INTRODUCTION TO ACTS
OPENING STATEMENTS
A. Acts forms an indispensable link between the accounts of Jesus’ life (Gospels) and His disciples’ interpretation,
preaching, and application of His acts and words in the Letters of the New Testament.
B. The early church developed and circulated two collections of New Testament writings: (1) the Gospels (four Gospels)
and (2) the Apostle (Paul’s letters). However, with the early Christological heresies of the second century, the value
of the book of Acts became obvious. Acts reveals the content and purpose of Apostolic preaching (kerygma) and the
amazing results of the gospel.
C. The historical accuracy of Acts has been accentuated and confirmed by modern archaeological discoveries, especially
in relation to the title of Roman governmental officials
1. stratēgoi, 16:20,22,35,36 (also used of temple captains, Luke 22:4,52; Acts 4:1; 5:24-26)
2. politarchas, 17:6,8; and prōtō, Acts 28:7, cf. A. N. Sherwin-White, Roman Society and Roman Law in the New
Testament
Luke records the tensions within the early church, even the fight between Paul and Barnabas (cf. Acts 15:39). This
reflects a fair, balanced, researched historical/theological writing.
D. The title of the book is found in slightly different forms in the ancient Greek texts:
1. Manuscript א (Sinaiticus), Tertullian, Didymus, and Eusebius have “Acts” (ASV, NIV)
2. Manuscripts B (Vaticanus), D (Bezae) in a subscription, Irenaeus, Tertullian, Cyrian, and Athanasius have “Acts
of the Apostles” (KJV, RSV, NEB)
3. Manuscripts A2 (first correction of Alexandrinus), E, G, and Chrysostom have “Acts of the Holy Apostles”
It is possible that the Greek words praxeis, praxis (acts, ways, behavior, deeds, practice) reflect an ancient
Mediterranean literary genre which denotes the lives and actions of famous or influential people (e.g., John, Peter,
Stephen, Philip, Paul). The book probably originally had no title (like Luke’s Gospel).
E. There are two distinct textual traditions of Acts. The shorter one is the Alexandrian (MSS P45, P74, א, A, B, C). The
Western family of manuscripts (P29, P38, P48 and D) seem to include many more details. It is uncertain whether they
are from the author or were later insertions by scribes, based on early church traditions. Most textual scholars believe
that the Western manuscripts have later additions because they
1. smooth out or try to fix unusual or difficult texts
2. add additional details
3. add specific phrases to accentuate Jesus as the Christ
4. are not quoted by any early Christian writers any time in the first three centuries (cf. F. F. Bruce, Acts: Greek
Text, pp. 69-80)
For a more detailed discussion consult A Textual Commentary on the Greek New Testament by Bruce M. Metzger,
published by the United Bible Societies, pp. 259-272.
Because of the vast number of later additions, this commentary will not deal with all the textual options. If a
textual variant is crucial to interpretation, then and only then will it be dealt with in this commentary.
AUTHOR
A. The book is anonymous, but Luke’s authorship is strongly implied.
1. The unique and surprising “we” sections (16:10-17 [second missionary journey at Philippi]; 20:5-15; 21:1-18
[end of third missionary journey] and 27:1-28:16 [Paul sent as prisoner to Rome]) strongly imply Luke as the
author.
2. The connection between the third Gospel and Acts is obvious when one compares Luke 1:1-4 with Acts 1:1-2.
3. Luke, a Gentile physician, is mentioned as a companion of Paul in Col. 4:10-14, Philemon 24, and II Timothy
4:11. Luke is the only Gentile writer in the NT.
4. The unanimous witness of the early church was that the author was Luke.
a. the Muratorian Fragment (a.d. 180-200 from Rome says, “complied by Luke the physician”)
b. the writings of Irenaeus (a.d. 130-200)
c. the writings of Clement of Alexandria (a.d. 156-215)
d. the writings of Tertullian (a.d. 160-200)
e. the writings of Origen (a.d. 185-254)
5. The internal evidence of style and vocabulary (especially medical terms) confirms Luke as author (Sir William
Ramsay and Adolph Von Harnack.
B. We have three sources of information about Luke.
1. The three passages in the NT (Col. 4:10-4; Philemon 24; II Tim. 4:11) and the book of Acts itself.
2. The second century Anti-Marcion prologue to Luke (a.d. 160-180)
3. The early church historian of the fourth century, Eusebius, in his Ecclesiastical History, 3:4, says “Luke, by race,
a native of Antioch, and by profession, a physician, having associated mainly with Paul and having companioned
with the rest of the apostles less closely, has left us examples of that healing of souls which he acquired from them
in two inspired books, The Gospel and The Acts of the Apostles.”
4. This is a composite profile of Luke.
a. a Gentile (listed in Col. 4:12-14 with Epaphras and Demas, not with the Jewish helpers)
b. from either Antioch of Syria (Anti-Marcion prologue to Luke) or Philippi of Macedonia (Sir William
Ramsay on Acts 16:19)
c. a physician (cf. Col. 4:14), or at least a well educated man
d. became a convert in middle adulthood after the church was started at Antioch (Anti-Marcion prologue)
e. Paul’s traveling companion (“we” sections of Acts)
f. unmarried
g. wrote the third Gospel and Acts (similar introductions and similar style and vocabulary)
h. died at the age of 84 at Boeotia
C. Challenges to Luke’s authorship
1. Paul’s preaching on Mars Hill in Athens uses Greek philosophical categories and terms to form a common ground
(cf. Acts 17), but Paul, in Romans 1-2, seems to regard any “common ground” (nature, inner moral witness) as
futile.
2. Paul’s preaching and comments in Acts depict him as a Jewish Christian who takes Moses seriously, but Paul’s
letters depreciate the Law as problematic and passing away.
3. Paul’s preaching in Acts does not have the eschatological focus that his early books do (i.e., I and II
Thessalonians).
4. This contrasting of terms, styles, and emphasis is interesting, but not conclusive. When the same criteria are
applied to the Gospels, the Jesus of the Synoptics speaks very differently than the Jesus of John. Yet, very few
scholars would deny that both reflect the life of Jesus.
D. When discussing authorship of Acts it is crucial that we discuss Luke’s sources because many scholars (e.g., C. C.
Torrey, ) believe Luke used Aramaic source documents (or oral traditions) for many of the first fifteen chapters. If this
is true, Luke is an editor of this material, not an author. Even in the later sermons of Paul, Luke only gives us a
summary of Paul’s words, not verbatim accounts. Luke’s use of sources is as crucial a question as his authorship of
the book.
DATE
A. There is much discussion and disagreement as to the time of the writing of Acts, but the events themselves cover from
about a.d. 30-63 (Paul was released from prison in Rome in the middle 60’s and rearrested and executed under Nero,
probably in the persecutions of a.d. 65).
B. If one assumes the apologetic nature of the book concerning the Roman government, then a date (1) before a.d. 64 (the
beginning of Nero’s persecution of Christians in Rome) and/or (2) related to the Jewish revolt of a.d. 66-73.
C. If one tries to relate Acts to Luke’s Gospel in sequence, then the date for the writing of the Gospel influences the date
of the writing of Acts. Since the fall of Jerusalem to Titus in a.d. 70 is prophesied (i.e., Luke 21), but not described,
seems to demand a date before a.d. 70. If so, then Acts, written as a sequel, must be dated sometime after the Gospel.
D. If one is bothered by the abrupt ending (Paul still in prison in Rome, F. F. Bruce), then a date related to the end of
Paul’s first Roman imprisonment, a.d. 58-63, is favored.
E. Some historical dates related to the historical events recorded in Acts.
1. widespread famine under Claudius (Acts 11:28, a.d. 44-48)
2. death of Herod Agrippa I (Acts 12:20-23, a.d. 44 [spring])
3. proconsulship of Sergius Paulus (Acts 13:7, appointed in a.d. 53)
4. expulsion of Jews from Rome by Claudius (Acts 18:2, a.d. 49 [?])
5. proconsulship of Gallio, Acts 18:12 (a.d. 51 or 52 [?])
6. proconsulship of Felix (Acts 23:26; 24:27, a.d. 52-56 [?])
7. replacement of Felix by Festus (Acts 24:27, a.d. 57-60 [?])
8. Judea’s Roman officials
a. Procurators
(1) Pontius Pilate, a.d. 26-36
(2) Marcellus, a.d. 36-37
(3) Marullus, a.d. 37-41
b. In a.d. 41 the procuratorial method of Roman administration was changed to an empirical model. The
Roman Emperor, Claudius, appointed Herod Agrippa I in a.d. 41.
c. After the death of Herod Agrippa I, a.d. 44, the procurator method was reestablished until a.d. 66
(1) Antonius Felix
(2) Porcius Festus
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE
A. One purpose of the book of Acts was to document the rapid growth of the followers of Jesus from Jewish roots to
worldwide ministry, from the locked upper room to the palace of Caesar:
1. This geographical pattern follows Acts 1:8, which is Acts’ Great Commission (Matt. 28:19-20).
2. This geographical expansion is expressed in several ways.
a. Using major cities and national boundaries. In Acts there are 32 countries, 54 cities and 9 Mediterranean
islands mentioned. The three major cities are Jerusalem, Antioch, and Rome (cf. Acts 9:15).
b. Using key persons. Acts can almost be divided into two halves: the ministries of Peter and Paul. There
are over 95 people mentioned in Acts, but the major ones are: Peter, Stephen, Philip, Barnabas, James and
Paul.
c. There are two or three literary forms which appear repeatedly in Acts which seem to reflect the author’s
conscious attempt at structure:
(1) summary statements (2) statements of growth (3) use of numbers
1:1 – 6:7 (in Jerusalem) 2:47 2:41
6:8 – 9:31 (in Palestine) 5:14 4:4
9:32 – 12:24 (to Antioch) 6:7 5:14
12:25 – 15:5 (to Asia Minor) 9:31 6:7
16:6 – 19:20 (to Greece) 12:24 9:31
19:21 – 28:31 (to Rome) 16:5 11:21,24
19:20 12:24
14:1
19:20
B. Acts is obviously related to the misunderstanding that surrounded the death of Jesus for treason. Apparently, Luke is
writing to Gentiles (Theophilus, possibly a Roman official). He uses (1) the speeches of Peter, Stephen, and Paul to
show the scheming of the Jews and (2) the positiveness of Roman governmental officials toward Christianity. The
Romans had nothing to fear from the followers of Jesus.
1. speeches of Christian leaders
a. Peter, 2:14-40; 3:12-26; 4:8-12; 10:34-43
b. Stephen, 7:1-53
c. Paul, 13:10-42; 17:22-31; 20:17-25; 21:40-22:21; 23:1-6; 24:10-21; 26:1-29
2. contacts with governmental officials
a. Pontius Pilate, Luke 23:13-25
b. Sergius Paulus, Acts 13:7,12
c. chief magistrates of Philippi, Acts 16:35-40
d. Gallio, Acts 18:12-17
e. Asiarchs of Ephesus, Acts 19:23-41 (esp. v. 31)
f. Claudius Lysias, Acts 23:29
g. Felix, Acts 24
h. Porcius Festus, Acts 24
i. Agrippa II, Acts 26 (esp. v. 32)
j. Publius, Acts 28:7-10
3. When one compares Peter’s sermons with Paul’s it is obvious that Paul is not an innovator, but a faithful
proclaimer of apostolic, gospel truths. If anyone copies anyone, then it is Peter (cf. I Peter) who uses Paul’s
phrases and vocabulary. The kerygma is unified!
C. Luke not only defended Christianity before the Roman government, but he also defended Paul before the Gentile
church. Paul was repeatedly attacked by Jewish groups (Judaizers of Galatians, the “super apostles” of II Corinthians
10-13); and Hellenistic groups (Gnosticism of Colossians and Ephesians). Luke shows Paul’s normalcy by clearly
revealing his heart and theology in his travels and sermons.
D. Although Acts was not intended to be a doctrinal book, it does record for us the elements of the early Apostles’
preaching which C. H. Dodd has called “the Kerygma” (essential truths about Jesus). This helps us see what they felt
were the essentials of the gospel, especially as they relate to Jesus’ death and resurrection.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE KERYGMA OF THE EARLY CHURCH
A. The promises by God made in the Old Testament have now been fulfilled with the coming of Jesus the Messiah (Acts
2:30-31; 3:19,24; 10:43; 26:6-7,22; Rom. 1:2-4; I Tim. 3:16; Heb. 1:1-2; I Peter 1:10-12; 2 Peter 1:18-19).
B. Jesus was anointed as Messiah by God at His baptism (Acts 10:38).
C. Jesus began His ministry in Galilee after His baptism (Acts 10:37).
D. His ministry was characterized by doing good and performing mighty works by means of the power of God (Mark
10:45; Acts 2:22; 10:38).
E. The Messiah was crucified according to the eternal purpose of God (Mark 10:45; John 3:16; Acts 2:23; 3:13-15,18;
4:11; 10:39; 26:23; Rom. 8:34; I Cor. 1:17-18; 15:3; Gal. 1:4; Heb. 1:3; I Peter 1:2,19; 3:18; I John 4:10).
F. He was raised from the dead and appeared to His disciples (Acts 2:24,31-32; 3:15,26; 10:40-41; 17:31; 26:23; Rom.
8:34; 10:9; I Cor. 15:4-7,12ff; I Thess. 1:10; I Tim. 3:16; I Peter 1:2; 3:18,21).
G. Jesus was exalted by God and given the name “Lord” (Acts 2:25-29,33-36; 3:13; 10:36; Rom. 8:34; 10:9; I Tim. 3:16;
Heb. 1:3; I Peter 3:22).
H. He gave the Holy Spirit to form the new community of God (Acts 1:8; 2:14-18,38-39; 10:44-47; I Peter 1:12).
I. He will come again for judgment and the restoration of all things (Acts 3:20-21; 10:42; 17:31; I Cor. 15:20-28; I Thess.
1:10).
J. All who hear the message should repent and be baptized (Acts 2:21,38; 3:19; 10:43,47-48; 17:30; 26:20; Rom. 1:17;
10:9; I Peter 3:21).
This schema served as the essential proclamation of the early church, though different authors of the New Testament may
leave out a portion or emphasize other particulars in their preaching. The entire Gospel of Mark closely follows the Petrine aspect
of the kerygma. Mark is traditionally seen as structuring Peter’s sermons, preached in Rome, into a written Gospel. Both Matthew
and Luke follow Mark’s basic structure.
E. Frank Stagg in his commentary, The Book of Acts, the Early Struggle for an Unhindered Gospel, asserts the purpose
is primarily the movement of the message about Jesus (the gospel) from a strictly nationalistic Judaism to a universal
message for all humans. Stagg’s commentary focuses on Luke’s purpose(s) in writing Acts. A good summary and
analysis of the different theories is found on pp. 1-18. Stagg chooses to focus on the term “unhindered” in 28:31, which
is an unusual way to end a book, as the key to understanding Luke’s emphasis on the spread of Christianity overcoming
all barriers.
F. Although the Holy Spirit is mentioned more than fifty times in Acts, it is not “the Acts of the Holy Spirit.” There are
eleven chapters where the Spirit is never mentioned. He is mentioned most often in the first half of Acts, where Luke
is quoting other sources (possibly originally written in Aramaic). Acts is not to the Spirit what the Gospels are to Jesus!
This is not meant to depreciate the Spirit’s place, but to guard us from building a theology of the Spirit primarily or
exclusively from Acts.
G. Acts is not designed to teach doctrine (cf. Fee and Stuart, How to Read the Bible For All Its Worth, pp. 94-112). An
example of this would be the attempt to base a theology of conversion from Acts which is doomed to failure. The order
and elements of conversion differ in Acts; therefore, which pattern is normative? We must look to the Epistles for
doctrinal help.
However, it is interesting that some scholars (Hans Conzelmann) have seen Luke purposefully reorienting the
imminent eschatologies of the first century with a patient service approach to the delayed Parousia. The kingdom is
here in power now, changing lives. The church functioning now becomes the focus, not an eschatological hope.
H. Another possible purpose of Acts is similar to Rom. 9-11: why did the Jews reject the Jewish Messiah and the church
become mostly Gentile? Several places in Acts the worldwide nature of the gospel is clearly trumpeted. Jesus sends
them into all the world (cf. 1:8). Jews reject Him, but Gentiles respond to Him. His message reaches Rome.
It is possible that Luke’s purpose is to show that Jewish Christianity (Peter) and Gentile Christianity (Paul) can
live together and grow together! They are not in competition, but joined in world evangelization.
I. As far as purpose is concerned I agree with F. F. Bruce (New International Commentary, p. 18) that since Luke and
Acts were originally one volume, the prologue for Luke (1:1-4) functions also as the prologue for Acts. Luke, though
not an eyewitness to all the events, carefully researched them and recorded them accurately, using his own historical,
literary, theological framework.
Luke then, in both his Gospel and narrative, wants to show the historical reality and theological trustworthiness
(cf. Luke 1:4) of Jesus and the church. It may be that the focus of Acts is the theme of fulfillment (unhindered, cf.
28:31, where it is the last word of the book). This theme is carried forward by several different words and phrases (cf.
Walter L. Liefeld, Interpreting the Book of Acts, pp. 23-24). The Gospel is not an afterthought, a plan B, or a new
thing. It is God’s predetermined plan (cf. Acts 2:23; 3:18; 4:28; 13:29).
GENRE
A. Acts is to the NT what Joshua through II Kings is to the OT: Historical Narrative (see Appendix Three). Biblical
historical narrative is factual, but the focus is not on chronology or exhaustive recording of event. It selects certain
events which explain who God is, who we are, how we are made right with God, how God wants us to live.
B. The problem in interpreting biblical narrative is that the authors never put in the text (1) what their purpose is, (2) what
the main truth is, or (3) how we should emulate the things recorded. The reader needs to think through the following
questions:
1. Why was the event recorded?
2. How does it relate to previous biblical material?
3. What is the central theological truth?
4. Is there significance to the literary context? (What event precedes or follows? Has this subject been dealt with
elsewhere?)
5. How large is the literary context? (Sometimes large amounts of narrative form one theological theme or purpose.)
C. Historical narrative should not be the only source of doctrine. Often things are recorded that are incidental to the
purpose of the author. Historical narrative can illustrate truths recorded elsewhere in the Bible. Just because something
happened does not mean it is God’s will for all believers in all ages (e.g., suicide, polygamy, holy war, handling snakes,
etc.).
D. The best brief discussion of how to interpret historical narrative is in Gordon Fee and Douglas Stuart’s How to Read
the Bible For All Its Worth, pp. 78-93 and 94-112.
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF HISTORICAL SETTING
New books on placing Acts in its first century setting have been produced by classicists. This inter-disciplinary approach
has truly helped the understanding of the NT. The series is edited by Bruce M. Minter.
A. The Book of Acts in Its Ancient Literary Setting
B. The Book of Acts in Its Graeco-Roman Setting
C. The Book of Acts and Paul in Roman Custody
D. The Book of the Acts in Its Palestinian Setting
E. The Book of Acts in Its Diaspora Setting
F. The Book of Acts in Its Theological Setting
Also very helpful are
1. A. N. Sherwin-White, Roman Society and Roman Law in the New Testament
2. Paul Barnett, Jesus and the Rise of Early Christianity
3. James S. Jeffers, The Greco-Roman World
READING CYCLE ONE (see p. v)
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the entire biblical book at one sitting. State the central theme of the entire book in your own words.
1. Theme of entire book
2. Type of literature (genre)
READING CYCLE TWO (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” pp. vi)
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the entire biblical book a second time at one sitting. Outline the main subjects and express the subject in a single
sentence.
1. Subject of first literary unit
2. Subject of second literary unit
3. Subject of third literary unit
4. Subject of fourth literary unit
5. Etc.
ACTS 1
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS*
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
The Promise of the Holy |
Prologue |
Introduction; the Risen |
Introduction |
Prologue |
1:1-5 |
1:1-3 |
1:1-5 |
1:1-5 |
1:1-5 |
|
The Holy Spirit Promised |
|
|
|
The Ascension of Jesus |
1:4-8 |
The Ascension |
Jesus Is Taken Up to |
The Ascension |
1:6-11 |
|
1:6-11 |
1:6 |
1:6-8 |
|
Jesus Ascends to Heaven |
|
1:7-9 |
|
|
1:9-11 |
|
|
1:9-11 |
|
|
|
1:10-11 |
|
The Choice of Judas’ |
The Upper Room Prayer |
The Gathering of the |
Judas’ Successor |
The Group of Apostles |
1:12-14 |
1:12-14 |
1:12-14 |
1:12-14 |
1:12-14 |
|
Matthias Chosen |
|
|
Judas is Replaced |
1:15-26 |
1:15-26 |
1:15-26 |
1:15-17 |
1:15-20 |
|
|
|
1:18-19 |
|
|
|
|
1:20 |
|
|
|
|
1:21-22 |
1:21-22 |
|
|
|
1:23-26 |
1:23-26 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
* Although they are not inspired, paragraph divisions are the key to understanding and following the original author’s intent. Each modern
translation has divided and summarized the paragraphs. Every paragraph has one central topic, truth, or thought. Each version encapsulates that
topic in its own distinct way. As you read the text, ask yourself which translation fits your understanding of the subject and verse divisions.
In every chapter we must read the Bible first and try to identify its subjects (paragraphs), then compare our understanding with the modern
versions. Only when we understand the original author’s intent by following his logic and presentation can we truly understand the Bible. Only
the original author is inspired—readers have no right to change or modify the message. Bible readers do have the responsibility of applying the
inspired truth to their day and their lives.
Note that all technical terms and abbreviations are explained fully in Appendices One, Two, and Three.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: ACTS 1:1-5
1The first account I composed, Theophilus, about all that Jesus began to do and teach, 2until the day when He was
taken up to heaven, after He had by the Holy Spirit given orders to the apostles whom He had chosen. 3To these He also
presented Himself alive after His suffering, by many convincing proofs, appearing to them over a period of forty days and
speaking of the things concerning the kingdom of God. 4Gathering them together, He commanded them not to leave
Jerusalem, but to wait for what the Father had promised, “Which,” He said, “you heard of from Me; 5for John baptized
with water, but you will be baptized with the Holy Spirit not many days from now.”
1:1 “The first account I composed” This is an aorist middle indicative, literally, “I made.” Luke is the obvious author of
both the Gospel of Luke and Acts (compare Luke 1:1-4 and Acts 1:1-2). The term “volume” was used in Greek for a historical
narrative. Technically (i.e., in Classical Greek) it implied one of at least three works. It is surely possible that the unusual ending
of Acts might be explained by Luke’s plan to write a third volume. Some even speculate that what we call the Pastoral Epistles
(I Timothy, II Timothy, and Titus) may have been penned by Luke.
▣ “Theophilus” This name is formed from (1) God (Theos) and (2) brotherly love (philos). It can be translated “God lover,”
“friend of God,” or “loved by God.”
The title “most excellent” in Luke 1:3 could be an honorific title for a Roman governmental official (cf. Acts 23:26; 24:3;
26:25), possibly used of the equestrian order of Roman society. He may have been the literary benefactor for the writing, copying,
and distributing of Luke’s two books. Church tradition names him as T. Flavius Clemens, cousin of Domitian (a.d. 24-96).
▣ “all that Jesus began to do” This refers to the Gospel of Luke. It is surprising that Luke says “all” that Jesus did, because
the Gospel of Luke (like all the Synoptic Gospels) is very selective in what it records about Jesus’ life and teachings.
1:2 “until the day when He was taken up to heaven” This is mentioned in Luke 24:51. See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE ASCENSION
There are a number of different Greek words used to describe Jesus’ ascension back to heaven:
1. Acts 1:2,11,22; analambanō, to take up (cf. I Tim. 3:16), which is also used in the Septuagint of II Kgs. 2:9,11 for
Elijah’s translation to heaven and also I Maccabees 2:58
2. Acts 1:9, epairō, to lift up, to raise up, to elevate
3. Luke 9:51, analēpsis (form of #1)
4. Luke 24:51, diistēmi, to depart
5. John 6:62, anabainō, to ascend
This event is not recorded in Matthew or Mark’s Gospel. Mark’s Gospel ends at 16:8, but one of the three later scribal addition
describes the event in 16:19 (i.e., analambanō).
▣ “He had by the Holy Spirit” See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE PERSONHOOD OF THE SPIRIT
In the OT “the Spirit of God” (i.e., ruach) was a force which accomplished YHWH’s purpose, but there is no hint that it
was personal (i.e., OT monotheism). However, in the NT the full personality and personhood of the Spirit is documented:
1. He can be blasphemed (cf. Matt. 12:31; Mark 3:29)
2. He teaches (cf. Luke 12:12; John 14:26)
3. He bears witness (cf. John 15:26)
4. He convicts, guides (cf. John 16:7-15)
5. He is called “who” (i.e., hos) (cf. Eph. 1:14)
6. He can be grieved (cf. Eph. 4:30)
7. He can be quenched (cf. I Thess. 5:19)
Trinitarian texts (here are three of many) also speak of three persons.
1. Matt. 28:19
2. II Cor. 13:14
3. I Pet. 1:2
The Spirit is linked to human activity.
1. Acts 15:28
2. Rom. 8:26
3. I Cor. 12:11
4. Eph. 4:30
At the very beginning of Acts the Spirit’s role is emphasized. Pentecost was not the beginning of the work of the Spirit, but
a new chapter. Jesus always had the Spirit. His baptism was not the beginning of the work of the Spirit, but a new chapter. Luke
prepares the church for a new chapter of effective ministry. Jesus is still the focus, the Spirit is still the effective means and the
Father’s love, forgiveness, and restoration of all humans made in His image is the goal!
▣ “given orders” This refers to information recorded in Gospel of Luke 24:44-49, in Matt. 28:18-20, and in Acts 1:8.
▣ “orders” This is an aorist middle (deponent) participle. Some scholars see this as referring to 1:8 (cf. Matt. 28:19-20;
Luke 24:45-47 or Luke 24:49). The church has a two-pronged function:
1. evangelism and Christlike maturity; every believer must wait for God’s power and equipping to achieve these
2. others see it as referring to “wait in Jerusalem for the Spirit coming and empowering (cf. v. 4; Luke 24:49)
▣ “the apostles” See chart of Apostles’ names at 1:13.
▣ “He had chosen” “Chosen” (eklegō, aorist middle indicative) is used in two senses. Usually in the OT it refers to service,
not salvation, but in the NT it refers to spiritual salvation. Here it seems to refer to both ideas (cf. Luke 6:13).
1:3 “He also presented Himself alive” This probably refers to Jesus’ three appearances in the upper room to the entire group
of disciples on three successive Sunday nights, but also could refer to other appearances (cf. I Cor. 15:5-8). The resurrection of
Jesus is crucial to the truthfulness of the gospel (cf. 2:24,32; 3:15,26; 4:10; 5:35; 10:40; 13:30,33,34,37; 17:31; and esp. I Cor.
15:12-19,20). The following is a chart of the post-resurrection appearances from Paul Barnett, Jesus and the Rise of Early
Christianity, p. 185.
John |
Matthew |
Luke |
I Corinthians |
Jerusalem Appearances
Mary (Jn. 20:15) |
|
|
|
|
Women (Mt. 28:9) |
|
|
|
|
Simon (Lk. 24:34) |
Cephas (I Cor. 15:5) |
|
|
two on the road to Emmaus |
|
|
|
disciples (Lk. 24:36) |
the Twelve (I Cor. 15:5) |
ten disciples (Jn. 20:19) |
|
|
|
eleven disciples (Jn. 20:26) |
|
|
|
Galilee Appearances
|
|
|
500+ believers (I Cor. 15:6; |
|
|
|
James (I Cor. 15:7) |
seven disciples (Jn. 21:1) |
|
|
|
|
the disciples (Mt. 28:16-20) |
|
|
Jerusalem Appearances
the Ascension (Lk. 24:50-51) |
all the apostles (I Cor. 15:7) |
NASB, NRSV,
NIV “by many convincing proofs”
NKJV “by many infallible proofs”
TEV “many times in ways that proved beyond doubt”
NJB “by many demonstrations”
The word tekmērion is used only here in the NT. There is a good discussion of the terms used in Greek literature in Moulton
and Milligan, The Vocabulary of the Greek Testament, p. 628, where it means “demonstrative evidence.” This term is also used
in the Wisdom of Solomon 5:11; 19:3 and III Maccabees 3:24.
▣ “after His suffering” It was with great difficulty that Jewish believers accepted this aspect of the gospel (cf. I Cor. 1:23).
The Messiah’s suffering is mentioned in the OT (cf. Gen. 3:15; Psalm 22; Isaiah 53; Zech. 10:12; and notice in Luke 24:45-47).
This was a major theological affirmation of Apostolic preaching (kerygma; see Special Topic at 2:14).
Luke often uses the aorist active infinitive of paschō (suffer) to refer to Jesus’ crucifixion (cf. Luke 9:22; 17:25; 22:15;
24:26,46; Acts 1:3; 3:18; 9:16; 17:3). Luke may have gotten this from Mark’s Gospel (cf. 8:31).
▣ “appearing to them” We have ten or eleven accounts of Jesus’ post-resurrection appearances recorded in the NT. However,
these are only representative samples and not a definitive list. Apparently Jesus came and went during the period, but did not stay
with any one group.
SPECIAL TOPIC: JESUS’ POST RESURRECTION APPEARANCES
Jesus showed himself to several people to confirm His resurrection.
1. the women at the tomb, Matt. 28:9
2. the eleven disciples, Matt. 28:16
3. Simon, Luke 24:34
4. two men, Luke 24:15
5. disciples, Luke 24:36
6. Mary Magdalene, John 20:15
7. ten disciples, John 20:19
8. eleven disciples, John 20:26
9. seven disciples, John 21:1
10. Cephas (Peter), I Cor. 15:5
11. the Twelve (Apostles), I Cor. 15:5
12. 500 brethren, I Cor. 15:6 (Matt. 28:16-17)
13. James (His earthly family), I Cor. 15:7
14. all the apostles, I Cor. 15:7
15. Paul, I Cor. 15:8 (Acts 9)
Obviously some of these refer to the same appearance. Jesus wanted them to know for sure He was alive!
▣ “forty days” This is an OT idiom for a long period of indefinite time, longer than a lunar cycle. Here it is related to the time
between the annual Jewish feasts of Passover and Pentecost (which is fifty days). Luke is the only source of this information.
Since the date of the ascension is not the major issue (not even noted by Christian writers until the fourth century a.d.), there must
be another purpose for the number. It could relate to Moses on Mt. Sinai, Israel in the wilderness, Jesus’ temptation experience,
or we just do not know, but it is obvious that the date itself is not the issue.
SPECIAL TOPIC: SYMBOLIC NUMBERS IN SCRIPTURE
A. Certain numbers functioned both as numerals and symbols.
1. One – God (e.g., Deut. 6:4; Eph. 4:4-6)
2. Four – the whole earth (i.e., four corners, four winds)
3. Six – human imperfection (one less than 7, e.g., Rev. 13:18)
4. Seven – divine perfection (the seven days of creation). Notice the symbolic usages in Revelation:
a. seven candlesticks, 1:12,20; 2:1
b. seven stars, 1:16,20; 2:1
c. seven churches, 1:20
d. seven spirits of God, 3:1; 4:5; 5:6
e. seven lamps, 4:5
f. seven seals, 5:1,5
g. seven horns and seven eyes, 5:6
h. seven angels, 8:2,6; 15:1,6,7,8; 16:1; 17:1
i seven trumpets, 8:2,6
j. seven thunders, 10:3,4
k. seven thousand, 11:13
l. seven heads, 13:1; 17:3,7,9
m. seven plagues, 15:1,6,8; 21:9
n. seven bowls, 15:7; 21:9
o. seven kings, 17:10
5. Ten – completeness
a. use in Gospels
(1) Matt. 20:24; 25:1,28
(2) Mark 10:41
(3) Luke 14:31; 15:8; 17:12,17; 19:13,16,17,24,25
b. use in Revelation
(1) 2:10, ten days of tribulation
(2) 12:3; 17:3,7,12,16, ten horns
(3) 13:1, ten crowns
c. multiples of 10 in Revelation
(1) 144,000 = 12x12x1000, cf. 7:4; 14:1,3
(2) 1,000 = 10x10x10, cf. 20:2,3,6
6. Twelve – human organization
a. twelve sons of Jacob (i.e., twelve tribes of Israel, Gen. 35:22; 49:28)
b. twelve pillars, Exod. 24:4
c. twelve stones on breast plate of High Priest, Exod. 28:21; 39:14
d. twelve loaves, for table in Holy Place (symbolic of God’s provision for the twelve tribes), Lev. 24:5; Exod.
25:30
e. twelve spies, Deut. 1:23; Josh. 3:22; 4:2,3,4,8,9,20
f. twelve apostles, Matt. 10:1
g. use in Revelation
(1) twelve thousand sealed, 7:5-8
(2) twelve stars, 12:1
(3) twelve gates, twelve angels, twelve tribes, 21:12
(4) twelve foundation stones, names of the twelve apostles, 21:14
(5) New Jerusalem was twelve thousand stadia squared, 21:16
(6) twelve gates made of twelve pearls, 21:12
(7) tree of life with twelve kinds of fruit, 22:2
7. Forty – number for time
a. sometimes literal (exodus and wilderness wanderings, e.g., Exod. 16:35); Deut. 2:7; 8:2
b. can be literal or symbolic
(1) flood, Gen. 7:4,17; 8:6
(2) Moses on Mt. Sinai, Exod. 24:18; 34:28; Deut. 9:9,11,18,25
(3) divisions of Moses life:
(a) forty years in Egypt
(b) forty years in the desert
(c) forty years leading Israel
(4) Jesus fasted forty days, Matt. 4:2; Mark 1:13; Luke 4:2
c. Note (by means of a Concordance) the number of times this number appears in time designation in the
Bible!
8. Seventy – round number for people
a. Israel, Exod. 1:5
b. seventy elders, Exod. 24:1,9
c. eschatological, Dan. 9:2,24
d. mission team, Luke 10:1,17
e. forgiveness (70×7), Matt. 18:22
B. Good references
1. John J. Davis, Biblical Numerology
2. D. Brent Sandy, Plowshares and Pruning Hooks
▣ “speaking of the things concerning the kingdom of God” The Gnostics claimed that Jesus revealed secret information to
their group during the time between Passover and Pentecost. This is certainly false. However, the account of the two on the road
to Emmaus is a good example of Jesus’ post-resurrection teaching. I think Jesus, Himself, showed the church leaders from the
Old Testament, the predictions and texts related to His life, death, resurrection and Second Coming. See Special Topic: The
Kingdom of God following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE KINGDOM OF GOD
In the OT YHWH was thought of as the King of Israel (cf. I Sam. 8:7; Ps. 10:16; 24:7-9; 29:10; 44:4; 89:18; 95:3; Isa. 43:15;
44:4,6) and the Messiah as the ideal king (cf. Ps. 2:6; Isa. 9:6-7; 11:1-5). With the birth of Jesus at Bethlehem (6-4 b.c.) the
kingdom of God broke into human history with new power and redemption (new covenant, cf. Jer. 31:31-34; Ezek. 36:27-36).
John the Baptist proclaimed the nearness of the kingdom (cf. Matt. 3:2; Mark 1:15). Jesus clearly taught that the kingdom was
present in Himself and His teachings (cf. Matt. 4:17,23; 9:35; 10:7; 11:11-12; 12:28;16:19; Mark 12:34; Luke 10:9,11; 11:20;
12:31-32; 16:16; 17:21). Yet the kingdom is also future (cf. Matt. 16:28; 24:14; 26:29; Mark 9:1; Luke 21:31; 22:16,18).
In the Synoptic parallels in Mark and Luke we find the phrase, “the kingdom of God.” This common topic of Jesus’
teachings involved the present reign of God in human’s hearts, which one day will be consummated over all the earth. This is
reflected in Jesus’ prayer in Matt. 6:10. Matthew, written to Jews, preferred the phrase that did not use the name of God (Kingdom
of Heaven), while Mark and Luke, writing to Gentiles, used the common designation, employing the name of deity.
This is such a key phrase in the Synoptic Gospels. Jesus’ first and last sermons, and most of His parables, dealt with this
topic. It refers to the reign of God in human hearts now! It is surprising that John uses this phrase only twice (and never in Jesus’
parables). In John’s gospel “eternal life”is a key metaphor.
The tension with this phrase is caused by the two comings of Christ. The OT focused only on one coming of God’s
Messiah—a military, judgmental, glorious coming—but the NT shows that He came the first time as the Suffering Servant of
Isaiah 53 and the humble king of Zech. 9:9. The two Jewish ages, the age of wickedness and the new age of righteousness,
overlap. Jesus currently reigns in the hearts of believers, but will one day reign over all creation. He will come like the OT
predicted! Believers live in “the already” versus “the not yet” of the kingdom of God (cf. Gordon D. Fee and Douglas Stuart’s
How to Read The Bible For All Its Worth, pp. 131-134).
1:4
NASB “gathering them together”
NKJV “being assembled together with them”
NRSV “while staying with them”
TEV “when they came together”
TEVb “while he was staying with them”
NIV “while he was eating with them”
NJB “while at table with them”
Verses 4-5 use one appearance of Jesus as an example of one of His several appearances and proofs. The term
sunalizomenos can be spelled differently. The spelling changes the meaning.
1. long a – assemble/gather
2. short a – eat with (literally “with salt”)
3. au (diphthong) – stay with
It is uncertain which was intended, but Luke 24:41-43 (cf. John 21) describes Jesus eating with the apostolic group, which
would have been evidence of His resurrected, physical body (cf. v. 3).
▣ “not to leave Jerusalem” This is recorded in Luke 24:49. The first part of Acts is a review of the end of Luke’s Gospel,
possibly a literary way of linking the two books.
▣ “to wait for what the Father had promised” In 2:16-21 Peter relates this to the eschatological prophecy of Joel 2:28-32.
They waited ten days until Pentecost. Luke has specifically designated “the Father’ promise” as the Holy Spirit (cf. Luke 24:49;
Acts 2:33). Jesus had previously spoken to them about the coming of the Spirit in John 14-16. However, it is possible that Luke
understands the Father’s promise not as one thing only (i.e., the Holy Spirit), but also that the OT promised salvation will be
brought to Israel in the person of the Messiah (cf. Acts 2:39; 13:23,32; 26:6).
▣ “Father” The OT introduces the intimate familial metaphor of God as Father:
1. the nation of Israel is often described as YHWH’s “son” (cf. Hos. 11:1; Mal. 3:17)
2. in Deuteronomy the analogy of God as Father is used (1:31)
3. in Deut. 32:6 Israel is called “his children” and God called “your Father”
4. this analogy is stated in Ps. 103:13 and developed in Ps. 68:5 (the father of orphans)
5. it was common in the prophets (cf. Isa. 1:2; 63:8; Israel as son, God as Father, 63:16; 64:8; Jer. 3:4,19; 31:9)
Jesus spoke Aramaic, which means that many of the places where “Father” appears as the Greek Pater may reflect the
Aramaic Abba (cf. 14:36). This familial term “Daddy” or “papa” reflects Jesus’ intimacy with the Father; His revealing this to
His followers also encourages our own intimacy with the Father. The term “Father” was used rarely in the OT (and not often in
rabbinical literature) for YHWH, but Jesus uses it often and pervasively. It is a major revelation of believers’ new relationship
with God through Christ (cf. Matt. 6:9).
1:5 “John” All four Gospels (cf. Matt. 3:1-12; Mark 1:2-8; Luke 3:15-17; John 1:6-8,19-28) tell of the ministry of John the
Baptist. “John” was the shortened form of the Hebrew name Johanan (BDB 220), which meant “YHWH is gracious” or “gift of
YHWH.” His name was significant because, like all biblical names, it pointed toward God’s purpose for his life. John was the
last of the Old Testament prophets. There had not been a prophet in Israel since Malachi, around 430 b.c. His very presence
caused great spiritual excitement among the people of Israel.
▣ “baptized with water” Baptism was a common initiating rite among Jews of the first and second century, but only in
connection with proselytes. If someone from a Gentile background wanted to become a full child of Israel, he had to accomplish
three tasks:
1. circumcision, if male
2. self-baptism by immersion, in the presence of three witnesses
3. a sacrifice in the Temple if possible
In sectarian groups of first century Palestine, such as the Essenes, baptism was apparently a common, repeated experience.
However, to mainline Judaism, ritualism precedents can be cited for this ceremonial washing:
1. as a symbol of spiritual cleansing (cf. Isa. 1:16)
2. as a regular ritual performed by the priests (cf. Exod. 19:10; Leviticus 15)
3. a regular ritual procedure before entering the temple to worship
▣ “you will be baptized with the Holy Spirit” This is a future passive indicative. The passive voice may refer to Jesus
because of Matt. 3:11; Luke 3:16. The preposition ev can mean “in,” “with,” or “by” (i.e., instrument, cf. Matt. 3:11). This
phrase can refer to two events: (1) becoming a Christian, (cf. I Cor. 12:13) or (2) in this context, the promised infusion of
spiritual power for effective ministry. John the Baptist often spoke of Jesus’ ministry by this phrase, (cf. Matt. 3:11; Mark 1:8;
Luke 3:16-17; John 1:33).
This is in contrast to John’s baptism. The Messiah will inaugurate the new age of the Spirit. His baptism will be with (or
“in” or “by”) the Spirit. There has been much discussion among denominations as to what event in the Christian experience this
refers. Some take it to refer to an empowering experience after salvation, a kind of second blessing. Personally I think it refers
to becoming a Christian (cf. I Cor. 12:13). I do not deny later fillings and equippings, but I believe there is only one initial
spiritual baptism into Christ in which believers identify with Jesus’ death and resurrection (cf. Rom. 6:3-4; Eph. 4:5; Col. 2:12).
This initiating work of the Spirit is delineated in John 16:8-11. In my understanding the works of the Holy Spirit are:
1. convicting of sin
2. revealing the truth about Christ
3. leading to acceptance of the gospel
4. baptizing into Christ
5. convicting the believer of continuing sin
6. forming Christlikeness in the believer
▣ “not many days from now” This is a reference to the Jewish festival of Pentecost which occurred seven weeks after Passover.
It recognized God’s ownership of the grain harvest. It came fifty days after Passover (cf. Lev. 23:15-31; Exod. 34:22; Deut.
16:10).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 1:6-11
6So when they had come together, they were asking Him, saying, “Lord, is it at this time You are restoring the
kingdom to Israel?” 7He said to them, “It is not for you to know times or epochs which the Father has fixed by His own
authority; 8but you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you; and you shall be My witnesses both in
Jerusalem, and in all Judea and Samaria, and even to the remotest part of the earth.” 9And after He had said these things,
He was lifted up while they were looking on, and a cloud received Him out of their sight. 10And as they were gazing
intently into the sky while He was going, behold, two men in white clothing stood beside them. 11They also said, “Men of
Galilee, why do you stand looking into the sky? This Jesus, who has been taken up from you into heaven, will come in just
the same way as you have watched Him go into heaven.”
1:6 “they were asking Him” This imperfect tense means either repeated action in past time or the initiation of an act.
Apparently these disciples had asked this many times.
▣ “Lord” The Greek term “Lord” (kurios) can be used in a general sense or in a developed theological sense. It can mean
“mister,” “sir,” “master,” “owner,” “husband” or “the full God-man” (cf. John 9:36, 38). The OT (Hebrew, adon) usage of this
term came from the Jews’ reluctance to pronounce the covenant name for God, YHWH, which was a form of the Hebrew verb
“to be” (cf. Exod. 3:14). They were afraid of breaking the Commandment which said, “Thou shalt not take the name of the Lord
thy God in vain” (cf. Exod. 20:7; Deut. 5:11). Therefore, they thought if they did not pronounce it, they could not take it in vain.
So, they substituted the Hebrew word adon, which had a similar meaning to the Greek word kurios (Lord). The NT authors used
this term to describe the full deity of Christ. The phrase “Jesus is Lord” was the public confession of faith and a baptismal formula
of the early church (cf. Rom. 10:9-13; I Cor. 12:3; Phil. 2:11).
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE NAMES FOR DEITY
A. El (BDB 42, KB 48)
1. The original meaning of the generic ancient term for deity is uncertain, though many scholars believe it comes
from the Akkadian root, “to be strong” or “to be powerful” (cf. Gen. 17:1; Num. 23:19; Deut. 7:21; Ps. 50:1).
2. In the Canaanite pantheon the high god is El (Ras Shamra texts)
3. In the Bible El is often compounded with other terms. These combinations became a way to characterize God.
a. El-Elyon (“God Most High,” BDB 42 & 751 II), Gen. 14:18-22; Deut. 32:8; Isa. 14:14
b. El-Roi (“God who sees” or “God who reveals Himself,” BDB 42 & 909), Gen. 16:13
c. El-Shaddai (“God Almighty” or “God of all compassion” or “God of the mountain,” BDB 42 & 994), Gen.
17:1; 35:11; 43:14; 49:25; Exod. 6:3
d. El-Olam (“the Everlasting God,” BDB 42 & 761), Gen. 21:33. This term is theologically linked to God’s
promise to David, II Sam. 7:13,16
e. El-Berit (“God of the Covenant,” BDB 42 & 136), Jdgs. 9:46
4. El is equated with
a. YHWH in Ps. 85:8; Isa. 42:5
b. Elohim in Gen. 46:3; Job 5:8, “I am El, the Elohim of your father”
c. Shaddai in Gen. 49:25
d. “jealousy” in Exod. 34:14; Deut. 4:24; 5:9; 6:15
e. “mercy” in Deut. 4:31; Neh. 9:31;
f. “great and awesome” in Deut. 7:21; 10:17; Neh. 1:5; 9:32; Dan. 9:4
g. “knowledge” in I Sam. 2:3
h. “my strong refuge” in II Sam. 22:33
i. “my avenger” in II Sam. 22:48
j. “holy one” in Isa. 5:16
k. “might” in Isa. 10:21
l. “my salvation” in Isa. 12:2
m. “great and powerful” in Jer. 32:18
n. “retribution” in Jer. 51:56
5. A combination of all the major OT names for God is found in Joshua 22:22 (El, Elohim, YHWH, repeated)
B. Elyon (BDB 751, KB 832)
1. Its basic meaning is “high,” “exalted,” or “lifted up” (cf. Gen. 40:17; I Kgs. 9:8; II Kgs. 18:17; Neh. 3:25; Jer.
20:2; 36:10; Ps. 18:13).
2. It is used in a parallel sense to several other names/titles of God.
a. Elohim – Ps. 47:1-2; 73:11; 107:11
b. YHWH – Gen. 14:22; II Sam. 22:14
c. El-Shaddai – Ps. 91:1,9
d. El – Num. 24:16
e. Elah – used often in Daniel 2-6 and Ezra 4-7, linked with illair (Aramaic for “High God”) in Dan. 3:26; 4:2;
5:18,21
3. It is often used by non-Israelites.
a. Melchizedek, Gen. 14:18-22
b. Balaam, Num. 24:16
c. Moses, speaking of the nations in Deut. 32:8
d. Luke’s Gospel in the NT, writing to Gentiles, also uses the Greek equivalent Hupsistos (cf. 1:32,35,76;
6:35; 8:28; Acts 7:48; 16:17)
C. Elohim (plural), Eloah (singular), used primarily in poetry (BDB 43, KB 52)
1. This term is not found outside the Old Testament.
2. This word can designate the God of Israel or the gods of the nations (cf. Exod. 3:6; 20:3). Abraham’s family were
polytheistic (cf. Josh. 24:2).
3. It can refer to Israeli judges (cf. Exod. 21:6; Ps. 82:6).
4. The term elohim is also used of other spiritual beings (angels, the demonic) as in Deut. 32:8 (LXX); Ps. 8:5; Job
1:6; 38:7.
5. In the Bible it is the first title/name for Deity (cf. Gen. 1:1). It is used exclusively until Gen. 2:4, where it is
combined with YHWH. It basically (theologically) refers to God as creator, sustainer, and provider of all life
on this planet (cf. Ps. 104).
It is synonymous with El (cf. Deut. 32:15-19). It can also parallel YHWH as Psalm 14 (Elohim, vv. 1,2,5;
YHWH, vv. 2,6; even Adon, v. 4).
6. Although plural and used of other gods, this term often designates the God of Israel, but usually it has the
singular verb to denote the monotheistic usage.
7. It is strange that a common name for the monotheistic God of Israel is plural! Although there is no certainty,
here are the theories.
a. Hebrew has many plurals, often used for emphasis. Closely related to this is the later
Hebrew grammatical feature called “the plural of majesty,” where the plural is used to magnify a concept.
b. This may refer to the angelic council, whom God meets with in heaven and who does His biding (cf. I Kgs.
22:19-23; Job 1:6; Ps. 82:1; 89:5,7).
c. It is even possible this reflects the NT revelation of the one God in three persons. In Gen. 1:1 God creates;
Gen. 1:2 the Spirit broods, and from the NT Jesus is God the Father’s agent in creation (cf. John 1:3,10;
Rom. 11:36; I Cor. 8:6; Col. 1:15; Heb. 1:2; 2:10).
D. YHWH (BDB 217, KB 394)
1. This is the name which reflects deity as the covenant-making God; God as savior, redeemer! Humans break
covenants, but God is loyal to His word, promise, covenant (cf. Psalm 103).
This name is first mentioned in combination with Elohim in Gen. 2:4. There are not two creation accounts
in Genesis 1-2, but two emphases: (1) God as the creator of the universe (the physical) and (2) God as the special
creator of humanity. Genesis 2:4-3:24 begins the special revelation about the privileged position and purpose
of mankind, as well as the problem of sin and rebellion associated with the unique position.
2. In Gen. 4:26 it is said “men began to call upon the name of the Lord” (YHWH). However, Exod. 6:3 implies
that early covenant people (the Patriarchs and their families) knew God only as El–Shaddai. The name YHWH
is explained only one time in Exod. 3:13-16, esp. v. 14. However, the writings of Moses often interpret words
by popular word plays, not etymologies (cf. Gen. 17:5; 27:36; 29:13-35). There have been several theories as
to the meaning of this name (taken from IDB, vol. 2, pp. 409-11).
a. from an Arabic root, “to show fervent love”
b. from an Arabic root “to blow” (YHWH as storm God)
c. from a Ugartic (Canaanite) root “to speak”
d. following a Phoenician inscription, a causative participle meaning “the One who sustains,” or “the One
who establishes”
e. from the Hebrew Qal form “the One who is,” or “the One who is present” (in future sense, “the One who
will be”)
f. from the Hebrew Hiphil form “the One who causes to be”
g. from the Hebrew root “to live” (e.g., Gen. 3:21), meaning “the ever-living, only- living One”
h. from the context of Exod. 3:13-16 a play on the imperfect form used in a perfect sense, “I shall continue
to be what I used to be” or “I shall continue to be what I have
always been” (cf. J. Wash Watts, A Survey of Syntax in the Old Testament, p. 67). The full name YHWH
is often expressed in abbreviation or possibly an original form.
(1) Yah (e.g., Hallelu – yah, BDB 219, cf. Exod. 15:2; 17:16; Ps. 89:8; 104:35)
(2) Yahu (“iah” ending of names, e.g., Isaiah)
(3) Yo (“Jo” beginning of names, e.g., Joshua or Joel)
3. In later Judaism this covenant name became so holy (the tetragrammaton) that Jews were afraid to say it lest they
break the command of Exod. 20:7; Deut. 5:11; 6:13. So they substituted the Hebrew term for “owner,” “master,”
“husband,” “lord”—adon or adonai (my
lord). When they came to YHWH in their reading of OT texts they pronounced “lord.” This is why YHWH is
written Lord in English translations.
4. As with El, YHWH is often combined with other terms to emphasize certain characteristics of the Covenant God
of Israel. While there are many possible combination terms, here are some.
a. YHWH – Yireh (YHWH will provide, BDB 217 & 906), Gen. 22:14
b. YHWH – Rophekha (YHWH is your healer, BDB 217 & 950, Qal participle), Exod. 15:26
c. YHWH – Nissi (YHWH is my banner, BDB 217 & 651), Exod. 17:15
d. YHWH – Meqaddishkem (YHWH the One who sanctifies you, BDB 217 & 872, Piel participle), Exod.
31:13
e. YHWH – Shalom (YHWH is Peace, BDB 217 & 1022), Jdgs. 6:24
f. YHWH – Sabbaoth (YHWH of hosts, BDB 217 & 878), I Sam. 1:3,11; 4:4; 15:2; often in the Prophets
g. YHWH – Ro‘I (YHWH is my shepherd, BDB 217 & 944, Qal participle), Ps. 23:1
h. YHWH – Sidqenu (YHWH is our righteousness, BDB 217 & 841), Jer. 23:6
i. YHWH – Shammah (YHWH is there, BDB 217 & 1027), Ezek. 48:35
▣ “is it at this time You are restoring the kingdom of Israel” They still had a totally Jewish nationalistic perspective (cf. Ps.
14:7; Jer. 33:7; Hos. 6:11; Luke 19:11; 24:21). They possibly even were asking about their administrative positions.
This theological question still causes much controversy. I want to include here a part of my commentary on Revelation (see
www.freebiblecommentary.org ) which discusses this very issue.
“The OT prophets predict a restoration of a Jewish kingdom in Palestine centered in Jerusalem where all the
nations of the earth gather to praise and serve a Davidic ruler, but the NT Apostles never focus on this agenda. Is not
the OT inspired (cf. Matt. 5:17-19)? Have the NT authors omitted crucial end-time events?
There are several sources of information about the end of the world:
1. OT prophets
2.OT apocalyptic writers (cf. Ezek. 37-39; Dan. 7-12)
3.intertestamental, non-canonical Jewish apocalyptic writers (like I Enoch)
4.Jesus Himself (cf. Matt. 24; Mark 13; Luke 21)
5.the writings of Paul (cf. I Cor. 15; II Cor. 5; I Thess. 4; II Thess. 2)
6.the writings of John (the book of Revelation).
Do these all clearly teach an end-time agenda (events, chronology, persons)? If not, why? Are they not all inspired
(except the Jewish intertestamental writings)?
The Spirit revealed truths to the OT writers in terms and categories they could understand. However, through
progressive revelation the Spirit has expanded these OT eschatological concepts to a universal scope (cf. Eph. 2:11-3:13). Here are some relevant examples:
1.The city of Jerusalem is used as a metaphor of the people of God (Zion) and is projected into the NT as a
term expressing God’s acceptance of all repentant, believing humans (the new Jerusalem of Revelation 20-22). The theological expansion of a literal, physical city into the people of God is foreshadowed in God’s
promise to redeem fallen mankind in Gen. 3:15 before there even were any Jews or a Jewish capital city.
Even Abraham’s call (cf. Gen. 12:3) involved the Gentiles.
2.In the OT the enemies are the surrounding nations of the Ancient Near East, but in the NT they have been
expanded to all unbelieving, anti-God, Satanically-inspired people. The battle has moved from a
geographical, regional conflict to a cosmic conflict.
3.The promise of a land which is so integral in the OT (the Patriarchal promises) has now become the whole
earth. New Jerusalem comes to a recreated earth, not the Near East only or exclusively (cf. Rev. 20-22).
4.Some other examples of OT prophetic concepts being expanded are (1) the seed of Abraham is now the
spiritually circumcised (cf. Rom. 2:28-29); (2) the covenant people now include Gentiles (cf. Hos. 1:9; 2:23;
Rom. 9:24-26; also Lev. 26:12; Exod. 29:45; II Cor. 6:16-18 and Exod. 19:5; Deut. 14:2;; Titus 2:14); (3)
the temple is now the local church (cf. I Cor. 3:16) or the individual believer (cf. I Cor. 6:19); and (4) even
Israel and its characteristic descriptive phrases now refer to the whole people of God (cf. Gal. 6:16; I Pet.
2:5, 9-10; Rev. 1:6)
The prophetic model has been fulfilled, expanded, and is now more inclusive. Jesus and the Apostolic writers
do not present the end-time in the same way as the OT prophets (cf. Martin Wyngaarden, The Future of The Kingdom
in Prophecy and Fulfillment). Modern interpreters who try to make the OT model literal or normative twist the
Revelation into a very Jewish book and force meaning into atomized, ambiguous phrases of Jesus and Paul! The NT
writers do not negate the OT prophets, but show their ultimate universal implication.”
1:7
NASB “It is not for you to know times or epochs which the Father has fixed by His own authority”
NKJV “It is not for you to know times or seasons”
NRSV “It is not for you to know the times or periods”
TEV “the times and occasions”
NJB “It is not for you to know times or dates”
The term “times” (chronos) means “eras” or “ages” (i.e., the passing of time), while the term “epochs” (kairos) means a
“time of specific events or seasons” (cf. Titus 1:2-3). Louw and Nida: Greek-English Lexicon, says they are synonyms simply
denoting duration of time (cf. I Thess. 5:1). It is obvious that believers are not to try to set specific dates; even Jesus did not know
the time of His return (cf. Matt. 24:36; Mark 13:32). Believers can know the general season, but they are to remain ready and
active for the actual event at all times (cf. Matt. 24:32-33). The twin emphases of the NT about the Second Coming are to stay
active and be ready. The rest is up to God!
1:8 “but you will receive power” Notice that the coming of the Holy Spirit is linked to power and witness. Acts is about
“witness” (i.e., martus). This theme dominates the book (cf. 1:8,22; 2:32; 3:15; 5:32; 10:39,41; 13:31; 22:15,20; 26:16). The
church has been given her assignment—witness to the gospel of Christ (cf. Luke 24:44-49)! The Apostles were witnesses of Jesus’
life and teaching, now they were witnesses about His life and teaching. Effective witness occurs only by means of the Spirit’s
power.
It is interesting that The Jerome Biblical Commentary (p. 169) notes Luke’s tendency to express a “delayed paraousia.” Here
is the quote.
“The Spirit is the substitute for the Parousia. This is the force of alla, ‘but,’ the conjunction that joins the two
parts of Jesus’ reply. The Spirit is the principle of continued Christian existence in a new era of sacred history, the era
of the church and mission. These realities must take the place of an early Parousia as the focal point of Christian
awareness. The Spirit in the Church is the Lucan answer to the problem of the delay of the Parousia and the
continuance of history.”
▣ “Jerusalem. . .Judea. . .Samaria. . .the remotest part of the earth” This is a geographical outline of Acts:
1. Jerusalem, chapters 1-7
2. Judea and Samaria, chapters 8-12
3. ends of the earth (i.e., Rome), chapters 13-28.
This outline may denote the author’s literary structure and purpose. Christianity is not a sect of Judaism, but a worldwide
movement of the one true God fulfilling His OT promises to restore rebellious mankind to fellowship with Himself (cf. Gen. 12:3;
Exod. 19:5; Isa. 2:2-4; 56:7; Luke 19:46).
The phrase “the remotest part of the earth” is used again in 13:47, where it is a quote from Isa. 49:6, a Messianic text which
also mentions “a light to the nations.” A Savior (cf. Gen. 3:15) for the nations (cf. Gen. 12:3; Exod. 19:5-6; Isa. 2:2-4) has always
been God’s plan.
The first Jewish leaders, knowing the Septuagint and the many prophetic promises of YHWH restoring Jerusalem, raising
Jerusalem, bringing the world to Jerusalem, expected these to be literally fulfilled. They stayed in Jerusalem (cf. 8:1). But the
gospel revolutionized and extended the OT concepts. The world-wide mandate (cf. Matt. 28:18-20; Luke 24:47; Acts 1:8) told
believers to go into all the world, not wait for the world to come to them. Jerusalem of the NT is a metaphor for heaven (cf. Rev.
21:2), not a city in Palestine.
SPECIAL TOPIC: BOB’S EVANGELICAL BIASES
I must admit to you the reader that I am biased at this point. My systematic theology is not Calvinism or Dispensationalism,
but it is Great Commission evangelicalism (cf. Matt. 28:18-20; Luke 24:46-47; Acts 1:8). I believe God had an eternal plan for
the redemption of all mankind (e.g., Gen. 3:15; 12:3; Exod. 19:5-6; Jer. 31:31-34; Ezekiel 18; 36:22-39; Acts 2:23; 3:18; 4:28;
13:29; Rom. 3:9-18,19-20,21-31), all those created in His image and likeness (cf. Gen. 1:26-27). The covenants are united in
Christ (cf. Gal. 3:28-29; Col. 3:11). Jesus is the mystery of God, hidden but now revealed (cf. Eph. 2:11-3:13)! The NT gospel,
not Israel, is the key to Scripture.
This pre-understanding colors all my interpretations of Scripture. I read all texts through it! It is surely a bias (all
interpreters have them!), but it is a Scripturally-informed presupposition.
1:9 “He was lifted up” This event is known as the Ascension. The resurrected Jesus is returned to His place of pre-existing glory
(cf. Luke 24:50-51; John 6:22; 20:17; Eph. 4:10; I Tim. 3:16; Heb. 4:14; and I Pet. 3:22). The unexpressed agent of the passive
voice is the Father. See Special Topic: The Ascension at 1:2.
Notice the variety in the verb used to describe this ascension.
1. “taken up,” v. 2 – aorist passive indicative
2. “lifted up,” v. 9 – aorist passive indicative
3. “has been taken up,” v. 11 (same verb as v. 2) – aorist passive participle
4. “was carried up into heaven,” Luke 24:51 (textual variant) – imperfect passive indicative
See Special Topic: The Ascension at 1:2.
▣ “a cloud” Clouds were a significant eschatological marker. See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: COMING ON THE CLOUDS
This phrase is an obvious reference to the Second Coming of Christ. This coming on the clouds was a very significant
eschatological sign. It was used in three distinct ways in the OT.
1. to show God’s physical presence, the Shekinah cloud of Glory (cf. Exod. 13:21; 16:10; Num. 11:25)
2. to cover His Holiness so that man would not see Him and die (cf. Exod. 33:20; Isa. 6:5)
3. to transport deity (cf. Ps. 104:3; Isa. 19:1)
In Daniel 7:13 clouds were used of the transportation of a divine human Messiah. This prophecy in Daniel is alluded to over
30 times in the NT. This same connection of the Messiah with the clouds of heaven can be seen in Matt. 24:30; Mark 13:26; Luke
21:27; 14:62; Acts 1:9,11 and I Thess. 4:17.
1:10 “they were gazing intently” This is a periphrastic imperfect. They were continuing to strain hard to see Jesus as long
as possible. Even after He had been lost from sight, they kept on looking.
This term is characteristic in Luke’s writings (cf. Luke 4:20; 22:56; Acts 1:10; 3:4,12; 6:15; 7:55; 10:4; 11:6; 13:9; 14:9;
23:1, found in the NT outside of Luke and Acts only twice, in II Corinthians 3). It implies “to look at intently,” “to gaze upon,”
or “to fix one’s eyes upon.”
▣ “into the sky” The ancients believed heaven was up, but in our day of a fuller knowledge of the universe, up is relative. In
Luke 24:31, Jesus vanished. This might be a better model for our culture. Heaven is not up and out there, but possibly another
dimension of time and space. Heaven is not a direction, but a person!
▣ “two men in white clothing” The NT often identifies angels by their bright white clothing, (cf. Luke 24:4; John 20:12).
Angels appeared at His birth, His temptation, in Gethsemane, at the tomb, and here at His ascension.
1:11 “Men of Galilee” Several times in Acts Luke records the Galilean origins of the disciples (cf. 2:7; 13:31). All of the Twelve,
except Judas Iscariot, were from Galilee. This area was looked down on by residents of Judea because it had a large Gentile
population and it was not as “kosher” (i.e., strict) in its performance of the Oral Traditions (Talmud).
One wonders if Luke structured this exchange to answer the later questions about the delayed Second coming. Christians
should not focus on the Parousia but on service, evangelism, and missions!
▣ “Jesus. . .will come” Some theologians try to make a distinction between “Jesus” and “the Christ.” These angels affirm that
it is the Jesus who they knew who would return. The glorified, ascended Christ is still the glorified Jesus of Nazareth. He remains
the God/man.
Jesus will come again as He left, on the clouds of heaven (See Special Topic at 1:9, cf. Matt. 10:23; 16:27; 24:3,27,37,39;
26:64; Mark 8:38-39; 13:26; Luke 21:27; John 21:22; I Cor. 15:23; I Thess. 1:10, 4:16; II Thess. 1:7, 10; 2:1,8; James 5:7-8; II
Pet. 1:16; 3:4,12; I John 2:28; Rev. 1:7). The Second Coming of Jesus is a recurrent and major theme of the NT. One reason
the gospel took so long to be put into written form was the early church’s expectation of the very-soon return of Christ. His
surprising delay, the dying of the Apostles, and the rise of heresies all finally prompted the church to record the life and teachings
of Jesus in written form.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 1:12-14
12Then they returned to Jerusalem from the mount called Olivet, which is near Jerusalem, a Sabbath day’s journey
away. 13When they had entered the city, they went up to the upper room where they were staying; that is, Peter and John
and James and Andrew, Philip and Thomas, Bartholomew and Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, and Simon the
Zealot, and Judas the son of James. 14These all with one mind were continually devoting themselves to prayer, along with
the women, and Mary the mother of Jesus, and with His brothers.
1:12 “returned” Luke 24:52 adds “with great joy.”
▣ “mount called Olivet” This seems to contradict Luke 24:50 (i.e., Bethany); however, compare Luke 19:29 and 21:37 with
Mark 11:11-12 and 14:3. The ridge known as the Mt. of Olives was a 2.5 mile ridge about 300-400 feet above Jerusalem that
ran from Bethany opposite the Kidron Valley, across from the Temple. It is mentioned in OT eschatological prophecy (cf. Zech.
14:4). Jesus had met the disciples there many times to pray and possibly camp out.
▣ “a Sabbath day’s journey away” The distance a Jew could travel on the Sabbath was set by the rabbis (cf. Exod. 16:29; Num.
35: 5). It was a distance of about 2,000 cubits (or steps), which the rabbis set as the maximum one could walk on the Sabbath and
not break the Mosaic law.
1:13 “the upper room” This was probably the same site as the Last Supper (cf. Luke 22:12; Mark 14:14-15). Tradition says it
was the upper level (2nd or 3rd floor) of the home of John Mark (cf. Acts 12:12), who wrote the memories of Peter into the Gospel
of Mark. It must have been a large room to accommodate 120 persons.
▣ “they” This is one of four lists of the Apostles (cf. Matt. 10:2-4; Mark 3:16-19; and Luke 6:14-16). The lists are not
identical. The names and order change. However, they are always the same persons named in four groups of three. Peter is
always first and Judas is always last. These three groups of four may have been for the purpose of allowing these men to return
home periodically to check on and provide for their families. See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE APOSTLES’ NAMES
|
Matthew 10:2-4 |
Mark 3:16-19 |
Luke 6:14-16 |
Acts 1:12-18 |
First Group |
Simon (Peter) Andrew (Peter’s James (son of Zebedee) John (James’ brother) |
Simon (Peter) James (son of John (James’ brother) Andrew |
Simon (Peter) Andrew (Peter’s brother) James John |
Peter John James Andrew |
Second Group |
Philip Bartholomew Thomas Matthew (tax gatherer) |
Philip Bartholomew Matthew Thomas |
Philip Bartholomew Matthew Thomas |
Philip Thomas Bartholomew Matthew |
Third Group |
James (son of Thaddaeus Simon (the Cananean) Judas (Iscariot) |
James (son of Thaddaeus Simon (the Cananean) Judas (Iscariot) |
James (son of Simon (the zealot) Judas (son of James) Judas (Iscariot) |
James (son of Simon (the zealot) Judas (son of James)
|
▣ “Peter” Most Jews of Galilee had both a Jewish name (e.g., Simon or Simeon [BDB 1035, cf. Gen. 29:33], meaning “hearing”)
and a Greek name (which is never given). Jesus nicknames him “rock.” In Greek it is petros and in Aramaic it is cephas (cf. John
1:42; Matt. 16:16).
▣ “Andrew” The Greek term means “manly.” From John 1:29-42 we learn that Andrew was a disciple of John the Baptist and
that he introduced his brother Peter to Jesus.
▣ “Philip” The Greek term means “fond of horses.” His call is elaborated in John 1:43-51.
▣ “Thomas” The Hebrew term means “twin” or Didymus (cf. John 11:16; 20:24; 21:2).
▣ “Bartholomew” The term means “Son of Ptolemy.” He may be the Nathanael (“gift of God,” BDB 681 and 41) of the Gospel
of John (cf. John 1:45-49; 21:20).
▣ “Matthew” Possibly related to the Hebrew name Mattenai, means “gift of YHWH” (BDB 683). This is another designation
for Levi (cf. Mark 2:14; Luke 5:27).
▣ “James” This is the Hebrew name “Jacob” (BDB 784, cf. Gen. 25:26) There are two men named James in the list of the
Twelve. One is the brother of John (cf. Mark 3:17) and part of the inner circle (i.e., Peter, James, and John). This one is known
as James the less.
▣ “Simon the Zealot” The Greek text of Mark has “Cananean” (also Matt. 10:4). Mark, whose Gospel was written to Romans,
may not have wanted to use the politically “hot-button” word “zealot,” which referred to a Jewish anti-Roman guerrilla movement.
Luke does call him by this term (cf. Luke 6:15 and Acts 1:13). The term “Cananean” may have several derivatives.
1. of the area of Galilee known as Cana
2. from the OT use of Canaanite as merchant
3. from a general designation as a native of Canaan.
If Luke’s designation is right, then “zealot” is from the Aramaic term for “enthusiast” (cf. Luke 6:15; Acts 1:17). Jesus’
chosen twelve disciples were from several different and competing groups. Simon was a member of a nationalistic group which
advocated the violent overthrow of Roman authority. Normally this Simon and Levi (i.e., Matthew the tax collector) would not
have been in the same room with each other.
▣ “Thaddaeus” He was also called “Lebbeus” (“man of heart,” cf. Matt. 10:3) or “Judas” (cf. Luke 6:16; John 14:22; Acts 1:13).
Thaddaeus means “beloved child” (lit. “from the breast”).
▣ “Judas Iscariot” There are two Simons, two Jameses, and two Judases. “Iscariot” has two possible derivations: (1) man of
Kerioth in Judah (cf. Josh. 15:23) or (2) “dagger man” or assassin, which would mean he also was a zealot, like Simon.
SPECIAL TOPIC: ISCARIOT
Judas had heard, observed, and fellowshiped with the Lord Jesus at close range for several years, but apparently he still had
no personal relationship with Him by faith (cf. Matt. 7:21-23). Peter undergoes the same intensity of temptation as does Judas,
but with drastically different results. Much discussion has taken place over the motives of Judas’ treachery:
1. it was primarily monetary (cf. John 12:6)
2. it was primarily political (cf. William Klassen, Judas Betrayer or Friend of Jesus?)
3. it was spiritual (cf. John 13:27)
On the subject of Satanic influence or demon possession there are several good resources (listed in the order of those I trust).
1. Merrill F. Unger, Biblical Demonology, Demons in the World Today
2. Clinton E. Arnold, Three Crucial Questions About Spiritual Warfare
3. Kurt Koch, Christian Counseling and Occultism, Demonology Past and Present
4. C. Fred Dickason, Demon Possession and the Christian
5. John P. Newport, Demons, Demons, Demons
6. John Warwick Montgomery, Principalities and Powers
Be careful of cultural myths and superstitions. Satan affects Peter in Matt. 16:23 to tempt Jesus in the very same way—His
substitutionary death. Satan is consistent. He is trying any way possible to stop Jesus’ redemptive work on our behalf.
1. the temptation of Jesus, Luke 4
2. uses Peter
3. uses Judas and the Sanhedrin
Jesus even describes Judas as a devil in John 6:70. The Bible does not discuss the subject of demon possession and influence
as it relates to believers. But, believers are obviously affected by personal choices and personal evil!
The etymology of this word is somewhat obscure; however, there are several possibilities:
1. Kerioth, a city of Judah (cf. Josh. 15:25)
2. Kartan, a city in Galilee (cf. Josh. 21:32)
3. Karōides, a date palm grove in Jerusalem or Jericho
4. scortea, an apron or leather bag (cf. John 13:29)
5. ascara, strangling (Hebrew) from Matt. 27:5
6. an assassin’s knife (Greek), meaning he was a Zealot like Simon (cf. Luke 6:15).
1:14 “these all with one mind” This term is a compound of “this same” (homo) and “emotion of the mind” (thumos). It was not
a prerequisite as much as it was the atmosphere of anticipation. This attitude is mentioned again and again in Acts (i.e., of
believers, cf. 1:14; 2:46; 4:24; 5:12; 15:25; and of others in 7:57; 8:6; 12:20; 18:12; 19:29).
▣
NASB “continually devoting”
NKJV “continued”
NRSV “constantly devoting”
TEV “gathered frequently”
NJB “joined constantly”
This term (pros and kaptereō) means to be intent or persistent or intently engaged. Luke uses it often (cf. 1:14; 2:42,46;
6:4; 8:13; 10:7). It is a periphrastic present active participle.
▣ “with the women” There was a group of women who traveled with and provided for and cared for Jesus and the Apostles (cf.
Matt. 27:55-56; Mark 15:40-41; Luke 8:2-3; 23:49; and John 19:25). See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: WOMEN WHO TRAVELED WITH JESUS AND HIS DISCIPLES
Matt. 27:55-56 Mark 15:40-41 Luke 8:2-3; 23:49 John 19:25
Mary Magdalene Mary Magdalene Mary Magdalene Mary, Jesus’ mother
Mary, mother of James Mary, mother of James Joanna, wife of Chuza His mother’s sister
and Joseph the Less, Joses (Herod’s steward) Mary, wife of Clopas
Mother of the sons of Salome Susanna Mary Magdalene
Zebedee (James and others
and John)
Following are the notes on these women from my commentary on Mark 15:40-41:
“There were also some women looking on from a distance” The apostolic group was ministered to both financially
and physically by several women (i.e., cooking, washing, etc., cf. v. 41; Matt. 27:55; Luke 8:3).
“Mary Magdalene” Magdala was a small city on the shores of the Sea of Galilee, three miles north of Tiberias.
Mary followed Jesus from Galilee after He had delivered her from several demons (cf. Luke 8:2). She has unfairly
been labeled as a prostitute but there is no NT evidence of this.
“Mary, the mother of James the Less and Joses” In Matt. 27:56 she is called “the mother of James and
Joseph.” In Matt. 28:1 she is called “the other Mary.” The real question is, to whom was she married?
In John 19:25 possibly she was married to Clopas, yet her son James, was said to be the “son of Alphaeus”
(cf. Matt. 10:3; Mark 3:18; Luke 6:15).
“Salome” This was the mother of James and John, who were part of the inner circle of Jesus’ disciples, and
the wife of Zebedee (cf. Matt. 27:56; Mark 15:40; 16:1-2).
Following are my the notes on these women from my commentary on John 19:25:
“standing by the cross of Jesus were His mother, and His mother’s sister, Mary, the wife of Clopas,
and Mary Magdalene” There is much discussion about whether there are four names here or three names.
It is probable that there are four names because there would not be two sisters named Mary. Mary’s sister, Salome,
is named in Mark 15:40 and Matt. 27:56. If this is true, then it would mean James, John, and Jesus were cousins.
A second-century tradition (Hegesippus) says that Clopas was Joseph’s brother. Mary of Magdala was the one out
of whom Jesus cast seven devils, and the first one to whom He chose to appear after His resurrection (cf. 20:1-2; 11-18;
Mark 16:1; Luke 24:1-10).
▣ “His brothers” We know the names of several of Jesus’ half-brothers: Jude, James (see Special Topic at 12:17), and Simon
(cf. Matt. 13:55; Mark 6:3 and Luke 2:7). They were once unbelievers (cf. John 7:5), but now part of the inner group of disciples.
For an interesting brief discussion of the historical development of the doctrine of the “perpetual virginity” of Mary, see F. F.
Bruce, New International Commentary, Acts, p. 44, footnote 47.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 1:15-26
15At this time Peter stood up in the midst of the brethren (a gathering of about one hundred and twenty persons was
there together), and said, 16“Brethren, the Scripture had to be fulfilled, which the Holy Spirit foretold by the mouth of
David concerning Judas, who became a guide to those who arrested Jesus. 17“For he was counted among us and received
his share in this ministry.” 18(Now this man acquired a field with the price of his wickedness, and falling headlong, he
burst open in the middle and all his intestines gushed out. 19And it became known to all who were living in Jerusalem;
so that in their own language that field was called Hakeldama, that is, Field of Blood.) 20“For it is written in the book of
Psalms, ‘Let his homestead be made desolate, And let no one dwell in it’; and, ‘Let another man take his
office.’ 21“Therefore it is necessary that of the men who have accompanied us all the time that the Lord Jesus went in
and out among us— 22beginning with the baptism of John until the day that He was taken up from us—one of these must
become a witness with us of His resurrection.” 23So they put forward two men, Joseph called Barsabbas (who was also
called Justus), and Matthias. 24And they prayed and said, “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all men, show which one
of these two You have chosen 25to occupy this ministry and apostleship from which Judas turned aside to go to his own
place.” 26And they drew lots for them, and the lot fell to Matthias; and he was added to the eleven apostles.
1:15 “at this time” This is literally “in these days” (en tais hēmerais) This phrase is used often in the opening chapters of Acts
(cf. 1:15; 2:18; 5:37; 6:1; 7:41; 9:37; 11:27; 13:41). Luke is using other eyewitness sources. He also uses “from day to day” (kath
hēmeran) as common, ambiguous time indicator in the early chapters of Acts (cf. 2:46,47; 3:2; 16:5; 17:11,31; 19:9). After
chapter 15 Luke is personally acquainted with many of the events he is recording. He still uses “day” often, but not as often as
in these ambiguous, idiomatic phrases.
▣ “Peter stood up” Peter is obviously the spokesman for the Apostles (cf. Matthew 16). He preached the first sermon of the
church after the coming of the Spirit (cf. Acts 2) and the second sermon in Acts 3. Jesus appears to him first in the post-resurrection appearances (cf. John 21 and I Cor. 15:5). His Hebrew name is “Simeon” (cf. Acts 15:14; II Pet. 1:1). This name
is spelled “Simon” in Greek. The term “Peter” is a Greek term (petros) for a “detached rock.” It is “Cephas” or “bedrock” in
Aramaic (cf. Matt. 16:18).
▣ “a gathering of about one hundred and twenty persons” This phrase is a parenthesis in the UBS4 Greek text (but not vv.
18-19). This group must have included the eleven Apostles, the women who accompanied Jesus, and other disciples from Jesus’
preaching and healing ministry.
1:16 “the Scripture” All references to “Scripture” in the NT (except II Pet. 3:15-16) refer to the OT (ex. Matt. 5:17-20; II Tim.
3:15-17). This passage also asserts the inspiration of the Holy Spirit (cf. II Pet. 1:21) through David. It also implies the
canonization of “the Writings” section of the Hebrew Bible.
SPECIAL TOPIC: INSPIRATION
The “once-for-all” faith refers to the truths, doctrines, concepts, world-view teachings of Christianity (cf. II Pet. 2:21). This
once-given emphasis is the biblical basis for theologically limiting inspiration to the writings of the NT and not allowing later or
other writings to be considered revelatory. There are many ambiguous, uncertain, and grey areas in the NT, but believers affirm
by faith that everything that is “needed” for faith and practice is included with sufficient clarity in the NT.
This concept has been delineated in what is called “the revelatory triangle”
1. God has revealed Himself in time-space history (REVELATION)
2. He has chosen certain human writers to document and explain His acts (INSPIRATION)
3. He has given His Spirit to open the minds and hearts of humans to understand these writings, not definitively, but
adequately for salvation and an effective Christian life (ILLUMINATION)
The point of this is that inspiration is limited to the writers of Scripture. There are no further authoritative writings, visions,
or revelations. The canon is closed. We have all the truth we need to respond appropriately and pleasingly to God.
This truth is best seen in the agreement of biblical writers versus the disagreement of sincere, godly believers. No modern
writer or speaker has the level of divine leadership that the writers of Scripture did.
▣ had to be” This is dei, which means necessity. It is an imperfect active indicative and refers to the first quote in v. 20.
The term is characteristic of Luke’s sense of the life of Jesus and the early church being an extension of OT Scriptures (cf.
Luke 18:31-34; 22:37; 24:44). Luke uses this term often (cf. Luke 2:49; 4:43; 9:22; 11:42; 12:12; 13:14,16,33; 15:32; 17:25;
18:1; 19:5; 21:9; 22:7,37; 24:7,26,44; Acts 1:16,21; 3:21; 4:12; 5:29; 9:6,16; 14:27; 15:5; 16:30; 17:3; 19:21,36; 20:35; 23:11;
24:19; 25:10,24; 26:9; 27:21,24,26). The term means “it is binding,” “it is necessary,” “it is inevitable.” The gospel and its
growth is not a chance occurrence, but the predetermined plan of God and fulfillment of OT Scripture (LXX usage).
▣ “fulfilled” When one reads these OT quotes (v. 20), Judas’ betrayal was not the intent of the writer of the Psalms (i.e., Ps.
69:25; 109:8). The Apostles interpreted the OT in light of their experience with Jesus. This is called typological interpretation
(cf. v. 20). Jesus Himself may have set the pattern of this approach as He walked and talked with the two on the road to Emmaus
(cf. Luke 24:13-35, especially vv. 25-27). The early Christian interpreters saw parallels between the events of the OT and Jesus’
life and teachings. They saw Jesus as the prophetic fulfillment of all the OT. Believers today must be careful of this approach!
Those inspired NT authors were under a level of inspiration and personally familiar with the life and teachings of Jesus. We affirm
the truth and authority of their witness but cannot reproduce their method.
SPECIAL TOPIC: TYPOLOGY
Philo and the early church’s use of allegory and Paul’s use of the same technique differed significantly. The former totally
ignored the historical setting, developing teachings entirely foreign to the original author’s intent. Paul’s approach is better
characterized as typology. Paul assumed the historical setting of Genesis and the unity of the Old and New Covenants, thus he
was able to build on the similarities between them because they have one author—God. In this particular context, Paul compared
the Abrahamic Covenant and the Mosaic Covenant and draws application to the New Covenant of Jer. 31:31-34 and the NT.
Four connections in 4:21-31 may be drawn.
1. the two mothers stand for two families; one formed by natural means, the other by supernatural promise
2. there was tension between these two mothers and their children as there was tension between the Judaizer’s message
and Paul’s gospel
3. both groups claimed to be descendants of Abraham, but one was in bondage to the Mosaic Law and the other was free
in Christ’s finished work
4. two mountains were connected to these different covenants, Mt. Sinai with Moses and Mt. Zion with Abraham. Mt.
Zion or Mt. Moriah was where Abraham offered Isaac as a sacrifice (cf. Gen. 22), which later became Jerusalem.
Abraham was looking for a heavenly city (Heb. 11:10; 12:22; 13:14, New Jerusalem, Isaiah 40-66) not an earthly
Jerusalem.
Paul may have used this typology because
1. the false teachers had used this same approach to their advantage claiming to be the true seed of Abraham
2. the false teachers may have used an allegory from Moses’ writings to push their Jewish covenant theology so Paul uses
the father of the Jewish faith, Abraham
3. Paul may have used it because of Gen. 21:9-10, which is quoted in verse 30 and says, “drive off” the natural son; in
Paul’s analogy this would refer to the Judaizers
4. Paul may have used it because of the exclusivism of the Jewish false teachers, particularly in their contempt for the
Gentiles; in Paul’s typology the Gentiles are accepted and the racially confident ones are rejected by God (cf. Matt.
8:11-12)
5. Paul may have used this typology because he has been emphasizing “sonship” and “heirship” in chapters 3 & 4. This
was the heart of his argument: our adoption into the family of God by faith through Christ alone, not natural descent.
▣ “Judas” It was Judas’ apostasy, not his death, which caused this election of a substitute Apostle. In v. 20b, Judas’ actions
were seen as a fulfillment of prophecy. The NT does not record another Apostolic election after the death of James (cf. Acts 12:2).
There is much mystery and tragedy in the life of Judas. He was possibly the only Apostle who was not a Galilean. He was made
the treasurer of the apostolic group (cf. John 12:6). He was accused of stealing their money throughout the period of Jesus’ time
with them. He is said to be a prophetic fulfillment and an object of Satanic attack. His motives are never stated, but his remorse
resulted in his taking his own life after returning the bribe.
There is so much speculation about Judas and his motives. He is mentioned and vilified often in John’s Gospel (6:71; 12:4;
13:2,26,39; 18:2,3,5). The modern play “Jesus Christ Superstar” depicts him as a faithful, but disillusioned, follower who tried
to force Jesus into fulfilling the role of Jewish Messiah—this is, to overthrow the Romans, punish the wicked, and set up Jerusalem
as the capital of the world. However, John depicts his motives as greedy and malicious.
The main problem is the theological issue of God’s sovereignty and human free will. Did God or Jesus manipulate Judas?
Is Judas responsible for his acts if Satan controlled him or God predicted and caused him to betray Jesus? The Bible does not
address these questions directly. God is in control of history; He knows future events, but mankind is responsible for choices and
actions. God is fair, not manipulative.
There is a new book that tries to defend Judas—Judas Betrayer or Friend of Jesus? by William Klassen, Fortress Press,
1996. I do not agree with this book, but it is very interesting and thought provoking.
▣ “who became a guide to those who arrested Jesus” Here is a quote from my commentary on Matthew 26:47-50 (see
www.freebiblecommentary.org ).
“There has been much discussion about the motivation of Judas. It must be said that this remains uncertain. His
kiss of Jesus in v. 49 either (1) was a sign to the soldiers that this was the man to arrest (cf. v. 48); or (2) lends support
to the modern theory that he was trying to force Jesus’ hand to act, (cf. 27:4). Other Gospel passages state that he was
a robber and an unbeliever from the beginning (cf. John 12:6).
From Luke 22:52 we know the make-up of this crowd. There were Roman soldiers involved because they were
the only ones who could legally carry swords. Also, the Temple police were involved because they usually carried
clubs. Representatives from the Sanhedrin were also present at the arrest (cf. vv. 47, 51).”
1:17 Judas was chosen by Jesus, heard Jesus speak, saw Jesus’ miracles, was sent on mission by and for Jesus, was present in the
upper room and participated in these events and, yet, betrayed Jesus!
1:18
NASB, NKJV,
NRSV, NJB,
NIV “falling headlong, he burst open”
TEV “where he fell to his death and burst open”
It is possible that “falling headlong” was a medical term for “swelling up” (cf. Moulton and Milligan, The Vocabulary of
the Greek Testament, pp. 535-536), which is found in some English translations (e.g., Phillips, Moffatt and Goodspeed). For a
good discussion of the different versions of Judas’ death (Matt. 27:5 vs. Acts 1:18) see Hard Sayings of the Bible, pp. 511-512.
▣ “this man acquired a field” Verses 18-19 are parenthetical (cf. NASB, NKJV, NRSV, NJB, NIV). The author provided this
information for the reader’s understanding. From Matt. 27:6-8 we learn the priests bought this piece of land in fulfillment of OT
prophecy (cf. Matt. 27:9). It was Judas’ money, which the priests considered unclean and used to buy a field for burying
unclaimed bodies. Verses 18-19 tell us it was the very field in which Judas died. This information about Judas’ death is not
repeated elsewhere.
1:19 “in their own language” Many of the Jews of Jesus’ day did not read or speak Hebrew, but a similar Semitic language,
Aramaic, which they learned from their years under Persian rule. The educated people could speak and read Hebrew. Jesus used
it when He reads Scripture in the Synagogues.
Many people in Palestine would have been bilingual (Koiine Greek and Aramaic) or tri-lingual (Koine Greek, Aramaic, and
Hebrew).
Jesus spoke Aramaic most of the time. The phrases and words in the Gospels that are transliterated are all Aramaic.
▣
NASB, NRSV “Hakeldama, that is Field of Blood”
NKJV “Akel dama, that is, Field of Blood”
TEV “Akeldama, which means Field of Blood”
NJB “Bloody acre. . .Hakel-dama”
This is a Greek translation of an Aramaic word. It is always difficult to uniformly transpose from one language to another.
Despite the Greek spelling variations, the Aramaic means “field of blood.” This could mean
1. a field bought with blood money (cf. Matt. 27:7a)
2. a field where blood was shed (cf. Acts 1:18)
3. a field where murderers or foreigners were buried (cf. Matt. 27:7b)
1:20 These are two quotes from the Psalms. The first is Ps. 69:25. Originally it was plural. It functions as a curse formula
related to Judas. The second quote is from Ps. 109:8 (LXX). It provides the prophetic precedent for the replacement of Judas
discussed in vv. 21-26.
Modern believers cannot reproduce this method of typological hermeneutics because none of us in this period of history are
inspired. The Spirit guided these Bible authors/scribes at a level He does not do for later believers. We are illumined by Him
but we sometimes disagree (see Special Topic: Inspiration at v. 16).
▣
NASB, NKJV,
NJB “office”
NRSV “positions of overseer”
TEV “place of service”
In the Septuagint the term episkopē carries the connotation of a charge or service of an officer (cf. Num. 4:16; Ps. 109:8).
It came to denote an office in the Roman Catholic clerical system, but in Greek it simply was the Greek city-state term for leader
(cf. NIV), as “elder” (presbuteros) was the Jewish term for leader (ex. Gen. 50:7; Exod. 3:16,18; Num. 11:16,24,25,39; Deut.
21:2,3,4,6,19,20 and others). Therefore with the possible exception of James, “overseer” and “elder” after the death of the
Apostles refer to the pastor (cf. Acts 20:17,28; Titus 1:5,7; Phil. 1:1).
1:21 “it is necessary” This is the word dei (see full note at v. 16). Apparently Peter felt that the Twelve Apostles somehow
represented the twelve tribes or some other symbolism that must not be lost.
1:21-22 These are the qualifications for Apostleship (See Special Topic: Send [apostellō] at 14:4). Notice that it shows the
presence of other believers besides the Twelve who followed Jesus throughout His earthly ministry. These criteria were later used
by some to reject Paul’s Apostleship.
Luke apparently includes these two verses to show the priority of Apostolic witness, not the election of Matthias, about whom
we hear no more. The church and NT Scripture will be built on Jesus’ life and teachings, but it is mediated through eyewitness,
authoritative witness, selected theological witness, the NT. This is the theological issue, not the symbolism of “twelve”!
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE NUMBER TWELVE
Twelve has always been a symbolic number of organization
A. outside the Bible
1. twelve signs of the Zodiac
2. twelve months of the year
B. in the OT (BDB 1040 plus 797)
1. the sons of Jacob (the Jewish tribes)
2. reflected in
a. twelve pillars of the altar in Exod. 24:4
b. twelve jewels on the high priest’s breastplate (which stand for the tribes) in Exod. 28:21
c. twelve loaves of bread in the holy place of the tabernacle in Lev. 24:5
d. twelve spies sent into Canaan in Num. 13 (one from each tribe)
e. twelve rods (tribal standards) at Korah’s rebellion in Num. 17:2
f. twelve stones of Joshua in Josh. 4:3,9,20
g. twelve administrative districts in Solomon’s administration in I Kgs. 4:7
h. twelve stones of Elijah’s altar to YHWH in I Kgs. 18:31
C. in the NT
1. twelve apostles chosen
2. twelve baskets of bread (one for each Apostle) in Matt. 14:20
3. twelve thrones on which NT disciples sit (referring to the 12 tribes of Israel) in Matt. 19:28
4. twelve legions of angels to rescue Jesus in Matt. 26:53
5. the symbolism of Revelation
a. 24 elders on 24 thrones in 4:4
b. 144,000 (12×12,000) in 7:4; 14:1,3
c. twelve stars on the woman’s crown in 12:1
d. twelve gates, twelve angels reflecting the twelve tribes in 21:12
e. twelve foundation stones of the new Jerusalem and on them the names of the twelve Apostles in 21:14
f. twelve thousand stadia in 21:16 (size of new city, New Jerusalem)
g. wall is 144 cubits in 21:17
h. twelve gates of pearl in 21:21
i. trees in new Jerusalem with twelve kinds of fruit (one for each month ) in 22:2
1:23 “they set two” There is a Greek manuscript variant which shows the theological issue in this phrase:
1. estēsan (“they set”) in MSS א, A, B, C, D1, E
2. estesen (“he set”) in MS D* (fifth century), Lectionary 156 (tenth century), two Old Latin manuscripts (fifth and
thirteenth centuries), and Augustine (a.d. 354-430)
If number one, this is an example of the whole group of disciples voting on the possible replacement of Judas (a form of
congregational polity (cf. 15:22), but if number 2, then this is evidence for the supremacy of Peter (cf. 15:7-11,14). As far as
Greek manuscript evidence, the wording of number one is certain (UBS4 gives it an “A” rating).
▣ “Joseph. . .Matthias” We know nothing about these men from the NT. We must remember that the Gospels and Acts are not
western histories, but selected theological writings to introduce Jesus and show how His message impacted the world.
1:24
NASB “who knows the hearts of all men”
NKJV “who knows the hearts of all”
NRSV “you know everyone’s heart”
TEV “you know the thoughts of everyone”
NJB “you can read everyone’s heart”
This is a compound word, “hearts” and “known” (cf. 15:8). This reflects an OT truth (cf. I Sam. 2:7; 16:7; I Kgs. 8:39;
I Chr. 28:9; II Chr. 6:30; Ps. 7:9; 44:21; Pro. 15:11; 21:2; Jer. 11:20; 17:9-10; 20:12; Luke 16:15; Acts 1:24; 15:8; Rom. 8:27).
God knows us completely and still loves us (cf. Rom. 8:27).
The disciples affirm that YHWH knows their motives as well as the motives and lives of the two candidates. They want
God’s will in this choice (aorist middle). Jesus chose the Twelve, but He is now with the Father.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE HEART
The Greek term kardia is used in the Septuagint and NT to reflect the Hebrew term lēb (BDB 523). It is used in several ways
(cf. Bauer, Arndt, Gingrich and Danker, A Greek-English Lexicon, pp. 403-404).
1. the center of physical life, a metaphor for the person (cf. Acts 14:17; II Cor. 3:2-3; James 5:5)
2. the center of spiritual life (i.e., moral)
a. God knows the heart (cf. Luke 16:15; Rom. 8:27; I Cor. 14:25; I Thess. 2:4; Rev. 2:23)
b. used of mankind’s spiritual life (cf. Matt. 15:18-19; 18:35; Rom. 6:17; I Tim. 1:5; II Tim. 2:22; I Pet. 1:22)
3. the center of the thought life (i.e., intellect, cf. Matt. 13:15; 24:48; Acts 7:23; 16:14; 28:27; Rom. 1:21; 10:6; 16:18;
II Cor. 4:6; Eph. 1:18; 4:18; James 1:26; II Pet. 1:19; Rev. 18:7; heart is synonymous with mind in II Cor. 3:14-15 and
Phil. 4:7)
4. the center of the volition (i.e., will, cf. Acts 5:4; 11:23; I Cor. 4:5; 7:37; II Cor. 9:7)
5. the center of the emotions (cf. Matt. 5:28; Acts 2:26,37; 7:54; 21:13; Rom. 1:24; II Cor. 2:4; 7:3; Eph. 6:22; Phil. 1:7)
6. unique place of the Spirit’s activity (cf. Rom. 5:5; II Cor. 1:22; Gal. 4:6 [i.e., Christ in our hearts, Eph. 3:17])
7. The heart is a metaphorical way of referring to the entire person (cf. Matt. 22:37, quoting Deut. 6:5). The thoughts,
motives, and actions attributed to the heart fully reveal the type of individual. The OT has some striking usages of the
terms
a. Gen. 6:6; 8:21, “God was grieved to His heart,” also notice Hosea 11:8-9
b. Deut. 4:29; 6:5, “with all your heart and all your soul”
c. Deut. 10:16, “uncircumcised heart” and Rom. 2:29
d. Ezek. 18:31-32, “a new heart”
e. Ezek. 36:26, “a new heart” vs. “a heart of stone”
1:25 “to his own place” This is an euphemism for “damnation.” Satan used him for his purposes (cf. Luke 22:3; John 13:2; 27),
but Judas is responsible for his choices and actions (cf. Gal. 6:7).
1:26 “they drew lots for them” This has an OT background related to the High Priest’s use of the Urim and Thummim in Lev.
16:8, or to individuals using some similar type of method (cf. Pro. 16:33; 18:18). The Roman soldiers also cast lots for Jesus’
clothes (cf. Luke 23:34). However, this is the last time this method of knowing God’s will is mentioned in the NT. If one tends
toward proof-texting, this method could become normative for how to make spiritual decisions, which would be very unfortunate
(e.g., opening the Bible and putting one’s finger on a verse to determine the will of God). Believers are to live by faith, not by
mechanical means of determining God’s will (e.g., sheep fleece, cf. Jdgs. 6:17,36-40).
▣ “Matthias” Eusebius says he was involved in the mission of the seventy (cf. Luke 10). Later traditions assert that he was
martyred in Ethiopia.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why did Jesus stay with the disciples for 40 days?
2. What is the “baptism of the Spirit?”
3. Why is verse 7 so important?
4. Why is the ascension important?
5. Why did Peter feel a need to fill Judas’ place?
6. How can Paul be an apostle when he did not fulfill the qualifications? (1:21-22)
ACTS 2
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
The Coming of the Holy |
Coming of the Holy Spirit |
The Day of Pentecost |
The Coming of the Holy |
Pentecost |
2:1-4 |
2:1-4 |
2:1-4 |
2:1-4 |
2:1-4 |
|
The Crowds Respond |
|
|
|
2:5-13 |
2:5-13 |
2:5-13 |
2:5-13 |
2:5-13 |
Peter’s Speech at Pentecost |
Peter’s Sermon |
Peter’s Sermon |
Peter’s Sermon |
Peter’s Address to the |
2:14-21 |
2:14-39 |
2:14-21 |
2:14-21 |
2:14-21 |
2:22-28 |
|
2:22-28 |
2:22-28 |
2:22-28 |
2:29-36 |
|
2:29-36 |
2:29-35 |
2:29-35 |
|
|
|
2:36 |
2:36 |
|
|
The Call to Repentance |
|
The First Conversions |
2:37-42 |
|
2:37-42 |
2:37 |
2:37-41 |
|
A Vital Church grows |
|
2:38-39 |
|
|
2:40-47 |
|
2:40-42 |
The Early Christian |
Life Among the Believers |
|
|
Life Among the Believers |
2:42 |
2:43-47 |
|
2:43-47 |
2:43-47 |
2:43 |
|
|
|
|
2:44-45 |
|
|
|
|
2:46-47 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
A. This is the first sermon of the New Age. Notice the OT quotes and allusions in chapter 2. Peter is preaching to Jews
from all over the Mediterranean world. The Scriptures he chooses reflect Jesus’ teachings of the two on the road to
Emmaus (cf. Luke 24:21-32) and His post-resurrection visits with the disciples (cf. Luke 24:45).
1. vv. 16-21 – Joel 2:28-32
2. vv. 25-28 – Psalm 16:8-11
3. v. 30 – an allusion to II Sam. 7:11-16 and Ps. 89:34 or 132:11
4. vv. 34-35 – Psalm 110:1
B. The fulfillment of Joel’s eschatological prophecy is a physical manifestation that the judgment of God that withdrew
His Spirit from Israel after Malachi (or the author of Chronicles) is over! The Spirit has returned in Great Commission
power and purpose!
C. The confusion of languages from the Tower of Babel (cf. Genesis 11) is now reversed (at least symbolically). The New
Age has begun.
D. For now the “tongues” of Acts are different from the tongues of Corinth. There is no need for an interpreter. The
message is exclusively evangelistic.
Tongues in Acts are for believing Jews to recognize that God has accepted a new racial/geographical group of
people into the Kingdom (i.e., Samaritans, Romans, etc.).
The Corinthian tongues fit the cultural model of the Delphi Oracle. They address God not humans (cf. I Cor.
14:2). They edify the speaker (cf. I Cor. 14:4). Please do not take these observations as negative in any sense to the
Corinthian model (cf. I Cor. 14:5,18). I believe it is still an ongoing spiritual gift. However, because of the questions
of I Cor. 12:28-29, which expect a “no” answer, they are not for every believer! See full notes on the subject at I
Corinthians 12 and 14 at www.freebiblecommentary.org
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 2:1-4
1When the day of Pentecost had come, they were all together in one place. 2And suddenly there came from heaven
a noise like a violent rushing wind, and it filled the whole house where they were sitting. 3And there appeared to them
tongues as of fire distributing themselves, and they rested on each one of them. 4And they were all filled with the Holy
Spirit and began to speak with other tongues, as the Spirit was giving them utterance.
2:1 “Pentecost” This annual Jewish Feast is also called “Feast of Weeks” (cf. Exod. 34:22; Deut. 16:10). The term “Pentecost”
means “fiftieth.” This feast was held fifty days (seven weeks) after Passover (i.e., numbering from the second day of the Feast
of Unleavened Bread). It had three purposes in Jesus’ day:
1. commemoration of giving of the Law to Moses (cf. Jubliees 1:1)
2. thanksgiving to God for the harvest
3. an offering of the first fruits (i.e., a sign of YHWH’s ownership of the whole harvest) of the grain harvest. The OT
background is in Exod. 23:16-17; 34:22; Lev. 23:15-21; Num. 28:26-31 and Deut. 16:9-12.
▣
NASB, NRSV “had come”
NKJV “had fully come”
TEV “came”
NJB “came around”
This is literally “had been filled.” It is a present passive infinitive. This was a divine appointment and fulfillment of
divine purpose. It is used only in Luke’s writings (cf. Luke 8:23; 9:51; here; and a similar metaphor in Luke 2:6). Human history
is calendared by YHWH.
M. R. Vincent, Word Studies, vol. 1, p. 224, reminds us that the Jews saw the day as a container to be filled. The time of
Pentecost had fully come! It was also the time of God’s special inauguration of the Age of the Spirit, the beginning of the church.
▣ “they were all together in one place” This phrase implies unity of both place and mind (cf. 1:14). It is not certain where this
occurred. It was probably in the “upper room” (cf. Acts 1:13; “house,” v. 2), but at some point the Temple is involved in this
experience (cf. Luke 24:53; size of group in v. 47).
2:2 “came from heaven a noise like a violent rushing wind” In this entire section the emphasis is on the sound, not the wind
or fire. This is similar to Gen. 3:8. In the OT the word ruah (BDB 924) is used of breath, wind, and Spirit (cf. Ezek. 37:9-14);
in the NT pneuma is used of wind and the Holy Spirit (cf. John 3:5-8). The term wind in this verse is pnoē. It is used only here
and in 17:25. The term pneuma is used of the Spirit in v. 4.
SPECIAL TOPIC: SPIRIT (PNEUMA) IN THE NT
The Greek term for “spirit” is used in several ways in the NT. Here are some representative classifications and examples.
A. of the Triune God
1. of the Father (cf. John 4:24)
2. of the Son (cf. Rom. 8:9-10; II Cor. 3:17; Gal. 4:6; I Pet. 1:11)
3. of the Holy Spirit (cf. Mark 1:11; Matt. 3:16; 10:20; John 3:5,6,8; 7:39; 14:17; Acts 2:4; 5:9; 8:29,35; Rom. 1:4;
8:11,16; I Cor. 2:4,10,11,13,14; 12:7)
B. of the human life force
1. of Jesus (cf. Mark 8:12; John 11:33,38; 13:21)
2. of mankind (cf. Matt. 22:43; Acts 7:59; 17:16; 20:22; Rom. 1:9; 8:16; I Cor. 2:11; 5:3-5; 7:34; 15:45; 16:18; II
Cor. 2:13; 7:13; Phil. 4:23; Col. 2:5)
C. of the spiritual realm
1. spiritual beings
a. good (i.e., angels, cf. Acts 23:8-9; Heb. 1:14)
b. evil (i.e., demonic, cf. Matt. 8:16; 10:1; 12:43,45; Acts 5:16; 8:7; 16:16; 19:12-21; Eph. 6:12)
c. ghosts (cf. Luke 24:37)
2. spiritual discernment (cf. Matt. 5:3; 26:41; John 3:6; 4:23; Acts 18:25; 19:21; Rom. 2:29; 7:6; 8:4,10; 12:11; I
Cor. 14:37)
3. spiritual things (cf. John 6:63; Rom. 2:29; 8:2,5,9,15; 15:27; I Cor. 9:11; 14:12)
4. spiritual gifts (cf. I Cor. 12:1; 14:1)
5. inspiration of the Spirit (cf. Matt. 22:43; Luke 2:27; Eph. 1:17)
6. spiritual body (cf. I Cor. 15:44-45)
D. Characterizes
1. the attitude of the world (cf. Rom. 8:15; 11:8; I Cor. 2:12)
2. thinking process of humans (cf. Acts 6:10; Rom. 8:6; I Cor. 4:2)
E. of the physical realm
1. wind (cf. Matt. 7:25,27; John 3:8; Acts 2:2)
2. breath (cf. Acts 17:25; II Thess. 2:8)
It is obvious that this term must be interpreted in light of its immediate context. There are various shades of meaning which
can refer to (1) the physical world; (2) the unseen world; (3) as well as persons of this physical world or of the spiritual realm.
The Holy Spirit is that part of the Triune God who is supremely active in this stage of history. The new age of the Spirit has
come. All that is good, holy, right, and true relates to Him. His presence, gifts, and ministry are crucial in the furtherance of the
gospel and the success of the Kingdom of God (cf. John 14 and 16). He does not draw attention to Himself, but to Christ (cf. John
16:13-14). He convicts, convinces, woos, baptizes, and matures all believers (cf. John 16:8-11).
2:3 “tongues as of fire distributing themselves” The text appears to describe a sound and light event. The light-like fire was
at first unified, but broke into separate manifestations and gathered on each believer. Each person in the Upper Room—Apostles,
Jesus’ family members, and disciples—had visible confirmation of their inclusion. The church was one!
The Feast of Pentecost had developed in Judaism as a celebration of the giving of the Law to Moses on Mt. Sinai (when the
tradition developed is uncertain, it was definitely by the second century a.d., but probably much earlier). Therefore, the loud wind
and fire may be a reminder of the awesomeness of YHWH descending on Horeb (cf. Exod. 19:16).
In the OT fire symbolizes (1) the presence of deity; (2) judgement (cf. Isa. 66:15-18); or (3) purification (cf. Exod. 3:2; Deut.
5:4 and Matt. 3:11). Luke is using an analogy to try to express a unique occurrence of a physical manifestation of the Spirit. See
Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: FIRE
Fire has both positive and negative connotations in Scripture.
A. Positive
1. warms (cf. Isa. 44:15; John 18:18)
2. lights (cf. Isa. 50:11; Matt. 25:1-13)
3. cooks (cf. Exod. 12:8; Isa. 44:15-16; John 21:9)
4. purifies (cf. Num. 31:22-23; Pro. 17:3; Isa. 1:25; 6:6-8; Jer. 6:29; Mal. 3:2-3)
5. holiness (cf. Gen. 15:17; Exod. 3:2; 19:18; Ezek. 1:27; Heb. 12:29)
6. God’s leadership (cf. Exod. 13:21; Num. 14:14; I Kgs. 18:24)
7. God’s empowering (cf. Acts 2:3)
8. Protection (cf. Zech. 2:5)
B. Negative
1. burns (cf. Josh. 6:24; 8:8; 11:11; Matt. 22:7)
2. destroys (cf. Gen. 19:24; Lev. 10:1-2)
3. anger (cf. Num. 21:28; Isa. 10:16; Zech. 12:6)
4. punishment (cf. Gen. 38:24; Lev. 20:14; 21:9; Josh. 7:15)
5. false eschatological sign (cf. Rev. 13:13)
C. God’s anger against sin is expressed in fire metaphors
1. His anger burns (cf. Hos. 8:5; Zeph. 3:8)
2. He pours out fire (cf. Nah. 1:6)
3. eternal fire (cf. Jer. 15:14; 17:4)
4. eschatological judgment (cf. Matt. 3:10; 13:40; John 15:6; II Thess. 1:7; II Pet. 3:7-10; Rev. 8:7; 16:8)
D. Like so many metaphors in the Bible (i.e., leaven, lion) fire can be a blessing or a curse depending on the context.
▣ “each one of them”
There was no distinction made between Apostles or disciples; men or women (cf. Joel 2:28-32; Acts 2:16-21).
2:4 “they were all filled with the Holy Spirit” This event is mentioned in Luke 24:49 and called “the promise of My Father.”
“Filling” is repeatable (cf. 2:4; 4:8,31; 6:3,5; 7:55; 9:17; 11:24; 13:9). It implies daily Christlikeness (cf. Eph. 5:18 compared
with Col. 3:16). This is different from baptism of the Spirit, which denotes the initial Christian experience or incorporation into
Christ (cf. I Cor. 12:13; Eph. 4:4-5). Filling is the spiritual empowering for effective ministry (cf. Eph. 5:18-20), here evangelism!
See note at 3:10.
In many ways some segments of Evangelicalism have reacted to what they see as excess in the area of spiritual experience
and have depreciated the NT emphasis on the Holy Spirit. Two books that have helped me work through this issue are by Gordon
Fee.
1. Gospel and Spirit
2. Paul, the Spirit, and the People of God
See full note at 5:17.
▣
NASB, NKJV “began to speak with other tongues”
NRSV “began to speak in other languages”
TEV “talk in other languages”
NJB “began to speak in different languages”
Literally it is “other tongues” (heterais glōssais). The translation “different languages” reflects the understanding of this
term based on the context of vv. 6 and 11. The other possible translation is “ecstatic utterances,” based on I Corinthians 12-14
and possibly Acts 2:13. It is uncertain how many different languages were being spoken, but it was many. If you try to add up
all the countries and regions in vv. 9-11 it must have been well over twenty. Several of the 120 believers must have spoken the
same language.
God did something unique and powerful to inspire this small group of frightened men and women waiting in a locked upper
room to become bold proclaimers of the gospel (both men and women). Whatever this initial sign of the coming of the promised
Holy Spirit was, God also used it to confirm His acceptance of other groups (e.g., Samaritans, Roman army officers, and Gentiles).
“Tongues” in Acts was always a sign to believers that the gospel had overcome another ethnic, geographical barrier. There is a
distinctive difference between the tongues of Acts and Paul’s later ministry in Corinth (cf. I Corinthians 12-14).
Theologically it is possible that Pentecost is the direct opposite of the tower of Babel (cf. Genesis 10-11). As prideful,
rebellious humans asserted their independence (i.e., refusal to disperse and fill the earth), God implemented His will by the
insertion of multiple languages. Now, in the new age of the Spirit, the nationalism which impedes humans from uniting (i.e., one
world government of the eschaton) has for believers been reversed. Christian fellowship across every human boundary (i.e., age,
sex, class, geography, language) is the reversal of the consequences of Genesis 3.
▣ “as the Spirit was giving them utterance” The verb is imperfect active indicative, meaning the Spirit began to give them.
The word “utterance” (apophtheggomai) is a present passive (deponent) infinitive. This term is only used by Luke in Acts (cf.
2:4,14; 26:25). It is used in the Septuagint for the speaking of prophets (i.e., Spirit-inspired speech, cf. Deut. 32:2; I Chr. 25:1;
Ezek. 13:9,19; Mic. 5:11; Zech. 10:2).
I prefer this interpretation to the Classical Greek etymological meaning “raised volume,” “impassioned speaking,” or
“elevated rhetorical speaking.” Luke knew the Septuagint and was influenced by its terminology. The Septuagint was the Bible
of the Mediterranean world and became the Bible of the Church.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 2:5-13
5Now there were Jews living in Jerusalem, devout men from every nation under heaven. 6And when this sound
occurred, the crowd came together, and were bewildered because each one of them was hearing them speak in his own
language. 7They were amazed and astonished, saying, “Why, are not all these who are speaking Galileans? 8“And how
is it that we each hear them in our own language to which we were born? 9“Parthians and Medes and Elamites, and
residents of Mesopotamia, Judea and Cappadocia, Pontus and Asia, 10Phrygia and Pamphylia, Egypt and the districts
of Libya around Cyrene, and visitors from Rome, both Jews and proselytes, 11Cretans and Arabs — we hear them in our
own tongues speaking of the mighty deeds of God.” 12And they all continued in amazement and great perplexity, saying
to one another, “What does this mean?” 13But others were mocking and saying, “They are full of sweet wine.”
2:5 “devout” This term means “taking hold of something well” (cf. LXX Lev. 15:31; Micah 7:2). In the case of first century
Judaism, it implies a reverence toward God and the traditions of the Elders (i.e., Oral Traditions, which became the Talmud).
These were pious, religious men (cf. 8:2; 22:12; Luke 2:25). This is similar in meaning to “blameless” used of Noah and Job.
▣ “from every nation under heaven” All male Jews were strongly urged to attend the three major annual feast days (cf.
Leviticus 23) at the Temple (cf. Deut. 16:16). There were
1. probably pilgrims from all over the Mediterranean area who had come to Jerusalem for Passover and stayed until
Pentecost
2. permanent residents who had moved from somewhere outside of Jerusalem (cf. use of the word in 4:16; 7:24; 9:22,32)
This has great theological implications (cf. Matt. 28:19-20; Luke 24:47; Acts 1:8).
2:6 “when this sound occurred” This could refer to (1) the noise of the rushing wind (cf. v. 2) or (2) the believers speaking in
other languages (cf. v. 4).
▣
NASB, NRSV,
NJB “bewildered”
NKJV “confused”
TEV “excited”
This same term is used in the Septuagint in Gen. 11:7,9, relating to the confusion of languages at the Tower of Babel. I think
Pentecost is the symbolic reversal of the nationalism begun at the Tower of Babel, first in punishment for mankind’s sinful
rejection of God’s will to disperse and second for mankind’s protection from a one-world government. The Jerome Biblical
Commentary, vol. 2, p. 172, further reinforces this view by the use of diamezizō in Acts 2:3, which is a rare term, but also used
in the Septuagint of Deut. 32:8 for dispersion of the Tower of Babel. Believers are no longer separated by nationality! See note
at 9:22.
▣ “the crowd came together” This implies that this occurred in the Temple area because a great crowd could not fit in a small
upper room or in the small streets of Jerusalem.
▣ “And how is it that we each hear them in our own language to which we were born” This may have been a miracle of
hearing, not necessarily speaking (cf. vv. 8 and 11). If this many people, all speaking a different language, spoke at the same time
it would be confusion. This is the theological reversal of The Tower of Babel (cf. Genesis11).
This is the Greek term dialektos (cf. v. 8), from which we get the English term “dialect.” Luke uses this term often in Acts
(cf. 1:19; 2:6,8; 21:40; 22:2; 26:14). It is used in the sense of “language.” However, in this context, dialect may be the intended
meaning. These Jews heard about Jesus in their mother dialect. This was meant to be a confirming sign to them of the truthfulness
of the new message about God and its universal inclusion!
2:7,12 Notice all the different terms expressing high emotions in this context.
1. sunechō, “bewildered” (v. 6)
2. existēmi, “amazed” (v. 7)
3. thaumazō, “astonished” (v. 7)
4. diaporeō, “perplexed” (v. 12)
▣ “Why, are not all these who are speaking Galileans” This rhetorical question (expecting a “yes” answer) was asked because
of their northern accent (i.e., dialect, cf. Matt. 26:73). The word “why” reflects the Greek term idou (behold), used twenty three
times in Acts and Luke.
2:9 “Parthians, Medes, Elamites, and residents of Mesopotamia” All of these groups were from the Fertile Crescent
(Mesopotamia), where Abraham was called from (Ur of the Chaldees, cf. Gen. 11:28) and from where Israel and Judah had been
exiled (Assyrian, Babylonian).
▣ “Judea” Why is Judea listed between two other unrelated countries? Why is it listed without the article, which would be
grammatically correct? Why would it surprise people of Judea that Galileans spoke Aramaic? Because of these questions many
have that supposed an early scribal error has occurred and this term refers to another nation.
1. Tertullian, Augustine – Armenia
2. Jerome – Syria
3. Chrysostom, Erasmus – India
4. for several modern suggestions see Bruce M. Metzger, A Textual Commentary on the Greek New Testament, p. 293.
2:9-10 “Cappadocia, Pontus and Asia, Phrygia and Pamphylia” These were groups from modern Turkey.
2:10 “Egypt and the district of Libya around Cyrene” These were groups from North Africa.
▣ “from Rome” Jewish pilgrims who were converted on this occasion may have been the origin of the church in Rome.
▣ “proselytes” This refers to Gentile converts to Judaism who were required
1. to keep the Mosaic law
2. that males be circumcised
3. to baptize themselves before witnesses
4. when possible to offer a sacrifice in the Temple
They were present in Jerusalem because all Jewish males were required to attend the three major feast days annually (cf. Exodus
23 and Leviticus 23).
2:11 “Cretans” This was a large island in the Mediterranean close to Turkey. It may have stood as a collective term for all the
islands of the Aegean.
▣ “Arabs” This would refer to the descendants of Esau. There were numerous Arab tribes spread out across the southern Near
East. This list represented to Jewish people of the first century the entire known world. It may be a metaphor similar to the
seventy languages of the world as a Jewish symbol of all humanity (cf. Luke 10). This same idea is expressed in Deut. 32:8 in
the LXX.
2:12 These pilgrims recognized this special event as a sign of significance. Peter seizes the moment to answer their questions.
2:13 “They are full” This is a Periphrastic perfect passive indicative, which asserts that these disciples had drunk themselves
into a state of drunkenness and they remained intoxicated.
▣ “sweet wine” One explanation of the situation was that these followers of Jesus were drunk (cf. Eph. 5:18a). How did
drunkenness explain the linguistic abilities? I am sure there was also an atmosphere of excitement and joy.
SPECIAL TOPIC: BIBLICAL ATTITUDES TOWARD ALCOHOL AND ALCOHOLISM
I. Biblical Terms
A. Old Testament
1. Yayin – This is the general term for wine (BDB 406), which is used 141 times. The etymology is uncertain
because it is not from a Hebrew root. It always means fermented fruit juice, usually grape. Some typical passages
are Gen. 9:21; Exod. 29:40; Num. 15:5,10.
2. Tirosh – This is “new wine” (BDB 440). Because of climatic conditions of the Near East, fermentation started
as soon as six hours after extracting the juice. This term refers to wine in the process of fermenting. For some
typical passages see Deut. 12:17; 18:4; Isa. 62:8-9; Hos. 4:11.
3. Asis – This is obviously alcoholic beverages (“sweet wine,” BDB 779, e.g., Joel 1:5; Isa. 49:26).
4. Sekar – This is the term “strong drink” (BDB 1016). The Hebrew root is used in the term “drunk” or “drunkard.”
It had something added to it to make it more intoxicating. It is parallel to yayin (cf. Pro. 20:1; 31:6; Isa. 28:7).
B. New Testament
1. Oinos – the Greek equivalent of yayin
2. Neos oinos (new wine) – the Greek equivalent of tirosh (cf. Mark 2:22).
3. Gleuchos vinos (sweet wine, asis) – wine in the early stages of fermentation (cf. Acts 2:13).
II. Biblical Usage
A. Old Testament
1. Wine is a gift of God (Gen. 27:28; Ps. 104:14-15; Eccl. 9:7; Hos. 2:8-9; Joel 2:19,24; Amos 9:13; Zech. 10:7).
2. Wine is a part of a sacrificial offering (Exod. 29:40; Lev. 23:13; Num. 15:7,10; 28:14; Deut. 14:26; Jdgs. 9:13).
3. Wine is used as medicine (II Sam. 16:2; Pro. 31:6-7).
4. Wine can be a real problem (Noah – Gen. 9:21; Lot – Gen. 19:33,35; Nabal – I Sam. 25:36; Uriah – II Sam.
11:13; Amnon – II Sam. 13:28; Elah – I Kgs. 16:9; Benhadad – I Kgs. 20:12; Rulers – Amos 6:6; and Ladies –
Amos 4).
5. Wine can be abused (Pro. 20:1; 23:29-35; 31:4-5; Isa. 5:11,22; 19:14; 28:7-8; Hosea 4:11).
6. Wine was prohibited to certain groups (priests on duty, Lev. 10:9; Ezek. 44:21; Nazarites, Numbers 6; and rulers,
Pro. 31:4-5; Isa. 56:11-12; Hosea 7:5).
7. Wine is used in an eschatological setting (Amos 9:13; Joel 3:18; Zech. 9:17).
B. Interbiblical
1. Wine in moderation is very helpful (Ecclesiasticus 31:27-30).
2. The rabbis say, “Wine is the greatest of all medicine, where wine is lacking, then drugs are needed.” (BB 58b).
C. New Testament
1. Jesus changed a large quantity of water into wine (John 2:1-11).
2. Jesus drank wine (Matt. 11:18-19; Luke 7:33-34; 22:17ff).
3. Peter accused of drunkenness on “new wine” at Pentecost (Acts 2:13).
4. Wine can be used as medicine (Mark 15:23; Luke 10:34; I Tim. 5:23).
5. Leaders are not to be abusers. This does not mean total abstainers (I Tim. 3:3,8; Titus 1:7; 2:3; I Pet. 4:3).
6. Wine used in eschatological settings (Mathew. 22:1ff; Rev. 19:9).
7. Drunkenness is deplored (Matt. 24:49; Luke 12:45; 21:34; I Cor. 5:11-13; 6:10; Gal. 5:21; I Pet. 4:3; Rom. 13:13-14).
III. Theological Insight
A. Dialectical tension
1. Wine is the gift of God.
2. Drunkenness is a major problem.
3. Believers in some cultures must limit their freedoms for the sake of the gospel (Matt. 15:1-20; Mark 7:1- 23; I
Corinthians 8-10; Romans 14).
B. Tendency to go beyond given bounds
1. God is the source of all good things.
2. Fallen mankind has abused all of God’s gifts by taking them beyond God-given bounds.
C. Abuse is in us, not in things. There is nothing evil in the physical creation (cf. Mark 7:18-23; Rom. 14:14,20; I Cor.
10:25-26; I Tim. 4:4; Titus 1:15).
IV. First Century Jewish Culture and Fermentation
A. Fermentation begins very soon, approximately 6 hours after the grape is crushed.
B. Jewish tradition says that when a slight foam appeared on the surface (sign of fermentation), it is liable to the wine-tithe (Ma aseroth 1:7). It was called “new wine” or “sweet wine.”
C. The primary violent fermentation was complete after one week.
D. The secondary fermentation took about 40 days. At this state it is considered “aged wine” and could be offered on the
altar (Edhuyyoth 6:1).
E. Wine that had rested on its lees (old wine) was considered good, but had to be strained well before use.
F. Wine was considered to be properly aged usually after one year of fermentation. Three years was the longest period
of time that wine could be safely stored. It was called “old wine” and had to be diluted with water.
G. Only in the last 100 years with a sterile environment and chemical additives has fermentation been postponed. The
ancient world could not stop the natural process of fermentation.
V. Closing Statements
A. Be sure your experience, theology, and biblical interpretation do not depreciate Jesus and first century Jewish/Christian
culture! They were obviously not total-abstainers.
B. I am not advocating the social use of alcohol. However, many have overstated the Bible’s position on this subject and
now claim superior righteousness based on a cultural/denominational bias.
C. For me, Romans 14 and I Corinthians 8-10 have provided insight and guidelines based on love and respect for fellow
believers and the spread of the gospel in our cultures, not personal freedom or judgmental criticism. If the Bible is
the only source for faith and practice, then maybe we must all rethink this issue.
D. If we push total abstinence as God’s will, what do we imply about Jesus, as well as those modern cultures that regularly
use wine (e.g., Europe, Israel, Argentina)?
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 2: 14-21
14But Peter, taking his stand with the eleven, raised his voice and declared to them: “Men of Judea and all you who
live in Jerusalem, let this be known to you and give heed to my words. 15“For these men are not drunk, as you suppose,
for it is only the third hour of the day; 16but this is what was spoken of through the prophet Joel: 17‘And it shall be in
the last days,’ God says, ‘, ‘That I will pour forth of My Spirit on all mankind; And your sons and your
daughters shall prophesy, And your young men shall see visions, And your old men shall dream dreams;
18Even on My bondslaves, both men and women will in those days pour forth of My Spirit And they shall
prophesy. 19‘And I will grant wonders in the sky above And signs on the earth below, Blood, and fire, and
vapor of smoke. 20‘The sun will be turned into darkness And the moon into blood, Before the great and
glorious day of the Lord shall come. 21‘And it shall be that everyone who calls on the name of the Lord
will be saved.’
2:14 “Peter” Just think, of all the disciples, Peter was the one to preach the first Christian sermon! The one who denied knowing
Jesus three times (cf. Luke 23)! Peter’s change from cowardice and denial to boldness and spiritual insight is another evidence
that the age of the Spirit had dawned with life-changing power. This is his first recorded sermon in Acts. It shows us the content
and emphasis of the preaching of the Apostles. These apostolic sermons form an important part of Acts.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE KERYGMA OF THE EARLY CHURCH
A. The promises by God made in the Old Testament have now been fulfilled with the coming of Jesus the Messiah (Acts
2:30-31; 3:19,24; 10:43; 26:6-7,22; Rom. 1:2-4; I Tim. 3:16; Heb. 1:1-2; I Peter 1:10-12; 2 Peter 1:18-19).
B. Jesus was anointed as Messiah by God at His baptism (Acts 10:38).
C. Jesus began His ministry in Galilee after His baptism (Acts 10:37).
D. His ministry was characterized by doing good and performing mighty works by means of the power of God (Mark
10:45; Acts 2:22; 10:38).
E. The Messiah was crucified according to the eternal purpose of God (Mark 10:45; John 3:16; Acts 2:23; 3:13-15,18;
4:11; 10:39; 26:23; Rom. 8:34; I Cor. 1:17-18; 15:3; Gal. 1:4; Heb. 1:3; I Peter 1:2,19; 3:18; I John 4:10).
F. He was raised from the dead and appeared to His disciples (Acts 2:24,31-32; 3:15,26; 10:40-41; 17:31; 26:23; Rom.
8:34; 10:9; I Cor. 15:4-7,12ff; I Thess. 1:10; I Tim. 3:16; I Peter 1:2; 3:18,21).
G. Jesus was exalted by God and given the name “Lord” (Acts 2:25-29,33-36; 3:13; 10:36; Rom. 8:34; 10:9; I Tim. 3:16;
Heb. 1:3; I Peter 3:22).
H. He gave the Holy Spirit to form the new community of God (Acts 1:8; 2:14-18,38-39; 10:44-47; I Peter 1:12).
I. He will come again for judgment and the restoration of all things (Acts 3:20-21; 10:42; 17:31; I Cor. 15:20-28; I Thess.
1:10).
J. All who hear the message should repent and be baptized (Acts 2:21,38; 3:19; 10:43,47-48; 17:30; 26:20; Rom. 1:17;
10:9; I Peter 3:21).
This schema served as the essential proclamation of the early church, though different authors of the New Testament may
leave out a portion or emphasize other particulars in their preaching. The entire Gospel of Mark closely follows the Petrine aspect
of the kerygma. Mark is traditionally seen as structuring Peter’s sermons, preached in Rome, into a written Gospel. Both Matthew
and Luke follow Mark’s basic structure.
▣ “with the eleven” This shows two things: (1) Peter is the spokesman, but still part of the Apostolic group. He does not speak
alone or on his own authority. The Spirit speaks uniquely through this whole group of called, eyewitnesses and (2) Matthias,
though we know nothing about his ministry, has officially become part of the Apostolic group.
▣ “Men of Judea and all who live in Jerusalem” The people addressed here seem to be different from the pilgrims delineated
by nationality in vv. 7-11.
▣ “Let this be known to you and give heed” These are both imperatives. The first is a present active and the second an
aorist middle (deponent). Peter wants their undivided attention.
This phrase is apparently a Semitic idiom. It is used twice to introduce Peter’s sermons (cf. 2:14; 4:10) and twice with Paul
(cf. 13:38; 28:28). Luke was a Gentile convert as an adult. This vestige of Semitic idioms shows that Luke does not create the
sermons in Acts for his own theological purposes, but faithfully summarizes his sources.
2:15 “these men are not drunk” Peter, responding to the charge in v. 13, says it was too early for Orthodox Jews to drink wine.
This follows the rabbinical interpretation of Exod. 16:8 (cf. E. M. Blaiklock, Tyndale NT Commentary Series, Acts, p. 58).
▣ “third hour” This would have been 9:00 a.m. It was the time of the daily morning sacrifice in the Temple. It had become
a special prayer time for Jews. The “third hour” is a Jewish time indicator. New Testament authors (esp. John) use both Jewish
and Roman time indicators.
2:16 “this is what was spoken of through the prophet Joel” This is a quote from Joel 2:28-32 from the Septuagint. Jesus
Himself may have been the source of identifying this prophetic passage as being fulfilled (cf. Luke 24:27,45).
2:17 “in the last days” This phrase is Luke’s alteration of the Septuagint’s text and should not be in capital letters. In the OT
this phrase referred to the end of time and the coming of the Messianic Age. In the NT the “last days” referred to the overlapping
of the two Jewish ages. The New Age began at Jesus’ incarnation in Bethlehem and will last until His Second Coming. We live
in the tension between “the already” and “the not yet” of the Kingdom of God. See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THIS AGE AND THE AGE TO COME
The OT prophets viewed the future as an extension of the present. For them the future will be a restoration of geographical
Israel. However, even they saw it as a new day (cf. Isa. 65:17; 66:22). With the continued willful rejection of YHWH by the
descendants of Abraham (even after the exile) a new paradigm developed in Jewish intertestamental apocalyptic literature (i.e.,
I Enoch, IV Ezra, II Baruch). These writings begin to distinguish between two ages: a current evil age dominated by Satan and
a coming age of righteousness dominated by the Spirit and inaugurated by the Messiah (often a dynamic warrior).
In this area of theology (eschatology) there is an obvious development. Theologians call this “progressive revelation.” The
NT affirms this new cosmic reality of two ages (i.e., a temporal dualism).
Jesus Paul Hebrews
Matthew 12:32 Romans 12:2 1:2
Mark 10:30 I Cor. 1:20; 2:6,8; 3:18 6:5
Luke 16:8 II Cor. 4:4 11:3
Luke 18:30 Galatians 1:4
Luke 20:34-35 Eph. 1:21; 2:2,7; 6:12
I Timothy 6:17
II Timothy 4:10
Titus 2:12
In NT theology these two Jewish ages have been overlapped because of the unexpected and overlooked predictions of the
two comings of the Messiah. The incarnation of Jesus fulfilled most of the OT prophecies of the inauguration of the new age (Dan.
2:44-45). However, the OT also saw His coming as Judge and Conqueror, yet He came at first as the Suffering Servant (cf. Isaiah
53; Zech. 12:10), humble and meek (cf. Zechariah 9:9). He will return in power just as the OT predicted (cf. Revelation 19). This
two-stage fulfillment caused the Kingdom to be present (inaugurated), but future (not fully consummated). This is the NT tension
of the already, but not yet!
▣ “God says” Codex Bezae, MS D, has kurios (Lord). Does Kurios refer to OT YHWH or to Jesus, the Messiah? It is surely
possible that Theos (God) was a scribal attempt to clarify the speaker.
▣ “I will pour forth My Spirit on all mankind” Note the universal element (cf. v. 39). All the old traditional barriers
are down in Christ (cf. I Cor. 12:13; Gal. 3:28; Eph. 3:6; Col. 3:11). Although no Jew-Gentile distinction is mentioned in Joel
2, notice v. 38, which implies no distinctions. YHWH is sharing His Spirit with all humans made in His image (literally, “all
flesh”), which is asserted in Gen. 1:26-27.
▣ “sons and your daughters shall prophesy. . .both men and women, I will pour forth My Spirit” This may be
a specific fulfillment of Num. 11:29. Note that there is no gender distinction.
SPECIAL TOPIC: WOMEN IN THE BIBLE
I. The Old Testament
A. Culturally women were considered property
1. included in list of property (Exodus 20:17)
2. treatment of slave women (Exodus 21:7-11)
3. women’s vows annullable by socially responsible male (Numbers 30)
4. women as spoils of war (Deuteronomy 20:10-14; 21:10-14)
B. Practically there was a mutuality
1. male and female made in God’s image (Genesis 1:26-27)
2. honor father and mother (Exodus 20:12 [Deut. 5:16])
3. reverence mother and father (Leviticus 19:3; 20:9)
4. men and women could be Nazirites (Numbers 6:1-2)
5. daughters have right of inheritance (Numbers 27:1-11)
6. part of covenant people (Deuteronomy 29:10-12)
7. observe teaching of father and mother (Proverbs 1:8; 6:20)
8. sons and daughters of Heman (Levite family) led music in Temple (I Chronicles 25:5-6)
9. sons and daughters will prophesy in new age (Joel 2:28-29)
C. Women were in leadership roles
1. Moses’ sister, Miriam, called a prophetess (Exodus 15:20-21 also note Micah 6:4)
2. women gifted by God to weave material for the Tabernacle (Exodus 35:25-26)
3. a married woman, Deborah, also a prophetess (cf. Jdgs. 4:4), led all the tribes (Judges 4:4-5; 5:7)
4. Huldah was a prophetess whom King Josiah invoked to read and interpret the newly-found “Book of the Law”
(II Kings 22:14; II Chr. 34:22-27)
5. Queen Esther, a godly woman, saved Jews in Persia
II. The New Testament
A. Culturally women in both Judaism and the Greco-Roman world were second class citizens with few rights or privileges
(the exception was Macedonia).
B. Women in leadership roles
1. Elizabeth and Mary, godly women available to God (Luke 1-2)
2. Anna, a prophetess serving at the Temple (Luke 2:36)
3. Lydia, believer and leader of a house church (Acts 16:14,40)
4. Philip’s four virgin daughters were prophetesses (Acts 21:8-9)
5. Phoebe, deaconess of church at Cenchrea (Rom. 16:1)
6. Prisca (Priscilla), Paul’s fellow-worker and teacher of Apollos (Acts 18:26; Rom. 16:3)
7. Mary, Tryphaena, Tryphosa, Persis, Julia, Nereus’ sister, several women co-workers of Paul (Rom. 16:6-16)
8. Junia (KJV), possibly a woman apostle (Rom. 16:7)
9. Euodia and Syntyche, co-workers with Paul (Phil. 4:2-3)
III. How does a modern believer balance the divergent biblical examples?
A. How does one determine historical or cultural truths, which apply only to the original context, from eternal truths valid
for all churches, all believers of all ages?
1. We must take the intent of the original inspired author very seriously. The Bible is the Word of God and the only
source for faith and practice.
2. We must deal with the obviously historically-conditioned inspired texts.
a. the cultus (i.e., ritual and liturgy) of Israel (cf. Acts 15; Gal. 3)
b. first century Judaism
c. Paul’s obviously historically-conditioned statements in I Corinthians
(1) the legal system of pagan Rome (I Cor. 6)
(2) remaining a slave (I Cor. 7:20-24)
(3) celibacy (I Cor. 7:1-35)
(4) virgins (I Cor. 7:36-38)
(5) food sacrificed to an idol (I Cor. 8; 10:23-33)
(6) unworthy actions at Lord’s Supper (I Cor. 11)
3. God fully and clearly revealed Himself to a particular culture, a particular day. We must take seriously the
revelation, but not every aspect of its historical accommodation. The Word of God was written in human words,
addressed to a particular culture at a particular time.
B. Biblical interpretation must seek the original author’s intent. What was he saying to his day? This is foundational and
crucial for proper interpretation. But then we must apply this to our own day. Now, here is the problem with women
in leadership (the real interpretive problem may be defining the term. Were there more ministries than pastors who were
seen as leadership? Were deaconesses or prophetesses seen as leaders?) It is quite clear that Paul, in I Cor. 14:34-35
and I Tim. 2:9-15, is asserting that women should not take the lead in public worship! But how do I apply that today?
I do not want Paul’s culture or my culture to silence God’s Word and will. Possibly Paul’s day was too limiting, but
also my day may be too open. I feel so uncomfortable saying that Paul’s words and teachings are conditional, first
century, local situational truths. Who am I that I should let my mind or my culture negate an inspired author?!
However, what do I do when there are biblical examples of women leaders (even in Paul’s writings, cf. Romans
16)? A good example of this is Paul’s discussion of public worship in
I Corinthians 11-14. In 11:5 he seems to allow women’s preaching and praying in public worship
with their heads covered, yet in 14:34-35 he demands they remain silent! There were deaconesses (cf. Rom. 16:1) and
prophetesses (cf. Acts 21:9). It is this diversity that allows me freedom to identify Paul’s comments (as relates to
restrictions on women) as limited to first century Corinth and Ephesus. In both churches there were problems with
women exercising their newly-found freedom (cf. Bruce Winter, After Paul Left Corinth), which could have caused
difficulty for the church in reaching their society for Christ. Their freedom had to be limited so that the gospel could
be more effective.
My day is just the opposite of Paul’s. In my day the gospel might be limited if articulate, trained women are not
allowed to share the gospel, not allowed to lead! What is the ultimate goal of public worship? Is it not evangelism and
discipleship? Can God be honored and pleased with women leaders? The Bible as a whole seems to say “yes”!
I want to yield to Paul; my theology is primarily Pauline. I do not want to be overly influenced or manipulated
by modern feminism! However, I feel the church has been slow to respond to obvious biblical truths, like the
inappropriateness of slavery, racism, bigotry, and sexism. It has also been slow to respond appropriately to the abuse
of women in the modern world. God in Christ set free the slave and the woman. I dare not let a culture-bound text
reshackle them.
One more point: as an interpreter I know that Corinth was a very disrupted church. The charismatic gifts were
prized and flaunted. Women may have been caught up in this. I also believe that Ephesus was being affected by false
teachers who were taking advantage of women and using them as surrogate speakers in the house churches of Ephesus.
C. Suggestions for further reading
How to Read the Bible For All Its Worth by Gordon Fee and Doug Stuart (pp. 61-77)
Gospel and Spirit: Issues in New Testament Hermeneutics by Gordon Fee
Hard Sayings of the Bible by Walter C. Kaiser, Peter H. Davids, F. F. Bruce, and Manfred T. Branch (pp. 613-616;
665-667)
▣ “prophecy” There are at least two ways to understand this term: (1) in the Corinthian letters this term refers to sharing or
proclaiming the gospel (cf. 14:1; Acts 2:17) (2) the book of Acts mentions prophets (cf. 12:27; 13:1; 15:32; 22:10, even
prophetesses, 21:9), who predict the future (see Special Topic at 11:27).
The problem with this term is, how does the NT gift of prophecy relate to OT prophets? In the OT prophets are the writers
of Scripture. In the NT this task is given to the original twelve Apostles and their helpers. As the term “apostle” is retained as
an ongoing gift (cf. Eph. 4:11) but with a changed tasks after the death of the Twelve, so too, the office of prophet. Inspiration
has ceased, there is no further inspired Scripture (cf. Jude 3,20). New Testament prophets’ primary task is the proclamation of
the gospel, but also a different task, possibly how to apply NT truths to current situations and needs.
▣ “young men. . .old men” Note that there is no age distinction.
2:18 “even on my bondslaves” Notice that there is no socioeconomic discrimination. Peter has added the term “prophesy”
to Joel’s prophecy. It is not in the Masoretic Hebrew text or the Greek Septuagint, but it is implied from v. 17.
As Luke 24 (vv. 3,6,12,17,32,36,40,51) has several textual variants, so too, Acts (i.e., 2:11,18,37,44). These variants are
often related to a shorter text found in MS D (Bezae from the 5th century) and in a few Old Latin versions (itd from the 5th century).
Usually this western family of Greek manuscripts adds phrases, but in Luke/Acts it has the shorter readings. Most English
translations include all the Alexandrian family of manuscripts’ longer version.
See Introduction to Acts, “Opening Statements,” E.
2:19-20 This is apocalyptic language, which is obvious because Peter asserts that this was fulfilled, yet none of these specific
natural phenomena occurred, except possibly the darkness while Jesus was on the cross. It speaks in figurative language of the
coming of the Creator and Judge. In the OT His comings may be for blessing or judgment. All creation convulses at His approach
(cf. Isa. 13:6ff and Amos 5:18-20). In the OT prophecy there is no obvious distinction between the Incarnation (first coming) and
the Parousia (second coming). The Jews were expecting only one coming and that of a powerful Judge/Deliverer. A very helpful
book on apocalyptic language is D. Brent Sandy, Plowshares and Pruning Hooks: Rethinking Prophetic and Apocalyptic
Language.
SPECIAL TOPIC: APOCALYPTIC LITERATURE
(This special topic is taken from my commentary on Revelation.)
Revelation is a uniquely Jewish literary genre, apocalyptic. It was often used in tension-filled times to express the conviction
that God was in control of history and would bring deliverance to His people. This type of literature is characterized by
1. a strong sense of the universal sovereignty of God (monotheism and determinism)
2. a struggle between good and evil, this age and the age to come (dualism)
3. use of secret code words (usually from the OT or intertestamental Jewish apocalyptic literature)
4. use of colors, numbers, animals, sometimes animals/humans
5. use of angelic mediation by means of visions and dreams, but usually through angelic mediation
6. primarily focuses on the end-time (new age)
7. use of a fixed set of symbols, not reality, to communicate the end-time message
8. Some examples of this type of genre are
a. Old Testament
(1) Isaiah 24-27, 56-66
(2) Ezekiel 37-48
(3) Daniel 7-12
(4) Joel 2:28-3:21
(5) Zechariah 1-6, 12-14
b. New Testament
(1) Matthew 24, Mark 13, Luke 21, and I Corinthians 15 (in some ways)
(2) II Thessalonians 2 (in most ways)
(3) Revelation (chapters 4-22)
c. non-canonical (taken from D. S. Russell, The Method and Message of Jewish Apocalyptic, pp. 37-38)
(1) I Enoch, II Enoch (the Secrets of Enoch)
(2) The Book of Jubilees
(3) The Sibylline Oracles III, IV, V
(4) The Testament of the Twelve Patriarchs
(5) The Psalms of Solomon
(6) The Assumption of Moses
(7) The Martyrdom of Isaiah
(8) The Apocalypse of Moses (Life of Adam and Eve)
(9) The Apocalypse of Abraham
(10) The Testament of Abraham
(11) II Esdras (IV Esdras)
(12) Baruch II, III
9. There is a sense of duality in this genre. It sees reality as a series of dualisms, contrasts, or tensions (so common in
John’s writings) between:
a. heaven – earth
b. evil age (evil men and evil angels) – new age of righteousness (godly men and godly angels)
c. current existence – future existence
All of these are moving toward a consummation brought about by God. This is not the world God intended it to be, but He
is continuing to play, work, and project His will for a restoration of the intimate fellowship begun in the Garden of Eden. The
Christ event is the watershed of God’s plan, but the two comings have brought about the current dualisms.
2:20 “the Great and Glorious Day of the Lord” The term “glorious” is from the same root as epiphaneia, which is often used
of Jesus’ Second Coming (cf. I Tim. 6:14; II Tim. 4:1; Titus 2:13). See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE SECOND COMING
This is literally “until the parousia,” which means “presence,” and was used of a royal visit. The other NT terms used for
the Second Coming are (1) epiphaneia, “face to face appearing”; (2) apokalupis, “unveiling”; and (3) “the Day of the Lord” and
the variations of this phrase.
The NT as a whole is written within the world-view of the OT, which asserted
1. a current evil, rebellious age
2. a coming new age of righteousness
3. this would be brought about by the Spirit’s agency through the work of the Messiah (Anointed One)
The theological assumption of progressive revelation is required because the NT authors slightly modify Israel’s expectation.
Instead of a military, nationalistic-focused (Israel) coming of the Messiah, there are two comings. The first coming was the
incarnation of deity in the conception and birth of Jesus of Nazareth. He came as the non-military, non-judicial “suffering servant”
of Isaiah 53; also the mild rider on the colt of a donkey (not a war horse or kingly mule), of Zech. 9:9. The first coming
inaugurated the New Messianic Age, the Kingdom of God on earth. In one sense the Kingdom is here, but of course, in another
it is still far off. It is this tension between the two comings of the Messiah which, in a sense, is the over-lapping of the two Jewish
ages that was unseen, or at least unclear, from the OT. In reality, this dual coming emphasizes YHWH’s commitment to redeem
all humanity (cf. Gen. 3:15; 12:3; Exod. 19:5 and the preaching of the prophets, especially Isaiah and Jonah).
The church is not waiting for the fulfillment of OT prophecy because most prophecies refer to the first coming (cf. How to
Read the Bible For All Its Worth, pp. 165-166). What believers do anticipate is the glorious coming of the resurrected King of
Kings and Lord of Lords, the expected historical fulfillment of the new age of righteousness on earth as it is in heaven (cf. Matt.
6:10). The OT presentations were not inaccurate, but incomplete. He will come again just as the prophets predicted, in the power
and authority of YHWH.
The Second Coming is not a biblical term, but the concept forms the world-view and framework of the entire NT. God will
set it all straight. Fellowship between God and mankind made in His image will be restored. Evil will be judged and removed.
God’s purposes will not, cannot, fail!
2:21 “everyone” Here is the universal element again (cf. vv. 17 and 39). Jesus died for the sin/sins of the entire world (cf. John
1:12; 3:16; 4:42; I Tim. 2:4; Titus 2:11; II Pet. 3:9; I John 2:1; 4:14). Notice the Spirit is poured on all mankind (cf. v. 17).
▣ “who calls” This is an aorist middle subjunctive. Human response is part of God’s plan for salvation (cf. Joel 2:32; John
1:12, 3:16; and Romans 10:9-13). Individual human beings are called (cf. 2:39) on to repent (cf. 2:38) and believe the gospel,
and to enter into a personal relationship with God through Christ (cf. 3:16,19; 20:21; Mark 1:15). Jesus died for the whole world;
the mystery is why some respond to the Spirit’s wooing (cf. John 6:44,65) and some do not (cf. II Cor. 4:4).
▣ “on the name of the Lord” This refers to the character of Jesus or teachings about Him. It has both the personal and
doctrinal element.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE NAME OF THE LORD
This was a common NT phrase for the personal presence and active power of the Triune God in the church. It was not a
magical formula, but an appeal to God’s character.
Often this phrase refers to Jesus as Lord (cf. Phil. 2:11)
1. at the profession of one’s faith in Jesus at baptism (cf. Rom. 10:9-13; Acts 2:38; 8:12,16; 10:48; 19:5; 22:16; I Cor.
1:13,15; James 2:7)
2. at an exorcism (cf. Matt. 7:22; Mark 9:38; Luke 9:49; 10:17; Acts 19:13)
3. at a healing (cf. Acts 3:6,16; 4:10; 9:34; James 5:14)
4. at an act of ministry (cf. Matt. 10:42; 18:5; Luke 9:48)
5. at the time of church discipline (cf. Matt. 18:15-20)
6. during preaching to Gentiles (cf. Luke 24:47; Acts 9:15; 15:17; Rom. 1:5)
7. in prayer (cf. John 14:13-14; 15:2,16; 16:23; I Cor. 1:2)
8. a way of referring to Christianity (cf. Acts 26:9; I Cor. 1:10; II Tim. 2:19; James 2:7; I Pet. 4:14)
Whatever we do as proclaimers, ministers, helpers, healers, exorcists, etc., we do in His character, His power, His
provisions—in His Name!
▣ “will be saved” In this context, this refers to spiritual salvation, while in Joel it probably meant physical deliverance from
God’s wrath (cf. v. 40). The term “saved” is used in the OT of physical deliverance (cf. Matt. 9:22; Mark 6:56; James 5:14,20).
However, in the NT it was used metaphorically of spiritual salvation or deliverance from God’s wrath (ex. James 1:21; 2:14; 4:12).
God’s heart beats for the salvation of all men and women made in His image (cf. Gen. 1:26-27); made for fellowship!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 2:22-28
22“Men of Israel, listen to these words: Jesus the Nazarene, a man attested to you by God with miracles and wonders
and signs which God performed through Him in your midst, just as you yourselves know —23this Man, delivered over by
the predetermined plan and foreknowledge of God, you nailed to a cross by the hands of godless men and put Him to
death. 24“But God raised Him up again, putting an end to the agony of death, since it was impossible for Him to be held
in its power. 25“For David says of Him, ‘I saw the Lord always in my presence; For He is at my right hand, so that
I will not be shaken. 26‘Therefore my heart was glad and my tongue exulted; Moreover my flesh also will
live in hope; 27Because You will not abandon my soul to Hades, Nor allow Your Holy One to undergo decay.
28‘You have made known to me the ways of life; You will make me full of gladness with Your presence.’
2:22 “Men of Israel” These hearers were eyewitnesses to the events of the last week of Jesus’ earthly life. They had first-hand
knowledge of what Peter was talking about. Those who had spiritual insight responded to the gospel, about three thousand to the
first sermon (cf. v. 41).
▣ “listen” This is an aorist active imperative. The Spirit’s physical manifestation got their attention; now comes the gospel
message.
▣ “Jesus the Nazarene” It is often assumed that this is just a parallel to “Jesus of Nazareth.” But, this is a rather unusual way
to express this. It is just possible that this phrase reflects the Messianic title, “the Branch” (BDB 666, cf. Isa. 4:2; 6:13; 11:1,10;
14:19; 53:2; Jer. 23:5; 33:15-16; Zech. 3:8; 6:12-13). The Hebrew term for “branch” is nezer.
SPECIAL TOPIC: JESUS THE NAZARENE
There are several different Greek terms that the NT uses to speak of Jesus.
A. NT Terms
1. Nazareth – the city in Galilee (cf. Luke 1:26; 2:4,39,51; 4:16; Acts 10:38). This city is not mentioned in
contemporary sources, but has been found in later inscriptions.
For Jesus to be from Nazareth was not a compliment (cf. John 1:46). The sign over Jesus’ cross which
included this place name was a sign of Jewish contempt.
2. Nazarēnos – seems to also refer to a geographical location (cf. Luke 4:34; 24:19).
3. Nazōraios – may refer to a city, but could also be a play on the Hebrew Messianic term “Branch” (netzer, BDB
666 [and its related terms], cf. Isa. 4:2; 11:1; 53:2; Jer. 23:5 [BDB 855]; 33:15; Zech. 3:8; 6:12; in the NT, Rev.
22:16). Luke uses this of Jesus in 18:37 and Acts 2:22; 3:6; 4:10; 6:14; 22:8; 24:5; 26:9.
4. Related to #3 nāzir (BDB 634), which means “consecrated one by means of a vow.”
B. Historical usages outside the NT.
1. It denoted a Jewish (pre-Christian) heretical group (Aramaic nāsōrayyā).
2. It was used in Jewish circles to describe believers in Christ (cf. Acts 24:5,14; 28:22, nosri).
3. It became the regular term to denote believers in the Syrian (Aramaic) churches. “Christian” was used in the
Greek churches to denote believers.
4. Sometime after the fall of Jerusalem, the Pharisees reorganized at Jamnia and instigated a formal separation
between the synagogue and the church. An example of the type of curse formulas against Christians is found in
“the Eighteen Benedictions” from Berakoth 28b-29a, which calls the believers “Nazarenes.”
“May the Nazarenes and heretics disappear in a moment; they shall be erased from the book of life and
not be written with the faithful.”
5. It was used by Justin Martyr, Dial. 126:1, who used Isaiah’s netzer of Jesus.
C. Author’s opinion
I am surprised by so many spellings of the term, although I know this is not unheard of in the OT as “Joshua” has
several different spellings in Hebrew. The following items cause me to remain uncertain as to its precise meaning:
1. the close association with the Messianic term “Branch” (netzer) or the similar term nāzir (one consecrated by
means of a vow)
2. the negative connotation of Galilee
3. little or no contemporary attestation to the city of Nazareth in Galilee
4. it coming from the mouth of a demon in an eschatological sense (i.e., “Have you come to destroy us?”).
For a full bibliography of studies of this word group, see Colin Brown (ed.), New International Dictionary of New
Testament Theology, vol. 2, p. 346 or Raymond E. Brown, Birth, pp. 209-213, 223-225.
▣ “a man attested to you by God” Jesus is surely human (i.e., v. 23; Rom. 1:3), as well as divine (cf. I John 4:1-3).
This is a perfect passive participle. The term means “shown by demonstration.” God has clearly and repeatedly revealed
Himself in Jesus’ words, deeds, and lifestyle. These Jerusalem hearers had seen and heard!
▣ “with miracles and wonders and signs” These hearers were eyewitnesses of all that Jesus did in Jerusalem the last week of
His life.
The term “wonders” (teras) meant an unusual sign, usually occurring in the heavens, like vv. 19-20.
The term “signs” (sēmeion) denotes a special event which conveys meaning or significance. This is a key term in John’s
Gospel (seven special signs, cf. 2:1-11; 4:46-54; 5:1-18; 6:1-15,16-21; 9:1-41; 11:1-57). Signs are not always seen in a positive
light (cf. John 2:18; 4:48; 6:2). Here it is used as a series of power manifestations which reveal that the new age of the Spirit has
begun!
It is interesting that Peter does not spend any time in the first sermon (at least the summary in Acts 2) about Jesus’ early life
and teachings. The fulfillment of OT prophecy, His predetermined sacrificial death, and His glorious resurrection are the main
points.
2:23 “This man” This may be an idiom of contempt (cf. 5:28; 6:13; Luke 23:14; John 9:16; 18:29), but in Acts 23:9 and 20:31-32
it is not a negative idiom. Again the humanity of Jesus is emphasized (cf. v. 22)
▣ “delivered over” This term (ekdotos) is found only here in the NT.
▣
NASB “the predetermined plan”
NKJV “the determined counsel”
NRSV “the definite plan”
TEV “God’s own plan”
NJB “the deliberate intention”
This is the term horizō in its perfect passive participle form. Its basic meaning is to determine, to appoint, or to fix. In
the OT it is used of setting boundaries of land or desires. Luke uses it often (cf. Luke 22:22; Acts 2:23; 10:42; 11:29; 17:26,31).
The cross was not a surprise to God, but had always been His chosen mechanism (i.e., sacrificial system of Leviticus 1-7) for
bringing redemption to rebellious humanity (cf. Gen. 3:15; Isa. 53:10; Mark 10:45; II Cor. 5:21).
Jesus’ death was no accident. It was the eternal, redemptive plan of God (cf. Luke 22:22; Acts 3:18; 4:28; 13:29; 26:22-23).
Jesus came to die (cf. Mark. 10:45)! The cross was no accident!
▣ “foreknowledge of God” This is the term prognosis (to know before), used only here and in I Pet. 1:2. This concept of God’s
knowing all of human history is difficult for us to reconcile with human free will. God is an eternal, spiritual being who is not
limited by temporal sequence. Although He controls and shapes history, humans are responsible for their motives and acts.
Foreknowledge does not affect God’s love and election. If so, then it would be conditional on future human effort and merit. God
is sovereign and He has chosen that His Covenant followers have some freedom of choice in responding to Him (cf. Rom. 8:29;
I Pet. 1:20).
There are two extremes in this area of theology: (1) freedom pushed too far: some say God does not know the future choices
and actions of humans (Open Theism, which is a philosophical extension of Process Thought) and (2) sovereignty pushed too far,
which becomes God choosing some to heaven and some to hell (supralapsarianism, double-edged Calvinism). I prefer Psalm 139!
▣ “you” Peter asserts the guilt and duplicity for Jesus’ death to these Jerusalem hearers (cf. 3:13-15; 4:10; 5:30; 10:39; 13:27,28).
They were not part of this rabble that called for His crucifixion; they were not members of the Sanhedrin that brought Him to
Pilate; they were not Roman officials or soldiers who crucified Him, but they are responsible, as we are responsible. Human sin
and rebellion forced His death!
▣ “nailed to a cross” Literally this is the term “fastening” (prospēgnumi). It is used only here in the NT. It implies both a nailing
and a tying to a cross. In 5:30 the same process was described as “hanging on a tree.” The Jewish leaders did not want Jesus
stoned for blasphemy as Stephen later was (cf. Acts 7), but they wanted Him crucified (Louw and Nida say this hapax legomenon
may be equivalent to stauroō, crucify, [p. 237 footnote 9]). This was probably connected to the curse of Deut. 21:23. Originally
this curse related to public impaling and improper burial, but by Jesus’ day the rabbis had linked it to crucifixion. Jesus bore the
curse of the OT law for all believers (cf. Gal. 3:13; Col. 2:14).
▣ “godless men” Literally this is “lawless men” and refers to the Romans.
2:24 “God raised Him” The NT affirms that all three persons of the Trinity were active in Jesus’ resurrection:
1. the Spirit (cf. Rom. 8:11)
2. the Son (cf. John 2:19-22; 10:17-18)
3. and most frequently the Father (cf. Acts 2:24,32; 3:15,26; 4:10; 5:30; 10:40; 13:30,33,34,37; 17:31; Rom. 6:4,9)
The Father’s actions were confirmation of His acceptance of Jesus’ life, death, and teachings. This was a major aspect of the early
preaching of the Apostles. See Special Topic: The Kerygma at 2:14.
▣ “putting an end to the agony of death” This term can mean (1) literally, birth pains (Classical Greek, cf. Rom. 8:22) (2)
metaphorically the problems before the Second Coming (cf. Matt. 24:8; Mark 13:8; I Thess. 5:3). Possibly it reflects the Hebrew
terms “snare” or “noose” in Ps. 18:4-5 and 116:3, which were OT metaphors of judgment (cf. Isa. 13:6-8; Jer. 4:31).
▣ “since it was impossible for Him to be held in its power” John 20:9 also links Jesus’ resurrection to OT prophecy (cf. vv.
25-28). Jesus went to Hades for a purpose (cf. I Pet. 3:19; 4:6). When He left He took the righteous believers with Him (cf. II
Cor. 5:6,8)!
2:25 “For David says of Him” This is a quote from Ps. 16:8-11. Peter is asserting that Psalm 16 is Messianic (as does Paul in
13:36; these are the only two quotes of Psalm 16 in the NT) and that it refers directly to Jesus. Jesus’ resurrection is the Psalmists
hope and the NT believer’s hope.
2:26 “hope” This term is not used in the Gospels, but is used in Acts to describe the faith of believers in the future consummation
of the gospel promises (cf. 23:6; 24:15; 26:6,7; 28:20). It is used often in Paul’s writing, but in several senses connected to the
eternal redemptive plan of God. See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: HOPE
Paul used this term often in several different but related senses. Often it was associated with the consummation of the
believer’s faith (e.g., I Tim. 1:1). This can be expressed as glory, eternal life, ultimate salvation, Second Coming, etc. The
consummation is certain, but the time element is future and unknown. It was often associated with “faith” and “love” (cf. I Cor.
13:13; I Thess. 1:3; II Thess. 2:16). A partial list of some of Paul’s uses are:
1. The Second Coming, Gal. 5:5; Eph. 1:18; 4:4; Titus 2:13
2. Jesus is our hope, I Tim. 1:1
3. The believer to be presented to God, Col. 1:22-23; I Thess. 2:19
4. Hope is laid up in heaven, Col. 1:5
5. Trust in the gospel, Col. 1:23; I Thess. 2:19
6. Ultimate salvation, Col. 1:5; I Thess. 4:13; 5:8
7. The glory of God, Rom. 5:2, II Cor. 3:12; Col. 1:27
8. The salvation of the Gentiles by Christ, Col. 1:27
9. Assurance of salvation, I Thess. 5:8
10. Eternal life, Titus 1:2; 3:7
11. Results of Christian maturity, Rom. 5:2-5
12. Redemption of all creation, Rom. 8:20-22
13. Adoption’s consummation, Rom. 8:23-25
14. Title for God, Rom. 15:13
15. Paul’s desire for believers, II Cor. 1:7
16. OT as a guide to NT believers, Rom. 15:4
2:27 “hades” This is the Greek term for the holding place of the dead. It is equivalent to the Hebrew term Sheol in the OT. In
the OT the afterlife was described as a conscious existence with one’s family, but there was no joy or fellowship. Only the
progressive revelation of the NT more clearly defined the afterlife (i.e., heaven and hell).
SPECIAL TOPIC: WHERE ARE THE DEAD?
I. Old Testament
A. All humans go to Sheol (etymology uncertain, BDB 1066), which is a way of referring to death or the grave, mostly
in Wisdom Literature and Isaiah. In the OT it was a shadowy, conscious, but joyless existence (cf. Job 10:21-22;
38:17)
B. Sheol characterized
1. associated with God’s judgment (fire), Deut. 32:22
2. associated with punishment even before Judgment Day, Ps. 18:4-5
3. associated with abaddon (destruction), in which God is also present, Job 26:6; Ps. 139:8; Amos 9:2
4. associated with “the Pit” (grave), Ps.16:10; Isa. 14:15; Ezek. 31:15-17
5. wicked descend alive into Sheol, Num. 16:30,33; Ps. 55:15
6. personified often as an animal with a large mouth, Num. 16:30; Isa. 5:14; Hab. 2:5
7. people there called Repha’im (i.e., “spirits of the dead”), Isa. 14:9-11)
II. New Testament
A. The Hebrew Sheol is translated by the Greek Hades (the unseen world)
B. Hades characterized
1. refers to death, Matt. 16:18
2. linked to death, Rev. 1:18; 6:8; 20:13-14
3. often analogous to the place of permanent punishment (Gehenna), Matt. 11:23 (OT quote); Luke 10:15; 16:23-24
4. often analogous to the grave, Luke 16:23
C. Possibly divided (rabbis)
1. righteous part called paradise (really another name for heaven, cf. II Cor. 12:4; Rev. 2:7), Luke 23:43
2. wicked part called Tartarus, II Peter 2:4, where it is a holding place for evil angels (cf. Genesis 6; I Enoch)
D. Gehenna
1. Reflects the OT phrase, “the valley of the sons of Hinnom,” (south of Jerusalem). It was the place where the
Phoenician fire god, Molech (BDB 574), was worshiped by child sacrifice (cf. II Kgs. 16:3; 21:6; II Chr. 28:3;
33:6), which was forbidden in Lev. 18:21; 20:2-5.
2. Jeremiah changed it from a place of pagan worship into a site of YHWH’s judgment (cf. Jer. 7:32; 19:6-7). It
became the place of fiery, eternal judgment in I Enoch 90:26-27 and Sib. 1:103.
3. The Jews of Jesus’ day were so appalled by their ancestors’ participation in pagan worship by child sacrifice, that
they turned this area into the garbage dump for Jerusalem. Many of Jesus’ metaphors for eternal judgment came
from this landfill (fire, smoke, worms, stench, cf. Mark 9:44,46). The term Gehenna is used only by Jesus (except
in James 3:6).
4. Jesus’ usage of Gehenna
a. fire, Matt. 5:22; 18:9; Mark 9:43
b. permanent, Mark 9:48 (Matt. 25:46)
c. place of destruction (both soul and body), Matt. 10:28
d. paralleled to Sheol, Matt. 5:29-30; 18:9
e. characterizes the wicked as “son of hell,” Matt. 23:15
f. result of judicial sentence, Matt. 23:33; Luke 12:5
g. the concept of Gehenna is parallel to the second death (cf. Rev. 2:11; 20:6,14) or the lake of fire (cf. Matt.
13:42,50; Rev. 19:20; 20:10,14-15; 21:8). It is possible the lake of fire becomes the permanent dwelling
place of humans (from Sheol) and evil angels (from Tartarus, II Pet. 2:4; Jude v. 6 or the abyss, cf. Luke
8:31; Rev. 9:1-11; 20:1,3).
h. it was not designed for humans, but for Satan and his angels, Matt. 25:41
E. It is possible, because of the overlap of Sheol, Hades, and Gehenna that
1. originally all humans went to Sheol/Hades
2. their experience there (good/bad) is exacerbated after Judgment Day, but the place of the wicked remains the
same (this is why the KJV translated hades (grave) as gehenna (hell).
3. the only NT text to mention torment before Judgment is the parable of Luke 16:19-31 (Lazarus and the Rich
Man). Sheol is also described as a place of punishment now (cf. Deut. 32:22; Ps. 18:1-5). However, one cannot
establish a doctrine on a parable.
III. Intermediate state between death and resurrection
A. The NT does not teach the “immortality of the soul,” which is one of several ancient views of the after life.
1. human souls exist before their physical life
2. human souls are eternal before and after physical death
3. often the physical body is seen as a prison and death as release back to pre-existent state
B. The NT hints at a disembodied state between death and resurrection
1. Jesus speaks of a division between body and soul, Matt. 10:28
2. Abraham may have a body now, Mark 12:26-27; Luke 16:23
3. Moses and Elijah have a physical body at the transfiguration, Matthew 17
4. Paul asserts that at the Second Coming the souls with Christ will get their new bodies first, I Thess. 4:13-18
5. Paul asserts that believers get their new spiritual bodies on Resurrection Day, I Cor. 15:23,52
6. Paul asserts that believers do not go to Hades, but at death are with Jesus, II Cor. 5:6,8; Phil. 1:23. Jesus
overcame death and took the righteous to heaven with Him, I Pet. 3:18-22.
IV. Heaven
A. This term is used in three senses in the Bible.
1. the atmosphere above the earth, Gen. 1:1,8; Isa. 42:5; 45:18
2. the starry heavens, Gen. 1:14; Deut. 10:14; Ps. 148:4; Heb. 4:14; 7:26
3. the place of God’s throne, Deut. 10:14; I Kgs. 8:27; Ps. 148:4; Eph. 4:10; Heb. 9:24 (third heaven, II Cor. 12:2)
B. The Bible does not reveal much about the afterlife, probably because fallen humans have no way or capacity to
understand (cf. I Cor. 2:9).
C. Heaven is both a place (cf. John 14:2-3) and a person (cf. II Cor. 5:6,8). Heaven may be a restored Garden of Eden
(Genesis 1-2; Revelation 21-22). The earth will be cleansed and restored (cf. Acts 3:21; Rom. 8:21; II Pet. 3:10). The
image of God (Gen. 1:26-27) is restored in Christ. Now the intimate fellowship of the Garden of Eden is possible
again.
However, this may be metaphorical (heaven as a huge, cubed city of Rev. 21:9-27) and not literal. I Corinthians
15 describes the difference between the physical body and the spiritual body as the seed to the mature plant. Again,
I Cor. 2:9 (a quote from Isa. 64:4 and 65:17) is a great promise and hope! I know that when we see Him we will be
like Him (cf. I John 3:2).
V. Helpful resources
A. William Hendriksen, The Bible On the Life Hereafter
B. Maurice Rawlings, Beyond Death’s Door
▣ “‘Nor allow your holy one to undergo decay’” This was an obvious Messianic reference relating to the death, but
not corruption of the Promised One, the Anointed One, the Holy One (cf. Ps. 49:15 and 86:13).
2:28 “you will make me full of gladness with your presence” This phrase implies a personal, joyful experience with
the Father (vv. 22-28) in heaven by means of the death of the Messiah (cf. Isa. 53:10-12). This same positive view of personal
fellowship with God in the afterlife is recorded in Job 14:14-15; 19:25-27.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 2:29-36
29“Brethren, I may confidently say to you regarding the patriarch David that he both died and was buried, and his
tomb is with us to this day. 30“And so, because he was a prophet and knew that God had sworn to him with an oath
to seat one of his descendants on his throne, 31he looked ahead and spoke of the resurrection of the Christ, that He
was neither abandoned to Hades, nor did His flesh suffer decay. 32“This Jesus God raised up again, to which we
are all witnesses. 33“Therefore having been exalted to the right hand of God, and having received from the Father the
promise of the Holy Spirit, He has poured forth this which you both see and hear. 34“For it was not David who ascended
into heaven, but he himself says: ‘The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at My right hand, 35Until I make Your enemies
a footstool for Your feet.“’ 36“Therefore let all the house of Israel know for certain that God has made Him both
Lord and Christ—this Jesus whom you crucified.”
2:29-31 It is not easy for modern western readers to follow Peter’s analysis of this Psalm because he is using rabbinical
hermeneutical procedures (this is also true of the book of Hebrews). Peter may have heard this argument in the synagogue for
the coming Messiah and now knows it refers to Jesus of Nazareth.
2:29 Peter shows that Psalm 16, although in some ways referring to David (especially 16:10b), cannot completely refer to David.
2:30 “he was a prophet” The Jews believed that God spoke through prophets. Moses is called a prophet (cf. Deut. 18:18). The
OT books of Joshua, Judges, I and II Samuel, and I and II Kings were known in the Jewish canon as “the former prophets.” After
the death of the last prophet, Malachi, the rabbis considered revelation as ceasing. It was in this Jewish sense of the term (i.e.,
Scripture writer) that David is considered a prophet. Earlier in the OT God had revealed to Moses (cf. Genesis 49) that the
Messiah would be from the tribe of Judah. In II Samuel 7 God revealed that He would be of the royal line of David. In Psalm
110 God further revealed that He would also be of the priestly line of Melchizedek (cf vv. 34-35).
▣ “God had sworn to him with an oath to seat one of his descendants on his throne” This is a summary or
composite reference to II Sam. 7:11-16; Ps. 89:3-4; or 132:11. This shows that God’s ancient intent is to be fulfilled in Jesus of
Nazareth. His death and resurrection were not plan B, but God’s pre-determined, pre-creation plan of redemption (cf. Eph. 2:11-3:13).
2:31 “the Christ” This is the Greek translation of “the Messiah” or literally “the Anointed One.” Not only was Jesus son of
David, King of Israel, but Son of God and seated on the heavenly throne (cf. Psalm 110).
SPECIAL TOPIC: MESSIAH
This is taken from my commentary note at Daniel 9:6. The difficulty in interpreting this verse is because of the possible
meanings associated with the term Messiah or anointed one (BDB 603).
1. used of Jewish kings (e.g., I Sam. 2:10; 12:3)
2. used of Jewish priests (e.g., Lev. 4:3,5)
3. used of Cyrus (cf. Isa. 45:1)
4. #1 and #2 are combined in Psalm 110 and Zechariah 4
5. used of God’s special coming, Davidic King to bring in the new age of righteousness
a. line of Judah (cf. Gen. 49:10)
b. house of Jesse (cf. II Samuel 7)
c. universal reign (cf. Psalm 2; Isa. 9:6; 11:1-5; Mic. 5:1-4ff)
I personally am attracted to the identification of “an anointed one” with Jesus of Nazareth because of
1. the introduction of an eternal Kingdom in Daniel 2 during the fourth empire
2. the introduction of “a son of man” in Dan. 7:13 being given an eternal kingdom
3. the redemptive clauses of Dan. 9:24, which point toward a culmination of fallen world history
4. Jesus’ use of the book of Daniel in the NT (cf. Matt. 24:15; Mark 13:14)
▣ “He was neither abandoned to Hades, nor did His flesh suffer decay” This is not marked off as an OT quote in the
1995 NASB (updated) text. It is obviously referring to Psalm 16.
For “flesh” see Special Topic below.
SPECIAL TOPIC: FLESH (sarx)
This term is used most often by Paul in Galatians and its theological development in Romans. Scholars differ on how to
characterize the different connotations of the term. There is surely some overlap in meanings. The following is merely an attempt
to note the wide semantic field of the term.
A. the human body, John 1:14; Rom. 2:28; I Cor. 5:5; 7:28; II Cor. 4:11; 7:5; 12:7; Gal. 1:16; 2:16,20; 4:13; Phil. 1:22; Col.
1:22,24; 2:5; I Tim. 3:16
B. human descent, John 3:6; Rom. 1:3; 4:1; 9:3,5,8; 11:14; I Cor. 10:18; Gal. 4:23,29
C. the human person, Rom. 3:20; 7:5; 8:7-8; I Cor. 1:29; II Cor. 10:3; Gal. 2:16; 5:24
D. humanly speaking, John 8:15; I Cor. 1:26; II Cor. 1:12; 5:16; 10:2; Gal. 6:12
E. human weakness, Rom. 6:19; 7:18; 8:5-6,9; II Cor. 10:4; Gal. 3:3; 5:13,16,19-21; Col. 2:18
F. hostility of humans toward God, related to the consequences of the Fall, Rom. 7:14; 13:14; I Cor. 3:1,3; Eph. 2:3; Col. 2:18;
I Pet. 2:11; I John 2:16
2:32-33 “Jesus. . .God. . .Spirit” Although the word “trinity” is never used in the Bible, the concept of a triune God is demanded
by (1) the deity of Jesus and (2) the personality of the Spirit. The Bible communicates this concept by mentioning the three persons
of the Trinity in a single context (cf. Acts 2:32-33; Matt. 28:19; I Cor. 12:4-6; II Cor. 1:21-22; 13:14; Eph. 4:4-6 and I Pet. 1:2).
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE TRINITY
Notice the activity of all three Persons of the Trinity in unified contexts. The term “trinity,” first coined by Tertullian, is not a
biblical word, but the concept is pervasive.
A. the Gospels
1. Matt. 3:16-17; 28:19 (and parallels)
2. John 14:26
B. Acts – Acts 2:32-33, 38-39
C. Paul
1. Rom. 1:4-5; 5:1,5; 8:1-4,8-10
2. I Cor. 2:8-10; 12:4-6
3. II Cor. 1:21-22; 13:14
4. Gal. 4:4-6
5. Eph. 1:3-14,17; 2:18; 3:14-17; 4:4-6
6. I Thess. 1:2-5
7. II Thess. 2:13
8. Titus 3:4-6
D. Peter – I Pet. 1:2
E. Jude – vv. 20-21
A plurality in God is hinted at in the OT.
A. Use of plurals for God
1. Name Elohim is plural, but when used of God always has a singular verb
2. “Us” in Genesis 1:26-27; 3:22; 11:7
B. The Angel of the Lord was a visible representative of Deity
1. Genesis 16:7-13; 22:11-15; 31:11,13; 48:15-16
2. Exodus 3:2,4; 13:21; 14:19
3. Judges 2:1; 6:22-23; 13:3-22
4. Zechariah 3:1-2
C. God and His Spirit are separate, Gen. 1:1-2; Ps. 104:30; Isa. 63:9-11; Ezek. 37:13-14
D. God (YHWH) and Messiah (Adon) are separate, Ps. 45:6-7; 110:1; Zech. 2:8-11; 10:9-12
E. The Messiah and the Spirit are separate, Zech. 12:10
F. All three are mentioned in Isa. 48:16; 61:1
The Deity of Jesus and the personality of the Spirit caused problems for the strict, monotheistic, early believers.
1. Tertullian – subordinated the Son to the Father
2. Origen – subordinated the divine essence of the Son and the Spirit
3. Arius – denied Deity to the Son and Spirit
4. Monarchianism – believed in a successive chronological manifestation of the one God as Father, Son, and Spirit
The Trinity is a historically developed formulation informed by the biblical material
1. the full Deity of Jesus, equal to the Father, and was affirmed in a.d. 325 by the Council of Nicea (cf. John 1:1; Phil.
2:6; Titus 2:13)
2. the full personality and Deity of the Spirit equal to the Father and Son was affirmed in a.d. 381 by the Council of
Constantinople
3. the doctrine of the Trinity is fully expressed in Augustine’s work De Trinitate
There is truly mystery here. But the NT seems to affirm one divine essence with three eternal personal manifestations.
2:32 “This Jesus God raised up again” See full note at 2:24.
▣ “to which we are all witnesses” This refers to those who saw the resurrected Christ. See chart of the post-resurrection
appearances from Paul Barnett, Jesus and the Rise of Early Christianity, p. 185, at 1:3 (p. 9).
2:33 “to the right hand of God” This is an anthropomorphic metaphor for the place of power, authority, and intercession (cf.
I John 2:1), which is taken from Ps. 110:1 (quoted more than any other Psalm in the NT) or Ps. 118:16. God is eternal Spirit,
present throughout physical and spiritual creation. Humans must use earth-bound language and concepts to speak of Him, but
they are all (1) negations (2) analogies or (3) metaphors. Even the word “Father” to describe God or “Son” to describe Jesus are
metaphorical. All metaphors break down at some point. They are meant to convey a central truth or concept about deity. Be
careful of literalness! Surely you do not expect to see an old man, a young man on a throne and a white bird circling overhead
when you get to heaven. See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: GOD DESCRIBED AS A HUMAN (anthropomorphic language)
I. This type of language is very common in the OT (some examples)
A. Physical body parts
1. eyes – Gen. 1:4,31; 6:8; Exod. 33:17; Num. 14:14; Deut. 11:12; Zech. 4:10
2. hands – Exod. 15:17; Num. 11:23; Deut. 2:15
3. arm – Exod. 6:6; 15:16; Num. 11:23; Deut. 4:34; 5:15
4. ears – Num. 11:18; I Sam. 8:21; II Kgs. 19:16; Ps. 5:1; 10:17; 18:6
5. face – Exod. 32:30; 33:11; Num. 6:25; Deut. 34:10; Ps. 114:7
6. finger – Exod. 8:19; 31:18; Deut. 9:10; Ps. 8:3
7. voice – Gen. 3:8,10; Exod. 15:26; 19:19; Deut. 26:17; 27:10
8. feet – Exod. 24:10; Ezek. 43:7
9. human form – Exod. 24:9-11; Ps. 47; Isa. 6:1; Ezek. 1:26
10. the angel of the Lord – Gen. 16:7-13; 22:11-15; 31:11,13; 48:15-16; Exod. 3:4,13-21; 14:19; Jdgs. 2:1; 6:22-23;
13:3-22
B. Physical actions
1. speaking as the mechanism of creation – Gen. 1:3,6,9,11,14,20,24,26
2. walking (i.e., sound of) in Eden – Gen. 3:8; 18:33; Hab. 3:15
3. closing the door of Noah’s ark – Gen. 7:16
4. smelling sacrifices – Gen. 8:21; Lev. 26:31; Amos 5:21
5. coming down – Gen. 11:5; 18:21; Exod. 3:8; 19:11,18,20
6. burying Moses – Deut. 34:6
C. Human emotions (some examples)
1. regret/repent – Gen. 6:6,7; Exod. 32:14; Jdgs. 2:18; I Sam. 15:29,35; Amos 7:3,6
2. anger – Exod. 4:14; 15:7; Num. 11:10; 12:9; 22:22; 25:3,4; 32:10,13,14; Deut. 6:5; 7:4; 29:20
3. jealousy – Exod. 20:5; 34:14; Deut. 4:24; 5:9; 6:15; 32:16,21; Josh. 24:19
4. loathe/abhor – Lev. 20:23; 26:30; Deut. 32:19
D. Family terms (some examples)
1. Father
a. of Israel – Exod. 4:22; Deut. 14:1; Isa. 1:2; 63:16; 64:8; Jer. 31:9; Hos. 11:1
b. of the king – II Sam. 7:11-16; Ps. 2:7
c. metaphors of fatherly action – Deut. 1:31; 8:5; 32:6-14; Ps. 27:10; Pro. 3:12; Jer. 3:4,22; 31:20; Hosea 11:1-4; Mal. 3:17
2. Parent – Hosea 11:1-4
3. Mother – Ps. 27:10; Isa. 49:15; 66:9-13 (analogy to nursing mother)
4. Young faithful lover – Hosea 1-3
II. Reasons for the use of this type of language
A. It is a necessity for God to reveal Himself to human beings. The very pervasive concept of God as male is an
anthropomorphism because God is spirit!
B. God takes the most meaningful aspects of human life and uses them to reveal Himself to fallen humanity (father,
mother, parent, lover)
C. Though necessary at times (i.e., Gen. 3:8), God does not want to be limited to any physical form (cf. Exodus 20;
Deuteronomy 5)
D. The ultimate anthropomorphism is the incarnation of Jesus! God became physical, touchable (cf. I John 1:1-3). The
message of God became the Word of God (cf. John 1:1-18).
▣ “the promise of the Holy Spirit” The OT promised a new day of Spirit-led righteousness, made operative by the work of the
Messiah.
1. John 7:39, the new day has arrived
2. Gal. 3:14, the blessing of Abraham (cf. Gen. 12:3) is now available to the whole world
3. Eph. 1:13, believers in this new age are sealed by the Spirit.
▣ “which you both see and hear” This is the continuing emphasis in this sermon on the eyewitness nature of these hearers (cc.
14,22,32,33,36). They knew what Peter said was true because they were there. Lawyers call this primary source evidence.
2:34 “the Lord said to my lord” This is a quote from Psalm 110:1 (YHWH…Adon). Jesus uses it in Matt. 22:41-46. In the
NT it shows the dual aspect of the kingdom; Jesus is already at God’s right, but His enemies are not yet His footstool. See Special
Topic: The Kingdom of God at 1:3.
2:36 “Let all the house of Israel” This refers to the Jewish leadership and people, the very ones Peter is addressing. He is
asserting that OT prophecy is fulfilled and culminated in Jesus of Nazareth. See Special Topic: The Kingdom of God at 1:3.
▣
NASB “know for certain”
NKJV “know assuredly”
NRSV “know with certainty”
TEV “know for sure”
NJB “can be certain”
This reflects two Greek words, the adverb aphalōs, which means “to fasten securely” (metaphorically with certainty, cf.
16:23) and the present active imperative of ginōskō, “to know.” These eyewitnesses of Jesus’ last week, death, and resurrection
could have no doubt about the truthfulness of Peter’s words.
▣ “Lord and Christ” The term “lord” (kurios) can be used in a general sense or in a specific theological sense (cf. v. 21). It
can mean “mister,” “sir,” “master,” “owner,” “husband,” or “the full God-man.” The OT usage of this term (adon) came from
the Jews’ reluctance to pronounce the covenant name for God, YHWH, from the Hebrew verb “to be” (cf. Exod. 3:14). They
were afraid of breaking the commandment which said, “Thou shalt not take the name of the Lord thy God in vain” (cf. Exod. 20:7,
Deut. 5:11). They thought if they did not pronounce it, they could not take it in vain. So, they substituted the Hebrew word
adonai, which had a similar meaning to the Greek word, Kurios (Lord). The NT authors used this term to describe the full Deity
of Christ. The phrase “Jesus is Lord” was the public confession of faith and baptismal formula of the early church (cf. Rom. 10:9-13; I Cor. 12:3; Phil. 2:11). See Special Topic: Names for Deity at 1:6.
“Christ” was the Greek equivalent of the Hebrew term messiah, which meant “an anointed one” (cf. 2:31,36; 3:18,20; 4:26;
5:42; 8:5; 9:22; 17:3; 18:5,28; 26:23). It implied “one called and equipped by God for a specific task.” In the OT three groups
of leaders: priests, kings, and prophets, were anointed. Jesus fulfilled all three of these anointed offices (cf. Heb. 1:2-3). See
Special Topic: Messiah at 2:31.
By using both of these OT titles for Jesus of Nazareth, Luke asserts both His deity (cf. Phil. 2:6-11, see Special Topic at
2:32) and His Messiahship (cf. Luke 2:11). This surely sets the stage for the proclamation (kerygma) of the other sermons in Acts!
See Special Topic: The Kerygma of the Early Church at 2:14.
▣ “this Jesus whom you crucified” Peter accused these inhabitants of Jerusalem with duplicity in Jesus’ death. All fallen
humans are equally involved in the guilt. See note at 2:23.
▣ “this Jesus” The designation “this Jesus” (cf. 2:23,32,36) links Peter’s proclamation of the historical Jesus to the resurrected,
exalted Christ. Both concepts are true. There is no biblical distinction between the early Jesus and the Jesus of faith!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 2:37-42
37Now when they heard this, they were pierced to the heart, and said to Peter and the rest of the apostles, “Brethren,
what shall we do?” 38Peter said to them, “Repent, and each of you be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ for the
forgiveness of your sins; and you will receive the gift of the Holy Spirit. 39“For the promise is for you and your children
and for all who are far off, as many as the Lord our God will call to Himself.” 40And with many other words he solemnly
testified and kept on exhorting them, saying, “Be saved from this perverse generation!” 41So then, those who had received
his word were baptized; and that day there were added about three thousand souls. 42They were continually devoting
themselves to the apostles’ teaching and to fellowship, to the breaking of bread and to prayer.
2:37 “they were pierced to the heart” This is the Greek term kata plus nussō. The root word is used in John 19:34 for Jesus
being nailed to the cross. Peter’s sermon nailed these hearers to the truth of the gospel. This obviously refers to the necessary
conviction of the Holy Spirit which precedes salvation (cf. John 16:8-11; Rom. 3:21-31).
2:38 “Repent” This is an aorist active imperative, which means make a decisive decision. The Hebrew term for repentance
meant a change of action. The Greek term meant a change of mind. Repentance is a willingness to change. It does not mean a
total cessation of sin, but a desire to please God, not self. As fallen humanity we live for ourselves, but as believers we live for
God! Repentance and faith are God’s requirements for salvation (cf. Mark 1:15; Acts 3:16, 19; 20:21). Jesus said “Unless you
repent, you will all perish” (cf Luke. 13:3,5). Repentance is God’s will for fallen man (cf. II Pet. 3:9, Ezek. 18:23, 30, 32). The
mystery of the sovereignty of God and human free will can be clearly demonstrated by repentance as a requirement for salvation.
However, the paradox or dialectic pair is that it is also a gift of God (cf. 5:31; 11:18 and II Tim. 2:25). There is always a tension
in the biblical presentation of God’s initiating grace and humanity’s needed covenantal response. The new covenant, like the old
covenant, has an “if. . .then” structure. There are several terms used in the NT which relate to the concept of repentance.
SPECIAL TOPIC: REPENTANCE
Repentance (along with faith) is a covenant requirement of both the Old Covenant (Nacham, BDB 636, e.g., 13:12; 32:12,14;
Shuv, BDB 996, e.g., I Kgs. 8:47; Ezek. 14:6; 18:30) and the New Covenant.
1. John the Baptist (Matt. 3:2; Mark 1:4; Luke 3:3,8)
2. Jesus (Matt. 4:17; Mark 1:15; Luke 5:32; 13:3,5; 15:7; 17:3)
3. Peter (Acts 2:38; 3:19; 8:22; 11:18; II Pet. 3:9)
4. Paul (Acts 13:24; 17:30; 20:21; 26:20; Rom. 2:4; II Cor. 2:9-10)
But what is repentance? Is it sorrow? Is it a cessation of sin? The best chapter in the NT for understanding the different
connotations of this concept is II Corinthians 7:8-11, where three related, but different, Greek terms are used.
1. “sorrow” (lupeō, cf. vv. 8 [twice], 9 [thrice], 10 [twice], 11). It means grief or distress and has a theologically neutral
connotation.
2. “repentance” (metanoeō, cf. vv. 9,10). It is a compound of “after” and “mind,” which implies a new mind, a new way
of thinking, a new attitude toward life and God. This is true repentance.
3. “regret” (metamelomai, cf. vv. 8[twice], 10). It is a compound of “after” and “care.” It is used of Judas in Matt. 27:3
and Esau in Heb. 12:16-17. It implies sorrow over the consequences, not over the acts.
Repentance and faith are the required covenant acts (cf. Mark 1:15; Acts 2:38,41; 3:16,19; 20:21). There are some texts
which imply that God gives repentance (cf. Acts 5:31; 11:18; II Tim. 2:25). But most of the texts see this as a necessary human
covenantal response to God’s offer of a free salvation.
The definitions of both the Hebrew and Greek terms are required to grasp the full meaning of repentance. The Hebrew
demands “a change of action,” while the Greek demands “a change of mind.” The saved person receives a new mind and heart.
He thinks differently and lives differently. Instead of “What’s in it for me?” the question is now “What is God’s will?” Repentance
is not an emotion that fades or a total sinlessness, but a new relationship with the Holy One that transforms the believer
progressively into a holy one.
▣ “be baptized” This is another aorist passive imperative. See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: BAPTISM
Curtis Vaughan, Acts, has an interesting footnote on p. 28 related to Acts 2:38.
“The Greek word for ‘baptized’ is a third person imperative; the word for ‘repent,’ a second person imperative.
This change from the more direct second person command to the less direct third person of ‘baptized’ implies that
Peter’s basic primary demand is for repentance.”
This follows the preaching emphasis of John the Baptist (cf. Matt. 3:2) and Jesus (cf. Matt. 4:17). Repentance seems to be
a spiritual key and baptism is an outward expression of this spiritual change. The New Testament knew nothing of unbaptized
believers! To the early church baptism was the public profession of faith. It is the occasion for the public confession of faith in
Christ, not the mechanism for salvation! It needs to be remembered that baptism is not mentioned in Peter’s second sermon,
though repentance is (cf. 3:19; Luke 24:17). Baptism was an example set by Jesus (cf. Matt. 3:13-18). Baptism was commanded
by Jesus (cf. Matt. 28:19). The modern question of the necessity of baptism for salvation is not addressed in the New Testament;
all believers are expected to be baptized. However, one must also guard against a sacramental mechanicalism! Salvation is a faith
issue, not a right-place, right-words, right-ritual act issue!
▣ “in the name of Jesus Christ” This is a Hebrew idiom (reflected in Joel 2:32) which refers to the person or character of Jesus.
It may be that the early church’s baptismal formula, which was probably repeated by the candidate, was “I believe Jesus is Lord”
(cf. Rom. 10:9-13; I Cor. 1:13,15). This was both a theological affirmation and a personal trust affirmation. In the Great
Commission of Matt. 28:19-20 the triune name is the baptismal formula. Again we must guard against a mechanical
sacramentalism! The title or formula is not the key, but the heart of the one being baptized.
For “Christ” see Special Topic at 2:31.
▣
NASB, NJB,
NIV “for the forgiveness of your sins”
NKJV “for the remission of sins”
NRSV “so that your sins may be forgiven”
TEV “so that your sins will be forgiven”
The theological question is how does “for” (eis) function? Is forgiveness linked to “repent” or “be baptized”? Is forgiveness
dependent on repentance and/or baptism?
The possible uses of eis are multiple. The most common use is “with a view to” or “for this purpose of.” Most Baptist
scholars choose “because of” for theological reasons, but it is a minor option. Often our presuppositions even function at this
grammatical analysis level. We must let the Bible speak in context; then check the parallels; then form our systematic theologies.
All interpreters are historically, denominationally, and experientially conditioned.
Forgiveness through faith in Christ is a recurrent theme in these sermons in Acts (i.e., Peter 2:38; 3:19; 5:31; 10:43; and Paul
13:38).
▣ “receive the gift of the Holy Spirit” This is a Future middle (deponent) indicative. The gift of the Spirit was
1. an assured salvation
2. an indwelling presence
3. an equipping for service
4. a developing Christlikeness
We must not push the items or the order of the events of salvation because they are often different in Acts. Acts was not meant
to teach a standard formula or theological sequence (cf. How To Read the Bible for All Its Worth, pp. 94-112), but record what
happened.
Should an interpreter use this text to assert a sequence of salvation acts: repent, be baptized, forgiveness, and then the gift
of the Spirit? My theology demands the Spirit as active from the first (cf. John 6:44,65) and crucial all through the process of
conviction (cf. John 16:8-12), repentance (cf. 5:31; 11:18; II Tim. 2:25), and faith. The Spirit is primary and necessary (cf. Rom.
8:9) from start to finish. He certainly cannot be last in a series!
One of the books that has helped me shed my denominational indoctrination and let the Bible speak with power is F. F.
Bruce, Answers to Questions. In it he makes several good comments about Acts 2:38. One that grabbed me is:
“This reception of the spirit might be experienced before baptism (Acts 10:44), after baptism (Acts 2:38), or after
baptism plus the laying on of apostolic hands (Acts 8:16; 19:54)” (p. 167).
Moderns want clear statements of doctrine which can be affirmed, but usually they react to a “proof-text” method of interpretation
and isolate only those texts that fit their pre-understanding, biases (see seminar on Biblical Interpretation,
www.freebiblecommentary.org )
2:39 “the promise is for you and your children” This was an OT corporate, multi-generational, familial concept (cf. Exod.
20:5-6 and Deut. 5:9-10; 7:9). The faith of the children was affected by the parents and was the parents’ responsibility (cf. Deut.
4:9; 6:6-7; 20-25; 11:19; 32:46). This corporate influence also has a frightful aspect in light of Matt. 27:25 (“His blood be on us
and our children”).
The promise of multi-generational faith influence helps me trust that God will use my faith to influence, bless, and protect
my descendants (cf. Deut. 7:9). This does not deny personal responsibility, but adds an element of corporate influence. My faith
and faithful service in Christ does impact my family and their family and so forth (cf. Deut. 7:9). What a comforting hope and
motivational promise. Faith runs through families!
In Acts the promise (2:39) of God involves several items with OT links:
1. forgiveness of sins – 2:38; 3:19; 5:31; 10:43; 13:38-39; 26:18
2. salvation – 2:21; 4:12; 11:14; 13:26; 16:31
3. the Spirit – 2:38-39; 3:19; 5:32; 8:15-18; 10:44-48; 19:6
4. times of refreshing – 3:19
▣ “for all who are far off” Peter is addressing Jewish people. This phrase originally referred to exiled Jews who would be
brought back to the Promised Land (cf. Isa. 57:19). However, it also, in some passages, seemed to refer to the Gentiles who were
so far from a knowledge of YHWH (cf. Isa. 49:1; Zech. 6:15). The good news of the gospel is that the one true God (i.e.,
monotheism) who created all humans in His image (cf. Gen. 1:26-27), desires to have fellowship with all of them (cf. I Tim. 2:4;
II Pet. 3:9). This is the hope of the unity of all humans in Christ. In Him there are no more Jews-Gentiles, slaves-free, men-women, but all are one (cf. Eph. 2:11-3:13). Paul uses this very quote addressing Gentiles in Eph. 2:13 & 17. The new age of
the Spirit has brought an unexpected unity!
SPECIAL TOPIC: MONOTHEISM
The concept of “monotheism” (one and only one God), not just the “high god” of polytheism or the good god of Iranian
dualism (Zoroastrianism), is unique to Israel (Abraham, 2000 b.c.). Only one rare exception briefly in Egypt (Amenhotep IV,
also known as Akhenaten, 1367-1350 or 1386-1361 b.c.).
This concept is expressed in several phrases in the OT.
1. “no one like YHWH our Elohim,” Exod. 8:10; 9:14; Deut. 33:26; I Kgs. 8:23
2. “no other besides Him,” Deut. 4:35,39; 32:39; I Sam. 2:2; II Sam. 22:32; Isa. 45:21; 44:6,8; 45:6,21
3. “YHWH is one,” Deut. 6:4; Rom. 3:30; I Cor. 8:4,6; I Tim. 2:5; James 2:19
4. “none like thee,” II Sam. 7:22; Jer. 10:6
5. “Thou alone are God,” Ps. 86:10; Isa. 37:16
6. “Before Me there was no God formed, and there will be none after Me,” Isa. 43:10
7. “there is no other; besides Me. . .there is no other,” Isa. 45:5,6,22
8. “there is none else, no other God,” Isa. 45:14,18
9. “there is none except Me,” Isa. 45:21
10. “there is no other;. . .there is no one like Me,” Isa. 46:9
It must be admitted that this crucial doctrine has been revealed in progressive ways. The early statements could be
understood as “henotheism” or practical monotheism (there are other gods, but only one god for us, cf. Exod. 15:11; 20:2-5; Deut.
3:28; 5:7; 6:4,14; 10:17; 32:12; I Kgs. 8:23; Ps. 83:18; 86:8; 136:1-2).
The first texts that begin to denote a singularity (philosophical monotheism) are early (cf. Exod. 8:10; 9:14; Deut. 4:35,39;
33:26). The full and compete claims are found in Isaiah 43-46 (cf. 43:11; 44:6,8; 45:7,14,18,22; 46:5,9).
The NT alludes to Deut. 6:4 in Rom. 3:30; I Cor. 8:4,6; Eph. 4:6; I Tim. 2:5; and James 2:19. Jesus quotes it as the first
commandment in Matt. 22:36-37; Mark 12:29-30; Luke 10:27. The OT, as well as the NT, asserts the reality of other spiritual
beings (demons, angels), but only one creator/redeemer God (YHWH, Gen. 1:1).
Biblical monotheism is characterized by
1. God is one and unique (ontology is assumed, not specified)
2. God is personal (cf. Gen. 1:26-27; 3:8)
3. God is ethical (cf. Exod. 34:6; Neh. 9:17; Ps. 103:8-10)
4. God created humans in His image (Gen. 1:26-27) for fellowship (i.e., #2). He is a jealous God (cf. Exod. 20:2-3
From the NT
1. God has three eternal, personal manifestations (see Special Topic: The Trinity at 8:11)
2. God is perfectly and completely revealed in Jesus (cf. John 1:1-14; Col. 1:15-19; Heb. 1:2-3)
3. God’s eternal plan for fallen humanity’s redemption is the sacrificial offering of His only Son (Isaiah 53; Mark 10:45;
II Cor. 5:21; Phil. 2:6-11; Hebrews)
▣ “as many as the Lord our God will call to Himself” This is an aorist middle (deponent) subjunctive. It originally referred
to scattered Judaism. God always takes the initiative (middle voice, cf. John 6:44,65). From Ezek. 18:32; John 3:16; I Tim. 2:4;
II Pet. 3:9 we know He calls all humans, at some level, to Himself. But, they must respond (i.e., subjunctive mood).
The terms “many” and “all” are biblically parallel (compare Isa. 53:6, “all” with Isa. 53:11,12, “many” or Rom. 5:18, “all”
with Rom. 5:19, “many”). God’s heart beats for a lost humanity made in His image (cf. Gen. 1:26-27), created for fellowship with
Him (cf. Gen. 3:8)!
2:40 “with many other words” This is textual evidence that the sermons recorded in Acts are summaries. This is also true of
Jesus’ teaching and preaching in the Gospels. We presuppositionally affirm the inspiration and accuracy of these summaries.
The first century world was accustomed to oral presentations and their retention.
▣ “solemnly testified” This Greek term (dia plus marturomai) is popular with Luke (cf. 2:40; 8:25; 10:42; 18:5; 20:21,23,24;
23:11; 28:23; Luke 16:28). The gospel has an urgency and ultimacy that cannot be ignored in either proclamation or hearing.
▣ “kept on exhorting them” Man must respond to God’s offer in Christ (cf John 1:12; 3:16; Rom. 10:9-13). This is the paradox
of God’s sovereignty and human free will (cf. Phil. 2:12-13).
▣
NASB, NKJV “Be saved”
NRSV, TEV,
NJB “Save yourselves”
The inflected form of this term is aorist passive imperative, but as you can tell, NRSV, TEV, and NJB translate it as
middle voice. This is the theological tension concerning salvation (cf. Phil. 2:12-13). Is it all of God, or must the hearer allow
God to work in his/her life?
The Greek term “saved” (sōsō) reflects a Hebrew concept (yasha, BDB 446, cf. Exod. 14:30) of physical deliverance (cf.
James 5:15,20), while in the NT usage it takes on the connotation of spiritual deliverance or salvation (cf. James 1:21; 2:14; 4:12).
SPECIAL TOPIC: GREEK VERB TENSES USED FOR SALVATION
Salvation is not a product, but a relationship. It is not finished when one trusts Christ; it has only begun (a gate and then a
road)! It is not a fire insurance policy, nor a ticket to heaven, but a life of growing Christlikeness. We have a proverbial saying
in America that says the longer a couple lives together, the more they begin to look alike. This is the goal of salvation!
SALVATION AS A COMPLETED ACTION (aorist)
― Acts 15:11
― Romans 8:24
― II Timothy 1:9
― Titus 3:5
― Romans 13:11 (combines the aorist with a future orientation)
SALVATION AS A STATE OF BEING (perfect)
― Ephesians 2:5,8
SALVATION AS A CONTINUING PROCESS (present)
― I Corinthians 1:18; 15:2
― II Corinthians 2:15
― I Peter 3:21
SALVATION AS A FUTURE CONSUMMATION (future in verb tense or context)
― Romans 5:9,10; 10:9,13
― I Corinthians 3:15; 5:5
― Philippians 1:28
― I Thessalonians 5:8-9
― Hebrews 1:14; 9:28
― I Peter 1:5
Therefore, salvation begins with an initial faith decision (cf. John 1:12; 3:16; Rom. 10:9-13), but this must issue in lifestyle faith
(cf. Rom. 8:29; Gal. 2:19-20; Eph. 1:4; 2:10), which will one day be consummated in sight (cf. I John 3:2). This final state is
called glorification. This can be illustrated as
1. initial salvation—justification (saved from the penalty of sin)
2. progressive salvation—sanctification (saved from the power of sin)
3. final salvation—glorification (saved from the presence of sin)
▣ “this perverse generation” This may be an allusion to Deut. 32:5 and Ps. 78:8. The OT root for the terms “right,” “righteous,”
“just,” “justice” was “a river reed” (see Special Topic at 3:14). It became a construction metaphor, a measuring reed, or straight
standard. God chose this metaphor to describe His own character. God is the standard! Most of the words for sin in Hebrew and
Greek refer to a deviation from this standard (i.e., crooked, perverse). All humans need to be saved and restored.
2:41
NASB “received”
NKJV “gladly received”
NRSV “welcomed”
TEV “believed”
NJB “accepted”
This is an aorist middle participle of apodechomai. Louw and Nida, Greek-English Lexicon, list three uses of this term
(cf. vol.2, p. 28).
1. welcome a person
2. accept something or someone as true and respond appropriately
3. acknowledge the truth or value of something or someone
Luke uses this word often (cf. Luke 8:40; 9:11; Acts 2:41; 18:27; 24:3; 28:30). The gospel is a person to be welcomed, truth
about that person to believe, and a life like that person’s to live. All three are crucial.
▣ “were baptized” Baptism was a religious expectation for Jews as they entered the temple. Proselytes were self-baptized. This
was an expected religious event for these hearers but with new meaning. Jesus was baptized (Matt. 3:13-17); Jesus commanded
us to baptize (Matt. 28:19)—that settles that! The NT knows nothing of unbaptized believers. It seems to me that this was a clear
break with Judaism and the start of the new people of God (i.e., the Church, cf. Gal. 6:16).
▣ “three thousand souls” This is a round number, but a large number. Peter’s message struck home to these eyewitnesses. They
were ready to make the leap of faith required to believe.
1. Jesus was the Messiah
2. the Messiah was meant to suffer
3. faith in Him was the only way to forgiveness
4. baptism was appropriate
This required a decisive, immediate, life-changing decision (as it does today)! See Special Topic: Kerygma at 2:14.
2:42 “They were continually devoting themselves” Luke uses this concept often (cf. 1:14; 2:42,46; 6:4; 8:13; 10:7). Notice the
things they did when together:
1. teaching (cf. 2:42; 4:2,18; 5:21,25,28,42)
2. fellowship
3. breaking of bread (i.e., this possibly refers to the Lord’s Supper, see note at v. 46)
4. prayer (cf. vv. 43-47)
These are the things we must teach new believers! These new converts were hungry for truth and community. See Special Topic
following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: KOINŌNIA
The term “fellowship” (koinōnia) means
1. close association with a person
a. with the Son (cf. I John 1:6; I Cor. 1:9)
b. with the Spirit (cf. II Cor. 13:13; Phil. 2:1)
c. with the Father and the Son (cf. I John 1:3)
d. with other covenant brothers/sisters (cf. I John 1:7; Acts 2:42; Gal. 2:9; Philemon 17)
2. close association with things or groups
a. with the gospel (cf. Phil. 1:5; Philemon 6)
b. with the blood of Christ (cf. I Cor. 10:16)
c. not with darkness (cf. II Cor. 6:14)
d. with suffering (cf. Phil. 3:10; 4:14; I Pet. 4:13)
3. gift or contribution done in generous fashion (cf. Rom. 12:13; 15:26; II Cor. 8:4; 9:13; Phil. 4:15; Heb. 13:16)
4. God’s gift of grace through Christ, which restores mankind’s fellowship with Him and his brothers and sisters
This asserts the horizontal relationship (human to human) that is brought about by the vertical relationship (human to
Creator). It also emphasizes the need for and joy of Christian community. The verb tense stresses the start and continuance of
this experience of community (cf. 1:3 [twice],6,7). Christianity is corporate!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 2:43-47
43Everyone kept feeling a sense of awe; and many wonders and signs were taking place through the apostles. 44And
all those who had believed were together and had all things in common; 45and they began selling their property and
possessions and were sharing them with all, as anyone might have need. 46Day by day continuing with one mind in the
temple, and breaking bread from house to house, they were taking their meals together with gladness and sincerity of
heart, 47praising God and having favor with all the people. And the Lord was adding to their number day by day those
who were being saved.
2:43-47 This seems to be the first of many editorial comments by Luke (i.e., 6:7; 9:31; 12:24; 16:5; 19:20). See Introduction,
“Purpose and Structure,” A.
2:43 “Everyone kept feeling a sense of awe” This is an imperfect passive (deponent) indicative. We get the English
“phobia” from this term “awe” or “fear.” God’s presence and power caused a holy atmosphere, even unsaved sinners were aware
of the sacredness of the time and place!
2:44 “all those who had believed” See note at 3:16.
▣ “and had all things in common” This early experiment in “community” was not successful (cf. 4:32-5:11). It was not meant
to be a universal principle, but an attempt at a loving, mutually supportive community or faith. This is a good example that not
everything recorded in the Bible is meant to be universally implemented! These early believers had a great love for one another.
Oh, that we could regain this love and sense of the presence and power of God among us (cf. John 17:11,21,22,23)!!
2:46 “with one mind” The early church was characterized by this unity of purpose (cf. 1:14; 2:46; 4:24; 5:12). This is not to
say that they agreed on everything, but that their hearts and minds were knit together in kingdom priorities instead of personal
preferences or agendas.
▣ “in the temple” They probably met in “Solomon’s portico” (cf 3:11; 5:12). Jesus taught there (cf. John 10:23). Solomon’s
Portico or porch was a covered colonnade along the east side of the outer court of the Gentiles in Herod’s Temple (cf. Josephus’
Antiq. 15.11.3). Rabbis taught there. People regularly gathered there to hear teaching.
Notice the early church attended the temple and probably the local synagogues until the rabbis instituted a curse formula
(about a.d. 70), which forced synagogue members to curse Jesus. This caused the break between the church and Judaism. The
early believers maintained their weekly worship, but also met on Sunday to commemorate Jesus’ resurrection. Remember, Jesus
Himself met with the disciples, three Sunday nights in a row.
▣ “breaking bread from house to house” If “breaking bread” was a technical designation for the Lord’s Supper (cf. Luke 22:19
and esp. in contexts of agape meals [I Cor. 11:17-22; II Pet. 2:13-14; Jude v. 12] in the early church, ex. Acts 20:7), then this
refers to daily communion in local homes (but it must be admitted that it is also used of a regular meal in Luke 24:30,35). Be
careful of your dogmatic denominational traditions about the when, where, frequency, and form of the Lord’s Supper. The heart
is the key!
▣
NASB “gladness and sincerity of heart”
NKJV “gladness and simplicity of heart”
NRSV “glad and generous hearts”
TEV “glad and humble hearts”
NJB “glad and generously”
The variety of the translations of the second term shows the difficulty of translating aphelotēs. Literally it meant smooth
or plain, but it was used metaphorically for “simple,” “sincere,” or “humble” (Louw and Nida). See Special Topic: The Heart
at 1:24.
2:47
NASB, NKJV “having favor with all the people”
NRSV “having the goodwill of all the people”
TEV “enjoying the goodwill of all the people”
NJB “were looked up to by everyone”
This phrase refers to the acceptance of the early Christians by the people of Jerusalem. All the different types and levels
of society thought well of these first believers. Christians were not a threat to Roman authority or to the Roman peace (one
purpose of Acts). There was no break with rabbinical Judaism at the beginning of the church.
▣ “the Lord was adding” This is an imperfect active indicative. The Bible emphasizes the sovereignty of God. Nothing
happens apart from God’s will. Nothing surprises God. However, this OT way of asserting monotheism (i.e., one causality, see
Special Topic at 2:39) has been misunderstood. I would like to insert two Special Topics, one on the need for balance and one
on covenant. I hope this brings light, not heat!
SPECIAL TOPIC: Election/Predestination and the Need for a Theological Balance
Election is a wonderful doctrine. However, it is not a call to favoritism, but a call to be a channel, a tool or means of others’
redemption! In the Old Testament the term was used primarily for service; in the New Testament it is used primarily for salvation
which issues in service. The Bible never reconciles the seeming contradiction between God’s sovereignty and mankind’s free will,
but affirms them both! A good example of the biblical tension would be Romans 9 on God’s sovereign choice and Romans 10
on mankind’s necessary response (cf. 10:11,13).
The key to this theological tension may be found in Ephesians 1:4. Jesus is God’s elect man and all are potentially elect in
Him (Karl Barth). Jesus is God’s “yes” to fallen mankind’s need (Karl Barth). Ephesians 1:4 also helps clarify the issue by
asserting that the goal of predestination is not heaven, but holiness (Christlikeness). We are often attracted to the benefits of the
gospel and ignore the responsibilities! God’s call (election) is for time as well as eternity!
Doctrines come in relation to other truths, not as single, unrelated truths. A good analogy would be a constellation versus
a single star. God presents truth in eastern, not western, genres. We must not remove the tension caused by dialectical
(paradoxical) pairs of doctrinal truths:
1. Predestination vs. human free will
2. Security of the believers vs. the need for perseverance
3. Original sin vs. volitional sin
4. Sinlessness (perfectionism) vs. sinning less
5. Initial instantaneous justification and sanctification vs. progressive sanctification
6. Christian freedom vs. Christian responsibility
7. God’s transcendence vs. God’s immanence
8. God as ultimately unknowable vs. God as knowable in Scripture
9. The Kingdom of God as present vs. future consummation
10. Repentance as a gift of God vs. repentance as a necessary human covenantal response
11. Jesus as divine vs. Jesus as human
12. Jesus is equal to the Father vs. Jesus as subservient to the Father
The theological concept of “covenant” unites the sovereignty of God (who always takes the initiative and sets the agenda)
with a mandatory initial and continuing repentant, faith response from humans. Be careful of proof-texting one side of the paradox
and depreciating the other! Be careful of asserting only your favorite doctrine or system of theology!
SPECIAL TOPIC: COVENANT
The OT term berith (BDB 136), covenant, is not easy to define. There is no matching verb in Hebrew. All attempts to
derive an etymological or cognate definition have proved unconvincing. However, the obvious centrality of the concept has forced
scholars to examine the word usage to attempt to determine its functional meaning.
Covenant is the means by which the one true God deals with His human creation. The concept of covenant, treaty, or
agreement is crucial in understanding the biblical revelation. The tension between God’s sovereignty and human free-will are
clearly seen in the concept of covenant. Some covenants are based exclusively on God’s character and actions.
1. creation itself (cf. Genesis 1-2)
2. the call of Abraham (cf. Genesis 12)
3. the covenant with Abraham (cf. Genesis 15)
4. the preservation and promise to Noah (cf. Genesis 6-9)
However, the very nature of covenant demands a response.
1. by faith Adam must obey God and not eat of the tree in the midst of Eden
2. by faith Abraham must leave his family, follow God, and believe in future descendants
3. by faith Noah must build a huge boat far from water and gather the animals
4. by faith Moses brought the Israelites out of Egypt to Mt. Sinai and received specific guidelines for religious and social
life with promises of blessings and cursings (cf. Deuteronomy 27-28)
This same tension involving God’s relationship to humanity is addressed in the “new covenant.” The tension can be clearly
seen in comparing Ezekiel 18 with Ezek. 36:27-38 (YHWH’s action). Is the covenant based on God’s gracious actions or
mandated human response? This is the burning issue between the Old Covenant and the New. The goals of both are the same:
(1) the restoration of fellowship with YHWH lost in Genesis 3 and (2) the establishment of a righteous people who reflect God’s
character.
The new covenant of Jer. 31:31-34 solves the tension by removing human performance as the means of attaining acceptance.
God’s law becomes an internal desire instead of an external law code. The goal of a godly, righteous people remains the same,
but the methodology changes. Fallen mankind proved themselves inadequate to be God’s reflected image. The problem was not
God’s covenant, but human sinfulness and weakness (cf. Romans 7; Galatians 3).
The same tension between OT unconditional and conditional covenants remains in the NT. Salvation is absolutely free in
the finished work of Jesus Christ, but it requires repentance and faith (both initially and continually). It is both a legal
pronouncement and a call to Christlikeness, an indicative statement of acceptance and an imperative to holiness! Believers are
not saved by their performance, but unto obedience (cf. Eph. 2:8-10). Godly living becomes the evidence of salvation, not the
means of salvation. However, eternal life has observable characteristics! This tension is clearly seen in Hebrews.
▣
NASB, NRSV “to their number”
NKJV “to the church”
TEV “to their group”
NJB “to their community”
The phrase epi to auto is used in Classical Greek and Koine Greek (Septuagint and Acts 1:15; 2:1,47; I Cor. 11:20; 14:23),
meaning “coming together” (Metzger, Textual Commentary, p. 305). Here in the NT it refers to a church meeting. Therefore,
the Lord added to the church (i.e., the gathering) daily. This shows the lifestyle evangelism of these first generation believers!
▣ “those who were being saved” The phrase “Lord (God or Christ) was adding,” used earlier in v. 46, is an imperfect active
indicative, but this phrase is a present passive participle. The expressed agent of the passive voice is the Lord. The “saved”
are in a process. Salvation starts with belief/trust/faith (i.e., John 1:12; 3:16; Rom. 10:9-13). Salvation is a relationship initiated
by God/Spirit (cf. John 6:44,65), but it must be an ongoing experience. It is not a ticket to heaven or a life insurance policy; it
is a daily, growing, faith relationship. See Special Topic: Greek Verb Tenses Used for Salvation at 2:40.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Outline Peter’s sermon
2. What was the purpose of Pentecost?
3. How did Joel’s prophesy relate to this context?
4. Describe Peter’s use of Old Testament passages.
ACTS 3
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
The Lame Man Healed at |
A Lame Man Healed |
Healing at the Beautiful |
A Lame Beggar is Healed |
The Cure of a Lame Man |
3:1-10 |
3:1-10 |
3:1-10 |
3:1-10 |
3:1-10 |
Peter’s Speech in |
Preaching in Solomon’s |
Peter’s Preaching |
Peter’s Message in the |
Peter’s Address to the |
3:11-26 |
3:11-26 |
3:11-16 |
3:11-16 |
3:11-16 |
|
|
3:17-26 |
3:17-26 |
3:17-24 |
|
|
|
|
3:25-26 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
In chapters 3-5 there is tension in Jerusalem over Jesus’ teaching and the Apostle’s miracles. The time frame for the first
five chapters is about one year.
A. Peter and John heal the lame man, 3:1-4:31 ( an example of Acts 2:43)
1. the healing itself
2. Peter’s second sermon explaining the healing
3. the reaction and trial (Peter’s third sermon, given to the Sanhedrin)
4. the persecution begins
B. An attempt at communal life, Acts 4:32-5:11
1. the early unity of believers (an example of Acts 2:43-47)
2. the problems with Ananias and Sapphira
C. The early church’s relations with rabbinical Judaism, 5:12-42
1. the life of the church
2. the jealousy of the Sanhedrin
3. the intercession of an angel
4. Peter’s fourth sermon
5. the reaction and punishment
TITLES FOR JESUS IN CHAPTERS 3-4
A. Jesus Christ the Nazarene, 3:6; 4:10
B. His Servant Jesus, 3:13,26; 4:27
C. The Holy and Righteous One, 3:14 (cf. 2:27)
D. The Prince of Life, 3:15
E. The Christ, 3:18,20; 4:10 (cf. “Lord and Christ,” 2:36)
F. Prophet, 3:22
G. Possibly an allusion to the title “Seed of Abraham,” 3:25-26
H. The Cornerstone, 4:11
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 3:1-10
1Now Peter and John were going up to the temple at the ninth hour, the hour of prayer. 2And a man who had been
lame from his mother’s womb was being carried along, whom they used to set down every day at the gate of the temple
which is called Beautiful, in order to beg alms of those who were entering the temple. 3When he saw Peter and John about
to go into the temple, he began asking to receive alms. 4But Peter, along with John, fixed his gaze on him and said, “Look
at us!” 5And he began to give them his attention, expecting to receive something from them. 6But Peter said, “I do not
possess silver and gold, but what I do have I give to you: In the name of Jesus Christ the Nazarene – walk!” 7And seizing
him by the right hand, he raised him up; and immediately his feet and his ankles were strengthened. 8With a leap he stood
upright and began to walk; and he entered the temple with them, walking and leaping and praising God. 9And all the
people saw him walking and praising God; 10and they were taking note of him as being the one who used to sit at the
Beautiful Gate of the temple to beg alms, and they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him.
3:1 “Peter and John were going up to the temple” This is an imperfect active indicative. It was the habit of all of the early
disciples to go to the Temple daily (cf. Luke 24:53; Acts 2:46). The original followers of Jesus in Palestine worshiped
1. in the Temple (at least on special days if not daily)
2. in the local synagogue (every Sabbath)
3. with believers on Sunday
This was the pattern for a long period of time. These believers saw no division between their faith in Jesus as the Promised
Messiah and Judaism. They saw themselves as the “people or congregation of Israel.” This is why they chose the name ekklesia
for their group. In the Septuagint this is how the Hebrew covenantal phrase, “the congregation (qahal) of Israel” was translated.
The Jews took official action after the fall of Jerusalem and instituted an oath formula (rejecting Jesus as the Messiah) to
restrict membership in the local synagogues. This is when the church solidified its day of worship as Sunday (the day to
commemorate Jesus’ resurrection; the day Jesus appeared three times to the disciples in the Upper Room).
John is often identified with Peter in Acts (cf. 1:13; 3:1,3,4,11; 4:13,19; 8:14). It is surely possible that the early church in
Jerusalem had groups of leaders which represented different perspectives and emphases of the gospel. Possibly Peter and John
were more open to Gentile evangelism (cf. vv. 8,10), while James (the half-brother of Jesus) was more identified with a
conservative Jewish element. All this changed to some extent after the Jerusalem Council of Acts 15.
▣ “at the ninth hour, the hour of prayer” This would denote nine hours after sunrise. The Jews (i.e., Pharisees) had
traditionally prayed each day at 9 a.m., 12 noon, and 3 p.m. (possibly based on Ps. 55:17). This text refers to the time of the
evening sacrifice, which was 3 p.m. (the morning sacrifice was at 9 a.m.). Many people would have been in the temple at this time
(cf. 10:30).
3:2 “a man who had been lame from his mother’s womb” All of the regular attenders of the Temple knew of this man’s
condition (“was being carried repeatedly” is an imperfect passive); therefore, there was no chance of a trick being involved in
the healing (cf 3:10; 4:22). This was a fulfillment of OT Messianic prophecy (cf. Isa. 35:6). The Jews wanted a sign; Jesus gave
them many, now they have another if they only had eyes to see.
Here is the shocking paradox of the sick sitting daily at the house of God. As a matter of fact, there was even a prohibition
against these kinds of people actively participating in worship (i.e., serving as priests, cf. Lev. 21:16-24). The gospel offers a new
day. Even an Ethiopian (no race barriers) eunuch (no physical barriers) is welcome in the new kingdom (cf. 8:26-40).
▣ “the gate of the temple which is called Beautiful” The exact location of this gate is uncertain. It was possibly the Nicanor
Gate which was made of Corinthian brass (Flavius Josephus, Antiq. 15.11.3; Wars 5.5.3). It led from the Court of the Gentiles
to the Court of the Women. It was on the eastern side of the temple, facing the Mount of Olives, close to Solomon’s Portico.
▣ “to beg alms of those who were entering” Almsgiving, or giving to the poor, was a required part of the Jewish faith (cf. Matt.
6:1-4; Luke 11:41; 12:33; Acts 10:2,4,31; 24:17). Usually money was collected weekly in the local synagogues and then food
distributed, but apparently some begged daily in the Temple area itself.
SPECIAL TOPIC: ALMSGIVING
I. The term itself
A. This term developed within Judaism (i.e., the Septuagint period).
B. It refers to giving to the poor and/or needy
C. The English word, almsgiving, comes from a contraction of the Greek term eleēmosunē.
II. Old Testament concept
A. The concept of helping the poor was expressed early in the Torah
1. typical context, Deut. 15:7-11
2. “gleaning,” leaving part of the harvest for the poor, Lev. 19:9; 23:22; Deut. 24:20
3. “sabbath year,” allowing the poor to eat the produce of the seventh, fallow year, Exod. 23:10-11; Lev. 25:2-7.
B. The concept was developed in Wisdom Literature (selected examples)
1. Job 5:8-16; 29:12-17 (the wicked described in 24:1-12)
2. the Psalms, 11:7
3. Proverbs 11:4; 14:21,31; 16:6; 21:3,13
III. Development in Judaism
A. The first division of the Mishnah deals with how to treat the poor, needy, and local Levites.
B. Selected quotes
1. Ecclesiasticus (also known as the Wisdom of Ben Sirach) 3:30, “as water extinguishes a blazing fire, so
almsgiving atones for sin” (NRSV)
2. Ecclesiasticus 29:12, “store up almsgiving in your treasury and it will rescue you from every disaster” (NRSV)
3. Tobit 4:6-11, “for those who act in accordance with truth will prosper in all their activities. To all those who
practice righteousnessb 7give alms from your possessions, and do not let your eye begrudge the gift when you
make it. Do not turn your face away from anyone who is poor, and the face of God will not be turned away from
you. 8If you have many possessions, make your gift from them in proportion; if few, do not be afraid to give
according to the little you have. 9So you will be laying up a good treasure for yourself against the day of
necessity. 10For almsgiving delivers from death and keeps you from going into the Darkness. 11Indeed,
almsgiving, for all who practice it, is an excellent offering in the presence of the Most High.” (NRSV)
4. Tobit 12:8-9, “8Prayer and fastingd is good, but better than both is almsgiving with righteousness. A little with
righteousness is better than wealth with wrongdoinge. It is better to give alms than to lay up gold. 9For
almsgiving saves from death and purges away every sin. Those who give alms will enjoy a full life.” (NRSV)
C. The last quote from Tobit 12:8-9 shows the problem developing. Human actions/human merits were seen as the
mechanism for both forgiveness and abundance.
This concept developed further in the Septuagint where the Greek term for “almsgiving” (eleēmosunē) became a
synonym for “righteousness” (dikaiosunē). They could be substituted for each other in translating the Hebrew
“righteousness” (BDB 842, God’s covenant love and loyalty, cf. Deut. 6:25; 24:13; Isa. 1:27; 28:17; 59:16; Dan. 4:27).
D. Human acts of compassion became a goal in themselves to achieve one’s personal abundance here and salvation at
death. The act itself, instead of the motive behind the act, became theologically preeminent. God looks at the heart,
then judges the work of the hand. This was the teaching of the rabbis, but it somehow got lost in individual self-righteousness (cf. Micah 6:8).
IV. New Testament reaction
A. The term is found in
1. Matt. 6:1-4
2. Luke 11:41; 12:33
3. Acts 3:2-3,10; 10:2,4,31; 24:17
B. Jesus addresses the traditional understanding of righteousness as (cf. II Clement 16:4)
1. almsgiving
2. fasting
3. prayer
C. In Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (cf. Matthew 5-7). Some Jews were trusting in their actions. These actions are meant
to flow out of a love for God, His word and covenant brothers and sisters, not self-interest or self-righteousness!
Humility and secrecy become guidelines for proper actions. The heart is crucial. The heart is desperately wicked.
God must change the heart. The new heart emulates God!
3:3 The man’s motive was originally only monetary (cf. v. 5).
3:4 “fixed his gaze on” See note at 1:10.
▣ “look at us” They wanted his undivided attention (blepō is in an aorist active imperative form).
3:5 The Apostles were not monetarily wealthy men, but they had access to the spiritual resources of God (cf. v. 6).
3:6 “In the name of Jesus Christ” “Name” is a Hebrew idiom which speaks of one’s character (cf. Luke 9:48,49; 10:17;
21:12,17; 24:47, see Special Topic at 2:21). This must have been shocking to this man. Jesus was a recently condemned and
crucified criminal, whom this stranger (i.e,. Peter) was calling “the Messiah” (i.e., “The Christ,” which is the Greek translation,
see Special Topic at 2:31).
▣ “The Nazarene” See Special Topic at 2:22.
▣ “walk” This is a present active imperative. Peter and John, like Jesus, used a chance encounter to demonstrate God’s love
and power and also to confirm the gospel message (cf. v. 9). This healing drew the attention of the Jewish worshipers (cf. v. 12ff).
3:7 This is an eyewitness account of several related events. Someone who was there told Luke about this in vivid, detailed terms.
▣ “immediately” This is the Greek term parachrēma. Luke uses it ten times in his Gospel and six times in Acts (cf. 3:7; 5:10;
12:23; 13:11; 16:26,33). It is used only twice in Matthew and nowhere else in the NT. It is used several times in the Septuagint.
Luke uses idioms and terms from this Greek translation of the Hebrew OT often. He must have known the OT well, possibly from
his contact with the Apostle Paul or involvement in Christian catechism with new believers.
3:8 “With a leap he stood upright” This is a present middle participle (cf. v. 9). This man began walking all around this
section of the Temple. What an opportunity to share the Good News!
3:10 They knew this man (imperfect active indicative, they began to recognize him). He was no stranger or visitor. They had
seen him at the gate day after day, and passed by! However, Jesus’ representatives did not just pass by, they acted in Pentecostal
power!
▣ “they were filled” Luke uses this term often (see full note at 5:17). Humans can be “filled” with many things (i.e.,
characterized by).
1. the Holy Spirit, Luke 1:15,41,67; Acts 2:4; 4:8,31; 9:17; 13:9
2. rage, Luke 4:28; 6:11
3. fear, Luke 5:26
4. wonder and amazement, Acts 3:10
5. jealousy, Acts 5:17; 13:45
6. confusion, Acts 19:29
Peter and John wanted these who were amazed (he got their attention) to be filled with the gospel!
▣ “wonder and amazement” These things are also common in Luke’s writings.
1. wonder, thambos, Luke 3:6; 5:9; Acts 3:10 and ekthambos in 3:11
2. amazement
a. ekstasis, Luke 5:26; Acts 3:10; 10:10; 11:5; 22:17
b. existēmi, Luke 2:47; 8:56; 24:22; Acts 2:7,12; 8:9,11; 9:21; 10:45; 12:16
God’s love and acts always cause amazement (these Greek words were used in the Septuagint for fear and awe of God, cf. Gen.
15:12; Exod. 23:27; Deut. 28:28).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 3:11-16
11While he was clinging to Peter and John, all the people ran together to them at the so-called portico of Solomon,
full of amazement. 12But when Peter saw this, he replied to the people, “Men of Israel, why are you amazed at this, or why
do you gaze at us, as if by our own power or piety we had made him walk? 13The God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, the
God of our fathers, has glorified His servant Jesus, the one whom you delivered and disowned in the presence of Pilate,
when he had decided to release Him. 14But you disowned the Holy and Righteous One and asked for a murderer to be
granted to you, 15but put to death the Prince of life, the one whom God raised from the dead, a fact to which we are
witnesses. 16And on the basis of faith in His name, it is the name of Jesus which has strengthened this man whom you see
and know; and the faith which comes through Him has given him this perfect health in the presence of you all.”
3:11 “while he was clinging to Peter” This is a present active participle. I would imagine he was holding on to Peter as Mary
held on to Jesus in the garden (cf. John 20:16-17).
▣ “the portico of Solomon” This was a long covered area along the eastern side of the court of the Gentiles (cf. Josephus’ Antiq.
20.9.7). The roof was supported by many columns. It got its name from the fact that the old foundations of Solomon’s temple
were located in the same general area. Jesus taught there often (cf. John 10:23).
3:12 “when Peter saw this” They saw the amazement and curiosity of the crowd and took advantage (cf. Col. 4:3; II Tim. 4:2)
of the opportunity to share the gospel (i.e., the second sermon of the new church).
▣ “Men of Israel” Peter called them this in 2:22. Peter is still addressing Jews.
▣ “why. . .why” Peter asked why they were surprised by a miraculous healing. Had not Jesus performed these kinds of miracles
during the last week of His life?
Also, why did they look at Peter and John so admiringly, as if they did it? This was a sign of the trustworthiness of the gospel
and the power of the name of the resurrected Messiah.
The Spirit performed this miracle for several reasons.
1. to confirm the leadership of Peter and John
2. to help a needy man
3. to witness to the Jews at the Temple
3:13 “The God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob” This shows that Jesus’ ministry and the gospel were vitally connected to the
Covenant God and Covenant people of the Old Testament (cf. Exod. 3:6,15; Luke 20:37).
Christianity must be characterized as the true fulfillment of Judaism (cf. Matt. 5:17-19). Many Jews would see it as a
perversion, but NT writers saw it as a fulfillment. The followers of Jesus are the promised fruition of the “new covenant” of Jer.
31:31-34 (cf. Gal. 6:16). Israel did not complete her missionary task of being a kingdom of priests for the world (cf. Exod. 19:5-6;
I Pet. 2:5,9; Rev. 1:6). The church has been given the mandate (cf. Matt. 28:18-20; Luke 24:46-47; Acts 1:8). God’s goal is the
restoration of His image in mankind, so that His initial purpose of fellowship can be accomplished. If there is only one God (i.e.,
monotheism, see Special Topic at 2:39), then there cannot be a special people, only servants to serve God’s universal purposes
with all humanity (see Special Topic at 1:8).
▣ “has glorified” This term can be understood in several ways.
1. the immediate context to the healing of the lame man in His name
2. the larger context of Peter’s sermon to Jesus being resurrected and thereby glorified
3. the OT context to Jesus as the coming Messiah
4. in John’s Gospel this term is always used by Jesus Himself for His crucifixion (cf. 7:39; 12:10,23; 13:31-32; 16:14;
17:1).
SPECIAL TOPIC: GLORY (DOXA)
The biblical concept of “glory” is difficult to define. Believers’ glory is that they understand the gospel and glory in God,
not in themselves (cf. 1:29-31; Jer. 9:23-24).
In the OT the most common Hebrew word for “glory” (kbd, BDB 217) was originally a commercial term relating to a pair
of scales (“to be heavy”). That which was heavy was valuable or had intrinsic worth. Often the concept of brightness was added
to the word to express God’s majesty (cf. Exod. 19:16-18; 24:17; Isa. 60:1-2). He alone is worthy and honorable. He is too
brilliant for fallen mankind to behold (cf. Exod 33:17-23; Isa. 6:5). YHWH can only be truly known through Christ (cf. John
12:45; 14:8-11; Col.1:15; Heb. 1:3).The term “glory” is somewhat ambiguous.
1. it may be parallel to “the righteousness of God”
2. it may refer to the “holiness” or “perfection” of God
3. it could refer to the image of God in which mankind was created (cf. Gen. 1:26-27; 5:1; 9:6), but
which was later marred through rebellion (cf. Gen. 3:1-21). It is first used of YHWH’s presence
with His people during the wilderness wandering period in Exod. 16:7,10; Lev. 9:23; and Num. 14:10.
▣ “His servant” The term “servant” (pais used regularly in the LXX)
1. an honorific title in the OT used for Jacob, Moses, Joshua, and David (cf. Psalm 105; Luke 1:69)
2. in the Servant Songs of Isaiah (i.e., 42:1-5; 49:1-7; 50:4-11; 52:13-53:12)
3. the nation of Israel (cf. 41:8-9; 42:19; 43:10; 44:1,21; also LXX seen in Luke 1:54)
4. God’s Messiah (cf. 42:1; 52:13; 53:11)
5. Pais is used of Jesus as the Servant/Messiah in Acts 3:13,26; 4:27,30
There is not a clear distinction between the corporate and individual aspect, especially in the last Song (i.e., Isa. 52:13-53:12). In context it cannot refer to Israel.
1. the nation cannot be the innocent one who brings redemption because the nation deserves the judgment (cf. Isa. 41:18-22; 53:8d)
2. the Septuagint changes “you” in Isa. 52:14 to “Him” (also in v. 15). The Jewish translators before Jesus’ birth
(possibly 250-150 b.c.) saw this text as Messianic and individual.
▣ “Jesus” When the name Jesus is used by itself, it usually emphasizes His humanness (cf. v. 6).
▣ “whom you delivered and disowned” The “you” is emphatic! It was not only the Jewish leaders who were responsible for
Jesus’ death (cf. v. 17; 2:23). Peter makes a specific reference to the crowd’s responses before Pilate (cf. Luke 23:18-25). It is
possible some of these may have been there, but Peter addresses this crowd as if they were responsible as a group (cf. v. 15).
God’s chosen people (Jews) “delivered” and “disowned” God’s Messiah (cf. John 1:11).
▣ “Pilate” See Special Topic below.
SPECIAL TOPIC: PONTIUS PILATE
I. The Man
A. Place and time of birth unknown
B. Of the Equestrian order (upper middle class of Roman society)
C. Married, but no known children
D. Earlier administrative appointments (of which there must have been several) unknown
II. His Personality
A. Two different views
1. Philo (Legatio and Gaium, 299-305) and Josephus (Antiq. 18.3.1 and Jewish Wars 2.9.2-4) depict him as a cruel
and uncompassionate dictator.
2. The NT (Gospels, Acts) presents a weak, easily manipulated Roman procurator
B. Paul Barnett, Jesus and the Rise of Early Christianity, pp. 143-148, gives a plausible explanation of these two views.
1. Pilate was not appointed procurator in a.d. 26 under Tiberius, who was pro-Jewish (cf. Philo, Legatio and Gaium,
160-161) by the advice of Sejanus, Tiberius’ anti-Jewish, chief advisor.
2. Tiberius suffered a loss of political power to L. Aelius Sejanus, his praetorian prefect who became the real power
behind the throne and who hated Jews (Philo, Legatio land Gaium, 159-160).
3. Pilate was a protege of Sejanus and tried to impress him by
a. bringing Roman standards into Jerusalem (a.d. 26), which other procurators had not done. These symbols
of Roman gods inflamed the Jews (cf. Josephus’ Antiq. 18.3.1; Jewish Wars 2.9.2-3).
b. minting coins (a.d. 29-31) which had images of Roman worship engraved on them. Josephus says he was
purposefully trying to overturn Jewish laws and customs (cf. Josephus, Antiq. 18.4.1-2).
c. taking money from the Temple treasury to build an aqueduct in Jerusalem (cf. Josephus, Antiq. 18.3.2;
Jewish Wars 2.9.3).
d. having several Galileans killed while offering a sacrifice at Passover in Jerusalem (cf. Luke 13:12).
e. bringing Roman shields into Jerusalem in a.d. 31. Herod the Great’s son appealed to him to remove them,
but he would not, so they wrote Tiberius, who demanded they be removed back to Caesarea by the sea (cf.
Philo, Legatio and Gaium, 299-305).
f. having many Samaritans slaughtered on Mt. Gerizim (a.d. 36/37) as they searched for sacred objects of their
religion, which had been lost. This caused Pilate’s local superior (Vitellius, Prefect of Syria) to remove him
from office and send him to Rome (cf. Josephus, Antiq. 18.4.1-2).
4. Sejanus was executed in a.d. 31 and Tiberius was restored to full political power; therefore, #a, b, c and d were
possibly done by Pilate to earn Sejanus’ trust; #e and f could have been attempts to earn Tiberius’ trust, but may
have backfired.
5. It is obvious with a pro-Jewish emperor restored, plus an official letter to procurators from Tiberius to be kind
to Jews (cf. Philo, Legatio and Gaium, 160-161), that the Jewish leadership in Jerusalem took advantage of
Pilate’s political vulnerability with Tiberius and manipulated him to have Jesus crucified. This theory of Barnett
brings the two views of Pilate together in a plausible way.
III. His Fate
A. He was recalled and arrived in Rome just after Tiberius’ death (a.d. 37).
B. He was not reappointed.
C. His life is unknown after this. There are many later theories, but no secure facts.
▣ “when he had decided to release Him” This refers to Luke 23:4,14,22, where Pilate says three times, “I find no guilt in Him,”
as well as the three times he tried to release Him (cf. Luke 23:16,20,22). Many scholars believe Acts was written to show that
Roman officials did not find Jesus treasonous. Pilate was forced by the Jewish leadership to do that which he was reluctant to
do himself.
3:14 “the Holy and Righteous One” This states clearly the innocence and sinlessness of Jesus. The trial was a farce. This is
another OT Messianic title (cf. Isa. 53:11; Acts 7:52; 22:14; John 6:69). The demons called Jesus the Holy One of God in Mark
1:24; Luke 4:34. See Special Topics following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE HOLY ONE
“The Holy One” can refer to
1. God the Father (cf. numerous OT passages on “the Holy One of Israel”)
2. God the Son (cf. Mark 1:24; Luke 4:34; John 6:69; Acts 3:14)
3. God the Spirit (His title, “Holy Spirit” cf. John 1:33; 14:26; 20:22).
Acts 10:38 is a verse where all three persons of the Godhead are involved in anointing. Jesus was anointed (cf. Luke 4:18;
Acts 4:17; 10:38). Here the concept is widened to include all believers (cf. I John 2:27). The Anointed One has become the
anointed ones! This may be parallel to Antichrist and antichrists (cf. I John 2:18). The OT symbolic act of physical anointing with
oil (cf. Exod. 29:7; 30:25; 37:29) relates to those who were called and equipped by God for a special task (i.e., ; prophets, priests,
and kings). The word “Christ” is a translation of the Hebrew term “the anointed one” or Messiah.
SPECIAL TOPIC: RIGHTEOUSNESS
“Righteousness” is such a crucial topic that a Bible student must make a personal extensive study of the concept.
In the OT God’s character is described as “just” or “righteous” (BDB 841). The Mesopotamian term itself comes from a
river reed which was used as a construction tool to judge the horizontal straightness of walls and fences. God chose the term to
be used metaphorically of His own nature. He is the straight edge (ruler) by which all things are evaluated. This concept asserts
God’s righteousness as well as His right to judge.
Man was created in the image of God (cf. Gen. 1:26-27; 5:1,3; 9:6). Mankind was created for fellowship with God. All of
creation is a stage or backdrop for God and mankind’s interaction. God wanted His highest creation, mankind, to know Him, love
Him, serve Him, and be like Him! Mankind’s loyalty was tested (cf. Genesis 3) and the original couple failed the test. This
resulted in a disruption of the relationship between God and humanity (cf. Genesis 3; Rom. 5:12-21).
God promised to repair and restore the fellowship (cf. Gen. 3:15). He does this through His own will and His own Son.
Humans were incapable of restoring the breach (cf. Rom. 1:18-3:20).
After the Fall, God’s first step toward restoration was the concept of covenant based on His invitation and mankind’s
repentant, faithful, obedient response. Because of the Fall, humans were incapable of appropriate action (cf. Rom. 3:21-31;
Galatians 3). God Himself had to take the initiative to restore covenant-breaking humans. He did this by
1. declaring mankind righteous through the work of Christ (i.e., forensic righteousness).
2. freely giving mankind righteousness through the work of Christ (i.e., imputed righteousness).
3. providing the indwelling Spirit who produces righteousness (i.e., Christlikeness, the restoration of the image of God)
in mankind.
4. restoring the fellowship of the Garden of Eden
However, God requires a covenantal response. God decrees (i.e., freely gives) and provides, but humans must respond and
continue to respond in
1. repentance
2. faith
3. lifestyle obedience
4. perseverance
Righteousness, therefore, is a covenantal, reciprocal action between God and His highest creation. Based on the character
of God, the work of Christ, and the enabling of the Spirit, to which each individual must personally and continually respond
appropriately. The concept is called “justification by faith.” The concept is revealed in the Gospels, but not in these terms. It
is primarily defined by Paul, who uses the Greek term “righteousness” in its various forms over 100 times.
Paul, being a trained rabbi, uses the term dikaiosunē in its Hebrew sense of the term SDQ used in the Septuagint, not from
Greek literature. In Greek writings the term is connected to someone who conformed to the expectations of Deity and society.
In the Hebrew sense it is always structured in covenantal terms. YHWH is a just, ethical, moral God. He wants His people to
reflect His character. Redeemed mankind becomes a new creature. This newness results in a new lifestyle of godliness (Roman
Catholic focus of justification). Since Israel was a theocracy there was no clear delineation between the secular (society’s norms)
and the sacred (God’s will). This distinction is expressed in the Hebrew and Greek terms being translated into English as “justice”
(relating to society) and “righteousness” (relating to religion).
The gospel (good news) of Jesus is that fallen mankind has been restored to fellowship with God. This has been
accomplished through the Father’s love, mercy, and grace; the Son’s life, death, and resurrection; and the Spirit’s wooing and
drawing to the gospel. Justification is a free act of God, but it must issue in godliness (Augustine’s position, which reflects both
the Reformation emphasis on the freeness of the gospel and Roman Catholic emphasis on a changed life of love and faithfulness).
For Reformers the term “the righteousness of God” is an objective genitive (i.e., the act of making sinful mankind acceptable
to God [positional sanctification], while for the Catholics it is a subjective genitive, which is the process of becoming more like
God [experiential progressive sanctification]. In reality it is surely both!!)
In my view all of the Bible from Genesis 4 – Revelation 20 is a record of God’s restoring the fellowship of Eden. The Bible
starts with God and mankind in fellowship in an earthly setting (cf. Genesis 1-2) and the Bible ends with the same setting (cf.
Revelation 21-22). God’s image and purpose will be restored!
To document the above discussions note the following selected NT passages illustrating the Greek word group.
1. God is righteous (often connected to God as Judge)
a. Romans 3:26
b. II Thessalonians 1:5-6
c. II Timothy 4:8
d. Revelation 16:5
2. Jesus is righteous
a. Acts 3:14; 7:52; 22:14 (title of Messiah)
b. Matthew 27:19
c. I John 2:1,29; 3:7
3. God’s will for His creation is righteousness
a. Leviticus 19:2
b. Matthew 5:48 (cf. 5:17-20)
4. God’s means of providing and producing righteousness
a. Romans 3:21-31
b. Romans 4
c. Romans 5:6-11
d. Galatians 3:6-14
e. Given by God
1) Romans 3:24; 6:23
2) I Corinthians 1:30
3) Ephesians 2:8-9
f. Received by faith
1) Romans 1:17; 3:22,26; 4:3,5,13; 9:30; 10:4,6,10
2) II Corinthians 5:21
g. Through acts of the Son
1) Romans 5:21
2) II Corinthians 5:21
3) Philippians 2:6-11
5. God’s will is that His followers be righteous
a. Matthew 5:3-48; 7:24-27
b. Romans 2:13; 5:1-5; 6:1-23
c. Ephesians 1:4; 2:10
d. I Timothy 6:11
e. II Timothy 2:22; 3:16
f. John 3:7
g. I Peter 2:24
6. God will judge the world by righteousness
a. Acts 17:31
b. II Timothy 4:8
Righteousness is a characteristic of God, freely given to sinful mankind through Christ. It is
1. a decree of God
2. a gift of God
3. an act of Christ
4. a life to be lived
But it is also a process of becoming righteous that must be vigorously and steadfastly pursued, which will one day be
consummated at the Second Coming. Fellowship with God is restored at salvation but progresses throughout life to become
a face-to-face encounter at death or the Parousia!
Here is a good quote to conclude this discussion. It is taken from Dictionary of Paul and His Letters from IVP
“Calvin, more so than Luther, emphasizes the relational aspect of the righteousness of God. Luther’s view of the
righteousness of God seems to contain the aspect of acquittal. Calvin emphasizes the marvelous nature of the
communication or imparting of God’s righteousness to us” (p. 834).
For me the believer’s relationship to God has three aspects.
1. the gospel is a person (emphasis of the Eastern Church and Calvin)
2. the gospel is truth (emphasis of Augustine and Luther)
3. the gospel is a changed life (Catholic emphasis)
They are all true and must be held together for a healthy, sound, biblical Christianity. If any one is over emphasized or
depreciated, problems occur.
We must welcome Jesus!
We must believe the gospel!
We must pursue Christlikeness!
▣ “and asked for a murderer” It is so ironic that Barabbas was guilty of the exact crime they accused Jesus of—sedition (cf.
Luke 23:18-19,23-25).
3:15 “but put to death” It is surprising that in the many texts which mention Jesus’ death (cf. 2:23,36; 3:15; 4:10; 5:30; 7:52;
10:39; 13:28) in Acts very little is developed along the lines of Gen. 3:15 or Isaiah 53.
There is also variety in how His death is phrased.
1. nailed to a cross – 2:23
2. crucified – 2:36; 4:10
3. put to death – 3:15; 13:28
4. put to death by hanging Him on a cross – 5:30; 10:39
5. killed – 7:52
The resurrection is emphasized but not substitutionary atonement.
▣
NASB, NKJV “the Prince of life”
NRSV, NIV “the Author of life”
TEV “the one who leads to life”
NJB “the prince of life”
Moffatt “the pioneer of life”
This title reflects one of the three possible meanings of archēgos:
1. the author or originator (cf. NRSV, Heb. 2:10; 12:2)
2. the agent of creation (cf. John 1:3; I Cor. 8:6; Col. 1:16; Heb. 1:2)
3. the one who goes first, a trail blazer (cf. TEV, NEB, Moffatt, Acts. 5:31)
The term is an obvious contrast to “murderer” (v. 14). See Special Topic below.
SPECIAL TOPIC: AUTHOR/LEADER (ARCHĒGOS)
The term “author” or “leader” is the Greek term archēgos. It comes from the Greek root “beginning” (archē) and “to go”
or “to lead” (agō). This compound came to be used of a ruler, prince, or leader (human or angelic). The term is only used three
other times in the NT:
1. Prince or author in Acts 3:15
2. prince or leader (cf. Acts 5:21)
3. the author (or pioneer) and perfecter of the faith in Heb. 12:2.
Jesus is the starter, the provider, and the finisher of salvation.
▣ “God raised from the dead” Usually in the NT it is the Father who raises the Son from the dead as a sign of His approval of
Jesus’ life, teachings, and substitutionary death. The NT also affirms that all three persons of the Trinity were active in Jesus’
resurrection:
1. the Spirit (cf. Rom. 8:11)
2. the Son (cf. John 2:19-22; 10:17-18)
3. the Father (cf. Acts 2:24,32; 3:15,26; 4:10; 5:30; 10:40; 13:30,33,34,37; 17:31; Rom. 6:4,9)
This is a major theological aspect of the Kerygma (see Special Topic at 2:14). If this is not true, all else is not true (cf. I Cor.
15:12-19).
▣ “a fact to which we are witnesses” This is either
1. an emphasis on primary source material; these hearers were eyewitnesses (cf. 2:22)
2. a reference to the Apostles and disciples in the Upper Room (cf. 1:22; 2:32)
In context number 2 seems best.
3:16 “on the basis of faith” This same phrase occurs in Phil. 3:9. The Greek term “faith” (pistis) can be translated into English
as “faith,” “trust,” or “believe.” It is humanity’s conditional response to God’s unconditional grace (cf. Eph. 2:8-9). It is basically
the believer’s trusting in the trustworthiness of God (i.e., His character, His promises, His Messiah) or faithing God’s faithfulness!
It is difficult in the healing accounts of the Gospels and Acts to document the spiritual (i.e., covenantal) side of the event. Those
healed are not always “saved” (cf. John 5). See Special Topic below.
The Greek preposition used in this phrase, eis (cf. Phil. 3:9), is rare when used on one’s faith in Christ (similar expression
in Acts 2:38). Usually one of several prepositions is used.
1. dia – Rom. 3:22,25,30; Gal. 2:16; 3:14,26; Eph. 2:8; 3:12,17; Col. 2:12; II Tim. 3:15; I Pet. 1:5
2. ek – Rom. 9:30; 14:23; Gal. 3:8,9,22; 5:5; James 2:24
3. en –I Cor. 16:13; II Cor. 13:5; Gal. 2:20; I Tim. 3:13
4. both eis and ek are used in Rom. 1:17
There was not standardized phrase to express “saving faith.”
SPECIAL TOPIC: Faith, Believe, or Trust (Pistis [noun], Pisteuō, [verb], Pistos [adjective])
A. This is such an important term in the Bible (cf. Heb. 11:1,6). It is the subject of Jesus’ early preaching (cf. Mark 1:15).
There are at least two new covenant requirements: repentance and faith (cf. Mark 1:15; Acts 3:16,19; 20:21).
B. Its etymology
1. The term “faith” in the OT meant loyalty, fidelity, or trustworthiness and was a description of God’s nature, not
ours.
2. It came from a Hebrew term (emun, emunah, BDB 53), which meant “to be sure or stable.” Saving faith is mental
assent (set of truths), moral living (a lifestyle), and primarily a relational (welcoming of a person) and volitional
commitment (a decision) to that person.
C. Its OT usage
It must be emphasized that Abraham’s faith was not in a future Messiah, but in God’s promise that he would have
a child and descendants (cf. Genesis 12:2; 15:2-5; 17:4-8; 18:14). Abraham responded to this promise by trusting in
God. He still had doubts and problems about this promise, which took thirteen years to be fulfilled. His imperfect
faith, however, was accepted by God. God is willing to work with flawed human beings who respond to Him and His
promises in faith, even if it is the size of a mustard seed (cf. Matt. 17:20).
D. Its NT usage
The term “believed” is from the Greek term (pisteuō) which can also be translated “believe,” “faith,” or “trust.” For
example, the noun does not occur in the Gospel of John, but the verb is used often. In John 2:23-25 there is
uncertainty as to the genuineness of the crowd’s commitment to Jesus of Nazareth as the Messiah. Other examples of
this superficial use of the term “believe” are in John 8:31-59 and Acts 8:13, 18-24. True biblical faith is more than
an initial response. It must be followed by a process of discipleship (cf. Matt. 13:20-22,31-32).
E. Its use with prepositions
1. eis means “into.” This unique construction emphasizes believers putting their trust/faith in Jesus
a. into His name (John 1:12; 2:23; 3:18; I John 5:13)
b. into Him (John 2:11; 3:15,18; 4:39; 6:40; 7:5,31,39,48; 8:30; 9:36; 10:42; 11:45,48; 12:37,42; Matt. 18:6;
Acts 10:43; Phil. 1:29; I Pet. 1:8)
c. into Me (John 6:35; 7:38; 11:25,26; 12:44,46; 14:1,12; 16:9; 17:20)
d. into the Son (John 3:36; 9:35; I John 5:10)
e. into Jesus (John 12:11; Acts 19:4; Gal. 2:16)
f. into Light (John 12:36)
g. into God (John 14:1)
2. en means “in” as in John 3:15; Mark 1:15; Acts 5:14
3. epi means “in” or upon, as in Matt. 27:42; Acts 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19; Rom. 4:5,24; 9:33; 10:11; I Tim. 1:16;
I Pet. 2:6
4. the dative case with no preposition as in John 4:50;Gal. 3:6; Acts 18:8; 27:25; I John 3:23; 5:10
5. hoti, which means “believe that,” gives content as to what to believe
a. Jesus is the Holy One of God (John 6:69)
b. Jesus is the I Am (John 8:24)
c. Jesus is in the Father and the Father is in Him (John 10:38)
d. Jesus is the Messiah (John 11:27; 20:31)
e. Jesus is the Son of God (John 11:27; 20:31)
f. Jesus was sent by the Father (John 11:42; 17:8,21)
g. Jesus is one with the Father (John 14:10-11)
h. Jesus came from the Father (John 16:27,30)
i. Jesus identified Himself in the covenant name of the Father, “I Am” (John 8:24; 13:19)
j. We will live with Him (Rom. 6:8)
k. Jesus died and rose again (I Thess. 4:14)
▣ The second part of v. 16 is stated in synonymous parallelism, so typical of Hebrew wisdom literature.
1. a. “the name of Jesus”
b. “has strengthened this man”
c. “whom you see and know”
2. a. “faith that comes through Him”
b. “has given him this perfect health”
c. “in the presence of you all”
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 3:17-26
17“And now, brethren, I know that you acted in ignorance, just as your rulers did also. 18But the things which God
announced beforehand by the mouth of all the prophets, that His Christ would suffer, He has thus fulfilled. 19Therefore
repent and return, so that your sins may be wiped away, in order that times of refreshing may come from the presence
of the Lord; 20and that He may send Jesus, the Christ appointed for you, 21whom heaven must receive until the period
of restoration of all things about which God spoke by the mouth of His holy prophets from ancient time. 22Moses said,
‘The Lord God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brethren; to Him you shall give heed to
everything He says to you. 23And it will be that every soul that does not heed that prophet shall be utterly destroyed from
among the people.’ 24And likewise, all the prophets who have spoken, from Samuel and his successors onward, also
announced these days. 25 ‘It is you who are the sons of the prophets and of the covenant which God made with your
fathers, saying to Abraham, And in your seed all the families of the earth shall be blessed.’ 26For you first, God
raised up His Servant and sent Him to bless you by turning every one of you from your wicked ways.”
3:17 “I know that you acted in ignorance” This reflects Jesus’ words from the cross (cf. Luke 23:34). However, even in their
ignorance, the people were still spiritually responsible! In some ways this excuse was a way to help people accept their own
responsibility (cf. 13:27; 17:30; 26:9; I Cor. 2:8). For a good discussion of the concept see Millard Erickson, Christian Theology,
2nd ed., pp. 583-585.
▣ “just as you rulers did also” Luke often makes a distinction between the people and their rulers (cf. Luke 7:29-30; 23:35; Acts
13:27; 14:5). The real issue in trying to do this may be the mutual responsibility of both groups. Often it is asserted that Jesus
does not condemn Jews as a whole, but their illegal (i.e., not of Aaronic descent) leaders. It is surely difficult to know if the
cursing of the fig tree (cf. Mark 11:12-14,20-24) and the parable of the unjust vineyard tenants (cf. Luke 20:9-18) are
condemnations of Judaism of the first century or only its leaders. Luke asserts it is both!
3:18 “announced beforehand” The gospel was no afterthought with God, but His eternal, purposeful plan (cf. Gen. 3:15; Mark
10:45; Luke 22:22; Acts 2:23; 3:18; 4:28; Rom. 1:2, see Special Topic at 1:8). The early sermons in Acts (the kerygma, see
Special Topic at 2:14) present Jesus as the fulfillment of OT promises and prophecies.
There are several aspects of the Kerygma (i.e., the major theological aspects of the sermons in Acts) expressed in these
verses.
1. faith in Jesus is essential
2. Jesus’ person and work were prophesied by OT prophets
3. the Messiah must suffer
4. they must repent
5. Jesus is coming again.
▣ “God announced beforehand by the mouth of all the prophets” Jesus fulfilled OT prophecy (cf. v. 34, Matt. 5:17-48).
I think Jesus Himself showed the two on the road to Emmaus (cf. Luke 24:13-35) the OT prophecies that pertained to His
suffering, death, and resurrection. They shared this with the Apostles, who made it part of their preaching (cf. Luke 24:45).
▣ “Christ” This is the Greek translation of the Hebrew word “ Messiah” (see Special Topic at 2:31), which means Anointed One.
This refers to God’s special agent whose life and death would inaugurate the new age of righteousness, the new age of the Spirit.
The affirmation that Jesus was/is the Christ/Messiah promised by YHWH becomes a recurrent theme of the preaching of
Acts.
1. Peter – 2:31; 3:18; 5:42; 8:5
2. Paul – 9:22; 17:3; 18:5,28
▣ “suffer” This was alluded to in several OT texts (cf. Gen. 3:15; Psalm 22; Isaiah 53; Zech. 12:10). This aspect of a suffering
Messiah is what surprised the Jews (cf. I Cor. 1:23). They were expecting a conquering general (cf. Rev. 20:11-16). This was
a recurrent theme of Apostolic sermons in Acts
1. Paul (cf. Acts 17:3; 26:23)
2. Peter (cf. Acts 3:18; I Pet. 1:10-12; 2:21; 3:18)
3:19 “repent and return” The Greek term “repent” means a change of mind. This is an aorist active imperative of metanoeō.
The Hebrew term for repentance means “change of action” (“return” [emistrephō] may reflect the Hebrew “turn” shub, cf. Num.
30:36; Deut. 30:2,10) in the Septuagint. Repentance is a necessary covenant item in salvation along with faith (cf. Mark 1:15 and
Acts 3:16,19; 20:21). Acts mentions it often (cf. Peter – 2:38; 3:19,26 and Paul – 14:15; 17:30; 20:21; 26:20). Repentance is
indispensable (cf. Luke 13:3 and II Peter 3:9). It is basically a willingness to change. It is a both a human volitional act and a
gift of God (cf. Acts 5:31; 11:18; II Tim. 2:25). See Special Topic at 2:38.
▣ “sins may be wiped away” This term means “to erase”; “blot out”; or “wipe away” (cf. Col. 2:14; Rev. 3:5; 7:17; 21:4). What
a promise! In the ancient world ink was acid and was, therefore, impossible to erase. This is a true miracle of God’s grace (cf.
Ps. 51:1; 103:11-13; Isa. 1:18; 38:17; 43:25; 44:22; Jer. 31:34; Micah 7:19). When God forgives, God forgets (erases)!
▣ “times of refreshing” The Greek term (anapsuchō, anapsuxis) basically means “breathing space, relaxation, relief” (Baker,
Arndt, Gingrich, and Danker, A Greek-English Lexicon, p. 63), “refresh by air,” or “treat a wound with air” (Kittle, Theological
Dictionary of the New Testament, vol. 9, p. 663). The metaphorical extension is physical or spiritual refreshment or restoration.
In the Septuagint it is used of regaining physical strength after a battle (cf. Exod. 23:12; Jdgs. 15:19; II Sam. 16:14) or
emotional refreshment as in I Sam. 16:23.
Peter’s reference seems to be to an OT promise, but this phrase is not used in the OT. For desert people expanse was
identified with freedom and joy, while closed in spaces were a sign of distress and trouble. God was going to bring a widening,
refreshing period of spiritual activity. This Messianic activity had come in the gospel. The “times of refreshing” had come in Jesus
of Nazareth. However, the coming consummation would bring the new age of the Spirit. In this specific context Peter is referring
to the Second Coming. This phrase seems to be parallel to “the period of restoration” (v. 21). See Special Topic: Kerygma at
2:14.
3:20 “He may send Jesus” This is an aorist active subjunctive, which denotes an element of contingency. The actions of
Peter’s hearers, in some sense, determined the time of spiritual consummation (cf. F. F. Bruce, Answers to Questions, where he
links Acts 3:19-21 with Rom. 11:25-27, p. 201).
The juxtaposition of “Jesus” next to “the Christ/the Messiah” seems to imply that Peter is specifically asserting the
Messiahship of Jesus of Nazareth. Later in the NT, “Lord,” “Jesus,” and “Christ” occur often, more as a combined referent to
Jesus (i.e., the Lord Jesus Christ) than an emphasis on the title Messiah. This is especially true in predominately Gentile churches.
▣ “the Christ appointed for you” This verb is a perfect passive participle. This same term is used of God’s fore-choice
in 10:41; 22:14; 26:16; Jesus’ coming and dying has always been God’s eternal redemptive plan (cf. 2:23; 3:18; 4:28; 13:29).
In the Septuagint this term reflects a choice, but without the foreknowledge (i.e., for Luke “pro” means before, cf. Exod. 4:13
and Josh. 3:12), which is obvious in this word’s usage in Acts. It does convey that sending Jesus was God’s choice of blessing
and redemption!
3:21
NASB, NKJV “whom heaven must receive”
NRSV “who must remain in heaven”
TEV, NIV “He must remain in heaven”
NJB “whom heaven must keep”
The subject of this phrase is “heaven”; the object is “whom” (i.e., Jesus). There are two verbals in this phrase. The first
is dei, from deō, which means “it is necessary” or “it is proper.” See full note at 1:16.
The second is an AORIST MIDDLE (deponent) infinitive of dechomai. Harold K Moulton, The Analytical Greek Lexicon
Revised says in this context it means “to receive into and retain” (p. 88). You can see how the English translations pick up on the
contextual aspect. Luke uses this term more than any other NT writer (13 times in Luke and 8 times in Acts). Words must be
defined in light of contextual usage and implication, not etymology. Lexicons (dictionaries) only denote usage. They do not set
definition!
▣
NASB “until”
NKJV, NRSV,
TEV “until”
NJB “til”
This word is in the Greek UBS4 text. I do not know why NASB, 1995 edition, put it in italics, which is the way to show it
is not in the Greek text, but supplied for English readers to understand.
In the 1970 edition of NASB, the “the” is in italics and not “until,” which is correct.
▣ “period of restoration of all things” This refers to recreation (cf. Matt. 17:11; and especially Rom. 8:13-23). The evil of
human rebellion in Genesis 3 is nullified and creation is restored; fellowship with God is reestablished. The initial purpose of
creation is finally fulfilled.
▣ “about which God spoke by mouth of His holy prophets from ancient times” Mark’s Gospel begins with a quote from Mal.
3:1. Matthew 1:22-23 refers to the prophecy of Isa. 7:14. Luke used this same phrase in Luke 1:70. One aspect of the Kerygma
(i.e., recurrent theological truths in the sermons in Acts, see Special Topic at 2:14) is that Jesus’ birth, life, death, and resurrection
fulfilled OT prophecy (cf. Matt. 5:17-19). Jesus’ ministry was not an afterthought or Plan B. It was the predetermined plan of
God (cf. 2:23; 3:18; 4:28; 13:29, see Special Topic at 1:8). All things are working out to the fulfillment of the total restoration
of God’s will for creation.
3:22 “Moses said” The title “The Prophet” was used of the coming Messiah (cf. Deut. 18:14-22; esp. 15,18; John 1:21,25). This
documentation of Jesus from the Law of Moses (i.e., the most authoritative part of the OT canon for Jews, both Sadducees and
Pharisees) would have been very important to these Jewish hearers. Jesus has always been God’s plan of redemption (i.e., Gen.
3:15). He came to die (cf. Mark 10:45; II Cor. 5:21).
3:23 This was a serious word of warning. It is an allusion to Deut. 18:19. Rejection of Jesus was, and still is, a serious, eternal
matter.
This allusion to Deut. 18:14-22 also has some significant theological insights.
1. Notice both the individual and corporate aspects. Each individual soul must personally respond to the Messiah. It is
not enough to be a part of the corporate body of Israel.
2. The phrase “utterly destroyed” is an allusion to “holy war.” God will prune His own vine (i.e., Israel, cf. John 15; Rom.
9-11). Those who reject “the Prophet” are rejected by God. The issue of salvation is one’s faith response to God’s
Messiah. Family, race, ethics, and meticulous performance of rules are not the new covenant criteria of salvation, but
faith in Christ (cf. I John 5:12).
3:24 “Samuel” In the Jewish canon he (i.e., I Samuel) is considered one of the “Former Prophets,” a part of the second division
of the Hebrew canon. Samuel was called a prophet in I Sam. 3:20 and also a seer (i.e., another term for prophet) in I Sam. 9:9;
I Chr. 29:29.
▣ “these days” The “time of refreshing” (v. 20) and “the period of restoration of all things” (v. 21) refer to the consummation
of the Kingdom of God at the return of Christ, but this phrase refers to the inauguration of the Messianic Kingdom, which occurred
at the incarnation of Jesus at Bethlehem or at least to the whole period of the latter days, which is the time between Christ’s two
appearances on planet earth. The OT primarily understood only one coming of the Messiah. His first coming as the “Suffering
Servant” (v. 18) was a surprise; His glorious return as military leader and judge was expected.
3:25 Peter addresses these Jews as the children of Abraham, the covenant people. However, these covenant people must respond
in faith and repentance to Jesus and the gospel or they will be rejected (v. 23)!
The NT (new covenant) is focused in a person, not a racial group. In the very call of Abram there was a universal element
(cf. Gen. 12:3). The universal offer has come in Christ and is available to all (i.e., Luke wrote primarily to Gentiles. His Gospel
and Acts made this invitation repeatedly and specifically).
▣ “covenant” See Special Topic: Covenant at 2:47.
▣ “all the families of the earth shall be blessed” This is a reference to God’s promise to Abraham in Gen. 12:1-3.
Notice the universal element also in Gen. 22:18. God chose Abraham to choose a people, to choose the world ( cf. Exod. 19:5-6;
Eph. 2:11-3:13). See Special Topic at 1:8.
3:26 “For you first” The Jews, because of their Covenant heritage, have the first opportunity to hear and understand the message
of the gospel (cf. Rom. 1:16; 9:5). However, they must respond in the same way as everyone else: repentance, faith, baptism,
obedience, and perseverance.
▣ “raised up His Servant and sent Him” See note at 2:24 and 3:13.
▣ “to bless you” This is what God wants for all mankind (cf. Gen. 12:3). However, He sent Jesus to the lost sheep of the house
of Israel first!
▣ “by turning every one of you from your wicked ways” Salvation involves a change of mind about sin with a resulting change
of actions and priorities. This change is evidence of true conversion! Eternal life has observable characteristics!
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. What is “the continual”?
2. Why was this healing so powerful”
3. Why was a suffering Messiah so shocking to the Jews?
4. Why does Luke quote Gen. 12:3?
5. Are Jews saved differently from Gentiles?
ACTS 4
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Peter and John Before the |
Peter and John Arrested |
Arrest and Release of Peter |
Peter and John Before the |
Peter and John Before the |
4:1-4 |
4:1-4 |
4:1-4 |
4:1-4 |
4:1-4 |
|
Addressing the Sanhedrin |
|
|
|
4:5-22 |
4:5-12 |
4:5-12 |
4:5-7 |
4:5-12 |
|
The Name of Jesus |
|
4:8-12 |
|
|
4:13-22 |
4:13-22 |
4:13-17 |
4:13-17 |
|
|
|
4:18-22 |
4:18-22 |
The Believers Pray for |
Prayer for Boldness |
|
The Believers Pray for |
The Apostles’ Prayer |
4:23-31 |
4:23-31 |
4:23-31 |
4:23-30 |
4:23-26 |
|
|
|
|
4:27-31 |
|
|
|
4:31 |
|
All Things in Common |
Sharing All Things |
The Sharing of Goods (4:32-5:6) |
The Believers Share Their |
The Early Christian |
4:32-37 |
4:32-37 |
4:32-5:11 |
4:32-35 |
4:32 |
|
|
|
|
4:33 |
|
|
|
|
4:34-35 |
|
|
|
|
The Generosity of |
|
|
|
4:36-37 |
4:36-37 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
A. It is obvious the chapter divisions are inappropriate in Acts. Remember, chapter divisions, verse divisions,
capitalization, paragraphing, and punctuation all are not original to the Greek text and, therefore, are the work of
modern translation committees.
B. Verses 1-31 deal with the lame man’s healing in chapter 3 and its consequences.
C. Verses 32-37 should go with chapter 5:1-11.
D. The problems of the early church continue and multiply, but so does the grace and power of the Spirit.
E. In dealing with Luke’s emphasis on the loving, giving nature of the early church in Jerusalem, modern western
interpreters must guard against a “capitalistic” bias. Luke seems to affirm voluntary mutuality. Acts cannot support
communism nor capitalism because neither was known at that time. The text must be interpreted in light of its day,
its author’s intent, and its hearers’ world.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 4:1-4
1As they were speaking to the people, the priests and the captain of the temple guard and the Sadducees came up to
them, 2being greatly disturbed because they were teaching the people and proclaiming in Jesus the resurrection from the
dead. 3And they laid hands on them and put them in jail until the next day, for it was already evening. 4But many of those
who had heard the message believed; and the number of the men came to be about five thousand.
4:1 “the priests” This is the word used in the ancient uncial Greek manuscripts א, A, D, and E, but MS C has “high priests”
(archiereis). The UBS4 gives the word “priests” a B rating (almost certain). The context of chapter 4 shows that opposition did
not come from the High Priests (cf. v. 6).
In the OT the tribe of Levi (i.e., Moses and Aaron’s tribe) was selected to serve YHWH in the stead of the “first born” (cf.
Exodus 13). Within this tribe were certain families who served as
1. local teachers of the Law
2. temple servants
3. priests who officiated at the Temple, especially involved in the sacrificial procedures (cf. Leviticus1-7)
The special family from which the High Priest must come was the family of Moses and Aaron. This whole tribe did not receive
a land allotment like the other tribes of Jacob/Israel. They had certain cities partially given to them (i.e., 48 Levitical cities, cf.
Joshua 20). These Levitical families depended on the other tribes to support them through the Temple tithe and the third-year
local tithe.
All of this changed when Rome took over Palestine. The office of High Priest was purchased from Rome. No longer was
it an OT spiritual office, but a commercial, political power office.
The current High Priest was Caiaphas (cf. Matt. 26:3; Luke 3:2; John 18), but the real power behind the office was the former
High Priest Annas (cf. Luke 3:2; John 18:13,24; Acts 4:6). This family was of the Sadducean sect of Judaism.
▣ “the captain of the temple guard” This was a special Levitical office which was next in power to the High Priest (cf.
Josephus, Wars 6.5.3). He would have controlled the temple police (cf. I Chr. 9:11; Neh. 11:11; Luke 22:4,52; Acts 5:24,26).
In Hebrew he was called “the man of the mountain of the house.”
▣ “Sadducees” These were the rich, political leaders of the Sanhedrin.
SPECIAL TOPIC: SADDUCEES
I. Origin of the Group
A. Most scholars believe the name comes from Zadok, one of David’s high priests (cf. II Sam. 8:17; 15:24). Later,
Solomon exiled Abiathar for supporting the rebellion of Adonijah (cf. I Kgs. 2:26-27) and recognized Zadok as the
only High Priest (cf. I Kgs. 2:35). After the Babylonian exile this priestly line was reestablished in Joshua (cf. Hag.
1:1). This Levitical family was chosen to administer the temple. Later those who were of this priestly tradition and
their supporters were called Zadokites or Sadducees.
B. A ninth century a.d. rabbinical tradition (Aboth of Rabbi Nathan) says Zadok was a disciple of Antigonus of Sokho
(2nd century b.c.), Zadok misunderstood a famous saying of his mentor involving “after dead rewards” and developed
a theology that denied an afterlife and thereby also denied the resurrection of the body.
C. Later within Judaism the Sadducees are identified with the Boethusians. Boethus was also a disciple of Antigonus of
Sokho. He developed a theology similar to Zadok, which also denied an afterlife.
D. The name Sadducee does not appear until the days of John Hyrcanus (135-104 b.c.), which is cited by Josephus (cf.
Antiquities 13:10:5-6). In Antiquities 13:5:9 Josephus says there existed “three schools of thought,” Pharisees,
Sadducees, and Essenes.
E. There is a rival theory that they came from the time of the Selucid rulers’ attempts to Hellenize the priesthood under
Antiochus IV Epiphanes (175-163 b.c.). During the Maccabean revolt a new priesthood was started in Simon
Maccabees (142-135 b.c.) and his descendants (cf. I Macc. 14:41). These new Hasmonean high priests were the
possible start of the aristocratic Sadducees. The Pharisees developed during this same time from the Hasidim (i.e.,
“the separated ones,” cf. I Macc. 2:42; 7:5-23).
F. There is the modern theory (i.e., T. W. Manson), that Sadducee is a transliteration of the Greek term sundikoi. This
term referred to local authorities who interfaced with Roman authority. This may explain why some Sadducees were
not aristocratic priests, but were members of the Sanhedrin.
II. Distinctive Beliefs
A. They were the priestly conservative faction of the sects of Jewish life during the Hasmonean and Roman periods.
B. They were especially concerned with temple procedures, protocol, rituals, and liturgy.
C. They held to the written Torah (i.e., Gen. – Deut.) as authoritative, but rejected the Orad Tradition (i.e., Talmud).
D. They, therefore, rejected many of the cherished developed doctrines of the Pharisees
1. the resurrection of the body (cf. Matt. 22:23; Mark. 12:18; Luke 20:27; Acts 4:1-2; 23:8)
2. the immortality of the soul (cf. Antiquities 18.1.3-4; Wars 2.8.14)
3. the existence of an elaborate hierarchy of angels (cf. Acts 23:8)
4. they took the “eye-for-an-eye” (i.e., lex talionis) literally and supported physical punishment and the death penalty
(instead of a monetary settlement)
E. Another area of theological dispute was predestination vs. free will. Of the three groups mentioned by Josephus
1. the Essenes affirmed a kind of determinism
2. the Sadducees placed an emphasis on human free will (cf. Antiquities 13.5.9; Wars 2.8.14)
3. the Pharisees held somewhat of a balancing position between the other two
F. In one sense the conflicts between the two groups (i.e., Sadducees – Pharisees) mirrored the tension between priests
and prophets in the OT.
Another tension arose from the fact that the Sadducees represented the social and landed gentry. They were the
aristocrats (cf. Josephus’ Antiquities 13.10.6; 18.1.4-5; 20.9.1), while the Pharisees and scribes were the scholars and
pious among the people of the land. This tension could be characterized as the temple in Jerusalem vs. the local
synagogues throughout the land.
Another tension may have represented the Sadducean rejection of the influence of Zoroastrianism on Pharisaic
theology. Example: a highly developed angelology, a dualism between YHWH and Satan and an elaborate view of
the afterlife in glowing physical terms. These excesses by the Essenes and Pharisees caused a reaction in the
Sadducees. They return to the conservative position of Moses-only theology in an attempt to thwart the speculations
of other Jewish groups.
III. Sources of Information
A. Josephus is the chief source of information about the Sadducees. He was biased both by his commitment to the
Pharisees and his interests in portraying a positive image of Jewish life to the Romans.
B. The other source of information is the rabbinical literature. However, here, too, a strong bias is evident. The
Sadducees denied the relevance and authority of the Oral Tradition of the Elders (i.e., the Talmud). These Pharisaic
writings obviously describe their opponents in negative, possibly exaggerated (i.e., straw man, tactics) ways.
C. There are no known writings of Sadducees themselves which have survived. With the destruction of Jerusalem and
the Temple in a.d. 70 all documents and influence of the priestly elite were destroyed.
They wanted to maintain regional peace and the only way to do that in the first century was to cooperate with Rome
(cf. John 11:48-50).
4:2
NASB, NKJV “being greatly disturbed”
NRSV “much annoyed”
TEV “were annoyed”
NJB “extremely annoyed”
This rare Greek term (here a present middle [deponent] participle) means “to work hard at something.” It is found only
one other place in Acts (16:18). It is not found in the Septuagint, nor the Koine papyri from Egypt.
The Sadducean leadership was upset because the Christian leaders were teaching the crowds at the Temple in Jesus’ name
and proclaiming His resurrection (which Sadducees denied, as well as the theological concept of resurrections in general). It is
also possible from the wording of v. 2 that the Apostles were not only asserting Jesus’ resurrection, but the full implications of
all believers’ resurrection (cf. I Corinthians 15).
4:3 “they” In v. 2 the antecedent was Peter, John, and even possibly the healed lame man. In v. 3 the antecedent is the priests
and temple police.
▣ “laid hands on them” This Greek verb has a wide semantic field, but Luke often uses it in this sense of arrest (cf. Luke 20:19;
21:12; Acts 5:18; 12:1; 21:27).
▣ “until the next day” Jewish law forbade a trial to be held after twilight. These leaders wanted this preaching/teaching stopped
and stopped immediately. So they jailed them overnight somewhere on the Temple grounds, as opposed to a public jail (cf. 5:18).
4:4 “those who had heard. . .believed” Both of these verbals are aorist tense. Faith begins with hearing (cf. Rom. 10:17).
Hearing the gospel results (with the Spirit’s aid, cf. John 6:44,65; 16:8-11) in believing the gospel. See Special Topic: Greek Verb
Tenses Used for Salvation at 2:40.
▣ “the number of men came to be about five thousand” Notice that this number does not include women and children. Often
in the NT it is implied that the belief of the father extended to and included the whole family (cf 11:14; 16:15,31,33). The group
in the upper room numbered about 120. At Pentecost 3,000 were added (cf. 2:41); now the number of believers was up to 5,000!
The church in Jerusalem is growing rapidly!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 4:5-12
5On the next day, their rulers and elders and scribes were gathered together in Jerusalem; 6and Annas the high priest
was there, and Caiaphas and John and Alexander, and all who were of high-priestly descent. 7When they had placed them
in the center, they began to inquire, “By what power, or in what name, have you done this?” 8Then Peter, filled with the
Holy Spirit, said to them, “Rulers and elders of the people, 9if we are on trial today for a benefit done to a sick man, as
to how this man has been made well, 10let it be known to all of you and to all the people of Israel, that by the name of Jesus
Christ the Nazarene, whom you crucified, whom God raised from the dead—by this name this man stands here before
you in good health. 11He is the stone which was rejected by you, the builders, but which became the chief corner
stone. 12And there is salvation in no one else; for there is no other name under heaven that has been given among men by
which we must be saved.”
4:5 “their rulers and elders and scribes”
The Sanhedrin (i.e., the Council, 5:21, from the Jerusalem area; the Council of the
elders, 22:5) was made up of seventy Jewish leaders. It was the highest political/religious body (which Rome allowed) within
Judaism of Jesus’ day. The concept was begun (i.e., Jewish tradition) by Ezra and the “men of the Great Synagogue.” It is usually
identified in the NT by the phrase, “the scribes, elders and high priests” (cf. Luke 23:13; Acts 3:17; 4:5,8; 13:27). See Special
Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE SANHEDRIN
I. Sources of Information
A. The New Testament itself
B. Flavius Josephus’ Antiquities of the Jews
C. The Mishnah section of the Talmud (i.e., Tractate “Sanhedrin”)
Unfortunately the NT and Josephus do not agree with the rabbinical writings, which seem to assert two Sanhedrins in
Jerusalem, one priestly (i.e., Sadducean), controlled by the High Priest and dealing with civil and criminal justice and
a second controlled by the Pharisees and scribes, concerned with religious and traditional issues. However, the
rabbinical writings date from a.d. 200 and reflect the cultural situation after the fall of Jerusalem to the Roman general,
Titus, in a.d. 70. The Jews reestablished their religious life at a city called Jamnia and later (i.e., a.d. 118) moved to
Galilee.
II. Terminology
The problem with identifying this judicial body involves the different names by which it is known. There are several words
used to describe judicial bodies within the Jewish community of Jerusalem.
A. Gerousia – “senate” or “council.” This is the oldest term which was used toward the end of the Persian period (cf.
Josephus’ Antiquities 12.3.3 and II Maccabees 11:27). It is used by Luke in Acts 5:21 along with “Sanhedrin.” It may
have been a way of explaining the term to Greek speaking readers (cf. I Macc. 12:35).
B. Synedrion – “Sanhedrin.” This is a compound from syn (together with) and hedra (seat). Surprisingly this term is used
in Aramaic, but it reflects a Greek word. By the end of the Maccabean period this had become the accepted term to
designate the supreme court of the Jews in Jerusalem (cf. Matt. 26:59; Mark 15:1; Luke 22:66; John 11:47; Acts 5:27).
The problem comes when the same terminology is used of local judicial councils outside Jerusalem (cf. Matt. 5:22;
10:17).
C. Presbyterion – “council of elders” (cf. Luke 22:66). This is an OT designation for tribal leaders. However, it came
to refer to the supreme court in Jerusalem (cf. Acts 22:5).
D. Boulē – This term “council” is used by Josephus (i.e., Wars 2.16.2; 5.4.2, but not the NT) to describe several judicial
bodies: (1) the Senate in Rome; (2) local Roman courts; (3) the Jewish supreme court in Jerusalem; and (4) local
Jewish courts. Joseph of Arimathea is described as a member of the Sanhedrin by a form of this term (i.e., bouleutēs,
which means “councilor,” cf. Mark 15:43; Luke 23:50).
III. Historical Development
Originally Ezra is said to have set up the Great Synagogue (cf. Targum on Song of Songs 6:1) in the post-exilic period, which
seems to have become the Sanhedrin of Jesus’ day.
A. The Mishnah (i.e., Talmud) records that there were two major courts in Jerusalem (cf. Sanh. 7:1).
1. One made up of 70 (or 71) members (Sand. 1:6 even states that Moses set up the first Sanhedrin in Num. 11, cf.
Num. 11:16-25).
2. One made up of 23 members (but this may refer to local synagogue courts).
3. Some Jewish scholars believe there were three 23-member Sanhedrins in Jerusalem. When the three got together
they, along with the two leaders, constituted “the Great Sanhedrin” of 71 members (i.e., Nasi and Av Bet Din).
a. one priestly (i.e., Sadducees)
b. one legal (i.e., Pharisees)
c. one aristocratic (i.e., elders)
B. In the post-exilic period, the returning Davidic seed was Zerubbabel and the returning Aaronic seed was Joshua. After
Zerubbabel’s death, no Davidic seed continued, so the judicial mantle passed exclusively to the priests (cf. I Macc.
12:6) and local elders (cf. Neh. 2:16; 5:7).
C. This priestly role in judicial decisions is documented by Diodorus 40:3:4-5 during the Hellenistic period.
D. This priestly role in government continued during the Selucid period. Josephus quotes Antiochus “the Great” III (223-187 b.c.) in Antiquities 12.138-142.
E. This priestly power continued during the Maccabean period according to Josephus’ Antiquities 13.10.5-6; 13.15.5.
F. During the Roman period the governor of Syria (i.e., Gabinius from 57-55 b.c.) established five regional “Sanhedrins”
(cf. Josephus’ Antiquities 14.5.4; and Wars 1.8.5), but this was later annulled by Rome (i.e., 47 b.c.).
G. The Sanhedrin had a political confrontation with Herod (i.e., Antiquities 14.9.3-5) who, in 37 b.c., retaliated and had
most of the high court killed (cf. Josephus’ Antiquities 14.9.4; 15.1.2).
H. Under the Roman procurators (i.e., a.d. 6-66) Josephus tells us (cf. Antiquities 20.200,251) that the Sanhedrin again
gained considerable power and influence (cf. Mark 14:55). There are three trials recorded in the NT where the
Sanhedrin, under the leadership of the High Priest’s family, executes justice.
1. Jesus’ trial (cf. Mark 14:53-15:1; John 18:12-23,28-32)
2. Peter and John (cf. Acts 4:3-6)
3. Paul (cf. Acts 22:25-30)
I. When the Jews revolted in a.d. 66, the Romans subsequently destroyed Jewish society and Jerusalem in a.d. 70. The
Sanhedrin was permanently dissolved, although the Pharisees at Jamnia tried to bring a supreme judicial court (i.e Beth
Din) back into Jewish religious (but not civil or political) life.
IV. Membership
A. The first biblical mention of a high court in Jerusalem is II Chr. 19:8-11. It was made up of (1) Levites; (2) priests;
and (3) the heads of families (i.e., elders, cf. I Macc. 14:20; II Macc. 4:44).
B. During the Maccabean period it was dominated by (1) Sadducean priestly families and (2) local aristocracy (cf. I Macc.
7:33; 11:23; 14:28). Later in this period “scribes” (Mosaic lawyers, usually Pharisees) were added, apparently by
Alexander Jannaeus’ wife Salome (76-67 b.c.). She is even said to have made the Pharisees the predominant group
(cf. Josephus’ Wars of the Jews 1.5.2).
C. By Jesus’ day the court was made up of
1. the families of the High Priests
2. local men of wealthy families
3. scribes (cf. Luke 19:47)
V. Sources Consulted
A. Dictionary of Jesus and the Gospels, IVP, pp. 728-732
B. The Zondervan Pictorial Encyclopedia of the Bible, vol. 5, pp. 268-273
C. The New Schaff-Herzog Encyclopedia of Religious Knowledge, vol. 10, pp. 203-204
D. The Interpreter’s Dictionary of the Bible, vol. 4, pp. 214-218
E. Encyclopedia Judaica, vol. 14, pp. 836-839
4:6 “Annas” His name in Greek is Hannas; Josephus calls him Hannanos (Jonathan). The name seems to come from the Hebrew
“merciful” or “gracious” (hānān, BDB 336).
In the OT the high priesthood was for life and stayed in the lineage of Aaron. However, the Romans had turned this office
into a political plumb, purchased by a Levitical family. The high priest controlled and operated the merchandising in the Court
of the Women. Jesus’ cleansing of the Temple angered this family.
According to Flavius Josephus, Annas was the High Priest from a.d. 6-14. He was appointed by Quirinius, governor of Syria
and removed by Valerius Gratus. His relatives (5 sons and 1 grandson) succeeded him. Caiaphas (a.d. 18-36), his son-in-law
(cf. John 18:13), was his immediate successor. Annas was the real power behind the office. John depicts him as the first person
to whom Jesus is taken (cf. 18:13,19-22).
▣ “Caiaphas” He was appointed high priest by Valerius Gratus, procurator of Judea (cf. MS D, ‘Iōnathas, cf. NEB, NJB) from
a.d. 18-36.
▣ “John” This may refer to “Jonathan,” who Josephus tells us was also one of Annas’ sons who became High Priest in a.d. 36
after Caiaphas. However, the UBS4 has ‘Iōannēs (i.e., John) as an A rating (certain); even the REB goes back to “John.”
▣ “Alexander” Nothing is known about this man, but he, like John, was probably a member of Annas’ family or a leading
member of the Sadducean party.
4:7 “When they had placed them in the center” The members of the Sanhedrin sat in a semicircle on a raised platform.
▣ “they began to inquire” This is an imperfect tense, which means either (1) continuous action in past time or (2) the
beginning of an action.
▣ “By what power, or in what name” They insinuated that the healing was done by magical power (cf. 19:13). They tried this
same trick on Jesus (cf. Luke 11:14-26; Mark 3:20-30). They could not deny the miracles so they attempted to impugn the method
or source of the power.
4:8 “filled with the Holy Spirit” The Spirit was the source of wisdom and boldness for the Apostles (cf. Luke 12:11-12; 21:12-15). Remember this was the same man who only a few days earlier had denied the Lord out of fear (cf. 4:13). Notice that Peter
was “filled” (cf. 2:4; 4:8,31). This shows that it was a repeatable experience (cf. Eph. 5:18). See full note at 5:17.
4:9 “if” This is a first class conditional sentence which is assumed true for the author’s purpose.
▣ “if we are on trial today” This Greek term literally means “examined by a court” (cf. 12:19; 24:8; 28:18; Luke 23:14). It was
used of the Berean Jews examining the Scriptures to see if Paul was accurately interpreting them (cf. 17:11).
▣ “for a benefit done to a sick man” Peter is asserting the inappropriateness of this official trial with such a hostile environment
concerning a wonderful miracle of healing and mercy. They should be praising God instead!
▣ “has been made well” This is a perfect passive indicative, meaning complete health and restoration of his legs.
4:10 “Let it be known to all of you and all the people of Israel” This is a perfect active imperative. The Spirit has
emboldened Peter. He is not intimidated by the judicial setting. These leaders could not keep Christ in the tomb and they could
not deny the healed man standing in front of them!
▣ “by the name of Jesus Christ the Nazarene” Peter picks up on their question and answers specifically how the miracle
occurred. See Special Topic: Jesus the Nazarene at 2:22.
▣ “whom you crucified” This was the obvious truth. They instigated His death. Notice “by you” in v. 11, which also asserts
their guilt.
▣ “whom God raised” The NT affirms that all three persons of the Trinity were active in Jesus’ resurrection:
1. Spirit, Rom. 8:11
2. Jesus, John 2:19-22; 10:17-18
3. Father, Acts 2:24,32; 3:15,26; 4:10; 5:30; 10:40; 13:30,33,34,37; 17:31; Rom. 6:4,9
This was confirmation of the truth of Jesus’ life and teachings about God and also the Father’s full acceptance of Jesus’
substitutionary death. This was a major aspect of the Kerygma (i.e., sermons in Acts, see Special Topic at 2:14).
▣ “this man stands here” This is a word play on “stands.” The lame man stands up and stands before them.
4:11 This is a quote from Ps. 118:22, but not from the Masoretic text or Septuagint (cf. Eph. 2:20; I Pet. 2:4ff). Jesus uses this
of Himself in Mark 12:10 and Luke 20:17, taken from the Septuagint. It signifies the fulfillment of OT prophecy of a rejected
Messiah who has become the very heart of God’s eternal plan for the redemption (see Special Topic at 1:8) of Israel and the world.
This was a shocking statement for these Jewish leaders (cf. I Tim. 2:5).
▣
NASB “the chief corner stone”
NKJV “the chief cornerstone”
NRSV, NJB “the cornerstone”
TEV “stone. . .the most important of all”
SPECIAL TOPIC: CORNERSTONE
I. OT Usages
A. The concept of a stone as a hard durable item which made a good foundation was used to describe YHWH (cf. Ps.
18:2).
B. It then developed into a Messianic title (cf. Gen. 49:24; Ps. 118:22; Isa. 28:16).
C. It came to represent a judgment from YHWH by the Messiah (cf. Isa. 8:14; Dan. 2:34-35,44-45).
D. This developed into a building metaphor.
1. a foundation stone, the first placed, which was secure and set the angles for the rest of the building, called “the
cornerstone”
2. it could also refer to the final stone put in place, which holds the walls together (cf. Zech. 4:7; Eph. 2:20,21),
called “the capstone,” from the Hebrew rush (i.e., head)
3. it could refer to the “key stone,” which is in the center of the doorway arch and holds the weight of the entire wall
II. NT Usages
A. Jesus quoted Psalm 118 several times in reference to Himself (cf. Matt. 21:41-46; Mark 12:10-11; Luke 20:17)
B. Paul uses Psalm 118 in connection with YHWH’s rejection of faithless, rebellious Israel (cf. Rom. 9:33)
C. Paul uses the concept of a “cornerstone” in Eph. 2:20-22 in reference to Christ
D. Peter uses this concept of Jesus in I Pet. 2:1-10. Jesus is the cornerstone and believers are the living stones (i.e.,
believers as temples, cf. I Cor. 6:19), built on Him (i.e., Jesus is the new Temple, cf. Mark 14:58; Matt. 12:6; John
2:19-20). The Jews rejected the very foundation of their hope when they rejected Jesus as Messiah.
III. Theological Statements
A. YHWH allowed David/Solomon to build a temple. He told them that if they kept the covenant He would bless them
and be with them (cf. II Samuel 7), but if they did not the temple would be in ruins (cf. I Kgs. 9:1-9)!
B. Rabbinical Judaism focused on form and ritual and neglected the personal aspect of faith (cf. Jer. 31:31-34; Ezek.
36:22-38). God seeks a daily, personal, godly relationship with those created in His image (cf. Gen. 1:26-27). Luke
20:17-18 contains frightening words of judgment, as does Matt. 5:20, directed at Judaism.
C. Jesus used the concept of a temple to represent His physical body (cf. John 2:19-22). This continues and expands the
concept of personal faith in Jesus as the Messiah is key to a relationship with YHWH (i.e., John 14:6; I John 5:10-12).
D. Salvation is meant to restore the damaged image of God in human beings (Gen. 1:26-27 and chapter 3) so that
fellowship with God is possible. The goal of Christianity is Christlikeness now. Believers are to become living stones
(i.e., little temples built on/patterned after Christ).
E. Jesus is the foundation of our faith and the capstone of our faith (i.e., the Alpha and Omega). Yet also the stone of
stumbling and the rock of offense. To miss Him is to miss everything. There can be no middle ground here!
4:12 “there is salvation in no one else” This is a strong double negative. There is no salvation in Abraham or Moses (cf. John
14:6; I Tim. 2:5; I John 5:10-12). What a shocking claim! It is very restrictive but also very obvious that Jesus believed that only
through a personal relationship with Himself can one know God. Peter boldly proclaims this to that elite Jewish leadership. This
has often been called the exclusivistic scandal of Christianity. There is no middle ground here. This statement is true or
Christianity is false!
▣ “there is no other name under heaven that has been given among men” The participle “has been given” is a perfect
passive. God has ordained this! Jesus is His answer to mankind’s spiritual need. There is no Plan B! For a good book on the
exclusivistic claims of Christianity see H. A. Netland, Dissonant Voices: Religious Pluralism and the Question of Truth.
▣ “among men” Notice the universal element (cf. John 3:16; I Tim. 2:4; II Pet. 3:9).
▣ “by which we must be saved” This phrase has two verbals.
1. dei, present active indicative, “we must” (see full note on dei at 1:16)
2. sōthēnai, aorist passive infinitive of sōzō, “to be saved”
The word for “save” has two usages in the NT.
1. physical deliverance (OT sense, cf. Matt. 9:22; Mark 6:56; Luke 1:71; 6:9; 7:50; Acts 27:20,31; James 1:21; 2:14;
4:12; 5:20)
2. spiritual salvation (NT usages, cf. Luke 19:10; Acts 2:21,40,47; 11:14; 15:11; 16:30-31)
The lame man experienced both. The religious leaders needed to trust Jesus as their only hope for acceptance and
forgiveness! Humans need to be saved (cf. Rom. 1:18-3:20) and Jesus is the only way for this to be accomplished (cf. Rom. 3:21-31). The OT quote in v. 12 shows He has always been God’s plan (cf. Isa. 8:14-15; 28:14-19; 52:13-53:12).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 4:13-22
13Now as they observed the confidence of Peter and John and understood that they were uneducated and untrained
men, they were amazed, and began to recognize them as having been with Jesus. 14And seeing the man who had been
healed standing with them, they had nothing to say in reply. 15But when they had ordered them to leave the Council, they
began to confer with one another, 16saying, “What shall we do with these men? For the fact that a noteworthy miracle
has taken place through them is apparent to all who live in Jerusalem, and we cannot deny it. 17But so that it will not
spread any further among the people, let us warn them to speak no longer to any man in this name.” 18And when they
had summoned them, they commanded them not to speak or teach at all in the name of Jesus. 19But Peter and John
answered and said to them, “Whether it is right in the sight of God to give heed to you rather than to God, you be the
judge; 20for we cannot stop speaking about what we have seen and heard.” 21When they had threatened them further,
they let them go (finding no basis on which to punish them) on account of the people, because they were all glorifying God
for what had happened; 22for the man was more than forty years old on whom this miracle of healing had been performed.
4:13 “the confidence” See the Special Topic: boldness (parrhēsia) at 4:29.
▣ “uneducated” The term is agrammatos, which is the term “writing” with the alpha privative. This may mean that they were
1. ignorant or uneducated (cf. Moulton, Milligan, Vocabulary, p. 6)
2. untrained in the rabbinical schools (cf. A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the Greek New Testament, vol. 3, p. 52 and
Louw and Nida, Lexicon, vol. 1, p. 328)
▣ “untrained” This is the term idiōtēs, which is usually translated “layman” or “untrained in a certain area.” Originally it
referred to a normal person as opposed to a leader or spokesperson. It came to be used of an outsider vs. a member of a group
(cf. I Cor. 14:16,23-24; II Cor. 11:6).
Notice how the different English translations handle this phrase.
NASB, NKJV “uneducated and untrained men”
NRSV “uneducated and ordinary men”
TEV “ordinary men of no education”
NJB “uneducated layman”
▣ “they were amazed” This is an imperfect active indicative (as are the next two verbs). They imply either the beginning
of an action or repeated action in past time (indicative mood). Luke uses this word often (18 times in Luke and Acts); it usually,
but not always, has a positive connotation (cf. Luke 11:38; 20:26; Acts 4:13; 13:41).
▣ “began to recognize them as having been with Jesus” This was in truth a compliment. Jesus was also untrained in the
rabbinical schools, yet He knew the Old Testament well. He did attend synagogue school as all Jewish children (as did Peter and
John) were required to do.
These leaders recognized the boldness and power of Peter and John. They had seen the same in Jesus.
4:14 Everyone knew this lame man because he regularly sat at the Temple door daily. But he was not sitting anymore! The crowd
in the Temple could not deny this (cf. vv. 16,22).
4:15 They asked the three of them to leave while they discussed their options and planned their strategy of denial and deception
(cf. vv. 17-18).
4:17-18 This was their plan! Stop talking about Jesus and stop helping people in His name! What about all the people who were
praising God for the healing (cf. 3:8-9; 4:16)?
4:19 “whether” This is a first class conditional sentence, which is used not of reality, but for the sake of argument. Peter
and John did not think their commands were valid (cf. 5:28).
▣ “right” See Special Topic: Righteousness at 3:14.
▣ “you be the judge” This is an aorist active imperative. These leaders condemned themselves by their words, motives, and
actions.
4:20 Peter and John assert that they cannot deny what they have experienced and they will not stop sharing it!
4:21 “when they had threatened them further” I wonder what they threatened to do. Jesus was raised from the dead. The man
was raised from his bed; what were these leaders going to do to Peter and John?
▣ “(finding no basis on which to punish them)” This may indicate one of Luke’s purposes in writing. Christianity was not a
threat to Rome or the peace of Jerusalem. Even the Sanhedrin could find no grounds to condemn its leaders.
▣ “on account of the people” The eyewitnesses of the events in Jerusalem held the early church in high esteem (cf. 2:47). The
Jewish leaders were threatened by this popularity (cf. 5:13,26).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 4:23-31
23When they had been released, they went to their own companions and reported all that the chief priests and the
elders had said to them. 24And when they heard this, they lifted their voices to God with one accord and said, “O Lord,
it is You who made the heaven and the earth and the sea, and all that is in them, 25who by the Holy Spirit, through
the mouth of our father David Your servant, said, ‘Why did the Gentiles rage, And the peoples devise futile
things? 26‘The kings of the earth took their stand, And the rulers were gathered together Against the Lord
and against His Christ.’ 27“For truly in this city there were gathered together against Your holy servant Jesus, whom
You anointed, both Herod and Pontius Pilate, along with the Gentiles and the peoples of Israel, 28to do whatever Your
hand and Your purpose predestined to occur. 29“And now, Lord, take note of their threats, and grant that Your
bond-servants may speak Your word with all confidence, 30while You extend Your hand to heal, and signs and wonders
take place through the name of Your holy servant Jesus.” 31And when they had prayed, the place where they had gathered
together was shaken, and they were all filled with the Holy Spirit and began to speak the word of God with boldness.
4:23 They went back to the Upper Room to meet with the disciples.
4:24 “with one accord” This unity of heart and mind characterized the early church (cf. 1:14; 2:46; 4:24; 5:12; 15:25). There
is spiritual power and focused action in this atmosphere of unity of purpose.
▣ “Lord” This is the Greek term despota, from which we get the English word despot. It denoted someone in complete
authority! Here it refers to God the Father (cf. Luke 2:29 and Rev. 6:10). It is also used of Jesus (cf. II Pet. 2:1 and Jude v. 4).
▣ “who made the heaven and the earth and the sea, and all that is in them” This may be an allusion to Exod. 20:11.
It is also quoted in 14:15 and the truth is stated in 17:24. YHWH is the creator!
4:25 There are many variant readings of the first part of this verse. The oldest manuscripts P74, א, A, and B already include the
ambiguous variant. Although the exact wording is uncertain, the thrust of the text is obvious. For a full account of the problem
and the theories of what happened, see Bruce M. Metzger, A Textual Commentary on the Greek New Testament, pp. 321-323).
▣ “who by the Holy Spirit through the mouth of our father David” This asserts the inspiration of the Old Testament (cf. Matt.
5:17-19). This is a quote from the Septuagint of Psalm 2:1-2, a royal Messianic Psalm. Christianity is not something new, but
the fulfillment of the Old Testament (cf. Matt. 5:17-48). Worldly opposition is to be expected, but so too, is the victory of
YHWH.
4:25-26 “Gentiles. . .the peoples. . .the Kings. . .the Rulers” It looks as if the disciples are doing a rabbinical word association
on “rulers.” In a sense, they are calling the Sanhedrin Goyim (i.e., Gentiles) or at least associating these OT names to
contemporary groups (i.e., Pilate, Herod, Sanhedrin, and Jewish mob) who participated in Jesus’ trial and crucifixion.
▣ “rage” This is literally “to snort through one’s nose.” This implies a haughty arrogance.
4:26 “the Lord. . .His Christ” Notice that YHWH and Messiah are both spoken of together. I am surprised they did not quote
Ps. 110:1.
It is so difficult to be a monotheist (see Special Topic at 2:39) and assert the full deity of Christ and the personality of the
Spirit (cf. v. 25, see Special Topic at 2:32). Yet, these three divine, eternal persons appear in unified contexts several times in
the NT. Remember that all the writers except Luke are monotheistic Jewish Christians. Something radical has caused them to
assert a triunity (i.e., the gospel). See Special Topic: The Trinity at 2:32.
4:27 “Your holy servant Jesus, whom You anointed” Notice these Messianic titles.
1. holy (cf. 3:14; 4:30)
2. servant (pais, cf. 3:13,26; 4:25,27,30. See note at 3:13)
3. anointed (chriō, from which Christ is derived, cf Luke 4:18; Acts 4:27; 10:38)
This verse asserts several different ways that Jesus was sent and authorized by YHWH. Jesus is God’s eternal plan and
method of redemption and restoration (cf. v. 28, see Special Topic at 1:8).
SPECIAL TOPIC: ANOINTING IN THE BIBLE (BDB 603)
A. Used for beautification (cf. Deut. 28:40; Ruth 3:3; II Sam. 12:20; 14:2; II Chr. 28:15; Dan. 10:3; Amos 6:6; Mic. 6:15)
B. Used for guests (cf. Ps. 23:5; Luke 7:38,46; John 11:2)
C. Used for healing (cf. Isa. 61:1; Jer. 51:8; Mark 6:13; Luke 10:34; James 5:14) [used in hygienic sense in Ezek. 16:9]
D. Used for preparation for burial (cf. Gen. 50:2; II Chr. 16:14; Mark 16:1; John 12:3,7; 19:39-40)
E. Used in a religious sense (of an object, cf. Gen. 28:18; 31:13 [a pillar]; Exod. 29:26 [the altar]; Exod. 30:26; 40:9-16;
Lev. 8:10-13; Num. 7:1 [the tabernacle])
F. Used for installing leaders
1. Priests
a. Aaron (Exod. 28:41; 29:7; 30:30)
b. Aaron’s sons (Exod. 40:15; Lev. 7:36)
c. standard phrase or title (Num. 3:3; Lev. 16:32)
2. Kings
a. by God (cf. I Sam. 2:10; II Sam. 12:7; II Kgs. 9:3,6,12; Ps. 45:7; 89:20)
b. by the prophets (cf. I Sam. 9:16; 10:1; 15:1,17; 16:3,12-13; I Kgs. 1:45; 19:15-16)
c. by priests (cf. I Kgs. 1:34,39; II Kgs. 11:12)
d. by the elders (cf. Jdgs. 9:8,15; II Sam. 2:7; 5:3; II Kgs. 23:30)
e. of Jesus as Messianic king (cf. Ps. 2:2; Luke 4:18 [Isa. 61:1]; Acts 4:27; 10:38; Heb. 1:9 [Ps. 45:7])
f. Jesus’ followers (cf. II Cor. 1:21; I John 2:20,27 [chrisma])
3. possibly of prophets (cf. Isa. 61:1)
4. unbelieving instruments of divine deliverance
a. Cyrus (cf. Isa. 45:1)
b. King of Tyre (cf. Ezek. 28:14, where he uses Garden of Eden metaphors)
5. term or title “Messiah” means “an Anointed One” (BDB 603)
▣ “there were gathered together against Your holy servant” Here is a list of the opponents to Jesus in Jerusalem.
1. Herod, the Roman appointed Edumean ruler of Palestine (see Special Topic below)
2. Pontius Pilate, the Roman administrative leader of Palestine (see Special Topic at 3:13)
3. Gentiles, which might refer to the Roman army or proselyte Jews
4. the “people of Israel,” which would refer to the Jewish authorities and the Jewish mob who asked for Barabbas to be
released and Jesus to be crucified
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE FAMILY OF HEROD THE GREAT
A. Herod the Great
1. King of Judea (37-4 b.c.), an Idumean (from Edom), who, through political maneuvering and the support of Mark
Antony, managed to be appointed ruler of a large part of Palestine (Canaan) by the Roman Senate in 40 b.c.
2. He is mentioned in Matt. 2:1-19 and Luke 1:5
3. His sons
a. Herod Philip (son of Mariamne of Simon)
(1) husband of Herodias (4 b.c. – a.d. 34)
(2) mentioned in Matt. 14:3; Mark 6:17
b. Herod Philip I (son of Cleopatra)
(1) Tetrarch of area north and west of the Sea of Galilee (4 b.c. – a.d. 34)
(2) mentioned in Luke 3:1
c. Herod Antipas
(1) Tetrarch of Galilee and Perea (4 b.c. – a.d. 39)
(2) mentioned in Matt. 14:1-12; Mark 6:14,29; Luke 3:1,19; 9:7-9; 13:31; 23:6-12,15; Acts 4:27; 13:1
d. Archelaus, Herod the Ethnarch
(1) ruler of Judea, Samaria, and Idumea (4 b.c. – a.d. 6)
(2) mentioned in Matt. 2:22
e. Aristobulus (son of Mariamne)
(1) mentioned as father of Herod Agrippa I who was
(a) King of Judea (a.d. 37-44)
(b) mentioned in Acts 12:1-24; 23:35
(i) his son was Herod Agrippa II
– Tetrarch of northern territory (a.d. 50-70)
(ii) his daughter was Bernice
– consort of her brother
– mentioned in Acts 25:13-26:32
(iii) his daughter was Drucilla
– wife of Felix
– mentioned Acts 24:24
B. Biblical References to the Herods
1. Herod the Tetrarch, mentioned in Matthew 14:1ff.; Luke 3:1; 9:7; 13:31, and 23:7, was the
son of Herod the Great. At the death of Herod the Great, his kingdom was divided among
several of his sons. The term “Tetrarch” meant “leader of the fourth part.” This Herod was
known as Herod Antipas, which is the shortened form of Antipater. He controlled Galilee and Perea. This meant
that much of Jesus’ ministry was in the territory of this second generation Idumean ruler.
2. Herodias was the daughter of Herod Antipas’ brother, Aristobulus. She had also been previously married to
Philip, the half brother of Herod Antipas. This was not Philip the Tetrarch who controlled the area just north of
Galilee, but the other brother Philip, who lived
in Rome. Herodias had one daughter by Philip. On Herod Antipas’ visit to Rome he met and was seduced by
Heroditas, who was looking for political advancement. Therefore, Herod Antipas divorced his wife, who was
a Nabatean princess, and Herodias divorced Philip so that she and Herod Antipas could be married. She was also
the sister of Herod Agrippa I (cf. Acts 12).
3. We learn the name of Herodias’ daughter, Salome, from Flavius Josephus in his book The Antiquities of the Jews
8:5:4. She must have been between the ages of twelve and seventeen at this point. She was obviously controlled
and manipulated by her mother. She later married Philip the Tetrarch, but was soon widowed.
4. About ten years after the beheading of John the Baptist, Herod Antipas went to Rome at the instigation of his wife
Herodias to seek the title of king because Agrippa I, her brother, had received that title. But Agrippa I wrote
Rome and accused Antipas of corroboration with the Parthians, a hated enemy of Rome from the Fertile Crescent
(Mesopotamia). The Emperor apparently believed Agrippa I and Herod Antipas, along with his wife Herodias,
was exiled to Spain.
5. It may make it easier to remember these different Herods as they are presented in the New Testament by
remembering that Herod the Great killed the children in Bethlehem; Herod Antipas killed John the Baptist; Herod
Agrippa I killed the Apostle James; and Herod Agrippa II heard Paul’s appeal recorded in the book of Acts.
C. For background information on the family of Herod the Great, consult the index of Flavius Josephus, Antiquities of
the Jews.
4:28 “Your hand and Your purpose predestined to occur” Even before creation God had His plan of redemption (cf. Matt.
25:34; John 17:24; Eph. 1:4; I Pet. 1:20; Rev. 13:8; Acts 2:13; 3:18; 13:29). These enemies of Christ only performed that which
God wanted them to perform. Jesus came to die (cf. Mark 10:45). The term translated here “predestine” is a compound of the
preposition “before” and “to set bounds” (cf. Rom. 8:29,30; I Cor. 2:7; Eph. 1:5,11).
The definitive passages on predestination in the NT are Rom. 8:28-30; Rom. 9; and Eph. 1:3-14. These texts obviously stress
that God is sovereign. He is in total control of all things, including human history. There is a preset divine redemption plan being
worked out in time. However, this plan is not arbitrary or selective. It is based not only on God’s sovereignty and foreknowledge,
but also on His unchanging character of love, mercy, and undeserved grace.
We must be careful of our western (American) individualism or our evangelical zeal coloring this wonderful truth. We must
also guard against being polarized into the historical, theological conflicts between Augustine and Pelegius or Calvinism and
Arminianism.
Predestination is not a doctrine meant to limit God’s love, grace, and mercy, nor to exclude some from the gospel. It is meant
to strengthen believers by molding their worldview. God’s love is for all mankind (cf. I Tim. 2:4; II Pet. 3:9). God is in control of
all things. Who or what can separate us from Him (cf. Rom. 8:31-39)? Predestination forms one of two ways to view life. God
views all history as present. Humans are time-bound. Our perspective and mental abilities are limited. There is no contradiction
between God’s sovereignty and mankind’s free will. It is a covenantal structure. This is another example of biblical truth given in
paradoxical, dialectical, tension-filled pairs. Biblical doctrines are presented from different perspectives. They often appear
paradoxical. The truth is a balance between the seemingly opposite pairs. We must not remove the tension by picking one of the
truths. We must not isolate any biblical truth into a compartment by itself.
It is also important to add that the goal of election is not only heaven when we die, but Christlikeness now (cf. Eph. 1:4; 2:10)!
We were chosen to be “holy and blameless.” God chooses to change us so that others may see the change and respond by faith to
God in Christ. Predestination is not a personal privilege, but a covenantal responsibility! We are saved to serve! See Special Topic
at 2:47.
4:29 “speak Your word” This is a present active infinitive. This is a prayer for continual boldness (cf. Eph. 6:19 and Col.
4:3) and an affirmation of inspiration (cf. II Tim. 3:15-17).
▣
NASB “with all confidence”
NKJV, NRSV,
TEV “with all boldness”
NJB “with all fearlessness”
See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: BOLDNESS (PARRHĒSIA)
This Greek term is a compound of “all” (pan) and “speech” (rhēsis). This freedom or boldness in speech often had the
connotation of a boldness amidst opposition or rejection (cf. John 7:13; I Thess. 2:2).
In John’s writings (used 13 times) it often denotes a public proclamation (cf. John 7:4, also in Paul’s writings, Col. 2:15).
However, sometimes it simply means “plainly” (cf. John 10:24; 11:14; 16:25,29).
In Acts the Apostles speak the message about Jesus in the same manner (with boldness) as Jesus spoke about the Father and
His plans and promises (cf. Acts 2:29; 4:13,29,31; 9:27-28; 13:46; 14:3; 18:26; 19:8; 26:26; 28:31). Paul also asked for prayer
that he might boldly preach the gospel (cf. Eph. 6:19; I Thess. 2:2) and live the gospel (cf. Phil. 1:20).
Paul’s eschatological hope in Christ gave him boldness and confidence to preach the gospel in this current evil age (cf. II
Cor. 3:11-12). He also had confidence that Jesus’ followers would act appropriately (cf. II Cor. 7:4).
There is one more aspect to this term. Hebrews uses it in a unique sense of boldness in Christ to approach God and speak
to Him (cf. Heb. 3:6; 4:16; 10:19,35). Believers are fully accepted and welcomed into intimacy with the Father through the Son!
It is used in several ways in the NT.
1. a confidence, boldness, or assurance related to
a. men (cf. Acts 2:29; 4:13,31; II Cor. 3:12; Eph. 6:19)
b. God (cf. I John 2:28; 3:21; 4:12; 5:14; Heb. 3:6; 4:16; 10:19)
2. to speak openly, plainly, or unambiguously (cf. Mark 8:32; John 7:4,13; 10:24; 11:14; 16:25; Acts 28:31)
3. to speak publically (cf. John 7:26; 11:54; 18:20)
4. the related form (parrhēsiazomai) is used to preach boldly amidst difficult circumstances (cf. Acts 18:26; 19:8; Eph.
6:20; I Thess. 2:2)
In this context it refers to an eschatological confidence. Believers do not fear the Second Coming of Christ; they embrace it with
confident enthusiasm because they abide in Christ and live Christlike lives.
4:30 “while you extend Your hand to heal” This was an anthropomorphic phrase (see Special Topic at 2:33) used to describe
God revealing His compassion and power. The signs were a way to confirm the gospel message. It was a radically different
message from what they had heard all their lives in the synagogue.
4:31 “the place where they had gathered together was shaken” God encouraged these witnesses by another physical
demonstration of His power and presence, just as He did at Pentecost. The word is used of wind blowing upon a sailing vessel.
▣ “all filled with the Holy Spirit” Notice that here again all were filled (cf. 2:4; 4:8,31; 9:17; 13:9,52, see full note at 5:17).
This filling was for the bold proclamation of the gospel. Also notice that tongues are not mentioned. In Acts when tongues are
mentioned, they are usually in an evangelistic context of the gospel overcoming cultural-ethnic and/or geographical barriers.
▣ “the word of God” The Jerome Biblical Commentary (p. 180) has a good note about this phrase, “this is a favorite Lucan way
of expressing the Christian message (see 6:2,7; 8:14; 11:1; 13:5,7,44,46,48; 16:32; 17:13; 18:11). Variants of it are “te word of
the Lord” (8:25; 13:49; 15:35,36; 19:10,20; 20:35) or simply “the word” (4:29; 6:4; 8:4; 10:44; 11:19; 14:25; 16:6).”
This is the central question of faith, “Is the gospel presented in the NT the word of God?” Faith energized by the Spirit says
“yes”!!
▣ “with boldness” See Special Topic at 4:29.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 4:32-35
32And the congregation of those who believed were of one heart and soul; and not one of them claimed that anything
belonging to him was his own, but all things were common property to them. 33And with great power the apostles were
giving testimony to the resurrection of the Lord Jesus, and abundant grace was upon them all. 34For there was not a needy
person among them, for all who were owners of land or houses would sell them and bring the proceeds of the sales 35and
lay them at the apostles’ feet, and they would be distributed to each as any had need.
4:32 “who believed were of one heart and soul” The spirit of unity among the believers (cf. 1:14) reflected the unity of the
Triune God (cf. John 17:11,21,23; Eph. 4:4-6). These very words are used in Mark 12:30 to reflect the first commandment in
Deut. 6:4-5.
▣ “all things were common property to them” They felt and acted like a family. This was the church’s first attempt to finance
ministry. It was voluntary and mutual, not mandatory. Love and concern, not government or social leveling, was the motive!
4:33 “were giving testimony to the resurrection” This was the central truth of their message ( cf. I Corinthians 15). Jesus was
alive!
▣ “and abundant grace was upon them all” We learn from Paul’s letters that at a later time this church was very poor (cf.
Rom. 15:3; Gal. 2:10). Abundant grace, like abundant living (cf. John 10:10) has little to do with material things. Notice this
abundance was upon all of them, not just the leaders, the possessors of certain gifts, or those of a certain socio-economic level.
4:34 The church felt a responsibility for one another. Those who had, gave freely to those in need (cf. v. 35). This is not
communism, but love in action.
4:35 “lay them at the apostles feet” This is a cultural idiom of giving something to another. They laid their goods and money
at the Apostles’ feet because they had laid their lives at Jesus’ feet.
▣ “they would be distributed” This is an imperfect passive indicative, which shows continual action in past time. This
follows the synagogue pattern of helping the poor and needy.
▣ “as any had need” There is an interesting comment in Klein, Blomberg, and Hubbard’s Introduction to Biblical Interpretation,
pp. 451-453, that Marx’s manifesto contains two quotes from Acts:
1. “from each according to his ability” – 11:29
2. “to each according to his need”
The hermeneutical problem is that modern people try to use the Bible to support that which the Bible itself never addressed
or realized. The Bible cannot mean to us what it never meant to the original author or hearer. We can apply the text in different
ways to our cultural and existential situation, but our application must be inseparably linked to the original author’s intended
meaning. Every biblical text has only one meaning, but many applications or significances. (See my Biblical Interpretation
Seminar at www.freebiblecommentary.org )
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 4:36-37
36Now Joseph, a Levite of Cyprian birth, who was also called Barnabas by the apostles (which translated means Son
of Encouragement), 37and who owned a tract of land, sold it and brought the money and laid it at the apostles’ feet.
4:36 “Joseph, a Levite” The Old Testament forbade priests to own land, but the Roman authorities had changed many things
in Palestine.
▣ “called Barnabas by the apostles (which translated means Son of Encouragement)” This is the popular meaning of
“Barnabas.” In Aramaic it could have meant “son of prophecy” or in Hebrew possibly “son of Nebo” (AB, vol. 1). He was an
early leader in the Jerusalem church and Paul’s friend and missionary companion. Eusebius, an early church historian, says that
he was one of the seventy in Luke 10.
SPECIAL TOPIC: BARNABAS
I. The Man
A. born in Cyprus (cf. Acts 4:36)
B. of the tribe of Levi (cf. Acts 4:36)
C. nicknamed “son of encouragement” (cf. Acts 4:36; 11:23)
D. a member of the Jerusalem church (cf. Acts 11:22)
E. he had the spiritual gifts of a prophet and teacher (cf. Acts 13:1)
F. called an apostle (cf. Acts 14:14)
II. His Ministry
A. in Jerusalem
1. sold his property and gave all the money to the Apostles to help the poor (cf. Acts 4:37)
2. leader in the Jerusalem church (cf. Acts 11:22)
B. with Paul
1. He was one of the first to trust Paul’s conversion (cf. Acts 9:27).
2. He went to Tarsus find Paul and get him to help with the new church in Antioch (cf. Acts 11:24-26).
3. The church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul to the church in Jerusalem with a contribution for the poor (cf. Acts
11:29-30).
4. Barnabas and Paul go on the first missionary journey (cf. Acts 13:1-3)
5. Barnabas was the team leader on Cyprus (his home island), but soon Paul’s leadership was recognized (cf. Acts
13:13)
6. They reported to the church in Jerusalem to explain and document their mission work among the Gentiles (cf.
Acts 15, called the Jerusalem Council).
7. Barnabas and Paul had their first disagreement about Jewish food laws and Gentile fellowship recorded in Gal.
2:11-14.
8. Barnabas and Paul planned a second missionary journey, but a dispute broke out over Barnabas’ cousin, John
Mark (cf. Col. 4:10), who deserted the work on the first mission trip (cf. Acts 13:13). Paul refused to take him
on the second mission trip, so the team broke up (cf. Acts 15:36-41). This resulted in two teams (i.e., Barnabas
and John Mark and Paul and Silas).
III. Church Tradition (Eusebius)
A. Barnabas was one of the seventy sent out by Jesus (cf. Luke 10:1-20).
B. He died as a Christian martyr on his home island, Cyprus.
C. Tertullian says he wrote the book of Hebrews.
D. Clement of Alexandria says he wrote the non-canonical book of the Epistle of Barnabas.
4:37 “who owned a tract of land” He was a man of means (like Nicodemus and Joseph of Aramathea). Chapter 5 shows the
potential for abuse in this method of financing ministry (e.g., jealousy, lying, and death).
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Who are the Sadducees? Why were they so mad?
2. What is the Sanhedrin?
3. What is the significance of Ps. 118?
4. Why is v. 12 so significant?
5. Does the predestination of v. 28 refer to individuals or God’s plan of redemption? Why?
6. Is Luke trying to set a precedent for the church in 4:32-5:11?
ACTS 5
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Ananias and Sapphira |
Lying to the Holy Spirit |
The Sharing of Goods |
Ananias and Sapphira |
The Fraud of Ananias and |
|
|
(4:32-5:11) |
|
|
|
|
4:32-5:6 |
|
|
5:1-11 |
5:1-11 |
|
5:1-6 |
5:1-6 |
|
|
5:7-11 |
5:7-8 |
5:7-11 |
|
|
|
5:9-11 |
|
Many Signs and Wonders |
Continuing Power in the |
Second Arrest of the |
Miracles and Wonders |
The General Situation |
5:12-16 |
5:12-16 |
5:12-21a |
5:12-16 |
5:12-16 |
Persecution of the Apostles |
Imprisoned Apostles Freed |
|
The Apostles are |
The Apostles’ Arrest and |
5:17-26 |
5:17-21 |
|
5:17-21a |
5:17-18 |
|
|
|
|
5:19-21a |
|
|
|
|
A Summons to Appear |
|
Apostles on Trial Again |
5:21b-26 |
5:21b-26 |
5:21b-26 |
|
5:22-32 |
|
|
|
5:27-32 |
|
5:27-32 |
5:27-28 |
5:27-33 |
|
Gamaliel’s Advice |
Gamaliel |
5:29-32 |
|
5:33-42 |
5:33-42 |
5:33-39a |
5:33-39a |
Gamaliel’s Intervention |
|
|
|
|
5:34-39a |
|
|
5:39b-42 |
5:39b-42 |
5:39b-41 |
|
|
|
|
5:42 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 5:1-6
1But a man named Ananias, with his wife Sapphira, sold a piece of property, 2and kept back some of the price for
himself, with his wife’s full knowledge, and bringing a portion of it, he laid it at the apostles’ feet. 3But Peter said,
“Ananias, why had Satan filled your heart to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back some of the price of the land? 4While
it remained unsold, did it not remain your own? And after it was sold, was it not under your control? Why is it that you
have conceived this deed in your heart? You have not lied to men but to God.” 5And as he heard these words, Ananias
fell down and breathed his last; and great fear came over all who heard of it. 6The young men got up and covered him
up, and after carrying him out, they buried him.
5:1 “Ananias” The full Hebrew name would have been Hananiah, which means “YHWH has graciously given” or “YHWH is
gracious” (BDB 337).
▣ Sapphira” This was Ananias’ wife. The name in Aramaic means “beautiful.” They were both believers.
5:2 kept back” This same rare verb (nosphizomai) is used in the Septuagint (LXX) of Joshua 7:1 to describe the sin of Achan.
F. F. Bruce, in his commentary on Acts (NIC) has made the comment that Ananias was to the early church what Achan was to
the Conquest. This sin had the potential of hurting the entire church. This term is also used in Titus 2:10 of slaves stealing from
their masters.
▣ “bringing a portion of it, he laid it at the apostles’ feet” This mimics what Barnabas did in 4:37. This couple had the
freedom to sell or not to sell their personal property (cf. v. 4). They had the freedom to give some or all of it to the Lord’s work.
They did not have the right to give part, but claim they gave all. Their motives and duplicitous actions revealed their heart (cf.
v. 4c; Luke 21:14). God looks at the heart (cf. I Sam. 16:7; I Kgs. 8:39; I Chr. 28:9; Pro. 21:2; Jer. 17:10; Luke 16:15; Acts 1:24;
Rom. 8:27).
5:3 “Satan. . .Holy Spirit” This shows the presence of the two spiritual forces which are active in our world and in our lives.
In Eph. 2:2-3 (cf. James. 4) are listed the three enemies of post-Genesis humanity:
1. the fallen world system
2. a personal tempter
3. our fallen nature
SPECIAL TOPIC: SATAN
This is a very difficult subject for several reasons.
1. The OT reveals not an archenemy of good, but a servant of YHWH, who offers mankind an alternative and also accuses
mankind of unrighteousness. There is only one God (monotheism), one power, one cause in the OT—YHWH.
2. The concept of a personal archenemy of God developed in the interbiblical (non-canonical) literature under the
influence of Persian dualistic religions (Zoroastrianism). This, in turn, greatly influenced rabbinical Judaism and the
Essene community (i.e., Dead Sea Scrolls).
3. The NT develops the OT themes in surprisingly stark, but selective, categories.
If one approaches the study of evil from the perspective of biblical theology (each book or author or genre studied
and outlined separately), then very different views of evil are revealed.
If, however, one approaches the study of evil from a non-biblical or extra-biblical approach of world religions
or eastern religions, then much of the NT development is foreshadowed in Persian dualism and Greco-Roman spiritism.
If one is presuppositionally committed to the divine authority of Scripture, then the NT development must be seen
as progressive revelation. Christians must guard against allowing Jewish folklore or western literature (Dante, Milton)
to further influence the concept. There is certainly mystery and ambiguity in this area of revelation. God has chosen
not to reveal all aspects of evil, its origin, its development, its purpose, but He has revealed its defeat!
In the OT the term “satan” or “accuser” (BDB 966) can relate to three separate groups.
1. human accusers (cf. I Sam. 29:4; II Sam. 19:22; I Kgs. 11:14,20,29; Ps. 109:6)
2. angelic accusers (cf. Num. 22:22-23; Job 1-2; Zech. 3:1)
3. demonic accusers (cf. I Chr. 21:1; I Kgs. 22:21; Zech. 13:2)
Only later in the intertestamental period is the serpent of Genesis 3 identified with Satan (cf. Book of Wisdom 2.23-24;
II Enoch 31:3), and even later does this become a rabbinical option (cf. Sot 9b and Sanh. 29a). The “sons of God” of
Genesis 6 become angels in I Enoch 54:6. I mention this, not to assert its theological accuracy, but to show its development.
In the NT these OT activities are attributed to angelic, personified evil (cf. II Cor. 11:3; Rev. 12:9).
The origin of personified evil is difficult or impossible (depending on your point of view) to determine from the OT.
One reason for this is Israel’7:14; Isa. 45:7; Amos 3:6). All causality was attributed to YHWH to demonstrate His
uniqueness and primacy (cf. Isa. 43:11; 44:6,8,24; 45:5-6,14,18,21,22).
Sources of possible information are (1) Job 1-2, where Satan is one of the “sons of God” (i.e., angels) or (2) Isaiah 14
and Ezekiel 28, where prideful near-eastern kings (Babylon and Tyre) are possibly used to illustrate the pride of Satan (cf.
I Tim. 3:6). I have mixed emotions about this approach. Ezekiel uses Garden of Eden metaphors, not only for the king of
Tyre as Satan (cf. Ezek. 28:12-16), but also for the king of Egypt as the Tree of the Knowledge of Good and Evil (Ezekiel
31). However, Isaiah 14, particularly vv. 12-14, seems to describe an angelic revolt through pride. If God wanted to reveal
to us the specific nature and origin of Satan, this is a very oblique way and place to do it. We must guard against the trend
of systematic theology of taking small, ambiguous parts of different testaments, authors, books, and genres and combining
them as pieces of one divine puzzle.
I agree with Alfred Edersheim (The Life and Times of Jesus the Messiah, vol. 2, appendices XIII [pp. 748-763] and
XVI [pp.770-776]) that rabbinical Judaism has been overly influenced by Persian dualism and demonic speculation. The
rabbis are not a good source for truth in this area. Jesus radically diverges from the teachings of the Synagogue in this area.
I think that the concept of an archangelic enemy of YHWH developed from the two high gods of Iranian dualism, Ahkiman
and Ormaza, and were then developed by the rabbis into a biblical dualism of YHWH and Satan.
There is surely progressive revelation in the NT as to the personification of evil, but not as elaborate as the rabbis. A
good example of this difference is the “war in heaven.” The fall of Satan is a logical necessity, but the specifics are not
given. Even what is given is veiled in apocalyptic genre (cf. Rev. 12:4,7,12-13). Although Satan is defeated in Jesus and
exiled to earth, he still functions as a servant of YHWH (cf. Matt. 4:1; Luke 22:31-32; I Cor. 5:5; I Tim. 1:20).
We must curb our curiosity in this area. There is a personal force of temptation and evil, but there is still only one God
and we are still responsible for our choices. There is a spiritual battle, both before and after salvation. Victory can only
come and remain in and through the Triune God. Evil has been defeated and will be removed!
SPECIAL TOPIC: PERSONAL EVIL
This is a very difficult subject for several reasons.
1. The OT does not reveal an arch enemy to good, but a servant of YHWH who offers mankind an alternative and accuses
mankind of unrighteousness (A. B. Davidson, pp. 300-306).
2. The concept of a personal arch enemy of God developed in the inter-biblical (non-canonical) literature under the
influence of Persian religion (Zoroastrianism). This, in turn, greatly influenced rabbinical Judaism.
3. The NT develops the OT themes in surprisingly stark, but selective, categories.
If one approaches the study of evil from the perspective of biblical theology (each book or author or genre studied and
outlined separately) then very different views of evil are revealed.
If, however, one approaches the study of evil from a non-biblical or extra-biblical approach of world religions or eastern
religions then much of the NT development is foreshadowed in Persian dualism and Greco-Roman spiritism.
If one is presuppositionally committed to the divine authority of Scripture, then the NT development must be seen as
progressive revelation. Christians must guard against allowing Jewish folk lore or English literature (i.e., Dante, Milton) to further
clarify the concept. There is certainly mystery and ambiguity in this area of revelation. God has chosen not to reveal all aspects
of evil, its origin, its purpose, but He has revealed its defeat!
In the OT the term Satan (BDB 966) or accuser seems to relate to three separate groups.
1. human accusers (I Sam. 29:4; II Sam. 19:22; I Kgs. 11:14,23,25; Ps. 109:6)
2. angelic accusers (Num. 22:22-23; Zech. 3:1)
3. demonic accusers (I Chr. 21:1; I Kgs. 22:21; Zech. 13:2)
Only later in the intertestamental period is the serpent of Genesis 3 identified with Satan (cf. Book of Wisdom 2:23-24; II
Enoch 31:3), and even later does this become a rabbinical option (cf. Sot 9b and Sanh. 29a). The “sons of God” of Genesis 6
become the evil angels in I Enoch 54:6. They become the origin of evil in rabbinical theology. I mention this, not to assert its
theological accuracy, but to show its development. In the NT these OT activities are attributed to angelic, personified evil (i.e.,
Satan) in II Cor. 11:3; Rev. 12:9.
The origin of personified evil is difficult or impossible (depending on your point of view) to determine from the OT. One
reason for this is Israel’s strong monotheism (cf. I Kgs. 22:20-22; Eccl. 7:14; Isa. 45:7; Amos 3:6). All causality was attributed
to YHWH to demonstrate His uniqueness and primacy (cf. Isa. 43:11; 44:6,8,24; 45:5-6,14,18,21,22).
Sources of possible information are (1) Job 1-2, where Satan is one of the “sons of God” (i.e., angels) or (2) Isaiah 14;
Ezekiel 28, where prideful near eastern kings (Babylon and Tyre) are used to illustrate the pride of Satan (cf. I Tim. 3:6). I have
mixed emotions about this approach. Ezekiel uses Garden of Eden metaphors not only of the king of Tyre as Satan (cf. Ezek.
28:12-16), but also for the king of Egypt as the Tree of the Knowledge of Good and Evil (Ezekiel 31). However, Isaiah 14,
particularly vv. 12-14, seems to describe an angelic revolt through pride. If God wanted to reveal to us the specific nature and
origin of Satan this is a very oblique way and place to do it. We must guard against the trend of systematic theology of taking
small, ambiguous parts of different testaments, authors, books, and genres and combining them as pieces of one divine puzzle.
Alfred Edersheim (The Life and Times of Jesus the Messiah, vol. 2, appendices XIII [pp. 748-763] and XVI [pp. 770-776])
says that Rabbinical Judaism has been overly influenced by Persian dualism and demonic speculation. The rabbis are not a good
source for truth in this area. Jesus radically diverges from the teachings of the Synagogue. I think that the rabbinical concept of
angelic mediation and opposition in the giving of the law to Moses on Mt. Sinai opened the door to the concept of an arch-angelic
enemy of YHWH as well as mankind. There are two high gods of Persian (Zoroastrian) dualism, Ahkiman and Ormaza, good
and evil. This dualism developed into a Judaic limited dualism of YHWH and Satan.
There is surely progressive revelation in the NT as to the development of evil, but not as elaborate as the rabbis proclaim.
A good example of this difference is the “war in heaven.” The fall of Satan is a logical necessity, but the specifics are not given.
Even what is given is veiled in apocalyptic genre (cf. Rev. 12:4,7,12-13). Although Satan is defeated and exiled to earth, he still
functions as a servant of YHWH (cf. Matt. 4:1; Luke 22:31-32; I Cor. 5:5; I Tim. 1:20).
We must curb our curiosity in this area. There is a personal force of temptation and evil, but there is still only one God and
mankind is still responsible for his/her choices. There is a spiritual battle, both before and after salvation. Victory can only come
and remain in and through the Triune God. Evil has been defeated and will be removed!
▣ “filled” This is the same word used of the Spirit (cf. Eph. 5:18). Filling requires cooperation! We are filled with something
(see full note at 5:17)! Satan is involved, but we are responsible (cf. Luke 22:3-6). I recommend the book Three Crucial
Questions About Spiritual Warfare, by Clinton E. Arnold. Surprisingly there is continuing satanic influence in the lives of
believers (cf. Eph. 6:10-19; I John 5:18-19). See fuller notes at 2:4 and 3:10.
This phrase (i.e., filled your heart”) may be a Hebrew idiom (cf. Esther 7:5; Eccl. 8:11; 9:3). Many scholars assume an
Aramaic original to the early chapters of Acts.
▣ “to lie to the Holy Spirit” They lied to Peter and the church, but in reality they lied to the Spirit. Theologically this is very
similar to Jesus asking Paul on the road to Damascus, “Why are you persecuting Me?” (cf. Acts 9:4). Paul was persecuting
individual believers, but Jesus took it personally, as does the Spirit here. This should be a word of warning to modern believers.
5:4 This verse has two questions that expect “yes” answers. This is a grammatical feature, not an interpretive issue.
▣ “You have not lied to men but to God” It was not that they kept part of the money, but that they lied to make themselves look
spiritual. Notice that even a kind, generous act, which is done with a bad motive, is a sin (cf. Rom. 14:23c). Notice that the Holy
Spirit mentioned in v. 3 here is called God.
5:5 “fell down and breathed his last” In the ancient world one’s last breath was evidence that the spirit of the person had left
(cf. Jgds. 4:2; Ezek. 21:7 in the LXX). This rare term is found in the NT only in Acts (cf. 5:4,10; 12:23). This is an example of
temporal judgment. This is similar to God’s judgment on Aaron’s sons in Leviticus 10. Sin is serious to God. It cost a life (cf.
II Kgs. 14:6; Ezek. 18:4,20).
▣ “a great fear came over all” This possibly was the purpose of this temporal judgment. This would be analogous to the OT
deaths of Nadab and Abihu of Leviticus 10 and Uzzah of II Samuel 6. Based on I Cor. 11:30; James 5:20; and I John 5:16-17,
it is possible to assume that some sins by believers result in an early death. It is hard to keep the balance between the holiness
of God (transcendence) and Fatherhood of God (immanence).
5:6 “they buried him” Jews of the first century did not practice embalming (they still do not), probably because of Gen. 3:19
(cf. Ps. 103:14; 104:29). A person had to be buried quickly, usually within one day.
Because of the offense there was no memorial service or other Christian burial rites.
SPECIAL TOPIC: BURIAL PRACTICES
I. Mesopotamia
A. Proper burial was very important to a happy afterlife.
B. An example of a Mesopotamian curse is, “May the earth not receive your corpses.”
II. Old Testament
A. Proper burial was very important (cf. Eccl. 6:3).
B. It was done very quickly (cf. Sarah in Genesis 23 and Rachel in Gen. 35:19 and notice Deut. 21:23).
C. Improper burial was a sign of rejection and sin.
1. Deuteronomy 28:26
2. Isaiah 14:20
3. Jeremiah 8:2; 22:19
D. Burial was done if possible in family vaults in the home area.
E. There was no embalming, like Egypt. Mankind came from dust and must return to dust (ex. Gen. 3:19; Ps. 103:14;
104:29).
F. In rabbinical Judaism it was difficult to balance a proper respect and handling of the body with the concept of
ceremonial defilement connected to dead bodies.
III. New Testament
A. Burial followed death quickly, usually within twenty-four hours. The Jews often watched the grave for three days,
believing that the soul could return to the body within that time frame (cf. John 11:39).
B. Burial involved the cleaning and wrapping of the body with spices (cf. John 11:44; 19:39-40).
C. There were no distinctive Jewish or Christian burial procedures or items placed in the grave in first century Palestine.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 5:7-11
7Now there elapsed an interval of about three hours, and his wife came in, not knowing what had happened. 8And
Peter responded to her, “Tell me whether you sold the land for such and such a price?” And she said, “Yes, that was the
price.” 9Then Peter said to her, “Why is it that you have agreed together to put the Spirit of the Lord to the test? Behold,
the feet of those who have buried your husband are at the door, and they will carry you out as well.” 10And immediately
she fell at his feet and breathed her last, and the young men came in and found her dead, and they carried her out and
buried her beside her husband. 11And great fear came over the whole church, and over all who heard of these things.
5:7 “about three hours” This shows the vividness of the account by an eyewitness. Luke’s writing is characterized by this
attention to details. It reflects both his writing style and research methods (i.e., interviews with eyewitnesses).
5:8 The lie, the pretense continues!
5:9 “test” In a round about sense, this was a test of the presence and power of the Holy Spirit, God the Father’s personal presence
on earth (see Special Topic at 1:2). There are temporal consequences, as well as eternal consequences for challenging the Spirit!
These two did not realize that it was the Spirit they were lying to, but Peter did.
There are two Greek terms used to denote a test. This one connotes “to test with a view toward destruction.” This possibly
reflects Exod. 17:2 and Deut. 6:16, where these texts warn against tempting/testing YHWH (cf. Ps. 78:18,41,56).
SPECIAL TOPIC: GREEK TERMS FOR TESTING AND THEIR CONNOTATIONS
There are two Greek terms which have the connotation of testing someone for a purpose.
1. Dokimazō, Dokimion, Dokimasia
This term is a metalurgist term for testing the genuineness of something i.e., metaphorically someone) by fire. The fire
reveals the true metal and burns off (i.e., purifies) the dross. This physical process became a powerful idiom for God and/or
Satan and/or humans testing others. This term is only used in a positive sense of testing with a view towards acceptance.
It is used in the NT of testing
a. oxen – Luke 14:19
b. ourselves – I Cor. 11:28
c. our faith – James. 1:3
d. even God – Heb. 3:9
The outcomes of these tests were assumed to be positive (cf. Rom. 1:28; 14:22; 16:10; II Cor. 10:18; 13:3,7; Phil. 2:27; I
Pet. 1:7), therefore, the term conveys the idea of someone examined and proved
a. to be worthwhile
b. to be good
c. to be genuine
d. to be valuable
e. to be honored
2. Peirazō, Peirasmus
This term often has the connotation of examination for the purpose of fault finding or rejection. It is often used in connection
to Jesus’ temptation in the wilderness.
a. It conveys the attempt to trap Jesus (cf. Matt. 4:1; 16:1; 19:3; 22:18, 35; Mark 1:13; Luke 4:38; Heb. 2:18).
b. This term (peirazōn) is used as a title for Satan in Matt. 4:3; I Thess. 3:5.
c. It is used by Jesus warning us not to test God (cf. Matt. 14:7; Luke 4:12) [or Christ cf. I Cor 10:9]. It also denotes the
attempt to do something that has failed (cf. Acts 9:20; 20:21; Heb.11:29). It
is used in connection with the temptation and trials of believers (cf. I Cor. 7:5; 10:9, 13; Gal. 6:1; I Thess. 3:5; Heb.
2:18; James. 1:2, 13, 14; I Pet. 4:12; II Pet 2:9). God allows the three enemies of mankind (i.e., the world, the flesh,
and the devil) to manifest in a specific time and place.
5:10 The term used to describe “the young men” (neōteroi) in v. 6 is different from the term neanikoi in v. 10. It is uncertain
whether this is just authorial variety or a different group of young men in the church. Both Greek words come from the same root
word (neos).
5:11 “great fear. . .over all who heard of these things” Luke uses the common word phobos several times in this same general
sense (cf. Luke 1:69; 3:37; Acts 19:17). For believers it is a sense of reverence, respect, and awe, but for unbelievers it is a sense
of foreboding, fear, and terror (cf. Luke 12:4-5; Heb. 10:31).
▣ “church” This is the first time this term is used in Acts, although it is in the Textus Receptus at 2:47. See Special Topic
following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: CHURCH (EKKLESIA)
This Greek term, ekklesia, is from two words, “out of” and “called,” therefore, the term implies the divinely called-out ones.
The early church took this word from secular use (cf. Acts 19:32,39,41) and because of the Septuagint’s use of this term for
“congregation” of Israel (Qahal, BDB 874, cf. Num. 16:3; 20:4). They used it for themselves as a continuation of the OT people
of God. They were the new Israel (cf. Rom. 2:28-29; Gal. 6:16; I Pet. 2:5,9; Rev. 1:6), the fulfillment of God’s worldwide mission
(cf. Gen. 3:15; 12:3; Exod. 19:5-6; Matt. 28:18-20; Luke 24:47; Acts 1:8).
This term is used in several senses in the Gospels and Acts.
1. secular town meeting, Acts 19:32,39,41
2. universal people of God in Christ, Matt. 16:18 and Ephesians
3. a local congregation of believers in Christ, Matt. 18:17; Acts 5:11 (in these verses the church in Jerusalem)
4. the people of Israel collectively, Acts 7:38, in Stephen’s sermon
5. the people of God in a region, Acts 8:3 (Judah or Palestine)
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 5:12-16
12At the hands of the apostles many signs and wonders were taking place among the people; and they were all with
one accord in Solomon’s portico. 13But none of the rest dared to associate with them; however, the people held them in
high esteem. 14And all the more believers in the Lord, multitudes of men and women, were constantly added to their
number, 15to such an extent that they even carried the sick out into the streets and laid them on cots and pallets, so that
when Peter came by at least his shadow might fall on any one of them. 16Also the people from the cities in the vicinity of
Jerusalem were coming together, bringing people who were sick or afflicted with unclean spirits, and they were all being
healed.
5:12-16 This is a brief summary, which is so characteristic of the book of Acts (cf. 2:43-47 and 4:32-35).
5:12 “many signs and wonders” This is an Imperfect passive (deponent) indicative. These two terms appear in Peter’s quote
from Joel 2 in Acts 2:19. Miracles were repeatedly performed (cf. 2:43; 4:30; 5:12; 6:8; 7:36; 14:3; 15:20). Remember that the
miraculous is not automatically a sign of deity (cf. Matt. 24:24; and II Thess. 2:9), but it was and is a way to confirm the Christian
message, which was so radically different from the focus and emphasis of Judaism.
▣ “they were all in one accord” See note at 1:14. It is important to Luke to emphasize this again and again. It was an ideal that
did not last long!
▣ “in Solomon’s portico” This was an open colonnade within the Temple area along the eastern wall of the Court of the Gentiles.
Jesus often taught there also (cf. John 10:23). This was the site of Peter and John’s first arrest.
5:13
NASB “none of the rest dared to associate with them”
NKJV, NRSV “none of the rest dared join them”
TEV “Nobody outside the group dared join them”
NJB “No one else dared to join them”
This is an unusual phrase. It seems to describe the negative side of “fear.” There are several groups designated in this
context (cf. vv. 12-16). For most, the events were a draw to faith in Christ (cf. #5 and possibly #6 and #7) or a confirmation of
faith in Christ (i.e., #3).
1. the Apostles, v. 12
2. the people, vv. 12,13
3. the believers (i.e., in one accord in Solomon’s portico), v. 12
4. the rest (i.e., the Jewish leadership), v. 13
5. new believers, v. 14
6. the sick of Jerusalem, v. 15
7. the sick and possessed from the surrounding villages, v. 16
The present middle infinitive “to associate” is literally “to glue.” Luke uses this term often, but in a wide variety of senses.
Here it refers to their not becoming part of the new group (i.e., believers in Jesus as the promised Messiah).
5:14 “believers” This is a present active participle, which implies an ongoing action. See Special Topics at 2:40 and 3:16.
▣
NASB, TEV,
NJB, NIV “in the Lord”
NKJV, NRSV “to the Lord”
This grammatical form (i.e., eight case system) can be understood as dative (“to”) or locative (“in”). I think it is a way
to show that believers belong to the Lord. We are His possession, and He is ours!
▣ “women” Luke especially highlights “women,” both in the Gospel and Acts (i.e., 1:14; 8:12; 16:1,13; 17:4,12,34; 18:2; 21:5).
Jesus brings a new sense of dignity and worth to women and children.
▣ “were constantly added to their number” Luke often used summary statements of the growth of the church (cf. 2:47; 5:14;
6:7; 9:31; 12:24; 16:5; 19:20).
5:15 “when Peter came by at least his shadow” Miracles at this stage were common as a way of confirming the gospel. Peter
was the obvious spokesman for the Apostles. This same type of confirming, healing also occurred through Paul (cf. 19:12).
As interpreters we must remember that these miracle signs were given to
1. show the compassion of God
2. show the truth of the gospel
3. show who were the God-called leaders
These signs were given in a particular culture, for a specific purpose. Because God did it there, it does not automatically
mean that He will do the same in every period of history in every culture. Not that God is not active in every age nor less
compassionate, but that the people of God must walk by faith and not by sight! Miracles continue, but salvation of sinners must
be the greatest goal, not physical healing for those who will still die!
It seems to me that God has not changed. His character, power, compassion, and desire for all to be saved remains the same,
but looking at history theologically, there are two major periods of intense, supernatural signs, both from God and from Satan.
1. surrounding the time of the incarnation and development of the early church
2. preceding the end-time events when believers will be under terrible persecution
I would like to quote A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, vol. III, p. 62
“There was, of course, no virtue or power in Peter’s shadow. That was faith with superstition, of course, just as
similar cases in the Gospels occur (Matt. 9:20; Mark 6:56; John 9:5) and the use of Paul’s handkerchief (Acts 19:12).
God honours even superstitious faith if it is real faith in him. Few people are wholly devoid of superstition.”
5:16 “they were all being healed” This is an imperfect passive indicative, which asserts each one was healed (the agent is
unexpressed, but probably the Spirit) one at a time, over and over and over, until none were left!
This is a summary type statement. Are we to take it literally (i.e., every single one)? Jesus required faith or used the healing
to (1) train the disciples or (2) cause the crowds to listen.
It is shocking to me that not all those healed in the NT were simultaneously “saved” (i.e., trust Christ and have eternal life).
Physical healing is a poor substitute for spiritual salvation. Miracles are only truly helpful if they bring us to God. All humans
live in a fallen world. Bad things happen. God often chooses not to intervene, but this says nothing about His love and concern.
Be careful of demanding that God act miraculously every time in this current evil age. He is sovereign and we do not know the
full implications of any given situation.
At this point I would like to add my commentary notes from II Tim. 4:20 about Paul and physical healing (see
www.freebiblecommentary.org ) :
“There are so many questions we would like to ask the NT writers. One subject all believers think about is
physical healing. In Acts (cf. 19:12; 28:7-9) Paul is able to heal, but here and in II Cor. 12:7-10 and Phil. 2:25-30, he
seems unable. Why are some healed and not all, and is there a time window connected to healing which has closed?
I surely believe in a supernatural, compassionate Father who has and does heal physically as well as spiritually,
but why is this healing aspect seemingly present and then noticeably absent? I do not think that it is connected to
human faith, for surely Paul had faith (cf. II Corinthians 12). I feel that healing and believing miracles affirmed the
truthfulness and validity of the gospel, which it still does in areas of the world where it is first proclaimed. However,
I feel that God wants us to walk by faith and not by sight. Also, physical illness is often allowed in believer’s lives (1)
as temporal punishment for sin; (2) as consequences of life in a fallen world; and (3) to help believers mature
spiritually. My problem is that I never know which one is involved! My prayer for God’s will to be done in each case
is not a lack of faith but a sincere attempt to allow the gracious, compassionate God to work His will in each life.”
▣ “unclean spirits” See Special Topics below.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE DEMONIC (UNCLEAN SPIRIT)
A. Ancient peoples were animists. They attributed human personality traits to forces of nature, animals, and natural
objects. Life was explained through the interaction of these spiritual entities with mankind.
B. This personification became polytheism (many gods). Usually the demonic (genii) were lesser gods or demigods (good
or evil) that impacted individual human lives.
1. Mesopotamia, chaos and conflict
2. Egypt, order and function
3. Canaan, see W. F. Albright’s Archaeology and the Religion of Israel, Fifth Edition, pp. 67-92
C. The OT does not dwell on or develop the subject of lesser gods, angels, or the demonic, probably because of its strict
monotheism (cf. Exod. 8:10; 9:14; 15:11; Deut. 4:35,39; 6:4; 33:26; Ps. 35:10; 71:19; 86:8; Isa. 46:9; Jer. 10:6-7; Mic.
7:18). It does mention the false gods of the pagan nations (Shedim, BDB 993, cf. Deut. 32:17; Ps. 106:37) and it does
name or personify some of them.
1. Se’im (satyrs or hairy demons, BDB 972 III, cf. Lev. 17:7; II Chr. 11:15; Isa. 13:21; 34:14)
2. Lilith (female, a seducing demon, BDB 539, cf. Isa. 34:14)
3. Mavet (Hebrew term for death used for Canaanite god of the underworld, Mot, BDB 560, cf. Isa. 28:15,18; Jer.
9:21; and possibly Deut. 28:22)
4. Resheph (plague, fire, or hailstones, BDB 958, cf. Deut. 32:24; Ps. 78:48; Hab. 3:5)
5. Dever (pestilence, BDB 184, cf. Ps. 91:5-6; Hab. 3:5)
6. Az’azel (name uncertain, but possibly a desert demon or place name, BDB 736, cf. Lev. 16:8,10,26)
(These examples are taken from Encyclopaedia Judaica, vol. 5, p. 1523.)
However, there is no dualism or angelic independence from YHWH in the OT. Satan is a servant of YHWH (cf.
Job 1-2; Zechariah 3), not an independent, self-directing enemy (cf. A. B. Davidson, A Theology of the Old Testament,
pp. 300-306).
D. Judaism developed during the Babylonian exile (586-538 b.c.). It was theologically influenced by the Persian
personified dualism of Zoroastrianism, a good high god called Mazda or Ormazd and an evil opponent called Ahriman.
This allowed within post-exilic Judaism the personified dualism between YHWH and His angels and Satan and his
angels or demons.
Judaism’s theology of personified evil is explained and well documented in Alfred Edersheim’s The Life and
Times of Jesus the Messiah, vol. 2, appendix XIII (pp. 749-863) and XVI (pp. 770-776). Judaism personified evil in
three ways.
1. Satan or Sammael
2. the evil intent (yetzer hara) within mankind
3. the Death Angel
Edersheim characterizes these as (1) the Accuser; (2) the Tempter; and (3) the Punisher (vol. 2, p. 756). There is a
marked theological difference between post-exilic Judaism and the NT presentation and explanation of evil.
E. The NT, especially the Gospels, asserts the existence and opposition of evil spiritual beings to humanity and to YHWH
(in Judaism Satan was an enemy to mankind, but not to God). They oppose God’s will, rule, and kingdom.
Jesus confronted and expelled these demonic beings, also called (1) unclean spirits (cf. Luke 4:36; 6:18) or (2)
evil spirits (cf. Luke 7:21; 8:2), from human beings. Jesus clearly made a distinction between illness (physical and
mental) and the demonic. He demonstrated His power and spiritual insight by recognizing and exorcizing these evil
spirits. They often recognized Him and attempted to address Him, but Jesus rejected their testimony, demanded their
silence, and expelled them. Exorcisms are a sign of the defeat of Satan’s kingdom.
There is a surprising lack of information in the NT Apostolic letters on this subject. Exorcism is never listed as
a spiritual gift, nor is a methodology or procedure for it given for future generations of ministers or believers.
F. Evil is real; evil is personal; evil is present. Neither its origin nor its purpose is revealed. The Bible asserts its reality
and aggressively opposes its influence. There is no ultimate dualism in reality. God is in total control; evil is defeated
and judged and will be removed from creation.
G. God’s people must resist evil (cf. James 4:7). They cannot be controlled by it (cf. I John 5:18), but they can be tempted
and their witness and influence damaged (cf. Eph. 6:10-18). Evil is a revealed part of the Christian’s world-view.
Modern Christians have no right to redefine evil (the demythologizing of Rudolf Baltmann); depersonalize evil (the
social structures of Paul Tillich), nor attempt to explain it completely in psychological terms (Sigmund Freud). Its
influence is pervasive, but defeated. Believers need to walk in the victory of Christ!
SPECIAL TOPIC: EXORCISM
Exorcisms were common in Jesus’ day, but Jesus’ methods were radically different. His exorcisms were a sign of the New
Age. The rabbis used magic formulas (see Alfred Edersheim, the Life and Times of Jesus, The Messiah, vol. 2, Appendix XIII,
pp. 748-763; XVI, pp. 770-776), but Jesus used His own authority. There is so much confusion and bad information circulating
today about exorcism and the demonic. Part of this problem is that the NT does not discuss these issues. As a pastor I wish I had
more information on this subject. Here are some books I trust.
1. Christian Counseling and the Occult, Kurt E. Koch
2. Demons in the World Today, Merrill F. Unger
3. Biblical Demonology, Merrill F. Unger
4. Principalities and Powers, John Warwick Montgomery
5. Christ and the Powers, Hendrik Berkhof
6. Three Crucial Questions About Spiritual Warfare by Clinton Anton
It surprises me that exorcism is not listed as one of the spiritual gifts and that the subject is not addressed in the Apostolic
letters. I believe in a biblical world view which includes the spiritual realm (i.e., good and evil), present and active in the physical
realm (i.e., Job 1-2; Daniel 10; Eph. 6:10-18). However, God has chosen not to reveal the specifics. As believers we have all
the information we need to live godly, productive lives for Him! But some subjects are not revealed or developed.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 5:17-26
17But the high priest rose up, along with all his associates (that is the sect of the Sadducees), and they were filled with
jealousy. 18They laid hands on the apostles and put them in a public jail. 19But during the night an angel of the Lord
opened the gates of the prison, and taking them out he said, 20“Go, stand and speak to the people in the temple the whole
message of this Life.” 21Upon hearing this, they entered into the temple about daybreak and began to teach. Now when
the high priest and his associates came, they called the Council together, even all the Senate of the sons of Israel, and sent
orders to the prison house for them to be brought. 22But the officers who came did not find them in the prison; and they
returned and reported back, 23saying, “We found the prison house locked quite securely and the guards standing at the
doors; but when we had opened up, we found no one inside.” 24Now when the captain of the temple guard and the chief
priests heard these words, they were greatly perplexed about them as to what would come of this. 25But someone came
and reported to them, “The men whom you put in prison are standing in the temple and teaching the people!” 26Then the
captain went along with the officers and proceeded to bring them back without violence (for they were afraid of the people,
that they might be stoned).
5:17 “they were filled with jealousy”
The Greek word simply means “to boil.” Therefore, context must tell us it is zealousness
or jealousy. This shows the true motivation of the religious leaders, jealousy! In Luke’s Gospel Jesus’ main enemies were the
Pharisees, but in Acts His followers’ main enemies were the Sadducees.
The verb “filled” is used in a variety of ways by Luke to show what characterizes or describes a person or personified entity.
1. John the Baptist, even before his birth, was filled with the Holy Spirit – Luke 1:15
2. Elizabeth was filled with the Holy Spirit – Luke 1:41
3. Zacharias was filled with the Holy Spirit –Luke 1:61
4. all in the Synagogue who heard Jesus speak were filled with rage – Luke 4:28
5. those in the house where the paralytic was lowered through the roof were filled with fear – Luke 5:26
6. Pharisees and Scribes traveling with Jesus on a Sabbath were filled with rage – Luke 6:11
7. those in the upper room on Pentecost were filled with the Holy Spirit – Acts 2:4
8. those who heard Peter speak in the temple were filled with amazement – Acts 3:10
9. Peter speaking before the Sanhedrin was filled with the Holy Spirit – Acts 4:8
10. all in the upper room were filled with the Holy Spirit – Acts 4:31
11. Satan filled Ananias’ and Sapphira’s hearts – Acts 5:3
12. Peter and John spoke to the Sanhedrin again and they were filled with jealousy – Acts 5:17
13. Jerusalem filled with the gospel – Acts 5:28
14. the seven full of the Spirit and wisdom – Acts 6:3
15. Stephen full of faith and the Holy Spirit – Acts 6:5,8; 7:55
16. Ananias lays hands on Saul/Paul and he is filled with the Holy Spirit – Acts 9:17
17. Paul preaches filled with the Spirit – Acts 13:9
18. Jews in the crowd who Paul preached to were filled with jealousy – Acts 13:45
19. the disciples were continually filled with joy and the Holy Spirit – Acts 13:52
20. Ephesus was filled with confusion – Acts 19:29
In the presence of the gospel what are you “filled” with?
5:18 These first chapters in Acts show the problems faced by the early church. The problems differ from age to age, culture to
culture, but God is for us, with us, and empowers us to overcome. Nothing—prison, attempted humiliation, threats, etc.—can rob
believers of the presence and peace of Christ (cf. Rom. 8:31-39).
5:19 “an angel of the Lord” This phrase is used two ways in the OT.
1. an angel (cf. Gen. 24:7,40; Exod. 23:20-23; 32:34; Num. 22:22; Jdgs. 5:23; I Sam. 24:16; I Chr. 21:15ff; Zech. 1:28)
2. as a way of referring to YHWH (cf. Gen. 16:7-13; 22:11-15; 31:11,13; 48:15-16; Exod. 3:2,4; 13:21; 14:19; Jdgs. 2:1;
6:22-24; 13:3-23; Zech. 3:1-2)
Luke uses the phrase often (cf. Luke 1:11,13; 2:9; Acts 5:19; 7:30; 8:26; 12:7,11,23; 10:3; 27:23), but in the sense of #1
above. The NT does not use sense #2, except in Acts 8:26 and 29, where, “an angel of the Lord” is paralleled to the Holy Spirit.
▣ “opened the gates of the prison” This is similar to Paul and Silas’ experience at Philippi (cf. Acts 16:26). In many ways the
life of Peter is paralleled in Paul. This may have been Luke’s literary intentionality.
5:20 “Go, stand and speak” These function as three imperatives.
1. Go, present middle (deponent) imperative
2. Stand, aorist passive participle used as an imperative (Friberg’s, Analytical Greek New Testament, p. 379)
3. Speak, present active imperative
The angel had an evangelistic mission for the early church (and for today’s church).
▣ “speak to the people” This was the major thrust of the Apostles’ ministry. Boldness (see Special Topic at 4:29), not fear,
characterizes their new spirit-filled lives.
▣
NASB “the whole message of the Life”
NKJV “all the words of this life”
NRSV “the whole message about this life”
TEV “all about this new life”
NJB “all about this new Life”
This phrase is speaking about the new life (zōe, eternal life) found only in the gospel of Jesus Christ. They had been freed
both spiritually (salvation) and physically (out of prison). Now they were to tell all to all (cf. Matt. 28:18-20; Luke 24:47; Acts
1:8)!
5:21 Notice that being supernaturally freed did not imply that they would not be imprisoned again. Even God’s provision does
not mean that all difficulties will be solved or removed in ministry (cf. Matt. 5:10-12; Rom. 8:17; I Pet. 4:12-16)
▣ “the Council. . .the Senate of the sons of Israel” See Special Topic: Sanhedrin at 4:5. To whom does “the Senate” refer?
Curtis Vaughan, in Acts, pp. 39-40, says it was the elders of Jerusalem who were not members of the Sanhedrin at that present
time (cf. M. R. Vincent, Word Studies, Vol. 1, p. 234), but the NASB and NIV translations assume that Council and Senate are
synonymous.
5:23 “locked” This is a perfect passive participle. The idea was that the prison doors were secure and the guards set (perfect
active participle), but the prisoners were gone.
5:24 “they were greatly perplexed” Luke uses this term several times. It is an intensified form of aporeō (cf. Luke 24:4; Acts
25:20) with dia (cf. Luke 9:7; Acts 2:12; 5:24; 10:17). Its basic meaning is doubt, uncertainty, or perplexity.
▣ “as to what would come of this” The grammatical form of the phrase is an incomplete Fourth class conditional sentence
(an plus aorist middle [deponent] optative). The optative mood expresses perplexity (cf. Luke 1:61-62; 3:15; 8:9; 15:26;
22:23; Acts 5:24; 8:31; 10:17; 21:33, see James Allen Hewett, New Testament Greek, p. 195).
5:26 “they were afraid of the people, that they might be stoned” This showed the popularity of the early church (cf. v. 13;
2:47; 4:21) and the source of the continuing jealousy of the Jewish leaders.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 5:27-32
27When they had brought them, they stood them before the Council. The high priest questioned them, 28saying, “We
gave you strict orders not to continue teaching in this name, and yet, you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching and
intend to bring this man’s blood upon us.” 29But Peter and the apostles answered, “We must obey God rather than men.
30The God of our fathers raised up Jesus, whom you had put to death by hanging Him on a cross. 31He is the one whom
God exalted to His right hand as Prince and a Savior, to grant repentance to Israel, and forgiveness of sins. 32And we are
witnesses of these things; and so is the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those who obey Him.”
5:28
NASB, NRSV,
TEV “strict orders”
NKJV “strictly command”
NJB “strong warning”
The NKJV has “Did we not strictly command you not to teach in this name,” which is a Greek manuscript variant found in
the Greek texts א2, D, and E, but not in MSS P74, א*, A, or B. The UBS4 puts the NKJV option in the text, but “not” in brackets.
This question expects a “yes” answer. The Apostles were warned!
The construction is a Semitic idiom (cf. Luke 22:15) similar to the cognate accusative in Koine Greek, where the verb
(parangellō) and the direct object (parangelia) are from the same root. This construction intensifies the basic meaning of the
terms. It is interesting that this term in the Koine papyri found in Egypt meant an official summons to court or an order from a
court (cf. Moulton and Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek New Testament, p. 481).
▣ “this man’s” This expression shows the contempt of the Jewish leaders. They never mention Jesus’ name. The Talmud even
calls Him “so and so” (cf. M. R. Vincent, Word Studies, vol. 1, p. 234).
▣ “blood upon us” Peter and John were continuing to assert that these Jewish leaders engineered Jesus’ death (cf. v. 30; 2:33;
3:14-15; 4:10). This was also Stephen’s accusation in 7:52.
5:29 “must” This word dei means moral necessity. This shows the Apostles’ obligation to preach the truth, regardless of the
consequences (cf. 4:19). See full note at 1:16.
5:30 “The God of our fathers” These early Christians believed they were the true spiritual heirs and descendants of the OT
people of God (cf. 3:13; Rom. 2:28-29; Gal. 6:16; I Pet. 3:5,9; Rev. 1:6).
▣ “raised up Jesus” The NT affirms that the Father raised Jesus (cf. Acts 2:24,32; 3:15,26; 4:10; 5:30; 10:40; 13:30,33,34,37;
17:31; Rom. 6:4,9) to confirm the truth of Jesus’ life and teachings. This is a major aspect of the Kerygma (cf. I Corinthians 15).
It should also be noted that the NT affirms that the Son and the Spirit were also involved in this great affirmation event.
1. the Son – John 2:19-22; 10:17-18
2. the Spirit – Rom. 8:11
▣ “whom you had put to death by hanging Him on a cross” This relates back to the curse of Deut. 21:23. These religious
leaders wanted Jesus, a Messianic pretender, to bear the curse of YHWH. Jesus bore the curse of the OT law (i.e., the soul that
sins will surely die [cf. Ezek. 18:4,20] and all humans have sinned, cf. Rom. 3:9-18, 23) for us (cf. Gal. 3:13; Col. 1:14). Jesus
was the innocent lamb of God who gave Himself for the estranged world (cf. John 1:29; II Cor. 5:21).
5:31 “God exalted to His right hand” The term “exalted” is translated in John 3:14 as “lifted up” and in Phil. 2:9 as “highly
exalted.” The cross was Christ’s means of exaltation and triumph (cf. Col. 1:15; II Cor. 2:14).
The anthropomorphic phrase “right hand” was a metaphor for the place of power and authority (cf. Matt. 26:64). God is
an eternal Spirit. He does not have a physical body. See Special Topic at 2:33.
▣ “Prince” This verse clearly and specifically asserts the Messiahship of Jesus. This same term was used of Jesus in 3:15, where
it could be translated “Author” (NRSV). It can mean “chief,” “pioneer,” or “prince.” It was also used of the founder of a school
or family (cf. Heb. 2:10; 12:2). See Special Topic at 3:15.
▣ “Savior” This term was used in the first century Greco-Roman world of Caesar. He claimed to be the savior of culture and
peace. Another term which the Caesars claimed for themselves, but Christians used uniquely for Jesus, was Lord (kurios).
This term “Savior” was used in the OT as a term for YHWH (cf. II Sam. 22:3; Ps. 106:21; Isa. 43:4,11; 45:15,21; 49:26;
60:16; 63:8). NT writers often assert the deity of Jesus by attributing to Him OT titles of YHWH. Notice how Paul in his letter
to Titus does this.
1. 1:3, “God our Savior”
2. 1:4, “Christ Jesus our Savior”
3. 2:10, “God our Savior”
4. 2:13, “our great God and Savior, Christ Jesus”
5. 3:4, “God our Savior”
6. 3:6, “Jesus Christ our Savior”
▣ “to grant repentance to Israel, and forgiveness of sins” This shows the purpose of Jesus’ death (cf. Luke 24:47 and Acts
2:38). It is unusual for NT authors to refer to repentance as a gift from God (cf. Acts 11:18 [to Gentiles]; II Tim. 2:25; and
possibly also Rom. 2:4). Usually it is one of the requirements of the New Covenant for the human recipient of the gospel (cf. Mark
1:15 and Acts 3:16,19; 20:21). I think it is a literary way to show that God wants all humans made in His image to be saved. It
is not an issue related to God’s sovereignty.
Often those who focus solely on God’s part in the New Covenant use this verse to prove that salvation is all of God and does
not involve any participation on the part of mankind. However, this is a good example of proof-texting a passage to fit one’s
preconceived system of theology. The Bible clearly asserts the priority and necessity of God’s initiation, but also reveals that the
concept of “covenant” best describes His chosen model of how to relate to needy humanity. Freedom is a gift which God gave
in creation. God does not violate this gift/responsibility (cf. Rom. 2:4; II Cor. 7:10). He does draw us, woo us, work with us, and
provide a way of redemption (cf. John 6:44,65). But fallen humans must respond and continue to respond in repentance, faith,
obedience, and perseverance.
Here is an interesting quote from Frank Stagg, New Testament Theology, p. 119:
“Men cannot achieve but only receive repentance, yet they must receive it. By faith a man receives Christ into
his innermost person; and Christ, as a transforming presence reverses the course of that life from self-trust to trust in
God, from self-assertion to self-denial. This conversion is the reversal of the Fall, in which man sought to find the
whole meaning of his existence within himself.”
5:32 Several times in Acts Peter referred to the fact that the Apostles and disciples are witnesses of Jesus’ life and death and
resurrection. In this context he adds, “the Holy Spirit” as witness. This may be a way of affirming the two necessary OT witnesses
to confirm a matter (cf. Num. 35:30; Deut. 17:6).
Luke/Acts speak of the gift of the Spirit
1. at baptism – 2:38
2. at obedience to the gospel – 5:32
3. cannot be bought – 8:19-20
4. to the Gentiles – 10:45; 11:17
5. from the Father – Luke 11:13 (cf. James 1:17)
▣ “those who obey Him” Obedience is a lifestyle choice! We must obey by believing the gospel. We must continue in
obedience to enjoy its fruits (cf. Matt. 7:24-27; Luke 6:46-48). The rare term “obey” (peithomai plus archē, cf. 27:21; Titus 3:1),
used in vv. 29 and 32, was a combination of the terms “ruler” (archē) and obey.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 5:33-39
33But when they heard this, they were cut to the quick and intended to kill them. 34But a Pharisee named Gamaliel,
a teacher of the Law, respected by all the people, stood up in the Council and gave orders to put the men outside for a
short time. 35And he said to them, “Men of Israel, take care what you propose to do with these men. 36For some time ago
Theudas rose up, claiming to be somebody, and a group of about four hundred men joined up with him. But he was killed,
and all who followed him were dispersed and came to nothing. 37After this man, Judas of Galilee rose up in the days of
the census and drew away some people after him; he too perished, and all those who followed him were scattered. 38So
in the present case, I say to you, stay away from these men and let them alone, for if this plan or action is of men, it will
be overthrown; 39but if it is of God, you will not be able to overthrow them; or else you may even be found fighting against
God.”
5:33
NASB “they were cut to the quick”
NKJV “they were furious”
NRSV “they were enraged”
TEV “they were so furious”
NJB “this so infuriated them”
This term literally means “cut with a saw” or “gnash with the teeth.” This very same term in the same form is also used in
7:54, where the added phrase, “cut to the heart,” shows the full metaphorical sense (see also Luke 2:35). This strong term (i.e.,
diaprō) is similar in meaning to 2:37a.
▣ “intended to kill them” This is an imperfect middle (deponent) indicative, implying that (1) they began at this point to try
to kill them or (2) this was a recurrent plan and desire. From our knowledge of the early church’s growth from Acts, #1 fits best.
Notice it is the Sadducees who expressed this anger and murderous intent. It is just possible that the Pharisees (i.e., Gamaliel)
saw the early church as a useful thorn to poke at the Sadducean rejection of resurrection in general. Pharisees would not want
to affirm the resurrection of Jesus, but would affirm the concept of a resurrection followed by a future life with God.
It is surprising to modern Bible readers that religious leaders could plan murder. Remember these were Sadducees
committed to the writings of Moses, which commanded that a blasphemer must be stoned to death. These leaders thought they
were acting on God’s behalf and in conformity to His word (cf. Lev. 24:10-16).
5:34 “Pharisees” See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: PHARISEES
I. The term had one of the following possible origins:
A. “To be separate.” This group developed during the Macaabean period. (This is the most widely accepted view).
B. “To divide.” This is another meaning of the same Hebrew root. Some say it meant an interpreter (cf. II Tim. 2:15).
C. “Persian.” This is another meaning of the same Aramaic root. Some of the doctrines of the Pharisees have much in
common with Persian Zoroastrian dualism.
II. They developed during the Macaabean Period from the Hasidim (pious ones). Several different groups like the Essenes
came out of the anti-Hellenistic reaction to Antiochus IV Epiphanes. The Pharisees are first mentioned in
Josephus’Antiquities of the Jews 8.5.1-3.
III. Their major doctrines.
A. Belief in a coming Messiah, which was influenced by interbiblical Jewish apocalyptic literature like I Enoch.
B.God active in daily life. This was directly opposite from the Sadducees. Many Pharisaic doctrines were theological
counterpoints to the doctrines of the Sadducees.
C. A physically oriented afterlife based on earthly life, which involved reward and punishment (cf. Dan. 12:2).
D. Authority of the OT and the Oral Traditions (Talmud). They were conscious of being obedient to the OT commands
of God as they were interpreted and applied by schools of rabbinical scholars
(Shammai, the conservative and Hillel, the liberal). The rabbinical interpretation was based on a dialogue between
rabbis of two differing philosophies, one conservative and one liberal. These
oral discussions over the meaning of Scripture were finally written down in two forms: the Babylonian Talmud and
the incomplete Palestinian Talmud. They believed that Moses had received these oral interpretations on Mt. Sinai.
The historical beginning of these discussions started with Ezra and the men of the “Great Synagogue” (later called the
Sanhedrin).
E. Highly developed angelology. This involved both good and evil spiritual beings. This developed from Persian dualism
and the interbiblical Jewish literature.
SPECIAL TOPIC: GAMALIEL
I. The Name
A. The name means “God is my rewarder.”
B. He is knows as “the elder” or Gamaliel I to distinguish him from a later relative, also very active in Jewish
leadership.
II. The Man
A. Tradition says he was the grandson of Hillel.
B. Other traditions say he had ties to the royal family of Herod (i.e., Agrippa I).
C. Tradition says he was president of the Sanhedrin, but this probably refers to Gamaliel II.
D. He was one of seven highly respected rabbi who was given the title Rabban.
E. He died before a.d. 70.
III. His Theology
A. He was a highly respected rabbi.
B. He was known for caring for and staying in control with the scattered Jews of the Diaspora.
C. He was also known for his concern for the socially disenfranchised (his Takkonot often began with “for the
benefit of humanity”).
1. orphans
2. widows
3. women
D. He was Paul the Apostle’s rabbinical mentor in Jerusalem (cf. Acts 22:3).
E. In Acts 5:33-39 he gives sage wisdom about how to handle the early church in Palestine.
F. This rabbi was so highly thought of that at his death it was said, “When Rabban Gamaliel the elder died the glory
of the Torah ceased and purity and saintliness (lit. “separation’) perished (Sot. 9:15), taken from Encyclopedia
Judaica, vol. 7, p. 296.
G. It must be stated that Gamaliel’s motivation in this case is uncertain. He may have been asserting the wisdom
of Pharisees against the impulsiveness of the Sadducees. These two powerful Jewish sects exploited each other
at every opportunity!
5:36-37 “Theudas. . .Judas of Galilee” Josephus mentions these same two names (cf. Antiq. 20.5.1). However, he listed them
in the reverse order. Further historical information shows that there were two persons by this name who were Jewish zealots
against Rome. Therefore, both the NT and Josephus could be accurate. The one mentioned by Gamaliel rebelled in a.d. 6,
whereas the one mentioned by Josephus rebelled in a.d. 44.
5:37 “in the days of the census” Josephus (cf. Antiq.18.1.1; Wars 2.8.1) tells us that Augustus ordered a tax to be levied on the
Jews, soon after Archelaus was dethroned and Quirinius was made legate of Syria (i.e., about a.d. 6-7). These census for taxation
purposes occurred every fourteen years, but took years to complete.
▣ “Judas of Galilee” He is mentioned several times by Josephus (cf. Antiq. 18.1.1-6; 20.5.2 and also in Wars 2.8.1; 2.17.8-9).
His revolt occurred in about a.d. 6 or 7. He was the founder of the zealot movement. The zealots (Josephus calls them “the fourth
philosophy) and the Sicarii (i.e., assassins) are possibly the same political movement.
5:38 “stay away from these men and let them alone” What surprising advice! This phrase has two aorist active imperatives.
1. aphistēmi, separate, put away
2. aphiēmi, send away, dismiss
▣ “if” This is a third class conditional sentence, which means potential action.
5:39 “if” This is a first class conditional sentence, which usually denotes an affirmation of truth, but here it cannot be true.
This shows the literary use of this grammatical form.
▣ “or else you may even be found fighting against God” It must be remembered that these religious leaders think they are
acting on God’s behalf. The very fact that Gamaliel speaks the possibility of their being sincerely wrong is a shocking statement
(cf. 11:17).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 5:40-42
40They took his advice; and after calling the apostles in, they flogged them and ordered them not to speak in the name
of Jesus, and then released them. 41So they went on their way from the presence of the Council, rejoicing that they had
been considered worthy to suffer shame for His name. 42And every day, in the temple and from house to house, they kept
right on teaching and preaching Jesus as the Christ.
5:40 “They took his advice” This phrase is included in v. 39 in some translations (cf. NRSV) and in v. 40 in others (cf. NASB,
NKJV). The TEV and NJB keep it in v. 39, but start a new paragraph.
▣ “flogged” This was not the same as the Roman flogging (mastix, cf. Acts 22:24-25), which Jesus endured. This referred to
the Jewish beating with rods (cf. Deut. 25:3; i.e., derō, Luke 12:47-48; 20:10-11; 22:63). It was very painful, but not life-threatening.
The interpretive problem is that these two Greek terms are often used interchangeably. The Septuagint of Deut. 25:3 has
mastix, but it refers to a Jewish punishment. Luke regularly uses derō for this Jewish synagogue beating (literally “skinning an
animal”).
▣ “and ordered them not to speak in the name of Jesus” This same Council had done this earlier (cf. 4:17,21). This time they
beat them and repeated the warning.
5:41 Jesus had predicted this type of treatment (cf. Matt. 10:16-23; Mark 13:9-13; Luke 12:1-12; 21:10-19; John 15:18-27; 16:2-4).
▣ “rejoicing that they had been considered worthy to suffer shame for His name” This seems surprising to us today because
we live in a society where physical persecution is so rare, but this has not been the case for the vast majority of believers through
the centuries.
Jesus plainly said that His followers would suffer. Please read Matt. 5:10-12; John 15:18-21; 16:1-2; 17:14; Acts 14:22;
Rom. 5:3-4;; 8:17; II Cor. 4:16-18; Phil. 1:29; I Thess. 3:3; II Tim. 3:12; James 1:2-4. Also notice how in I Peter Jesus’ suffering
(cf. 1:11; 2:21,23; 3:18; 4:1,13; 5:1) is to be emulated by His followers (cf. 1:6-7; 2:19; 3:13-17; 4:1,12-19; 5:9-10).
5:42 “every day, in the temple” These early witnesses of Jesus refused to be silenced, even in the very heart of Judaism, the
temple in Jerusalem.
▣ “from house to house” The early church had their meetings in private homes spread throughout the city (cf. 2:46). There were
no church buildings until several hundred years later.
▣
NASB, NKJV “the Christ”
NRSV, TEV,
REB “the Messiah”
In this Jewish setting the title “Messiah” (see Special Topic at 2:31) is more appropriate (cf. 2:31; 3:18; 5:42; 8:5; 9:22),
as Peter used in Matt. 16:16. When Paul preached to Jews he also used this as a reference to the promised, anointed One (cf. 17:3;
18:5,28).
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS FOR ACTS 3-5
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why did the Apostles stay within Judaism so long?
2. List the titles of Jesus and their meanings which are used in chapter 3.
3. What are the two minimal requirements in salvation?
4. Why is Moses quoted so often in the New Testament?
5. What is the significance of the Abrahamic covenant to the NT church?
6. Why were Peter and John arrested?
7. Outline Peter’s third sermon.
8. What is significant about the prayer of 4:24-31?
9. To be truly New Testament must one be communistic? (cf. 4:32)
10. List the reasons why Luke included the account of Ananias and Sapphira.
11. Did Ananias realize that he was filled with Satan? Did he realize that he had lied to God?
12. Why was God seemingly so harsh?
13. What about miracles (especially healings) in our day?
14. Why were the Sadducees so mad?
15. Why did the angel release the Apostles from prison?
16. Outline Peter’s fourth sermon. List the common elements between his other recorded sermons in Acts.
17. Who was Gamaliel?
18. Why should Christians rejoice in suffering?
ACTS 6
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
The Appointment of the |
Seven Chosen to Serve |
Choice of the Seven |
The Seven Helpers |
The Institution of the |
6:1-6 |
6:1-7 |
6:1-7 |
6:1-4 |
6:1-6 |
|
|
|
6:5-6 |
|
6:7 |
|
|
6:7 |
6:7 |
Th e Arrest of Stephen |
Stephen Accused of |
Preaching and Martyrdom |
The Arrest of Stephen |
Stephen’s Arrest |
|
|
(6:8-7:2a) |
|
|
6:8-15 |
6:8-15 |
6:8-7:2a |
6:8-15 |
6:8-15 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
A. Chapters 6 and 7 are Luke’s literary/historical way of beginning to discuss the Gentile mission.
B. The church in Jerusalem had grown rapidly by this time (cf. 6:1).
C. The Church was made up of Aramaic-speaking Jews from Palestine and Greek-speaking Jews from the Diaspora.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 6:1-6
1Now at this time while the disciples were increasing in number, a complaint arose on the part of the Hellenistic Jews
against the native Hebrews, because their widows were being overlooked in the daily serving of food. 2So the twelve
summoned the congregation of the disciples and said, “It is not desirable for us to neglect the word of God in order to
serve tables. 3Therefore, brethren, select from among you seven men of good reputation, full of the Spirit and of wisdom,
whom we may put in charge of this task. 4“But we will devote ourselves to prayer and to the ministry of the word.” 5The
statement found approval with the whole congregation; and they chose Stephen, a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit,
and Philip, Prochorus, Nicanor, Timon, Parmenas and Nicolas, a proselyte from Antioch. 6And these they brought before
the apostles; and after praying, they laid their hands on them.
6:1 “disciples” This is literally “learners” from the verb manthanō. It is important to realize that the NT emphasizes “becoming
disciples” (cf. Matt. 28:19; Act 14:21), not merely making a decision. This designation for believers is unique to the Gospels and
Acts. In the Letters, the terms “brothers” and “saints” are used to designate the followers of Jesus.
▣ “were increasing in number” This is a present active participle. Growth always causes tension.
▣ “complaint” This term means “to speak privately in a low voice” (i.e., private conversations between individuals, Moulton,
Analytical Lexicon, p. 81). It occurs several times in the LXX of Exodus describing the Wilderness Wandering Period (cf. Exod.
16:7,8; 17:3; also Num. 11:1; 14:27). This same word is found in Luke 5:30 and several times in John (cf. 6:41,43,61; 7:12,32).
▣ “the Hellenistic Jews against the native Hebrews” This refers to believing Jews, those who were from Palestine and spoke
primarily Aramaic and those who grew up in the Diaspora and spoke primarily Koine Greek. There were certainly cultural and
racial overtones in this situation.
▣ “the daily serving of food” The early church followed the patterns of the Synagogue. Every week funds (i.e., alms) were
collected to feed the poor. This money was used to buy food, which was given out weekly by the Synagogue and daily by the early
church. See Special Topic: Almsgiving at 3:2.
It seems from history that many Jewish families who lived and worked in other countries returned to Palestine in the father’s
later years so that he could be buried in the Promised Land. Therefore, there were many widows in Palestine, especially the
Jerusalem area.
Judaism had an institutional (i.e., Mosaic Covenant) concern for the poor, alien, and widows (cf. Exod. 22:21-24; Deut.
10:18; 24:17). Luke’s writings show that Jesus, too, cared for widows (cf. Luke 7:11-15; 18:7-8; 21:1-4). It is, then, natural that
the early church, patterning itself on both the Synagogue social services and the teachings of Jesus, would have an overt concern
for church widows.
6:2 “The twelve” This was the collective title for the Apostles in Acts. Those were the first specially chosen companions of Jesus
during His earthly ministry, starting in Galilee.
▣ “summoned the congregation of the disciples” Exactly what is meant here is uncertain in this sense that the church was made
up of several thousand people at this point, so no home or business was large enough to accommodate this gathering. This must
have taken place in the Temple itself, probably Solomon’s Portico (cf. 3:11; 5:12).
This is the first example of what came to be called congregational polity (cf. vv. 3,5; 15:22). This is one of three biblical
ways the modern church organizes itself:
1. episcopal (i.e., one top leader)
2. presbyterian (i.e., a group of leaders)
3. congregational (i.e., the whole body of believers)
All are present in Acts 15.
▣ “It is not desirable for us to neglect the word of God in order to serve tables” This is not a disparaging word about serving,
but the beginning of the sensed need for a division of pastoral responsibilities among the people of God. These were not offices,
but delegated functions. Gospel proclamation must take priority over some needed ministries. The Apostles were uniquely called
and qualified for their task. Nothing should take away from that task. This was not an “either/or,” but a “both/and” situation.
The word “serve” is the common Greek term for service, diakonia. Unfortunately many modern commentators, looking for
guidelines for the later office of deacon (cf. Phil. 1:1; I Tim. 3:8-10,12-13), have used this text to define that ministry task.
However, these are not “deacons”; they are lay ministers/preachers. Only eisegesis can find deacons in Acts 6.
It is interesting to me how this early church conducted its ministry without buildings.
1. When they all met together it must have been at the Temple.
2. On Sabbaths they surely met with their local synagogues and on Sundays probably in house churches.
3. During the week (daily) the Apostles moved from believer’s home to believer’s home (cf. 2:46).
6:3
NASB, NRSV “select”
NKJV “seek out”
TEV “choose”
NJB “must select”
This is an aorist middle (deponent) imperative. Something had to be done to restore unity and the spirit of one accord.
This pastoral issue had the potential to affect the furtherance of the gospel. The church had to organize for ministry. Every
believer is a called, gifted, full-time minister (cf. Eph. 4:11-16).
▣ “seven men” There is no reason for this number except that it was often the symbolic number of perfection in the OT because
of its relation to the seven days of creation (cf. Genesis 1; Psalm 104). In the OT there is a precedent for this same process of
developing a second-tier leadership (cf. Numbers 18). See Special Topic: Number Symbolism in Scripture at 1:3.
▣
NASB, NJB “of good reputation”
NKJV “of good reputation”
NRSV “of good standing”
TEV “who are known to be”
The differences in these English translations reflect the two different usages of this term.
1. “to witness to” or provide information about (cf. TEV, NIV)
2. “to speak well of someone” (cf. Luke 4:22).
▣ “full of the Spirit” The filling of the Spirit has been mentioned several times in Acts, usually in connection with the Twelve
and their preaching/teaching/reaching ministries. It denotes power for ministry. The presence of the Spirit in a person’s life is
detectible. There is evidence in attitude, actions, and effectiveness. Widows are important, but gospel proclamation is priority
(cf. v. 4). See full note on “filling” at 5:17.
▣ “and of wisdom” There are two kinds of wisdom in the OT.
1. grasp of knowledge (academic)
2. wise living (practical)
These seven men had both!
▣ “whom we may put in charge of this task” They had a task-oriented assignment. This passage cannot be used to assert that
deacons handle the business matters (KJV, “this business”) of the church! The word “task” (chraomai) means “need,” not “office”
(Alfred Marshall, RSV Interlinear, p. 468).
6:4 “devote ourselves” This Greek term is used in several senses.
1. to closely associate with someone, Acts 8:13
2. to personally serve someone, Acts 10:7
3. to be steadfastly committed to something or someone
a. the early disciples to each other and prayer, Acts 1:14
b. the early disciples to the Apostles’ teaching, Acts 2:42
c. the early disciples to each other, Acts 2:46
d. the Apostles to the ministry of prayer and the Word, Acts 6:4 (Paul uses the same word to call believers to
steadfastness in prayer, Rom. 12:12; Col. 4:2).
▣ “prayer and the ministry of the word” This phrase is fronted (i.e., placed first) in the Greek sentence for emphasis. Isn’t it
paradoxical that it was these “seven” who were the first to catch the vision of the world mission of the gospel, not the Apostles.
It was “the seven” whose preaching forced the break with Judaism, not the Apostles.
It is so shocking that the Apostles were not the initiators of the Great commission, but these Greek-speaking Jews. Acts
never records them fulfilling the task assigned to them by the Apostles but instead depicts them as gospel preachers. Their
qualifications seem more in line with this task than the administration and pastoral care needed by the church in Jerusalem.
Instead of bringing peace, their ministries brought conflict and persecution!
6:5 “Stephen” His name means “victor’s crown.” All of the “seven” had Greek names, but most Jews of the Diaspora had both
a Hebrew name and a Greek name. Just the names themselves do not mean they were all Greek-speaking Jews. Reason says there
may have been both groups present.
▣ “full of faith” The term faith came from an OT word (i.e., emeth) that originally meant a person whose feet were in a stable
stance. It came to be used metaphorically for someone who was trustworthy, faithful, dependable, and loyal. In the NT this term
is used for the believer’s response to God’s promise through Christ. We trust His trustworthiness! We faith His faithfulness.
Stephen trusted in God’s trustworthiness; therefore, he was characterized by God’s character (i.e., full of faith, faithfulness).
SPECIAL TOPIC: Believe, Trust, Faith, and Faithfulness in the Old Testament (ןמא)
I. Opening Statement
It needs to be stated that the use of this theological concept, so crucial to the NT, is not as clearly defined in the OT.
It is surely there, but demonstrated in key selected passages and persons.
The OT blends
A. the individual and the community
B. the personal encounter and covenant obedience
Faith is both personal encounter and daily lifestyle! It is easier to describe in a person than in a lexical form (i.e., word
study). This personal aspect is best illustrated in
A. Abraham and his seed
B. David and Israel
These men met/encountered God and their lives were permanently changed (not perfect lives, but continuing faith). Testing
revealed weaknesses and strengths of their faith encounter with God, but the intimate, trusting relationship continued through
time! It was tested and refined, but it continued as evidenced by their devotion and lifestyle.
II. Main root used
A. ןמא (BDB 52)
1. verb
a. Qal stem – to support, to nourish (i.e., II Kgs. 10:1,5; Esther 2:7, the non-theological usage)
b. Niphal stem – to make sure or firm, to establish, to confirm, to be faithful or trustworthy
(1) of men, Isa. 8:2; 53:1; Jer. 40:14
(2) of things, Isa. 22:23
(3) of God, Deut. 7:9; Isa. 49:7; Jer. 42:5
c. Hiphil stem – to stand firm, to believe, to trust
(1) Abraham believed God, Gen. 15:6
(2) the Israelites in Egypt believed, Exod. 4:31; 14:31 (negated in Deut. 1:32)
(3) Israelites believed YHWH spoke through Moses, Exod. 19:9; Ps. 106:12,24
(4) Ahaz did not trust in God, Isa 7:9
(5) whoever believes in it/him, Isa. 28:16
(6) believe truths about God, Isa. 43:10-12
2. noun (masculine) – faithfulness (i.e., Deut. 32:20; Isa. 25:1; 26:2)
3. adverb – truly, verily, I agree, may it be so (cf. Deut. 27:15-26; I Kgs. 1:36; I Chr. 16:36; Isa. 65:16; Jer. 11:5;
28:6). This is the liturgical use of “amen” in the OT and NT.
B. תמא (BDB 54) feminine noun, firmness, faithfulness, truth
1. of men, Isa. 10:20; 42:3; 48:1
2. of God, Exod. 34:6; Ps. 117:2; Isa. 38:18,19; 61:8
3. of truth, Deut. 32:4; I Kgs. 22:16; Ps. 33:4; 98:3; 100:5; 119:30; Jer. 9:5; Zech. 8:16
C. הנומא (BDB 53), firmness, steadfastness, fidelity
1. of hands, Exod. 17:12
2. of times, Isa. 33:6
3. of humans, Jer. 5:3; 7:28; 9:2
4. of God, Ps. 40:11; 88:12; 89:1,2,5,8; 119:138
III. Paul’s use of this OT concept
A. Paul bases his new understanding of YHWH and the OT on his personal encounter with Jesus on the road to Damascus
(cf. Acts 9; 22; 26).
B. He found OT support for his new understanding in two key OT passages which use the root ןמא.
1. Gen. 15:6 – Abram’s personal encounter initiated by God (Genesis 12) resulted in an obedient life of faith
(Genesis 12-22). Paul alludes to this in Romans 4 and Galatians 3.
2. Isa. 28:16 – those who believe in it (i.e., God’s tested and firmly placed cornerstone) will never be
a. Rom. 9:33, “put to shame” or “be disappointed”
b. Rom. 10:11, same as above
3. Hab. 2:4 – those who know the faithful God should live faithful lives (cf. Jer. 7:28). Paul uses this text in Rom.
1:17 and Gal. 3:11 (also note Heb. 10:38).
IV. Peter’s use of the OT concept
A. Peter combines
1. Isa. 8:14 – I Pet. 2:8 (stumbling block)
2. Isa. 28:16 – I Pet. 2:6 (cornerstone)
3. Ps. 118:22 – I Pet 2:7 (rejected stone)
B. He turns the unique language that describes Israel, “a chosen race, a royal priesthood, a holy nation, a people for God’s
own possession” from
1. Deut. 10:15; Isa. 43:21
2. Isa. 61:6; 66:21
3. Exod. 19:6; Deut. 7:6
and now uses it for the church’s faith in Christ
V. John’s use of the concept
A. Its NT usage
The term “believed” is from the Greek term (pisteuō). which can also be translated “believe,” “faith,” or “trust.” For
example, the noun does not occur in the Gospel of John, but the verb is used often. In John 2:23-25 there is
uncertainty as to the genuineness of the crowd’s commitment to Jesus of Nazareth as the Messiah. Other examples of
this superficial use of the term “believe” are in John 8:31-59 and Acts 8:13, 18-24. True biblical faith is more than
an initial response. It must be followed by a process of discipleship (cf. Matt. 13:20-22,31-32).
B. Its use with prepositions
1. eis means “into.” This unique construction emphasizes believers putting their trust/faith in Jesus
a. into His name (John 1:12; 2:23; 3:18; I John 5:13)
b. into Him (John 2:11; 3:15,18; 4:39; 6:40; 7:5,31,39,48; 8:30; 9:36; 10:42; 11:45, 48; 12:37,42; Matt. 18:6;
Acts 10:43; Phil. 1:29; I Pet. 1:8)
c. into Me (John 6:35; 7:38; 11:25,26; 12:44,46; 14:1,12; 16:9; 17:20)
d. into the Son (John 3:36; 9:35; I John 5:10)
e. into Jesus (John 12:11; Acts 19:4; Gal. 2:16)
f. into Light (John 12:36)
g. into God (John 14:1)
2. en means “in” as in John 3:15; Mark 1:15; Acts 5:14
3. epi means “in” or “upon,” as in Matt. 27:42; Acts 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19; Rom. 4:5, 24; 9:33; 10:11; I Tim.
1:16; I Pet. 2:6
4. the dative case with no preposition as in Gal. 3:6; Acts 18:8; 27:25; I John 3:23; 5:10
5. hoti, which means “believe that,” gives content as to what to believe
a. Jesus is the Holy One of God (John 6:69)
b. Jesus is the I Am (John 8:24)
c. Jesus is in the Father and the Father is in Him (John 10:38)
d. Jesus is the Messiah (John 11:27; 20:31)
e. Jesus is the Son of God (John 11:27; 20:31)
f. Jesus was sent by the Father (John 11:42; 17:8,21)
g. Jesus is one with the Father (John 14:10-11)
h. Jesus came from the Father (John 16:27,30)
i. Jesus identified Himself in the covenant name of the Father, “I Am” (John 8:24; 13:19)
j. We will live with Him (Rom. 6:8)
k. Jesus died and rose again (I Thess. 4:14)
VI. Conclusion
Biblical faith is the human response to a Divine word/promise. God always initiates (i.e., John 6:44,65), but part of this
Divine communication is the need for humans to respond.
A. trust
B. covenant obedience
Biblical faith is
1. a personal relationship (initial faith)
2. an affirmation of biblical truth (faith in God’s revelation)
3. an appropriate obedient response to it (daily faith)
Biblical faith is not a ticket to heaven or an insurance policy. It is a personal relationship. This is the purpose of
creation and humans being made in the image and likeness (cf. Gen. 1:26-27) of God. The issue is “intimacy.” God desires
fellowship, not a certain theological standing! But fellowship with a holy God demands that the children demonstrate the
“family” characteristic (i.e., holiness, cf. Lev. 19:2; Matt. 5:48; I Pet. 1:15-16). The Fall (cf. Genesis 3) affected our ability
to respond appropriately. Therefore, God acted on our behalf (cf. Ezek. 36:27-38), giving us a “new heart” and “new spirit,”
which enables us through faith and repentance to fellowship with Him and obey Him!
All three are crucial. All three must be maintained. The goal is to know God (both Hebrew and Greek senses) and to
reflect His character in our lives. The goal of faith is not heaven someday, but Christlikeness every day!
Human faithfulness is the result (NT), not the basis (OT) for a relationship with God: human’s faith in His faithfulness;
human’s trust in His trustworthiness. The heart of the NT view of salvation is that humans must respond initially and
continually to the initiating grace and mercy of God, demonstrated in Christ. He has loved, He has sent, He has provided;
we must respond in faith and faithfulness (cf. Eph. 2:8-9 and 10)!
The faithful God wants a faithful people to reveal Himself to a faithless world and bring them to personal faith in Him.
▣ “full of. . .the Holy Spirit” There are many different phrases which describe the ministry of the Spirit to believers:
1. the wooing of the Spirit (cf. John 6:44,65)
2. the baptism of the Spirit (cf. I Cor. 12:13)
3. the fruit of the Spirit (cf. Gal. 5:22-23)
4. the gifts of the Spirit (cf. I Cor. 12)
5. the filling of the Spirit (cf. Eph. 5:18).
To be full of the Spirit implies two things: (1) that the person is saved (cf. Rom. 8:9) and (2) that the person is led by the Spirit
(cf. Rom. 8:14). It seems that one’s “fullness” is related to one’s continually being filled (present passive imperative of Eph.
5:18). For “filled” see full note at 5:17.
▣ “Philip” There are several Philips in the NT. This one was one of the Seven. His name means “lover of horses.” His ministry
is told in Acts 8. He was instrumental in the revival in Samaria and a personal witness to a governmental official from Ethiopia.
He is called “the evangelist” in Acts 21:8 and his daughters were also active in ministry (i.e., prophetesses, cf. Acts 21:9, see
Special Topic: women in the Bible at 2:17).
▣ “Prochorus” Little is known of this person. In The International Standard Bible Encyclopedia, vol. 4, James Orr (ed.) says
he became bishop of Nicomedia and was martyred at Antioch (p. 2457).
▣ “Nicanor” Nothing is known about this person in church history. His name is Greek and means “conqueror.”
▣ “Timon” Nothing is known about this person in church history. His name is Greek and means “honorable.”
▣ “Parmenas” This is a shortened form of Parmenides. Church tradition says he was martyred at Philippi during the reign of
Trajan (cf. The International Standard Bible Encyclopedia, vol. 4, p. 2248).
▣ “Nicholas, a proselyte from Antioch” More information may have been given about this man because his city may have been
Luke’s home. Being a Jewish proselyte involved three ritual acts:
1. that the person baptized himself in the presence of witnesses
2. that the person, if a male, was circumcised
3. that the person, if they had opportunity, offered a sacrifice in the temple
There has been some confusion about this man in church history because there is a group of a similar name mentioned in
Rev. 2:14-15. Some early church fathers (i.e., Irenaeus and Hippolytus) thought he was the founder of this heretical group. Most
of the church fathers who mention a connection at all think the group may have tried to use his name to assert their founder was
a leader in the Jerusalem church.
6:6 “they laid their hands on them” The grammar implies that the whole church laid hands on them (cf. 13:1-3), although the
referent to the pronoun is ambiguous.
The Roman Catholic Church has used texts like this one to assert Apostolic Succession. In Baptist life we use texts like this
to assert ordination (i.e., to dedicate people to a particular ministry). If it is true that all believers are called, gifted ministers (cf.
Eph. 4:11-12), then there is no distinction in the NT between “clergy” and “laity.” The elitism set up and propagated by biblically
unsupported ecclesiastical traditions needs to be reexamined in light of NT Scripture. Laying on of hands may denote function,
but not special standing or authority. Many of our denominational traditions are historically or denominationaly-based and not
a clear biblical teaching or mandate. Tradition is not a problem until it is raised to the level of Scriptural authority.
SPECIAL TOPIC: LAYING ON OF HANDS IN THE BIBLE
This gesture of personal involvement is used in several different ways in the Bible.
1. oath taking (i.e., hand under thigh [Gen. 24:2,9; 47:29])
2. passing on the family leadership (cf. Gen. 48:14,17,18)
3. identifying with the death of a sacrificial animal as a substitute
a. priests (cf. Exod. 29:10,15,19; Lev. 16:21; Num. 8:12)
b. laypersons (cf. Lev. 1:4; 3:2,8; 4:4,15,24; II Chr. 29:23)
4. setting persons aside to serve God in a special task or ministry (cf. Num. 8:10; 27:18,23; Deut. 34:9; Acts 6:6; 13:3;
I Tim. 4:14; 5:22; II Tim. 1:6)
5. participating in the judicial stoning of a sinner (cf. Lev. 24:14)
6. the hand on one’s mouth denotes silence or acquiescence (cf. Jdgs. 18:19; Job 21:5; 29:9; 40:4; Micah 7:16)
7. the hand on one’s own head means sorrow/grief (II Sam. 13:19)
8. receiving a blessing for health, happiness, and godliness (cf. Matt. 19:13,15; Mark 10:16)
9. relating to physical healing (cf. Matt. 9:18; Mark 5:23; 6:5; 7:32; 8:23; 16:18; Luke 4:40; 13:13; Acts 9:17; 28:8)
10. receiving the Holy Spirit (cf. Acts 8:17-19; 9:17; 19:6)
There is a surprising lack of uniformity in the passages that have been historically used to support the ecclesiastical
installation of leaders (i.e., ordination).
1. In Acts 6:6 it is the Apostles who lay hands on the seven for local ministry.
2. In Acts 13:3 it is the prophets and teachers who lay hands on Barnabas and Paul for missionary service.
3. In I Tim. 4:14 it is the local elders who were involved in Timothy’s initial call and installation
4. In II Tim. 1:6 it is Paul who lays hands on Timothy.
This diversity and ambiguity illustrate the lack of organization in the first century church. The early church was much more
dynamic and regularly used the spiritual gifts of believers (cf. I Cor. 14). The NT is simply not written to advocate or delineate
a governmental model or ordinational procedure.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 6:7
7The word of God kept on spreading; and the number of the disciples continued to increase greatly in Jerusalem, and
a great many of the priests were becoming obedient to the faith.
6:7 “The word of God” This refers to the gospel of Jesus Christ. His life, death, resurrection, and teaching about God form the
new way of viewing the Old Covenant (cf. Matt. 5:17-48). Jesus is the word (cf. John 1:1; 14:6). Christianity is a Person! See
full note at 4:31.
▣ “kept on spreading” All three verbs in v. 7 are imperfect tense. This is a central theme in Acts. God’s word is spreading
by people trusting in Christ and becoming a part of the new people covenant of God (cf. 6:7; 12:24; 19:20).
This may be an allusion to God’s promises to Abraham about the numerical growth of his family, who became the old
covenant people of God (cf. 7:17; Gen. 17:4-8; 18:18; 28:3; 35:11).
▣ “a great many of the priests were becoming obedient to the faith” This was one of the causes of the Jewish leadership (i.e.,
Sadducees) unrest over Christianity. Those who knew the OT well were being convinced that Jesus of Nazareth was truly the
promised Messiah. The inner circle of Judaism was cracking!
The summary statements of growth may be a key to the structure of the book (cf. 9:31; 12:24; 16:5; 19:20; 28:31).
▣ “the faith” This term may have several distinct connotations:
1. its OT background means “faithfulness” or “trustworthiness”; therefore, it is used of our faithing the faithfulness of God
or our trusting in the trustworthiness of God (see Special Topic at 6:5)
2. our accepting or receiving God’s free offer of forgiveness in Christ
3. faithful, godly living
4. the collective sense of the Christian faith or the doctrinal truth about Jesus (cf. Rom. 1:5; Gal. 1:23; and Jude 3 & 20).
In several passages, such as II Thess. 3:2, it is difficult to know which sense Paul had in mind.
See Special Topic: Faith, Believe, Trust (noun, verb, adjective) at 3:16.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 6:8-15
8And Stephen, full of grace and power, was performing great wonders and signs among the people. 9But some men
from what was called the Synagogue of the Freedmen, including both Cyrenians and Alexandrians, and some from Cilicia
and Asia, rose up and argued with Stephen. 10But they were unable to cope with the wisdom and the Spirit with which
he was speaking. 11Then they secretly induced men to say, “We have heard him speak blasphemous words against Moses
and against God.” 12And they stirred up the people, the elders and the scribes, and they came up to him and dragged him
away and brought him before the Council. 13They put forward false witnesses who said, “This man incessantly speaks
against this holy place and the Law; 14for we have heard him say that this Nazarene, Jesus, will destroy this place and
alter the customs which Moses handed down to us.” 15And fixing their gaze on him, all who were sitting in the Council
saw his face like the face of an angel.
6:8 “full of grace and power” “Full of grace” refers to the blessing of God on his life and ministry. See special Topic at 5:17.
This term “power” relates to the next phrase, “performing great signs and wonders.”
▣ “was performing great wonders and signs” This is an imperfect tense (like v. 7). This possibly occurred before his choice
as one of the Seven. Stephen’s gospel message was continually corroborated by his person (i.e., full of grace) and power (i.e.,
signs and wonders).
6:9 “some men from. . .some from” There is the question concerning how one interprets how many groups rose up against
Stephen.
1. one synagogue (men from all countries listed)
2. two synagogues
a. of Jews from Cyrenia and Alexandria
b. of Jews from Cilicia and Asia (Paul was from Cilicia)
3. one synagogue, but two groups
4. five separate synagogues
The Greek genitive masculine plural article (tōn) is repeated twice.
▣ “from what is called” The reason for this phrase is that the term “freedman” is a Latin word; therefore, it had to be interpreted
for clarity. Apparently these were Jews who had been taken into foreign lands as slaves (military or economic), but had now
returned to Palestine as freedmen, but still Koine Greek was their first language.
6:10 Not only was Stephen’s gospel message confirmed by power signs, but apparently it was logically persuasive. Chapter 7
is an example of his preaching.
▣ “the Spirit” In the Greek text there is no way to distinguish capitals; therefore, this is the interpretation of the translators. A
capital “S” would refer to the Holy Spirit, a small “s” to the human spirit (KJV, NRSV footnote, REB, cf. 7:59; 17:16; 18:25;
Rom. 1:9; 8:16; I Cor. 2:11; 5:4; 16:18; II Cor. 2:13; 7:13; 12:18; Gal. 6:18; Phil. 4:23). This may be an allusion to Pro. 20:27.
See Special Topic: Spirit (pneuma) in the NT at 2:2.
6:11 “they secretly induced men to say” The term “induced” can mean (1) to bribe (cf. Louw and Nida, Lexicon, vol. 1, pp. 577-578) or (2) to scheme secretly (cf. Bauer, Arndt, Gingrich, and Danker, A Greek-English Lexicon, p. 843). This is the same
technique used against Jesus (cf. Matt. 26:61) and Paul (cf. Acts 21:28). Their charge was a violation of Exod. 20:7, which carried
the death penalty.
▣ “We have heard him speak blasphemous words against Moses” Stephen’s sermon in Acts 7 answers this charge. Whether
Acts 7 was typical of Stephen’s gospel preaching or a special sermon meant to answer this specific charge is uncertain, but Stephen
probably used the OT often to assert Jesus’ Messiahship.
▣ “and against God” These Jews put God after Moses! Their very sentence structure reveals the perception problem. Moses’
Law had become ultimate.
6:12 “the elders and the scribes. . .the Council” The phrase “elders and scribes” is often a shortened designation for the
members of the Sanhedrin, which is referred to in this context by the term “the Council.” It was the religious authority of the
Jewish nation in the Roman period before a.d. 70. It was made up of
1. the High Priest(s) and his family
2. local wealthy land owners and civic leaders
3. local scribes
It totaled seventy leaders from the Jerusalem area. See Special Topic: The Sanhedrin at 4:5.
6:13 “this man” This is a Semitic way to show contempt. This phrase is often used of Jesus.
▣ “speaks against this holy place and the Law” This phrase is an extension of the charge in v. 11. This may refer to Stephen’s
affirmation of Jesus’ words about the Temple’s destruction recorded in Luke 19:44-48 (also Mark 13:2), or Jesus’ threat in Matt.
26:61; 27:40; Mark 14:58; 15:29; John 2:19 (cf. v. 14). Jesus saw Himself as the “new Temple,” the new center of worship, the
new meeting place of God and humanity (cf. Mark 8:31; 9:31; 10:34). God’s judgment was coming on Herod’s building.
Stephen’s preaching about a full and free forgiveness in Jesus was probably the source of “speaks against the Law.” The
gospel message reduces “the Mosaic Covenant” to a historical witness instead of a means of salvation (cf. Galatians 3 and the NT
book of Hebrews).
For first century Jews this was radical teaching, blasphemy! This truly departs from a typical OT understanding of
monotheism, salvation, and the unique place of Israel. The NT has a radical reoriented focus (i.e., Jesus not Israel, grace not
human merit).
6:14 In a sense their charges were true! These two charges were designed to stir up both the Sadducees (i.e., “destroy this place”)
and the Pharisees (i.e., “alter the customs which Moses handed down”).
▣ “this Nazarene, Jesus” See Special Topic at 2:22.
6:15 “fixing their gaze on him” This is a literary device often used by Luke. It denotes uninterrupted attention (cf. Luke 4:20;
22:56; Acts 1:10; 3:4,12; 6:15; 7:55; 10:4; 11:6; 13:9; 14:9; 23:1).
▣ “his face like the face of an angel” This may have been similar to
1. Moses’ face glowing after visiting with YHWH (cf. Exod. 34:29-35, II Cor. 3:7)
2. Jesus’ face and body glowing during His transfiguration (cf. Matt. 17:2; Luke 9:29)
3. the messenger angel of Daniel 10:5-6
This was a way of metaphorically denoting one who had been in the presence of God.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why did the early church choose their best spiritual men to serve tables?
2. Why is there tension in rapid growth?
3. What is the purpose of laying on hands?
4. Why was Stephen attacked?
ACTS 7
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Stephen’s Speeches |
Stephen’s Address: the |
Preaching and Martyrdom |
Stephen’s Speech |
Stephen’s Speech |
|
|
(6:8-8:1a) |
|
|
7:1-8 |
7:1-8 |
|
7:1 |
7:1-8 |
|
|
|
7:2-8 |
|
|
The Patriarchs in Egypt |
7:2b-8 |
|
|
7:9-16 |
7:9-16 |
7:9-16 |
7:9-16 |
7:9-16 |
7:17-22 |
7:17-36 |
7:17-22 |
7:17-22 |
7:17-22 |
7:23-29 |
|
7:23-29 |
7:23-29 |
7:23-29 |
7:30-43 |
|
7:30-34 |
7:30-34 |
7:30-34 |
|
Israel Rebels Against God |
7:35-43 |
7:35-38 |
7:35-43 |
|
7:37-43 |
|
|
|
|
God’s True Tabernacle |
|
7:39-43 |
|
7:44-50 |
7:44-50 |
7:44-50 |
7:44-47 |
7:44-50 |
|
Israel Resists the Holy |
|
7:48-50 |
|
7:51-53 |
7:51-53 |
7:51-53 |
7:51-53 |
7:51-53 |
The Stoning of Stephen |
Stephen the Martyr |
|
The Stoning of Stephen |
The Stoning of Stephen, |
7:54-8:1a |
7:54-60 |
7:54-8:1a |
7:54-8:1a |
7:54-8:1 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
A. Stephen’s speech in Acts 7 is the longest recorded in Acts. It breaks the theological ground for Paul’s (and the
church’s) understanding of the gospel’s relationship to the Old Testament. Stephen’s sermon answers the charges made
against him, showing that
1. God has acted outside the Temple
2. God works with Gentiles
3. Jews have always rejected God’s message, men, and now they have rejected the Messiah!
B. Stephen’s defense affected Saul of Tarsus’ heart and Paul’s theology.
C. Stephen reveals the continuing covenant infidelity of the Jewish people and God’s revelations outside the Promised
Land and apart from the Temple in Jerusalem, which had become the focus of first century Jewish worship.
D. The Jewish people had regularly rejected God’s spokesman and now they did it again. They had violently rejected
Jesus of Nazareth and they were about to violently reject Stephen, His witness.
E. Stephen is charged by the same group with similar blasphemes as Jesus was. As he was being stoned Stephen said
several things which mimic Jesus’ words and actions on the cross. Was this an intentional literary device used by
Luke? It seems so!
F. Stephen’s perspective on the relationship between Jews and Christians will set the stage for the persecution (cf. 8:1-3)
and ultimate splitting (i.e., a.d. 70 curse formulas) of these two groups. It is surely possible that God used Stephen,
as He did Samson in the OT, to start a fight thereby forcing the spread of the gospel beyond Palestine.
G. Stephen’s speech/defense/sermon has several details which differ from the Hebrew OT (he quotes from the Septuagint).
Should scholars try to defend Stephen’s sayings or allow them to be Jewish traditions or even historical errors? This
question reveals the emotional and intellectual biases of interpreters. I believe that the Bible is true history, that
Christianity stands or falls on the events of the Bible. However, the very beginning of the Bible (i.e., Genesis 1-11)
and the end of the Bible (i.e., book of Revelation) are not “typical history”! As for the intervening accounts I think
they are accurate and true. This takes into account that sometimes there are:
1. differences in numbers
2. differences in genre
3. differences in detail
4. rabbinical techniques of interpretation (ex. combining two or more texts)
These do not affect my affirmation of the historical accuracy or trustworthiness of biblical narratives. Stephen may
have been recounting what he learned in Synagogue school or he may have modified texts to fit his purpose! To miss
his message by focusing on one or two details shows our modern sense of historiography and not the first century’s
sense of history.
H. Basic Outline of Stephen’s historical overview of God’s dealing with Israel in chapter 7
1. the Patriarchs, vv. 2-16
2. the Exodus and Wilderness Wanderings, vv. 17-43
3. the Tabernacle and Temple, vv. 44-50
4. the application to them of his summary of the OT history, vv. 51-53
I. Stephen uses several OT references (quotes and allusions).
1. 7:3 – Gen. 12:1
2. 7:5 – Gen. 12:7 or 17:8
3. 7:6-7a – Gen. 15:13-14
4. 7:7b – Exod. 3:12
5. 7:8a – Gen. 17:9-14
6. 7:8b – Gen. 21:2-4
7. 7:8c – Gen. 25:26
8. 7:8d – Gen. 35:22-26
9. 7:9 – Gen. 37:10,28; 45:4
10. 7:10 – Gen. 39:21; 41:40-46
11. 7:11 – Gen. 41:54-55; 42:5
12. 7:12 – Gen. 42:2
13. 7:13 – Gen. 45:1-4
14. 7:14 – Gen. 45:9-10
15. 7:15 – Gen. 46:5; 49:33; Exod. 1:6
16. 7:16 – Gen. 23:16; 50:13
17. 7:17 –Exod. 1:7-8
18. 7:18 – Exod. 1:8
19. 7:19 – Exod. 1:10-11
20. 7:20 – Exod. 2:2
21. 7:21 – Exod. 2:5,6,10
22. 7:22 – Exod. 2:10
23. 7:23 – Exod. 2:11-12
24. 7:26 – Exod. 2:13
25. 7:27-28 –Exod. 2:14
26. 7:30 – Exod. 3:1-2
27. 7:29a –Exod. 2:15
28. 7:29b – Exod. 2:22; 4:20; 18:3-4
29. 7:32 – Exod. 3:6
30. 7:33-34 – Exod. 3:5,7-10
31. 7:36 – Exod. 12:41; 33:1
32. 7:37 – Deut. 18:15
33. 7:38 – Exod. 19:17
34. 7:39 – Num. 14:3-4
35. 7:40 – Exod. 32:1,23
36. 7:41 – Exod. 32:4,6
37. 7:42-43 – Amos 5:25-27
38. 7:44 – Exod. 25:31,36-40
39. 7:45 –Josh. 3:14ff; 18:1; 23:9
40. 7:46 – II Sam. 7:8ff
41. 7:47 – I Kings 6-8; II Chronicles 1-6
42. 7:49-50 –Isa. 66:1-2
Another good Scriptural summary of Israel’s history is Nehemiah 9.
1. 9:6 – Genesis 1-11
2. 9:7-8 – Genesis 12-50
3. 9:9-14 – Exodus (the exodus)
4. 9:15-21 – Numbers (the wilderness wandering period)
5. 9:22-25 – Joshua (the conquest)
6. 9:26-31 – Judges
7. 9:32-38 – Samuel, Kings, Chronicles (the Monarchy)
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 7:1-8
1The high priest said, “Are these things so?” 2And he said, “Hear me, brethren and fathers! The God of glory
appeared to our father Abraham when he was in Mesopotamia, before he lived in Haran, 3and said to him, ‘Leave your
country and your relatives, and come into the land that I will show you.’ 4Then he left the land of the Chaldeans
and settled in Haran. From there, after his father died, God had him move to this country in which you are now living.
5But He gave him no inheritance in it, not even a foot of ground, and yet, even when he had no child, He promised that
He would give it to him as a possession, and to his descendants after him. 6But God spoke to this effect, that his
descendants would be aliens in a foreign land, and that they would be enslaved and mistreated for four
hundred years. 7And whatever nation to which they will be in bondage I Myself will judge,’ said God, ‘and
after that they will come out and serve Me in this place.’ 8And He gave him the covenant of circumcision; and
so Abraham became the father of Isaac, and circumcised him on the eighth day; and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and
Jacob of the twelve patriarchs.”
7:1 “The high priest” This was Caiaphas. See note at 4:6.
7:2 “And he said” Stephen’s defense is very similar to the book of Hebrews. He answered the charges in two ways: (1) the
Jewish people had continually rejected Moses in the past and (2) the Temple was only one of several ways that God used to speak
with Israel. This is a direct answer to the charges brought against him in 6:13.
▣ “Hear” This is the aorist active imperative form of the Greek word akouō. It is used in the Septuagint to translate the
famous prayer of Judaism, the Shema (cf. Deut. 6:4-5). It is also used in the prophets to reflect the sense of “hear so as to respond”
(cf. Micah 1:2; 6:1). It is difficult to be certain this technical connotation is present when these Jewish men express their Hebrew
thoughts in Koine Greek words, but in some contexts like this it may be true.
▣ “‘The God of glory” This God of glory (cf. Ps. 29:3) appeared to the Patriarch Abraham (cf. Gen. 12:1, 15:1,4; 17:1; 18:1,
22:1), thus beginning the Jewish people. See Special Topic at 3:13.
▣ “Abraham” Abraham was considered the father of the Jewish people. He was the first Patriarch. His call and subsequent walk
with God are described in Gen. 12:1-25:11. In Galatians 3 and later Romans 4 Paul uses him as the paradigm of justification by
grace through faith.
▣ “when he was in Mesopotamia before he lived in Haran” Genesis 11:31 implies that Abraham was in the city of Haran
when YHWH spoke to him. However, the time of God’s contact with Abraham was not specifically stated. Abraham was from
Ur of the Chaldeans (cf. Gen. 11:28,31), but later moved to Haran (cf. Gen. 11:31,32; 29:4) following God’s command. The point
is that God spoke to Abraham outside of the land of Canaan. Abraham did not own or possess any part of the Holy Land (cf. v.
5) during his lifetime (except a cave to bury his family, cf. Gen. 23:9).
The term “Mesopotamia” can refer to the different ethnic groups:
1. a people group in the northern area of the Tigris and Euphrates (i.e., “Syria between the Rivers”)
2. a people group near the mouth of the Tigris and Euphrates
7:3 “Leave your country and your relatives, and come into the land that I will show you” This is a quote from
Gen. 12:1. The theological issue involved in this quote is when God says this to Abram:
1. while he was in Ur before he took his father Terah and nephew Lot to Haran
2. while he was in Haran and he waited until his father died to follow God south to Canaan?
7:4 “he left the land of the Chaldeans” Chaldea (BDB 505) may be the name of a district close to the mouth of the Tigris and
Euphrates Rivers (see note at 7:2). It later came to refer to the nation which developed in this region, also known as Babylon
(BDB 93). This nation also produced many scholars who developed mathematical formulas related to the movement of the night
lights (i.e., planets, stars, comets, etc.). This group of wise men (i.e., astrologers) was also known by the name Chaldean (cf. Dan.
2:2; 4:7; 5:7-11).
▣ “Haran” Haran (BDB 357) is a city to which Terah, Abraham, and Lot moved (cf. Gen. 11:31-32). Another of Abram’s
brothers settled there and the place is called by his name (i.e., city of Nahor, cf. Gen. 24:10; 27:43). This city on the upper part
of the Euphrates (i.e., tributary river, Balikh) was started in the third millennium b.c. and has retained its name until today. Just
as a note of interest, Abraham’s brother, Haran (BDB 248), is not spelled the same in Hebrew as the city.
▣ “after his father died” Many have seen a contradiction here between Gen. 11:26,32 and 12:4. There are at least two possible
solutions.
1. Abraham might not have been the oldest son, but the most famous son (i.e., listed first).
2. The Samaritan Pentateuch has Terah’s age at death at 145, not 205, as the Hebrew text.
See Gleason L. Archer, Encyclopedia of Bible Difficulties, p. 378.
7:5 “He promised that He would give it to him as a possession, and to his descendants after him” This is an allusion
to Gen. 12:7 or 17:8. The theological key is not only God’s promise, but Abraham’s faith in God giving him a descendant as well
as a land. This faith is highlighted in Gen. 15:6 (cf. Gal. 3:6; Romans 4:3).
7:6 This predictive prophecy is stated in Gen. 15:13,14 and reaffirmed in Exod. 3:12. However, Exod. 12:40 has “430 years”
instead of “400 years.” The Septuagint (LXX) translates Exod. 12:40 as “and the sojourning of the children of Israel, while they
sojourned in the land of Egypt and the land of Canaan was 430 years.”
The rabbis have said that the number “400 years” starts with the offering of Isaac in Genesis 22. John Calvin has called the
400 years a round number. It may relate to four generations of 100 years each (cf. Gen. 15:16).
7:7 “And whatever nation” This is a quote from the Septuagint of Gen. 15:14. This is not meant to be obtuse, but is a general
statement. The nation was obviously Egypt. Other nations, however (i.e., Philistia, Syria, Assyria, Babylon), would become
Israel’s oppressors and God will judge them also.
▣ “and after that” This full phrase is a quote from Exod. 3:12. Stephen is reciting a loose, running history of Israel.
This text asserts that Canaan and Jerusalem will uniquely become YHWH’s special place. This fits the emphasis of
Deuteronomy.
▣ “in this place” In the context of the quote from Exod. 3:12, this refers to Mt. Sinai (see Special Topic at 7:30), which is also
outside the Promised Land and is the site of one of the major events in the life of Israel (the giving of the Law to Moses).
7:8 “covenant” See Special Topic at 2:47.
▣ “circumcision” This was practiced by all of Israel’s neighbors, except the Philistines (Greek Aegean people). For most
cultures it was usually a rite of passage into manhood, but not for Israel, where it was an initiation rite into the covenant People.
It was a sign of a special faith relationship with YHWH (cf. Gen. 17:9-14). Each Patriarch circumcised his own sons (i.e., acted
as priest for his own family). Robert Girdlestone, Synonyms of the Old Testament, p. 214, says the rite of circumcision connected
the rite of blood-shedding with the act of circumcision. Blood was connected to covenant forming (cf. Gen. 15:17), covenant
breaking (cf. Gen. 2:17), and covenant redemption (cf. Isaiah 53).
▣ “the twelve patriarchs” This usually refers to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, but here it refers to Jacob’s twelve sons, who will
become the tribes of Israel.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 7:9-10
9The patriarchs became jealous of Joseph and sold him into Egypt. Yet God was with him, 10and rescued him
from all his afflictions, and granted him favor and wisdom in the sight of Pharaoh, king of Egypt, and he made
him governor over Egypt and all his household.
7:9 “Joseph” This account is found in Gen. 37:11,28; 45:4. Stephen is trying to show that the Jewish people and their leaders
have often rejected God’s chosen leader (cf. Moses in v. 35).
7:10 This account is found in Gen. 39:21; 41:40-46.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 7:11-16
11Now a famine came over all Egypt and Canaan, and great affliction with it, and our fathers could find no food.
12But when Jacob heard that there was grain in Egypt, he sent our fathers there the first time. 13On the second visit Joseph
made himself known to his brothers, and Joseph’s family was disclosed to Pharaoh. 14Then Joseph sent word and invited
Jacob his father and all his relatives to come to him, seventy-five persons in all. 15And Jacob went down to Egypt and
there he and our fathers died. 16From there they were removed to Shechem and laid in the tomb which Abraham had
purchased for a sum of money from the sons of Hamor in Shechem.
7:11 This account is found in Gen. 41:54-55; 42:5.
7:12 This account is found in Gen. 42:4.
7:13 This account is found in Gen. 45:1-4.
7:14 “seventy-five” This follows the Septuagint and the Dead Sea Scrolls manuscripts, while the Masoretic Text has “seventy”
(cf. Gen. 46:27; Exod. 1:5; Deut. 10:22). At first this seems like a manuscript problem between the LXX, which Stephen quotes,
and the Hebrew text of Exod. 1:5. On further reflection it may be two ways of counting all the descendants of Jacob. The problem
arises between Gen. 46:26 and 27:
1. the MT of verse 27 has two sons born to Joseph in Egypt, while the LXX has nine, which means that Ephraim and
Manassah later had more children between them
2. in the Hebrew text Jacob and his wife are counted, but Ephraim and Manasseh’s extra children are not counted
In the Greek text (LXX) Jacob and his wife are not counted, but the extra children of Ephraim and Manasseh are counted. Both
are accurate, but they add up the descendants in different ways at different times in Jacob’s life. The Hebrew texts known as the
Dead Sea Scrolls also have “seventy-five persons” in Gen. 46:27 and Exod. 1:5. Philo of Alexandia was familiar with both
numbers.
We are all the benefactors of modern scholarship when it comes to difficult texts or number problems like this one. There
is a new type of biblical resource available today which targets these difficult texts. I recommend:
1. Hard Sayings of the Bible, IVP
2. More Hard Sayings of the Bible, IVP
3. Encyclopedia of Bible Difficulties by Gleason Archer.
For a discussion of Acts 7:14-15 see #1 pp. 521-522.
7:15 This account is found in Gen. 46:5; 49:33; Exod. 1:6.
7:16 “to Shechem” From the Genesis accounts of (1) the burial of Joseph recorded in Josh. 24:32 and (2) the burial of Jacob
recorded in Gen. 50:13, there seems to be a discrepancy in Stephen’s sermon. The problem is (1) the city; it should be Hebron,
not Shechem, or (2) the patriarch; it should be Jacob, not Abraham. However, Abraham and Jacob both bought land (cf. Gen.
23:16; 33:19). At Hebron Sarah and Abraham were buried (cf. Gen. 23:19; 25:9), as were Isaac and Rebekah (cf. Gen. 49:29-31)
and Jacob (cf. Gen. 50:13). Although it is uncertain about a burial plot at Shechem, it is possible that Abraham had earlier
purchased a field on his stop there in Gen. 12:6-7. Later Jacob redeemed that same piece of land (cf. Gen. 33:19; Josh. 24:32).
This is obviously speculation, but Stephen appears to be very knowledgeable of the OT history and this would be the only way
to reconcile the various accounts.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 7:17-29
17But as the time of the promise was approaching which God had assured to Abraham, the people increased and
multiplied in Egypt, 18until there arose another king over Egypt who knew nothing about Joseph. 19It was he
who took shrewd advantage of our race and mistreated our fathers so that they would expose their infants and they would
not survive. 20It was at this time that Moses was born; and he was lovely in the sight of God, and he was nurtured three
months in his father’s home. 21And after he had been set outside, Pharaoh’s daughter took him away and nurtured him
as her own son. 22Moses was educated in all the learning of the Egyptians, and he was a man of power in words and deeds.
23But when he was approaching the age of forty, it entered his mind to visit his brethren, the sons of Israel. 24And when
he saw one of them being treated unjustly, he defended him and took vengeance for the oppressed by striking down the
Egyptian. 25And he supposed that his brethren understood that God was granting them deliverance through him, but they
did not understand. 26On the following day he appeared to them as they were fighting together, and he tried to reconcile
them in peace, saying, “Men, you are brethren, why do you injure one another?” 27But the one who was injuring his
neighbor pushed him away, saying, “Who made you a ruler and judge over us? 28You do not mean to kill me as
you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you?” 29At this remark, Moses fled and became an alien in the land of
Midian, where he became the father of two sons.
7:17 This would refer to Gen. 15:12-16 (the Promise) and Exod. 1:7 (their large number).
7:18 “until there arose another king” This is a quote from Exod. 1:8. There has been and continues to be debate among
scholars on the date of the Exodus. The identity of this Egyptian king is caught up in the disagreement. One could identify him
as an Egyptian king from the XVIII dynasty (1445 b.c.) or from the XIX dynasty (1290 b.c.). One theory is to relate this Egyptian
king to the first native Egyptian dynasty who overthrew the Hyksos (Semitic) rulers of Egypt. This would explain the use of
heteros in v. 18. A native Egyptian would not want Semites, like the Hebrews, in large numbers in his territory, fearing another
invasion like the Hyksos.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE DATE OF THE EXODUS
A. There have been two scholarly opinions on the date of the Exodus:
1. from I Kings 6:1, which says, “480 years from the Exodus to the building of Solomon’s Temple”:
a. Solomon began to reign in 970 b.c. This is figured by using the battle of Qarqar (853 b.c.) as a certain
starting date.
b. The Temple was built in his fourth year (965 b.c.), and the Exodus occurred about 1445/6 b.c.
2. This would make it occur in the 18th Egyptian Dynasty.
a. The Pharaoh of the oppression would be Thutmose III (1490-1436 b.c.).
b. The Pharaoh of the Exodus would be Amenhotep II (1436-1407 b.c.).
(1) Some believe evidence from Jericho based on the fact that no diplomatic correspondence occurred
between Jericho and Egypt during the reign of Amenhotep III (1413-1377 b.c.).
(2) The Amarna texts record diplomatic correspondence written on ostraca about the Habiru over-running
the land of Canaan in the reign of Amenhotep III. Therefore, the Exodus occurred in the reign of
Amenhotep II.
(3) The period of the Judges is not long enough if the 13th century is the date of Exodus.
3. The possible problems with these dates are:
a. The Septuagint (LXX) has 440 years not 480.
b. It is possible that 480 years is representative of 12 generations of 40 years each, therefore, a figurative
number.
c. There are 12 generations of priests from Aaron to Solomon (cf. I Chronicles 6), then 12 from Solomon to
the Second Temple. The Jews, like the Greeks, reckoned a generation as forty years. So, there is a 480 year
period back and forward (symbolic use of numbers, cf. Bimson’s Redating the Exodus and Conquest).
4. There are three other texts that mention dates:
a. Genesis 15:13,16 (cf. Acts 7:6), 400 years of bondage
b. Exodus 12:40-41 (cf. Gal. 3:17)
(1) MT – 430 years of sojourn in Egypt
(2) LXX – 215 years of sojourn in Egypt
c. Judges 11:26 – 300 years between Jephthah’s day and the conquest (supports 1445 date)
d. Acts 13:19, exodus, wanderings and conquest – 450 years
5. The author of Kings used specific historical references and did not round numbers (Edwin Thiele, A Chronology
of the Hebrew Kings, pp. 83-85
B. The tentative evidence from archaeology seems to point toward a date of 1290 b.c., or the 19th Egyptian Dynasty.
1. Joseph was able to visit his father and Pharaoh in this same day. The first native Pharaoh who began to move
the capital of Egypt from Thebes back to the Nile Delta, to a place called Avaris/Zoan/Tanis which was the old
Hyksos capital, was Seti I (1309-1290). He would be the Pharaoh of the oppression.
a. This seems to fit two pieces of information about the Hyksos reign of Egypt.
(1) A stele has been found from the time of Rameses II that commemorates the founding of Avaris four
hundred years earlier (1700’s b.c. by the Hyksos)
(2) The prophecy of Genesis 15:13 speaks of a 400 year oppression
b. This implies that Joseph’s rise to power was under a Hyksos (Semitic) Pharaoh. The new Egyptian dynasty
is referred to in Exod. 1:8.
2. The Hyksos, an Egyptian word meaning “rulers of foreign lands,” who were a goup of non-Egyptian Semitic
rulers, controlled Egypt during the 15th and 16th Dynasties (1720-1570 b.c.). Some want to relate them to
Joseph’s rise to power. If we subtract the 430 years of Exod. 12:40 from 1720 b.c., we get a date of about 1290
b.c.
3. Seti I’s son was Rameses II (1290-1224). This name is mentioned as one of the store cities built by the Hebrew
slaves, Exod. 1:11. Also this same district in Egypt near Goshen is called Rameses, Gen. 47:11.
Avaris/Zoan/Tanis was known as “House of Rameses” from 1300-1100 b.c.
4. Thutmoses III was known as a great builder, as was Rameses II.
5. Rameses II had 47 daughters living in separate palaces.
6. Archaeology has shown that most of the large walled cities of Canaan (Hazor, Debir, Lachish) were destroyed
and rapidly rebuilt around 1250 b.c. In allowing for a 38 year wilderness wandering period this fits a date of
1290 b.c.
7. Archaeology has found a reference to the Israelis being in southern Canaan on a memorial stele of Rameses’
successor Merneptah (1224-1214 b.c. [cf. The Stele of Merneptah, dated 1220 b.c.]).
8. Edom and Moab seem to have attained strong national identity in the late 1300’s b.c. These countries were not
organized in the 15th century (Glueck).
9. The book entitled Redating the Exodus and Conquest by John J. Bimson, published by the University of
Sheffield, 1978, argues against all of the archaeological evidence for an early date.
C. There is a new possible date even earlier than 1445 b.c. See the History Channel, “The Exodus Decoded,” which
asserts a northern route.
7:19 This account is found in Exod. 1:10ff.
7:20 “Moses was born” This account is found in Exodus 2.
▣ “was lovely in the sight of God” This is a Hebrew idiom of beauty (cf. Exod. 2:2). Even Josephus comments on Moses’
beauty (cf. Antiq. 2.9.6).
7:21 This account is found in Exod. 2:5-6,10.
▣ “he had been set outside” This is the Greek term ektithēmi, which means “to expose” (cf. v. 19) or “place outside.” The
Egyptians forced the Hebrews to abandon their male children to the elements and wild beasts so as to control their rapid population
growth.
▣
NASB, NKJV “Pharaoh’s daughter took him away”
NRSV, NJB “Pharaoh’s daughter adopted him”
TEV “the king’s daughter adopted him”
The term anaireō literally means “to lift up.” Moses was literally “lifted up” out of the river and by this act, became the
adopted son of Pharaoh’s daughter.
7:22 Moses had the best academic and military training available in his day at the court of Pharaoh.
▣ “he was a man of power in words and deeds” This must be a summary of Moses’ later life because at his encounter with
YHWH at the burning bush he claimed he could not speak well (cf. Exod. 4:10-17).
7:23-24 This account is in Exod. 2:11-12.
7:23 “he was approaching the age of forty” I think it was D. L. Moody who said Moses’ life can be divided into three groups
of forty:
1. for the first forty years he thought he was somebody (i.e., educated at Pharaoh’s court)
2. for the second forty years he thought he had become a nobody (i.e., exiled to the land of Midian and learned the ways
and terrain of the Sinai desert)
3. for the third forty years he found out what God could do with a nobody (i.e., led the people of God to the Promised
Land)
7:25 This verse is Stephen’s assumptions (possibly Jewish traditions); they are not stated in Exodus.
7:26-29 This account is found in Exod. 2:13-14.
7:28 The question expects a “no” answer.
7:29 “At this remark Moses fled” This account is found in Exod. 2:15,22. Moses’ fear at killing an Egyptian shows that
Pharaoh was not supportive of his being an adopted child of one of his daughters. Even so, Hebrews 11:27 is clear!
▣ “and became an alien in the land of Midian” God appeared to Moses at the burning bush in the land of Midian (cf.
Exodus 3-4) and revealed His law to him at Sinai in the land of Midian (cf. Exodus 19-20), which shows that God was not limited
as to where He revealed Himself. This same emphasis on God revealing Himself apart from the Temple in Jerusalem is seen in
Acts 7:36, 44, 48, and 53.
▣ “became the father of two sons” This account is found in Exod. 2:22; 4:20; 18:3-4.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 7:30-34
30After forty years had passed, an angel appeared to him in the wilderness of Mount Sinai, in the flame of a burning
thorn bush. 31When Moses saw it, he marveled at the sight; and as he approached to look more closely, there came the
voice of the Lord: 32“I am the God of your fathers, the God of Abraham and Isaac and Jacob.” Moses shook with fear
and would not venture to look. 33But the Lord said to him, “Take off the sandals from your feet, for the place on which
you are standing is holy ground. 34I have certainly seen the oppression of My people in Egypt and have heard their groans,
and I have come down to rescue them; come now, and I will send you to Egypt.”
7:30 This account is found in Exodus, chapters 3 and 4.
▣ “an angel” In the OT text this angel is really YHWH. See full note at 5:19. Notice how this angel is characterized.
1. Exod. 3:2, “the angel of the Lord appeared to him in a blazing fire”
2. Exod. 3:4, “when the Lord (i.e., YHWH) saw that he turned aside to look”
3. Exod. 3:4, “God (i.e., Elohim) called to him from the midst of the bush”
See Special Topic: Names for Deity at 1:6.
▣ “Mount Sinai” See Special Topic below.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE LOCATION OF MT. SINAI
A. If Moses was speaking literally and not figuratively of the “three day journey” he requested of Pharaoh (3:18; 5:3;
8:27), that was not a long enough time for them to get to the traditional site in the southern Sinai peninsula. Therefore,
some scholars place the mountain near the oasis of Kadesh-Barnea.
B. The traditional site called “Jebel Musa,” in the Wilderness of Sin, has several things in its favor.
1. A large plain before the mountain.
2. Deuteronomy 1:2 says it was an eleven day journey from Mt. Sinai to Kadesh-Barnea.
3. The term “Sinai” is a non-Hebrew term. It may be linked to the Wilderness of Sin, which refers to a small desert
bush. The Hebrew name for the mountain is Horeb (i.e., wilderness).
4. Mt. Sinai has been the traditional site since the fourth century a.d. It is in the “land of Midian,” which included
a large area of the Sinai peninsula and Arabia.
5. It seems that archaeology has confirmed the location of some of the cities mentioned in the Exodus account (Elim,
Dophkah, Rephidim) as being on the western side of the Sinai Peninsula.
C. The Jews were never interested in the geographical location of Mt. Sinai. They believed that God gave them the Law
and fulfilled His promise from Gen. 15:12-21. “Where” was not the issue and they did not intend to return to this site
(i.e., no annual pilgrimage).
D. The traditional site of Mt. Sinai was not established until Pilgrimage of Silvia, written about a.d. 385-8 (cf. F. F. Bruce,
Commentary on the Book of the Acts, p. 151.
E. There is much speculation today on a new possible location across the Gulf of Aqaba in Arabia. It is claimed
1. that the land of Midian was always exclusively in Arabia
2. that in Gal. 4:25 Paul states it was in Arabia
3. that satellite mapping has revealed an ancient road leading from Egypt across the Sinai peninsula with a raised,
rocky ledge, which crosses the Gulf of Aqaba
4. that the top of the highest peak in this area is blackened (cf. Exod. 19:16,18)
It must be restated that we simply do not know the location!
7:32 This account is found in Exod. 3:6.
▣ “fathers” In both the Hebrew text and Greek translation (i.e., Septuagint) the word is singular. In every other occurrence
of the phrase it is plural. God knew Moses’ slave father.
7:33 This account is found in Exod. 3:5. Moses approached the bush out of curiosity, not religious devotion.
The exact reason for taking off his shoes is uncertain.
1. shoes might be polluted (i.e., animal dung)
2. taking off shoes might be a sign of intimacy or familiarity (i.e., at home).
3. a cultural practice of the Patriarchs or Egyptian ritual
7:34 This account is found in Exod. 3:7. For me this verse is so theologically significant for this reason: YHWH heard their
prayers, saw the affliction, and responded. He came down to rescue them, but notice His rescue was effected through human
instrumentality. God sent a reluctant Moses. God has chosen to deal with humans through humans!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 7:35-43
35This Moses whom they disowned, saying, “Who made you a ruler and a judge?” Is the one whom God sent to
be both a ruler and a deliverer with the help of the angel who appeared to him in the thorn bush. 36This man led them out,
performing wonders and signs in the land of Egypt and in the Red Sea and in the wilderness for forty years. 37This is the
Moses who said to the sons of Israel, “God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brethren.” 38This
is the one who was in the congregation in the wilderness together with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai,
and who was with our fathers; and he received living oracles to pass on to you. 39Our fathers were unwilling to be
obedient to him, but repudiated him and in their hearts turned back to Egypt, 40saying to Aaron, “Make for us gods
who will go before us; for this Moses who led us out of the land of Egypt—we do not know what happened
to him.” 41At that time they made a calf and brought a sacrifice to the idol, and were rejoicing in the works of their hands.
42But God turned away and delivered them up to serve the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, “It
was not to Me that you offered victims and sacrifices forty years in the wilderness, was it, O house of
Israel? 43You also took along the tabernacle of Moloch and the star of the god Rompha, the images which
you made to worship. I also will remove you beyond Babylon.“
7:35 “This Moses whom they disowned” God’s people regularly reject God’s spokesperson (cf. vv. 51-52). This may even be
the purpose of v. 27!
▣ “with the help of the angel who appeared to him in the thorn bush” Again God came to an Israelite outside the Promised
Land. God’s activity was not limited to any locality. Much of Israel’s history occurred outside Canaan and before the Temple
in Jerusalem. All through the Israelites’ history God’s leaders were rejected by their peers (cf. vv. 9,27-28,35,39). This is a
recurrent theme.
This angel is depicted as deity (cf. Exod. 3:2,4). This divine physical manifestation can also be seen in Gen. 16:7-13; 22:11-15; 31:11,13; 48:15-16; Exod. 13:21; 14:19; Jdgs. 2:1; 6:22-23; 13:3-22; Zech. 3:1-2. However, it must be stated that “the angel
of the Lord” is not always a divine physical manifestation; sometimes he is just an angel, a messenger, (cf. Gen. 24:7,40; Exod.
23:20-23; 32:34; Num. 22:22; Judg. 5:23; II Sam. 24:16; I Chr. 21:15ff; Zech. 1:11; 12-13).
7:36 This is a summary of God’s miraculous power (i.e., Moses’ staff) through Moses and Aaron.
7:37-38 This is a Messianic quote from Deut. 18:15. Stephen is identifying God’s presence during the Exodus and Wilderness
Wandering Period as both God’s angel and God’s special successor of Moses (i.e., the Messiah, the Prophet). Stephen is not
depreciating Moses, but truly listening to Moses!
7:38 “congregation” This is the Greek term ekklesia, but it is used in the sense of assembly, not church. See Special Topic:
Church at 5:11.
▣ “the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai” Rabbinical theology asserted that angels were mediators between
YHWH and the giving of the Law (see note at 7:53). It is also possible that the angel refers to YHWH Himself (cf. Exod. 3:21
compared to 14:19; and also Exod. 32:34; Num. 20:16; Jdgs. 2:1).
7:39 “our fathers were unwilling to be obedient to him” Stephen is connecting the dots of OT rebellion. His implication is
that the Jews have always rejected God’s leaders, and now they have rejected the Messiah.
▣ “repudiated him” This account is found in Num. 14:3-4.
7:40-41 This account is found in Exodus 32. This was not idolatry, but the creation of a physical image of God. It later turned
into fertility worship.
7:41 Stephen interprets the golden calf as an idol and uses this historical event to introduce a quote from Amos 5, which implies
that Israel, even as far back as the Exodus and Wilderness Wandering, was idolatrous and rebellious.
7:42 “God turned away and delivered them up to serve” Verses 42 and 43 are quotes from Amos 5:25-27 where Amos asserts
that Israel was always offering sacrifices to foreign gods. It was a regular, and early, pattern of their history (cf. Josh. 24:20). This
reminds one of the drastic statements of rejection in Romans 1:24,26,28.
▣ “the host of heaven” This refers to Assyrian and Babylonian astral worship (cf. Deut. 17:3; II Kgs. 17:16; 27:3; II Chr. 33:3,5;
Jer. 8:2; 19:13). There are several textual problems between the Hebrew text (MT) of Amos 5:25-27, the Greek text (LXX) and
Stephen’s quote:
1. the name of the star god. The MT has kywn or kaiwann, the Assyrian name for the planet Saturn. The LXX has rypn
or raiphan, which may be repa, the Egyptian name for the planetary god of Saturn.
2. the Hebrew text (MT) and the Greek text (LXX) have “beyond Damascus,” while Stephen quotes “beyond Babylon.”
There is no known manuscript of Amos that has the reading. Stephen may have been combining the Assyrians exile, of which
Amos speaks, with the later Babylonian exile of Judah, but substituting the place of exile.
The worship of astral deities began in Mesopotamia, but spread into Syria and Canaan (cf. Job 31:26,27). The archaeological
discovery at Tell El-Amarna, which included hundreds of letters from Canaan to Egypt in the 14th century b.c. also uses these
astral deities as place names.
▣ “in the book of the prophets” This refers to the scroll that contained the twelve minor prophets (cf. 13:40). The quote in vv.
42-43 is from the Septuagint of Amos 5:25-27.
The next phrase in v. 42 is a question that expects a “no” answer.
7:43 “Moloch” The Hebrew consonants for the word king are mlk (BDB 574). There are several Canaanite gods whose names
are a play on these three consonants, Milcom, Molech, or Moloch. Moloch was the chief fertility god of the Amorites to whom
children were offered to ensure the health and prosperity of the community or nation (cf. Lev. 20:2-5; Deut. 12:31; I Kgs.
11:5,7,33; II Kgs. 23:10,13,14; Jer. 7:31; 32:35). A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures In the New Testament, vol. 3, p. 93, says
Moloch was “an ox-headed image with arms outstretched in which children were placed and hollow underneath so that fire could
burn underneath.” The mention of the term Molech in Lev. 18:21 in context of inappropriate sexual unions, has caused some
scholars to assume that children were not sacrificed to Molech, but dedicated to him as temple prostitutes, male and female. The
concept fits in the general practices of fertility worship.
▣ “images” See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: FORM (TUPOS)
The problem is the word tupos, which has a variety of uses.
1. Moulton and Milligan, The Vocabulary of the Greek New Testament, p. 645
a. pattern
b. plan
c. form or manner of writing
d. decree or rescript
e. sentence or decision
f. model of human body as votive offerings to the healing god
g. verb used in the sense of enforcing the precepts of the law
2. Louw and Nida, Greek-English Lexicon, vol. 2, p. 249
a. scar (cf. John 20:25)
b. image (cf. Acts 7:43)
c. model (cf. Heb. 8:5)
d. example (cf. I Cor. 10:6; Phil. 3:17)
e. archetype (cf. Rom. 5:14)
f. kind (cf. Acts 23:25)
g. contents (cf. Acts 23:25)
3. Harold K. Moulton, The Analytical Greek Lexicon Revised, p. 411
a. a blow, an impression, a mark (cf. John 20:25)
b. a delineation
c. an image (cf. Acts 7:43)
d. a formula, scheme (cf. Rom. 6:17)
e. form, purport (cf. Acts 23:25)
f. a figure, counterpart (cf. I Cor. 10:6)
g. an anticipative figure, type (cf. Rom. 5:14; I Cor. 10:11)
h. a model pattern (cf. Acts 7:44; Heb. 8:5)
i. a moral pattern (cf. Phil. 3:17; I Thess. 1:7; II Thess. 3:9; I Tim. 4:12; I Pet. 5:3)
In this context # I above seems best. The gospel has both doctrine and lifestyle implications. The free gift of salvation in
Christ also demands a life like Christ!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 7:44-50
44Our fathers had the tabernacle of testimony in the wilderness, just as He who spoke to Moses directed him to make
it according to the pattern which he had seen. 45And having received it in their turn, our fathers brought it in with Joshua
upon dispossessing the nations whom God drove out before our fathers, until the time of David. 46David found favor in
God’s sight, and asked that he might find a dwelling place for the God of Jacob. 47But it was Solomon who built a house
for Him. 48However, the Most High does not dwell in houses made by human hands; as the prophet says: 49“Heaven is
My throne, And earth is the footstool of My feet; What kind of house will you build for Me?“ says the Lord,
“Or what place is there for My repose? 50Was it not My hand which made all these things?“
7:44 This account is found in Exodus, chapters 25-31; 36-40. These detailed plans of the tabernacle were revealed to Moses on
Mt. Sinai. The NT book of Hebrews talks about a heavenly tabernacle or sanctuary (cf. 8:5-6; 9:11,23) of which the earthly one
was a copy. As Stephen dealt previously in this chapter with the charge of chapter 6 that he was against Moses (cf. 6:11), now
he begins to deal with the second charge that he was against the Temple (cf. 6:13).
▣ “the pattern” See Special Topic at 7:43.
7:45 This covers a period of time from the conquest (either 1400 or 1250 b.c.) to the time of David (+ 1011 b.c. to 971/70 b.c.,
Harrison; 973 b.c., Young; 961 b.c., Bright).
7:46 This reflects II Samuel 7, which is such a significant passage. It is the divine establishment of the Davidic kingship.
7:47 “Solomon who built a house for Him” This account is found in I Kings 6-8 and II Chronicles 1-6.
7:48 This statement is similar to Solomon’s statement in I Kgs. 8:27 and II Chr. 6:18.
7:49-50 This quote is taken from the Septuagint of Isa. 66:1-2. T he point is that even Solomon recognized that a building could
not contain the God of creation!
Do these verses imply an argument for the inclusion of Gentiles? If so, it seems somewhat veiled. However, Solomon
himself saw the temple as a place for the world to come to YHWH (cf. I Kgs. 8:41-43). It was the Greek-speaking Jews (i.e., the
seven in Acts 6) who saw and proclaimed the worldwide mission even before the Apostles recognized this aspect of Jesus’
teachings (cf. Matt. 28:18-20; Acts 1:8). Stephen may have been asserting this by implication in v. 50.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 7:51-53
51“You men who are stiff-necked and uncircumcised in heart and ears are always resisting the Holy Spirit; you are
doing just as your fathers did. 52Which one of the prophets did your fathers not persecute? They killed those who had
previously announced the coming of the Righteous One, whose betrayers and murderers you have now become; 53you who
received the law as ordained by angels, and yet did not keep it.”
7:51 “You men” Stephen turns from the rebellion of Jewish leaders and people in the past to the current leaders and people in
the temple hearing his message. They were and they are rebels against YHWH!
▣ “a stiff-necked” Stephens alludes to Moses’ characterization of the children of Jacob/Israel (cf. Exod. 32:9; 33:3,5; 34:9; Deut.
9:6).
▣ “uncircumcised in heart” This Hebrew idiom means unfaithful, disloyal, and untrustworthy (cf. Lev. 26:41; Jer. 9:25-26;
Ezek. 44:7). This is the opposite of Deut. 10:16; Jer. 4:4!
▣ “and ears” This idiom refers to their unwillingness to hear and respond to God’s messengers (cf. Jer. 6:10).
▣ “are always resisting the Holy Spirit” This is very similar to Isa. 63:10. God’s love and faithfulness were extolled in Isa.
63:9,11-14, but the people’s reaction was faithlessness!
7:51b-52 This is the strong condemnation of the current Jewish leadership, just like the ancient Israelite leadership! The ancient
people of God had killed God’s messengers and now they have killed the Messiah (cf. 3:14; 5:28).
7:52 “Righteous One” This is used as a title for Jesus in 3:14 and 22:14. See fuller note at 3:14 and Special Topic:
Righteousness at 3:14.
7:53 “as ordained by angels” This refers to the rabbinical interpretation of Deut. 33:2 from the Septuagint in which God gave
the law to Moses through angelic mediation which seems to be confirmed by Gal. 3:19 and Heb. 2:2.
▣ “yet did not keep it” Stephen opened his defense with “hear” (BDB 1033) which may reflect the Hebrew Shema, “hear so as
to heed” (cf. Deut. 6:4). Stephen and later James (Jesus’ half brother ) both assert “be doers of the word not merely hearers” (cf.
James 1:22-23 following Jesus, Matt. 7:24-27; Luke 11:48; John 13:17; as did Paul, Rom. 2:13).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 7:54-60
54Now when they heard this, they were cut to the quick, and they began gnashing their teeth at him. 55But being full
of the Holy Spirit, he gazed intently into heaven and saw the glory of God, and Jesus standing at the right hand of God;
56and he said, “Behold, I see the heavens opened up and the Son of Man standing at the right hand of God.” 57But they
cried out with a loud voice, and covered their ears and rushed at him with one impulse. 58When they had driven him out
of the city, they began stoning him; and the witnesses laid aside their robes at the feet of a young man named Saul. 59They
went on stoning Stephen as he called on the Lord and said, “Lord Jesus, receive my spirit!” 60Then falling on his knees,
he cried out with a loud voice, “Lord, do not hold this sin against them!” Having said this, he fell asleep.
7:54 “they” This must refer to the members of the Sanhedrin (cf. 6:15).
▣
NASB “cut to the quick”
NKJV “cut to the heart”
NRSV “they became enraged”
TEV “they became furious”
NJB “they were infuriated”
This is an imperfect passive indicative. It is literally “cut to the heart” (cf. 5:33). Stephen’s message really got to these
leaders, but instead of repenting, they turned, as always, to rejection and murder (cf. 5:33).
▣ “gnashing their teeth” This is a sign of rage (cf. Job 16:9; Psalm 35:16; 37:12; Lam. 2:16).
7:55 “Holy Spirit. . .God. . .Jesus” Notice the mention of the Triune God. See Special Topic at 2:32-33.
▣ “Being full of the Holy Spirit” The concept of being filled with the Spirit for proclamation of the gospel is unique to Acts
(i.e., plēroō, cf. 2:4; 4:8,31; plērēs, cf. 6:3,5,8; 7:55; 11:24). See full note at 5:17.
The biblical truths related to the Spirit are characterized as:
1. the person of the Spirit (cf. John 14-16)
2. the baptism of the Spirit (cf. I Cor. 12:13)
3. the fruit of the Spirit (cf. Gal. 5:22-23)
4. the gifts of the Spirit (cf. I Cor. 12)
5. the filling of the Spirit (cf. Eph. 5:18)
Of all of these, Acts focuses on #5. The early church leaders were empowered, apparently again and again, to boldly and
powerfully proclaim the gospel of Jesus Christ. In Stephen’s case the effectiveness of his sermon cost him his life.
▣ “gazed intently” Luke is very fond of this term (cf. Luke 4:20; 22:56; Acts 1:10; 3:4,12; 6:15; 7:55; 10:4; 11:6; 13:9; 14:9;
23:1). Stephen looked up, as was typical of the Jewish manner of prayer, but instead of praying, God allowed him to see into
heaven itself.
▣ “saw the glory of God” Notice that Stephen is not said to have seen God, but His glory. No one could see God and live (cf.
Exod. 33:20-23). Job believed he would see God (cf. Job 19:25-27; Acts 7:55). Jesus promises that one day the pure in heart
will see God (cf. Matt. 5:8). See Special Topic: Glory at 3:13.
▣ “Jesus standing at the right hand of God” Jesus being at God’s right hand is an anthropomorphic idiom (see Special Topic
at 2:33) for the place of divine power and authority. The fact that Jesus was standing shows His interest and care for the first
Christian martyr.
God revealed Himself to Stephen in the form and manner that Stephen could receive. This does not mean to imply
1. that heaven is “up”
2. that God is sitting on a throne
It does mean to convey Jesus’ care and concern. We must be careful of culturally conditioned anthropomorphic language as the
source of doctrine. Modern western readers’ trying to take every passage literally as a way to show trust or devotion to the Bible
is an unfortunate cultural trend. God truly reveals Himself to His creation, but He does so in earthly ways and forms in which they
can understand. There is surely an element of accommodation. Fallen, finite, human creatures are not able to fully comprehend
the spiritual realm. God chooses things in our cultural and experiential world to use as analogies and metaphors to communicate
to us. These are surely true, but not exhaustive.
7:56 “Son of Man” Stephen obviously is identifying Jesus with the “Righteous One” of 5:52. His hearers would not have missed
this Messianic affirmation. The term “son of man” has two OT usages:
1. it was a common phrase for a person (cf. Ezek. 2:1; Ps. 8:4)
2. it was used of the divine personage (i.e., Messiah) in Daniel 7:13-14 and Ps. 110:1
Therefore, it had connotations of both humanity and deity. This is why Jesus used it as a self-designation and also because it was
not used by the rabbis who tended to use OT titles in exclusivistic, nationalistic, and militaristic ways. This reference by Stephen
is one of only two uses of this phrase outside of the words of Jesus (cf. John 12:34).
7:57-58 These hearers believed that Stephen had blasphemed by asserting that Jesus was the coming Son of Man (cf. Dan. 7:13).
For these monotheistic (see Special Topic at 2:39) Jews this was just too much! They did to Stephen what Moses mandated for
blasphemy (cf. Lev. 24:14-16; Deut. 13:9; 17:7). Stephen’s affirmation is either true or he is a blasphemer worthy of death! There
can be no middle ground about the claims of Jesus (cf. John 14:6-9).
7:57 “rushed at him with one impulse” This is the very term used so often by Luke to describe the unity of the early disciples
(cf. 1:14; 2:46; 5:12; 15:25). The Sanhedrin was unified in their anger and rejection of Stephen (also see 18:12, where the Jews
of Achaia reject Paul and 19:29 of the anger of the pagans of Ephesus against Christians).
7:58 “driven him out of the city” No one could be killed inside Jerusalem because it was “holy” ground!
▣ “stoning him” It is often stated that the Jews under Roman occupation did not have the right of capital punishment. This shows
that that is not always true. Mob violence could not be stopped quickly.
▣ “a young man named Saul” In Jewish circles, one was considered young up to age 40. This is our first encounter with Saul
of Tarsus by name, later to become Paul the Apostle. Paul heard Stephen’s OT survey and possibly had heard him earlier in the
synagogue of the Cilicians in Jerusalem (6:9). One wonders whether this began Saul’s period of doubt, which he tried to deal with
by persecuting Christians.
7:59 “Lord Jesus, receive my spirit” This is an aorist middle imperative. Notice that Stephen believed that he was going
to heaven to be with Jesus (cf. II Cor. 5:6,8) and not to hades (i.e., the holding place of the dead like the Hebrew sheol, see
Special Topic at 2:27). Stephen may have witnessed Jesus’ crucifixion, or at least had heard about it in detail because he uses
two similar phrases (i.e., vv. 59 and 60, cf. Luke 23:34,46).
It is interesting to note that Stephen prays to Jesus, as did the disciples in 1:24. However, in the rest of the NT prayer is made
to the Father in the name of the Son.
7:60 “falling on his knees” Stoning was not always a quick experience. The text implies it took several minutes.
▣ “he cried out with a loud voice” This also mimics Jesus’ experience. These words were as much for the crowd as for YHWH.
These words must have echoed in Saul’s ears.
▣ “he fell asleep” This is a biblical metaphor for death (ex. Job 3:13; 14:12; Ps. 76:5; II Sam. 7:12; I Kgs. 2:10; Jer. 51:39,57;
Dan. 12:2; Matt. 27:52; John 11:11; Acts 7:60; 13:36; I Cor. 15:6,18,20; I Thess. 4:13; II Pet. 3:4). This does not affirm the
doctrine of “soul-sleep.”
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. What is the purpose of Stephen’s statement?
What did it show about the Jews?
Why were they so enraged?
2. How was Jesus like Moses, verse 37?
3. Why is the quote from Isaiah 66:1-2 in verses 49-50 so important?
4. What was so significant about Stephen’s vision of Jesus?
ACTS 8
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Saul Persecutes the Church |
Saul Persecutes the Church |
Spread of the Gospel to |
Saul Persecutes the church |
The Stoning of Stephen, |
8:1b-3 |
8:1-3 |
8:1b-3 |
8:1b-2 |
(7:55-8:3) |
|
|
|
|
8:2 |
|
|
|
8:3 |
8:3 |
The Gospel is Preached in |
Christ is Preached in |
|
The Gospel is Preached in |
Philip in Samaria |
8:4-8 |
8:4-8 |
8:4-8 |
8:4-8 |
8:4-8 |
|
The Sorcerer’s Profession |
|
|
Simon the Magician |
8:9-13 |
8:9-13 |
8:9-13 |
8:9-13 |
8:9-13 |
|
The Sorcerer’s Sin |
|
|
|
8:14-24 |
8:14-24 |
8:14-24 |
8:14-17 |
8:14-17 |
|
|
|
8:18-19 |
8:18-24 |
|
|
|
8:20-24 |
|
8:25 |
8:25 |
8:25 |
8:25 |
8:25 |
Philip and the Ethiopian |
Christ is Preached to an |
|
Philip and the Ethiopian |
Philip Baptizes a Eunuch |
8:26-33 |
8:26-40 |
8:26-40 |
8:26-30 |
8:26-33 |
|
|
|
8:31-33 |
|
8:34-40 |
|
|
8:34-37 |
8:34-40 |
|
|
|
8:38-40 |
|
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 8:1a
1Saul was in hearty agreement with putting him to death.
8:1 “Saul was in hearty agreement with putting him to death” This phrase concludes chapter 7. It is a periphrastic
imperfect active. Paul remembered this experience with great shame (cf. Acts 22:20; I Cor. 15:9; Gal. 1:13,23; Phil. 3:6; I Tim.
1:13). Some relate this passage to 26:10, where it is assumed Paul voted in the Sanhedrin to put Christians to death.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 8:1b-3
1bAnd on that day a great persecution began against the church in Jerusalem, and they were all scattered throughout
the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles. 2Some devout men buried Stephen, and made loud lamentation
over him. 3But Saul began ravaging the church, entering house after house, and dragging off men and women, he would
put them in prison.
▣ “on that day a great persecution began against the church in Jerusalem” This probably represents the activity of the Jewish
leaders (mostly Sadducees) because of the exploding growth and prominence of the early church in Jerusalem. However, it was
also God’s way of forcing the church to implement Acts 1:8! If not 1:8 then 8:1!
It is not by accident that Luke uses the term ekklesia (see Special Topic at 5:11) for the new body of believers. These men
and women did not see themselves as something separate from God’s OT promises, but the fulfillment! The term was used in the
Septuagint to translate “the congregation” (MT – qahal) of Israel (cf. Acts 7:38); now it is used of the fellowship of believers in
Jerusalem.
Luke is very fond of the term “great” (megas). He uses it twenty-five times in his Gospel and twenty-nine times in Acts.
In chapter 8 he uses it for:
1. great persecution, v. 1
2. great lamentation, v. 2
3. loud voice, v. 7
4. someone great, v. 9
5. to the greatest, v. 10
6. great miracles, v. 13
▣ “they were all scattered throughout the region. . .except the apostles” It is extremely interesting that the persecution
bypassed the Apostles and landed squarely on the Hellenistic Jewish Christians. Apparently at this stage the Apostles were still
content to remain within Judaism. This event occurred some time after their meeting with Jesus in Galilee (cf. Matt. 28:18-20)
Pentecost and still the Apostolic leadership was content to remain and preach only to Jews or proselytes and only in the Jerusalem
area.
▣ “scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria” This is in fulfillment of Luke’s Great Commission mentioned
in Acts 1:8. It has been some time now since Jesus spoke these words and apparently persecution was the only means of getting
the church to go into all the world. The church is still reluctant!
8:2 “Some devout men buried Stephen” The term “devout men” is usually used of spiritually sensitive Jews (cf. Luke 2:25).
It is possible that this refers to Jewish Christians or simply Jews who disagreed with the illegal procedures (i.e., mob violence)
and execution of Stephen. The Mishnah permits the burial of blasphemers, but not with the loud lamentations made by those who
bury them. These devout men grieved openly
1. in defiance of what happened
2. in reference to the fact that what happened was not officially sanctioned
8:3 “Saul began ravaging the church” This verb is an imperfect middle indicative. This can mean the beginning of an action
in past time (cf. NASB, NJB) or recurrent action (cf. NKJV, NRSV, TEV).
The term “ravage” meant “the tearing of a body by an animal.” It is used in the Septuagint of animals in Exod. 22:13; Ps.
74:13 and of military defeat in Jer. 28:2 and 31:18. Paul apparently was struggling with the truth of Stephen’s statements, and
may have tried to cover up his internal tension by aggressively persecuting the church (cf. Acts 9:1,13,21; 22:4,19: 26:10-11;
I Cor. 15:9; Gal. 1:13; Phil. 3:6; I Tim. 1:13).
See Special Topic: Church at 5:11.
▣ “entering house by house” This phrase could be understood in two ways:
1. Paul found out where the Apostles had visited (cf. 5:42)
2. there were several house churches even at this early date in Jerusalem where believers met regularly
The early Christians would meet at
1. the local synagogues every Sabbath
2. the Temple on special days or even most days
3. special locations or numerous homes on Sundays
▣ “dragging off men and women” This is a verb that is used for Satan sweeping a third of the stars from heaven in Rev. 12:4.
It is used several times in Acts (cf. 8:3; 14:19; 17:6). Saul was vicious in his persecution (cf. 26:10). This is evidenced by the
phrase “men and women.” He tore apart families of sincere believers and had them imprisoned and some even killed (cf.
9:1,13,21; 22:4,19; 26:10,11; Gal. 1:13;23; I Tim. 1:13). This is why he later calls himself “the least of the saints” (cf. I Cor. 15:9;
Eph. 3:8).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 8:4-8
4Therefore, those who had been scattered went about preaching the word. 5Philip went down to the city of Samaria
and began proclaiming Christ to them. 6The crowds with one accord were giving attention to what was said by Philip,
as they heard and saw the signs which he was performing. 7For in the case of many who had unclean spirits, they were
coming out of them shouting with a loud voice; and many who had been paralyzed and lame were healed. 8So there was
much rejoicing in that city.
8:4 “those who had been scattered went about preaching the word” Notice it was not the Apostles, because they remained
in Jerusalem, but the Hellenistic Jewish Christians scattered throughout the region who became the early evangelists. It is amazing
that the worldwide mission of the church was instigated, not by the Apostles, but by Stephen and Philip.
The “word” here must surely mean the gospel, but also the added worldwide, non-Jewish focus of Stephen (Great
Commission, 1:8; Matt. 28:18-20; Luke 24:47).
8:5 “Philip” He is one of “the Seven” mentioned in 6:5 (cf. 21:8-9). He is depicted in three evangelistic settings: (1) Samaria;
(2) the Ethiopian Eunuch; and (3) ministry in the Palestinian coastal area. These “seven” had a heart for evangelism.
▣ “went down to the city of Samaria” There is a manuscript question over whether the text reads “the city of Samaria” or “a
city of Samaria.” Manuscript attestation is in favor of the definite article (cf. MSS, P74, א, A, B). However, this city was not
known by the name Samaria at this time, but as Sebaste. During this Roman period the term Samaria was used of the district.
The major city of Samaria would have been Shecham, then called Neapolis and today Nablus. It has been theorized that this city
may be Gitta because that is the traditional home of Simon Magus. This theory is from Justin Martyr, who was also from this area.
▣ “and began proclaiming Christ to them” The Samaritans were hated by the Jews because they considered them to be half-breeds (cf. Ezra 4:1-3). This was related to the Assyrian exile of 722 b.c. that repopulated the area of the northern Ten Tribes
with pagans who intermarried with the small remaining Jewish population (cf. II Kings 17:24-41).
This group of people was also ministered to by Jesus. Jesus revealed His Messiahship to a woman of Samaria and her village
(cf. John 4). Now Philip preaches about “the Christ” (definitive article), which is the Greek translation of “The Messiah” (see
Special Topic at 2:31). The OT title relates to YHWH’s promise of sending One who would set up the new kingdom, inaugurate
the new age of the Spirit. This event is foreshadowed in Jesus’ ministry and specifically mandated in Jesus’ closing words (1:8).
8:6 “The crowds with one accord” The phrase “one accord” is very popular with Luke. See note at 1:14.
▣ “as they heard and saw the signs which he was performing” This refers to miracles confirming Philip’s message (cf. v.
7). These same manifestations of the Spirit accompanied Jesus, the Twelve, the Seventy, and Peter and John preaching.
8:7 Demon possession is a reality in our world (cf. Merrill F. Unger’s two books: [1] Biblical Demonology and [2] Demons in
the World Today). See the two Special Topics at 5:16.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 8: 9-13
9Now there was a man named Simon, who formerly was practicing magic in the city and astonishing the people of
Samaria, claiming to be someone great; 10and they all, from smallest to greatest, were giving attention to him, saying,
“This man is what is called the Great Power of God.” 11And they were giving him attention because he had for a long time
astonished them with his magic arts. 12But when they believed Philip preaching the good news about the kingdom of God
and the name of Jesus Christ, they were being baptized, men and women alike. 13Even Simon himself believed; and after
being baptized, he continued on with Philip, and as he observed signs and great miracles taking place, he was constantly
amazed.
8:9 “a man named Simon” Whether this man truly believed (cf. vv. 13,18) or was simply a charlatan seeking power is uncertain.
I would like to give him the benefit of the doubt based on v. 24. It is amazing how much tradition the early church developed
around this man, but all of it is speculative (cf. The Zondervan Pictorial Encyclopedia of the Bible, vol. 5, pp. 442-444).
▣
NASB, NRSV “magic”
NKJV, TEV “sorcery”
NJB “magic arts”
SPECIAL TOPIC: MAGIC
In ancient times there appear to be several types of individuals and groups involved in different kinds of magic.
1. There is a priestly caste from Medea involved in astrology called Chaldeans (cf. Dan. 1:20; 2:2,10,27; 4:7,9; 5:11;
Matt. 2:1,7,16). Herodotus calls them “Medean priests.” They were involved in foretelling and controlling future
events based on the movement and configuration of astral gods (i.e., planets, stars, constellations, comets).
2. There is a philosophical, mathematical counterpoint group in Greek life known as the Pythagorians.
3. Most magical groups were made up of persons who claimed to be able to manipulate the supernatural or natural forces
of nature (cf. Gen. 41:8,24; Exod. 7:11,22; 8:7,19; 9:11). Often these forces (or gods) were seen to be in conflict with
humanity and by taking the side of this force or that force the possessor of the knowledge could control the forces for
personal gain (cf. the magical papyri of the third and fourth centuries a.d.). These individuals would:
a. foretell future events
b. control future events
c. interpret future events and dreams
d. curse or protect other individuals, cities, nations, armies, etc.
4. Magicians as in Acts 8:9,11 claimed to be able to manipulate the impersonal forces of nature or the personal (demonic)
forces to perform their will. This often involved magical rites and incantation.
5. “True” magicians often attacked other magicians who did not perform the rites and liturgies correctly. These were call
charlatan or deceivers (cf. Acts 13:6,8; 19:13).
6. The power of the gospel is seen in Paul’s ministry in Ephesus where former magicians converted to faith in Christ
burned their expensive magic books (i.e., how to properly perform incantations, rites and liturgies, cf. Acts 19:19).
7. For further reading
a. Susan Garrett, The Demise of the Devil, Fortress Press, 1989
b. Merrill Unger, Biblical Demonology, Scripture Press, 1967
c. Hendrik Berkhof, Christ and the Powers, Herald Press, 1977
d. Waller Wink, Naming the Powers, Fortress Press, 1984
e. Clinton Arnold, Three Crucial Questions About Spiritual Warfare, Baker, 1997
8:10 “This man is what is called the Great Power of God” This was a title for the high god of the Greco-Roman Pantheon (i.e.,
Zeus). In Aramaic it would be “This is the power of the god who is called great.” This man had thoroughly tricked the locals.
He may have even tricked himself (cf. vv. 9,13).
8:12 “believed” See Special Topic: Believe, Faith, Trust at 3:16 and OT Believe at 6:5.
▣
NASB “preaching the good news”
NKJV “preached the things”
NRSV “was proclaiming the good news”
TEV “message about the good news”
This is the Greek verb euangelizō, which is a compound of good (eu) and message (angelizō). We get the English words
evangel, evangelize, and evangelism from this Greek term. Philip presented the story of Jesus to these Samaritans and they
responded in saving faith.
▣ “about the kingdom of God” See the Two Special Topics on this subject at 1:3.
▣ “the name of Jesus Christ” See Special Topic at 2:21.
▣ “they were being baptized” See Special Topic at 2:38.
▣ “men and women alike” Contextually there may be two significances to this phrase.
1. Paul persecuted “men and women (cf. 8:3),” but the gospel also was saving “men and women”
2. In Judaism only men participated in the initial Jewish rite of circumcision, but now in the gospel, both genders
participated in the initial rite of baptism.
8:13 “Simon believed” Most evangelicals use this term “believed” (See Special Topic at 3:16) in a very definitive sense, but
there are places in the NT (e.g., John 8:31) where it denotes something less than conversion (cf. John 8:59).
Initial faith is not the only criteria (cf. Matt. 13:1-9,10-23; 24:13). Continuance and obedience are also evidence of a true
relationship with Christ.
SPECIAL TOPIC: PERSEVERANCE
The biblical doctrines related to the Christian life are difficult to explain because they are presented in typically eastern,
dialectical pairs. These pairs seem contradictory, yet both poles are biblical. Western Christians have tended to choose one truth
and ignore or depreciate the opposite truth. Some examples:
1. Is salvation an initial decision to trust Christ or a life-time commitment to discipleship?
2. Is salvation an election by means of grace from a sovereign God or a faith and repentant response on mankind’s part
to a divine offer?
3. Is salvation, once received, impossible to lose, or is there a need for continual diligence?
The issue of perseverance has been contentious throughout church history. The problem starts with seemingly conflicting
passages of the NT:
1. texts on assurance
a. statements of Jesus in John’s Gospel (John 6:37; 10:28-29)
b. statements of Paul (Rom. 8:35-39; Eph. 1:13; 2:5,8-9; Phil. 1:6; 2:13; II Thess. 3:3; II Tim. 1:12; 4:18)
c. statements of Peter (I Pet. 1:4-5)
2. texts on the need for perseverance
a. statements of Jesus in the Synoptic Gospels (Matt. 10:22; 13:1-9,24-30; 24:13; Mark 13:13)
b. statements of Jesus in John’s Gospel (John 8:31; 15:4-10)
c. statements of Paul (Rom. 11:22; I Cor. 15:2; II Cor. 13:5; Gal. 1:6; 3:4; 5:4; 6:9; Phil. 2:12; 3:18-20; Col. 1:23;
II Tim. 3:2)
d. statements of the author of Hebrews (2:1; 3:6,14; 4:14; 6:11)
e. statements of John (I John 2:6; II John 9; Rev. 2:7,17,26; 3:5,12,21; 21:7)
Biblical salvation issues from the love, mercy, and grace of a sovereign Triune God. No human can be saved without the
initiation of the Spirit (cf. John 6:44,65). Deity comes first and sets the agenda, but demands that humans must respond in faith
and repentance, both initially and continually. God works with mankind in a covenant relationship. There are privileges and
responsibilities!
Salvation is offered to all humans. Jesus’ death dealt with the sin problem of the fallen creation! God has provided a way
and wants all those made in His image to respond to His love and provision in Jesus.
If you would like to read more on this subject see
1. Dale Moody, The Word of Truth, Eerdmans, 1981 (pp. 348-365)
2. Howard Marshall, Kept by the Power of God, Bethany Fellowship, 1969
3. Robert Shank, Life in the Son, Westcott, 1961
The Bible addresses two different problems in this area: (1) taking assurance as a license to live fruitless, selfish lives or (2)
encouraging those who struggle with ministry and personal sin. The problem is that the wrong groups are taking the wrong
message and building theological systems on limited biblical passages. Some Christians desperately need the message of
assurance, while others need the stern warnings of perseverance! Which group are you in?
There is a historical theological controversy involving Augustine versus Pelagius and Calvin versus Arminius (semi-Pelagian). The issue involves the question of salvation: if one is truly saved, must he persevere in faith and fruitfulness?
The Calvinists line up behind those biblical texts that assert God’s sovereignty and keeping-power (John 10:27-30; Rom.
8:31-39; I John 5:13,18; I Pet. 1:3-5) and verb tenses like the perfect passive participles of Eph. 2:5,8.
The Arminians line up behind those biblical texts that warn believers to “hold on,” “hold out,” or “continue” (Matt. 10:22;
24:9-13; Mark 13:13; John 15:4-6; I Cor. 15:2; Gal. 6:9; Rev. 2:7,11,17,26; 3:5,12,21; 21:7). I personally do not believe that
Hebrews 6 and 10 are applicable, but many Arminians use them as a warning against apostasy. The parable of the Sower in
Matthew 13 and Mark 4 addresses the issue of apparent belief, as does John 8:31-59. As Calvinists quote the perfect tense
verbs used to describe salvation, the Arminians quote the present tense passages like I Cor. 1:18; 15:2; II Cor. 2:15.
This is a perfect example of how theological systems abuse the proof-texting method of interpretation. Usually a guiding
principle or chief text is used to construct a theological grid by which all other texts are viewed. Be careful of grids from any
source. They come from western logic, not revelation. The Bible is an eastern book. It presents truth in tension-filled, seemingly
paradoxical pairs. Christians are meant to affirm both and live within the tension. The NT presents both the security of the
believer and the demand for continuing faith and godliness. Christianity is an initial response of repentance and faith followed
by a continuing response of repentance and faith. Salvation is not a product (a ticket to heaven or a fire insurance policy), but
a relationship. It is a decision and discipleship. It is described in the NT in all verb tenses:
aorist (completed action), Acts 15:11; Rom. 8:24; II Tim. 1:9; Titus 3:5
perfect (completed action with continuing results), Eph. 2:5,8
present (continuing action), I Cor. 1:18; 15:2; II Cor. 2:15
future (future events or certain events), Rom. 5:8,10; 10:9; I Cor. 3:15; Phil. 1:28; I Thess. 5:8-9; Heb. 1:14; 9:28
▣ “he continued on with Philip” This is a periphrastic imperfect. Notice the sequence.
1. he heard, vv. 6-7,12
2. he saw, vv. 6-7,13
3. he believed, v. 13
4. he was baptized, v. 13
5. he went with Philip, v. 13
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 8:14-24
14Now when the apostles in Jerusalem heard that Samaria had received the word of God, they sent them Peter and
John, 15who came down and prayed for them that they might receive the Holy Spirit. 16For He had not yet fallen upon
any of them; they had simply been baptized in the name of the Lord Jesus. 17Then they began laying their hands on them,
and they were receiving the Holy Spirit. 18Now when Simon saw that the Spirit was bestowed through the laying on of
the apostles’ hands, he offered them money, 19saying, “Give this authority to me as well, so that everyone on whom I lay
my hands may receive the Holy Spirit.” 20But Peter said to him, “May your silver perish with you, because you thought
you could obtain the gift of God with money! 21You have no part or portion in this matter, for your heart is not right
before God. 22Therefore repent of this wickedness of yours, and pray the Lord that, if possible, the intention of your heart
may be forgiven you. 23For I see that you are in the gall of bitterness and in the bondage of iniquity.” 24But Simon
answered and said, “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves, so that nothing of what you have said may come upon me.”
8:14 “when the apostles in Jerusalem heard that Samaria had received the word of God, they sent them Peter and John”
Ministry to the Samaritans was forbidden to the disciples during Jesus’ lifetime (cf. Matt. 10:5). Apparently the Apostles wanted
to give their official sanction to this radical and unusual movement of the Holy Spirit among this traditionally hated racial group.
This area was specifically mentioned in Acts 1:8. As was typical, Philip caught Jesus’ implication of world-wide evangelization
quicker than the Twelve.
Notice that believing in Jesus is parallel to “receiving the word of God.” The word of God can stand for several things.
1. God’s total communication to human beings
2. God’s recorded communication to human beings (i.e., Scripture)
3. God’s Son (i.e., the Word, cf. John 1:1) who is the ultimate revelation of God (cf. Heb. 1:3)
Notice that Peter and John were sent. Peter was the acknowledged leader of the apostolic group and John the one who earlier
wanted to call down fire on the Samaritans (cf. Luke 9:54).
8:15 “who came and prayed for them that they might receive the Holy Spirit” There are tremendous problems trying to build
a theology of salvation from Acts for the following reason: the order of events and the events themselves surrounding salvation
differs from passage to passage. The Holy Spirit in this passage refers to a confirmation, like Pentecost, showing that God had
accepted and saved these Samaritans. They could not have truly been saved in the first place (i.e., receive is perfect middle
indicative) without the work of the Holy Spirit (cf. Rom. 8:9).
I think the experience of Pentecost set a pattern, which God reproduced in the experience of different racial and geographical
people groups, to show and confirm to the believing Jewish church that God Himself had fully and completely accepted a new
group. The Spirit’s manifestation in Acts (i.e., Pentecost) is thereby theologically different from the Corinthian tongues.
This text cannot be used to demand a Corinthian-like experience to confirm salvation (cf. I Cor. 12:29-30, which is a series
of questions which expect a “no” answer). Luke records what occurred, not what should occur every time.
8:16-17 This is different from the stated order of events in Acts 2:38. The discrepancy is due to the specific action of the Holy
Spirit: (1) in 2:38 in relation to salvation and (2) in 8:16 in relation to a Pentecostal type of experience. The same “Holy Spirit
event” of Acts 2 now occurred with Samaritans. This was not for their benefit alone, but mostly for the Jewish Christian
community. It showed them that God had fully accepted the Samaritans! This is not meant to assert a two-step initial salvation
experience.
Please notice that it was Peter and John who noticed the absence of the special manifestation of the Spirit that they had
experienced at Pentecost. This is not to imply that the miraculous signs which accompanied Philip’s preaching were not true
manifestations of the Spirit (cf. v. 13). Peter and John wanted a Samaritan Pentecost! This is so important because when
Cornelius has the same experience (i.e., Acts 10), Peter knew that God had fully accepted a Roman military man and his family.
The gospel is for all people. This is the great truth which this experience reveals in Acts!
8:16 This could be called the Samaritan Pentecost.
8:17 This cannot be a proof-text for the necessity of laying on hands. This procedure, for this purpose, does not occur again in
Acts. It does express the power and authority of the Apostles. See Special Topic: Laying on of Hands at 6:6.
8:20 The theological question for us is the soteriological question for Simon. Was he saved or not? Peter’s word can be taken
as a curse or a warning. All new believers have weak and incorrect information about the gospel, but does Simon’s denote an
added element of egotism? Can people be saved with conflicting priorities in their lives?
▣ “the gift of God” Here the Spirit stands for all of God’s work on behalf of sinful rebellious humanity (cf. Isa. 55:1-2; Jer.
31:31-34; Ezek. 36:22-38; Luke 11:13; Acts 2:38).
8:21 “You have no part or portion in this matter” The first term “part” (i.e., meris) means a portion in common. It has a
negative connotation here and in II Cor. 6:15.
The second term “portion” (i.e., klēros) is the OT word for “lot,” which was the way they determined the will of God (i.e.,
Urim and Thummim). They were used to divide the Promised Land among the tribes (cf. Josh. 12-19). Therefore, it is used in
the sense of inheritance. This term came to be used in English for “clergy,” but in the NT it refers to all believers.
▣ “your heart is not right before God” This may be an allusion to Ps. 78:37. The terms “right” and “just” (see Special Topic
at 3:14) and their various forms, come from a term for a river reed found in Mesopotamia. It was fifteen to twenty feet tall and
straight. God took this word, which was used in construction (checking the horizontal straightness of walls), to describe His own
ethical character. God is the standard, ruler, straight edge by which all humans are judged. In light of this, all fail the test (cf.
Rom. 3:9-18,23).
8:22 “repent” This is an aorist active imperative, which denotes urgency. See note and Special Topic at 2:38.
▣ “pray” This is an aorist passive (deponent) imperative. Talking to God is evidence of a personal relationship, as conviction,
which leads to repentance, is evidence of the indwelling Spirit!
▣ “if” This is a first class conditional sentence, which is assumed to be true for the author’s literary purposes or from his
perspective. In this sentence it denotes a contingency based on Simon’s willingness to repent and pray for forgiveness. His
mindset and actions are a serious deviation from normative Christianity.
▣ “the intention of your heart” Sin begins in the thought life. The rabbis say that the mind is like a plowed garden ready for
seed. What we allow in through our eyes and ears takes root. If we dwell on it, these thoughts become actions. This is why the
NT asserts that we should “gird up the loins of our minds” (cf. I Pet. 1:13) or “renew your mind” (cf. Rom 12:2; Eph. 4:23).
8:23
NASB, NRSV “the gall of bitterness”
NKJV “poisoned by bitterness”
TEV “full of bitter envy”
NJB “bitterness of gall”
The terms “gall” (cholē) and “bitterness” (pikros) both refer to a bitter spirit, usually associated with anger and apostasy (cf.
Deut. 29:18; 32:28-33; Heb. 12:15). Paul uses the term “bitter” several times in lists of things to avoid (cf. Rom. 3:14; Eph. 4:31).
▣
NASB “in the bondage of iniquity”
NKJV “bound by iniquity”
NRSV “chains of wickedness”
TEV “a prisoner of sin”
NJB “chains of sin”
This may be an allusion to the work of the Messiah (cf. Isa. 58:6). Jesus could free Simon from this evil bondage to personal
power as he freed him from the penalty of sin. Sin has two aspects: (1) death both physically and spiritually and (2) who is in
control in the sinner’s life (it can affect both the saved and the lost, cf. I Cor. 3:1-3). Sin must be dealt with both in time and in
eternity; its penalty and power must be dealt with, but only Christ and the Spirit can do it, but we as believers must allow Them
to!
8:24 “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” This is an aorist passive imperative (plural, which may refer to the entire
mission team). Simon repeats Peter’s words from v. 22. Peter’s words have frightened him. I believe Simon is a believer, but
a new, baby one.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 8:25
25So, when they had solemnly testified and spoken the word of the Lord, they started back to Jerusalem, and were
preaching the gospel to many villages of the Samaritans.
8:25 “solemnly testified” See note at 2:40.
▣ “and were preaching the gospel to many villages of the Samaritans” This shows the marked change of attitude on the part
of the Apostles to the Samaritans.
It seems that “the word of the Lord” and “the gospel” are synonymous.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 8:26-40
26But an angel of the Lord spoke to Philip saying, “Get up and go south to the road that descends from Jerusalem
to Gaza.” (This is a desert road.) 27So he got up and went; and there was an Ethiopian eunuch, a court official of Candace,
queen of the Ethiopians, who was in charge of all her treasure; and he had come to Jerusalem to worship, 28and he was
returning and sitting in his chariot, and was reading the prophet Isaiah. 29Then the Spirit said to Philip, “Go up and join
this chariot.” 30Philip ran up and heard him reading Isaiah the prophet, and said, “Do you understand what you are
reading?” 31And he said, “Well, how could I, unless someone guides me?” And he invited Philip to come up and sit with
him. 32Now the passage of Scripture which he was reading was this: “He was led as a sheep to slaughter; And as a
lamb before its shearer is silent, So He does not open His mouth. 33In humiliation His judgment was taken
away; Who will relate His generation? For His life is removed from the earth.” 34The eunuch answered Philip
and said, “Please tell me, of whom does the prophet say this? Of himself or of someone else?” 35Then Philip opened his
mouth, and beginning from this Scripture he preached Jesus to him. 36As they went along the road they came to some
water; and the eunuch said, “Look! Water! What prevents me from being baptized?” 37And Philip said, “If you believe
with all your heart, you may.” And he answered and said, “I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.” 38And he
ordered the chariot to stop; and they both went down into the water, Philip as well as the eunuch, and he baptized him.
39When they came up out of the water, the Spirit of the Lord snatched Philip away; and the eunuch no longer saw him,
but went on his way rejoicing. 40But Philip found himself at Azotus, and as he passed through he kept preaching the gospel
to all the cities until he came to Caesarea.
8:26 “an angel of the Lord spoke to Philip” Here “the angel of the Lord” and “the Holy Spirit” seem to be synonymous (cf. v.
29). This is common in Acts. See note at 5:19.
▣ “Get up and go south” These are both imperatives. This could refer to one of two roads to Egypt. This message may have
been audible because of its specificity. This is obviously a divinely prepared evangelistic encounter (like Paul’s).
▣
NASB “(This is a desert road.)”
NKJV “This is desert”
NRSV “(This is a wilderness road)”
TEV “(This road is not used nowadays)”
NJB “the desert road”
If this is a comment by Luke, is Luke clarifying his source, or is this is a comment from Luke’s source (probably Philip, cf.
Acts 21:8)? These questions cannot be answered with certainty. Inspiration covers Bible productions no matter how many
separate persons are involved.
8:27 “a court official” The term “official” is literally the term “eunuch.” However, it is uncertain whether he was a physical
eunuch or simply an official at court (derived meaning). In the OT, Potiphar is called a eunuch and yet he is married (cf. Gen.
39:1). In the OT, Deut. 23:1 forbids a eunuch from becoming a part of the Jewish community; however, in Isaiah 56:3-5, this ban
is removed. This clearly shows the new age of the Spirit has dawned. Whether this man was a god-fearer or a proselyte is simply
uncertain, but probable. The descriptive phrase implies he was a high government official.
▣ “Candace, queen of the Ethiopians” Candace is a title like “Pharaoh” or “Caesar.” The reason the queen is mentioned is
because the king in Ethiopia was considered to be a deity and, therefore, it was beneath him to deal with simple administrative
or political affairs.
8:28 “reading the prophet Isaiah” Apparently this man had bought an expensive leather scroll of Isaiah, which would have been
over 29 feet long (i.e., one found in the Dead Sea Scrolls). By the Spirit’s direction, he had opened it to the Messianic passage
of Isaiah 53:7-8 and was reading it.
8:29 “the Spirit said to Philip, ‘Go up and join this chariot’” This is an aorist passive imperative. It literally meant “be
glued.” The Spirit is giving Philip every specific guidance.
8:30 “Philip ran up and heard him reading Isaiah the prophet” Ancients all read aloud even when alone.
▣ “Do you understand what you are reading” What a great question! It is possible to read Scripture and not clearly see its
intent. The Spirit is directing Philip to a “divine appointment” which will
1. show the new age has dawned
2. give a powerful witness to another people group
8:31 A. T. Robertson’s Word Pictures in the New Testament comments on this verse, “This is a mixed condition, the conclusion
coming first belongs to the fourth class. . .with ‘an’ and the optative, but the condition. . .is of the first class. . .a common enough
phenomenon in Koine” (p. 110). This first class condition, like Luke 19:40 uses ean instead of ei. The condition is determined
by the mood, not the construction (cf. Luke 19:40).
8:32-33 This quote is from the Messianic passage from the Septuagint of Isa. 53:7-9. I am surprised that these verses are
emphasized and not other Messianic verses in this OT context. However, Philip starts right where he was reading and explains
the entire passage in light of the life, ministry, death, and resurrection of Jesus of Nazareth. The OT prophecy has been fulfilled
and forgiveness through Christ is offered to everyone!
8:35 “Philip opened his mouth” This shows the centrality of the OT passage concerning “the Suffering Servant” to gospel
proclamation. I believe Jesus, Himself, showed the early church how these ancient prophecies applied to Himself (cf. Luke
24:27).
8:36 “Look! Water! What prevents me from being baptized” Philip’s gospel message included baptism (cf. Matthew 3;
28:19; Acts 2:38; Rom. 6:1-11; Col. 2:12)! See Special Topic at 2:38. Notice he did not need approval from the Apostles in
Jerusalem to baptize a convert. Baptism is not a denominational issue, but a kingdom issue. We must be careful of the
denominational traditions that have so muddied the biblical waters as far as expected procedures in our day!
Was the eunuch worried about being accepted?
1. racial issue
2. physical issue
3. socio-economic issue
4. catechism issue
All barriers are down in Jesus Christ (cf. Eph. 2:11-3:13). Whosoever will may come (cf. John 1:12; 3:16; Rom. 10:9-13)!
8:37 This verse, which records the eunuch’s confession, is not included in the ancient Greek papyri manuscripts P45 (Chester
Beatty Papyri), P74 (Bodmer Papyri), or the ancient uncial Greek manuscripts א, A, B, or C. Neither is it present in some of the
ancient Vulgate, Syriac, Coptic, or Ethiopian translations. Verse 37 is not original to Acts. UBS4 gives its omission an “A” rating,
meaning certain. It is not even included in the text of NASB (1970) edition, but is included in the 1995 update with brackets.
8:38-39 “went down into the water. . .came up out of the water” This is not a proof-text for immersion. The context implies
they walked into a body of water, not the method of the baptism. Be careful of your preconceived biases!
8:39 “the Spirit of the Lord snatched Philip away” Whether this is a miraculous occurrence like Elijah’s (cf. I Kgs. 18:12;
II Kgs. 2:16) or Ezekiel’s (cf. Ezek. 3:14; 8:3) or simply a reference to his immediate departure is uncertain. The Spirit was
intimately involved in this conversion. Notice also that extensive follow-up and catechism apparently did not occur, but the
convert had the scroll of Isaiah and the indwelling Spirit!
▣ “went on his way rejoicing” The Good News is always accompanied by rejoicing (cf. 8:8). Ireaneus records the tradition
that this eunuch became a gospel missionary to his own people. The Spirit Himself must have done the follow-up discipling!
8:40 Philip continued (imperfect middle indicative) his evangelistic ministry in the Philistine town of Ashdod (i.e., Azotus)
on his way home to Caesarea by the sea. It is obvious that Philip understood the universal evangelistic implication of the
Samaritans and the Ethiopians. The gospel included even Philistines!
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why did God allow persecution to come upon the early Church?
2. Why was the gospel being preached to Samaritans so significantly?
3. Was Simon a believer?
4. Why did the Samaritans not receive the Holy Spirit when they believed?
5. What type of persons does the eunuch represent?
6. Why is verse 37 not in all Bibles?
ACTS 9
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
The Conversion of Saul |
The Damascus Road: Saul |
Conversion of Saul of |
The Conversion of Saul |
The Conversion of Saul |
9:1-9 |
9:1-9 |
9:1-9 |
9:1-2 |
9:1-2 |
|
|
|
9:3-4 |
9:3-9 |
|
|
|
9:5a |
|
|
|
|
9:5b-6 |
|
|
Ananias Baptizes Saul |
|
9:7-9 |
|
9:10-19a |
9:10-19 |
9:10-19a |
9:10a |
9:10-12 |
|
|
|
9:10b |
|
|
|
|
9:11-12 |
|
|
|
|
9:13-14 |
9:13-19a |
|
|
|
9:15-16 |
|
|
|
|
9:17-19a |
|
Saul Preaches at Damascus |
Saul Preaches Christ |
|
Saul Preaches in Damascus |
Saul’s Preaching at |
9:19b-22 |
|
9:19b-22 |
9:19b-20 |
9:19b-22 |
|
9:20-22 |
|
9:21 |
|
|
|
|
9:22 |
|
Saul Escapes From the |
Saul Escapes Death |
Saul’s First Visit to |
|
|
9:23-25 |
9:23-25 |
9:23-25 |
9:23-25 |
9:23-25 |
Saul at Jerusalem |
Saul at Jerusalem |
|
Saul in Jerusalem |
Saul’s Visit to Jerusalem |
9:26-30 |
9:26-30 |
9:26-30 |
9:26-30 |
9:26-30 |
|
The Church Prospers |
|
|
A Lull |
9:31 |
9:31 |
9:31 |
9:31 |
9:31 |
The Healing of Aeneas |
Aeneas Healed
|
Peter’s Journey to Lydda |
Peter Sees Lydda in Joppa |
Peter Cures a Paralytic at |
9:32-35 |
9:32-35 |
9:32-35 |
9:32-35 |
9:32-35 |
Dorcas Restored to Life |
Dorcas Restored to Life |
|
|
Peter Raises a Woman to |
9:36-43 |
9:36-43 |
9:36-43 |
9:36-43 |
9:36-38 |
|
|
|
|
9:39-42 |
|
|
|
|
9:43 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
A. The emphasis in Acts is beginning to shift from
1. the Apostle Peter to the Apostle Paul
2. from Palestine to the Mediterranean world
3. from Jews to Gentiles.
B. Paul’s conversion is such an important point in church history that it is recorded three times in the book of Acts.
1. Luke’s account, 9:1-30
2. Paul’s account before the mob in Jerusalem, 22:3-16
3. Paul’s account before Agrippa II at Caesarea, 26:4-18
4. Paul also briefly mentions this same period in Gal. 1:13-17 and II Cor. 11:32-33
C. The similarities between Stephen’s message and Paul’s messages are obvious. Paul began to minister to the same
Hellenistic Jews to whom Stephen had preached. Paul heard Stephen’s sermon of Acts 7 (cf. 7:58; 8:1; 22:20). It is
even possible that Paul was one of the leaders of the Hellenist Synagogues in Jerusalem who debated with Stephen and
lost!
D. Some possible influential factors in Paul’s conversion
1. failure of Judaism to provide internal peace and joy
2. the life and teachings of Jesus were well known and discussed in rabbinical circles (especially Jerusalem)
3. he heard Stephen’s sermon and witnessed his death (possibly even debated Stephen)
4. he saw the demeanor and faith of Christians under persecution
5. his personal encounter with the resurrected Lord changed everything
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 9:1-9
1Now Saul, still breathing threats and murder against the disciples of the Lord, went to the high priest, 2and asked
for letters from him to the synagogues at Damascus, so that if he found any belonging to the Way, both men and women,
he might bring them bound to Jerusalem. 3As he was traveling, it happened that he was approaching Damascus, and
suddenly a light from heaven flashed around him; 4and he fell to the ground and heard a voice saying to him, “Saul, Saul,
why are you persecuting Me?” 5And he said, “Who are You, Lord?” And He said, “I am Jesus whom you are persecuting,
6but get up and enter the city, and it will be told you what you must do.” 7The men who traveled with him stood
speechless, hearing the voice but seeing no one. 8Saul got up from the ground, and though his eyes were open, he could
see nothing; and leading him by the hand, they brought him into Damascus. 9And he was three days without sight, and
neither ate nor drank.
9:1 “Saul, still breathing threats and murder” This is literally “snorting.” In Acts 26:11, Paul says of himself, that he was
furiously enraged at them. Apparently Paul even killed some Christians (cf. 8:1).
▣ “the disciples of the Lord” This term means learners. It only appears in the Gospels and Acts. This term is rapidly replaced
by the term “saints.” Notice the number of terms used in this chapter to describe the people of God:
1. disciples, vv. 1,10,19,25,26,36,38
2. the Way, v. 2
3. saints, vv. 13,32,41
4. brothers, v. 17.
▣ “went to the high priest” This is obviously a reference to the Sanhedrin (cf. Acts 26:10). See note on Sanhedrin at 4:5.
9:2 “for letters from him to the synagogues at Damascus” The Roman government had given limited authority to the Sanhedrin
to conduct and control events in the synagogues or related to Jewish life in the Empire (cf. I Macc. 15:16-21 or Josephus, Antiq.
14.10.2). Judaism was a recognized, legal religion of the Greco-Roman world.
Apparently these were letters of extradition for the Jewish Christians who had fled Jerusalem in the face of the Jewish
persecution (cf. 9:14,21; 22:5; 26:10).
▣ “if” This is a third class conditional sentence meaning potential action.
▣ “The Way” This was the early designation for believers (cf. 19:9,23; 22:4; 24:14,22 and possibly 18:25,26). It has an OT
background, speaking of lifestyle faith (cf. Ps. 1:1; 16:11; 119:105; 139:24; Pro. 4:10-19). Jesus uses this concept in Matt. 7:14
and uses the title for Himself in John 14:6. Christianity is a personal encounter followed by a daily relationship.
▣ “women” The mention of women three times amidst the groups that Paul persecuted is a way to show the intensity of Paul’s
actions (cf. 8:3; 22:4). Luke has a special concern for women!
9:3 “Damascus” This was an ancient city and capital of the Roman Province of Syria just north/northeast of Galilee. It was 150
miles from Jerusalem.
▣ “and suddenly” This term also has the connotation of “unexpectedly.”
▣ “a light from heaven” Paul relates his experience with this light differently in his three accounts of his experience in Acts
1. “a light from heaven flashed around him” (9:3)
2. “a very bright light suddenly flashed from heaven all around me” (22:6)
3. “I saw on the way a light from heaven, brighter than the sun, shining all around me” (26:13)
Paul vividly remembers this event! It is just possible that this light is theologically/physically related to the Shekinah glory
of YHWH’s presence with Israel during the Wilderness Wandering Period. The Hebrew concept of “glory” takes on an aspect
of bright light from this historical event (see Special Topic: Glory at 3:13). This light would have showed Saul the rabbi that this
was the personal presence of God.
9:4 “heard a voice” This heavenly voice was something Judaism was familiar with. It is known as a bath kol. This provided
a means for the Jews to receive information and/or confirmation from God (during the interbiblical period between the closing
of Malachi [or Chronicles] and the beginning of the ministry of John the Baptist). This form of revelation was necessary because
there were no inspired prophets during this period.
▣ “Saul, Saul” In Hebrew this repeating of the name was a way to show intensity.
▣ “why are you persecuting Me” This is extremely significant theologically because it shows the continuity and intimacy
between Jesus and His church (cf. Matt. 10:40; 25:40,45). Paul was persecuting the Church, but Jesus took it personally. From
Acts 26:14 we know that Jesus spoke to Paul in Aramaic.
It is also theologically significant that Christianity is both a person (Jesus) and a group (church). The corporate metaphors
used in the NT for the church are:
1. body
2. family
3. building
4. saints
All emphasize the corporate nature of faith (cf. I Cor. 12:7). It starts individually, but moves to the group (conscientiousness
and concern). This individual corporality can be seen in Paul’s discussion of Adam and Christ in Rom. 5:12-21. The One is part
of the all; the One can affect the all (cf. Joshua 7).
9:5a “Who are You, Lord” What did Paul imply by the use of “Lord”?
1. sir, title of respect (ex. John 4:11)
2. YHWH, translated by Lord in the OT (ex. Gen. 2:4)
If surprise is the focus, then possibly #1 applies, but if the light from heaven denotes an action of God, then #2 is the case.
If #2, then suddenly Paul’s rabbinical theology is challenged. What a confusing and frightful time this must have been! See
Special Topic: Names for Deity at 1:6.
9:5b-6b These verses are not found in any early Greek manuscripts. They are found in only one Latin family of manuscripts.
Erasmus, translating from the Vulgate, put them in his first edition of the Greek New Testament in 1516. These words are found
in Acts 26:14. Their inclusion here shows a tendency of scribes to make parallels uniform and full of all details.
9:5 “I am Jesus whom you are persecuting” Paul is claiming to have seen the Glorified Christ (cf. Acts 22:14; I Cor. 9:1; 15:8-9). Paul will later understand this experience as an integral part of his call to be the Apostle to the Gentiles.
The crucified carpenter from Nazareth is the glorified Messiah!
9:6 This verse is explained in detail in vv. 10-19.
▣ “must do” See full note on dei at 1:16.
9:7 “The men who traveled with him” This possibly refers to
1. the Temple police accompanying Paul
2. other Jewish zealots, probably from Hellenistic synagogues
3. other theological students from Jerusalem
▣ “hearing the voice but seeing no one” There is a seeming discrepancy between 9:7 and 22:9 in the details of this event.
There have been several theories how to deal with it:
1. It is a matter of syntax. The verb “to hear” can take a genitive (9:7) or an accusative (22:9). These different forms
have different implications or connotations. The NRSV, in a footnote, has “The Greek suggests that his companions
heard the sound of the voice, but not the words spoken.”
2. Others say it is similar to John 12:29-30 about Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem and the voice from heaven.
3. Others say that it is Paul’s voice that is being referred to, not Jesus’. They heard Paul speaking, but they did not hear
Jesus speaking.
4. Others say this is similar to the Synoptic problem. Different Gospel writers record the same events, sermons, and
actions of Jesus in differing ways, which is different eyewitness accounts.
9:8 “though his eyes were open, he could see nothing” Paul apparently had eye problems from this point on (cf. Gal. 4:13-15;
6:11). I, personally, believe Paul’s “thorn in the flesh” (cf. II Cor. 12:7-10; Gal. 4:13-15; 6:11) was Oriental ophthalmia, possibly
caused by this experience. There is irony here; Paul experiences a reorientation. He thought he could see (physically and
spiritually, cf. John 9), but he found out that he was blind. After this encounter with Christ he was physically blinded for a period,
but his spiritual eyes were wide open!
9:9 “And he was three days without sight” This is a periphrastic imperfect. Some commentators see this as the occasion
of Paul’s vision of heaven recorded in II Cor. 12:1-4.
▣ “and neither ate nor drank” Paul was fasting and praying (cf. v. 11). What a reorientation must have been occurring in Paul’s
mind (theology) and heart (desire)! He was beginning the transformation from persecutor of the gospel to proclaimer of the
gospel!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 9:10-19a
10Now there was a disciple at Damascus named Ananias; and the Lord said to him in a vision, “Ananias.” And he
said, “Here I am, Lord.” 11And the Lord said to him, “Get up and go to the street called Straight, and inquire at the house
of Judas for a man from Tarsus named Saul, for he is praying, 12and he has seen in a vision a man named Ananias come
in and lay his hands on him, so that he might regain his sight.” 13But Ananias answered, “Lord, I have heard from many
about this man, how much harm he did to Your saints at Jerusalem; 14and here he has authority from the chief priests
to bind all who call on Your name.” 15But the Lord said to him, “Go, for he is a chosen instrument of Mine, to bear My
name before the Gentiles and kings and the sons of Israel; 16for I will show him how much he must suffer for My name’s
sake.” 17So Ananias departed and entered the house, and after laying his hands on him said, “Brother Saul, the Lord
Jesus, who appeared to you on the road by which you were coming, has sent me so that you may regain your sight and
be filled with the Holy Spirit.” 18And immediately there fell from his eyes something like scales, and he regained his sight,
and he got up and was baptized; 19and he took food and was strengthened.
9:10 “Ananias” This name means “YHWH is gracious.” Apparently he was a believing Jew of good reputation, not a refugee
(cf. 22:12).
▣ “Here I am, Lord” This is a Jewish idiom of availability (cf. Isa. 6:8). Verse 11 was obviously given verbally because it is
very specific instruction.
9:12 “he has seen in a vision a man named Ananias” “In a vision” is not in the ancient Greek manuscripts P74, א, and A, but
it is in MSS B and C. The UBS4 put the shorter reading in the text but gives it a “C” rating (with difficulty in deciding). This
verse shows that Ananias’ coming, actions, and message were confirming Jesus’ earlier words to Paul (cf. v. 6)
▣ “lay his hands on hin” See Special Topic at 6:6.
9:13 “I have heard from many” Obviously Ananias had heard the bad reports about Paul’s vicious persecution of believers from
the Jewish refugees from Jerusalem.
▣ “Your saints” The term hagioi is related to the Greek word “holy” (hagios). The OT background (kadosh) relates to some
thing, some person, or some place set apart by God for a special task. The term “saints” is always plural, except one time in Phil.
4:21, but even there it is in a plural context. To be a Christian is to be a part of a family, a community. There are no loners in
the faith.
SPECIAL TOPIC: SAINTS
This is the Greek equivalent of the Hebrew kadosh (BDB 871), which has the basic meaning of setting some one, some thing,
or some place apart for YHWH’s exclusive use (BDB 871). It denotes the English concept of “the sacred.” YHWH is set apart
from humanity by His nature (eternal non-created Spirit) and His character (moral perfection). He is the standard by which all
else is measured and judged. He is the transcendent, Holy One, Holy Other.
God created humans for fellowship, but the fall (Genesis 3) caused a relational and moral barrier between a Holy God and
sinful humanity. God chose to restore His conscious creation; therefore, He calls on His people to be “holy” (cf. Lev. 11:44; 19:2;
20:7,26; 21:8). By a faith relationship with YHWH His people become holy by their covenantal position in Him, but are also
called on to live holy lives (cf. Matt. 5:48).
This holy living is possible because believers are fully accepted and forgiven through Jesus’ life and work and the presence
of the Holy Spirit in their minds and hearts. This establishes the paradoxical situation of:
1. being holy because of Christ’s imputed righteousness
2. called to live holy because of the presence of the Spirit
Believers are “saints” (hagioi) because of
1. the will of the Holy One (the Father, cf. John 6:29,40)
2. the work of the Holy Son (Jesus, cf. II Cor. 5:21)
3. the indwelling presence of the Holy Spirit (cf. Rom. 8:9-11)
The NT always refers to saints as plural (except one time in Phil. 4:21, but even then the context makes it plural). To
be saved is to be part of a family, a body, a building! Biblical faith starts with a personal reception, but issues into a corporate
fellowship. We are each gifted (cf. I Cor. 12:11) for the health, growth, and well-being of the body of Christ—the church (cf. I
Cor. 12:7). We are saved to serve! Holiness is a family characteristic!
9:14 “the chief priests” In the OT the high priesthood was for life and was passed on to a special family of Levite’s son (cf. Lev.
8-10). However, during the Roman period this position was purchased from the Roman officials. Therefore, there were several
High Priests within the Sadducean family of Annas.
▣ “who call on Your name” This phrase has important theological implications. Luke uses it several times in Acts for
1. someone addressing Jesus (cf. 7:59)
2. someone who has accepted Jesus as Savior (cf. 9:14,21)
3. an OT quote from Amos 9:12, where it refers to someone upon whom YHWH’s name is called (i.e., believers, cf.
15:17)
4. A way for someone to publicly affirm his faith in Jesus (cf. 22:16)
This phrase is also part of Paul’s plea to Israel from Joel 2:32 in Rom. 10:9-13 (cf. II Tim. 2:22). Peter uses this same
passage (Joel 2:28-32) in his Pentecost sermon and invited those present to “call upon the name of the Lord” from Joel 2:32.
The name stands for the person. By invoking the name sinners beseech Jesus to act on their behalf and include them in His
family. See Special Topic at 2:22.
9:15 “Go” This is a present middle (deponent) imperative. Jesus authoritatively sends the reluctant Ananias to Saul.
▣ “for he is a chosen instrument of Mine” Oh, the greatness of the grace and election of God! Paul does not fit the evangelical
model of voluntary, volitional conversion. He was dramatically drafted!
▣
NASB, NKJV “before the Gentiles”
NRSV, NJB “to bring my name before Gentiles”
TEV “to make my name known to Gentiles”
What a startling statement for a Jew to be told (cf. Eph. 3:7)! Yet, this has always been God’s plan (cf. Gen. 12:3; Exod.
19:5-6; Eph. 2:11-3:13, see Special Topic at 1:8). Israel was only an instrument to reach the world, made in the image of God
(cf. Gen. 1:26-27), but fallen (cf. Gen. 3:15).
▣ “and kings” Paul spoke to governmental leaders, small and great, and finally to Caesar!
▣ “and the sons of Israel” Paul’s regular missionary pattern was to preach first at the local synagogue (cf. Rom. 1:16) in every
city. This allowed the Jews and the God-fearers who knew the OT a chance to respond first to the gospel. Then he would turn
to the pagans.
9:16 “for I will show him how much he must suffer for My name’s sake” Suffering is not the exception, but the norm for
Christians in a fallen world (cf. Matt. 5:10-12; John 15:18-21; 16:1-2; 17:14; Acts 14:22; Rom. 5:3-4; 8:17-18; II Cor. 4:7-12;
6:3-10; 11:24-33; Phil. 1:29; I Thess. 3:3; II Tim. 3:12; James 1:2-4; I Peter 4:12-16).
There is a theological relationship between the sufferings of Christ and the sufferings of His followers in this fallen realm.
The book of I Peter shows this parallel.
1. Jesus’ suffering, 1:11; 2:21,23; 3:18; 4:1,13; 5:1
2. His followers’, 1:6-7; 2:19; 3:13-17; 4:1,12-19; 5:9-10
If the world rejected Him it will reject His (cf. John 7:7; 15:18-19; 17:14).
9:17 “and after laying his hands on him” There is no scriptural basis for the concept of “apostolic authority” in bestowing
spiritual gifts. Ananias is an unknown lay believer in Damascus who becomes
1. God’s spokesman and an agent in
2. Paul’s being the filled with the Holy Spirit (cf. v. 17)
3. Paul’s physical healing (cf. v. 18)
4. Paul’s baptism (cf. v. 18)
▣ “Brother Saul” What a great example of obedience and love!
9:18 “there fell from his eyes something like scales” This is a technical medical term for the flaking of skin from a wound Luke
uses to describe what happened to Paul’s eyes in this moment of healing. The word scales is used of fish scales in the Septuagint
(cf. Lev. 11:9,10,12; Deut. 14:9). The metaphorical extension can be seen in Num. 16:38, where it is used of flattened metal
plates. In this context they were probably flakes of skin or crust which oozed from Paul’s eyes.
▣ “was baptized” Ananias apparently also baptized Paul (cf. 8:36,38). NT baptism was an act of obedience to Jesus’ example
(cf. Matt. 3:13-17; Mark 1:9-11; Luke 3:21-22) and command (cf. Matt. 28:19.) It marks a change of ownership and allegiance.
9:19a “he took food and was strengthened” Paul had been fasting and praying since the light knocked him to the ground (cf.
v. 9). After a three day total fast (no food or water), he must have been very weak.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 9:19b-22
19bNow for several days he was with the disciples who were at Damascus, 20and immediately he began to proclaim
Jesus in the synagogues, saying, “He is the Son of God.” 21All those hearing him continued to be amazed, and were saying,
“Is this not he who in Jerusalem destroyed those who called on this name, and who had come here for the purpose of
bringing them bound before the chief priests?” 22But Saul kept increasing in strength and confounding the Jews who lived
at Damascus by proving that this Jesus is the Christ.
9:20 “he began to proclaim Jesus in the synagogues” This is an imperfect active indicative. It can mean (1) the beginning
of an action or (2) repeated action. What irony! He came earlier with a letter from the High Priests in Jerusalem to the synagogues
in Damascus to persecute the followers of Jesus and now he came to the same synagogues preaching Jesus as the Messiah (cf. v
21).
▣ “‘He is the Son of God’” This is the only use of the title “Son of God” in the book of Acts (except for the quote of Ps. 2:7 in
Acts 13:33). Its OT background reflects its significance: (1) the nation of Israel (cf. Hos. 11:1); (2) the King of Israel (cf. II Sam.
7:14); and (3) the Messiah (cf. Matt. 2:15). Paul’s strict monotheism (see Special Topic at 2:39) is being redefined!
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE SON OF GOD
This is one of the major NT titles for Jesus. It surely has divine connotations. It included Jesus as “the Son” or “My Son”
and God addressed as “Father.” It occurs in the NT over 124 times. Even Jesus’ self-designation as “Son of Man” has a divine
connotation from Dan. 7:13-14.
In the OT the designation “son” could refer to four specific groups.
1. angels (usually in the plural, cf. Gen. 6:2; Job 1:6; 2:1)
2. the King of Israel (cf. II Sam. 7:14; Ps. 2:7; 89:26-27)
3. the nation of Israel as a whole (cf. Exod. 4:22-23; Deut. 14:1; Hos. 11:1; Mal. 2:10)
4. Israeli judges (cf. Ps. 82:6)
It is the second usage that is linked to Jesus. In this way “son of David” and “son of God” both relate to II Samuel 7; Psalm
2 and 89. In the OT “son of God” is never used specifically of the Messiah, except as the eschatological king as one of the
“anointed offices” of Israel. However, in the Dead Sea Scrolls the title with Messianic implications is common (see specific
references in Dictionary of Jesus and the Gospels, p. 770). Also “Son of God” is a Messianic title in two interbiblical Jewish
apocalyptic works (cf. II Esdras 7:28; 13:32,37,52; 14:9 and I Enoch 105:2).
Its NT background as it refers to Jesus is best summarized by several categories.
1. His pre-existence (cf. John 1:1-18)
2. His unique (virgin) birth (cf. Matt. 1:23; Luke 1:31-35)
3. His baptism (cf. Matt. 3:17; Mark 1:11; Luke 3:22. God’s voice from heaven unites the royal king of Psalm 2 with
the suffering servant of Isaiah 53).
4. His satanic temptation (cf. Matt. 4:1-11; Mark 1:12,13; Luke 4:1-13. He is tempted to doubt His sonship or at least
to accomplish its purpose by different means than the cross).
5. His affirmation by unacceptable confessors
a. demons (cf. Mark 1:23-25; Luke 4:31-37,41; Mark 3:11-12; 5:7)
b. unbelievers (cf. Matt. 27:43; Mark 14:61; John 19:7)
6. His affirmation by His disciples
a. Matt. 14:33; 16:16
b. John 1:34,49; 6:69; 11:27
7. His self affirmation
a. Matthew 11:25-27
b. John 10:36
8. His use of the familial metaphor of God as Father
a. His use of “abba” for God
1) Mark 14:36
2) Romans 8:15
3) Galatians 4:6
b. His recurrent use of Father (patēr) to describe His relationship to deity
In summary, the title “Son of God” had great theological meaning for those who knew the OT and its promises and
categories, but the NT writers were nervous about its use with Gentiles because of their pagan background of “the gods” taking
women with the resulting offspring being “the titans” or “giants.”
9:21 This verse is in the form of a question which expects a “yes” answer.
▣ “destroyed” This is a rare and intense word meaning to ravage, lay waste to, or totally destroy. It is found only here and in
Gal. 1:13,23 in the NT and in IV Macc. 4:23. Paul was a vicious persecutor!
9:22
NASB “Saul kept increasing in strength”
NKJV “Saul increased all the more in strength”
NRSV “Saul became increasingly more powerful”
TEV “Saul’s preaching became even more powerful”
NJB “Saul’s power increased steadily”
This is an imperfect passive indicative. It took some time for Saul’s gifts and skills to develop. In context this refers to
Paul’s preaching and debating skills (cf. TEV).
▣ “confounding” This is an imperfect active indicative which denotes repeated action in past time. This is a compound term
from “together” (sun) and “pour” (cheō). This word is only found in Acts.
1. 2:6, bewildered
2. 9:22, confounded
3. 19:32, confusion
4. 21:27, stir up
5. 21:31, confusion
The Jews could not explain Paul’s conversion or his powerful preaching of Jesus as the promised OT Messiah.
▣ “proving” This word means to conclude (cf. Acts 16:10; 19:33) and by extension, to prove. Paul’s method was much like
Stephen’s. They both used OT passages and their fulfillment in the life of Jesus of Nazareth to prove that He was the Messiah
promised in the OT.
▣ “the Christ” This is a way of referring to the Messiah (Anointed One, Promised Coming One, see Special Topic at 2:31).
Many times in Acts the definite article precedes the noun (ex. 2:31,36; 3:18,20). Saul was asserting with power and conviction
that Jesus of Nazareth, killed in Jerusalem, was indeed God’s Son, the Messiah. If this was true, it changed everything for Jews
(and Gentiles)! They had misunderstood and rejected Him. They had missed God’s gift and remained in spiritual darkness and
need.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 9:23-25
23When many days had elapsed, the Jews plotted together to do away with him, 24but their plot became known to Saul.
They were also watching the gates day and night so that they might put him to death; 25but his disciples took him by night
and let him down through an opening in the wall, lowering him in a large basket.
9:23 “When many days had elapsed” We must take into account Paul’s personal account found in Gal. 1:15-24, where he spent
a long period of time in Arabia. In this context Arabia refers to the Nabataean kingdom (ruled by Aretas IV, who reigned from
9 b.c. to a.d. 40) just southeast of Damascus. The three-year period probably reflects somewhere close to eighteen months. Jews
counted part of a day as the whole day (cf. Matt. 26:61; 27:40,63); this reckoning was also used of years.
▣ “the Jews plotted together to do away with him” The Jews apparently stirred up the civil authorities (cf. II Cor. 11:32-33).
This must have been humiliating for Paul because he mentions this very event in his discussion of weakness in II Corinthians 11.
9:25 “through an opening in the wall” This must refer to a window in a private house whose back wall was part of the wall
surrounding the city (cf. II Cor. 11:33; Josh 2:15; I Sam. 19:12).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 9:26-30
26When he came to Jerusalem, he was trying to associate with the disciples; but they were all afraid of him, not
believing that he was a disciple. 27But Barnabas took hold of him and brought him to the apostles and described to them
how he had seen the Lord on the road, and that He had talked to him, and how at Damascus he had spoken out boldly in
the name of Jesus. 28And he was with them, moving about freely in Jerusalem, speaking out boldly in the name of the
Lord. 29And he was talking and arguing with the Hellenistic Jews; but they were attempting to put him to death. 30But
when the brethren learned of it, they brought him down to Caesarea and sent him away to Tarsus.
9:26 “he came to Jerusalem” This was apparently eighteen to thirty-six months later (cf. Gal. 1:15-24). This verse shows the
level of skepticism in which the Jerusalem believers held their former persecutor. Apparently Acts records several of Paul’s visits
to Jerusalem after his dramatic conversion.
1. 9:26, first visit
2. 11:30, relief visit
3. 12:25, after mission
4. 15:2, Jerusalem Council
5. 18:22, brief visit with the church
6. 21:17, visit with James and the elders and resulting Nazarite vow and arrest
9:27 “Barnabas” The popular meaning, though not etymological, was “son of encouragement.” This was the great saint
mentioned back in 4:36 who later became Paul’s first missionary companion. See full note and Special Topic at 4:36.
▣ “brought him to the apostles” The only other account is Galatians 1:18.
▣ “and described to them” Barnabas knew and shared Saul’s testimony. This opened the door to his acceptance (cf. v. 28).
9:28
NASB “moving about freely”
NKJV “coming in and going out”
NRSV “went in and out”
TEV “went all over”
NJB “to go around”
This is an OT idiom of everyday life or activity (cf. Num. 27:17; I Kgs. 3:7).
9:29 “he was talking and arguing with the Hellenistic Jews” This refers to the same group (synagogues of Greek-speaking
Jews in Jerusalem) who killed Stephen; now they are planning to kill Saul, who was also a Jew from the diaspora. They must have
thought Stephen had returned!
9:30 “when the brethren learned of it” From 22:17-21 we learn that Jesus appeared to Paul at this time to tell him to flee
Jerusalem. Jesus appeared to Paul several times during his ministry to encourage and guide him (cf. 18:9-11; 22:17-21; and an
angel of the Lord in 27:23).
▣ “Caesarea” This refers to the Roman seaport on the Mediterranean coast of Palestine. This was the official headquarters of
the Roman government in Palestine.
▣ “Tarsus” Paul is going to drop out of sight now for several years in his home town. Tarsus was a free city. It was also the
third largest center of learning in the ancient world, behind Alexandria and Athens. The universities in Tarsus emphasized
philosophy, rhetoric, and law. Paul was obviously trained both in Greek rhetoric and philosophy as well as rabbinical Judaism.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 9:31
31So the church throughout all Judea and Galilee and Samaria enjoyed peace, being built up; and going on in the fear
of the Lord and in the comfort of the Holy Spirit, it continued to increase.
9:31 This is a summary verse which concludes the account of Paul’s conversion and introduces the travels of Peter. Luke uses
these summary verses often in Acts. See Introduction IV Purpose and Structure, A.
▣ “the church” See note and Special Topic at 5:11 and notice how the singular “church” refers to many individual congregations.
The term “church” can denote a local church (ex. Col. 1:18,24; 4:15,16), all churches of an area (ex. Eph. 1:22; 3:10,21;
5:23,24,25,27,29,32), and all churches universally (ex. Matt. 16:18).
▣ Notice the items Luke chooses to mention.
1. peace in all churches
2. growing and increasing
3. comfort from the Spirit
What a change from the persecution of 8:1! There were still problems, but God had met every need!
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why was Paul so vehement in his persecution of the church?
2. Why are there three accounts of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts?
3. What is the significance of Paul being commissioned, laid-hands on, and baptized by Ananias?
4. What is the significance of Paul’s use of Jesus as “The Son of God”?
5. Why does Luke not record Paul’s three year excursion to Arabia?
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS TO 9:32-10:48
A. Although the book of Acts begins the transition from Peter to Paul, chapters 9:32-12:25 show the itinerant ministry of
Peter.
B. This section deals with Peter at Lydda, 9:32-35; Joppa, 9:36-43, 10:9-23; Caesarea, 10:1-8, 23-48; and at Jerusalem,
11:1-18; 12:1-17.
C. This section is extremely important because it deals with the continuing struggle over the Gentile mission and Peter’s
part (as head of the Apostolic group) in that struggle. Luke deems the Cornelius account so important as to repeat it
three times in this section.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 9:32-35
32Now as Peter was traveling through all those regions, he came down also to the saints who lived at Lydda. 33There
he found a man named Aeneas, who had been bedridden eight years, for he was paralyzed. 34Peter said to him, “Aeneas,
Jesus Christ heals you; get up and make your bed.” Immediately he got up. 35And all who lived at Lydda and Sharon saw
him, and they turned to the Lord.
9:32 “Peter was traveling” Apparently the Apostles were preaching throughout Palestine and in neighboring countries.
▣ “the saints” This term is used in the book of Acts to describe the church. See Special Topic: Saints at 9:13. The term
“disciples” is gradually replaced by the term “saints.” The term is related to the OT word “holy” and means, “set apart” for God’s
service. It is never used in the singular except one time in Phil. 4:21, which is a corporate context. This shows that to be a saint
means to be “in community.” See Special Topic at 9:13. All believers are called “saints” in the NT! It is our position in Christ
that is being emphasized.
SPECIAL TOPIC: SANCTIFICATION
The NT asserts that when sinners turn to Jesus in repentance and faith, they are instantaneously justified and sanctified. This
is their new position in Christ. His righteousness has been imputed to them (cf. Romans 4). They are declared right and holy (a
forensic act of God).
But the NT also urges believers on to holiness or sanctification. It is both a theological position in the finished work of Jesus
Christ and a call to be Christlike in attitude and actions in daily life. As salvation is a free gift and a cost-everything lifestyle, so
too, is sanctification.
Initial Response A Progressive Christlikeness
Acts 20:32; 26:18 Romans 6:19
Romans 15:16 II Corinthians 7:1
I Corinthians 1:2-3; 6:11 Ephesians 1:4; 2:10
II Thessalonians 2:13 I Thessalonians 3:13; 4:3-4,7; 5:23
Hebrews 2:11; 10:10,14; 13:12 I Timothy 2:15
I Peter 1:2 II Timothy 2:21
Hebrews 12:14
I Peter 1:15-16
▣ “Lydda” The town of Lydda was located on the trade route from Babylon to Egypt. In the OT it was known as “Lod” (cf.
I Chr. 8:12). It was about eleven miles inland from the Mediterranean Sea. This is the same area visited by Philip in chapter 8:40.
9:33 “a man named Aeneas” His Greek name means “praise.” Whether he is a believer or unbeliever is uncertain, but
apparently Peter is revisiting the established churches started by Philip.
▣ “who had been bedridden eight years, for he was paralyzed” This translation is the most common interpretation of this
Greek phrase (NASB, NKJV, NRSV, TEV, NJB). However, the Greek phrase can mean “since eight years old” (cf. Newman
and Nida, A Translator’s Handbook on The Acts of the Apostles, p. 199).
9:34 “Jesus Christ heals you” There is no article here, which implies that these two terms had become a common designation.
This is a literary form known as an aoristic present, which means “this instant the Messiah is healing you.”
▣ “get up and make your bed” These are two aorist active imperatives showing intensity and urgency!
▣ “Immediately he got up” This shows the man’s faith in response to Peter’s message about Jesus.
9:35 “all who lived at Lydda” This is a good example of a hyperbolic use of the term “all” in the Bible (cf. Gen. 41:37; Deut.
2:25; Luke 2:1; Rom. 11:26).
▣ “Sharon” This refers to the northern coastal plain in Palestine. It is about thirty miles in length running from Joppa to
Caesarea.
▣ “and they turned to the Lord” The word “turn to” may reflect the OT word for repentance (shub). It implies turning from
sin and self (repentance) and turning to (faith) the Lord (cf. 11:21).
This little summary statement is included several times in this section, showing the great movement of the Spirit of God
through Peter and later through Paul. This miraculous event opened the door for the proclamation of the gospel.
SPECIAL TOPIC: REPENTANCE IN THE OLD TESTAMENT
This concept is crucial but difficult to define. Most of us have a definition which comes from our denominational affiliation.
However, usually a “set” theological definition is imposed on several Hebrew (and Greek) words which do not specifically imply
this “set” definition. It must be remembered that NT authors (except Luke) were Hebrew thinkers using Koine Greek terms, so
the place to start is the Hebrew terms themselves, of which there are primarily two.
1. nhm ( BDB 636, KB 688)
2. swb ( BDB 996, KB 1427)
The first, nhm, which originally seems to have meant to draw a deep breath, is used in several senses.
a. “rest” or “comfort” (e.g., Gen. 5:29; 24:67; 27:42; 37:35; 38:12; 50:2; often used in names, cf.
II Kgs. 15:14; I Chr. 4:19; Neh. 1:1; 7:7; Nahum 1:1)
b. “grieved” (e.g., Gen. 6:6,7)
c. “changed mind” (e.g., Exod. 13:17; 32:12,14; Num. 23:19)
d. “compassion” (e.g., Deut. 32:36)
Notice that all of these involve deep emotion! Here is the key: deep feelings that lead to action. This change of action is
often directed at other persons, but also toward God. It is this change of attitude and action toward God that infuses this term with
such theological significance. But here care must be exercised. God is said to “repent” (cf. Gen. 6:6,7; Exod. 32:14; Jdgs. 2:18;
I Sam. 15:11,35; Ps. 106:45), but this does not result from sorrow over sin or error, but a literary way of showing God’s
compassion and care (cf. Num. 23:19; I Sam. 15:29; Ps. 110:4; Jer. 4:27-28; Ezek.24:14). Due punishment for sin and rebellion
is forgiven if the sinner truly turns away from his/her/their sin and turns to God.
This term has a wide semantical field. Context is crucial in determining its intended meaning.
The second term, swb, means “to turn” (turn from, turn back, turn to). If it is true that the two covenant requirements are
“repentance” and “faith” (e.g., Matt. 3:2; 4:17; Mark 1:4,15; 2:17; Luke 3:3,8; 5:32; 13:3,5; 15:7; 17:3), then nhm refers to the
intense feelings of recognizing one’s sin and turning from it, while swb would refer to the turning from sin to the turning to God
(one example of these two spiritual actions is Amos 4:6-11, “you have not returned to Me” [five times] and Amos 5:4,6,14, “seek
Me. . .seek the Lord. . .seek good and not evil”).
The first great example of the power of repentance is David’s sin with Bathsheba (cf. II Samuel 12; Psalm 32,51). There
were continuing consequences for David, his family, and Israel, but David was restored to fellowship with God! Even wicked
Manasseh can repent and be forgiven (cf. II Chr. 33:12-13).
Both of these terms are used in parallel in Ps. 90:13. There must be a recognition of sin and a purposeful, personal turning
from it, as well as a desire to seek God and His righteousness (cf. Isa. 1:16-20). Repentance has a cognitive aspect, a personal
aspect, and a moral aspect. All three are required, both to start a new relationship with God and to maintain the new relationship.
The deep emotion of regret turns into an abiding devotion to God and for God!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 9:36-43
36Now in Joppa there was a disciple named Tabitha (which translated in Greek is called Dorcas); this woman was
abounding with deeds of kindness and charity which she continually did. 37And it happened at that time that she fell sick
and died; and when they had washed her body, they laid it in an upper room. 38Since Lydda was near Joppa, the disciples,
having heard that Peter was there, sent two men to him, imploring him, “Do not delay in coming to us.” 39So Peter arose
and went with them. When he arrived, they brought him into the upper room; and all the widows stood beside him,
weeping and showing all the tunics and garments that Dorcas used to make while she was with them. 40But Peter sent them
all out and knelt down and prayed, and turning to the body, he said, “Tabitha, arise.” And she opened her eyes, and when
she saw Peter, she sat up. 41And he gave her his hand and raised her up; and calling the saints and widows, he presented
her alive. 42It became known all over Joppa, and many believed in the Lord. 43And Peter stayed many days in Joppa with
a tanner named Simon.
9:36 “Joppa” Today this town is known as Jaffa (Yafo). It was the ancient seaport for Jerusalem. Today it is part of the modern
city of Tel Aviv-Yafo.
▣ “disciple” The term “disciple” is used quite often in this section of Acts. It literally means “learner,” but is used in the sense
of believer.
▣ “Tabitha. . .Dorcas” This lady’s Aramaic name was Tabitha; her Greek name was Dorcas. Most Jews who had social or
commercial contact with non-Jews had two names, an Aramaic one and a Greek one. Both of these names mean “gazelle,” a
symbol of grace and beauty (cf. Song of Songs 2:9, 17; 4:5; 7:3).
▣ “with deeds of kindness and charity” This refers to Jewish alms-giving. This was a Jewish concept of weekly donations that
developed in the Synagogue for the care of the needy Jewish people in the community. It was considered spiritually important
by the Jews of Jesus’ day. The church followed this pattern (cf. Acts 6). See Special Topic at 3:2.
▣ “which she continually did” This is an imperfect active indicative. This speaks of habitual action in past time.
9:37 “they had washed her body, they laid it in an upper room” The washing of the body was typical of the Jewish
preparation for burial. In Jerusalem a body had to be buried the same day one died, but outside of Jerusalem, burial could be
delayed for three days. See Special Topic at 5:6.
9:38 “sent two men to him” These believers had heard of great miracles done by God through Peter and they believed that he
could do something for this great Jewish Christian lady.
9:39 “and all the widows stood beside him” Apparently they were wearing the clothes that Dorcas had made for them of two
different kinds: (1) the inner undergarments and (2) the outward cloaks.
9:40 “But Peter sent them all out” This is literally “threw them out.” This is exactly what Jesus did in Mark 5:40. In fact, there
are great similarities between the miracles performed in this section and the miracles performed in Jesus’ lifetime. Jesus’ ministry
is the only model the Apostles had.
The question is, “Why did Peter want all of them to leave the room?” Jesus did this because He did not want to be known
as a healer only and the gospel was not yet complete. But why did Peter do this? It seems that these miracles opened the door
of faith, so it would seem he would want as many as possible to view it.
▣ “knelt down” The usual position for Jewish prayer was standing with the arms and eyes raised to heaven. However, in the
Book of Acts, it is recorded several times that the disciples knelt down to pray. This apparently was for emphasis (cf. 7:60; 20:36;
21:5), as it was with Jesus in the Garden of Gethsemane (cf. Luke 22:41).
▣ “‘Tabitha, arise’” Apparently he was speaking Aramaic. Jesus and the Jews in Palestine of the first century all spoke Aramaic,
not Hebrew. This is true even as far back as Ezra-Nehemiah (cf. Neh. 8:4-8).
9:41 “saints” See Special Topic: Saints at 9:13.
9:42 “and many believed in the Lord” This is another summary statement that shows the great results of Peter’s miracles and
preaching ministry. See Special Topics at 2:40 and 3:16.
9:43 “Peter stayed many days in Joppa with a tanner named Simon” Peter’s Jewish legalism must have been breaking down
already for him to stay with a ceremonially unclean tanner (had to deal with dead animal skins) such as Simon.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are
meant to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why is the conversion of Paul recorded three times in Acts?
2. Why are the three accounts of Paul’s conversion slightly different?
3. How much choice did Paul have in his conversion? Is his experience to be seen as normative?
4. Why did the Hellenistic Jews try to kill Paul?
5. If Peter and Paul used miracles to open the door for the gospel, why does God not use that method more today?
ACTS 10
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Peter and Cornelius |
Cornelius Sends a |
The Conversion of |
Peter and Cornelius |
Peter Visits a Roman |
10:1-8 |
10:1-8 |
10:1-8 |
10:1-3 |
10:1-2 |
|
|
|
|
10:3-8 |
|
|
|
10:4a |
|
|
Peter’s Vision |
|
10:4b-8 |
|
10:9-16 |
10:9-16 |
10:9-16 |
10:9-13 |
10:9-16 |
|
|
|
10:14 |
|
|
Summons to Caesarea |
|
10:15-16 |
|
10:17-23a |
10:17-23 |
10:17-23a |
10:17-18 |
10:17-23a |
|
|
|
10:19-21 |
|
|
|
|
10:22-23a |
|
10:23b-33 |
Peter Meets Cornelius |
10:23b-29 |
10:23b-29 |
10:23b-33 |
|
10:24-33 |
|
|
|
|
|
10:30-33 |
10:30-33 |
|
Peter Speaks in Cornelius’ |
Preaching to Cornelius’ |
|
Peter’s Speech |
Peter’s Address in the |
10:34-43 |
10:34-43 |
10:34-43 |
10:34-43 |
10:34-35 |
|
|
|
|
10:36-43 |
Gentiles Receive the Holy |
The Holy Spirit Falls on |
|
The Gentiles Welcome the |
Baptism of the First |
10:44-48 |
10:44-48 |
10:44-48 |
10:44-48 |
10:44-48 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
A. The gospel is breaking out of its Jewish origins.
1. Cornelius – a Roman military God-fearer
2. the Ethiopian Eunuch – a Gentile God-fearer
B. The work of the Greek-speaking Jews (the seven of Acts 6) is having an influence.
C. The repeat of the Pentecostal experience shows God’s acceptance of all people.
1. Samaritans (chapter 8)
2. Romans (chapter 10)
3. Ethiopian (chapter 8)
D. The theological stage is being set for the Jerusalem Council of chapter 15. A watershed of universal gospel availability
has been reached!
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 10:1-8
1Now there was a man at Caesarea named Cornelius, a centurion of what was called the Italian cohort, 2a devout man
and one who feared God with all his household, and gave many alms to the Jewish people and prayed to God continually.
3About the ninth hour of the day he clearly saw in a vision an angel of God who had just come in and said to him,
“Cornelius!” 4And fixing his gaze on him and being much alarmed, he said, “What is it, Lord?” And he said to him,
“Your prayers and alms have ascended as a memorial before God. 5Now dispatch some men to Joppa and send for a man
named Simon, who is also called Peter; 6he is staying with a tanner named Simon, whose house is by the sea.” 7When the
angel who was speaking to him had left, he summoned two of his servants and a devout soldier of those who were his
personal attendants, 8and after he had explained everything to them, he sent them to Joppa.
10:1 “there was a man at Caesarea” The conversion of Cornelius was a major event. However, it must be remembered that
he was not the first social barrier the gospel had overcome.
1. The first was the Samaritans
2. then there was the Ethiopian Eunuch who also was possibly a God-fearer
3. then Cornelius, who was not only a Gentile, but a Roman army officer who was part of the military occupation of the
Promised Land
The emphasis of this account is not so much on Cornelius’ conversion because he was already a God-fearer, like the Ethiopian
Eunuch, but the large number of relatives and friends, mentioned in vv. 1,24,27,44,48, who were also saved. Peter refers to this
account at the Jerusalem Council in Acts 15:7-9 and sets the stage for the Gentile mission of the Church.
▣ “Cornelius” Footnote 1 in F. F. Bruce’s Commentary on the Book of the Acts, p. 214, has “Cornelius was an especially
common name in Rome ever since Publius Cornelius Sulla in 82 b.c. liberated 10,000 slaves who were enrolled in the gens
Cornelia, to which he belonged.” A gens was a clan or group of families who shared a common name and a belief in a common
ancestor or hero (as here).
▣ “a centurion” Centurions are mentioned several times in the NT and always in a favorable light (cf. Matt. 8:5; Luke 7:2;
23:47; Acts 10:1; 22:5; 27:3; etc). Technically they were leaders of a hundred men; however, they were noncommissioned
officers, something like our sergeant majors.
▣ “called the Italian cohort” Usually a Roman cohort is made up of 600 men. This particular one was made up of a thousand
Roman volunteers who were stationed in Syria. We know from historical evidence that they were called an auxiliary cohort.
Possibly they were archers. Roman troops had to be stationed in Palestine because of the rebelliousness of the Jews.
10:2 “a devout man” There is a threefold description of this man’s devotion:
1. he revered God (see note at v. 22) with all his households
2. he was always liberal in his many deeds of charity to the people
3. he had the habit of praying to God (cf. v. 22; 13:16,26).
This man was religiously, emotionally, and socially linked to the synagogue, although he was not a full convert. To be a full
convert one had to
1. be circumcised if a male
2. baptize himself in the presence of witnesses
3. if possible, offer a sacrifice in the Temple.
These requirements prevented many interested Gentiles from becoming full proselytes.
▣ “with all his household” This is the first mention of a family as a religious unit which we find often in the Book of Acts (cf.
Acts 10:2; 11:14; 16:15, 31; 18:8). It shows the cultural context that the faith of the father was always the faith of the household
and even of the extended family which would include servants.
▣ “many alms” This refers to almsgiving. To Jewish people this would show that Cornelius was an active part of the local
synagogue and apparently a God-fearer. See Special Topic: Alms Giving at 3:2.
▣ “prayed to God continually” There are three present participles here, denoting continuing action which shows Cornelius’
piety.
1. fearing, Present middle (deponent)
2. doing alms, present active
3. praying, present middle (deponent)
This man’s devotion was daily and personal. He was doing the two things which rabbinical Judaism honored
most—almsgiving and prayer.
10:3 “About the ninth hour” This refers to the time of the evening offering (i.e., 3 p.m., cf. Exod. 29:39, 41; Num. 28:3-31;
I Kgs. 18:29-36; Ps. 55:17; 141:2; Dan. 6:10; Josephus Antiq. 11.4.1; Wars 1.1.1). This was a traditional time for prayer.
▣
NASB, NRSV,
TEV “clearly saw”
NKJV “saw clearly”
NJB, NIV “distinctly saw”
In the Gospels the adverb phanerōs means to openly or publicly make an appearance (cf. Mark 1:45; John 7:10). This
vision came in daylight hours and was very specific and distinct.
▣ “in a vision an angel of God” In some ways this conversion is like Saul’s. This person was a devoutly religious man. God
sends a supernatural agent to direct him to faith. Who could say “No”? These conversions are a sign of God’s choice, not human
free will. These people are responding to overwhelming evidence and experience of the reality of the gospel.
10:4 The angel’s message contains two sacrificial terms: “ascended”and “memorial before God.” Apparently God accepted this
man’s worship (i.e., prayers and almsgiving) even before he heard the gospel.
▣ “fixing his gaze on him” See note at 1:10.
▣ “‘What is it, Lord’” It is very difficult to know how to translate this term Lord. It can mean (1) “mister” or “sir” or (2) “Lord”
in a theological sense of master/owner/sovereign. Another good NT passage which shows the ambiguity is John 4:1,11,15,19,49.
In Acts there is even an added possibility. Cornelius addresses the angel as Lord (cf. Rev. 7:14) and Peter addresses “the
voice” (cf. 10:13,15) as Lord (cf. 10:14). Therefore, the term could refer to any supernatural, personal manifestation, with
reference specifically to Jesus. In 8:26 and 29 an angel of the Lord is identified with the Spirit. This same fluidity and
transference occurs between “the voice” and the Spirit in 10:13,14,15 and 19,20.
10:5 “Now dispatch some men to Joppa” This is an aorist middle (deponent) imperative. Notice the angel did not share
the gospel, but sent for Peter. God uses human instruments (cf. Exod. 3:7-10). This man, though a devout, sincere religionist (like
Saul), needed to hear and respond to the gospel of Jesus Christ.
10:7 “he summoned two of his servants and a devout soldier” This makes a party of three; however, in verse 19 only two of
them are mentioned. Possibly the soldier was a guard and the two household servants spoke.
10:8 Cornelius involved his family and friends in his faith. This man lived out what he believed. A whole community would come
to faith in Christ through him.
These three men must have walked through the night and wondered and discussed the angel’s message and their master and
friend’s faith.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 10:9-16
9On the next day, as they were on their way and approaching the city, Peter went up on the housetop about the sixth
hour to pray. 10But he became hungry and was desiring to eat; but while they were making preparations, he fell into a
trance; 11and he saw the sky opened up, and an object like a great sheet coming down, lowered by four corners to the
ground, 12and there were in it all kinds of four-footed animals and crawling creatures of the earth and birds of the air.
13A voice came to him, “Get up, Peter, kill and eat!” 14But Peter said, “By no means, Lord, for I have never eaten anything
unholy and unclean.” 15Again a voice came to him a second time, “What God has cleansed, no longer consider unholy.”
16This happened three times, and immediately the object was taken up into the sky.
10:9 “about the sixth hour to pray” Although rabbinical Judaism had set aside 9:00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. to pray (the times of
the daily sacrifices in the Temple), the Pharisees had added noon as another appropriate time. Apparently Peter was acting in the
traditions of the elders by praying at noon or maybe he was just taking a nap before lunch.
10:10 “he became hungry” The setting of Peter’s vision is in the context of his hunger and his view of the Mediterranean Ocean
from Simon’s roof.
The word for “hunger” is used only here in all of known Greek literature. Its exact connotation is impossible to know, but
with the preposition pros added, it may mean “extreme hunger,” but this is surprising in this context. This hapax legomenon
(words used only once in the NT) must remain uncertain until more lexical information is discovered. It must remain uncertain
as to why Luke chose to use this rare term, but the general sense of the context is obvious.
▣ “he fell into a trance” This is literally “out of himself” or “beside himself,” often used of astonishment (cf. Mark 5:42; 16:8;
Luke 5:26; and several texts in LXX). We get the English term “ecstasy” from this Greek word. In this verse and 11:5 and 22:17
it means a semiconscious mental state which allows God to speak to the subconscious. This is a different word from the one used
in verse 3 to describe Cornelius’ vision.
10:11
NASB “the sky opened”
NKJV, TEV “heaven opened”
NRSV “the heaven opened”
NJB “heaven thrown open”
This is a perfect passive participle, literally “the heavens having been and continued to be opened.” In the OT heavens
is plural. This opening of the atmosphere is an idiom for the spiritual, invisible dimension to break into physical reality (cf.
Ezek. 1:1; Matt. 3:16; Mark 1:10; Luke 3:21; John 1:51; Acts 7:56; 10:11; Rev. 4:1; 19:11).
▣ “like a great sheet” This is the same term used for the sails on a ship.
10:12 “all kinds of four footed animals and crawling creatures of the earth and birds of the air” This is the same threefold
division of animals found in Gen. 1 and 6:20. Apparently they were made up of clean and unclean animals according to the Jewish
food laws of Lev. 11.
10:13 “A voice came to him” From the time of the closing of Malachi to the coming of the NT period there was no authoritative
prophetic voice from God among the Jews. During this period when the Jews wanted to confirm something as being revealed from
God they depended on something known as a bath kol. We see this in the NT in Matt. 3:17; 17:5, also in Acts 9:7, and here.
10:14 “By no means Lord for I have never eaten anything unholy or unclean” “By no means” is a strong Greek phrase used
several times in the Septuagint to translate several Hebrew idioms. Peter was still struggling with his Jewish orthodoxy. He was
basing his actions on Leviticus. 11. However, Jesus seems to have specifically dealt with this issue in Mark 7:14ff, especially
verse 19. It is interesting to note that the Gospel of Mark is apparently the later recollections or sermons of the Apostle Peter from
Rome.
10:15 “What God has cleansed, no longer consider unholy” This is a present active imperative with a negative particle,
which usually implies stop an action already in progress. God clearly states the cessation of the Mosaic food laws (i.e., Leviticus
11). They are no longer appropriate for new covenant believers. Here they are used in an analogous way to show the acceptance
of all humans!
10:16 “This happened three times” It is not uncommon in the Bible for important prayers, praises, or actions to be repeated
three times.
1. Jesus’ prayer in the Garden of Gethsemane (cf. Mark 14:36,39)
2. Jesus’ discussion with Peter after the resurrection (cf. John 21:17)
3. Paul’s “thorn in the flesh” prayer (cf. II Cor. 12:8)
It was a Semitic way of emphasis (cf. Isa. 6:3; Jer. 7:4). In this case it specifically shows Peter’s reluctance to obey this heavenly
voice!
A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures In the New Testament has an incisive word at this point.
“Here is a striking illustration of obstinacy on the part of one who acknowledges the voice of God to him when
the command of the Lord crosses one’s preferences and prejudices. There are abundant examples today of precisely
this thing. In a real sense Peter was maintaining a pose of piety beyond the will of the Lord” (p. 137).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 10:17-23a
17Now while Peter was greatly perplexed in mind as to what the vision which he had seen might be, behold, the men
who had been sent by Cornelius, having asked directions for Simon’s house, appeared at the gate; 18and calling out, they
were asking whether Simon, who was also called Peter, was staying there. 19While Peter was reflecting on the vision, the
Spirit said to him, “Behold, three men are looking for you. 20But get up, go downstairs and accompany them without
misgivings, for I have sent them Myself.” 21Peter went down to the men and said, “Behold, I am the one you are looking
for; what is the reason for which you have come?” 22They said, “Cornelius, a centurion, a righteous and God-fearing man
well spoken of by the entire nation of the Jews, was divinely directed by a holy angel to send for you to come to his house
and hear a message from you.” 23So he invited them in and gave them lodging.
10:17 “Peter was greatly perplexed” This is an imperfect active indicative, which here denotes the beginning of an action
in past time.
The term is used several times by Luke to show mental confusion (cf. Luke 9:7; Acts 2:12; 5:24; 10:17). Peter did not
immediately understand the purpose of the vision.
▣ “the vision” The word used here to describe Peter’s experience, horama, is the same as is used of Cornelius’ vision in v. 3 (cf.
v. 19).
10:19 “the Spirit said to him” The exact relationship between “the Spirit” (v. 19) speaking and “the angel” (vv. 3,22) speaking
throughout this context is uncertain (cf. v. 20, “I have sent them Myself”). Apparently the angel spoke on the behalf of the Holy
Spirit or the two are identified like an OT theophony (cf. Exod.3:2,4; Acts 8:26,29).
10:20 This verse is very emphatic.
1. get up, participle used as an imperative
2. go downstairs, aorist active imperative
3. accompany them, present middle (deponent) imperative
4. without misgiving, participle used as an imperative
5. I have sent them Myself, ego with perfect active indicative
There was no option for Peter but to go! This was a divine appointment. The Spirit was responsible for Cornelius’ vision,
Cornelius’ sending the men, Peter’s vision, and now Peter’s responding to their request.
10:22 They faithfully relate what has happened.
▣
NASB “a righteous”
NKJV “a just man”
NRSV, NJB “upright”
TEV “a good man”
This term must be used in the OT sense of “blameless.” It does not refer to sinlessness (cf. Gen. 6:1; Job 1:1; Luke 1:6; 2:25)
or to the imputed righteousness of Christ (cf. Rom. 4). This man lived up to all he understood about the will of God. See Special
Topic: righteousness at 3:14.
▣
NASB, NRSV,
NJB “God-fearing”
NKJV “one who fears God”
TEV “who worships God”
This phrase (or one like it) is used often to describe Cornelius (cf. 10:2,22,35). In Acts 13:16,26,43,50 it is used for those
who are not racial Jews and not full proselytes, but those who regularly attended synagogues. They were called “God-fearers”
(cf. 16:14; 17:4,17; 18:7).
10:23 “So he invited them in and gave them lodging” This is another example of Peter’s continuing separation from his Jewish
legalism. It is certain that the accompanying soldier was a Roman and yet Peter invited him in for dinner and fellowship. Notice
how in v. 48 Peter will stay in a Roman house for a few days.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 10:23b-29
23bAnd on the next day he got up and went away with them, and some of the brethren from Joppa accompanied him.
24On the following day he entered Caesarea. Now Cornelius was waiting for them and had called together his relatives
and close friends. 25When Peter entered, Cornelius met him, and fell at his feet and worshiped him. 26But Peter raised him
up, saying, “Stand up; I too am just a man.” 27As he talked with him, he entered and found many people assembled. 28And
he said to them, “You yourselves know how unlawful it is for a man who is a Jew to associate with a foreigner or to visit
him; and yet God has shown me that I should not call any man unholy or unclean. 29That is why I came without even
raising any objection when I was sent for. So I ask for what reason you have sent for me.”
10:24 “some of the brethren from Joppa accompanied him” Chapter 11:12 says there were six of them. Peter knew that this
incident would cause problems among some of the Jewish followers of Jesus. Therefore, he took several witnesses with him (cf.
11:12).
▣ “Caesarea” Caesarea was the beautiful city by the sea. It was named in honor of the Roman Caesar. It was the Palestinian
quarters for the Roman occupation force. The Romans had made it into a small harbor.
▣ “called together his relatives and close friends” Cornelius, expecting a speaker from God, had called all his close family,
friends, servants, and possibly other soldiers. They may have all been waiting for hours and hours. What a spirit of anticipation
and expectation must have filled this house! All of these would have been discussing the vision and its message.
This is what shocked the leaders of the Jewish segment of the church, that a large number of Gentiles, many of them not God-fearers, had been included in the filling of the Spirit and baptism (cf. v. 27).
10:25,27 “When Paul entered. . .he entered” There is an apparent discrepancy in the Greek text here. However, the first
“entering” mentioned in v. 25 could be the city gate on the courtyard of the house, and the second “entering” in v. 27 could be
Cornelius’ house. Whichever is the case, again Peter is violating Jewish ceremonial ritualism by entering a Gentile home.
10:25 “fell at his feet and worshiped him” This is the regular idiom in the Septuagint and the Gospels for worship. But, in this
context “give respect” may better catch the idea (cf. NJB). An angel had prepared Peter’s coming; of course Cornelius would
honor and respect this messenger (cf. Rev. 19:10; 22:8-9).
10:28 “You yourselves know how unlawful it is for a man who is a Jew to associate” Peter is quoting his rabbinical training
or synagogue school; however, this is not found in the OT, but simply in rabbinical interpretations.
▣ “a foreigner” This term is another unique text found only here in the NT. Luke has chosen several very rare words in this
chapter.
1. eusebēs, vv. 2,7, devout (cf. II Pet. 2:9)
2. prospeinos, v. 10, hungry
3. dienthumeomai, v. 19, reflecting
4. sunomileō, v. 27, talked
5. athemiton, v. 28, unlawful
6. allophulō, v. 28, foreigner
7. anantirrētos, v. 29, without even raising any objections (cf. Acts 19:36)
8. prosōpolēmpēs, v. 34, respecter of persons (similar to Rom. 2:11; Eph. 6:9; James 2:19)
9. katadunasteuō, v. 38, oppress (cf. James 2:6)
10. procheirotoneō, v. 41, elect before
It is uncertain whether Luke copied some of these early sermons and events in Acts from other sources or records verbal
interviews with those who were present.
▣ “yet God has shown me that I should not call any man unholy or unclean” Peter got the message! The animals in the sheet
represented all human beings made in the image of God (cf. Gen. 1:26-27). God’s love for Cornelius and his family and friends
showed Peter the worldwide scope of the gospel! This would confirm the witness of Stephen and the preaching of Philip.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 10:30-33
30Cornelius said, “Four days ago to this hour, I was praying in my house during the ninth hour; and behold, a man
stood before me in shining garments, 31and he said, ‘Cornelius, your prayer has been heard and your alms have been
remembered before God. 32Therefore send to Joppa and invite Simon, who is also called Peter, to come to you; he is
staying at the house of Simon the tanner by the sea.’ 33So I sent for you immediately, and you have been kind enough to
come. Now then, we are all here present before God to hear all that you have been commanded by the Lord.”
10:30 “in shining garments” Angels often appear in this form (cf. 1:10; Matt.28:3; Mark 16:5; John 20:12; Luke 24:4).
10:31 This is the third time in this chapter that Cornelius’ piety has been affirmed (cf. vv. 4,22). Cornelius is not the surprise;
it is his friends, servants, and family who also trust Christ. This is one of several examples in Acts of “household salvations.”
Those of us who have grown up with western evangelical models of evangelism which emphasize individual volitional
response are surprised by these kinds of corporate responses, but most of the world has a tribal, family, group orientation. God
is able to work through many models to reach humans made in His image. There is no one model of evangelism!
10:33 These people were ready to hear! They realized they were in the midst of a divine moment with a God-sent messenger.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 34-43
34Opening his mouth, Peter said: “I most certainly understand now that God is not one to show partiality, 35but in
every nation the man who fears Him and does what is right is welcome to Him. 36The word which He sent to the sons of
Israel, preaching peace through Jesus Christ (He is Lord of all)—37you yourselves know the thing which took place
throughout all Judea, starting from Galilee, after the baptism which John proclaimed. 38You know of Jesus of Nazareth,
how God anointed Him with the Holy Spirit and with power, and how He went about doing good and healing all who were
oppressed by the devil, for God was with Him. 39We are witnesses of all the things He did both in the land of the Jews and
in Jerusalem. They also put Him to death by hanging Him on a cross. 40God raised Him up on the third day and granted
that He become visible, 41not to all the people, but to witnesses who were chosen beforehand by God, that is, to us who ate
and drank with Him after He arose from the dead. 42And He ordered us to preach to the people, and solemnly to testify
that this is the One who has been appointed by God as Judge of the living and the dead. 43Of Him all the prophets bear
witness that through His name everyone who believes in Him receives forgiveness of sins.”
10:34 “that God is not one to show partiality” This is the beginning of Peter’s sermon to Cornelius. It is a good example of
the preaching of the early church to non-Jews. In the OT this judicial phrase characterized God (cf. Deut. 10:17; II Chr. 19:7)
and is required of His people (cf. Deut. 1:17; 16:19). It is also a common characterization of God in the NT (cf. Rom. 2:11; Gal.
2:6; Eph. 6:9; Col. 3:24-25; I Pet. 1:17). In the OT this phrase literally meant “to lift the face.” In Hebrew courts the defendants
kept their heads bowed so that the judge would not recognize the person and thereby be biased.
God has no favorites (nations, races, or individuals)! If this is true then how does predestination work? Or how is Israel
special? Be careful of modern systems of theology!
10:35 “in every nation the man who fears Him and does what is right is welcome to Him” This description does not refer
to the concept of spiritual salvation, but apparently to the idea of almsgiving, prayer, and piety. See Special Topic at 3:2. This
phrase must be theologically balanced with the mandate to receive the gospel (cf. John 1:12; 3:16; Rom. 10:9-13).
The major truth is that God accepts Gentiles without their becoming proselyte Jews. This set the theological stage for Acts
15, the Jerusalem Council.
10:36-39 The Jerome Biblical Commentary (vol. II, p. 188) makes a several good comments about these names.
1. they constitute Peter’s summary of the gospel (i.e., Kerygma)
2. they have poor syntax, which shows that Luke accurately records his sources and does not invent them or edit them
10:36 “The word which He sent to the sons of Israel” This does not refer to the OT, but Jesus and the Apostles’ preaching.
▣ “preaching peace through Jesus Christ” This may be an allusion to Isa. 52:7. The term “peace” is used in three ways in the
NT:
1. peace between God and humanity (cf. Col. 1:20)
2. the subjective peace of the individual believer (cf. John 14:27; 16:33, Philippians 4)
3. peace between human groups who respond to Christ (cf. Eph. 2:14-3:6; Col. 3:16)
All human barriers are down in Christ (cf. Gal. 3:28; Col. 3:11)!
▣ “(He is Lord of all)” This is an editorial/authorial comment. Here is the universal element of the message and invitation of
the gospel of Jesus Christ that still sounded so radical in the mouth of an orthodox Jew (cf. Acts 2:36; Matt. 28:18; Rom. 10:12;
Eph. 1:20-22; Col. 2:10; I Pet. 3:22). He is Lord of all races and all things (i.e., cosmic Lordship)!
10:37,39 “you yourselves know the things which took place” Peter is using the same form as his Pentecost sermon (cf. 2:22,33).
They had heard about Jesus and what happened to Him in Jerusalem.
One wonders how these people would have had all this information. Is Peter using hyperbole? Were these somehow
involved in some of the events in Jerusalem? Were some of these household servants Jewish? The text is too brief and we just
do not know.
Some have used this sermon to assert:
1. Luke wrote all the sermons in Acts (but Luke is a good Koine writer and vv. 36-38 are not good, acceptable Greek).
2. Luke was true to his sources and quoted them accurately without correcting their poor grammar.
3. This phrase is meant to be understood by later readers of Acts (cf. The Jerome Commentary, vol. II, p. 189).
10:37 “after the baptism which John proclaimed” Why Jesus was baptized has always been a concern for believers because
John’s baptism was a baptism of repentance. Jesus did not need repentance or forgiveness, for He was sinless (cf. II Cor. 5:21;
Heb. 4:15; 7:26; I Pet. 2:22; I John 3:5). The theories have been:
1. it was an example for believers to follow
2. it was His identification with believers’ need
3. it was His ordination and equipping for ministry
4. it was a symbol of His redemptive task
5. it was His approval of the ministry and message of John the Baptist
6. it was a prophetic foreshadowing of His death, burial, and resurrection (cf. Rom. 6:4; Col. 2:12).
The baptism by John was seen as the beginning of Jesus’ Spirit-filled, public ministry. All three Synoptic Gospels record
this inaugural event. Mark begins his Gospel (Peter’s eyewitness account) with this event. This was seen by the early church as
the special start of the new age of the Spirit as it relates to the public ministry of Jesus.
10:38 “Jesus of Nazareth, how God anointed Him with the Holy Spirit and with power” Notice the things Peter affirms about
Jesus.
1. God anointed Him (anoint is the Hebrew root word of Messiah)
2. with the Holy Spirit (the new age is the age of the Spirit)
3. with power (effective ministry)
a. doing good
b. healing all oppressed by the devil (power of evil and Satan)
4. God was with Him (He spoke and acted on behalf of YHWH, cf. John 3:2; 9:33; 10:38; 14:10-11)
Apparently this refers to Jesus’ baptism (cf. F. F. Bruce, Answers to Questions, pp. 171-172).
Robert B. Girdlestone, Synonyms of the Old Testament, makes the interesting statement:
“The verb χρίειν is used five times in the N.T. In four of these passages it refers to the anointing of Christ by His
father, namely: Luke 4. 18, which is quoted from Isa. 61. 1; Heb. 1. 9, quoted from Ps. 45. 7; Acts 4. 27, where it is
used with special reference to the quotation from the second Psalm, which immediately precedes it; and Acts 10. 38,
where we are told God anointed Jesus with the Spirit” (p. 183).
See Special Topic: Kerygma at 2:14.
▣ “healing all who were oppressed by the devil” See special Topics at 5:3 and 5:16.
10:39 “They also put Him to death by hanging Him on a cross” “They” refers to the Jewish leadership, the mob, and the
Roman authorities. See note at 2:23. This concept of hanging upon a tree is mentioned in 5:30 and reflects Deut. 21:23 (which
originally referred to impaling on a stake after death to humiliate someone, but the rabbis of Jesus’ day interpreted it as Roman
crucifixion), whereby Jesus bore the curse of the OT law (cf. Isa. 53) for us (cf. Gal. 3:13).
10:40 “God raised him” It is theologically interesting that Isa.53:4-6,10 asserts that it was YHWH’s will and purpose that Jesus
suffer and die (cf. Gen. 3:15). YHWH used the agency of
1. Satan
2. evil Jewish leadership
3. manipulated Roman leadership
4. an angry Jewish mob
Evil is in the will of God! He uses it to accomplish His ultimate purpose for humanity made in His image/likeness. Wow! What
a theology of sovereignty! He allows death, then brings resurrection life to Jesus and to all!
The NT affirms that all three persons of the Trinity were active in Jesus’ resurrection:
1. Spirit (Rom. 8:11)
2. Jesus (John 2:19-22; 10:17-18)
3. Father (Acts 2:24,32; 3:15,25; 4:10; 5:30; 10:40; 13:30,33,34,37; 27:31; Rom. 6:4,9)
This was confirmation of the truth of Jesus’ life, death, and teachings about God. This was a major aspect of the Kerygma (i.e.,
sermons in Acts, see Special Topic at 2:14).
▣ “on the third day” Because of I Cor. 15:4, some relate this to Ps. 16:10 or Hosea 6:2, but more probably Jonah 1:17 because
of Matt. 12:40.
10:40-41 “granted that He become visible, not to all the people” Jesus appeared to several select groups (cf. John 14:19, 24;
15:27; 16:16, 22; I Cor. 15:5-9).
10:41 “who ate and drank with Him after He rose from the dead” Although Jesus’ resurrection body did not need physical
nourishment, He ate and drank to show His special witnesses He was real and to express His fellowship with them (cf. Luke
24:35, 41-43; John 21:9-13).
10:42 “He ordered us to preach to the people” The pronoun refers to Jesus (cf. Matt. 28:18-20; Luke 24:47-48; John 15:27).
This witness was to begin in Jerusalem but reach to all the world (cf 1:8).
▣ “Judge of the living and the dead” Christ is the Father’s agent in judgment (cf. Dan. 7:13-14; John 5:22,27; Acts 17:31; II
Cor. 5:10; II Tim. 4:1; I Pet. 4:5) as He was the Father’s agent in creation (cf. John 1:3; Col. 1:16; Heb. 1:2). Jesus did not come
to judge, but to save (cf. John 3:17-19).
The phrase “living and dead” refers to eschatological judgment, the Second Coming. Some believers will be alive (cf.
I Thess. 4:13-18).
SPECIAL TOPIC: JUDGE, JUDGMENT, and JUSTICE (טפש) IN ISAIAH
This is a widely used term (BDB 1047) in the OT. NIDOTTE, vol. 4, p. 214, has characterized its distribution and
significance.
1. Pentateuch, 13%, human judges
2. History books, 34%, human leaders
3. Wisdom Literature, 22%, divine activity
4. Prophets, 31%, mostly divine activity
Note the following chart.
YHWH Messiah Israel’s Israel’s
as Judge as Judge Ideal Judges Actual Judges
2:4 9:7 1:17,21,23 3:2
3:14 11:3,4 26:8 5:7
4:4 16:5 56:1 10:2
5:16 32:1 58:2,8 59:4,9,11,14,15
28:6,17,26 40:14
30:18 42:1,3,4
33:5,22 51:4,5
61:8 53:8
66:16
Israel was to reflect YHWH’s character to the nations. She failed, so YHWH raised one “ideal” Israelite to fulfill His personal
revelation to the world (i.e., the Messiah, Jesus of Nazareth, the Christ, cf. Isa. 52:11-53:12)!
10:43 “Of Him all the prophets bear witness” Jesus showed the two disciples on the road to Emmaus (only recorded in Luke 24:13-35) where and how the OT referred to Himself. These showed the disciples in the upper room and this information became the
standard approach of witnessing to Jews (cf. 3:18). Jesus opened the disciples’ minds (cf. Luke 24:45).
▣ “through His name” (cf. Joel 2:32 and Luke 24:47)
▣ “everyone who believes in Him receives forgiveness of sins” This is the gospel message:
1. everyone
2. through His name
3. who believes in Him
4. receives forgiveness of sin (cf. Luke 24:46-47)
It is Jesus-focused, not performance focused (i.e., the new covenant of Jer. 31:31-34, cf. Ezek. 36:22-38). All that needs to be
done for everyone, anyone, to be saved has been done! God has chosen to work with fallen humanity through covenant. He initiates
it and sets the agenda, but He has also demanded that humans respond by repentance, faith, obedience, and perseverance. Humans
must receive God’s gift in Christ (cf. John 1:12; 3:16; Rom. 10:9-13). It is not an automatic transfer.
Frank Stagg, New Testament Theology, has an interesting comment about forgiveness and its assumed relationship to repentance.
“Forgiveness calls for a new awareness of sin and a turning from it. The assurance is given that forgiveness and
cleansing will certainly follow upon the confession of sins (I John 1:9), but no promise is given where confession does not
obtain. In the home of Cornelius, Peter related forgiveness to faith, declaring that to this one (Jesus) all the prophets bear
witness: ‘that through his name everyone who trusts him shall receive forgiveness of sins’ (Acts 10:43). In this trust, with
its repentance and confession, one both ‘owns and disowns’ his sin. This does not mean that repentance wins forgiveness;
even repentance does not make one worthy of forgiveness. As another has put it, the sinner must accept his rejection and
accept his acceptance, although he knows himself to be unacceptable. The sinner is not forgivable until he is willing to
accept God’s no in order to hear his yes” (p. 94).
For “believes in Him” see Special Topic at 3:16.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 10:44-48
44While Peter was still speaking these words, the Holy Spirit fell upon all those who were listening to the message. 45All
the circumcised believers who came with Peter were amazed, because the gift of the Holy Spirit had been poured out on the
Gentiles also. 46For they were hearing them speaking with tongues and exalting God. Then Peter answered, 47“Surely no one
can refuse the water for these to be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit just as we did, can he?” 48And he ordered
them to be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ. Then they asked him to stay on for a few days.
10:44 Notice that Peter had not yet finished his sermon when the Spirit fell (cf. 8:16-17; 10:44; 11:15).
▣ “upon all those who were listening to the message” The real theological tension was not Cornelius. He had been fully accepted
by the local synagogue. It was all the friends! They had no apparent previous contact, even with Judaism, and now God had fully
accepted them. This acceptance was demonstrated and confirmed by the same manifestation of spiritual power and presence shown
at Pentecost.
Also notice that the order of events changes. The Spirit comes before water baptism, not in conjunction with it (cf. 2:38) or after
it (cf. 8:17). Luke records what happened, not what “should have happened.” Be careful of trying to turn one of these gospel
encounters recorded in Acts into “the” gospel encounter!
10:45 The same supernatural manifestation of the Spirit (cf. v. 46) that occurred at Pentecost, occurred again involving Romans!
This special sign was not for Cornelius and his friends only, but primarily for the circumcised believers (cf. v. 47). It showed in a
powerful, undisputable fashion that God had accepted Gentiles (cf. 11:17), even Romans!
Luke is setting the literary stage for Acts 15, the Jerusalem Council. Both Peter and Paul had been convinced along with the
Hellenistic believing Jews that God fully accepted Gentiles through Christ.
▣ “the gift of the Holy Spirit” The ministry of the Spirit can be seen clearly in John 16:8-14. In one sense, conviction of sin is a
gift from the Spirit. Salvation itself is a gift of the Spirit. The indwelling presence is a gift of the Spirit. This is the new age of the
Spirit (cf. 2:38; 8:20; 11:17). Nothing permanent and effective happens without the presence and power of the Spirit.
▣ “had been poured out” This is a perfect passive indicative. Pouring was part of the OT sacrificial system. It was predicted
of the Spirit in Joel 2:28 and quoted by Peter in his Pentecostal sermon (cf. 2:17,33). The Spirit has been fully and permanently given
to believers by God.
10:47 This is a rhetorical question which expects a “no” answer. This question was to gain the consensus of the Jewish believers who
accompanied Peter from Joppa. See Special Topic: Baptism at 2:38.
10:48 “he ordered them to be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ” Notice that baptism was immediate. Also, notice that it was
done in Jesus’ name as in 2:38 and 19:5. The baptismal formula in Acts was “in the name of Jesus,” while in Matt. 28:19 it was in
the name of the Triune God. The formula is not the key, but the heart of the candidate!
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why is the salvation of Cornelius so significant?
2. How is Cornelius’ salvation experience like Paul’s?
3. What theological significance did the sheet full of animals and Peter’s comments have in relation to Cornelius?
4. Why was Cornelius’ friends’ conversion such a problem?
5. Outline Peter’s sermon and compare it with other salvation events in Acts. They are all different, yet the same.
ACTS 11
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Peter’s Report to the |
Peter Defends God’s Grace |
Peter’s Defense |
Peter’s Report to the |
Jerusalem: Peter Justifies |
11:1-18 |
11:1-18 |
11:1-18 |
11:1-4 |
11:1-10 |
|
|
|
11:5-17 |
|
|
|
|
|
11:11-14 |
|
|
|
|
11:15-17 |
|
|
|
11:18 |
11:18 |
The Church at Antioch |
Barnabas and Saul at |
Mission to the Greeks in |
The Church at Antioch |
Foundation of the Church |
11:19-26 |
11:19-26 |
11:19-26 |
11:19-26 |
11:19-21 |
|
|
|
|
11:22-24 |
|
|
|
|
11:25-26 |
|
Relief to Judea |
Famine Relief Sent to |
|
Barnabas and Saul Sent as |
11:27-30 |
11:27-30 |
11:27-30 |
11:27-30 |
11:27-30 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 11:1-18
1Now the apostles and the brethren who were throughout Judea heard that the Gentiles also had received the word of
God. 2And when Peter came up to Jerusalem, those who were circumcised took issue with him, 3saying, “You went to
uncircumcised men and ate with them.” 4But Peter began speaking and proceeded to explain to them in orderly sequence,
saying, 5“I was in the city of Joppa praying; and in a trance I saw a vision, an object coming down like a great sheet lowered
by four corners from the sky; and it came right down to me, 6and when I had fixed my gaze on it and was observing it I saw
the four-footed animals of the earth and the wild beasts and the crawling creatures and the birds of the air. 7I also heard a
voice saying to me, ‘Get up, Peter; kill and eat.’ 8But I said, ‘By no means, Lord, for nothing unholy or unclean has ever
entered my mouth.’ 9But a voice from heaven answered a second time, ‘What God has cleansed, no longer consider unholy.’
10This happened three times, and everything was drawn back up into the sky. 11And behold, at that moment three men
appeared at the house in which we were staying, having been sent to me from Caesarea. 12The Spirit told me to go with them
without misgivings. These six brethren also went with me and we entered the man’s house. 13And he reported to us how he
had seen the angel standing in his house, and saying, ‘Send to Joppa and have Simon, who is also called Peter, brought here;
14and he will speak words to you by which you will be saved, you and all your household.’ 15And as I began to speak, the Holy
Spirit fell upon them just as He did upon us at the beginning. 16And I remembered the word of the Lord, how He used to say,
‘John baptized with water, but you will be baptized with the Holy Spirit.’ 17Therefore if God gave to them the same gift as
He gave to us also after believing in the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I that I could stand in God’s way?” 18When they heard
this, they quieted down and glorified God, saying, “Well then, God has granted to the Gentiles also the repentance that leads
to life.”
11:1 This verse implies that the church in Jerusalem’s leadership was surprised at this turn of events. They were shocked and not
fully supportive! They had not understood the Great Commission (cf. Matt. 28:18-20; Luke 24:47; Acts 1:8) to include pagans. This
same phrase occurs in 8:14 at Samaritan’s receiving the gospel.
▣ “brethren” This is an early title for believers which emphasizes our corporate family identify (cf. 1:15; 6:3; 9:30; 10:23; 11:1,12,
29; 12:17; 14:2; 15:1,3,22,23,32-33,40; 16:2,40; 17:6,10,14; 18:18,27; 21:7, 17; 22:5; 28:14-15). To be a Christian is to be a part
of a family (cf. I Cor. 12:13; Gal. 3:28; Col. 3:11).
▣ “throughout Judea” This shows the geographical limitations of the church up to the time. Even after many years the church had
not moved beyond its cultural boundaries. Jesus’ command in 1:8 had not been obeyed! It is “almost” parallel to Genesis 10-11.
▣ “Gentiles also had received the word of God” This is aorist middle (deponent) indicative. It shows the necessity of a
personal reception of the gospel message (cf. John 1:12; 3:16; Rom. 10:9-13 Eph. 2:8-9).
The phrase “the word of God” is parallel to “the gospel.” The OT universal promises/prophecies are being fulfilled. See the
Special Topic at 1:8.
11:2 “When Peter came up to Jerusalem” Apparently the problem with the Gentile mission which continues in chapter 15 was
a recurring problem for the Jerusalem leadership of the early church. Many of the converts to Christianity were still very nationalistic
(cf. 15:5; 21:18-26).
▣
NASB “those who were circumcised”
NKJV “those of the circumcision”
NRSV, NJB “the circumcised believers”
TEV “those who were in favor of circumcising Gentiles”
Williams “the champions of circumcision”
This phrase is used in several different senses:
1. in 10:45 to describe Peter’s six Jewish companions
2. here, it refers to a group of believers in the church at Jerusalem (cf. 11:18 or 15:5)
3. in Galatians it refers to believers from the Jerusalem church (cf. 2:12) as well as Jewish unbelievers (cf. 1:7; 2:4; 5:10,12)
There is no question about the sincerity of these believers, nor the logic of their position. However, the radical nature of the
gospel had opened the door to all people totally unconnected to the Mosaic Law (i.e., Rom. 3:21-31) This is a message (grace, not
performance, brings salvation) many modern believers need to hear and heed!
▣
NASB “took issue”
NKJV “contended”
NRSV, TEV “criticized”
NJB “protested”
This is an imperfect middle indicative. This grammatical form can denote repeated action in past time or the beginning of
an action. Notice these believing traditionalists took issue with Peter, not with the gospel. They did not see that this was a gospel
issue.
11:3 “You went to uncircumcised men and ate with them” Obviously Peter is not the unchallenged leader. Grammatically this
verse can be a statement or a question (NRSV).
This issue of table fellowship was very important to Jewish people. This may be the very issue behind the food laws of Leviticus
11. Jews were not to share any social event with Canaanites. Eating in the Ancient Near East was a kind of covenant of fellowship.
Jesus had been accused of a similar breach of tradition in Matt. 9:11; 11:19; Luke 5:30; 15:2.
Peter struggled with this issue in his ministry (cf. Gal. 2:12). This was such a sensitive issue for these first believers. It is so
hard to rethink traditions, culture, and personal preferences, but the gospel demands that we do (cf. I Cor. 12:13; Gal. 3:23-29; Col.
3:11). The Jew vs. Gentile model of the OT has been totally replaced with the believer vs. unbeliever model!
11:4-18 Peter recounts his experience at Simon’s and Cornelius’ houses (Acts 10) for the Jewish leaders at Jerusalem. This repetition
(cf. the Jerusalem Council in chapter 15) is Luke’s way of showing how important this issue (world evangelization) was for the life
of the church. This was a theological watershed moment!
11:4
NASB “in orderly sequence”
NKJV “in order from the beginning”
NRSV “step by step”
TEV “a complete account”
NJB “the details point by point”
The word kathexēs is used in the NT only by Luke (cf. Luke 1:3; 8:1; Acts 3:24; 11:4; 18:23). It has the connotation of
explaining something in a logical, temporal, or sequential order. This fits Luke’s research method (cf. Luke 1:1-4), personality, and
professional training (physician).
11:6 “fixed my gaze on it” See note at 1:10.
11:12
NASB “without misgivings”
NKJV “doubting nothing”
NRSV “not to make a distinction”
TEV “without hesitation”
NJB “have no hesitation”
There are several Greek manuscript variants connected to the tense of this participle (present middle from 10:20 or aorist
middle in MSS P74, א2, B). It is even omitted in the Greek manuscripts P45, D, and some Old Latin and one Syrian version. Scribes
tended to make parallels agree. As with most of the textual variants in the NT, these do not affect the meaning of the phrase. The
UBS4 put the aorist middle participle in the text but gives it a “C” rating (difficulty in deciding).
11:14 “will be saved” Cornelius’ piety and generosity did not make him a Christian! He and his family and friends are saved by
faith in Christ!
11:15 This verse is theologically crucial in seeing the purpose of the repeated Pentecostal experience in Acts. God used the
inaugurating experience in Jerusalem to show His acceptance of other racial, geographical, and cultural groups (cf. v. 17). The
experience was not only for Cornelius, but for
1. Peter
2. the accompanying Jewish believers
3. the church in Jerusalem
11:16 “I remembered the word of the Lord” This is an allusion to Jesus’ words in Acts 1:5. This shows the pattern of the early
Apostles’ approach to theology:
1. quote Jesus
2. use Jesus’ example
3. quote the OT (cf. Matt. 3:11; Acts 1:5)
Peter is establishing that the Lord Himself foresaw this development (i.e., sign).
11:17 “if” This is a first class conditional sentence which is assumed to be true from the author’s perspective or for his literary
purposes.
▣ “God gave to them the same gift” This, like v. 15, refers to the Pentecost experience (cf. 2:1-4; 8:15; 10:46; 15:8). Salvation,
like the Spirit, is also a gift from God (cf. Rom. 3:24; 5:15-17: 6:23; Eph. 2:8).
▣ “after believing in the Lord” It must be received (cf. 11:1; John 1:12; Eph. 2:8-9). Notice how v. 17 asserts both the sovereignty
of God and the mandated human response. There are several prepositions in the NT used to describe faith in Jesus:
1. epi = on (here)
2. eis = into
3. en = in
4. hoti = statement about Jesus
5. Dative case without preposition
This variety seems to imply that there was no specific grammatical form connected to “believe” (pisteuō). Usually the personal,
volitional aspect is emphasized (except for hoti, which means the content of the gospel or doctrines). Jesus is a person to be
welcomed! See Special Topics at 2:40 and 3:16.
11:18 “they quieted down and glorified God” Peter’s testimony not only stopped the negative atmosphere, but it engendered
praise! Most of these early leaders and believers were teachable and flexible. They were willing to adjust their theology and follow
God’s lead.
▣ “God has granted to the Gentiles also the repentance that leads to life” There are several passages in the NT that imply that
the sovereign God is the source of repentance as well as grace (cf. Acts 5:31, 8:22; II Tim. 2:25).
The theological issue related to this phrase is, “how is the sovereignty of God related to salvation versus the demanded response
of humans?” Are faith and repentance (cf. Mark 1:15; Acts 3:16,19; 20:21) human responses or gifts from God? There are texts
which strongly imply that they are a gift from God (cf. Acts 5:31; 11:18; Rom. 2:4; and II Tim. 2:25). Since I believe that all
Scripture is inspired (cf. II Tim. 3:16) then one must compare all texts related to any theological issue and not succumb to a proof-text
or denominational method. It is obvious that the one true God is in control of all things! Acts emphasizes this over and over.
However, He has chosen to relate to His highest creation by means of covenant. God always takes the initiative and sets the agenda,
but mankind must respond and continue to respond. It is never an either/or question. It is always a both/and relationship. See Special
Topic: Covenant at 2:47. For “repentance” see Special Topic at 2:38.
Michael Magill, NT TransLine (p. 435, #24) has a good summary statement of what the early believing Jews in Jerusalem
thought would happen.
“The Jewish believers knew the message was for the world. But that salvation was to come to the Gentiles apart from
Judaism, with all the implications that this has, was a new thought for them. They were assuming salvation would be
proclaimed to the world as part of and through a true, spiritual Judaism; that Judaism would reign and all people would
become Jews as part of finding life in Christ; that Israel’s culture would gloriously become world culture.”
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 11:19-26
19So then those who were scattered because of the persecution that occurred in connection with Stephen made their way
to Phoenicia and Cyprus and Antioch, speaking the word to no one except to Jews alone. 20But there were some of them, men
of Cyprus and Cyrene, who came to Antioch and began speaking to the Greeks also, preaching the Lord Jesus. 21And the
hand of the Lord was with them, and a large number who believed turned to the Lord. 22The news about them reached the
ears of the church at Jerusalem, and they sent Barnabas off to Antioch. 23Then when he arrived and witnessed the grace of
God, he rejoiced and began to encourage them all with resolute heart to remain true to the Lord; 24for he was a good man,
and full of the Holy Spirit and of faith. And considerable numbers were brought to the Lord. 25And he left for Tarsus to look
for Saul; 26and when he had found him, he brought him to Antioch. And for an entire year they met with the church and
taught considerable numbers; and the disciples were first called Christians in Antioch.
11:19-30 These verses seem to be a historical flashback and a theological summary. They connect to 8:4.
11:19 “those who were scattered because of the persecution” We have several early examples of these persecutions in Acts (cf.
5:17ff; 6:8-15; 8:1-3; 9:1-2). Stephen’s understanding of the radical implication of the gospel forced all the Jewish believers in
Palestine to reassess their faith and the purpose of the gospel.
▣ “Antioch” Antioch was the third largest city of the Roman Empire after Rome and Alexandria. It was the capital of Syria and
it had a large Jewish population. It was well known for its university life and its sexual immorality. It was also famous worldwide
for its chariot racing. It will become a major center of Christianity!
▣ “speaking the word to no one except to Jews alone” This shows that the early church was not certain whether preaching to the
Gentiles was appropriate. The conservatives would quote the words of Jesus in Matt. 10:5, while the visionaries would quote Matt.
28:18-20 or Acts 1:8. This theological issue will resurface in Acts 15.
11:20 “men of Cyprus and Cyrene” These are the same Greek-speaking Jewish believers as in Acts 6-8, who began to preach the
universal implications of the Christian gospel in Jerusalem. Barnabas was also from this geographical area.
▣ “to Greeks” This word (Hellēn) normally refers to Gentiles (cf. 14:1; 16:1,3; 18:4; 19:10,17; 20:21; 21:28). However, in 17:4
it refers to Gentiles who were connected to the synagogues (God-fearers), but not members (i.e., proselytes).
The question is, “Who is Luke referring to as being preached to.”
1. Greek-speaking Jews as in 6:1 and 9:29 (Hellēnists)
2. Gentiles related to the synagogue (Hellēn)
3. full Gentiles (cf. TEV, NJB)?
With all the commotion this caused, possibly the term refers to those who spoke Greek; some might be Jews of the Diaspora, and
others full Gentiles.
▣ “preaching the Lord Jesus” This is a present middle participle of the verb from which we get the English term “evangel”
and evangelism.” Their message was not about OT laws and procedures, but about Jesus of Nazareth as the Messiah (see Special
Topic at 2:31)!
11:21 “the hand of the Lord was with them and a large number who believed turned to the Lord” This is another summary
statement of the great movement of God through evangelistic preaching. Finally Acts 1:8 was being fulfilled (cf. v. 24b).
This is an OT idiom for the acknowledgment of YHWH’s presence and power for the accomplishing of His purpose in human
activity (cf. II Sam. 3:12).
It is interesting to note that the term “Lord” (Kurios) is used in the first of this verse to refer to YHWH (cf. LXX Exod. 3:14;
II Sam. 3:12; Isa. 59:1, see Special Topic at 1:6). However, in the latter part of the verse it is used to refer to Jesus Christ. This
transference of titles is a common literary technique of the NT authors to assert the deity of Jesus. Notice where Paul quotes Ot texts
referring to YHWH and applies them to Jesus (i.e., Rom. 10:13; I Cor. 2:16; Phil. 2:10-11).
The “hand of the Lord” is an OT anthropomorphic idiom (see special Topic at 2:33). YHWH is an eternal spirit present through
time and creation. He does not have a physical body. However, the only vocabulary humans have to speak of anything personal is
physical, human terms. We must remember the limits of fallen, temporal, earth-bound human language. It speaks of the spiritual
realm in metaphors, analogies, and negations. It expresses truth, but in non-exhaustive ways. God is far greater than our ability to
know and express. He communicates truly to us, but not exhaustively. We can trust the Bible as God’s self-revelation, but we must
realize God is greater still! Human language both reveals and limits!
SPECIAL TOPIC: HAND (ILLUSTRATED FROM EZEKIEL)
The word “hand” (BDB 388) has several connotations and usages.
1. literal (i.e., hand of a human)
a. symbol of the entire person, 3:18; 18:8,17; 33:6,8
b. symbol of human weakness, 7:17,27; 21:7; 22:14
c. symbol of foreign enemies, 7:21; 11:9; 16:39; 21:31; 23:9,28; 28:10; 30:12; 34:27; 38:12; 39:23
d. literal hand, 8:11; 12:7; 16:11; 37:17,19,20
e. symbol of false leaders’ power, 13:21,22,23; 34:10
f. symbol of a nation, 23:31,37,42,45; 25:14; 27:15; 28:9; 30:10,22,24,25; 31:11; 39:3
2. anthropomorphic of deity
a. reception of revelation, 1:3; 3:14,22; 8:1; 33:22; 37:1; 40:1 (2:9 is another metaphor- scroll on a hand)
b. YHWH’s power in judgment, 6:14; 13:9; 14:9,13; 16:27; 20:33; 25:7,13,16; 35:3; 39:21
c. YHWH Himself (His personal Presence), 20:22
d. YHWH’s power to deliver, 20:34 (possibly key usage from Exodus, cf. 3:20; 4:17; 6:1; 7:19; 13:3)
3. anthropomorphic of Cherubim, 1:8; 8:3; 10:7,8,12,21
4. anthropomorphic of destroying angels, 9:1-2; 21:11
5. symbol of a pledge or oath, 17:18; 20:5(twice),6,15,23,28; 36:7; 44:12; 47:14
6. symbol of joy, 25:6
7. anthropomorphic of an angel, 40:3,5; 47:3
11:22 “Barnabas” Barnabas is a major figure in the book of Acts (cf. 4:36-37; 9:27). His name is used in the sense of encourager,
which is obvious in v. 23. The church in Jerusalem was still uncomfortable about Gentile inclusion! See Special Topic at 4:36.
11:23 It is interesting to notice that when Barnabas saw the active presence of God’s grace through the Spirit, he encouraged all of
them to remain in faith (cf. 14:22). This clearly shows the need for diligence on the part of God’s people for purposeful perseverance
(see Special Topic at 14:22). The Jews and the church were very concerned about the immoral cultural context of paganism. The
gospel was not only a free gift of salvation, but a call to godliness (cf. Matt. 5:48; Rom. 8:28-29; II Cor. 3:18; Gal. 4:19; Eph. 4:1;
I Thess. 3:13; 4:3; I Pet. 1:15). God wants a people who reflect His character to a lost world. The goal of Christianity is not only
heaven when we die, but Christlikeness now so that others may come to faith in Christ!
11:24 “he was a good man, and full of the Holy Spirit and of faith” This description is very similar to the Greek-speaking Jewish
believers (the seven) of Acts 6:3, 5. The early church was full of men like this! Oh that it may be true of our day, our culture, our
church!
11:25 “And he left for Tarsus to look for Saul” This verb in the Egyptian Koine papyri (but not the LXX) implies that Saul was
not easy to find. Only Luke uses this term in the NT (cf. Luke 2:44,45; Acts 11:25).These silent years are apparently referred to in
Gal. 1:21. The exact time frame is uncertain, but it was approximately ten years.
11:26 “church” See Special Topic at 5:11.
▣ “he brought him to Antioch. . .the disciples were first called Christians in Antioch” At first “Christian” was a derogatory
reference to believers coined by pagans. Surprisingly this is a rare term in the NT. The word’s formation (ending ianos) follows the
pattern of the formation of a term for those who support and follow; Herod (and his family) are called “Herodians” (cf. Mark 3:6;
12:13; Matt. 22:16). Its use in this Hellenistic environment shows how the title for Messiah (Hebrew) translated Christ in Greek has
become a name for Jesus’ followers (Christians).
In this Hellenistic setting, it is possible that the term was given by governmental officials to differentiate Jews from believers.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 11:27-30
27Now at this time some prophets came down from Jerusalem to Antioch. 28One of them named Agabus stood up and
began to indicate by the Spirit that there would certainly be a great famine all over the world. And this took place in the reign
of Claudius. 29And in the proportion that any of the disciples had means, each of them determined to send a contribution for
the relief of the brethren living in Judea. 30And this they did, sending it in charge of Barnabas and Saul to the elders.
11:27 “prophets” Prophets are mentioned several times in the NT (cf. 13:1; 15:32; 21:10; I Cor. 12:28; 14:1-5, 29-33; Eph. 2:20;
4:10). It is not always certain whether their function is primarily foretelling, as here, or forth-telling, as in I Corinthians 14 and Acts
2:17 (cf. 13:6; 15:32; I Cor. 12:28; 14:1-5, 29-33; Eph. 2:20; 4:10).
In the OT prophets are seen as the spokesmen of God, explaining His revelation; however, NT prophets are not the mediators
of God’s revelation. This is reserved to NT authors, most of whom were Apostles or those related to an Apostle (Mark, Luke) . The
NT gift of prophecy must be limited. Inspired revelation has ceased (cf. Jude 3 and 20).
SPECIAL TOPIC: NEW TESTAMENT PROPHECY
I. It is not the same as OT prophecy (BDB 611), which has the rabbinical connotation of inspired revelations from YHWH
(cf. Acts 3:18,21; Rom. 16:26). Only prophets could write Scripture.
A. Moses was called a prophet (cf. Deut. 18:15-21).
B. History books (Joshua – Kings [except Ruth]) were called the “former prophets” (cf. Acts 3:24).
C. Prophets usurp the place of High Priest as the source of information from God (cf. Isaiah – Malachi)
D. The second division of the Hebrew canon is “the Prophets” (cf. Matt. 5:17; 22:40; Luke 16:16; 24:25,27; Rom. 3:21).
II. In the NT the concept is used in several different ways.
A. referring to OT prophets and their inspired message (cf. Matt. 2:23; 5:12; 11:13; 13:14; Rom. 1:2)
B. referring to a message for an individual rather than a corporate group (i.e., OT prophets spoke primarily to Israel)
C. referring to both John the Baptist (cf. Matt. 11:9; 14:5; 21:26; Luke 1:76) and Jesus as proclaimers of the Kingdom
of God (cf. Matt. 13:57; 21:11,46; Luke 4:24; 7:16; 13:33; 24:19). Jesus also claimed to be greater than the prophets
(cf. Matt. 11:9; 12:41; Luke 7:26).
D. other prophets in the NT
1. early life of Jesus as recorded in Luke’s Gospel (i.e., Mary’s memories)
a. Elizabeth (cf. Luke 1:41-42)
b. Zacharias (cf. Luke 1:67-79)
c. Simeon (cf. Luke 2:25-35)
d. Anna (cf. Luke 2:36)
2. ironic predictions (cf. Caiaphas, John 11:51)
E. referring to one who proclaims the gospel (the lists of proclaiming gifts in I Cor. 12:28-29; Eph. 4:11)
F. referring to an ongoing gift in the church (cf. Matt. 23:34; Acts 13:1; 15:32; Rom. 12:6; I Cor. 12:10,28-29; 13:2;
Eph. 4:11). Sometimes this can refer to women (cf. Luke 2:36; Acts 2:17; 21:9; I Cor. 11:4-5).
G. referring to the apocalyptic book of Revelation (cf. Rev. 1:3; 22:7,10,18,19)
III. NT prophets
A. They do not give inspired revelation in the same sense as did the OT prophets (i.e., Scripture). This statement is
possible because of the use of the phrase “the faith” (i.e., a sense of a completed gospel) used in Acts 6:7; 13:8;
14:22; Gal. 1:23; 3:23; 6:10; Phil. 1:27; Jude vv. 3,20.
This concept is clear from the full phrase used in Jude 3, “the faith once and for all handed down to the saints.”
The “once for all” faith refers to the truths, doctrines, concepts, world-view teachings of Christianity. This once-given emphasis is the biblical basis for theologically limiting inspiration to the writings of the NT and not allowing
later or other writings to be considered revelatory. There are many ambiguous, uncertain, and grey areas in the NT,
but believers affirm by faith that everything that is “needed” for faith and practice is included with sufficient clarity
in the NT. This concept has been delineated in what is called “the revelatory triangle”
1. God has revealed Himself in time-space history (REVELATION)
2. He has chosen certain human writers to document and explain His acts (INSPIRATION)
3. He has given His Spirit to open the minds and hearts of humans to understand these writings, not definitively,
but adequately for salvation and an effective Christian life (ILLUMINATION). The point of this is that
inspiration is limited to the writers of Scripture. There are no further authoritative writings, visions, or
revelations. The canon is closed. We have all the truth we need to respond appropriately to God. This truth
is best seen in the agreement of biblical writers versus the disagreement of sincere, godly believers. No modern
writer or speaker has the level of divine leadership that the writers of Scripture did.
B. In some ways NT prophets are similar to OT prophets.
1. prediction of future events (cf. Paul, Acts 27:22; Agabus, Acts 11:27-28; 21:10-11; other unnamed prophets,
Acts 20:23)
2. proclaim judgment (cf. Paul, Acts 13:11; 28:25-28)
3. symbolic acts which vividly portray an event (cf. Agabus, Acts 21:11)
C. They do proclaim the truths of the gospel sometimes in predictive ways (cf. Acts 11:27-28; 20:23; 21:10-11), but
this is not the primary focus. Prophesying in I Corinthians is basically communicating the gospel (cf. 14:24,39).
D. They are the Spirit’s contemporary means of revealing the contemporary and practical applications of God’s truth
to each new situation, culture, or time period (cf. I Cor. 14:3).
E. They were active in the early Pauline churches (cf. I Cor.11:4-5;12:28,29;13:2,8,9; 14:1,3,4,5,6,22,24,29,31,32,
37,39; Eph. 2:20; 3:5; 4:11; I Thess. 5:20) and are mentioned in the Didache (written in the late first century or in
the second century, date uncertain) and in Montanism of the second and third centuries in northern Africa.
IV. Have the NT gifts ceased?
A. This question is difficult to answer. It helps to clarify the issue by defining the purpose of the gifts. Are they meant
to confirm the initial preaching of the gospel or are they ongoing ways for the church to minister to itself and a lost
world?
B. Does one look at the history of the church to answer the question or the NT itself? There is no indication in the NT
that the spiritual gifts were temporary. Those who try to use I Cor.
13:8-13 to address this issue abuse the authorial intent of the passage, which asserts that everything but love will pass
away.
C. I am tempted to say that since the NT, not church history, is the authority, believers must affirm that the gifts
continue. However, I believe that culture affects interpretation. Some very clear texts are no longer applicable (i.e.,
the holy kiss, women wearing veils, churches meeting in homes, etc). If culture affects texts, then why not church
history?
D. This is simply a question that cannot be definitively answered. Some believers will advocate “cessation” and others
“non-cessation.” In this area, as in many interpretative issues, the heart of the believer is the key. The NT is
ambiguous and cultural. The difficulty is being able to decide which texts are affected by culture/history and which
are for all time and all cultures (cf. Fee and Stuart’s How to Read the Bible for All Its Worth, pp. 14-19 and 69-77).
Here is where the discussions of freedom and responsibility, which are found in Rom. 14:1-15:13 and I Corinthians
8-10, are crucial. How we answer the question is important in two ways.
1. Each believer must walk in faith in the light they have. God looks at our heart and motives.
2. Each believer must allow other believers to walk in their faith understanding. There must be tolerance within
biblical bounds. God wants us to love one another as He does.
E. To sum up the issue, Christianity is a life of faith and love, not a perfect theology. A relationship with Him which
impacts our relationship with others is more important than definitive information or creedal perfection.
11:28 “great famine all over the world. . .Claudius” This geographical phrase refers to the Roman Empire (cf. 17:6, 31; 19:27;
24:5). Claudius reigned from a.d. 41-54. He followed Caligula and preceded Nero. There were several severe famines during his
reign (cf. Suetonius, Life of Caludius 18:2). The worst famine for Palestine was sometime between a.d. 44-48, according to Josephus,
Antiq. 20.5.2.
11:29 “in the proportion that any of the disciples had means, each of them determined to send a contribution” This is one of
the major strategies of the Gentile churches, to promote fellowship with their sister church in Jerusalem. This would set a pattern
in Paul’s churches (cf. 24:17; Rom. 15:2-28; I Cor. 16:1-4; II Cor. 8-9; Gal. 2:10).
11:30 “sending it. . .to the elders” This is the first mention of church “elders” (cf. 14:23; 15:2,4, 6, 22,23; 16:4; 20:17; 21:18).
The term “elders” is synonymous with the terms “overseers,” “bishops,” and “pastors” (cf. Acts 20:17,28 and Titus 1:5,7). The term
elder (presbuteros) has an OT tribal background, while overseer (episkopos) has a Greek city-state governmental background.
Apparently this refers to a specific group of leaders in the Jerusalem church (cf. 15:2,6,22,23). The more Jewish portions of the NT,
like James and Hebrews, still use the Jewish understanding of older, local leaders, but not necessarily pastors.
▣ “of Barnabas and Saul” There is much discussion as to whether the visit to Jerusalem mentioned in Gal. 2:2,10 is referring to
this visit or to the Jerusalem Council which is mentioned in Acts 15. We know so little of Paul’s early life and ministry.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why was Gentiles receiving Christ such a theological problem?
2. Is repentance a gift of God (v. 18) or a covenant requirement (Mark 1:15; Acts 3:16,19; 20:21)?
3. Why did Barnabas go and seek for Saul (Paul)?
ACTS 12
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
James Killed and Peter |
Herod’s Violence to the |
Herod Agrippa’s |
More Persecution |
Peter’s Arrest and |
12:1-5 |
12:1-5 |
12:1-5 |
12:1-5 |
12:1-5 |
Peter Delivered from Prison |
Peter Freed from Prison |
|
Peter is Set Free from |
|
12:6-17 |
12:6-19 |
12:6-11 |
12:6-10 |
12:6-11 |
|
|
|
12:11 |
|
|
|
12:12-17 |
12:12-15 |
12:12-17 |
|
|
|
12:16-17 |
|
12:18-19 |
|
12:18-19 |
12:18-19a |
12:18-19 |
|
|
|
12:19b |
|
The Death of Herod |
Herod’s Violent Death |
Death of Herod Agrippa |
The Death of Herod |
The Death of the Persecutor |
12:20-23 |
12:20-24 |
12:20-23 |
12:20 |
12:20-23 |
|
|
|
12:21-23 |
|
|
Barnabas and Saul |
Barnabas and Saul in (12:24-13:12) |
|
Barnabas and Saul Return |
12:24-25 |
|
12:24-25 |
12:24 |
12:24 |
|
12:25-13:3 |
|
12:25 |
12:25 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
The lineage of Herod the Great (for more information consult the index of Flavius Josephus in Antiquities of the Jews).
I. Herod the Great
A. King of Judea (37-4 b.c.)
B. Matt. 2:1-19; Luke 1:5
II. His Sons
A. Herod Philip (son of Marianne of Simon)
1. Husband of Herodias
2. Tetrarch of Iturea (4 b.c. – a.d. 34)
3. Matt. 14:3; Mark 6:17
B. Herod Philip (son of Cleopatra)
1. Tetrarch of area north and west of the Sea of Galilee (4 b.c. – a.d. 34)
2. Luke 3:1
C. Herod Antipas
1. Tetrarch of Galilee and Perea (4 b.c.- a.d. 39)
2. Executed John the Baptist
3. Matt. 14:1-12; Mark 6:14,29; Luke 3:19; 9:7-9; 13:31; 23:6-12,15; Acts 4:27; 13:1
D. Archelaus, Herod the Ethnarch
1. Ruler of Judea, Samaria and Idumea (4 b.c. – a.d. 6)
2. Matt. 2:22
E. Aristobulus (son of Mariamne)
1. his only son was Herod Agrippa I
2. Ruled all of Palestine (a.d. 41-44)
3. Killed James and had Peter imprisoned
4. Acts 12:1-24; 23:35
(a) his son was Herod Agrippa II, Tetrarch of northern territory (a.d. 50-70)
(b) his daughter was Bernice
(1) consort of her brother
(2) Acts 25:13-26:32
(c) his daughter was Drusilla
(1) wife of Felix
(2) Acts 24:24
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 12:1-5
1Now about that time Herod the king laid hands on some who belonged to the church in order to mistreat them. 2And
he had James the brother of John put to death with a sword. 3When he saw that it pleased the Jews, he proceeded to arrest
Peter also. Now it was during the days of Unleavened Bread. 4When he had seized him, he put him in prison, delivering him
to four squads of soldiers to guard him, intending after the Passover to bring him out before the people. 5So Peter was kept
in the prison, but prayer for him was being made fervently by the church to God.
12:1 “Herod” This refers to Herod Agrippa I. He reigned over different areas of Palestine from a.d. 37-44. He was raised in Rome
and became friends with Gaius, who followed Emperor Tiberius and who later became the Emperor Caligula. The Jews readily
accepted Herod as a leader because his grandmother (Mariamne) was a Hasmonean/Maccabean (i.e., Jewish patriot) princess. He
was a strict follower of Judaism (but possibly for political reasons). For a full discussion of this Herod, see Josephus’ Antiq. 19.7.3;
19.8.2.
▣ “church” See Special Topic at 5:11.
▣ “in order to mistreat them” Herod did this to gain support and approval from the Jewish leadership (cf. vv. 3,11). Roman leaders
did the same thing (cf. 24:27; 25:9).
Luke uses this term several times (cf. 7:6,19; 12:1; 14:2; 18:10). It was a common term in the Septuagint for ill-treatment.
Luke’s vocabulary is greatly influenced by the Septuagint.
12:2 “James, the brother of John, put to death with a sword” This refers to the Apostle James, who was the brother of John (cf.
Luke 5:10; 6:14; 8:51; 9:28,54). He was a member of the inner circle of disciples (cf. Matt. 17:1; 26:37; Mark 5:37; 9:2; 14:33; Luke
9:28). Why James should die and Peter be spared is a mystery of God. Beheading with a sword was the normal method of capital
punishment for Roman citizens, but it apparently was odious to Jews.
It is interesting that at this time the early church did not sense the need to replace James as they had Judas (cf. 1:15-20). The
reasons are unclear, but possibly it was Judas’ treachery, not death, that caused the replacement (cf. 1:15-26).
Some may assert that Paul calling James, the half brother of Jesus and leader of the Jerusalem church, an apostle (cf. Gal. 1:19)
constitutes a replacement. The question relates to the official position of the original Twelve versus the ongoing gift of apostleship
(cf. Eph. 4:11).
Reading James D. G. Dunn, Unity and Diversity in the New Testament has caused me to think about the possible different
authority structure in the first century church.
1. the Jerusalem Apostles
2. the inner circle (Peter, James, John) of the Apostles
3. James the Lord’s half-brother, who led the Jerusalem church
4. the Seven (Acts 6) who were leaders of the Greek-speaking Jews
5. later Paul and Barnabas and their sending to the church in Antioch of Syria
To this could be added the sects related to Christianity, Judaizers, Gnostics, Ebionites. Each of these also had their own leadership.
The unity that Luke often refers to among Christians was difficult to maintain. The preaching of Jesus and the Scriptures were
ambiguous enough to allow multiple interpretations. This is the reason that the “rule of faith” developed in the first centuries. There
had to be a standard to evaluate a group’s theology. The dynamic Spirit-led emphasis of the NT turned into the organized structure
of the eastern and western church centers. Orthodoxy is a significant issue for those generations removed from the Founder and
eyewitnesses.
12:3 “arrest Peter” This is Peter’s third arrest (cf. 4:3; 5:18). Christians are not spared from persecution.
▣ “during the days of Unleavened Bread” This refers to the Passover Feast (cf. v. 4), combined with the Feast of Unleavened
Bread, which lasted eight days (cf. Exod. 12:18; 23:15; Luke 22:1). Both celebrated Israel’s deliverance from Egyptian bondage.
It was celebrated on Nissan 14-21, which would be our March or April, depending on the Jewish lunar calendar.
12:4 “four squads of soldiers” This would mean four squads of soldiers four times a day, or sixteen men. The number shows
Herod’s concern over Peter’s possible escape (cf. 5:19).
12:5 “prayer for him was being made fervently by the church to God” The church is praying (cf. v. 12), but will be surprised
when God answers! “Fervently” is a very intense adverb (cf. Luke 22:44). It is used only three times in the NT (cf. I Pet. 1:22).
SPECIAL TOPIC: INTERCESSORY PRAYER
I. Introduction
A. Prayer is significant because of Jesus’ example
1. personal prayer, Mark 1:35; Luke 3:21; 6:12; 9:29; 22:29-46
2. cleansing of the Temple, Matt. 21:13; Mark 11:17; Luke 19:46
3. Model Prayer, Matt. 6:5-13; Luke 11:2-4
B. Prayer is putting into tangible action our belief in a personal, caring God who is present, willing, and able to act on our
behalf and others, through our prayers.
C. God has personally limited Himself to act on the prayers of His children in many areas (cf. James 4:2)
D. The major purpose of prayer is our fellowship and time with the Triune God.
E. The scope of prayer is anything or anyone that concerns believers. We may pray once, believing, or over and over again
as the thought or concern returns.
F. Prayer can involve several elements
1. praise and adoration of the Triune God
2. thanksgiving to God for His presence, fellowship, and provisions
3. confession of our sinfulness, both past and present
4. petition of our sensed needs or desires
5. intercession where we hold the needs of others before the Father
G. Intercessory prayer is a mystery. God loves those for whom we pray much more than we do, yet our prayers often effect
a change, response, or need, not only in ourselves, but in them.
II. Biblical Material
A. Old Testament
1. Some examples of intercessory prayer:
a. Abraham pleading for Sodom, Gen. 18:22ff
b. Moses’ prayers for Israel
(1) Exodus 5:22-23
(2) Exodus 32:31ff
(3) Deuteronomy 5:5
(4) Deuteronomy 9:18,25ff
c. Samuel prays for Israel:
(1) I Samuel 7:5-6,8-9
(2) I Samuel 12:16-23
(3) I Samuel 15:11
d. David for his child, II Samuel 12:16-18
2. God is looking for intercessors, Isaiah 59:16
3. Known, unconfessed sin or an unrepentant attitude affects our prayers
a. Psalm 66:18
b. Proverbs 28:9
c. Isaiah 59:1-2; 64:7
B. New Testament
1. The Son and Spirit’s intercessory ministry
a. Jesus
(1) Romans 8:34
(2) Hebrews 7:25
(3) I John 2:1
b. Holy Spirit, Romans 8:26-27
2. Paul’s intercessory ministry
a. Prays for the Jews
(1) Romans 9:1ff
(2) Romans 10:1
b. Prays for the churches
(1) Romans 1:9
(2) Ephesians 1:16
(3) Philippians 1:3-4,9
(4) Colossians 1:3,9
(5) I Thessalonians 1:2-3
(6) II Thessalonians 1:11
(7) II Timothy 1:3
(8) Philemon, v. 4
c. Paul asked the churches to pray for him
(1) Romans 15:30
(2) II Corinthians 1:11
(3) Ephesians 6:19
(4) Colossians 4:3
(5) I Thessalonians 5:25
(6) II Thessalonians 3:1
3. The church’s intercessory ministry
a. Pray for one another
(1) Ephesians 6:18
(2) I Timothy 2:1
(3) James 5:16
b. Prayer requested for special groups
(1) our enemies, Matt. 5:44
(2) Christian workers, Hebrews 13:18
(3) rulers, I Timothy 2:2
(4) the sick, James 5:13-16
(5) backsliders, I John 5:16
III. Conditions for answered prayer
A. Our relationship to Christ and the Spirit
1. Abide in Him, John 15:7
2. In His name, John 14:13,14; 15:16; 16:23-24
3. In the Spirit, Ephesians 6:18; Jude 20
4. According to God’s will, Matthew 6:10; I John 3:22; 5:14-15
B. Motives
1. Not wavering, Matthew 21:22; James 1:6-7
2. Humility and repentance, Luke 18:9-14
3. Asking amiss, James 4:3
4. Selfishness, James 4:2-3
C. Other aspects
1. Perseverance
a. Luke 18:1-8
b. Colossians 4:2
2. Kept on asking
a. Matthew 7:7-8
b. Luke 11:5-13
c. James 1:5
3. Discord at home, I Peter 3:7
4. Free from known sin
a. Psalm 66:18
b. Proverbs 28:9
c. Isaiah 59:1-2
d. Isaiah 64:7
IV. Theological Conclusion
A. What a privilege. What an opportunity. What a duty and responsibility
B. Jesus is our example. The Spirit is our guide. The Father is eagerly waiting.
C. It could change you, your family, your friends, and the world.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 12:6-17
6On the very night when Herod was about to bring him forward, Peter was sleeping between two soldiers, bound with
two chains, and guards in front of the door were watching over the prison. 7And behold, an angel of the Lord suddenly
appeared and a light shone in the cell; and he struck Peter’s side and woke him up, saying, “Get up quickly.” And his chains
fell off his hands. 8And the angel said to him, “Gird yourself and put on your sandals.” And he did so. And he said to him,
“Wrap your cloak around you and follow me.” 9And he went out and continued to follow, and he did not know that what
was being done by the angel was real, but thought he was seeing a vision. 10When they had passed the first and second guard,
they came to the iron gate that leads into the city, which opened for them by itself; and they went out and went along one
street, and immediately the angel departed from him. 11When Peter came to himself, he said, “Now I know for sure that the
Lord has sent forth His angel and rescued me from the hand of Herod and from all that the Jewish people were expecting.”
12And when he realized this, he went to the house of Mary, the mother of John who was also called Mark, where many were
gathered together and were praying. 13When he knocked at the door of the gate, a servant-girl named Rhoda came to answer.
14When she recognized Peter’s voice, because of her joy she did not open the gate, but ran in and announced that Peter was
standing in front of the gate. 15They said to her, “You are out of your mind!” But she kept insisting that it was so. They kept
saying, “It is his angel.” 16 But Peter continued knocking; and when they had opened the door, they saw him and were
amazed. 17But motioning to them with his hand to be silent, he described to them how the Lord had led him out of the prison.
And he said, “Report these things to James and the brethren.” Then he left and went to another place.
12:6 “On the very night” Luke’s writings are characterized by time indicators (cf. vv. 3,4,5,6,7,8,10,18). But be careful of
interpreting this as western, sequential, chronological history. Luke has a theological evangelistic purpose.
▣ “between two soldiers” This verse shows the impossibility of Peter’s escape. It is almost as if they expected an attempt to release
him (cf. 5:19).
12:7 “an angel of the Lord suddenly appeared” It is unusual that the supernatural interventions of the angel of the Lord (cf. 5:19;
7:30,35,38,53; 8:26; 10:3,7,22) and the Holy Spirit (cf. 8:29,39; 10:19) are interchanged throughout the book of Acts. Apparently
the Spirit speaks intuitively, but the angel is an outward physical manifestation. It is interesting to see the combination of the natural
and the supernatural in this account (similar to the plagues of the Exodus).
▣ “Get up quickly” This is an aorist active imperative which denotes urgency. Why is the angel in a hurry? Is he not in control
of events?
12:8 “Gird yourself and put on your sandals” These are both aorist middle imperatives.
▣ “Wrap your cloak around you and follow me” This is an aorist middle imperative followed by a present active
imperative. The angel was really in a hurry to perform this task! This was one nervous angel!
12:9 Peter was uncertain whether this was a vision, dream, or reality (cf. v. 11-12; 10:17,19; 11:5).
12:11 “When Peter came to himself” Luke uses a similar phrase in describing the Prodigal Son (cf. Luke 15:17). Suddenly the
reality of the experience and its implications dawned on him (cf. v. 12).
12:12 “the house of Mary” Mary was a very common name. There are several Marys mentioned in the Gospels.
1. the mother of Jesus (cf. Luke 1:27)
2. Mary of Magdala, a disciple from Galilee (cf. Luke 8:2; 24:10)
3. mother of James and John (cf. Luke 24:10)
4. sister of Martha and Lazarus (cf. Luke 10:39,42)
5. wife of Cleophas (cf. John 19:25)
6. mother of John Mark (here)
▣ “the mother of John” This refers to John Mark’s mother. The early church met in this family’s house in Jerusalem (cf. Acts
12:12). It was also the site of the Lord’s three post resurrection appearances and the coming of the Spirit at Pentecost.
John Mark accompanied Paul and his cousin Barnabas (cf. Col. 4:10) on the first missionary journey (cf. Acts 12:25-13:13).
For some reason he deserted the team and returned home (cf. Acts 15:38). Barnabas wanted to include him on the second missionary
journey, but Paul refused (cf. Acts 15:36-41). This resulted in Paul and Barnabas separating. Barnabas took John Mark to Cyprus
(cf. Acts 15:39). Later, while Paul was in prison, he mentions John Mark in a positive way (cf. Col. 4:10) and still later in Paul’s
second imprisonment at Rome, just before his death, he mentions John Mark again (cf. II Tim. 4:11).
Apparently John Mark became part of Peter’s missionary team (cf. I Pet. 5:13). Eusebius’ Eccl. His. 3.39.12 gives us an
interesting account of John Mark’s relation to Peter.
“In his own book Papias gives us accounts of the Lord’s sayings obtained from Aristion or learnt direct from the
presbyter John. Having brought these to the attention of scholars, I must now follow up the statements already quoted from
him with a piece of information which he sets out regarding Mark, the writer of the gospel:
This, too, the presbyter used to say. ‘Mark, who had been Peter’s interpreter, wrote down carefully, but not in order,
all that he remembered of the Lord’s sayings and doings. For he had not heard the Lord or been one of His followers, but
later, as I said, one of Peter’s. Peter used to adapt his teaching to the occasion, without making a systematic arrangement
of the Lord’s sayings, so that Mark was quite justified in writing down some things just as he remembered them. For he
had one purpose only—to leave out nothing that he had heard, and to make no misstatement about it’” (p. 152).
In this quote Papias refers to “John the elder.” Irenaeus says “and these things are borne witness to in writing by Papias,
the hearer of John, and a companion of Polycarp.” This implies Papias heard it from John the Apostle.
▣ “many were gathered together and were praying” The grammatical forms of these words reveal that the church had gathered
and intended to remain in prayer (perfect passive participle followed by a present middle [deponent] participle).
12:13 “door of the gate” This was a small door on the street. There was a larger door upstairs.
▣ “Rhoda” Her name means “rose.” It is uncertain whether she worked for the homeowners or was a member of the prayer meeting.
12:15 “You are out of your mind” The church was praying for God to act, but they were extremely surprised (cf. v. 16) when He
did.
▣ “They kept saying” There are two imperfect active indicatives in this context, which implies that Rhoda’s affirmation and
that of those in the prayer meeting in the upper room’s response happened more than once.
▣ “It is his angel” Angels play a prominent role in Luke’s writings. Apparently the Jews believed that one’s guardian angel could
take their physical shape (for a good discussion of Jewish sources and beliefs about guardian angels, see Encyclopaedia Judaica, vol.
2, p. 963). There is no scriptural basis for this belief. This development of angeology may have come from the concept of fravashi
in Zoroastrianism. Much of rabbinical angelology can be traced to this Persian influence. There is some scriptural evidence for
guardian angels for new believers (cf. Matt. 18:10). Angels are servants of the redeemed (cf. Heb. 1:14).
12:17 “motioning to them with his hand to be silent” This is obviously an eyewitness detail (cf. 13:16). Luke records this gesture
several times (cf. 13:16; 19:33; 21:40).
▣ “Report these things to James and the brethren” This shows that James, the half-brother of Jesus, was already the leader of
the Jerusalem church (cf. 15:13-21).
SPECIAL TOPIC: JAMES, THE HALF BROTHER OF JESUS
A. He was called “James the Just” and later nicknamed “camel knees” because he constantly prayed on his knees (from
Hegesippus, quoted by Eusebius).
B. James was not a believer until after the resurrection (cf. Mark 3:21; John 7:5). Jesus appeared to him personally after the
resurrection (cf. I Cor. 15:7).
C. He was present in the upper room with the disciples (cf. Acts 1:14) and possibly also there when the Spirit came on
Pentecost.
D. He was married (cf. I Cor. 9:5).
E. He is referred to by Paul as a pillar (possibly an apostle, cf. Gal. 1:19) but was not one of the Twelve (cf. Gal. 2:9; Acts
12:17; 15:13ff).
F. In Antiquities of the Jews, 20.9.1, Josephus says that he was stoned in a.d. 62 by orders from the Sadducees of the
Sanhedrin, while another tradition (the second century writers, Clement of Alexandria or Hegesippus) says he was pushed
off the wall of the Temple.
G. For many generations after Jesus’ death a relative of Jesus was appointed leader of the church in Jerusalem.
▣ “went to another place” No one knows where Peter went, but apparently he did not go to Rome as some supposed because he
is present at the Jerusalem Council recorded in Acts 15.
Even though God supernaturally delivered Peter, this did not imply that he could be reckless or expect this miraculous
intervention every time. Remember James had been killed! Peter also sends word to the church to expect more physical persecution
because of his deliverance.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 12:18-19
18Now when day came, there was no small disturbance among the soldiers as to what could have become of Peter.
19When Herod had searched for him and had not found him, he examined the guards and ordered that they be led away to
execution. Then he went down from Judea to Caesarea and was spending time there.
12:18 “there was no small disturbance” It is interesting that Luke states things in the negative, often by understatement (cf. 12:18;
15:2; 19:11,23,24; 20:12; 26:19,26; 27:30; 28:2, see footnote #8, p. 134, of G. B. Caird, The Language and Imagery of the Bible).
This literary feature is unknown in Hebrew literature, but is used often in Greek literature. Luke was a highly educated Greek!
12:19 “he examined the guards and ordered that they be led away to execution” This is the implication of the text (cf. NKJV,
NRSV, TEV), but it is not stated explicitly (cf. NJB). Some translations use italics to identify words that are not in the Greek text.
If a guard lost his prisoner, he had to bear the prisoner’s punishment (cf. 16:27; 27:42, Code of Justinian 9.4.4).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 12:20-23
20Now he was very angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon; and with one accord they came to him, and having won over
Blastus the king’s chamberlain, they were asking for peace, because their country was fed by the king’s country. 21On an
appointed day Herod, having put on his royal apparel, took his seat on the rostrum and began delivering an address to them.
22The people kept crying out, “The voice of a god and not of a man!” 23And immediately an angel of the Lord struck him
because he did not give God the glory, and he was eaten by worms and died.
12:20 “Now he was very angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon” Herod was very angry and continued to be so (periphrastic
imperfect). The particular historic incident and person are not known in history, but the region of Tyre and Sidon depended on the
agricultural produce from the area of Galilee (cf. I Kgs. 5:11; Ezra 3:7; and possibly Ezek. 27:17).
12:21 “On an appointed day Herod, having put on his royal apparel” This occurred in a.d. 44. For a more complete account
of this event see Josephus’ Antiq. 19.8.2 (translated by William Whiston, Kregal).
“At which festival, a great multitude was gotten together of the principal persons, and such as were of dignity through
his province. On the second day of which shows he put on a garment made wholly of silver, and of a contexture truly
wonderful, and came into the theatre early in the morning; at which time the silver of his garment being illuminated by the
fresh reflection of the sun’s rays upon it, shone out after a surprising manner, and was so resplendent as to spread a horror
over those that looked intently upon him: and presently his flatterers cried out, one from one place, and another from
another, (though not for his good,) that he was a god: and they added,—‘Be thou merciful to us; for although we have
hitherto reverenced thee only as a man, yet shall we henceforth own thee as superior to mortal nature.’ Upon this the king
did neither rebuke them, nor reject their impious flattery. But, as he presently afterwards looked up, he saw an owl sitting
on a certain rope over his head, and immediately understood that this bird was the messenger of ill tidings, as it had once
been the messenger of good tidings to him; and fell into the deepest sorrow. A severe pain also arose in his belly, and
began in a most violent manner. He therefore looked upon his friends, and said,—‘I, whom you call a god, am commanded
presently to depart this life; while Providence thus reproves the lying words you just now said to me; and I, who was by
you called immortal, am immediately to be hurried away by death’” (p. 412).
Herod’s temper and the physical condition which accompanied it are also described in gruesome detail in Antiq. 17:6:5.
The Jerome Biblical Commentary (vol. 2, p. 191) informs us that these gruesome details of a person’s death was ancient writer’s
way of showing what happens to those who offend God.
1. Antiochus IV Epiphanes – II Macc. 9:5-18
2. Herod the Great – Josephus, Antiq. 17.6.5
12:23 “the angel of the Lord” This refers to the Death Angel (cf. Exod. 12:23; II Sam. 24:16; II Kgs. 19:35). Death is in the hands
of God, not Satan. This is an example of temporal judgment.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 12:24
24But the word of the Lord continued to grow and to be multiplied.
12:24 This is a characteristic Lukan summary statement (cf. 6:7; 9:31; 12:24; 16:5; 19:20; 28:31).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 12:25
25And Barnabas and Saul returned from Jerusalem when they had fulfilled their mission, taking along with them John,
who was also called Mark.
12:25 This begins the account of Paul’s missionary journeys. There is a textual variant in this verse relating to whether they returned
“to” Jerusalem (cf. eis, MSS א and B) or “from” Jerusalem (cf. apo, MS D or ek, MSS P74, A). Chapter 13 begins with Barnabas and
Saul in Antioch (“from Jerusalem to Antioch,” cf. MS E and Old Latin, Syrian, and Coptic versions).
▣ “Mark” See note at “Persons Mentioned,” Acts 16 Introduction.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why did God spare Peter and not James?
2. Was the assembled church surprised when their prayers were answered? Explain the implication.
3. Do believers need angels if they have the indwelling Holy Spirit?
ACTS 13
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Barnabas and Saul |
Barnabas and Saul |
Barnabas and Saul in |
Barnabas and Saul are |
The Mission Sent Out |
|
(12:25-13:3) |
(12:23-13:12) |
|
|
13:1-3 |
|
13:1-3 |
13:1-2 |
13:13 |
|
|
|
13:3 |
|
The Apostles Preach in |
Preaching in Cyprus |
|
In Cyprus |
Cyprus: The Magician |
13:4-12 |
13:4-12 |
13:4-12 |
13:4-5 |
13:4-5 |
|
|
|
13:6-11a |
13:6-12 |
|
|
|
13:11b-12 |
|
Paul and Barnabas at |
At Antioch of Pisidia |
Journey to Antioch of |
In Antioch in Pisidia |
They Arrive at Antioch in |
13:13-16a |
13:13-41 |
13:13-16a |
13:13-16a |
13:13-16a |
13:16b-25 |
|
14:16b-25 |
13:16b-20a |
13:16b-25 |
|
|
|
13:20b-25 |
|
13:26-41 |
|
13:26-41 |
13:26-41 |
13:26-31 |
|
|
|
|
13:32-37 |
|
|
|
|
13:38-39 |
|
Blessing and Conflict at |
|
|
13:40-41 |
13:42-43 |
13:42-52 |
13:42-43 |
13:42-43 |
13:42-43 |
|
|
|
|
Paul and Barnabas Preach |
13:44-52 |
|
13:44-47 |
13:44-47 |
13:44-47 |
|
|
13:48-52 |
13:48 |
13:48-49 |
|
|
|
13:49-52 |
|
|
|
|
|
13:50-52 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
A. This is an account of Paul and Barnabas’ first missionary journey. The rest of Acts will be given over to Paul’s ministry.
B. It would be very helpful to turn to the map in the back of your Bible or atlas and follow the geographical locations
mentioned in chapters 13 and 14.
C. There is an obvious transition in chapters 13 and 14 from the leadership of Barnabas to the leadership of Paul.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 13:1-3
1Now there were at Antioch, in the church that was there, prophets and teachers: Barnabas, and Simeon who was called
Niger, and Lucius of Cyrene, and Manaen who had been brought up with Herod the tetrarch, and Saul. 2While they were
ministering to the Lord and fasting, the Holy Spirit said, “Set apart for Me Barnabas and Saul for the work to which I have
called them.” 3Then, when they had fasted and prayed and laid their hands on them, they sent them away.
13:1 “Antioch” See note at 11:19.
▣ “the church” See Special Topic at 5:11.
▣ “prophets and teachers” These two gifts of the Spirit are listed in I Cor. 12:28 and Eph. 4:11. The grammatical construction
is such that it is uncertain whether the five men listed were both prophets and teachers or if the first three are prophets and the last
two are teachers.
The problem with this term is, “How is the NT gift of prophecy related to OT prophets?” In the OT prophets are writers of
Scripture. In the NT this task is given to the original twelve Apostles and their helpers. As the term “apostle” is retained as an
ongoing gift (cf. Eph. 4:11), but with a changed task after the death of the Twelve, so too, is the office of prophet. Inspiration has
ceased; there is no further inspired Scripture. New Testament prophets’ primary task is proclamation of the gospel, but also a different
task, possibly how to apply NT truths to current situations and needs. See Special Topic at 11:27.
The gift of teacher is mentioned in Acts 13:1 in combination with prophecy, but in Eph. 4:11 it is linked with pastors. In II Tim.
1:11 Paul says he is a preacher, apostle, and a teacher. Here it seems to stand independently, as it does in Rom. 12:7. It is also
discussed separately in James 3:1ff. This implies that these leadership gifts can be combined in different ways in different believers
to meet the need of the church in that day or area. Each of these gifted leaders (cf. Eph. 4:11) proclaimed the gospel, but in different
ways (ordering, preaching, instructing).
SPECIAL TOPIC: INSPIRATION
The “once-for-all” faith refers to the truths, doctrines, concepts, worldview teachings of Christianity (cf. II Pet. 2:21). This once-given emphasis is the biblical basis for theologically limiting inspiration to the writings of the NT and not allowing later or other
writings to be considered revelatory. There are many ambiguous, uncertain, and grey areas in the NT, but believers affirm by faith
that everything that is “needed” for faith and practice is included with sufficient clarity in the NT.
This concept has been delineated in what is called “the revelatory triangle”
1. God has revealed Himself in time-space history (REVELATION)
2. He has chosen certain human writers to document and explain His acts (INSPIRATION)
3. He has given His Spirit to open the minds and hearts of humans to understand these writings, not definitively, but
adequately for salvation and an effective Christian life (ILLUMINATION)
The point of this is that inspiration is limited to the writers of Scripture. There are no further authoritative writings, visions,
or revelations. The canon is closed. We have all the truth we need to respond appropriately and pleasingly to God.
This truth is best seen in the agreement of biblical writers versus the disagreement of sincere, godly believers. No modern writer
or speaker has the level of divine leadership that the writers of Scripture did.
SPECIAL TOPIC: ILLUMINATION
“God has acted in the past to clearly reveal Himself to mankind. In theology this is called revelation. He selected certain men
to record and explain this self-revelation. In theology this is called inspiration. He has sent His Spirit to help readers understand His
word. In theology this is called illumination. The problem arises when we assert that the Spirit is involved in understanding God’s
word—so why are there so many interpretations of it?
Part of the problem lies in the reader’s pre-understanding or personal experiences. Often a personal agenda is addressed by
using the Bible in a proof-text or atomistic fashion. Often a theological grid is imposed over the Bible allowing it to speak only in
certain areas and in selected ways. Illumination simply cannot be equated with inspiration although the Holy Spirit is involved in
each.
The best approach may be to attempt to assert the central idea of a paragraph, not interpret every detail of the text. It is the
topical thought which conveys the original author’s central truth. Outlining the book or literary unit helps one follow the intent of
the original inspired author. No interpreter is inspired. We cannot reproduce the biblical writer’s method of interpretation. We can
and must attempt to understand what they were saying to their day and then communicate that truth to our own day. There are parts
of the Bible that are ambiguous or hidden (until a certain time or period). There will always be disagreements on some texts and
subjects but we must state clearly the central truths and allow freedom for individual interpretations within the boundary of the
original author’s intent. Interpreters must walk in the light they have, always being open to more light from the Bible and the Spirit.
God will judge us based on the level of our understanding and how we live out that understanding.
▣ “Simeon who was called Niger” The term niger is Latin for dark or black. Some commentators try to relate this Simon to Mark
15:21.
▣ “Lucius of Cyrene” Possibly this is one of the Hellenistic Jews that preached to the Gentiles in Antioch (cf. 11:20). He is
probably not the Lucius mentioned in Rom. 16:21.
▣ “Manaen who had been brought up with Herod the tetrarch” Manaen is a Greek form of the Hebrew Manahem, which means
“comforter.” This man was either a foster brother (Greek literature) of Herod Antipas (see Introduction to chapter 12) or he grew
up with him (Koine papyri). Luke probably got much of his information about Herod Antipas (the Tetrarch) from conversations with
this man.
13:2
NASB “ministering”
NKJV “ministered”
NRSV “worshiping”
TEV “serving”
NJB “offering worship”
This is the Greek term leitourgia (a compound from “public” and “work”) from which we get the English term liturgy.
Originally it referred to someone who did public service at their own expense. In this context it implies a period of seeking God’s
will during a worship service. The verb could refer to the entire church or just the five men listed.
▣ “had fasted” In the OT there is only one fast day a year, the Day of Atonement, Leviticus 16. However, during the first century,
rabbinical Judaism had developed two fasts a week. Although fasting is not required of believers, many times it is helpful in
discerning God’s will (cf. 14:23).
SPECIAL TOPIC: FASTING
Fasting, though never commanded in the NT, was expected at the appropriate time for Jesus’ disciples (cf. Matt. 6:16,17; 9:15;
Mark 2:19; Luke 5:35). Proper fasting is described in Isaiah 58. Jesus set the precedent Himself (cf. Matt. 4:2). The early church
fasted (cf. Acts 13:2-3; 14:23; II Cor. 6:5; 11:27). The motive and manner are crucial; the timing, the length, and frequency are
optional. OT fasting is not a requirement for NT believers (cf. Acts 15:19-29). Fasting is not a way of showing off one’s spirituality,
but of drawing closer to God and seeking His guidance. It can be spiritually helpful.
The early church’s tendencies toward asceticism caused scribes to insert “fasting” in several passages (i.e., Matt. 17:21; Mark
9:29; Acts 10:30; I Cor. 7:5). For further information on these questionable texts consult Bruce Metzger’s A Textual Commentary
on the Greek New Testament, published by United Bible Societies.
▣ “the Holy spirit said” This is another biblical evidence for the personality of the Holy Spirit (see Special Topic at 1:2). Whether
it was audible or intuitive is uncertain (cf. 8:29; 10:19; 11:12; 20:23; 21:11). It is obvious that this was a very specific message (cf.
16:6-7), probably given through one of the prophets.
▣ “Set apart” This is an aorist active imperative. The term aphorizō has the same connotation as “holy” (hagiazō). It implies
set apart and equipped for an assigned divine task (cf. Rom. 1:1; Gal. 1:15).
▣ After “set apart” in the Greek text is the particle dē, which denotes intensity (cf. Luke 2:15; I Cor. 6:20). It gives an earnestness
to the Spirit’s call. There is a parallel in Paul’s statement of 15:36.
▣ “the work to which I have called them” This is a perfect middle (deponent) indicative. It is the Spirit who calls and equips
for ministry tasks (cf. I Cor. 12:7,11).
13:3 The verse has three aorist participles describing the spiritual preparations to send out the first missionaries from the church
at Antioch.
1. fasted
2. prayed
3. laid hands on them
This seems to be the united actions of the whole congregation, not just the other prophets and teachers. The whole church should
be involved in Great Commission activities!
▣ “laid their hands on them” This particular verse is one of the ambiguous texts on which our modern practice of ordination is
based. However, it is inappropriate as a biblical foundation for our modern denominational practices. There are many physical
examples of “laying on of hands” in the Bible.
1. in the OT for the purpose of
a. sacrificial identification (cf. Lev. 1:4; 3:2; 4:4; 16:21)
b. a blessing (cf. Gen. 48:13ff; Matt. 19:13,15)
c. the commissioning of a successor (cf. Num. 27:23; Deut. 34:9)
2. In the NT the background is equally as varied
a. for healing (cf. Luke 4:40; 13:13; Acts 9:17; 28:8)
b. dedication or commissioning to a task (cf. Acts 6:6; 13:3)
c. connected with receiving the Holy Spirit or spiritual gifts (cf. Acts 8:17; 19:6; I Tim. 4:14; II Tim. 1:6)
d. a reference to the basic teachings of Judaism or the church (cf. Heb. 6:2)
This laying on of hands was not an inaugurating experience. These men were already called, gifted, functioning leaders. It is not
a new ministry they are called to, but an expansion of what they were already doing.
Ordination tends to encourage a distinction among believers. It gives credence to the clergy-laity dichotomy. The Greek word
cleros (to inherit by lot) and laos (Greek word for people), when used in the NT, always refers to the entire group of believers. All
believers are called, gifted, full time ministers of the gospel (cf. Eph. 4:11-12). There is no biblical evidence for separating believers
into hierarchal groups. All believers are gifted for ministry to the body of Christ (cf. I Cor. 12:7, 11).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 13:4-12
4So, being sent out by the Holy Spirit, they went down to Seleucia and from there they sailed to Cyprus. 5When they
reached Salamis, they began to proclaim the word of God in the synagogues of the Jews; and they also had John as their
helper. 6When they had gone through the whole island as far as Paphos, they found a magician, a Jewish false prophet whose
name was Bar-Jesus, 7who was with the proconsul, Sergius Paulus, a man of intelligence. This man summoned Barnabas and
Saul and sought to hear the word of God. 8But Elymas the magician (for so his name is translated) was opposing them,
seeking to turn the proconsul away from the faith. 9But Saul, who was also known as Paul, filled with the Holy Spirit, fixed
his gaze on him, 10and said, “You who are full of all deceit and fraud, you son of the devil, you enemy of all righteousness,
will you not cease to make crooked the straight ways of the Lord? 11“Now, behold, the hand of the Lord is upon you, and
you will be blind and not see the sun for a time.” And immediately a mist and a darkness fell upon him, and he went about
seeking those who would lead him by the hand. 12Then the proconsul believed when he saw what had happened, being amazed
at the teaching of the Lord.
13:4 “being sent out by the Holy Spirit” This context does not assert the authority of the local church, but the authority of the Spirit.
He is that part of the Trinity (see Special Topic at 2:32) emphasized in Acts. The “new Messianic age” was known as “the age of
the Spirit.” He calls, gifts, directs, convicts, and empowers (cf. John 14:16-17,26; 15:26; 16:7-15). No permanent or effective
ministry can occur without His presence and blessing.
▣ “Seleucia” This was the port city of Antioch of Syria. It was about fifteen miles southwest. Its name goes back to Alexander
the Great’s general (Seleucid), who ruled this area after Alexander’s death.
▣ “Cyprus” This was Barnabas’ home (cf. 4:36) where there was a large Jewish population. In the OT it is known as Kittim. This
was not the first Christian witness on this island (cf. 11:19-20).
13:5 “Salamis” This was the port city on the east coast of the island of Cyprus. It was the commercial center of the island.
▣ “they began to proclaim the word of God in the synagogue” The reason for this is obvious.
1. these Jews already knew the OT
2. Jews were the chosen people (cf. Gen. 12:1-3) and had the first opportunity to respond (cf. 3:26; 13:46; 17:2; 18:4,19;
19:8; Rom. 1:16)
3. in the synagogue services were Gentiles who [a] had already been attracted to the one true God and [b] knew the OT
This became Paul’s regular missionary method wherever there was a synagogue.
▣ “John” This refers to John Mark in whose home the disciples met (cf. Acts 12:12). He is also the traditional writer of the Gospel
of Mark, which seems to record the eyewitness testimony of the Apostle Peter. He is also the cause of the great argument between
Paul and Barnabas which split the missionary team (cf. 15:36-41). However, later on Paul mentions John Mark in a positive way (cf.
Col. 4:10; II Tim. 4:11 and Philemon v. 24). See fuller note at Introduction to chapter 16.
13:6 “when they had gone through the whole island” This probably means that they stopped and preached in every synagogue
on the island.
▣ “Paphos” This refers to new Paphos, in contradistinction from the older Phoenician city seven miles away. Both of these cities
are named after the Phoenician goddess Paphian. This was the god of love also known as Aphrodite, Astarte, Venus, etc. This city
was the official political capital of Cyprus.
▣ “Bar-Jesus” This man was a Jewish false prophet. His name means “son of Joshua.” We learn from v. 8 that he went by the
designation Elymas the magician. This term magician reflects the Greek equivalent of an Aramaic root that means “sorcerer” (cf.
v. 10). See Special Topic at 8:9.
13:7 “the proconsul, Sergius Paulus” There has been much discussion about the historicity of Luke’s accounts. Here is a good
example of the accuracy of Luke the historian. He calls this man “a proconsul,” which meant Cyprus was a Roman Senatorial
province. We learn this occurred in a.d. 22 by decree from Augustus. We also learn from a Latin inscription at Soloi that Sergius
Paulus began his proconsulship in a.d. 53. The more information archaeology discovers from the Mediterranean world of the first
century, the more Luke’s historical accuracy is corroborated.
▣ “a man of intelligence” This term is used with a wide variety of connotations. In this context it implies he was able to rule
effectively. Also characterizing him in this way shows that the gospel not only impacted the poor and uneducated, but also the
wealthy and educated (cf. Manaen 13:1). It is also possible that one of Luke’s intents of writing Acts was to show that the gospel
did not threaten Roman rule.
13:8 “Elymas” It seems that this Greek name is a transliteration of
1. an Arabic term for a wise man (a sage, a diviner, one who can foresee and control the future by manipulating the unseen
powers/forces of the unseen realm, AB, vol. 2, p. 487)
2. an Aramaic word for one who interprets dreams
▣ “magician” This is related to the term “magi,” which meant Chaldean-Median wise men, like Daniel (cf. Dan. 2:2; 4:9; Matt. 2:1).
However, by Paul’s day, it was used of itinerant magicians and wandering quacks in the Greco-Roman world. See Special Topic at
8:9.
▣ “the faith” This term is used in three specific ways in the NT:
1. personal trusting in Jesus Christ as a Savior
2. faithful, godly living
3. theological content of the gospel (i.e., doctrine, cf. Jude 3, 20)
The same ambiguity is seen in Acts 6:7. Here it seems to refer to #3 because of the article and the context. See Special Topics at
3:16 and 6:5.
13:9 “Paul” This is the first use of his Roman cognomen in the book of Acts. Paul is from a Greek term that means “little.” Some
think it refers to Paul’s physical size, others to his own personal evaluation of himself as “the least of the apostles” because he
persecuted the church. It was probably the second name given to him by his parents at birth.
▣ “Paul, filled with the Holy Spirit” The power of the Spirit that guided the early church is described by the term “the filling” (cf.
2:4; 4:8,31; 6:3; 7:55; 9:17; 13:9,52). The ongoing, daily filling of the Spirit is the normal state of all believers (cf. Eph. 5:18). In
Acts it is usually associated with a boldness to proclaim the gospel.
▣ “fixed his gaze” See fuller note at 1:10.
13:10 Paul characterizes this Jewish false prophet by several terms.
1. “full by deceit,” meaning to entrap with a bait (this is the only use of this term in Luke’s writings)
2. “full of all fraud,” this is from the Greek word that means to do something lightly or frivolously, but it came to have an
evil connotation (cf. 18:14). This term is found only in Acts (cf. 13:10; 18:14).
3. “son of the devil,” this is a Semitic idiom (cf. 3:25; 4:36) for one characterized by the actions of the devil (cf. Matt. 13:38;
John 8:38,41,44, see Special Topics at 5:3)
4. “enemy of all righteousness,” This term is used several times in Luke’s writings involving OT quotes (cf. Luke 1:71,74;
20:43; Acts 2:35). All that is like God, this man was against. See Special Topic: Righteousness at 3:14.
5. Paul uses the inclusive term “all” three times to show this man’s complete volitional wickedness
▣ “to make crooked the straight ways of the Lord” This question expects a “yes” answer. The word “right” or “straight” in the
NT reflects the OT concept of righteousness, which meant a standard or measuring reed. The NT terms “crooked” or “perverted”
reflect the OT terms for sin, which were a deviation from the standard, which is God Himself. This man made everything crooked
(i.e., the opposite of righteousness). See Special Topic at 3:14.
13:11 “the hand of the Lord” This is a Semitic anthropomorphic phrase referring to the power and presence of YHWH (cf. Luke
1:66; Acts 11:21). In the OT it often refers to God’s judgment (cf. Exod. 9:3; I Sam. 5:6; Job 19:21; 23:2; Ps. 32:4; 38:2; 39:10),
as it does here.
▣ “you will be blind” These powerful descriptive terms of evil and rebellion by which Paul characterizes this man and the form of
his temporary divine punishment may reflect Paul’s own previous life. He looks back now and sees himself in this Jewish false
teacher and his manipulation (cf. 9:8).
Blindness is often used in a parabolic sense of a lack of spiritual receptivity (cf. John 9; Acts 9; also note Deut. 28:28-29).
13:12 “believed when he saw what happened” This is the same Greek word (pisteuō, the noun can be translated as believe, faith,
or trust) used throughout the NT for genuine belief. This governor responded to the gospel message. One man’s eyes were closed
(literally); one man’s eyes were opened (metaphorically). This is the mystery of belief and unbelief (cf. John 9). See Special Topics:
Faith (noun, verb, and adjective) at 3:16 and OT Faith at 6:5.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 13:13-16a
13Now Paul and his companions put out to sea from Paphos and came to Perga in Pamphylia; but John left them and
returned to Jerusalem. 14But going on from Perga, they arrived at Pisidian Antioch, and on the Sabbath day they went into
the synagogue and sat down. 15After the reading of the Law and the Prophets the synagogue officials sent to them, saying,
“Brethren, if you have any word of exhortation for the people, say it.” 16Paul stood up, and motioning with his hand said,
13:13 “Paul and his companions” Obviously the leadership has changed. From now on in the book of Acts Paul’s name will be
listed first.
▣ “Perga in Pamphylia” Perga was the largest city of the small Roman coastal province of Pamphylia (mid-southern Turkey). It
was located several miles inland to discourage attacks by sea-faring raiders.
Apparently Paul did not preach here at this time, but did so later (cf. 14:25). There is no historical evidence of a Christian group
in this area for several hundred years. He merely passed through this coastal region.
▣ “John left them and returned to Jerusalem” Luke records this event, but gives no clue as to why (nor does any other NT author).
See Introduction to chapter 16, he returned to the Lord’s service!
13:14 “Pisidian Antioch” This literally means “Antioch towards Pisidia” because it was located in the ethnic area of Phrygia the
Roman Province of Galatia. This was a distinct ethnic group, probably from Europe.
▣ “on the Sabbath day” This would denote from sundown on Friday to sundown on Saturday. The Jews counted time from evening
to evening, following Genesis 1.
▣ “sat down” This may be an idiom denoting someone who was to speak in the synagogue. Rabbis always taught while seated (cf.
Matt. 5:1; Luke 4:20). The synagogues regularly allowed itinerant visitors to speak if they wished (cf. v. 15).
13:15 “the reading of the Law and the Prophets” This was the part of the typical order of service in a synagogue in Jesus’ day.
Originally only the Law of Moses was read, but Antiochus IV Epiphanes forbade this in 163 b.c. The Jews then substituted the
reading of the Prophets. During the Maccabeen revolt, Judaism was restored and both the Law and the Prophets were continued to
be read together as a basic format of synagogue services (cf. v. 27). See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: HEBREW CANON
The Hebrew Bible is divided into three divisions (the English Bible follows the order of the Septuagint).
1. The Torah (Pentateuch), Genesis – Deuteronomy
2. The Prophets
a. former prophets, Joshua – Kings (except Ruth)
b. later prophets, Isaiah – Malachi (except Lamentations and Daniel)
3. The Writings
a. Wisdom Literature, Job – Proverbs
b. Post-exilic Literature, Ezra – Esther
c. Megilloth (five scrolls)
(1) Ruth (read at Pentecost)
(2) Ecclesiastes (read at tabernacles)
(3) Song of Songs (read at Passover)
(4) Lamentations (read to remember the fall of Jerusalem in 586 b.c.)
(5) Esther (read at Purim)
d. Daniel
e. I and II Chronicles
▣ “the synagogue officials” These were the men in charge of building maintenance and the order of worship (cf. Luke 8:41,49).
They often invited guests to speak.
▣ “if you have any word of exhortation” This is a first class conditional sentence, assumed to be true from the perspective
of the author of for his literary purposes. This was a normal aspect of synagogue worship. Paul took full advantage of the
opportunity.
13:16 “Paul stood up” Usually Jewish teachers sit when they teach; however, it was the Greco-Roman custom to stand while
teaching. Paul modified his manner and presentation to the audience.
▣ “motioning with his hand” Paul gestured for quiet. Luke mentions this eyewitness detail often (cf. 12:17; 13:16; 19:33; 21:40).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 13:16b-25
16“Men of Israel, and you who fear God, listen: 17‘The God of this people Israel chose our fathers and made the people
great during their stay in the land of Egypt, and with an uplifted arm He led them out from it. 18For a period of about forty
years He put up with them in the wilderness. 19When He had destroyed seven nations in the land of Canaan, He distributed
their land as an inheritance—all of which took about four hundred and fifty years. 20After these things He gave them judges
until Samuel the prophet. 21Then they asked for a king, and God gave them Saul the son of Kish, a man of the tribe of
Benjamin, for forty years. 22After He had removed him, He raised up David to be their king, concerning whom He also
testified and said, “I have found David the son of Jesse, a man after My heart, who will do all My will.” 23From the
descendants of this man, according to promise, God has brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, 24after John had proclaimed before
His coming a baptism of repentance to all the people of Israel. 25And while John was completing his course, he kept saying,
‘What do you suppose that I am? I am not He. But behold, one is coming after me the sandals of whose feet I am not worthy
to untie.’”
13:16b “Men of Israel, and you who fear God, listen” There were two groups present, Jews and Gentile “God-fearers” (cf. v. 26;
10:2,22,35). This sermon is very similar to Stephen’s sermon of Acts 7. In many ways Paul was deeply influenced by Stephen’s
understanding of the OT and the gospel.
13:17 Paul began his review of OT history with the call of the Patriarchs (Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob in Genesis) and the captivity
and deliverance from Egypt (Exodus-Deuteronomy).
▣ “with an uplifted arm He led them out” This is typical OT imagery (cf. LXX Exod. 6;1,6) of YHWH in physical terms. It is
similar to the anthropomorphic phrase, “His right arm.” The Bible speaks of God in human vocabulary (i.e., anthropomorphism) even
though He is an eternal, non-physical, all pervasive Spirit. These biblical analogies are the source of many misunderstandings and
literal overstatements. The Bible speaks of God in analogy, metaphor, and negation. God is far greater than fallen, time-bound, earth-bound humans can comprehend or express! See Special Topic at 2:33.
13:18 “For a period of about forty years He put up with them in the wilderness” This reflects Deut. 1:31 and could be translated
“fed as a nurse” (cf. MSS A, C). This reflects the OT books of Exodus and Numbers.
The term “forty” is often a round number. Literally the time from Horeb to Shittim was thirty-eight years with a two year period
at Horeb (Sinai). See Special Topic at 1:3.
13:19 “destroyed seven nations” The nations of Palestine can be characterized in several ways.
1. collective terms, Canaanite (i.e., lowlander, cf. Gen. 10:18-29; Jdgs. 1:1) or Amorite (i.e., highlander, cf. Gen. 15:16)
2. two nations (Canaanites, Perizzites, cf. Gen. 13:7; 34:30; Jdgs. 1:4-5)
3. three nations (Hivites, Canaanites, Hittites, cf. Exod. 23:28)
4. six nations (Canaanite, Hittite, Amorite, Perizzite, Hivite, Jebusite, cf. Exod. 3:8,17; 33:2; 34:11; Deut. 20:17; Josh. 9:1;
12:8)
5. seven nations (Hittites, Girgashites, Amorites, Canaanites, Perizzites, Hivites, Jebusites, cf. Deut. 7:1; Josh. 3:10; 24:11)
6. ten nations (Kenites, Kenizzites, Kadmonites, Hittites, Perizzites, Rephaim, Amonites, Canaanites, Girgashites, Jebusites,
cf. Gen. 15:19-21)
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE PRE-ISRAELITE INHABITANTS OF PALESTINE
A. There are several lists of peoples.
1. Genesis 15:19-21 (10)
a. Kenite d. Hittite g. Amorite j. Jebusite
b. Kenizzite e. Perizzite h. Canaanite
c. Kadmonite f. Rephaim i. Girgashite
2. Exodus 3:17 (6)
a. Canaanite d. Perizzite
b. Hittite e. Hivite
c. Amorite f. Jebusite
3. Exodus 23:28 (3)
a. Hivites c. Hittites
b. Canaanites
4. Deuteronomy 7:1 (7)
a. Hittites d. Canaanites g. Jebusites
b. Girgashites e. Perizzites
c. Amorites f. Hivites
5. Joshua 24:11 (7)
a. Amorite d. Hittite g. Jebusite
b. Perizzite e. Girgashite
c. Canaanite f. Hivite
B. The origin of the names if dubious because of lack of historical data. Genesis 10:15-19 includes several of them as related to
Canaan, a son of Ham.
C. Brief descriptions from the longest list in Gen. 15:19-21
1. Kenite – BDB 884
– non-Israelite
– names related to “forger” or “smith,” which could refer to metal working or music (cf. Gen. 4:19-22)
– connected to the area of Sinai north to Hebron
– name connected to Jethro, Moses’ father-in-law (cf. Jdgs. 1:16; 4:11)
2. Kenizzite – BDB 889
– relative of Jews
– a clan of Edom (cf. Gen. 15:19)
– lived in Negev
– possibly absorbed into Judah (cf. Num. 32:12; Josh. 14:6,14)
3. Kadmonite – BDB 870 II
– non-Israelite, possibly a descendant of Ishmael (cf. Gen. 25:15).
– name relates to “easterner”
– lived in Negev
– possibly related to “the men of the east” (cf. Job 1:3)
4. Hittite – BDB 366
– non-Israelite
– descendant of Heth
– from kingdom of Anatolia (Asia Minor, Turkey)
– were present very early in Canaan (cf. Genesis 23; Josh. 11:3)
5. Perizzite – BDB 827
– non-Israelite, possibly Hurrians
– lived in forested area of Judah (cf. Gen. 34:30; Jdgs. 1:4; 16:10)
6. Rephaim – BDB 952
– non-Israelite, possibly giants (cf. Gen. 14:5; Num. 33:33; Deut. 2:10-11,20)
– lived on eastern bank of Jordan (cf. Gen. 15:20; Josh. 12:4; 13:12; Deut. 2:8-11,20; 3:13) or western
bank (cf. Josh. 15:8; 17:15; II Sam. 5:18,22; 23:13; I Chr. 20:4)
– line of warriors/heroes
7. Amorite – BDB 57
– northwestern Semitic people-group from Ham (cf. Gen. 10:16)
– became general designation for inhabitants of Canaan (cf. Gen. 15:16; Deut. 1:7; Josh. 10:5; 24:15;
II Sam. 21:2)
– the name may mean “the west”
– the ISBE, vol. 1, p. 119, says the term denotes
a. the inhabitants of Palestine generally
b. the population of the hill country as opposed to the coastal plain
c. a specific people group with their own king
8. Canaanite – BDB 489
– from Ham (cf. Gen. 10:15)
– general designation of all the tribes in Canaan west of the Jordan
– meaning of Canaan uncertain, possibly “merchant” or “red-purple dye”
– as a people group they dwelt along the coastal plain (cf. Num. 13:29)
9. Girgashite – BDB 173
– from Ham (cf. Gen. 10:16) or at least “from a son of [i.e., the country of] Canaan,” ISBE, vol. 2, p.
1232)
10. Jebusite – BDB 101
– from Ham (cf. Gen. 10:16)
– from city of Jebus/Salem/Jerusalem (cf. Josh. 15:63; Jdgs. 19:10)
– Ezek. 16:3,45 asserts they were a mixed race from Amorite and Hittite
11. Hivites – BDB 295
– from Ham (cf. Gen. 10:17)
– translated by LXX as Horite (cf. Gen. 34:2; 36:20-30; Josh. 9:7)
– possibly from the Hebrew word “cave,” therefore cave dwellers
– they lived in the highlands of Lebanon (cf. Josh. 11:3; Jdgs. 3:3). In II Sam. 24:7 they are listed next
to Tyre and Sidon
▣ “an inheritance” The triple compound term kata + klēros + nemō is common in the Septuagint, but is used only here in the NT
(other texts have kata + klēros + didōmi). It implies the casting of lots as a means of dividing the Promised Land among the tribes
(cf. Josh. 13-19). The word klēros is where we get the English word “clergy,” but in the NT it always refers to the body of believers,
not an elite group!
▣ “four hundred and fifty years” This number seems to be arrived at by:
1. 400 year bondage in Egypt (cf. Gen. 15:13)
2. 40 year wilderness wandering period (cf. Exod. 16:35; Num. 14:33-34; 32:13)
3. 7-10 year conquest (cf. Josh. 14:7,10)
The Textus Receptus (KJV) moves the number to v. 20 and seems to involve the Judges (following Josephus, Antiq. 8.3.1), but
this wording is not in the older and better uncial Greek manuscripts (cf. א, A, B, C), which fits better with I Kgs. 6:1 dating. The dash
found in the NASB is to accentuate the proper place of the number.
13:20 This refers to the period from the book of Judges through I Samuel 7.
13:21 This refers to I Sam. 8-10.
▣ “for forty years” This time phrase is not found in the OT unless the OT manuscript problem connected to I Sam. 13:1 includes
“forty” (NIV). Josephus, Antiq. 6.14.9 also mentions that Saul reigned “forty” years. The Septuagint just omits the entire sentence
and starts with I Sam. 3:2. “Forty” was obviously a rabbinical tradition.
13:22 “I have found David the son of Jesse, a man after My heart” This is not a direct quote from the OT but it seems to
be a combination of Psalm 89:20 and I Samuel 13:14. It needs to be remembered that this sermon by Paul follows the basic pattern
of Stephen’s historical rendition in Acts 7. That David can be called a man after God’s heart, when he was such a notorious sinner
(cf. Ps. 32,51; II Samuel 11), is a great encouragement to all believers.
This combination quote implies several things.
1. This was a standard practice with the rabbis, which explains many of the unusual OT quotes in the NT.
2. This was already a part of Christian catechism. Paul often quotes from early Christian hymns and possibly other literature.
3. This quote is unique to Paul and shows that Luke must have gotten his summary of this first recorded message of Paul in
Acts from Paul himself.
▣
NASB, NKJV “who will do all My will”
NRSV “who will carry out all my wishes”
TEV “who will do all I want him to do”
NJB “who will perform my entire will”
This verse is a combination OT allusion. This part of the sentence is not in the OT passages. In the OT context Saul was
disobedient and rejected. But David’s life also had disobedience. God works with imperfect humans to accomplish His redemptive
plan.
13:23 This is parallel to Acts 7:52. It points back to all the OT promises.
1. a redemption through the seed of a woman, Gen, 3:15
2. a ruler from Judah, Gen. 49:10
3. a coming leader like Moses, the Prophet, Deut. 18:15,18
4. a leader from David, II Sam. 7; Ps. 132:11; Isa. 11:1,10; Matt. 1:1
5. a suffering servant, Isa. 52:13-53:12
6. a savior, Luke 2:11; Matt. 1:21; John 1:29; 4:42; Acts 5:31
For Luke #4 is prominent (cf. Luke 1:32,69; 2:4; 3:31; Acts 2:29-31; 13:22-23). The Messiah would be of Jesse’s line (cf. Isa.
9:7; 11:1,10; 16:5).
13:24 John the Baptist’s ministry and message is described in Mark 1:1-8; Matt. 3:1-11; Luke 3:2-17; John 1:6-8,19-28. John
fulfilled the prophecies of Matt. 3:1; 4:5-6. His preaching of repentance also set the pattern for Jesus’ early preaching (cf. Matt. 4:17;
Mark 1:14-15).
John spoke of a Coming One, greater than himself (cf. Matt. 3:11; Mark 1:7; Luke 3:16; John 1:27,30; Acts 13:25).
13:25 “while John was completing his course” God had a specific task for John to perform. John’s public ministry only lasted
eighteen months. But, what a year and a half it was, filled with the Spirit’s power and preparing the way for the Messiah.
Paul knew the OT from his youth in synagogue school and his training as a rabbi under Gamaliel in Jerusalem. He heard the
gospel
1. from Stephen
2. from believers he persecuted
3. by a special vision from Jesus
4. from a believing Jewish layman from Damascus
5. by Jesus in Arabia
6. when he visited with the other Apostles
He tries to quote Jesus’ whenever he can on a subject. Here he quotes the Gospel accounts of His life
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 13:26-41
26“Brethren, sons of Abraham’s family, and those among you who fear God, to us the message of this salvation has been
sent. 27For those who live in Jerusalem, and their rulers, recognizing neither Him nor the utterances of the prophets which
are read every Sabbath, fulfilled these by condemning Him. 28And though they found no ground for putting Him to death,
they asked Pilate that He be executed. 29When they had carried out all that was written concerning Him, they took Him down
from the cross and laid Him in a tomb. 30But God raised Him from the dead; 31and for many days He appeared to those who
came up with Him from Galilee to Jerusalem, the very ones who are now His witnesses to the people. 32And we preach to you
the good news of the promise made to the fathers, 33that God has fulfilled this promise to our children in that He raised up
Jesus, as it is also written in the second Psalm, ‘You are My Son; today have begotten You.’ 34As for the fact that He
raised Him up from the dead, no longer to return to decay, He has spoken in this way: ‘I will give you the holy and sure
blessings of David.’ 35Therefore He also says in another Psalm, ‘You will not allow Your Holy One to undergo
decay.’ 36For David, after he had served the purpose of God in his own generation, fell asleep, and was laid among his
fathers and underwent decay; 37but He whom God raised did not undergo decay. 38Therefore let it be known to you,
brethren, that through Him forgiveness of sins is proclaimed to you, 39and through Him everyone who believes is freed from
all things, from which you could not be freed through the Law of Moses. 40Therefore take heed, so that the thing spoken of
in the Prophets may not come upon you: 41‘Behold, you scoffers, and marvel, and perish; For I am accomplishing
a work in your days, A work which you will never believe, though someone should describe it to you.’”
13:26 “sons of Abraham’s family, and those among you who fear God” This refers to both the Jewish hearers (or proselytes)
and the Gentiles (God-fearers) attached to Judaism’s monotheism and morality.
▣ “this salvation” This is referring to God’s promise to redeem fallen humanity through a Messiah (cf. Gen. 3:15). It includes
Gentiles (cf. Gen. 12:5; Exod. 19:5-6; and Acts 28:28 and 13:46).
13:27 This is such a tragic verse. It succinctly summarizes the blindness of the Jews in Jerusalem about the Scriptures even though
they read them continuously. By missing the prophetic signs (cf. Psalm 22; Isaiah 53; Zechariah; Malachi) and prophecies (Isaiah,
Jonah) they became the prophetic sign! He came to His own, but His own received Him not (cf. John 1:11-12).
13:28 Acts records again and again the spiritual responsibility of the Jews in Jerusalem (cf. 2:23,36; 3:13-15; 4:10; 5:30; 7:52; 10:;39;
13:27-28).
13:29 “they. . .they” These must refer to different groups. The first were those who sought His death (i.e., Jewish leadership, the
crowd before Pilate). The second involves those who wanted a proper burial. This could have involved sincere Jewish people who
saw the injustice (similar to Acts 8:2, involving the burial of Stephen) or secret disciples like Joseph of Arimathea and Nicodemus
(cf. John 19:38-42).
▣ “all that was written concerning Him” Jesus’ life was one of fulfilled prophecy. One strong evidence for the inspiration of the
Bible and the Messiahship of Jesus of Nazareth is predictive prophecy (cf. Luke 22:22; Acts 2:23; 3:18; 4:28; 10:43; 13:29; 24:14;
26:22).
It is surely true that many of the details of Jesus’ life, which we in the church today call prophecy, are in a sense typology. Many
events happened in the life of Israel which later seem to also occur in Jesus’ life (one example, Hosea 11:1). Often ambiguous,
oblique passages, which would not have been understood in context as prophetic, seem to jump to life as one views Jesus’ earthly
experience (ex. Psalm 22; Isaiah 53). It takes inspiration and a sense of the flow of redemptive history to fully appreciate the OT
foreshadowing of Jesus. I would also add that although inspired NT writers use typology, even allegory, that modern teachers and
preachers should not use this method of interpretation! See Bob’s Biblical Interpretation Seminar online at
www.freebiblecommentary.org
▣ “the cross” See notes at 5:30 and 10:29.
13:30,33,34,37 “But God raised Him from the dead” The NT affirms that all three persons of the Trinity were active in Jesus’
resurrection:
1. the Spirit (cf. Rom. 8:11)
2. the Son (cf. John 2:19-22; 10:17-18)
3. the Father (cf. Acts 2:24,32; 3:15,26; 4:10; 5:30; 10:40; 13:30,33,34,37; 17:31; Rom. 6:4,9; 10:9; I Cor. 6:14; II Cor. 4:14;
Gal. 1:1; Eph. 1:20; Col. 2:12; I Thess. 1:10).
This was the Father’s confirmation of the truth of Jesus’ life and teachings. This is a major aspect of the Kerygma (i.e., content of
the sermons in Acts). See Special Topic at 2:14.
13:31 “for many days” Acts 1:3 says “forty days.” However, forty is a common OT round number. See Special Topic at 1:3.
▣ “He appeared” See Special Topic: Jesus’ Post-resurrection Appearances at 1:3
13:32 “the promise made to the fathers” This refers to the initial promise of YHWH to Abraham for a land and a seed (cf. Gen.
12:1-3; Romans 4). This same promise of God’s presence and blessing was repeated to the Patriarchs and to their children (cf. Isa.
44:3; 54:13; Joel 2:32). The OT focuses on the land, while the NT focuses on “the seed.” Paul alludes to this very promise in Rom.
1:2-3.
13:33 This quote from Ps. 2:7, which is a royal messianic psalm about the conflict and victory of God’s Promised Messiah. Jesus
had been killed by evil forces (human and demonic), but God had raised Him to victory (cf. Rom. 1:4).
This verse and Rom. 1:4 were used by early heretics (adoptionists) to assert that Jesus became Messiah at the resurrection.
There is surely a NT emphasis on Jesus being affirmed and glorified because of His obedience, but this must not be taken in isolation
from His preexistent glory and deity (cf. John 1:1-5,9-18; Phil. 2:6-11; Col. 1:13-18; Heb. 1:2-3).
This same verb, “raised up” (anistēmi), is used in Acts 3:26 of God raising up “His Servant”; in Acts 3:22 of God raising up
the Prophet (cf. 7:37; Deut. 18:19). This seems to be a distinct usage from “raised” from the dead (cf. vv. 30,34,37). Jesus was
“raised up” before He died!
13:34 “no longer to return to decay” This statement refers to Jesus’ death and resurrection. He was the first to be resurrected (first
fruits of the dead, cf. I Cor. 15:20) rather than resuscitated. Many people were brought back to physical life in the Bible, but they
all had to die again. Enoch and Elijah were translated to heaven without death, but they were not resurrected.
▣ “I will give you the holy and sure blessings of David” This is a quote from Isa. 55:3 from the LXX. The quote includes
the plural “sure blessings,” but does not specify to what this refers. It is something that passed from God to David, to Jesus, then to
His followers (plural “you” in the quote). The OT context shows the significance of “you” (cf. Isa. 55:4-5 LXX, “Behold, I have
made him a testimony among the Gentiles, a prince and commander to the Gentiles. Nations which know thee not, shall call upon
thee, and peoples which are not acquainted with thee, shall flee to thee for refuge, for the sake of the Lord thy God, the Holy One
of Israel, for he has glorified thee,” The Septuagint, Zondervan, 1976, p. 890).
The blessings and promises to David (i.e., Jews) are now the blessing and promises of the Gentiles (i.e., the entire human race).
13:35-37 This is the same argument used earlier in Peter’s Pentecost sermon (cf. 2:24-32), also taken from Psalm 16. These early
sermons in Acts reflect an early Christian catechism. Several OT Messianic texts were strung together. Therefore, often the
pronouns and details do not seem to be relevant to the central purpose of the NT author, which was to affirm the physical
resurrection of Jesus and the decay of David.
13:38 Paul is using an OT augmented argument, as does Peter (Acts 2) and Stephen (Acts 7) to reach these synagogue hearers.
Paul promises a full and complete forgiveness of sins, which Judaism could not provide (cf. v. 39), to all who trust Jesus as the
Christ (i.e., “This One,” vv. 38,39).
13:39 “and through Him everyone” Notice the universal element. God loves all humans and all humans have the opportunity to
respond to Him by faith (cf. 10:43; Isa. 42:1,4,6,10-12; 55; Ezek. 18:23,32; Joel 2:28,32; John 3:16; 4:42; Rom. 3:22,29,30; 10:9-13;
I Tim. 2:4; 4:10; Titus 2:11; II Peter 3:9; I John 2:1; 4:14).
▣ “who believes” See Special Topics at 3:16 and 6:5.
▣
NASB, NKJV “is freed from all things” (v. 39)
NRSV “is set free from all those sins” (v. 39)
TEV “is set free from all the sins” (v. 39)
NJB “justification from all sins” (v. 38)
This is literally “justified” (present passive indicative). This is a legal term which describes our standing before God through
Jesus Christ’s righteousness (cf. II Cor. 5:21). In Hebrew it originally means a “river reed” (see Special Topic at 3:14). It reflects
an OT construction term used metaphorically for God as the standard or ruler by which judgement is made.
▣ “which you could not be freed through the Law of Moses” This was Paul’s major theological point (cf. Rom. 3:21-30). The
Mosaic law was a tutor to bring us to an understanding of our personal sin and to cause us to desire Christ (cf. Gal. 3:23-29). The
OT Law is not a means of salvation, because all sinned (cf. Rom. 3:9-18,23; Gal. 3:22). It had become a death sentence, a curse (cf.
Gal. 3:13; Col. 2:14).
SPECIAL TOPIC: PAUL’S VIEWS OF THE MOSAIC LAW
It is good and from God (cf. Rom. 7:12,16).
A. It is not the way to righteousness and acceptance by God (it can even be a curse, cf. Galatians. 3).
B. It is still God’s will for believers because it is God’s self-revelation (Paul often quotes the OT to convict and/or encourage
believers).
C. Believers are informed by the OT (cf. Rom. 4:23-24; 15:4; I Cor. 10:6,11), but not saved by the OT (cf. Acts 15; Romans
4; Galatians 3; Hebrews).
D. It functions in the new covenant to:
1. show sinfulness (cf. Gal. 3:15-29)
2. guide redeemed mankind in society
3. inform Christian ethical decisions
It is this theological spectrum from cursing and passing away to blessing and permanency that causes the problem in trying to
understand Paul’s view of the Mosaic Law. In A Man in Christ, James Stewart shows Paul’s paradoxical thinking and writing:
“You would normally expect a man who was setting himself to construct a system of thought and doctrine to fix as
rigidly as possible the meanings of the terms he employed. You would expect him to aim at precision in the phraseology
of his leading ideas. You would demand that a word, once used by your writer in a particular sense, should bear that sense
throughout. But to look for this from Paul is to be disappointed. Much of his phraseology is fluid, not rigid. . . ‘The law
is holy’ he writes, ‘I delight in the law of God after the inward man’ (cf. Rom. 7:12,22) but it is clearly another aspect of
nomos that makes him say elsewhere, ‘Christ had redeemed us from the curse of the law (cf. Gal. 3:13)” (p. 26).
13:40-41 Paul calls on his hearers (present active imperative) to respond by trusting Jesus as the Promised Messiah, as the only
way to receive forgiveness (cf. John 14:6; Acts 4:12; I Tim. 2:5).
He quotes Hab. 1:5 from the Septuagint as a warning. In other places in Paul’s writings he quotes Hab. 2:4 as an appropriate
response (cf. Rom. 1:17; Gal. 3:11). Paul preaches for a decision. Intellectual assent is not enough; a complete personal surrender
to Jesus as the only hope is required. This initial faith and repentant response must be matched by daily Christlike living.
Verse 41 describes the shocking new methodology of salvation of the new covenant in Christ.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 13:42-43
42As Paul and Barnabas were going out, the people kept begging that these things might be spoken to them the next
Sabbath. 43Now when the meeting of the synagogue had broken up, many of the Jews and of the God-fearing proselytes
followed Paul and Barnabas, who, speaking to them, were urging them to continue in the grace of God.
13:42
This shows the power of the Spirit (1) using Paul’s sermon and (2) the hunger for forgiveness and restoration with God within
the hearts of humans made in God’s image.
13:43
NASB “God-fearing proselytes”
NKJV “devout proselytes”
NRSV “devout converts to Judaism”
TEV “Gentiles who had been converted to Judaism”
NJB “devout converts”
This phrase is literally “worshiping proselytes.” This is a different group from the “ones fearing God” of vv. 16,26 (cf.
10:2,22,35).
Verse 43 refers to those Gentiles who had officially become Jews. This required
1. self baptism in the presence of witnesses
2. circumcision for males
3. offering a sacrifice at the Temple in Jerusalem when possible
There are a few references to Jewish proselytes in the NT (cf. Matt. 23;15; Acts 2:11; 6:5; 13:43).
▣ “urging them to continue in the grace of God” From the context it is difficult to define this phrase.
1. some of these hearers may have already responded to the gospel in their hearts
2. those who were faithful to what they understood of the grace of God in the OT are urged to continue to seek God and listen
to Paul again (cf. v. 44)
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 13:44-47
44The next Sabbath nearly the whole city assembled to hear the word of the Lord. 45But when the Jews saw the crowds,
they were filled with jealousy and began contradicting the things spoken by Paul, and were blaspheming. 46Paul and
Barnabas spoke out boldly and said, “It was necessary that the word of God be spoken to you first; since you repudiate it
and judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life, behold, we are turning to the Gentiles. 47For so the Lord has commanded us,
‘I have placed You as a light for the Gentiles, That You may bring salvation to the end of the earth.’”
13:44 Paul’s message had an obvious impact. This is also hyperbole. Not everyone in the city attended.
▣
NASB, NRSV,
TEV “the word of the Lord”
NKJV, NJB,
REB “the word of God”
There is a Greek manuscript variant at this point.
1. Lord is in MSS P74, א, A, B2
2. God is in MSS B, C, E
The UBS4 puts “Lord” in the text, but rates it “C” (difficulty deciding). As with so many variants, this does not change the sense of
the text. The gospel is a divine revelation about Jesus, the Messiah/Christ.
13:45 “when the Jews saw the crowd. . .jealousy” Whether it was the large turnout or the large number of Gentiles in the crowd
that caused the jealousy is uncertain in this context. Jealousy is attributed to Jewish leadership both in Jerusalem and the Diaspora.
(cf. Matt. 27:18; Mark 15:10; Acts 17:5).
Later in Romans Paul develops the theological problem of Jewish unbelief (cf. Romans 9-11). He asserts that God has
temporarily blinded Israel so that the Gentiles might be saved. However, God will use the salvation of the Gentiles as a means (i.e.,
jealousy) to cause Israel to respond to Christ, so that all believers will be united through the gospel (cf. Eph. 2:11-3:13).
The problem is when does this occur? The same question could be asked of Zech. 12:10. Is this prophecy related to the early
church, which was made up of believing Jews, or to a future period? Jealousy is meant for a redemptive purpose (cf. Rom. 10:19;
11:11,14), but the jealousy in this text causes unbelief!
▣ “they were fill with jealousy” See note at 3:10.
▣ “were blaspheming” As these Jews defended their traditions and attacked Paul’s preaching, they themselves were guilty of
blasphemy. There is no middle ground here. Either Judaism or Christianity is a true reflection of God’s will. They are exclusive!
13:46 “spoke out boldly” This is one of the signs in Acts of being Spirit-filled.
▣ “‘It was necessary that the word of God be spoken to you first’” This was the pattern of early missionary preaching. The Jews
had priority (cf. Romans 9-11), but God had included Gentiles. Those in the synagogue knew their OT and could check the
prophecies. Acts has a series of texts on this concept and pattern (cf. 3:26; 9:20; 13:5,14; 16:13; 17:2,10,17).
▣ “‘you repudiate it’” This is a strong verb (present middle indicative) used several times in the Septuagint. Its basic meaning
is “to thrust away.” It was used of the Israelites in Stephen’s sermon (cf. 7:39). It is also used by Paul in Rom. 11:1-2 to assert that
God has not rejected His people, but they have rejected His Son, His only means of salvation, His full revelation.
▣ “‘judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life’” It is difficult to hold the concept of predestination, which is emphasized so often
in Acts, with the concept of mandated individual personal response. No one can come to faith without the drawing of the Spirit (cf.
John 6:44,65), but we are judged by whether we respond or not. By their rejection of Paul’s preaching of the gospel, they revealed
their true selves (cf. John 3:17-21). The blame for lack of response cannot be placed on God. He has provided a way, His Son, but
He is the only way! It is the myster of “unbelief”!
▣ “we are turning to the Gentiles” This becomes a regular pattern of gospel proclamation (cf. 18:6; 22:21; 26:20; 28:28; Rom.
1:16).
13:47 This is a quote from Isa. 49:6 (cf. 42:6) from the Septuagint. Simeon used this quote at the blessing of Jesus in Luke 2:32 to
affirm His Messianic task of universal redemption (see Special Topic at 1:8). It is even possible that the “light” in the context refers
to Paul and Barnabas’ preaching of the gospel to these Gentiles (cf. “Use of the Old Testament in the New,” by Darrell Boch, p. 97
in Foundations for Biblical Interpretation, Broadman & Holman Publishers, 1994). Now Paul uses it to show the universal
proclamation of the universal gospel!
The ending phrase, “to the end of the earth,” may be an allusion to 1:8. It highlights the universality of the gospel.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 13:48-52
48When the Gentiles heard this, they began rejoicing and glorifying the word of the Lord; and as many as had been
appointed to eternal life believed. 49And the word of the Lord was being spread through the whole region. 50But the Jews
incited the devout women of prominence and the leading men of the city, and instigated a persecution against Paul and
Barnabas, and drove them out of their district. 51But they shook off the dust of their feet in protest against them and went
to Iconium. 52And the disciples were continually filled with joy and with the Holy Spirit.
13:48 “When the Gentiles heard this, they began rejoicing and glorifying the word of the Lord” Many of these had been in the
synagogue for years and had never heard the inclusive, universal message of God’s love and acceptance of all humanity by faith in
Messiah. When they heard it they enthusiastically received it (cf. 28:28) and passed it on to others (cf. v. 49).
▣ “as many as had been appointed to eternal life believed” This is a clear statement of predestination (so common in the rabbis’
and Intertestamental Jewish literature), but it is in the same ambiguous relationship as all NT passages that relate to the paradox of
God’s choice and human’s free will (cf. Phil. 2:12, 13). It is a pluperfect passive periphrastic that comes from a military term
(tassō) which means to “enroll” or “appoint.”
This concept of enrolling refers to the two metaphorical books that God keeps (cf. Dan. 7:10; Rev. 20:12). First is the Book
of the Deeds of men (cf. Ps. 56:8; 139:16; Isa. 65:6; and Mal. 3:16). The other is the Book of Life (cf. Exod. 32:32; Ps. 69:28; Isa.
4:3; Dan. 12:1; Luke 10:20; Phil. 4:3; Heb. 12:23; Rev. 3:5; 13:8; 17:8; 20:12-15; 21:27). See Special Topic: Election/Predestination
and the Need for a Theological Balance at 2:47.
13:50 “But the Jews incited the devout women of prominence” This text gives historical and cultural setting of the exalted place
of women in Asia Minor in the first century (cf. 16:14; 17:4).
In this context it refers to proselytes to Judaism who were also leaders in the community or were married to the civic leaders.
A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, vol. 3, p. 201, makes the point that Gentile women were greatly attracted to
Judaism (cf. Strabo 7:2 and Juvenal 6:542) because of its morality.
▣ “instigated a persecution against Paul” Paul refers to this in II Tim. 3:11.
13:51 “they shook off the dust of their feet” This is a Jewish sign of rejection (cf. Matt. 10:14; Mark 6:11; Luke 9:5; 10:11). It
is uncertain whether this refers to (1) dust on their feet and sandals from walking or (2) dust on their robes which was kicked up when
they were working.
▣ “Iconium” This was a major city of Lycaonia, located in the Roman province of Galatia. It was about eighty miles east, south-east
of Pisidian Antioch and directly north of Lystra.
13:52 “continually filled with joy” This is an imperfect passive indicative which can mean the beginning of an action or the
repeat of an action in past time. The NASB, 1995 update, takes it in the second sense. Only the Holy Spirit can give joy amidst
persecution (cf. Rom. 5:3; James 1:2ff; I Peter 4:12ff).
The phrase “the disciples” is ambiguous. Does it refer to the new believers, the missionary team, or both?
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why can 13:2-3 not be used as a proof-text for ordination by a select group?
2. Why did Paul preach in the synagogue first?
3. Why did John Mark leave the mission team? (cf. v. 13)
4. How is v. 39 related to Galatians 3?
5. Explain v. 48b in relation to predestination and human free will.
ACTS 14
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul and Barnabas at |
At Iconium |
Ministry in the Iconium |
In Iconium |
Iconium Evangelism |
14:1-7 |
14:1-7 |
14:1-7 |
14:1-4 |
14:1 |
|
|
|
|
14:2 |
|
|
|
|
14:3 |
|
|
|
|
14:4-7 |
|
|
|
14:5-7 |
|
Paul and Barnabas at Lystra |
Idolatry at Lystra |
|
In Lystra and Derbe |
Healing of a Cripple |
14:8-18 |
14:8-18 |
14:8-18 |
14:8-13 |
14:8-10 |
|
|
|
|
14:11-18 |
|
|
|
14:14-18 |
|
|
Stoning, Escape to Derbe |
|
|
End of the Mission |
14:19-20 |
14:19-20 |
14:19-20 |
14:19-20 |
14:19-20 |
The Return to Antioch in |
Strengthening the Converts |
|
The Return to Antioch in |
|
14:21-28 |
14:21-28 |
14:21-23 |
14:21-23 |
14:21-23 |
|
|
14:24-28 |
14:24-26 |
14:24-26 |
|
|
|
14:27-28 |
14:27-28 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
How Does Paul’s Mission Relate to Galatians?
A. These two aspects of background material must be dealt with together because two opposing theories of the identities of
the recipients affect the dating of the letter. Both theories have logical weight and limited biblical evidence.
B. The two theories
1. The traditional theory that was unanimous until the eighteenth century.
a. It is called the “Northern Galatian Theory.”
b. It assumes that “Galatia” refers to the ethnic Galatians of the northern central plateau of Turkey (cf. I Pet. 1:1).
These ethnic Galatians were Celts (Greek Keltoi or Latin Gall) who invaded this area in the third century b.c.
They were called “Gallo-Graecians” to distinguish them from their western European brothers. They were
defeated in 230 b.c. by Attalus I, the King of Pergamum. Their geographical influence was limited to northern
central Asia Minor or modern Turkey.
c. If this ethnic group is assumed, then the date would be the mid 50’s during Paul’s second or third missionary
journey. Paul’s traveling companions would be Silas and Timothy.
d. Some have linked Paul’s illness in Gal. 4:13 to malaria. They assert that Paul went north into the highlands
to get away from the marshy, malaria-infested, coastal lowlands.
2. The second theory is championed by Sir Wm. M. Ramsay, St. Paul the Traveler and Roman Citizen, New York:
G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1896.
a. Whereas the traditional theory defined “Galatia” as ethnic, this theory defines it as administrative. It seems that
Paul often used Roman provincial names (cf. I Cor. 16:19; II Cor. 1:1; 8:1, etc.) The Roman province of
“Galatia” included a larger area than ethnic “Galatia.” These ethnic Celts supported Rome very early and were
rewarded with more local autonomy and expanded territorial authority. If this large area was known as
“Galatia,” then it is possible that Paul’s first missionary journey to these southern cities of Antioch in Pisidia,
Lystra, Derbe and Iconium, recorded in Acts 13-14, is the location of these churches.
b. If one assumes this “Southern Theory,” the date would be very early—close to, but before, the “Jerusalem
Council” of Acts 15, which addresses the same subject matter as the book of Galatians. The Council occurred
in a.d. 48-49 and the letter was probably written during the same period. If this is true, Galatians is the first
letter of Paul in our New Testament.
c. Some evidences for the southern Galatian theory
(1) There is no mention of Paul’s traveling companions by name, but Barnabas is mentioned three times (cf.
2:1,9,13). This fits the first missionary journey of Paul.
(2) It is mentioned that Titus was not circumcised (cf. 2:1-5). This fits best before the Jerusalem Council of
Acts 15.
(3) The mention of Peter (cf. 2:11-14) and the problem of fellowship with Gentiles fits best before the
Jerusalem Council.
(4) When the money was taken to Jerusalem several companions of Paul from different areas (cf. Acts 20:4)
were listed. None, however, were listed from northern Galatia cities, although we know these ethnic
Galatian churches participated (cf. I Cor. 16:1).
For a detailed presentation of the different arguments concerning these theories, consult a technical commentary.
They each have valid points. At this point in time there is no consensus, but the “Southern Theory” seems to fit all
of the facts best.
C. Relationship of Galatians to Acts
1. Paul made five visits to Jerusalem, recorded by Luke in the book of Acts
a. 9:26-30, after his conversion
b. 11:30; 12:25, to bring famine relief from the Gentile churches
c. 15:1-30, the Jerusalem Council
d. 18:22, brief visit
e. 21:15ff., another explanation of Gentile work
2. There are two visits to Jerusalem recorded in Galatians:
a. 1:18, after three years
b. 2:1, after fourteen years
3. It seems most probable that Acts 9:26 is related to Gal. 1:18. Acts 11:30 & 15:1ff. are the setting of unrecorded
meetings which are mentioned in Gal. 2:1.
4. There are some differences between the Acts 15 and Gal. 2 accounts but this is probably due to
a. different perspectives
b. different purposes of Luke and Paul
c. the fact that Gal. 2 may have occurred sometime before the meeting described in Acts 15 but in conjunction
with it.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 14:1-7
1In Iconium they entered the synagogue of the Jews together, and spoke in such a manner that a large number of people
believed, both of Jews and of Greeks. 2But the Jews who disbelieved stirred up the minds of the Gentiles and embittered them
against the brethren. 3Therefore they spent a long time there speaking boldly with reliance upon the Lord, who was testifying
to the word of His grace, granting that signs and wonders be done by their hands. 4But the people of the city were divided;
and some sided with the Jews, and some with the apostles. 5And when an attempt was made by both the Gentiles and the Jews
with their rulers, to mistreat and to stone them, 6they became aware of it and fled to the cities of Lycaonia, Lystra and Derbe,
and the surrounding region; 7and there they continued to preach the gospel.
14:1 “Iconium” There is a second century non-canonical book known as The Acts of Paul and Thekla, which is reported to be Paul’s
activities in Iconium. This book possibly contains the only physical descriptions of Paul ever recorded: short, bald, bowlegged, heavy
eyebrows, and protruding eyes. It is quite uninspired and yet reflects the impact that the Apostle Paul had in this region of Asia
Minor. Most of this area was in the Roman Province of Galatia.
▣ “entered the synagogue” This was Paul and Barnabas’ regular pattern. These hearers, both Jews and Greeks, would be familiar
with the OT prophecies and promises.
▣ “a large number of people believed, both of Jews and of Greeks” This phrase shows the purpose of Acts. The gospel is
spreading vigorously among various people groups. The implications of the OT promises to all humanity (cf. Gen. 3:15; 12:3) are
now being realized.
These summary statements relating to the rapid growth of the church are characteristic of Luke’s writings.
14:2 “the Jews who disbelieved” Salvation is characterized by “believed” (cf. v. 1), spiritual blindness and recalcitrance is
characterized by “disobedience” or “disbelief.” The refusal to respond to the gospel dooms one to blindness and lostness!
Luke documents the virulent antagonism of Jewish unbelief and active persecution. It is their rejection that opens the door of
faith to the Gentiles (cf. Romans 9-11).
▣ “stirred up” This is a common Septuagint verb for rebellion (cf. I Sam. 3:12; 22:8; II Sam. 18:31; 22:49; I Chr. 5:26), but it is
used in the NT only in Acts 13:50 and here.
▣ “embittered” This is another common term in the Septuagint to describe evil, oppressive people who mistreat others. Luke uses
this term often in Acts (cf. 7:6,19; 12:1; 14:2; 18:10).
14:3 God used the miraculous to confirm His gracious character and the truthfulness of the gospel of Jesus Christ in this new area
(cf. 4:29-30; Heb. 2:4).
14:4 “But the people of the city were divided” The word of truth always divides (cf. 17:4-5; 19:9; 28:24; Matt. 10:34-36). Some
of the Jews in the Synagogue believed, but others became militant against the gospel.
▣ “with the apostles” This refers to both Paul and Barnabas. In this chapter (i.e., 14:4 and 14) is the only time Luke uses this term
to refer to anyone except the original Twelve. Barnabas is called an apostle (cf. v. 14). This is also implied in I Cor. 9:5-6. This
is obviously a wider use of the term “apostle” than the Twelve. James the Just (half brother of Jesus) is called an apostle in Galatians
1:19; Silvanus and Timothy were called apostles in I Thess. 1:1 combined with 2:6; Andronicus and Junius (Junia in KJV), are called
apostles in Rom. 16:6-7; and Apollos is called an apostle in I Cor. 4:6-9.
The twelve Apostles were unique. When they died no one replaced them (except Matthias for Judas, cf. Acts 1). However there
is an ongoing gift of apostleship mentioned in I Cor, 12:28 and Eph. 4:11. The NT does not provide enough information to describe
the functions of this gift. See Special Topic: Send (Apostellō) following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: SEND (APOSTELLŌ)
This is a common Greek word for “send” (i.e., apostellō) This term has several theological usages:
1. the rabbis used it as one called and sent as an official representative of another, something like our English “ambassador”
(cf. II Cor. 5:20)
2. the Gospels often use this term of Jesus being sent by the Father. In John the term takes on Messianic overtones (cf. Matt.
10:40; 15:24; Mark 9:37; Luke 9:48 and especially John 5:36,38; 6:29,57; 7:29; 8:42; 10:36; 11:42; 17:3,8,18,21,23,25;
20:21 [both “apostle” and its synonym pempō used in v. 21]). It is used of Jesus sending believers (cf. John 17:18; 20:21)
3. the NT used it for disciples
a. the original twelve inner circle of disciples (e.g., Mark 6:30; Luke 6:13; Acts 1:2,26)
b. a special group of Apostolic helpers and co-workers
(1) Barnabas (cf. Acts 14:4,14)
(2) Andronicus and Junias (KJV, Junia, cf. Rom. 16:7)
(3) Apollos (cf. I Cor. 4:6-9)
(4) James the Lord’s brother (cf. Gal. 1:19)
(5) Silvanus and Timothy (cf. I Thess. 2:6)
(6) possibly Titus (cf. II Cor. 8:23)
(7) possibly Epaphroditus (cf. Phil. 2:25)
(8) an ongoing gift in the church (cf. I Cor. 12:28-29; Eph. 4:11)
4. Paul uses this title for himself in most of his letters as a way of asserting his God-given authority as Christ’s representative
(cf. Rom. 1:1; I Cor. 1:1; II Cor. 1:1; Gal. 1:1; Eph. 1:1; Col. 1:1; I Tim. 1:1; II Tim. 1:1; Titus 1:1).
14:5 “with their rulers” This could refer to the leaders of the city or the leaders of the synagogue. Some early scribes and modern
commentators assert two persecutions, (1) v. 2 and (2) v. 5, but the context implies just one.
▣
NASB, NRSV,
TEV “mistreat”
NKJV “abuse”
NJB “make attacks”
The Greek term hubrizō is more intense than “mistreat,” possibly “to run riot,” or “to commit violent acts.” It is very common
in the Septuagint. Luke uses this term often in three senses.
1. insult, Luke 11:45
2. violent act, Luke 18:32; Acts 14:5
3. loss of physical property, Acts 27:10,21
▣ “stone” This second descriptive term shows just how violently the opposition planned to attack the believers. Probably the Jewish
element chose this specific means because of its OT connection to blasphemy (i.e., Lev. 24:16; John 8:59; 10:31-33).
14:6 “and fled to the cities of Lycaonia, Lystra and Derbe” Iconium was in Phyrgia. It was close to the boundary of a racially
distinct group. This detail shows the historicity of the book of Acts.
14:7 The verb is a periphrastic perfect middle, meaning that they preached again and again. This is the theme of Paul’s
missionary journeys (cf. 14:21; 16:10). Those who trusted Christ under his preaching also sensed the urgency and mandate to present
the gospel to others. This was/is the priority (cf. Matt. 28:19-20; Luke 24:47; Acts 1:8)!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 14:8-18
8At Lystra a man was sitting who had no strength in his feet, lame from his mother’s womb, who had never walked.
9This man was listening to Paul as he spoke, who, when he had fixed his gaze on him and had seen that he had faith to be made
well, 10said with a loud voice, “Stand upright on your feet.” And he leaped up and began to walk. 11When the crowds saw
what Paul had done, they raised their voice, saying in the Lycaonian language, “The gods have become like men and have
come down to us.” 12And they began calling Barnabas, Zeus, and Paul, Hermes, because he was the chief speaker. 13The
priest of Zeus, whose temple was just outside the city, brought oxen and garlands to the gates, and wanted to offer sacrifice
with the crowds. 14But when the apostles Barnabas and Paul heard of it, they tore their robes and rushed out into the crowd,
crying out 15and saying, “Men, why are you doing these things? We are also men of the same nature as you, and preach the
gospel to you that you should turn from these vain things to a living God, who made the heaven and the earth and the
sea and all that is in them. 16In the generations gone by He permitted all the nations to go their own ways; 17and yet He
did not leave Himself without witness, in that He did good and gave you rains from heaven and fruitful seasons, satisfying
your hearts with food and gladness.” 18Even saying these things, with difficulty they restrained the crowds from offering
sacrifice to them.
14:8 “At Lystra” This town was Timothy’s home (cf. 16:1). This is a Roman colony established by Augustus in a.d. 6. There was
probably no synagogue here, so Paul and Barnabas conducted street preaching.
▣ So that there was no possibility of a trick or deception (cf. 3:2). There are three specific descriptive phrases describing this man’s
permanent condition.
1. no strength in his feet
2. lame from his mother’s womb
3. had never walked
▣ “no strength” The term adunatos usually means “impossible” or literally “unable” (cf. Luke 18:27; Heb. 6:4,18; 10:4; 11:6), but
here Luke uses it like the medical writers in the sense of impotent or weak (cf. Rom. 8:3; 15:1).
It is interesting that Luke, in many ways, parallels Peter’s and Paul’s ministries. Peter and John heal a lame man in 3:1-10 now
so too, do Paul and Barnabas.
14:9 “when he had fixed his gaze on him” Luke uses this phrase often (cf. 3:4; 10:4). See note at 1:10. Paul saw that this man was
listening intently. Therefore, he commanded him to stand up and walk (cf. v 10) and he did!
▣ “that he had faith to be made well” This is used in the OT sense of the term “saved,” meaning physical deliverance. Notice
that Paul’s ability to heal was based on the man’s faith. This is often, but not exclusively, the case in the NT (cf. Luke 5:20; John
5:5-9). Miracles had several functions:
1. to show the love of God
2. to show the power and truth of the gospel
3. to train and encourage the other believers present
14:11 “in the Lycaonian language” Obviously Paul and Barnabas did not understand what the crowd was saying. This was the
indigenous language of the region.
14:12 “calling Barnabas Zeus and Paul, Hermes, because he was the chief speaker” A local tradition asserted that the Greek
gods often visited humans in human form (cf. Ovid, Metamorphoses 8:626ff). From local inscriptions we learn this was an area where
Zeus and Hermes were worshiped (cf. v. 13).
Notice that Barnabas is mentioned first. This is probably because Paul, as the spokesperson, would be understood by these
pagans as the equivalent of Hermes (Mercury); the silent Barnabas must then be the high god Zeus (Jupiter).
14:13 “gate” This could refer to the city or, more probably, to the temple of Jupiter (Zeus) which was located just outside the city
gate and facing it. It was a time of great confusion and misunderstanding.
14:14 “apostles” See note at 14:4.
▣ “tore their robes” This is a Jewish sign of mourning and blasphemy (cf. Matt. 26:65; Mark 14:63). It surely would have
communicated even to these pagans that there was a problem.
▣ “rushed out” This is a common term in the Septuagint for “leaping out” or “rushing out,” though it is used only here in the NT.
Paul and Barnabas sprang up and out into the midst of the crowd.
14:15-17 Here is a summary of Paul’s first sermon to pagans. It is much like his sermon on Mars Hill (cf. 17:22-33).
14:15
NASB, NKJV “men of the same nature as you”
NRSV “we are mortals just like you”
TEV “we ourselves are only human beings like you”
NJB “we are only human beings, mortal like yourselves”
The term is homoiopathēs, which is a compound of “the same” and “passions.” This term is used only here and in James 5:17
in the NT. The locals had thought Paul and Barnabas were gods (homoiōthentes, cf. v. 11), which means “made like” men. Paul uses
the same root to denote their common humanity. Luke shows the humility of Paul and Barnabas in contradistinction to Herod Antipas
in 12:20-23.
▣ “you should turn from these vain things” The term “vain” means empty, void, non-existent. Paul is directly confronting their
superstitious paganism.
▣ “to a living God” This is a play on the term YHWH, which is from the Hebrew verb “to be” (cf. Exod. 3:14). YHWH is the ever-living, only-living God. See Special Topic: Names For Deity at 1:6.
▣ “who made” This is a quote from Exod. 20:11 or Ps. 146:6. The Hebrew term Elohim (cf. Gen. 1:1) describes God as creator
and provider (cf. The Expositor’s Bible Commentary, vol. 1, pp. 468-469) as YHWH describes Him as Savior, Redeemer (cf. The
Expositor’s Bible Commentary, vol. 1, pp. 471-472) and covenant-making God. See special Topic at 1:6.
14:16 “In the generations gone by He permitted all the nations to go their own ways” This phrase may be an allusion to Deut.
32:7-8 in which Moses asserts that YHWH establishes the boundaries of the nations. Theologically this affirms God’s care and
attention to the nations (Gentiles, cf. Girdlestone, Synonyms of the Old Testament, pp. 258-259). God desired that they know Him,
but the fallenness of humanity caused superstition and idolatry (cf. Rom. 1:18-2:29). However, He continued to pursue them (cf. v.
17).
The Gentile’s ignorance of God is contrasted with the Jews’ knowledge of God. The irony is that Gentiles respond in mass by
faith to the gospel, while Jews respond in mass rejection and persecution toward the gospel (cf. Romans 9-11).
14:17 “He did not leave Himself without witness” This is the concept of natural revelation (cf. Ps. 19:1-6; Rom. 1:19-20; 2:14-15).
All humans know something about God from creation and an inner moral witness.
▣ “rains. . .food” The local pagan tradition said that Zeus was the giver of rain and Hermes was the giver of food. Paul, following
Deuteronomy 27-29, affirms God’s control of nature.
These pagans did not know God so the covenant curses of Deuteronomy are replaced by God’s patience (cf. Acts 17:30; Rom.
3:25; 4:15; 5:13). Paul was God’s unique choice (apostle to the Gentiles) to reach the nations! Paul uses God’s creation and
provision through nature (cf. Ps. 145:15-16; 147:8; Jer. 5:24; Jonah 1:9) as his point of contact.
It is interesting that there is nothing of the gospel per se in this sermon summary. One assumes that Paul continued in the same
line of reasoning as he did in his Athenian sermon in Acts 17:16-34. One wonders whether Luke got this summary from Paul or
possibly Timothy (this was his home).
14:18 This is an eyewitness detail.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 14:19-23
19But Jews came from Antioch and Iconium, and having won over the crowds, they stoned Paul and dragged him out
of the city, supposing him to be dead. 20But while the disciples stood around him, he got up and entered the city. The next
day he went away with Barnabas to Derbe. 21After they had preached the gospel to that city and had made many disciples,
they returned to Lystra and to Iconium and to Antioch, 22strengthening the souls of the disciples, encouraging them to
continue in the faith, and saying, “Through many tribulations we must enter the kingdom of God.” 23When they had
appointed elders for them in every church, having prayed with fasting, they commended them to the Lord in whom they had
believed.
14:19 Jewish opposition in the cities where Paul had preached united in recurrent attacks on him (cf. II Cor. 4:7-15; 6:3-10; 11:23-30). Notice that the attack was focused on Paul, not Barnabas. Notice also the fickleness of the pagan crowd. Paul and Barnabas
are honored as gods one moment and stoned the next!
▣ “they stoned Paul” This was not a resuscitation miracle, but an account of Paul’s physical stamina and bravery (cf. vv. 20-21).
II Corinthians 11:25 and Galatians 6:17 also refer to this same event. The stoning planned in v. 5 now became a reality!
14:20 “while the disciples stood around him” Although it is not specifically stated, I think this was a prayer meeting to which God
wondrously responded. Notice how persecution continued to be the mechanism/motivation for the spread of the gospel (i.e., a new
city).
14:21 “After they had preached the gospel to that city” This refers to Derbe (cf. v. 20). This city was also in the Lycaonian part
of the Roman province of Galatia. This was as far eastward as Paul and Barnabas traveled on this missionary journey.
This city also wonderfully responded to the gospel and many were saved.
▣ “they returned to Lystra and to Iconium and to Antioch” Apparently they did not preach publicly on this return visit, but were
privately organizing and encouraging the believers (cf. vv. 22-23).
14:22 This verse is a summary of Paul’s discipleship message. Notice it is focused on (1) perseverance and (2) tribulation. Believers
are matured through trials (cf. Rom. 5:3-4; 8:17-18; I Thess. 3:3; II Tim. 3:12; James 1:2-4; I Pet. 4:12-16).
▣ “strengthening” This term is used several times in the Septuagint in the sense of “to cause to rest on” or “to be established.” Luke
uses this term several times to describe Paul’s follow-up discipleship ministry (cf. 14:22; 15:32,41; 18:23).
▣ “the souls of the disciples” The term soul (psuchē) is used in the sense of the person or their mental activities. This is not the
Greek concept of every person having an immortal soul, but the Hebrew concept of soul (nephesh, BDB 659, KB 711-713, cf. Gen.
2:7) as a way of referring to a human being (cf. Acts 2:41; 3:23; 7:14; 14:2,22; 15:24; 27:37).
▣ “encouraging them to continue in the faith” See Special Topic: Perseverance following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE NEED TO PERSEVERE
The biblical doctrines related to the Christian life are difficult to explain because they are presented in typically eastern
dialectical pairs. These pairs seem contradictory, yet both are biblical. Western Christians have tended to choose one truth and ignore
or depreciate the opposite truth. Let me illustrate.
A. Is salvation an initial decision to trust Christ or a lifetime commitment to discipleship?
B. Is salvation an election by means of grace from a sovereign God or mankind’s believing and repentant response to a divine
offer?
C. Is salvation, once received, impossible to lose, or is there a need for continual diligence?
The issue of perseverance has been contentious throughout church history. The problem begins with apparently conflicting
passages of the NT:
A. texts on assurance
1. statements of Jesus (John 6:37; 10:28-29)
2. statements of Paul (Rom. 8:35-39; Eph. 1:13; 2:5,8-9; Phil. 1:6; 2:13; II Thess. 3:3; II Tim. 1:12; 4:18)
3. statements of Peter ( I Pet. 1:4-5)
B. texts on the need for perseverance
1. statements of Jesus (Matt. 10:22; 13:1-9,24-30; 24:13; Mark 13:13; John 8:31; 15:4-10; Rev. 2:7,17,20; 3:5,12,21)
2. statements of Paul (Rom. 11:22; I Cor. 15:2; II Cor. 13:5; Gal. 1:6; 3:4; 5:4; 6:9; Phil. 2:12; 3:18-20; Col. 1:23)
3. statements of the author of Hebrews (2:1; 3:6,14; 4:14; 6:11)
4. statements of John (I John 2:6; II John 9)
5. statement of the Father (Rev. 21:7)
Biblical salvation issues from the love, mercy, and grace of a sovereign Triune God. No human can be saved without the
initiation of the Spirit (cf. John 6:44,65). Deity comes first and sets the agenda, but demands that humans must respond in faith and
repentance, both initially and continually. God works with mankind in a covenant relationship. There are privileges and
responsibilities!
Salvation is offered to all humans. Jesus’ death dealt with the fallen creation’s sin problem. God has provided a way and wants
all those made in His image to respond to His love and provision in Jesus.
If you would like to read more on this subject from a non-Calvinistic perspective, see
1. Dale Moody, The Word of Truth, Eerdmans, 1981 (pp. 348-365)
2. Howard Marshall, Kept by the Power of God, Bethany Fellowship, 1969
3. Robert Shank, Life in the Son, Westcott, 1961
The Bible is addressing two different problems in this area: (1) taking assurance as a license to live fruitless, selfish lives and
(2) encouraging those who struggle with ministry and personal sin. The problem is that the wrong groups are taking the wrong
message and building theological systems on limited biblical passages. Some Christians desperately need the message of assurance,
while others need the stern warnings! Which group are you in?
▣ “the kingdom of God” This is a difficult phrase to interpret. Jesus used it often in connection to His own ministry. However,
the Apostles obviously misunderstood its significance (cf. 1:3,6). In Acts it is almost synonymous with the gospel (cf. 8:12; 19:8;
20:25; 28:23,31). However, in 14:22 it takes on eschatological implications. It is this “already” (cf. Matt. 12:28; Luke 16:16) vs.
“not yet” (cf. Matt. 24:14,30,36-37; 25:30,31; II Pet. 1:11) tension which characterizes this age. See Special Topic at 2:17. The
Kingdom has come in Jesus Christ (i.e., First Coming), but its consummation is future (i.e., Second Coming).
14:23 “they had appointed elders” The term “elders” (presbuteros) is synonymous with the terms “bishop” (episkopos) and
“pastors” (poimenos) in the NT (cf. Acts 20:17,28 and Titus 1:5,7). The term “elder” has a Jewish background (cf. Girdlestone,
Synonyms of the Old Testament, pp. 244-246 and Frank Stagg, New Testament Theology, pp. 262-264), while the term “bishop” or
“overseer” has a Greek city-state background. There are only two church officers listed in the NT: pastors and deacons (cf. Phil. 1:1).
The term “appoint” can mean “elect by the show of hands” (cf. II Cor. 8:19 and Louw and Nida, Greek-English Lexicon, pp.
363, 484). The term is later used of “ordination” by the early church fathers. The real issue is how does “elect by vote” fit this
context? A vote by these new churches seems inappropriate (although the church in Jerusalem voted for the Seven in Acts 6 and the
church votes to affirm Paul’s ministry to the Gentiles in Acts 15).
F. F. Bruce, Answers to Questions, p. 79 says, “originally indicated appointment or election by a show of hands (literally by
stretching out the hand), it had lost this specific force by New Testament times and had come to mean simply ‘appoint,’ no matter
by what procedure.” One cannot advocate or reject an ecclesiastical polity by the use of this term in the NT.
Notice that Paul instructs Titus to also appoint “elders” on Crete, but to Timothy in Ephesus Paul says let the church select
persons with certain qualifications (cf. I Timothy 3). In new areas leaders were appointed, but in established areas leadership traits
had a chance to be manifested and be affirmed by the local church.
Notice that Paul’s missionary strategy is to establish local churches who will continue the task of evangelism and discipleship
in their area (cf. Matt. 28:19-20). This is God’s method for reaching the entire world (i.e., local churches)!
▣ “church” See Special Topic at 5:11.
▣ “having prayed with fasting” This may be purposefully parallel to 13:2-3. Paul had experienced the Spirit’s power and direction
at Antioch. He continued this same spiritual pattern. They had to prepare themselves for God to reveal His will. See Special Topic:
Fasting at 13:2.
▣ “in whom they had believed” This is a pluperfect active indicative, which denotes a settled action in past time. These new
elders had believed for a period of time and had proved to be faithful exhibiting leadership qualities.
This grammatical construction of eis connected to pisteuō (cf. Acts 10:43) is characteristic of John’s writings, but is also present
in Paul’s (cf. Rom. 10:14; Gal. 2:16; Phil. 1:29) and Peter (cf. I Pet. 1:8). See the important Special Topics at 3:16 and 6:5.
▣ “they commended them to the Lord” This does not refer to some type of ordination. The same verb is used in v. 26 of Paul
and Barnabas, while in 20:32 for those who were already elders. Ordination is helpful in that it emphasizes the truth that God calls
people into leadership roles. It is a negative and unbiblical if it makes a distinction between believers. All believers are called and
gifted for ministry (cf. Eph. 4:11-12). There is no clergy-laity distinction in the NT.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 14:24-28
24They passed through Pisidia and came into Pamphylia. 25When they had spoken the word in Perga, they went down
to Attalia. 26From there they sailed to Antioch, from which they had been commended to the grace of God for the work that
they had accomplished. 27When they had arrived and gathered the church together, they began to report all things that God
had done with them and how He had opened a door of faith to the Gentiles. 28And they spent a long time with the disciples.
14:24 The highland province of Pisidia is just north of the coastal province of Pamphylia. Perga was the chief city of the region.
Paul apparently only passed through this city earlier (cf. 13:13), but now returned and preached the gospel (cf. v. 25).
14:25 “Attalia” This was the seaport of Perga.
14:26 “sailed to Antioch” They did not return to Cyprus. Barnabas will return after the dispute with Paul over John Mark (cf. 15:36-39).
▣ “they had been commended to the grace of God” The verb is a periphrastic pluperfect passive. This first missionary
journey, initiated and sustained by the Spirit, was a marvelous success.
14:27 “gathered the church together, they began to report all things that God had done” Notice they were responsible to the
church. “Even the Apostle to the Gentiles” reported to a local church (See Special Topic at 5:11). They also acknowledged who
accomplished this great accomplishment—YHWH/Spirit.
They did not report to the leaders (cf. 13:1), but to the congregation and later reported on their mission activity to the
congregation in Jerusalem (cf. 15:4) and, for that matter, all other congregations along the way (cf. 15:3). I think it was the whole
congregation who had laid hands on them and commissioned them on their journey.
▣ “and how He had opened a door of faith to the Gentiles” Paul used this phrase “door of faith” quite often (cf. I Cor. 16:9;
II Cor. 2:12; Col. 4:3; and also notice Rev. 3:8). God opened a door to all humanity in the gospel that no one could close. The full
implication of Jesus’ words in 1:8 is now being fulfilled.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Outline Paul’s first missionary journey by geographical sites.
2. Outline both of Paul’s sermons; to the Jews and to pagans.
3. How is fasting related to modern Christians?
4. Why did John Mark quit the missionary team?
ACTS 15
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
The Council at Jerusalem |
Conflict Over Circumcision |
Controversy Over |
The Meeting At Jerusalem |
Controversy at Antioch |
15:1-5 |
15:1-5 |
15:1-5 |
15:1-2 |
15:1-2 |
|
|
|
15:3-5 |
15:3-4 |
|
|
|
|
Controversy at Jerusalem |
|
The Jerusalem Council |
|
|
15:5-7a |
15:6-11 |
15:6-21 |
15:6-21 |
15:6-11 |
Peter’s Speech |
|
|
|
|
15:7b-11 |
15:12-21 |
|
|
15:12-18 |
15:12 |
|
|
|
|
James’ Speech |
|
|
|
|
15:13-18 |
|
|
|
15:19-21 |
15:19-21 |
The Reply of the Council |
The Jerusalem Decree |
|
The Letter to the Gentile |
The Apostolic Letter
|
15:22-29 |
15:22-29 |
15:22-29 |
15:22-29 |
15:22-29 |
|
Continuing Ministry in |
|
|
The Delegates at Antioch |
15:30-35 |
15:30-35 |
15:30-35 |
15:30-34 |
15:30-35 |
|
|
|
15:35 |
|
Paul and Barnabas Separate |
Division Over John Mark |
Departure on Second |
Paul and Barnabas Separate |
Paul Separates from |
15:36-41 |
15:36-41 |
15:36-41 |
15:36-41 |
15:36-38 |
|
|
|
|
15:39-40 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
A. This chapter is often called “The Jerusalem Council.”
B. This was a major turning point, a theological watershed, in the methods and goals of the Early Church. In a sense it is a
merging of the two centers of Christendom, Jerusalem and Antioch.
C. The conversions of non-Jews in Acts 8-11 seem to have been allowed as exceptions (they were not full, practicing pagans),
not as a new policy to be vigorously pursued (cf 11:19).
D. This chapter’s relationship to Galatians 2 is disputed. Acts 15 or Acts 11:27-30 could be the background to Galatians 2.
See Introduction to chapter 14, C.
E. It is interesting that the recurrent Pentecostal sign of speaking in tongues (chapters 2, 8 & 10; possibly v. 8) is not
mentioned at all as an evidence for the assurance of salvation of Gentiles (i.e., pagans).
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 15:1-5
1Some men came down from Judea and began teaching the brethren, “Unless you are circumcised according to the
custom of Moses, you cannot be saved.” 2And when Paul and Barnabas had great dissension and debate with them, the
brethren determined that Paul and Barnabas and some others of them should go up to Jerusalem to the apostles and elders
concerning this issue. 3Therefore, being sent on their way by the church, they were passing through both Phoenicia and
Samaria, describing in detail the conversion of the Gentiles, and were bringing great joy to all the brethren. 4When they
arrived at Jerusalem, they were received by the church and the apostles and the elders, and they reported all that God had
done with them. 5But some of the sect of the Pharisees who had believed stood up, saying, “It is necessary to circumcise them
and to direct them to observe the Law of Moses.”
15:1 “Some men came down from Judea” This paragraph refers to events in Antioch. “Some men” refers to a group of believing
Jews who were committed to both Judaism and Jesus. They saw Jesus as the fulfillment of the OT faith (cf. Matt. 5:17-19), not a
rival or substitute for it (cf. 11:2; 15:5; Gal. 2:12). These persons’ theology is related to the false Jewish teachers (Judaizers) referred
to in Galatians. These men were somehow connected to the church in Jerusalem (cf. v. 24), but they were not official representatives.
Notice it says “down.” If you look at a map, it seems to be “up,” but for Jews everywhere was “down,” theologically, from
Jerusalem (cf. v. 2).
▣ “began teaching” This is an imperfect tense, which can mean (1) started to teach or (2) taught again and again.
▣ “Unless you are circumcised” This is a third class conditional sentence, which means potential action. Circumcision was
the covenant sign to Abraham and his descendants (cf. Gen. 17:10-11). This was not a minor matter in Judaism, but related to
salvation itself. These men felt that the only way to YHWH was through Judaism (cf. v. 5). This type of people became known as
Judaizers (cf. Gal. 1:7; 2:4. They believed in Christ plus conformity to the Mosaic Covenant (cf. v. 5). Righteousness was based
on their performance, not on God’s free gift. One’s relationship with God was achieved by one’s performance (cf. Rom. 3:21-30;
Gal. 5:2-9). The real issue was who are “the people of God” and how do you characterize them?
15:2 “Paul and Barnabas had great discussion and debate with them” Luke uses the expression “great discussion” to show
extreme emotion (cf. Luke 23:19,25; Acts 15:2; 19:40; 23:7,10; 24:5). This debate was crucial! It was directed at the heart of the
gospel message:
1. How is one brought into right standing with God?
2. Is the New Covenant inseparably linked to the Mosaic Covenant?
The phrase in the NASB, “had a great discussion and debate,” is literally “discord and questioning not a little.” Young’s Literal
Translation of the Bible (p. 95), has “not a little dissension and disputation.” This literary technique of expressing something in a
negative understatement is characteristic of Luke’s writings. See full note at 12:18.
▣ “the brethren determined that” This refers to “the church” (cf. v. 3). There are several groups in chapter 15 that relate to the
different leadership or polity styles.
1. In verses 2,3,12, and 22 congregational authority is mentioned.
2. In verses 6 and 22 apostolic or episcopal authority (i.e., James) is mentioned, which is Roman Catholic or Anglican polity.
3. In verses 6 and 22 the authority of the elders is mentioned. This seems to parallel Presbyterian polity.
The New Testament records all of these polity structures. There is a development from the authority of the Apostles (who would
one day die) to the authority of the congregation, with the pastors being the leadership catalysts (cf. v. 19).
In my opinion the polity structure is not as crucial as the spirituality of the leaders. Great Commission, Spirit-filled leaders are
crucial to the gospel. Certain forms of polity fall in and out of favor, usually based on the cultural political model.
▣ “and some others” A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, p. 224, has an interesting comment on this verse,
“Certainly Titus (Gal. 2:1,3), a Greek and probably a brother of Luke who is not mentioned in Acts.” This is certainly a possibility,
but it is based on several assumptions. We must be careful that because a text (with our presuppositions) can mean or imply
something, does not mean that it does! We must be content with the original author’s writings and not our expanded assumptions,
valid though they may be.
▣ “to the apostles” The leadership structure of the Jerusalem church is not settled. From several texts it looks as if James, the half-brother of Jesus, was the leader. This appears to be true in this chapter also. Yet, there were other leadership groups (cf. vv. 4,22):
1. the Twelve
2. local elders
3. the congregation as a whole
What is uncertain is how James relates to these groups. He is called an apostle in Gal. 1:19. It is also possible he was the
acknowledged leader of the group of elders (cf. Peter called himself an elder in I Pet. 5:1; John calls himself an elder in II John 1 and
III John 1).
▣ “elders” In this context “elders” would refer to an older group of leadership modeled on the synagogue pattern. See note at 11:30
or 14:23.
15:3 “church” See Special Topic at 5:11.
▣ “they were passing through both Phoenicia and Samaria” This is an imperfect middle indicative. Phoenicia was mostly
Gentile, while Samaria was a mixed population of Jews and Gentiles. These areas had previously been evangelized (cf. 8:5ff; 11:19).
▣ “describing in detail the conversion of the Gentiles” It seems that Paul and Barnabas reported the marvelous work of God
among the “nations” to every congregation they came in contact with. To people knowledgeable of the OT, the conversion of the
“nations” was a fulfilled prophecy (i.e., Isa. 2:2-4; 42:6; 49:6)!
It is also possible that by widely reporting the success of the mission endeavor that the church in Jerusalem would not be able
to quietly and secretly dismiss the issue (cf. 21:18-20).
▣ “were bringing great joy to all the brethren” These were Gentile areas. The churches would have been mixed churches. Their
response is a prophetic reminder to the Jerusalem church. The world-wide mission started by Hellenists, is confirmed by Hellenist
churches.
15:4 “the church and the apostles and the elders” Here all their polity groups are mentioned, as in verse 22.
▣ “they reported all that God had done with them” This had become a pattern!
15:5 “But some of the sect of the Pharisees who had believed” Faith (perfect active participle) in Jesus as the promised
Messiah was the foundation of the church. But within the church there were differences of opinion about how this faith in Christ
related to the covenants and promises to Israel. This vocal group (“stood up” is fronted in Greek to show its emphasis) of saved
Pharisees felt that the OT was inspired and eternal and therefore must be maintained (cf. Matt. 5:17-19)! One must trust Jesus and
obey Moses (i.e., dei, necessary [1] to circumcise; [2] to charge them; and [3] to keep; all three are present infinitives). It is this
very question that forms the theological content of Romans 1-8 and Galatians! See Special Topic: Pharisees at 5:34.
▣ “it is necessary” See full note on dei at 1:16.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 15:6-11
6The apostles and the elders came together to look into this matter. 7After there had been much debate, Peter stood up
and said to them, “Brethren, you know that in the early days God made a choice among you, that by my mouth the Gentiles
would hear the word of the gospel and believe. 8And God, who knows the heart, testified to them giving them the Holy Spirit,
just as He also did to us; 9and He made no distinction between us and them, cleansing their hearts by faith. 10Now therefore
why do you put God to the test by placing upon the neck of the disciples a yoke which neither our fathers nor we have been
able to bear? 11“But we believe that we are saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, in the same way as they also are.”
15:6 “The apostles and the elders came together” Here the leadership met in private first. This speaks of the Presbyterian pattern
of polity.
15:7 “After there had been much debate” The leadership was not unanimous. Some agree with the statement in v. 5. These were
all sincere believers. But some were clinging to the familiar while being blinded to the radical nature of the gospel. Even the Apostles
were slow to see the full implications (cf. 8:1). Notice the elements of policy making: (1) private discussion; (2) open discussion;
(3) vote by the congregation.
▣ “Peter stood up” This must have been the way to get to speak to the assembled group (cf. v. 5). This is the last mention of him
in Acts. He recalls his experience with Cornelius (cf. chapters 10-11).
▣ “Gentiles would hear the word of the gospel and believe” God used Peter to witness to His love and acceptance of the nations!
God allowed this new radical understanding to proceed in stages.
1. the Samaritans first, chapter 8
2. the Ethiopian Eunuch, chapter 8
3. Cornelius, chapters 10-11
These were not full practicing pagans, but were all related to Judaism. However, 1 and 3 were confirmed by the Pentecost
experience, which was evidence for the early church of God’s acceptance of other groups.
15:8 “God who knows the heart” This was a way of confirming God’s complete knowledge (cf. I Sam. 1:24; 16:7; Ps. 26:2; 139:1;
Pro. 21:2; 24:12; Jer. 11:20; 17:10; Luke 16:15; Rom. 8:27; Rev. 2:23) of the faith of these Gentile converts.
▣ “giving them the Holy Spirit” This apparently refers to the same type of spiritual experience as Pentecost (“just as He also did
to us”). The very same manifestation of the Spirit occurred in Jerusalem, in Samaria, and in Caesarea. It was the sign to the Jewish
believers of God’s acceptance of other people groups (cf. v. 9; 11:17).
15:9 “He made no distinction between us and them” This was the theological conclusion Peter came to in 10:28,34; 11:12. God
is no respecter of persons (cf. Gal. 3:28; Eph. 3:11-4:13; Col. 3:11). All humans are made in the image of God (cf. Gen. 1:26-27).
God desires all humans to be saved (cf. Gen. 12:3; Exod. 19:5-6; I Tim. 2:4; 4:10; Titus 2:11; II Pet. 3:9)! God loves the whole world
(cf. John 3:16-17).
▣ “cleansing their hearts by faith” This term is used in the Septuagint to denote Levitical purification. It denotes the removal of
that which us separates from God.
This is the very verb used in Peter’s experience of the clean and unclean animals in 10:15 and 11:9 (which follows the LXX
of Gen. 7:2,8; 8:20).
In the Gospel of Luke it is used for the cleansing of leprosy (cf. 4:27; 5:12,13; 7:22; 17:14,17). It came to be a powerful
metaphor for cleansing from sin (cf. Heb. 9:22,23; I John 1:7).
The heart is an OT way of referring to the whole person. See Special Topic at 1:24. These Gentiles have been completely
cleansed and accepted by God through Christ. The means of their cleansing is faith in the gospel message. They have believed,
received, and fully trusted in the person and work of Jesus (cf. Rom. 3:21-5:11; Gal. 2:15-21).
15:10 “why do you put God to the test” The OT background of this statement is Exod. 17:2,7 and Deut. 6:16. This Greek term
for “test” (peirazō) has the connotation of “to test with a view toward destruction.” This was a serious discussion! See Special Topic:
Greek Terms for “Testing” and Their connotations at 5:9.
▣ “yoke” This was used by the rabbis for the recitation of the Shema, Deut. 6:4-5; therefore, it stands for the Law, written and oral
(cf. Matt. 23:4; Luke 11:46; Gal. 5:1). Jesus uses it in Matt. 11:29 for the requirements of the New Covenant in Him.
▣ “which neither our fathers or we have been able to bear” This reflects the teachings of Jesus (cf. Luke 11:46). This subject
is addressed by Paul in Galatians 3. But this is Peter who, like James, feels the weight of Judaism (cf. Gal. 2:11-21).
This phrase admits the theological truth that the Law was not able to bring salvation because fallen humanity could not keep
a holy law (cf. Romans 7)! Salvation could not and cannot be based on human performance. However, the saved, gifted, and indwelt
believer needs to live a godly life (cf. Matt. 11:30; Eph. 1:4; 2:10). Godliness (Christlikeness, i.e., Rom. 8:29; Gal. 4:19; Eph. 4:13)
is always the goal of Christianity, for the purpose of providing opportunities for evangelism, not personal pride nor judgmental
legalism.
15:11 This is a summary of salvation (i.e., “saved,” aorist passive infinitive) by grace through faith (for Peter cf. Acts 2-3; for
Paul cf. 13:38-39; Rom. 3-8; Galatians 3; Ephesians 1-2). Notice the way of salvation is the same for Jews and Gentiles (cf. Rom.
3:21-31; 4; Eph. 2:1-10).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 15:12-21
12All the people kept silent, and they were listening to Barnabas and Paul as they were relating what signs and wonders
God had done through them among the Gentiles. 13After they had stopped speaking, James answered, saying, “Brethren,
listen to me. 14Simeon has related how God first concerned Himself about taking from among the Gentiles a people for His
name. 15With this the words of the Prophets agree, just as it is written, 16‘After these things I will return, And I will
rebuild the tabernacle of David which has fallen, And I will rebuild its ruins, And I will restore it, 17So that
the rest of mankind may seek the Lord, And all the Gentiles who are called by My name,’ 18Says the Lord, who
makes these things known from long ago. 19Therefore it is my judgment that we do not trouble those who are turning
to God from among the Gentiles, 20but that we write to them that they abstain from things contaminated by idols and from
fornication and from what is strangled and from blood. 21For Moses from ancient generations has in every city those who
preach him, since he is read in the synagogues every Sabbath.”
15:12 “All the people kept silent, and they were listening” Peter’s words had settled the group of leaders. From the context it
seems that at this point the two missionaries repeated their review of the mission trip a second time. This time the leadership listened!
The Jerome Biblical Commentary (vol. 2, p. 195) believes it was another meeting separate from the church council of vv. 6-11. I
think it is the same meeting.
▣ “Barnabas and Paul” Notice that the names are reversed because this was Barnabas’ home church.
▣ “relating the signs and wonders” The theological purpose of the Pentecostal tongues in Acts is a sign of God’s acceptance, so
one wonders whether this particular sign was often repeated as a way of confirmation.
Signs themselves were performed by Jesus (cf. 2:22), the Apostles (cf. 2:43; 3:7; 4:16,30; 5:12), the Seven (cf. 6:8; 8:6,13),
and Paul and Barnabas (cf. 14:3; 15:12). God was confirming His presence and power through the gospel by these signs and wonders.
These were further evidence to the Judaizing group that God fully accepted full pagans on the basis of grace alone, through faith.
15:13 “James” This is not the Apostle James because he was killed in Acts 12:1-2. This was Jesus’ half-brother who became the
leader of the Jerusalem church and author of the NT book of James. He was known as “James the Just.” He was sometimes called
“camel knees” because he prayed so often, kneeling. The two main Jerusalem leaders are vocal on this issue (Peter and James). See
Special Topic at 12:17.
15:14 “Symeon” This is the Aramaic form of Simon, which is Peter (cf. II Pet. 1:1).
▣ “about taking from among the Gentiles a people for His name” This is the universal emphasis of the OT prophets (ex. Isa.
2:2-4; 42:6; 45:20-23; 49:6; 52:10). The people of God were always to include both Jews and Gentiles (cf. Gen. 3:15; 12:3; Exod.
9:16; Eph. 2:11-3:13).
The phrase “for His name” may be an allusion to Jer. 13:11 and 32:20 or Isa. 63:12,14.
15:15-18 “it is written” This is a free quote from Amos 9:11-12 in the Septuagint. The term “mankind” in verse 17 is Edom (the
nation) in the Masoretic Text, but the Septuagint has anthropos (mankind). James quotes the Septuagint because in this case it
uniquely fits his purpose of expressing the universal nature of God’s promise of redemption.
Notice the promised actions are of YHWH. This is similar to Ezek. 36:22-38. Notice the number of “I’s”!
This quote from the LXX, which is obviously at variance with the MT, shows that the real issue of faith is not a perfect text,
but a perfect God and His plan for mankind. None of us like the textual variants of the OT or NT, but they do not affect believers’
faith in the trustworthiness of Scripture. God has effectively and faithfully revealed Himself to fallen humans! Hand-copied ancient
texts cannot be used as an excuse to reject this revelation. See Manfred Brauch, Abusing Scripture, chapter 1, “The Nature of
Scripture,” pp. 23-32.
15:16 It is obvious from the context that James chooses and modifies this quotation from the Septuagint to assert the inclusion of the
nations. Did he also choose this text because it asserts the destruction of OT Mosaic religion? The New Covenant is radically
different.
1. grace-based, not performance-based (gift not merit)
2. Messiah-focused, not temple-focused (Jesus is the new Temple)
3. world-wide in scope, not focused on the Jewish race
These changes would be devastating to a “circumcision party” of believers. Now the chief Apostle (Peter), the converted rabbi
Apostle (Paul), and the leader of the Jerusalem church (James) all agree against them, as does the consensus (vote) of the mother
church and the mission churches!
15:17 What a wonderful universal statement. But also note the “election” phrase, “all the Gentiles who are called by My name” (cf.
Dan. 9:19). It denotes a worship experience of some kind (cf. LXX of Deut. 28:10; also note Isa. 63:19; Jer. 14:9).
15:18 The inclusion of the Gentiles has always been God’s plan (cf. Gal. 3:26-29; Eph. 3:3-6, see Special Topic at 1:8). The means
of salvation will come from the lineage of King David (cf. v. 16; II Chr. 6:33).
15:19 This is James’ conclusion.
15:20 These guidelines were meant to (1) assure table fellowship in mixed churches and (2) enhance the possibility of local Jewish
evangelism. These things have nothing to do with the Gentiles’ individual personal salvation! These guidelines were directed at both
Jewish sensibilities and pagan worship excesses (cf. v. 29; 21:25).
The Levitical laws were given to accentuate a distinction (social and religious) between Jews and Canaanites. Their very
purpose was disfellowship, but here the purpose is just the opposite. These “essentials” are to help maintain fellowship between
believers of two cultures!
There are many Greek manuscript variations related to this Apostolic Decree. Some have two items, three items, or four items.
For a full discussion of the options, see Bruce M. Metzger’s A Textual Commentary on the Greek New Testament, pp. 429-434). Most
English translations have the four-fold list.
▣
NASB, NRSV,
REB “from fornication”
NKJV, REV,
NET “from sexual immorality”
NJB “from illicit marriages”
It is difficult to know for sure if this prohibition was directed towards
1. pagan immoral worship practices (i.e., immorality)
2. Jewish sensibilities about incest (cf. Leviticus 18; see F. F. Bruce, Answers to Questions, p. 43; NJB)
▣ “what is strangled and from blood” Some commentators relate both of these to the Mosaic food laws (cf. Lev. 17:8-16). It is,
however, possible that “from blood” refers to murder, which is also a major issue in Moses’ writings.
15:21 This verse means
1. to assure the legalists that the Torah was being taught to Gentiles in all localities or
2. since there were Jews in every locality, their scruples should be respected so that they may be effectively evangelized (cf.
II Cor. 3:14-15)
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 15:22-29
22Then it seemed good to the apostles and the elders, with the whole church, to choose men from among them to send
to Antioch with Paul and Barnabas—Judas called Barsabbas, and Silas, leading men among the brethren, 23and they sent
this letter by them, “The apostles and the brethren who are elders, to the brethren in Antioch and Syria and Cilicia who are
from the Gentiles, greetings. 24Since we have heard that some of our number to whom we gave no instruction have disturbed
you with their words, unsettling your souls, 25it seemed good to us, having become of one mind, to select men to send to you
with our beloved Barnabas and Paul, 26men who have risked their lives for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ. 27Therefore
we have sent Judas and Silas, who themselves will also report the same things by word of mouth. 28For it seemed good to the
Holy Spirit and to us to lay upon you no greater burden than these essentials: 29that you abstain from things sacrificed to
idols and from blood and from things strangled and from fornication; if you keep yourselves free from such things, you will
do well. Farewell.”
15:22 This delegation was for the purpose of unity (cf. v. 23), not to mandate compliance.
▣ “Judas called Barsabbas” This faithful leader, like so many in the NT, is unknown to us. Nothing else in the NT is said about
him. But God knows him well!
It is just possible that this man was the brother of Joseph Barsabbas, who was one of the candidates to replace Judas Iscariot
in 1:23. If so, they were both sons of a man named Barsabbas.
▣ “Silas” He, like Barnabas, was a leader in the church of Jerusalem. He is called Silvanus by Paul and will replace Barnabas as
Paul’s associate on the second missionary journey. Paul may have chosen him so that when someone accused him of (1) preaching
a different gospel than the Twelve or (2) being out of fellowship with the mother church, Silas could answer their concerns and
accusations.
SPECIAL TOPIC: SILAS/SILVANUS
Silas, or Silvanus, was the man Paul chose to go with him on the second missionary journey after Barnabas and John Mark went
back to Cyprus:
A. He is first mentioned in the Bible in Acts 15:22 where he is called a chief man among the brethren of the Jerusalem
Church.
B. He was also a prophet (cf. Acts 15:32).
C. He was a Roman citizen like Paul (cf. Acts 16:37).
D. He and Judas Barsabbas were sent to Antioch by the Jerusalem Church to inspect the situation (cf. Acts 15:22,30-35).
E. Paul mentions him in II Cor. 1:19 as a fellow gospel preacher.
F. Later he is identified with Peter in writing I Peter. (cf. I Pet. 5:12).
G. Both Paul and Peter call him Silvanus while Luke calls him Silas (the Aramaic form of Saul). It is possible that Silas was
his Jewish name and Silvanus his Latin name (cf. F. F. Bruce, Paul: Apostle of the Heart Set Free, p. 213).
15:23 The letter from the Jerusalem Council is directed only to certain churches, apparently which had a large believing Jewish
component. By listing only certain regions, James shows that it was not meant as rules for all the Gentile churches. The letter was
only for fellowship and evangelism purposes and not for guidelines for ethics or salvation!
Do you as a modern believer totally avoid non-Kosher meats? See
1. Manfred Brauch, Abusing Scripture, chapter 7, “The Abuse of Context: Historical Situation and Cultural Reality,” pp. 202-249
2. Gordon Fee, Gospel and Spirit
3. Hard Sayings of the Bible, “How Kosher Should Christians Live?”, pp. 527-530 and “To Eat or Not to Eat,” pp. 576-578
These are all helpful articles. It is so comforting to read other informed, sincere and Bible-believing Christians struggle with these
issues. Their writings give other believers the freedom to think and live based on the light they have. Unity, not uniformity, is the
key to healthy, growing, Great Commission churches.
▣ “Cilicia” This is Paul’s home area (cf. 22:3).
15:24 This verse shows that the church in Jerusalem had become aware that some of their membership, who had no authority or
official standing (cf. v. 1), were (1) traveling to these mission churches and (2) demanding conformity to the Mosaic law (cf. v. 1).
The verb (anaskeuazō) used is a strong military term used only here in the NT for plundering a city.
15:25
NASB “having become of one mind”
NKJV “being assembled with one accord”
NRSV, NJB “we have decided unanimously”
TEV “we have met together and have all agreed”
This unity among believers was a characteristic of the Spirit’s presence (cf. v. 28). Notice this did not mean that there was no
discussion or the exchange of strong opinions, but that after a full airing of the issue the believers came to a unified agenda.
This unified theological agreement needed to be published abroad so the same tension and argument would not occur again and
again. The Jerusalem church has now taken an official stand on the content of the gospel and its implications for Gentiles!
15:26 Paul and Barnabas shared not only the victories, but also the hardships of mission work. This vulnerability was not a passing
feeling, but a permanent commitment (perfect active participle).
15:28 “the Holy Spirit and to us” God was present at this crucial meeting. He expressed His will through the discussion! The Holy
Spirit is the one who produced unity. Here both aspects of biblical covenant are highlighted—God’s activity and appropriate human
response. Notice it was a compromise; each side got something. The grace-alone, faith-alone gospel was affirmed, but Jewish
sensibilities were respected. See Special Topic: The Personhood of the Spirit at 1:2.
▣ “these essentials” These do not refer to personal individual salvation, but fellowship between believing Jews and believing
Gentiles in local churches.
15:29 This meant for Gentiles a complete break with their idolatrous past. Christian freedom and responsibility are hard to balance,
but they must be (cf. Rom. 14:1-5:13; I Cor. 8:1-13; 10:23-28). These pagans’ previous worship involved all three of these excluded
things!
These “essentials” are listed in various ways in different Greek manuscripts. The real question is to what do they relate?
1. things sacrificed to idols would refer to meat (cf. I Cor. 8; 10:23-33)
2. blood could refer to either
a. non-kosher meat
b. premeditated murder
3. things strangled must refer to non-kosher ways of killing animals, implying that the previous two also relate to food
sensibilities of the Jews (i.e., Leviticus 11)
4. fornication could refer to
a. participation in pagan worship rituals (as well as the food)
b. OT Levitical laws against incest (cf. Lev. 17:10-14, see F. F. Bruce, Answers to Questions, p. 43)
All of these “essentials” relate not to salvation, but to fellowship within mixed churches and expanded opportunities for Jewish
evangelism. See F. F. Bruce, Answers to Questions, pp. 80-81.
SPECIAL TOPIC: CHRISTIAN FREEDOM vs. CHRISTIAN RESPONSIBILITY
A. This chapter tries to balance the paradox of Christian freedom and responsibility. The literary unit runs through Acts
15:13.
B. The problem which precipitated this chapter was possibly the tension between Gentile and Jewish believers in the church
of Rome. Before conversion the Jews tended to be legalistic and the pagans tended to be immoral. Remember, this
chapter is addressed to sincere followers of Jesus. This chapter does not address carnal believers (cf. I Cor. 3:1). The
highest motive is ascribed to both groups. There is danger in the extremes on both sides. This discussion is not a license
for nit-picking legalism or flaunting liberality.
C. Believers must be careful not to make their theology or ethics the standard for all other believers (cf. II Cor. 10:12).
Believers must walk in the light they have but understand that their theology is not automatically God’s theology.
Believers are still affected by sin. We must encourage, exhort, and teach one another from the Scriptures, reason, and
experience, but always in love. The more one knows the more one knows he does not know (cf. I Cor. 13:12)!
D. One’s attitude and motives before God are the real keys in evaluating his/her actions. Christians will stand before Christ
to be judged on how they treated one another (cf. vv. 10,12 and II Cor. 5:10).
E. Martin Luther said, “A Christian man is a most free Lord of all, subject to none; the Christian man is a most dutiful servant
of all, subject to all.” Biblical truth is often presented in a tension-filled paradox.
F. This difficult but crucial subject is dealt with in the entire literary unit of Romans 14:1-15:13 and also in I Corinthians 8-10
and Colossians 2:8-23.
G. However, it needs to be stated that pluralism among sincere believers is not a bad thing. Each believer has strengths and
weaknesses. Each must walk in the light he/she has, always open to the Spirit and the Bible for more light. In this period
of seeing through a glass darkly (I Cor. 13:8-13) one must walk in love (v. 15), and peace (vv. 17,19) for mutual
edification.
H. The titles “stronger” and “weaker” which Paul gives to these groups prejudices them to us. This was certainly not Paul’s
intent. Both groups were sincere believers. We are not to attempt to mold other Christians into ourselves! We accept one
another in Christ!
I. The entire argument could be outlined as
1. accept one another because God accepts us in Christ (cf. 14:1,3; 15:7);
2. do not judge one another because Christ is our only Master and Judge (cf. 14:3-12);
3. love is more important than personal freedom (cf. 14:13-23);
4. follow Christ’s example and lay down your rights for others’ edification & good (cf. 15:1-13).
▣ “if” Grammatically this is not a conditional sentence. The NJB has “avoid these, and you will do what is right.”
▣ “Farewell” This is a perfect passive imperative which was used as a common closing wishing strength and health.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 15:30-35
30So when they were sent away, they went down to Antioch; and having gathered the congregation together, they
delivered the letter. 31When they had read it, they rejoiced because of its encouragement. 32Judas and Silas, also being
prophets themselves, encouraged and strengthened the brethren with a lengthy message. 33After they had spent time there,
they were sent away from the brethren in peace to those who had sent them out. 34But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.
35But Paul and Barnabas stayed in Antioch, teaching and preaching with many others also, the word of the Lord.
15:30 This is another congregational meeting. It shows the significance of the gathered local church.
15:31 This second congregation (i.e., the Gentile church of Antioch) did not see these essentials as negative or restrictive.
15:32 This verse defines the thrust of NT prophecy. It is primarily the preaching of the gospel and its application; who knows, maybe
it is NT evidence for long sermons! See Special Topic: NT Prophecy at 11:27.
15:33 “in peace” This NASB translation is awkward. See NKJV or NRSV for a clearer way to translate this verse. This may reflect
the Hebrew good-bye, Shalom (i.e., “peace”, BDB 1022). This is a further way of showing the full support of the Jerusalem church
and her leadership.
15:34 This verse is not included in the Greek manuscripts P74, א, A, B, E, nor the Vulgate Latin translation. It is also omitted by
NRSV, TEV, NJB, and NIV. It is in a modified form in the other uncial Greek manuscripts (i.e., C and D). It is probably not
originally part of Acts. UBS4 rates its exclusion as “certain” (A).
15:35 This verse shows how many other first century preachers and teachers we moderns know nothing about. The NT is so selective
in its witness about the lives of the other Apostles and other missionaries and preachers. God knows! Acts is not interested in
biographies.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 15:36-41
36After some days Paul said to Barnabas, “Let us return and visit the brethren in every city in which we proclaimed the
word of the Lord, and see how they are.” 37Barnabas wanted to take John, called Mark, along with them also. 38But Paul
kept insisting that they should not take him along who had deserted them in Pamphylia and had not gone with them to the
work. 39And there occurred such a sharp disagreement that they separated from one another, and Barnabas took Mark with
him and sailed away to Cyprus. 40But Paul chose Silas and left, being committed by the brethren to the grace of the Lord.
41And he was traveling through Syria and Cilicia, strengthening the churches.
15:36 “Let us return” It was Paul and Barnabas’ purpose to return and strengthen the new churches which had been started on their
first journey. Notice there was not the divine manifestation about this mission as there was for the first one (cf. 13:2).
15:38 “Paul kept insisting” This is an imperfect active indicative. Apparently Paul continued to express his reluctance.
▣ “who had deserted them” Exactly why John Mark left the first mission is uncertain (cf. 13:13).
15:39 “there occurred such a sharp disagreement that they separated from one another” The root meaning of this term is
“sharp,” meaning “to sharpen as a blade.” It is used in a positive sense in Heb. 10:24. The verb is also used in Acts 17:6 and I Cor.
13:5. They really had an argument!
▣ “Barnabas took Mark with him and sailed away to Cyprus” Now there are two mission teams.
15:40 “Paul chose Silas” Paul chose another leader from the Jerusalem church.
▣ “being committed by the brethren to the grace of the Lord” This would have involved a type of dedicatory prayer service (cf.
6:6; 13:3 14:26; 20:32). This implies the whole church, not a select group.
15:41 “Cilicia” Why and how these churches were started is uncertain. Possibly Paul himself started them during his silent years
in Tarsus. Cilicia was Paul’s home province.
▣ “churches” See Special Topic at 5:11.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why is this chapter so important?
2. Who are the Judaizer-Christians?
3. Why was James’ opinion given so much weight?
4. Who are the elders?
5. Do the restrictions of verses 28-29 refer to salvation or fellowship?
ACTS 16
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Timothy Accompanies Paul |
Timothy Joins Paul and |
Timothy Joins Paul |
Timothy Goes with Paul |
Lycaonia: Paul Recruits |
|
|
|
|
15:41-16:3 |
16:1-5 |
16:1-5 |
16:1-5 |
16:1-5 |
|
|
|
|
|
16:4 |
|
|
|
|
16:5 |
Paul’s Vision of the Man |
The Macedonia Call |
Through Asia Minor to Troas |
In Troas: Paul’s Vision |
The Crossing into Asia |
16:6-10 |
16:6-10 |
16:6-10 |
16:6-10 |
16:6-8 |
|
|
|
|
16:9-10 |
The Conversion of Lydia |
Lydia Baptized at Philippi |
Paul and Silas in Philippi |
In Philippi: the Conversion of Lydia |
Arrival at Philippi |
16:11-15 |
16:11-15 |
16:11-15 |
16:11-15 |
16:11-15 |
The Imprisonment at |
Paul and Silas Imprisoned |
|
In Prison at Philippi |
Imprisonment of Paul and |
16:16-24 |
16:16-24 |
16:16-18 |
16:16-22a |
16:16-18 |
|
|
16:19-24 |
|
16:19-24 |
|
|
|
16:22b-24 |
|
|
The Philippian Jailer Saved |
|
|
The Miraculous |
16:25-34 |
16:25-34 |
16:25-34 |
16:25-28 |
16:25-28 |
|
|
|
16:29-30 |
16:29-34 |
|
Paul Refuses to Depart |
|
16:31-34 |
|
16:35-40 |
16:35-40 |
16:35-40 |
16:35 |
16:35-37 |
|
|
|
16:36 |
|
|
|
|
16:37 |
|
|
|
|
16:38-40 |
16:38-40 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS INTO ACTS 15:36-16:40
I. THE SECOND MISSIONARY JOURNEY (15:36-18:23)
A. This mission took much longer than the first journey, possibly lasting 3-4 years.
B. It focused primarily in Macedonia and Achaia, which is modern Greece.
C. Brief Outline
1. Barnabas and Paul split, 15:36-40 (fight over John Mark)
2. Syria and Cilicia, 15:41 (when and how these churches began is uncertain.)
3. Lystra and Derbe, 16:1-5 (Timothy joins the team.)
4. Troas (Troy), 16:6-10 (Paul receives a vision to turn west.)
5. Philippi, 16:11-40
6. Thessalonica, 17:1-9
7. Berea, 17:10-14
8. Athens, 17:15-34
9. Corinth, 18:1-17
10. Back to Antioch of Syria, 18:18-22
PAUL’S CO-LABORERS
A. John Mark (John is a Jewish name. Mark is a Roman name, Acts 12:25.)
1. He grew up in Jerusalem. His mother’s house is mentioned in Acts 12:12 as the place that the early church in
Jerusalem met for prayer.
2. Many have asserted that his house was the site of the Lord’s Supper and that the naked man of Mark 14:51-52
was John Mark. Both of these are possible, but they are only speculation.
3. He was the cousin of Barnabas (cf. Col. 4:10).
4. He was the companion of Barnabas and Paul (cf. Acts 13:5).
5. He left the team early and returned to Jerusalem (cf. Acts 13:13).
6. Barnabas wanted to take him on the second journey, but Paul refused (cf. Acts 15:36-41).
7. Later Paul and John Mark were apparently reconciled (cf. II Tim. 4:11; Philemon 24).
8. He apparently became close friends with Peter (cf. I Peter 5:13).
9. Tradition says that he wrote the Gospel that bears his name by recording Peter’s sermons preached in Rome.
Mark’s Gospel has more Latin terms than any other NT book and was probably written for Romans. This
comes from Papias of Hierapolis, as recorded by Eusebius ‘ Eccl. His. 3.39.15.
10. Tradition says he is associated with the establishment of the Alexandrian Church.
B. Silas
1. He is called Silas in Acts and Silvanus in the Epistles.
2. He, like Barnabas, was a leader in the Jerusalem Church (cf. Acts 15:22-23).
3. He is closely associated with Paul (cf. Acts 15:40; 16:19ff; 17:1-15; I Thess. 1:1).
4. He, like Barnabas and Paul, was a prophet (cf. Acts 15:32).
5. He is called an apostle (cf. I Thess. 2:6).
6. He, like Paul, was a Roman citizen (cf. Acts 16:37-38).
7. He, like John Mark, is also associated with Peter, even possibly acting as a scribe (cf. I Peter 5:12).
C. Timothy
1. His name means “one who honors God.”
2. He was the child of a Jewish mother and a Greek father and lived in Lystra. The Latin translation of Origen’s
commentary on Rom. 16:21 says Timothy was a citizen of Derbe. This is possibly taken from Acts 20:4. He
was instructed in the Jewish faith by his mother and grandmother (cf. II Tim. 1:5; 3:14-15).
3. He was asked to join Paul and Silas’ missionary team on the second journey (cf. Acts 16:1-5). He was
confirmed by prophecy (cf. I Tim. 1:18; 4:14).
4. He was circumcised by Paul in order to work with both Jews and Greeks.
5. He was a dedicated companion and co-worker of Paul. He is mentioned by name more than any other of Paul’s
helpers (17 times in 10 letters, cf. I Cor. 4:17; 16:10; Phil. 1:1; 2:19; Col. 1:5; I Thess. 1:1; 2:6; 3:2; I Tim.
1:2,18; 4:14; II Tim. 1:2; 3:14-15).
6. He is called an “apostle” (cf. I Thess. 2:6).
7. Two of the three Pastoral Epistles are addressed to him.
8. He is last mentioned in Hebrews 13:23.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 16:1-5
1Paul came also to Derbe and to Lystra. And a disciple was there, named Timothy, the son of a Jewish woman who was
a believer, but his father was a Greek, 2and he was well spoken of by the brethren who were in Lystra and Iconium. 3Paul
wanted this man to go with him; and he took him and circumcised him because of the Jews who were in those parts, for they
all knew that his father was a Greek. 4Now while they were passing through the cities, they were delivering the decrees which
had been decided upon by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem, for them to observe. 5So the churches were being
strengthened in the faith, and were increasing in number daily
16:1 “Derbe and to Lystra” These cities are located in the southern part of the Roman Province of Galatia (modern Turkey). Paul
visited this area on his first missionary journey (cf. v. 14).
▣ “And a disciple was there” Luke uses the term idou to introduce this phrase. It was a way of showing emphasis. Timothy will
become a major participant in Paul’s ministry.
▣ “the son of a Jewish woman who was a believer, but his father was a Greek” From II Tim. 1:5 we learn that his grandmother
was also a Jewish believer or a faith-oriented Jew. His grandmother was named Lois and his mother was named Eunice. His mother,
and possibly grandmother, became believers on Paul’s first mission.
16:2 “he was well spoken of” This is an imperfect passive indicative. People spoke well of Timothy again and again. One of
the qualifications for a church leader was “no handle for criticism,” within both the believing and unbelieving communities (cf. I Tim.
3:2, 7, 10).
▣ “in Lystra” Timothy’s hometown was Lystra. However, some Greek manuscripts of Acts 20:4 (and Origen’s writings) imply
that Derbe was his hometown.
16:3 “Paul wanted this man to go with him” Notice that Paul calls Timothy. This was not Timothy’s choice alone (cf. I Tim. 3:1).
In a sense Timothy becomes Paul’s apostolic delegate or representative.
▣ “had circumcised him” Paul wanted him to be able to work with Jews (cf. I Cor. 9:20; Acts 15:27-29). This was not a
compromise with the Judaizers because
1. of the results of the Jerusalem Council (cf. v. 15)
2. he refused to circumcise Titus (cf. Gal. 2:3)
However, Paul’s actions surely confused the issue! Paul’s methodology of becoming all things to all men in order to win some (cf.
I Cor. 9:19-23) makes people and their salvation priority!
▣ “father was a Greek” The imperfect tense implies that he was dead.
16:4 Paul and Silas reported (i.e., imperfect active indicative) on the results of the Jerusalem Council (cf 15:22-29). Remember
these “essentials” were for two purposes:
1. fellowship within the churches
2. Jewish evangelism (as was Timothy’s circumcision)
16:5 This is another of Luke’s summary statements (cf. 6:7; 9:31; 12:24; 16:5; 19:20; 28:31). Paul had a heart for discipling (cf.
14:22; 15:36; 15:5). Evangelism without discipleship violates the Great Commission (cf. Matt. 28:18-20) and results in “spiritual
abortions”!
▣ “churches” See Special Topic at 5:11.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 16:6-10
6They passed through the Phrygian and Galatian region, having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to speak the word
in Asia; 7and after they came to Mysia, they were trying to go into Bithynia, and the Spirit of Jesus did not permit them;
8and passing by Mysia, they came down to Troas. 9A vision appeared to Paul in the night: a man of Macedonia was standing
and appealing to him, and saying, “Come over to Macedonia and help us.” 10When he had seen the vision, immediately we
sought to go into Macedonia, concluding that God had called us to preach the gospel to them.
16:6 “passed through the Phrygian and Galatian region” In this text Luke is speaking more of racial, linguistic groupings than
of Roman political divisions or provinces. This idiom would refer to the unofficial boundary between these ethnic groups.
▣ “having been forbidden” This is an aorist passive participle. It is a common term in the Septuagint and in the NT. The Spirit
was intimately involved in the actions and decisions of the early church (cf. 2:4; 8:29,39; 10:19; 11:12,28; 15:28; 16:6,7; 21:4; Rom.
1:13). The modern church has lost the dynamism of the early church.
▣ “in Asia” This refers to the Roman Province of Asia Minor, which was the western end of modern Turkey.
16:6,7 “the Holy Spirit. . .Spirit of Jesus” For the personality of the Spirit, see Special Topic at 1:2. See Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: JESUS AND THE SPIRIT
There is a fluidity between the work of the Spirit and the Son. G. Campbell Morgan said the best name for the Spirit is “the
other Jesus” (however, they are distinct, eternal persons). The following is an outline comparison of the work and titles of the Son
and Spirit.
1. Spirit called “Spirit of Jesus” or similar expressions (cf. Rom. 8:9; II Cor. 3:17; Gal. 4:6; I Pet. 1:11).
2. Both called by the same terms
a. “truth”
1) Jesus (John 14:6)
2) Spirit (John 14:17; 16:13)
b. “advocate”
1) Jesus (I John 2:1)
2) Spirit (John 14:16,26; 15:26; 16:7)
c. “Holy”
1) Jesus (Mark 1:24; Luke 1:35; 4:34; Acts 3:14; 4:27,30)
2) Spirit (Luke 1:35)
3. Both indwell believers
a. Jesus (Matt. 28:20; John 14:20,23; 15:4-5; Rom. 8:10; II Cor. 13:5; Gal. 2:20; Eph. 3:17;Col. 1:27)
b. Spirit (John 14:16-17; Rom. 8:9,11; I Cor. 3:16; 6:19; II Tim. 1:14)
c. Father (John 14:23; II Cor. 6:16)
16:7 “Mysia” This was an ethnic area in the northwest of the Roman Province of Asia Minor. It was mountainous with several major
Roman roads. Its major cities were Troas, Assos, and Pergamum.
▣ “Bithynia” This region was also in northwest Asia Minor, northeast of Mysia. This was not a Roman Province in Luke’s day,
but was combined with Pontus as one political unit. Peter later evangelized this area (cf. I Pet. 1:1). We learn from Philo that there
were many Jewish colonies in this area.
16:8 “passing by Mysia” In this context, it must mean “passing through” or “around” (cf. BAGD 625). Remember, context
determines meaning and not lexicons/dictionaries.
▣ “Troas” This city was four miles from ancient Troy. It was founded about 400 years earlier and remained a free Greek city until
it became a Roman colony. It was the regular port of departure from Mysia to Macedonia.
16:9 “A vision appeared to Paul” God led Paul several times by supernatural means.
1. bright light and Jesus’ voice, 9:3-4
2. a vision, 9:10
3. a vision, 16:9,10
4. a vision, 18:9
5. a trance, 22:17
6. an angel of God 27:23
▣ “a man of Macedonia” How Paul knew he was from Macedonia is uncertain. Possibly it was because of accent, clothes,
ornaments, or simply stated in the vision. Some commentators think the man was Luke (cf. v. 10).
This was a major geographical decision. The gospel turns to Europe!
▣ “Come over. . .help us” The first is an aorist active participle, used as an imperative, the second is an aorist active
imperative. The vision was very specific and forceful.
16:10 “we” This is the first occurrence of the “we” sections in Acts. This refers to Luke’s addition to the missionary group of Paul,
Silas, and Timothy (cf. 16:10-17; 20:5-15; 21:1-18; 27:1-28:16). Some commentators have thought that the man Paul saw in v. 9
was Luke, the Gentile physician and author of the Gospel and Acts.
▣ “Macedonia” Modern Greece was divided into two Roman Provinces.
1. Achaia in the south (Athens, Corinth, Sparta)
2. Macedonia in the north (Philippi, Thessalonica, Berea)
▣ “concluding” This is the term sumbibazō, which literally means to bring together or unite. Here it has the implication that all that
happened was God’s leadership to go to Macedonia.
1. the Spirit not letting them preach in Asia, cf. v. 6
2. the Spirit closing off Bythinia, cf. v 7
3. and the vision of v. 9
▣ “God has called” This is a perfect passive indicative. The Spirit’s leadership was not for safety, but for evangelism. This is
always God’s will.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 16:11-15
11So putting out to sea from Troas, we ran a straight course to Samothrace, and on the day following to Neapolis;
12and from there to Philippi, which is a leading city of the district of Macedonia, a Roman colony; and we were staying in this
city for some days. 13And on the Sabbath day we went outside the gate to a riverside, where we were supposing that there
would be a place of prayer; and we sat down and began speaking to the women who had assembled. 14A woman named Lydia,
from the city of Thyatira, a seller of purple fabrics, a worshiper of God, was listening; and the Lord opened her heart to
respond to the things spoken by Paul. 15And when she and her household had been baptized, she urged us, saying, “If you
have judged me to be faithful to the Lord, come into my house and stay.” And she prevailed upon us.
16:11 “ran a straight course
” This is one of many nautical terms used by Luke (cf. chap. 27). They took a direct ship sailing route
vessel, not a coastal vessel. Luke knew sailing terms well or interviewed the sailors.
▣ “Samothrace” This is a small rocky island rising out of the Aegean Sea about 5,000 feet. It was about halfway between Troas
and Philippi.
▣ “Neapolis” This is literally “new town.” There were several cities in the Mediterranean with this name. This one was the seaport
for Philippi, which was about 10 miles away. At this seaport the Ignatian Way, the major Roman road running east to west, ended
its eastern trek.
16:12 “Philippi” The Greek is plural, probably denoting the unifying of several settlements into one united city. It was located
on the famous Roman highway, the Ignatian Way. This city was originally called Kreinides (wells). Philip II of Macedon captured
it because of its gold deposits and renamed it after himself.
▣
NASB, NRSV “a leading city of the district of Macedonia”
NKJV “the foremost city of that part of Macedonia”
TEV “a city of the first district of Macedonia”
NJB “the principal city of that district”
This phrase is very uncertain. Amphipolis was the “leading town of Macedonia.” What Luke meant by this has been greatly
disputed. It may have been an honorary title of significance.
▣ “a Roman colony” In 42 b.c., Octavian and Mark Antony defeated Cassius and Brutus near this city. In memory of this victory,
Octavian made Philippi a Roman colony and retired his troops there. In 31 b.c., after the defeat of Antony and Cleopatra at Attium,
Octavian settled more troops there. Other Roman colonies mentioned in the NT are Pisidian Antioch, Lystra, Troas, Corinth, and
Ptolema. They had all the privileges of cities in Italy:
1. self-government
2. no taxation
3. special legal perks
Paul often preached and established churches in these Roman colonies.
16:13 “on the Sabbath” There were apparently no synagogues in Philippi. This being a Roman colony, it probably did not have
ten male Jews in the town, which was the minimum number required to have a synagogue. Apparently there were some God-fearers
or proselytes (cf. v. 14; 13:43; 17:4,17; 18:7). Many women were attracted to the morality and ethics of Judaism.
▣ “to a riverside” This seems to have been a common place of religious worship (cf. Josephus’ Antiquities of the Jews 14.10.23).
▣ “sat down” This was the typical rabbinical teaching position, but this is a Roman city and, therefore, probably has no significance.
It is just another of Luke’s eyewitness details.
16:14 “A woman named Lydia from the city of Thyatira” The Roman province of Macedonia had more opportunities for women
than any other place in the first century Mediterranean world. Lydia was from a city in Asia Minor (cf. Rev. 2:17ff). It was known
for its purple dye, made from mollusks’ shells, which was very popular with the Romans. There was a synagogue in her hometown.
Her name came from Lydia, the ancient province, where the city was located. She is not mentioned in Paul’s later letters, therefore,
she may have died.
▣ “worshiper of God” This refers to God-fearers who were attracted to Judaism but had not yet become full proselytes.
▣ “the Lord opened her heart” The Bible describes the relationship between God and humanity as a covenant. God always takes
the initiative in establishing the relationship and setting the conditions of the covenant (see Special Topic at 2:47). Salvation is a
covenant relationship. No one can be saved unless God initiates (cf. John 6:44,65). However, God desires that all humans be saved
(cf. John 3:16; 4:42; Titus 2:11; I Tim. 2:4; 4:10; II Pet. 3:9; I John 2:1; 4:14); therefore, the implication is that God, on some level
(natural revelation, cf. Ps. 19:1-6 or special revelation, cf. Ps. 19:7-14), confronts every person with their sin (cf. Romans 1-3) and
His character.
The mystery is why some respond and some do not! I personally cannot accept that the answer is God’s choice of some, but
not others. All humans are made in God’s image (cf. Gen. 1:26-27) and God promises to redeem all of them in Gen. 3:15.
Maybe it is not so important that we understand why, but that we faithfully present the gospel to all and let it do its work in the
heart and mind of its hearers (cf. Matt. 13:1-23). Paul preached to Lydia and she and her household responded.
16:15 “her household had been baptized” This apparently refers to her family, servants, and workers (cf. Cornelius, Acts 10:2;
11:14; and the Philippian jailer, Acts 16:33). Also, notice that she, like others in the NT, was baptized immediately. It is not an
option! See Special Topic: Baptism at 2:38.
The theological question which this verse raises is, “Were children involved in these examples of household conversions in
Acts?” If so, then there is a biblical precedent for infant baptism in those “family salvations.” Those who assert this as evidence
also point toward the OT practice of including children into the nation of Israel as infants (i.e., circumcision at eight days of age, see
James D. G. Dunn, pp. 175-176).
Although it is surely possible that faith in Christ immediately affected the whole family (cf. Deut. 5:9 and 7:9) in this societal
setting, the question remains, “Is this a universal truth to be practiced in every culture?” I would assert that the NT is a revelation
about personal volitional choices related to the awakening sense of guilt. One must recognize his need for a savior. This leads to
the further question of, “Are people born sinful in Adam, or are they sinful when they choose to disobey God?” Judaism allows a
period of childhood innocence until a knowledge of the Law and a commitment to keep it; for males, age 13, for females, age 12.
The rabbis do not emphasize Genesis 3 as much as the church.
The NT is an adult book. It asserts God’s love for children, but its message is directed toward adults! However, we live in a
democratic, individual-focused society, but the Near East is a tribal, clan, family society!
▣ “If” This is a first class conditional, which is assumed to be a true believer from the author’s perspective or for his literary
purposes.
▣ “you have judged me to be faithful to the Lord” The first verbal is a perfect active indicative. Lydia is asserting that she
is now a believer. She was inviting these missionaries to use her house and resources for the gospel. This is in accordance with Jesus’
message to the seventy when He sent them out on mission (cf. Luke 10:5-7).
▣ “come into my house and stay” Lydia was an assertive personality type, a business woman! This first verb is an aorist active
participle, used as an imperative; the second is a present active imperative.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 16:16-18
16It happened that as we were going to the place of prayer, a slave-girl having a spirit of divination met us, who was
bringing her masters much profit by fortune-telling. 17Following after Paul and us, she kept crying out, saying, “These men
are bond-servants of the Most High God, who are proclaiming to you the way of salvation.” 18She continued doing this for
many days. But Paul was greatly annoyed, and turned and said to the spirit, “I command you in the name of Jesus Christ
to come out of her!” And it came out at that very moment.
16:16 “It happened” Apparently this occurred on another day, possibly the next Sabbath. This was a chance encounter, but God
was fully involved for His purposes, as He is in every event, every personal encounter, every day!
▣ “a spirit of divination” There are two terms used in this sentence to describe this slave girl. The first, “divination” (found only
here in the NT) has an OT background, but uses different Greek terms in the Septuagint (cf. Lev. 19:31; 20:6,27; Deut. 18:11; I Sam.
28:3,7; II Kgs. 21:6; I Chr. 10:13). This was a demon-possessed person who, by chants, incantations, or the interpreting of natural
phenomena (i.e., flight of birds, clouds, remains in a drinking cup, animal liver, etc.) could predict and, to some degree, affect the
future.
In this Greek cultural setting the term is puthōn, which comes out of Greek mythology where a giant serpent is killed by Apollo.
This myth became an oracle rite (i.e., Delphi), where humans could consult the gods. This site was known for its temple snakes (i.e.,
pythons) who would crawl over people who lay down in the temple and allowed the snake to crawl over them for the purpose of
knowing and affecting the future.
▣ “by fortune telling” This term (present active participle, feminine, singular) is used only here in the NT. The root term
is common in the Septuagint for “diviner, seer, prophet,” usually in a negative context. It means one who raves, thereby denoting
the emotional trance which accompanies their prediction. Here it denotes one who predicts the future for profit. The contextual and
lexical implication is that the girl was indwelt with an unclean spirit.
16:17 “Following after Paul. . .kept crying out” This is a present active participle and an imperfect active indicative. She
continued to follow and kept on crying out (cf. v. 18).
▣ “These men are bondservants of the Most High God” Jesus would not accept demonic testimony (cf. Luke 8:28; Mark 1:24;
3:11; Matt. 8:29) and neither would Paul because it could lead to the implication of demonic support.
The term “Most High God” (cf. Mark 5:7; Luke 8:28) is used of YHWH (i.e., El, Elyon) in Gen. 14:18-19; II Sam. 22:14 (see
Special Topic at 1:6), but it was also used in this culture of Zeus. This spirit was not giving testimony to glorify God, but to associate
the gospel with the demonic.
▣ “ who are proclaiming to you the way of salvation” There is no article with “way” (cf. NRSV). She was possibly saying that
they were one of several ways to the Most High God. This demon is not trying to help Paul’s ministry. The purpose of this statement
is
1. to identify Paul with divination
2. to present an alternative way, not the way of salvation (i.e., faith in Christ)
The NET Bible (p. 2022 #16) has a good discussion of the grammatical issues involved in translating “the way” vs. “a way.”
It prefers “the way.”
The real issue is what the hearers in first century Philippi would have understood. In their cultural setting, “the Most High God”
would have referred to Zeus, so the presence of absence of the definite article with “way” is not the exegetical issue.
16:18 “Paul was greatly annoyed” In this instance Paul acted, not out of love, but out of irritation. Paul was human too! This same
strong verb is found in the Septuagint in Eccl. 10:9, where it means hard labor. In the NT it is used only here and in 4:2. It denotes
someone who is completely worn out.
▣ “to the spirit” Notice Paul does not address the slave girl, but the demon indwelling and controlling her. Paul’s exorcism was
couched in the same manner as other NT exorcisms (i.e., in the name of Jesus). See the Special Topics: The Demonic and Exorcism
at 5:16.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 16:19-24
19But when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone, they seized Paul and Silas and dragged them into the
market place before the authorities, 20and when they had brought them to the chief magistrates, they said, “These men are
throwing our city into confusion, being Jews, 21and are proclaiming customs which it is not lawful for us to accept or to
observe, being Romans.” 22The crowd rose up together against them, and the chief magistrates tore their robes off them and
proceeded to order them to be beaten with rods. 23When they had struck them with many blows, they threw them into prison,
commanding the jailer to guard them securely; 24and he, having received such a command, threw them into the inner prison
and fastened their feet in the stocks.
16:19 “saw that their hope of profit was gone” These “masters” did not care at all that a human being had been freed from the
bondage to evil. They were distressed by the monetary loss (cf. v. 16), much like the people in Luke 8:26-39.
▣ “seized Paul and Silas” Why Luke and Timothy were not taken is uncertain.
16:20 “chief magistrates” This is the term praetors. Officially their titles were duumvirs, but we learn from Cicero that many liked
to be called Praetors. Luke is very accurate in his use of Roman governmental officials’ titles. This is one of several evidences of
his historicity.
16: 20, 21 “being Jews. . .being Romans” This shows their racial pride and prejudice. Paul’s time in Philippi may be close to
Claudius’ edict expelling the Jews from Rome, a.d. 49-50 (actually he forbade any Jewish worship practices). Roman anti-Semitism
may be seen in Cicero’s Pro Fiasco 28 and Javenal 14.96-106.
▣ “proclaiming customs which it is not lawful for us to accept” Notice this charge has nothing to do with the slave girl’s exorcism.
It apparently refers to their preaching of the gospel of Jesus Christ. Judaism was a legal religion in the Roman Empire, but as it
became obvious that Christianity was destined to be seen as a separate and, therefore, illegal religion. It was illegal for Jews to
attempt to proselytize Romans, and it was illegal for Paul as well.
16:22 “tore their robes off them and proceeded to order them” The verbal forms imply that the two Praetors, moved by the uproar
of the crowd, tore the clothes off Paul and Silas themselves (aorist active participle, plural). This would have been highly
unusual for them to be such active participants in a judicial event.
1. they tore off (aorist active participle)
2. they ordered to flog (i.e., an imperfect active indicative followed by a present active infinitive)
▣ “to be beaten with rods” This type of punishment (i.e., verberatio, which was administered by the authority of a city court) was
not as severe as Roman scourging. There was no set number for the blows. Paul was beaten like this three times (cf. II Cor. 11:25).
This is the only recorded one (cf. I Thess. 2:2).
16:24 “inner prison” This means maximum security. There was a fear factor here (cf. v. 29). Paul’s exorcism got their attention.
▣ “feet in the stocks” Most jails of that day had chains attached to the walls to which the prisoner was shackled. Therefore, the
doors were only latched, not locked. These stocks would spread the feet wide apart and caused great discomfort and added security.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 16:25-34
25But about midnight Paul and Silas were praying and singing hymns of praise to God, and the prisoners were listening
to them; 26and suddenly there came a great earthquake, so that the foundations of the prison house were shaken; and
immediately all the doors were opened and everyone’s chains were unfastened. 27When the jailer awoke and saw the prison
doors opened, he drew his sword and was about to kill himself, supposing that the prisoners had escaped. 28But Paul cried
out with a loud voice, saying, “Do not harm yourself, for we are all here!” 29And he called for lights and rushed in, and
trembling with fear he fell down before Paul and Silas, 30and after he brought them out, he said, “Sirs, what must I do to be
saved?” 31They said, “Believe in the Lord Jesus, and you will be saved, you and your household.” 32And they spoke the word
of the Lord to him together with all who were in his house. 33And he took them that very hour of the night and washed their
wounds, and immediately he was baptized, he and all his household. 34And he brought them into his house and set food before
them, and rejoiced greatly, having believed in God with his whole household.
16:25 “about midnight” They probably could not sleep because of the pain of the beating and the stocks.
▣ “praying and singing hymns of praise to God” It is possible that the theological content of these prayers and hymns caused the
prisoners to trust Christ (i.e., “the prisoners were listening to them”) because none of the prisoners escaped when the earthquake
opened the doors (cf. vv. 26,28, “we are all here”).
▣ “the prisoners were listening” This is an imperfect middle (deponent) indicative, implying they listened continually to Paul
and Silas. The verb epakroaomai is a rare word in the NT and the Septuagint. Its use in I Sam. 15:22 denotes an intense listening
with joyfulness. These down-and-out prisoners eagerly heard and responded to a message of God’s love, care, and acceptance!
16:26 “earthquake” This was a natural event, but with supernatural purpose, timing, and effect (cf. Matt. 27:51,54; 28:2). God had
delivered Peter from prison by means of an angel (cf. 4:31), but here an event was chosen that gave Paul a chance to preach the gospel
to both the prisoners and the guards.
16:27 “sword” This was the small, two-edged sword worn in the belt, which was shaped like a tongue. This was the instrument of
capital punishment for Roman citizens. If a jailor lost prisoners, he suffered their fate (cf. 12:19).
16:28 Paul and Silas’ faith and the content of their prayers and songs made a powerful impact on the other prisoners (I think they,
too, were saved)!
16:29 “called for lights” Notice the plural. There were other jailers.
16:30 “Sirs, what must I do to be saved” This reflects mankind’s (1) fear of the supernatural and (2) search for peace with God!
He wanted the peace and joy that Paul and Silas had exhibited, even in these unfair and painful circumstances. Notice this man, as
so many, knew there must be some kind of human response (cf. Luke 3:10,12,14; Acts 2:37; 22:10).
16:31 “‘Believe in the Lord Jesus’” The verb (aorist active imperative) pisteuō can be translated “believe,” “faith,” or “trust.”
See Special Topics at 2:40, 3:16, and 6:5. It is primarily a volitional trusting response (cf. 10:43). Also notice that it is trust in a
person, not a doctrine or a theological system. This man had no Jewish background (i.e., Ninevites in Jonah). Yet the requirements
for complete salvation are very simple and just the same! This is the most succinct summary of the gospel in the NT (cf. 10:43).
His repentance (cf. Mark 1:15; Acts 3:16,19; 20:21) was shown by his actions.
▣ “you will be saved, you and your household” In the ancient world the religion of the head of the house was the religion of all
its members (cf. 10:2; 11:14; 16:15; 18:8). How this worked out on an individual level is uncertain, but apparently it involved some
level of personal faith on each individual’s part. Paul subsequently preached the full gospel message to the jailer and his household
(cf. v. 32).
In this instance, not only his household but his prison also!
16:32 “the word of the Lord” There is a variant involving this phrase.
1. “The word of the Lord” is in MSS P45,74, א2, A, C, D, E. The UBS4 gives it a “B” rating (almost certain).
2. “The word of God” is in MSS א*, B
In context the issue is to whom does “Lord” refer?
1. Jesus, v. 31
2. YHWH (cf. vv. 25,34; 13:44,48; it is an OT phrase cf. Gen. 15:14; I Sam. 15:10; Isa. 1:10; Jonah 1:1)
16:33 “and immediately he was baptized, he and all his household” This shows the importance of baptism. Acts mentions it over
and over. See Special Topic: Baptism at 2:38. Jesus did it (cf. Luke 3:21) and commanded it (cf. Matt. 28:19) and that settles it (cf.
Acts 2:38). It also is consistent with other examples in Acts that baptism occurred immediately after their profession of faith (cf. Acts
10:47-48). In a sense it was their visible and verbal public profession of faith in Christ (i.e., Rom. 10:9-13).
16:34 “and rejoiced greatly having believed in God with his whole household” The two verbs are singular referring to the
jailor. However, the adverbial phrase implies the inclusion of the man’s extended family and servants.
The verb, “believed” is a perfect active participle, implying a settled state. Notice the change in tense from v. 31.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 16:35-40
35Now when day came, the chief magistrates sent their policemen, saying, “Release those men.” 36And the jailer reported
these words to Paul, saying, “The chief magistrates have sent to release you. Therefore come out now and go in peace.” 37But
Paul said to them, “They have beaten us in public without trial, men who are Romans, and have thrown us into prison; and
now are they sending us away secretly? No indeed! But let them come themselves and bring us out.” 38The policemen reported
these words to the chief magistrates. They were afraid when they heard that they were Romans, 39and they came and
appealed to them, and when they had brought them out, they kept begging them to leave the city. 40They went out of the
prison and entered the house of Lydia, and when they saw the brethren, they encouraged them and departed.
16:35 “policemen” This is literally “rod-bearer” (hrabdouchosta lictor). This refers to those involved in official discipline (cf. v.
20). The Italian “fascist” party got their name from this term. A bundle of these rods (from Latin fasces) was the symbol of political
authority.
16:37 “men who are Romans” Philippi was a Roman colony with many extra legal privileges which could be in jeopardy from
Rome if this unfair treatment of Roman citizens was reported. Beating Roman citizens was a serious violation of their colonial legal
status (cf. v. 39; see Livy, “History” 10.9.4 or Cicero, “Pro Rabirio 4.12-13).
16:39 The purpose of Paul’s protest was possibly to protect the fledgling church at Philippi and to achieve a certain recognized status
for them. The leaders, by their actions, imply that gospel preaching was not illegal! The door was open for future evangelistic efforts
in Philippi.
16:40 “and departed” Luke apparently stayed behind. We find him still here in 20:5-6.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why is the Holy Spirit called the Spirit of Jesus?
2. Why did God allow the missionaries to encounter so much opposition and trial?
3. Why did Paul not accept the slave girl’s testimony?
4. List the people saved at Philippi.
5. Why were only Paul and Silas imprisoned?
6. Why did the other prisoners not escape?
7. List the elements of salvation in this chapter. Are they different from those in other chapters in Acts?
8. Did this jailer have any background in Judaism or Christianity?
9. What does “his household was saved” mean?
10. Why did Paul make the city officials apologize in person?
ACTS 17
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
The Uproar in Thessalonica |
Preaching Christ at |
From Thessalonica to |
In Thessalonica |
Thessalonica: Difficulties |
17:1-9 |
17:1-4 |
17:1-9 |
17:1-4 |
17:1-4 |
|
Assault on Jason’s House |
|
|
|
|
17:5-9 |
|
17:5-9 |
17:5-9 |
The Apostles at Beroea |
Ministering at Berea |
|
In Berea |
Fresh Difficulties at Beroea |
17:10-15 |
17:10-15 |
17:10-15 |
17:10-15 |
17:10-12 |
|
|
|
|
17:13-15 |
Paul at Athens |
The Philosophers at Athens |
Paul at Athens |
In Athens |
Paul in Athens |
17:16-21 |
17:16-21 |
17:16-21 |
17:16-21 |
17:16-18 |
|
Addressing the Areopagus |
|
|
17:19-21 |
17:22-28a |
17:22-34 |
17:22-31 |
17:22-31 |
17:22a |
|
|
|
|
Paul’s Speech Before the |
|
|
|
|
17:22b-23 |
|
|
|
|
17:24-28 |
17:28b-31 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
17:29 |
|
|
|
|
17:30-31 |
17:32-34 |
|
17:32-34 |
17:32-34 |
17:32-34 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
Brief Outline of Paul’s Message To Intellectual Greeks in Athens (17:15-34). It is similar to Acts 14:15-18.
A. There is one God, creator of heaven (spirit) and earth (matter)
1. of whom they are ignorant
2. who does not dwell in human temples or idols
3. who is not in need of anything from mankind
4. who is the only source of real life
B. He is in control of all human history
1. made all nations from one man
2. fixes the boundaries of the nations
C. He has placed in humans a desire to know Himself, and He is not hard to find
D. Sin has separated us from Him
1. he overlooked sins in times of ignorance
2. we must repent
E. He will judge His creation
1. there is a set day for judgement
2. judgement will occur through the Messiah
3. this Messiah has been raised from the dead to prove His person and work
The City of Thessalonica
A. Brief History of Thessalonica
1. Thessalonica was located at the head of the Thermaic Gulf. Thessalonica was a coastal town on Via Ignatia (the way
of the nations) the major Roman road, running eastward from Rome. A seaport, it was also very close to a rich, well-watered, coastal plain. These three advantages made Thessalonica the largest, most important commercial and
political center in Macedonia.
2. Thessalonica was originally named Therma, derived from the hot springs located in the area. An early historian,
Pliny the Elder, refers to Therma and Thessalonica existing together. If this is the case, Thessalonica simply
surrounded Therma and annexed it (Leon Morris, The First and Second Epistles to the Thessalonians, Grand Rapids:
Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1991, p. 11). Yet most historians believe Cassander, one of Alexander the
Great’s generals, renamed Therma in 315 b.c. after Philip of Macedonia’s daughter and Alexander’s half-sister and
his wife, Thessalonica (Strabo VII Fragment 21). Sometime during the early centuries of the spread of Christianity,
Thessalonica came to be nicknamed “the orthodox city” because of its Christian character (Dean Farrar, The Life and
Work of St. Paul, New York: Cassell and Company, Limited, 1904, p. 364). Today Thessalonica is known as
Salonika and it still is an important city in Greece.
3. Thessalonica was a cosmopolitan metropolis similar to Corinth, inhabited by peoples from all over the known world.
a. Barbaric Germanic peoples from the north were living there, bringing with them their pagan religion and
culture.
b. Greeks lived there, coming from Achaia to the south and from the islands of the Aegean Sea, in turn bringing
their refinement and philosophy.
c. Romans from the west also settled there. They were mostly retired soldiers and they brought their strength of
will, wealth, and political power.
d. Finally, Jews came in large numbers from the east; eventually one third of the population was Jewish. They
brought with them their ethical monotheistic faith and their national prejudices.
4. Thessalonica, with a population of about 200,000, was truly a cosmopolitan city. It was a resort and health center
because of the hot springs. It was a commercial center because of its seaport, fertile plains and the proximity of the
Ignatian Way.
5. As the capital and largest city, Thessalonica was also the central political headquarters of Macedonia. Being a
Roman provincial capital and home of many Roman citizens (mostly retired soldiers), it became a free city.
Thessalonica paid no tribute and was governed by Roman law, since most Thessalonians were Roman citizens. Thus
the Thessalonian rulers were called “politarchs.” This title appears nowhere else in literature, but it is preserved by
an inscription over the triumphal arch at Thessalonica known as the Vardar Gate (Farrar, p. 371n.).
B. Events Leading to Paul’s Coming to Thessalonica
1. Many events led Paul to Thessalonica, yet behind all the physical circumstances is the direct, definite call of God.
Paul had not originally planned to enter the European continent. His desire on this second missionary journey was
to revisit the churches in Asia Minor that he had established on his first journey and then to turn eastward. Yet, just
as the moment arrived to turn northeastward, God started closing the doors. The culmination of this was Paul’s
Macedonian vision (cf. Acts 16:6-10). This caused two things to happen: first, the continent of Europe was
evangelized and second, Paul, because of circumstances in Macedonia, began writing his Epistles (Thomas Carter,
Life and Letters of Paul, Nashville: Cokesbury Press, 1921, p. 112).
2. Physical circumstances that led Paul to Thessalonica
a. Paul went to Philippi, a small town with no synagogue. His work there was thwarted by the owners of a
“prophetic,” demonic slave girl and the town council. Paul was beaten and humiliated, yet a church was
formed. Because of the opposition and physical punishment, Paul was forced to leave, possibly sooner than
he had wished.
b. Where would he go from there? He passed through Amphipolis and Apollonia, which also had no synagogue.
c. He came to the largest city in the area, Thessalonica, which did have a synagogue. Paul had made it a pattern
to go to the local Jews first. He did this because
(1) of their knowledge of the Old Testament;
(2) of the opportunity for teaching and preaching that the synagogue presented;
(3) of their position as the chosen people, God’s covenant people (cf. Matt. 10:6; 15:24; Rom. 1:16-17; 9-11);
(4) Jesus had offered Himself first to them, then to the world—so too, Paul would follow Christ’s example.
Paul’s Companions
A. Paul was accompanied by Silas and Timothy in Thessalonica. Luke was with Paul at Philippi and he remained there. We
learn this by the “we” and “they” passages of Acts 16 and 17. Luke speaks of “we” at Philippi, but of “they” as traveling
to Thessalonica.
B. Silas, or Silvanus, was the man Paul picked to go with him on the second missionary journey after Barnabas and John Mark
went back to Cyprus
1. He is first mentioned in the Bible in Acts 15:22, where he is called a chief man among the brethren of the Jerusalem
Church.
2. He was also a prophet (cf. Acts 15:32).
3. He was a Roman citizen like Paul (cf. Acts 16:37).
4. He and Judas Barsabbas were sent to Antioch by the Jerusalem Church to inspect the situation (cf. Acts 15:22,30-35).
5. Paul praises him in II Cor. 1:19 and mentions him in several letters.
6. Later he is identified with Peter in writing I Pete (cf. I Pet. 5:12).
7. Both Paul and Peter call him Silvanus while Luke calls him Silas.
C. Timothy was also a companion and fellow-worker of Paul
1. Paul met him at Lystra, where he was converted on the first missionary journey.
2. Timothy was half Greek (father) and half Jewish (mother). Paul wanted to use him to work with evangelizing the
Gentiles.
3. Paul circumcised him so that he could work with Jewish people.
4. Timothy is mentioned in the salutation in: II Corinthians, Colossians, I and II Thessalonians and Philemon.
5. Paul spoke of him as “my son in the ministry” (cf. I Tim. 1:2; II Tim. 1:2; Titus 1:4).
6. Paul’s general tone throughout his letters implies Timothy was younger and timid. Yet Paul has great confidence
and trust in him (cf. Acts 19:27; I Cor. 4:17; Phil. 2:19).
D. It is only fitting in the section on Paul’s companions that mention is made of the men who came to Thessalonica and
accompanied Paul on his later missions. They are Aristarchus (Acts 19:29; 20:4; 27:2) and Secundus (Acts 20:4). Also,
Demas could have been from Thessalonica (Philem. 24; II Tim. 4:10).
Paul’s Ministry in the City
A. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica followed his usual pattern of going to the Jews first and then turning to the Gentiles. Paul
preached in the synagogue on three Sabbaths. His message was “Jesus is the Messiah.” He used Old Testament Scriptures
to show that the Messiah was to be a suffering Messiah (cf. Gen. 3:15; Isa. 53), and not a political temporal Messiah. Paul
also emphasized the resurrection and offered salvation to all. Jesus was clearly presented as the Messiah promised of old
who could save all peoples.
B. The response to this message was that some Jews, many devout Gentiles, and many important women accepted Jesus as
Savior and Lord. An analysis of these groups of converts is very meaningful in understanding Paul’s later letters to this
church.
C. Gentiles comprised most of the members of the church, as seen by the absence of allusions to the OT in either of the two
epistles. The Gentiles readily accepted Jesus as Savior and Lord for several reasons.
1. Their traditional religions were powerless superstition. Thessalonica lay at the foot of Mt. Olympus and all knew
its heights were empty.
2. The gospel was free to all.
3. Christianity contained no Jewish exclusive nationalism. The Jewish religion had attracted many because of its
monotheism and its high morals, but it also repelled many because of its repugnant ceremonies (such as
circumcision), and its inherent racial and national prejudices.
D. Many “chief women” accepted Christianity because of these women’s abilities to make their own religious choices.
Women were more free in Macedonia and Asia Minor than in the rest of the Greco-Roman world (Sir Wm. M. Ramsay,
St. Paul the Traveler and Roman Citizen, New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1896, p. 227). Yet the poorer class of women,
although free, were still under the sway of superstition and polytheism (Ramsay, p. 229).
E. Many have found a problem in the length of time that Paul stayed at Thessalonica:
1. Acts 17:2 speaks of Paul’s reasoning in the synagogue on three Sabbaths while in Thessalonica.
2. I Thess. 2:7-11 tells of Paul’s working at his trade. This was tent-making or as some have suggested working with
leather.
3. Phil. 4:16 supports the longer residence, when Paul received at least two monetary gifts from the church at Philippi
while in Thessalonica. The distance between the two cities is about 100 miles. Some suggest that Paul stayed about
two or three months and that the three Sabbaths refer only to the ministry to the Jews (Shepard, p. 165).
4. The differing accounts of the converts in Acts 17:4 and I Thess. 1:9 and 2:4 support this view, the key difference in
the accounts being the rejection of idols by the Gentiles. The Gentiles in Acts were Jewish proselytes and had
already turned from idols. The context implies Paul may have had a larger ministry among pagan Gentiles than Jews.
5. When a larger ministry might have occurred is uncertain because Paul always went to the Jews first. After they
rejected his message, he turned to the Gentiles. When they responded to the gospel in large numbers, the Jews
became jealous and started a riot among the rabble of the city.
F. Because of a riot Paul left Jason’s house and hid with Timothy and Silas, or at least they were not present when the mob
stormed Jason’s house looking for them. The Politarchs made Jason put up a security bond to insure peace. This caused
Paul to leave the city by night and go to Berea. Nevertheless, the church continued its witness of Christ in the face of much
opposition.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 17:1-9
1Now when they had traveled through Amphipolis and Apollonia, they came to Thessalonica, where there was a
synagogue of the Jews. 2And according to Paul’s custom, he went to them, and for three Sabbaths reasoned with them from
the Scriptures, 3explaining and giving evidence that the Christ had to suffer and rise again from the dead, and saying, “This
Jesus whom I am proclaiming to you is the Christ.” 4And some of them were persuaded and joined Paul and Silas, along with
a large number of the God-fearing Greeks and a number of the leading women. 5But the Jews, becoming jealous and taking
along some wicked men from the market place, formed a mob and set the city in an uproar; and attacking the house of Jason,
they were seeking to bring them out to the people. 6When they did not find them, they began dragging Jason and some
brethren before the city authorities, shouting, “These men who have upset the world have come here also; 7and Jason has
welcomed them, and they all act contrary to the decrees of Caesar, saying that there is another king, Jesus.” 8They stirred
up the crowd and the city authorities who heard these things. 9And when they had received a pledge from Jason and the
others, they released them.
17:1 “through Amphipolis and Apollonia” These two cities were located on the Roman highway, Ignatian Way (i.e., the Road of
the Nations), a major east-west road of over 500 miles, which linked the eastern and western parts of the empire and which formed
the main street of Thessalonica.
▣ “Thessalonica” See Introduction to this chapter.
▣ “where there was a synagogue” This was Paul’s pattern and sequence for proclamation (cf. v. 2; 3:26; 13:46; Rom. 1:16; 2:9,10;
Acts 9:20; 13:5,14; 14:1; 17:2,10,17; 18:4,19; 19:8), probably because he felt the gospel was first for the Jews (cf. Rom. 1:16)
because of OT prophecy. Also, many God-fearers also attended, knew, and respected the Old Testament.
17:2 “for three Sabbaths” This means he spoke in this synagogue on only three Sabbaths. He was probably in the city longer than
three weeks (cf. Phil. 4:16), but not for an extended period.
▣ “reasoned with them from the Scriptures” Paul matched Messianic prophecies with Jesus’ life, teaching, death, and resurrection.
He took this pattern from Stephen (Acts 7) and his rabbinical training.
17:3
NASB “explaining and giving evidence”
NKJV “explaining and demonstrating”
NRSV, NJB “explaining and proving”
TEV “explaining the Scriptures, and proving from them”
The first word is dianoigō, which is used of Jesus opening the Scriptures for the two on the road to Emmaus (cf. Luke 24:32,45).
It was also used of Jesus opening their eyes so that they recognized Him (cf. Luke 24:31). This same word was used in 16:14 for God
opening Lydia’s heart to understand the gospel.
The second term, paratithēmi, is used often in Luke’s writings for placing food before someone, but here it implies “to place
the truth before” or “to commend” (cf. 14:23; 20:32). Twice in Luke (cf. 12:48; 23:46) it is used of entrusting something to another.
Paul carefully and meticulously gave to the hearers the gospel (i.e., deposit, parathēkē, I Tim. 6:20; II Tim. 1:12,14). Some
responded (some Jews, some God-fearers, and several leading women).
▣ “Christ had to suffer” The term “had” (dei) is an imperfect active indicative, which denotes necessity (see full note at 1:16).
A suffering Messiah was predicted in the OT (cf. Gen. 3:15; Ps. 22; Isa. 52:13-53:12; Zech. 12:10), but was never clearly seen by
the rabbis. It was forcibly asserted by Apostolic preachers (cf. Luke 24:46; Acts 3:18; 26:23; I Pet. 1:10-12). This truth was the
major stumbling block to the Jews (cf. I Cor. 1:22-23). See note at 3:18.
▣ “and rise again from the dead” This is a common element in all the sermons of Peter, Stephen, and Paul in Acts (part of the
kerygma, see Special Topic at 2:14). It is a central pillar of the gospel (cf. I Corinthians 15).
▣ “This Jesus whom I am proclaiming to you is the Christ” There are many variations in the Greek manuscripts of the last words
of this sentence.
1. “the Christ, the Jesus” – MS B
2. “the Christ, Jesus” – some Vulgate and the Coptic translations
3. “Christ Jesus” – MSS P74, A, D
4. “Jesus Christ” – MS א
5. “Jesus the Christ” – MS E and Bohairic Coptic version
6. “the Christ” – the Georgean version
Many scholars choose the wording of #1 (Vaticanus) because it is so unusual (UBS4 gives it a “C” rating).
In this synagogue setting “the Christ” would mean the promised Anointed One of the OT, the Messiah (see Special Topic at
2:31). There were three anointed offices in the OT: kings, prophets, priests. Jesus fulfills all three of these functions (cf. Heb. 1:1-3).
This anointing was a symbol of God’s choice and equipping of a ministry task. See Special Topic: Anointing in the Bible at 4:27.
The early church acknowledged again and again that Jesus of Nazareth was the promised Messiah (cf. 2:31-32; 3:18; 5:42; 8:5;
9:22; 17:3; 18:5,28), following Jesus’ own clear and repeated affirmations.
17:4 “joined” This Greek verb (aorist passive indicative) is found only here in the NT. It literally means “to assign by lot.”
In this context it connotes “to follow” or “join with.” The “lot” was an OT way of knowing God’s will. The implication of
1. the preposition (pros)
2. the root (klēpoō)
3. the passive voice implies a divine action
God opened their hearts as He did Lydia’s (cf. 16:24; also notice similar thought in I Pet. 5:3).
▣ “God-fearing Greeks” These were followers of Judaism who had not yet become full converts, which involved
1. being circumcised
2. self baptism
3. offering a sacrifice when possible at the Temple in Jerusalem
▣ “and a number” This is another example of Juke’s use of litotes (a purposeful understatement, cf. 12:18; 15:2; 19:11,23,24;
20:12; 26:19,26; 27:20; 28:2), usually in the form of negation. Here the phrase is literally “not a few,” placed at the end of the
sentence for emphasis.
▣ “leading women” Women had greater freedom in Macedonia (Lydia) than other parts of the Mediterranean world. The pattern
set at Pisidian Antioch was repeating itself (cf. 13:43,45,50). The western family of Greek manuscripts adds a phrase in v. 4 asserting
that these women were the wives of leading men.
17:5 “the Jews, becoming jealous” Jewish unbelief is sad to me (cf. 14:2), but jealousy (cf. 5:17) is tragic! These were not
motivated by religious zeal like Saul’s, but jealousy! The number of converts (cf. 13:45), not the content of the preaching, is what
bothered them.
Luke uses the term “Jews” often in a pejorative, negative sense (cf. 12:3; 13:45; 14:2; 17:13), as does Paul (cf. I Thess. 2:15-16).
It becomes synonymous with those who oppose and resist the gospel.
▣
NASB “some wicked men from the marketplace”
NKJV “some evil men from the marketplace”
NRSV “some ruffians in the market places”
TEV “worthless loafers from the streets”
NJB “a gang from the market place”
This term describes one who hangs around the marketplace without working, a lazy good-for-nothing.
▣ “a mob” This word is found only here in the NT and is very rate in Greek literature. It is not found in the Septuagint. “Mob” is
the contextually implied meaning. Luke was an educated man with a large vocabulary (i.e., medical, nautical, etc.).
17:6 “dragging Jason” Some speculate that the Jason mentioned in Rom. 16:21 is this same person, but this is uncertain.
▣ “and some brethren” This construction implies that Jason was not yet a believer. Exactly how Jason welcomed the missionary
team is uncertain. It is possible that
1. Paul or Silas worked for him
2. they rented space from him
3. they stayed in his home
The verb welcome in v. 7 means “to receive as a guest” (cf. Luke 10:38; 19:6; James 2:25).
▣ “city authorities” This tem “politarch” means city leader. This was the special name for local governmental leaders in Macedonia.
It is a very rare word, used only here and in v. 8 in the NT, or in Greek literature and its use shows Luke’s knowledge of the area and
supports the historicity of Acts (NASB Study Bible, p. 1607, but the word has been found in a Greek inscription on an arch on the
Ignatian Way in Thessalonica). Luke was an accurate historian in an age when this was rare. He does have a faith agenda, which
believers affirm as inspiration.
▣
NASB “upset the world”
NKJV, NRSV
NJB “turned the world upside down”
TEV “caused trouble everywhere”
This implies a charge of sedition (cf. 21:38; also note 16:20; 24:5). This is a very strong term. Note Paul’s use of it in Gal. 5:12.
We know from I Thess. 2:14-16 that this church faced great persecution.
One wonders if this is hyperbole or they knew of the spread of this new sect of Judaism.
17:7 “to the decrees of Caesar” Some think this relates to Claudius’ (a.d. 41-54) edict of a.d. 49-50, which outlawed Jewish rituals
in Rome. This edict, in effect, caused the Jewish population of Rome to leave. However, I think the context is clear that it refers to
their preaching of the gospel. It was illegal for anyone to proselytize a Roman.
▣ “saying that there is another king, Jesus” This charge may be due to
1. Paul’s heavy emphasis on eschatology in his preaching at Thessalonica
2. the terms the Christians used for Jesus being the same terms that the Romans used of Caesar (king, lord, and savior)
17:8
NASB, TEV “the city authorities”
NKJV “rulers of the city”
NRSV “city officials”
NJB “the city counselors”
This is the Greek term politarchs, which were annual appointees in the cities of Macedonia. They were not Roman but local
leaders (AB, vol. 5, pp. 384-389).
17:9 “a pledge” Probably this was a large monetary security bond, which was put up by the recent converts (cf. vv. 4,6,10), to assure
that Paul did not continue to preach in the city. Some relate this to I Thess. 2:18.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 17:10-15
10The brethren immediately sent Paul and Silas away by night to Berea, and when they arrived, they went into the
synagogue of the Jews. 11Now these were more noble-minded than those in Thessalonica, for they received the word with
great eagerness, examining the Scriptures daily to see whether these things were so. 12Therefore many of them believed, along
with a number of prominent Greek women and men. 13But when the Jews of Thessalonica found out that the word of God
had been proclaimed by Paul in Berea also, they came there as well, agitating and stirring up the crowds. 14Then immediately
the brethren sent Paul out to go as far as the sea; and Silas and Timothy remained there. 15Now those who escorted Paul
brought him as far as Athens; and receiving a command for Silas and Timothy to come to him as soon as possible, they left.
17:10 “Berea” This was a large city in Paul’s day about 60 miles west, very close to the Ignatian Highway. It also had a Jewish
community, one that was open to listening to Paul and checking his theology from the texts he cited from the OT.
▣ “They went into the synagogue of the Jews” The text implies that soon after they arrived, even after an all-night journey, they
immediately went to the synagogue. Maybe it just happened to be the Sabbath or maybe they knew they would be followed by the
agitators. Time was of the essence. Modern western believers have lost the urgency and priority of evangelism!
17:11 “these were more noble-minded” This term was used for wealthy, educated, upper class people (cf. LXX Job 1:3; Luke
19:12). This literal definition does not fit the Jews of Berea; therefore, it is metaphorical for someone more willing to hear new ideas
and evaluate them. This open attitude may have been characteristic of the leading citizens of the city who worshiped at the synagogue
(cf. v. 12).
▣ “examining the Scriptures daily to see whether these things were so” This is the way to determine truth. Paul’s preaching
method was to quote the OT and then show how it applied to Jesus.
The phrase (“whether these things were so”) contains a fourth class conditional sentence (i.e., ei with the optative mood,
cf. 17:27; 20:16; 24:19; 27:12), which denotes that which is farthest removed from reality (less likely). Some responded; some did
not (the mystery of the gospel).
17:12 “many of them believed” This implies that many of the Jews of the synagogue and many of the “God-fearers” responded.
See Special Topics at 3:16 and 2:40.
▣ “prominent” This term is a compound from “good” and “form” or “appearance.” It was used of honorable, reputable, and
influential people (cf. 13:50 and Joseph of Arimathea, Mark 15:43).
17:13 This shows the purposeful opposition of Paul’s Jewish antagonists. Many of these were sincere Jews acting out of religious
motives (as Saul had). However, their methods reveal their spiritual status.
17:14 “as far as the sea” This may mean
1. Paul traveled to Athens by coastal boat
2. Paul took the coastal road to Athens
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 17:16-21
16Now while Paul was waiting for them at Athens, his spirit was being provoked within him as he was observing the city
full of idols. 17So he was reasoning in the synagogue with the Jews and the God-fearing Gentiles, and in the market place
every day with those who happened to be present. 18And also some of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers were conversing
with him. Some were saying, “What would this idle babbler wish to say?” Others, “He seems to be a proclaimer of strange
deities,” — because he was preaching Jesus and the resurrection. 19And they took him and brought him to the Areopagus,
saying, “May we know what this new teaching is which you are proclaiming? 20“For you are bringing some strange things
to our ears; so we want to know what these things mean.” 21(Now all the Athenians and the strangers visiting there used to
spend their time in nothing other than telling or hearing something new.)
17:16 “Athens” This was the greatest city of Greece’s past cultural heritage and still the intellectual center of the Roman world.
It was steeped in tradition, superstition and immorality.
▣ “his spirit” The Greek uncial manuscripts of the NT did not have
1. space between the words
2. punctuation marks
3. capitalization (all letters were capitals)
4. verse and chapter divisions
Therefore, only context can determine the need for capitals. Usually capitals are used for
1. names for deity
2. place names
3. personal names
The term “spirit” can refer to
1. the Holy Spirit (cf. Mark 1:5)
2. the conscious personal aspect of humanity (cf. Mark 8:12; 14:38)
3. some being of the spiritual realm (i.e., unclean spirits, cf. Mark 1:23)
In this context it refers to Paul as a person.
There are several places in Paul’s writings where this grammatical construction is used to describe what the Holy Spirit produces
in the individual believer
1. “not a spirit of slavery,” “a spirit of adoptions, Rom. 8:15
2. “a spirit of gentleness,” I Cor. 4:21
3. “a spirit of faith (faithfulness), II Cor. 4:13
4. “a spirit of wisdom and of revelation,” Eph. 1:17
It is obvious from the context Paul is using “spirit” as a way of referring to himself or other humans (I Cor. 2:11; 5:4; II Cor.
2:13; 7:13; Rom. 1:9; 8:16; Phil. 4:23).
▣
NASB “was being provoked within him”
NKJV “was provoked within him”
NRSV “was deeply distressed”
TEV “greatly upset”
NJB “was revolted”
This is an Imperfect passive indicative of paroxunō, which basically means “to sharpen,” but here is used figuratively to “stir
up.” This is the term (in its noun form) that is used to describe Paul and Barnabas’ fight over John Mark in 15:39. It is used
positively in Heb. 10:24.
17:17 Paul was concerned with both Jews (“reasoning in the synagogue”) and Gentiles, both those attracted to Judaism (god-fearers)
and those who were idolatrous pagans (“those who happened to be present in the market place”). Paul addressed these various groups
in different ways: to the Jews and God-fearers he used the OT, but to the pagans he tried to find some common ground (cf. vv. 22-31).
17:18 “Epicurean” This group believed that pleasure or happiness was the highest good and goal of life. They believed in no
personal, physical afterlife. “Enjoy life now” was their motto (a form of hedonism). They held that the gods were unconcerned with
humans. They got their name from Epicurus, an Athenian philosopher, 341-270 b.c., but they overstated his basic conclusion.
Epicurus saw pleasure in a wider sense than personal, physical pleasure (i.e., healthy body and tranquil mind). “Epicurus is reported
to have said, ‘If thou wilt make a man happy, add not unto his riches, but take away from his desires’” (The New Schaff-Herzog
Encyclopedia of Religious Knowledge, vol. IV, p. 153).
▣ “Stoic” This group believed that god was (1) the world-soul or (2) immanent in all creation (pantheism). They asserted that humans
must live in harmony with nature ( i.e., god). Reason was the highest good. Self-control, self-sufficiency, and emotional stability
in every situation was their goal. They did not believe in a personal afterlife. Their founder was Zeno, a philosopher from Cyprus,
who moved to Athens about 300 b.c. They got their name from the fact that he taught in the painted stoa in Athens.
▣ “idle babbler” This word was used of sparrows eating seeds in a field. It came to be used metaphorically of itinerant teachers
who picked up pieces of information here and there and tried to sell them. The R.S.V. Interlinear by Alfred Marshall translates it
as “ignorant plagiarist.” The NJB has “parrot.”
▣ “proclaimer of strange deities” This is literally “foreign daimōn” used in the sense of spiritual powers or gods (cf. I Cor. 10:20-21). These Athenian philosophers were religious polytheists (Olympic pantheon).
1. It is just possible that these Athenian Greek philosophers took Paul’s words as referring to two gods (Jerome Biblical
Commentary, vol. 2, p. 199).
a. goddess of health
b. goddess of resurrection (i.e., Anastasis)
2. It is even possible they saw one as
a. male (Jesus)
b. female (resurrection is a feminine noun)
3. Paul’s gospel terminology (cf. NET Bible) itself may be the source of the confusion related to one God in three persons
(i.e., the Trinity, see Special Topic at 2:32).
a. Father
b. Son
c. Spirit
▣ “because he was preaching Jesus and the resurrection” The stumbling block of the gospel for the Jews was “a suffering
Messiah” and for the Greeks it was “the resurrection” (cf. I Cor. 1:18-25). A personal, bodily afterlife did not fit into the Greek
understanding of the gods or mankind. They asserted a divine spark in every person, trapped or imprisoned by a physical body.
Salvation was deliverance from the physical and reabsorption into an impersonal or semi-personal deity.
17:19 “took him and brought him to the Areopagus” The term areopages means the hill of Ares (the god of war). In the Roman
pantheon, the war god was named Mars. In the golden days of Athens, it was the philosophical forum of this renowned intellectual
city. This was no judicial trial, but an open city forum in the presence of a council of city leaders.
This is a sample of Paul’s preaching to pagans, as 13:16ff was to God-fearing Gentiles. Thank God for these synopses of Paul’s
messages.
▣ “May we know what this new teaching is which you are proclaiming” Here is the difference between intellectual curiosity (cf.
vv. 20-21) and revelation. God has made us curious (cf. Eccl. 1:8-9,18; 3:10-11), but human intellect cannot bring peace and joy.
Only the gospel can do this! Paul discusses the difference between human wisdom and God’s revelation in I Corinthians 1-4.
17:19-20 These words are very socially polite. This was, in a sense, a university setting.
17:21 This verse seems to be an authorial comment. It shows that the politeness of vv. 19-20 was not true intellectual inquiry, but
a current cultural fad. They just enjoyed hearing and debating. They were trying to relive Athens’ past glory. The tragedy is they
could not differentiate between human wisdom and divine revelation (and so it is today in our universities)!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 17:22-31
22So Paul stood in the midst of the Areopagus and said, “Men of Athens, I observe that you are very religious in all
respects. 23For while I was passing through and examining the objects of your worship, I also found an altar with this
inscription, ‘to an unknown god.’ Therefore what you worship in ignorance, this I proclaim to you. 24The God who made
the world and all things in it, since He is Lord of heaven and earth, does not dwell in temples made with hands; 25nor is He
served by human hands, as though He needed anything, since He Himself gives to all people life and breath and all things;
26and He made from one man every nation of mankind to live on all the face of the earth, having determined their appointed
times and the boundaries of their habitation, 27that they would seek God, if perhaps they might grope for Him and find Him,
though He is not far from each one of us; 28for in Him we live and move and exist, as even some of your own poets have said,
‘For we also are His children.’ 29Being then the children of God, we ought not to think that the Divine Nature is like gold or
silver or stone, an image formed by the art and thought of man. 30Therefore having overlooked the times of ignorance, God
is now declaring to men that all people everywhere should repent, 31because He has fixed a day in which He will judge the
world in righteousness through a Man whom He has appointed, having furnished proof to all men by raising Him from the
dead.”
17:22 “you are very religious” This is literally “to fear the gods (daimōn).” This can mean (1) in a negative sense, “superstitious,”
as in the King James Version, or (2) in a positive sense, “very precise in the practice of religious detail” (NKJV, NJB cf. 25:19).
These men had an intellectual curiosity and respect for religious matters, but only within certain parameters (their traditions).
▣ “all” Notice the number of times in this sermon that Paul uses the inclusive “all” or phrases that parallel it.
1. “all respects,” v. 22
2. “all things,” v. 24
3. “all life and breath,” v. 25
4. “all things,” v. 25
5. “every nation,” v. 26
6. “all the face of the earth,” v. 26
7. “each one of us,” v. 27
8. “we” (twice”, v. 28
9. “all everywhere,” v. 30
10. “the world” (lit. The inhabited earth), v. 31
11. “all men,” v. 31
Paul’s good news was that God loved all humans (i.e., made in His image, cf. Gen. 1:26-27) and has provided a way for them to know
Him (i.e., original purpose of creation was fellowship with God, cf. Gen. 3:8) and be forgiven (i.e., from the effects of the fall, cf.
Gen. 3).
17:23 “inscription, ‘to an unknown god’” The Greeks were afraid they may have forgotten or left out of their worship an
important deity who might cause trouble if neglected, so they regularly had monuments of this type (cf. Pausanias, Description of
Greece 1:1:4 and Philostratus, Life of Apollonius 6:3:5). It shows their fear of the spiritual realm and their polytheism.
▣ “Therefore what you worship in ignorance” There is a word play between “unknown” (agnōetō) and “ignorance” (agnoountes).
We get the English word “agnostic” from this Greek word. Paul was adapting the gospel presentation to pagans who believed in an
impersonal world soul.
▣ “This I proclaim to you” Paul is clearly asserting that he is not a “babbler” (v. 18) and that he does know the high God they are
ignorant of.
17:24 “The God who made the world and all things in it” Paul’s first theological point is God is creator (cf. Gen. 1-2; Ps. 104;
146:6; Isa. 42:5). The Greeks believed that spirit (God) and matter (atoms) were both co-eternal. Paul asserts the Genesis 1 concept
of creation where a personal, purposeful God creates both the heavens and the earth (this planet and the universe).
▣ “does not dwell in temples made with hands” This is a quote from (1) the OT (cf. I Kings 8:27; Isa. 66:1-2) or (2) a Greek
philosopher, Euripides, Fragment 968. There are several quotes in this context from Greek writers (cf. vv.25 & 28). Paul was also
trained in Greek scholastics.
17:25 “as though He needed anything” This same thought is found in (1) Euripides’ Heracles 1345f; (2) Plato’s Euthyphro 14c;
(3) Aristobulus, Fragment 4; or (4) Psalm 50:9-12. The Greek temples were often seen as the place where the gods were fed and cared
for.
▣ “since He Himself gives to all people life and breath and all things” This may be an allusion to Isa. 42:5. This is Paul’s
theological way of asserting (1) God’s love for humanity (mercy, grace) and (2) God’s gracious provision for humanity (providence).
A similar truth was made by Zeno, the founder of the Stoic school, recorded in Clement of Alexandria, Stromateis 5:76:1. Notice
the “autos,” He Himself! What a wonderful truth for Gentile pagans to hear and receive.
17:26 “He made from one” The western family of Greek manuscripts adds “one blood.” However, the Greek manuscripts P74, א,
A, and B omit the term (the UBS4 gives its omission a “B” rating [almost certain]). If original it refers to Adam. If it is an allusion
to Greek philosophy it reflects the unity of humanity from one stock. This phrase and the next one clearly assert the solidarity of all
humanity (possibly an allusion from Mal. 2:10, or even the LXX of Deut. 32:8), and theologically it asserts that humans are made
in God’s image (cf. Gen. 1:26-27).
The rest of this verse may also allude to the Genesis account. Mankind is commanded to be fruitful and fill the earth (cf. 1:28;
9:1,7). Humans were reluctant to separate and fill the earth. The Tower of Babel (cf. Gen. 10-11) shows God’s mechanism to
accomplish this.
▣ “having determined their appointed times and the boundaries of their habitation” Paul asserts that God not only created all
things, but directs all things. This may be an allusion to Deut. 32:8 (LXX). However, this truth is also asserted elsewhere in the OT
(cf. Job 12:23; Ps. 47:7-9; 66:7).
17:27 The first phrase may be another quote from the Greek poet, Aratus.
▣ “if” This is a fourth class conditional which means the farthest removed from reality. Humans must recognize their need.
Both verbs are aorist active optatives.
▣
NASB, NKJV,
NRSV “they might grope for Him”
TEV “as they felt around for him”
NJB “feeling their way towards him”
The word means “to touch” or “to feel” (cf. Luke 24:39). This context implies a groping due to darkness or confusion. They
are trying to find God, but it is not easy. Paganism is a blinding force which characterizes the fall, as does idolatry and superstition
(cf. Romans 1-2), but God is present!
▣ “He is not far from each one of us” What a wonderful truth. God created us, God is for us, God is with us (cf. Psalm 139)! Paul
is forcibly asserting God’s love, care, and presence with all humans. This is the truth of the gospel (cf. Eph. 2:11-3:13).
Paul may be alluding to Deut. 4:7 or Jer. 23:23-24, but extrapolating it to all humans. This is the hidden secret of the New
Covenant!
17:28 “even some of your own poets have said” The previous phrase, “in Him we live and move and exist,” is a quote from
1. Cleanthes’ Hymn to Zeus. He was the head of the Stoic school from 263-232 b.c. or
2. Aratus’s (from Soli, a city near Tarsus) Phainomena, line 5. Aratus was from Cilicia and lived from 315-240 b.c. This
quote emphasizes either
a. God’s immanence (cf. v. 27) or
b. God’s creation of all humans (cf. v. 26).
Paul also quotes the Epicureans in I Cor. 15:32 and Menander, Thais, in I Cor. 15:33. Paul was trained in Greek literature and
rhetoric, probably at Tarsus, which was a major university town.
▣ “For we also are His children” This is another quote, possibly from Epimenides, quoted by Diogenes Laertius in Lives of the
Philosophers 1:112.
17:29 This is Paul’s conclusion and refutation of idolatry (cf. Ps. 115:1-18; Isa. 40:18-20; 44:9-20; 46:1-7; Jer. 10:6-11; Hab. 2:18-19). The tragedy of fallen humanity is that they seek spiritual truth and fellowship from manmade things that cannot hear, answer,
or help!
17:30 “overlooked the times of ignorance” This is a surprising aspect of God’s mercy (cf. Rom. 3:20,25; 4:15; 5:13,20; 7:5,7-8;
I Cor. 15:56). But now they have heard the gospel and are spiritually responsible!
▣ “God is now declaring to men that all people everywhere” This statement asserts
1. there is only one God
2. He wants all humans everywhere to repent
It shows the universalism of God’s mercy and love (cf. John 3:16; 4:42; I Tim. 2:4; Titus 2:11; II Pet. 3:9; I John 2:1; 4:14).
This is not universalism in the sense that all will be saved (cf. vv. 32-33), but in the sense that God desires all humans to repent and
trust Jesus for salvation. Jesus died for all! All can be saved! The mystery of evil is that not all will be saved.
▣ “repent” The Hebrew term means “a change of action,” while the Greek term refers to a “change of mind.” Both are crucial.
Both schools of philosophy mentioned in v. 18 would have rejected this, but for different reasons. See Special Topic: Repentance
at 2:38.
17:31 “because He has fixed a day in which He will judge the world” Paul’s message has clearly and repeatedly asserted God’s
mercy and provision. But this is only half the message. The God of love and compassion is also the God of justice who desires
righteousness. Humans made in His image will give an account of their stewardship of the gift of life (i.e., Ps. 96:13; 98:9). The NT
theme that God will judge the world (hyperbole on the known world) is recurrent (ex. Matt. 10:15; 11:22,24; 16:27; 22:36; 25:31-46;
Rev. 20:11-15).
▣ “through a Man whom He has appointed” This concept of a Judgement Day based on our faith relationship to a resurrected
man, Jesus of Nazareth (YHWH’s agent in judgment), was unheard of and incredible to these Greek intellectuals (cf. I Cor. 1:23),
but the heart of the gospel witness (cf. 10:42; Matt. 25:31-33).
▣ “by raising Him from the dead” This theme is repeated many times in Acts (cf. 2:24,32; 3:15,26; 4:10; 5:30; 10:40; 13:30,33,
34,37; 17:31). It is the heart of the gospel affirmation that God the Father accepted the life, teaching, and substitutionary death of
Jesus. The fullest teaching text on the subject of (1) Jesus’ resurrection and (2) the resurrection of believers is I Corinthians 15.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 17:32-34
32Now when they heard of the resurrection of the dead, some began to sneer, but others said, “We shall hear you again
concerning this.” 33So Paul went out of their midst. 34But some men joined him and believed, among whom also were
Dionysius the Areopagite and a woman named Damaris and others with them.
17:32 “when they heard of the resurrection of the dead” The Greeks, except the Epicureans, believed in the immortality of the
soul, but not of the body. The resurrection was the major stumbling block for the Greeks (cf. v. 18; I Cor. 1:23).
▣ “sneer” This term is used only here in the NT, but the intensified form appears in Acts 5:30 and 26:21. Its root (chleusma or
chleusmos) is used in the Septuagint several times for “derision” or “mockery” (cf. Job 12:4; Ps. 79:4; Jer. 20:8).
▣ “but others said, ‘We shall hear you again concerning this’” Paul’s message of God’s love and care for all people was so
radically new that these hearers were attracted, but not fully convinced.
17:34 “some men joined him and believed, among whom also were Dionysius” There are three possible responses to the gospel:
1. rejection, “some began to sneer” (v. 32)
2. delayed decision, “we shall hear you again concerning this (v. 32)
3. belief, “some joined Paul and believed” (v. 34; I Thess. 1:9-10)
This parallels the parable of the sower (cf. Matthew 13).
▣ “Dionysius the Areopagite” He must have been a regular attender of these philosophical discussions on Mars Hill. At least one
intellectual became a believer.
Eusebius, Eccl. His. 3:4:6-7 and 4:23:6 says he became the first bishop of Athens or Corinth. If true, what a great
transformation! The gospel is in the transformation business!
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why did Paul bypass certain larger cities like Amphipolis and Apollonia?
2. Why was Christ’s suffering so upsetting to the Jews?
3. Why is Berea’s response to the gospel so noteworthy and encouraging?
4. Why was Paul so stirred over Athen’s spiritual situation?
5. Why is Paul’s sermon on Mars Hill so significant? (vs. 22-24)
ACTS 18
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul at Corinth |
Ministering at Corinth |
Founding of the Church in |
In Corinth |
Foundation of the Church |
18:1-4 |
18:1-17 |
18:1-4 |
18:1-4 |
18:1-4 |
18:5-11 |
|
18:5-11 |
18:5-8 |
18:5-11 |
|
|
|
18:9-11 |
The Jews Take Paul to |
18:12-17 |
|
18:12-17 |
18:12-13 |
18:12-17 |
|
|
|
18:14-17 |
|
Paul’s Return to Antioch |
Paul Returns to Antioch |
End of the Second |
The Return to Antioch |
Return to Antioch and |
18:18-23 |
18:18-23 |
18:18-21 |
18:18-21 |
18:18 |
|
|
|
|
18:19-21 |
|
|
18:22-23 |
18:22-23 |
18:22-23 |
Apollos Preaches at |
Ministry of Apollos |
Apollos in Ephesus |
Apollos in Ephesus and |
Apollos |
18:24-28 |
18:24-28 |
18:24-28 |
18:24-28 |
18:24-26 |
|
|
|
|
18:27-28 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 18:1-4
1After these things he left Athens and went to Corinth. 2And he found a Jew named Aquila, a native of Pontus, having
recently come from Italy with his wife Priscilla, because Claudius had commanded all the Jews to leave Rome. He came to
them, 3and because he was of the same trade, he stayed with them and they were working, for by trade they were
tent-makers. 4And he was reasoning in the synagogue every Sabbath and trying to persuade Jews and Greeks.
18:1 “he left Athens and went to Corinth” Corinth was 50 miles west of Athens on a narrow strip of land (isthmus). Paul was alone
in Athens and even for a little while in Corinth (cf. v. 5). Paul had eye problems (thorn in the flesh, cf. II Cor. 12). It was very hard
for him to be alone.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE CITY OF CORINTH
A. Winter shipping lanes around the southern most point of Greece (i.e., Cape Malea) were very dangerous. Therefore, a land
route of the shortest possible length was crucial. The geographical location of Corinth on the four mile isthmus between
the Gulf of Corinth (i.e., Adriatic Sea) and the Saronic Gulf (i.e., Aegean Sea) made the city a major commercial (i.e.,
shipping and trading center specializing in types of pottery and a special type of brass) and military center. In Paul’s day
this was literally where the cultures of the East and West met.
B. Corinth was also a major cultural center of the Greco-Roman world because it hosted the bi-annual Isthmian Games which
began in 581 b.c. (at the Temple of Poseidon). Only the Olympic Games in Athens, every four years, rivaled them in size
and importance (Thucydides, Hist. 1.13.5).
C. In 146 b.c. Corinth was involved in a revolt (i.e., the Achaean League) against Rome and was destroyed by the Roman
General Lucius Mummius and the population dispersed. Because of its economical and military importance it was rebuilt
in either 46 or 48 b.c. by Julius Caesar. It became a Roman colony where Roman soldiers retired. It was a mimic of Rome
in architecture and culture and the administrative center of the Roman (i.e., Senatorial) province of Achaia in 27 b.c. It
became an Imperial Province in a.d. 15.
D. The acropolis of Old Corinth, rising more than 1880 feet above the plain, was the site of the temple to Aphrodite. To this
temple were attached 1,000 prostitutes (Strabo, Geography, 8.6.20-22). To be called “a Corinthian” (i.e.,
Korinthiazesthai, coined by Aristophanes [450-385 b.c.]) was synonymous to loose, riotous living. This temple, as most
of the city, was destroyed in an earthquake about 150 years before Paul arrived, as it was again in a.d. 77. It is uncertain
if the fertility cult continued in Paul’s day. Since the Romans, in 146 b.c., destroyed the city and killed or enslaved all
of its citizens, the Greek flavor of the city was superseded by its Roman colonial status (Pausanias, II.3.7).
18:2 “a Jew named Aquila. . .Priscilla” His wife, Priscilla, also called Prisca, is usually mentioned first (cf. 18:18,26; I Cor. 16:19;
II Tim. 4:19), which was highly unusual in this patriarchal culture (see Special Topic: Women in the Bible at 2:17). Her name
matches a wealthy Roman family name (gens Prisca). She is never said to be a Jew. What a great love story it would be if she were
a wealthy Roman lady who fell in love with an itinerant Jewish tentmaker or leather worker! They befriended and worked together
with Paul in that trade. They helped disciple Apollos.
▣ “recently” In A Translator’s Handbook on the Acts of the Apostles, p. 347, Newman and Nida make an interesting point about
this adverb, prosphatōs. Originally it means “freshly killed,” but it came to be used metaphorically as “recent.” This is a good
example of how etymology is not always a good indication of meanings. Words must be understood in their contemporary and
contextual setting. Many of the misinterpretations of the Bible come from the failure of the modern interpreter to recognize the
ancient metaphorical or idiomatic usage.
▣ “having come from Italy with his wife Priscilla, because Claudius had commanded all the Jews to leave Rome” In Historia
Contra Paganus 7.6.15, Orosius says the date of this edict was a.d. 49. Suetonius, in Life of Claudius 25.4, tells us that it was over
rioting in the Jewish ghetto at the instigation of one Chrestus. The Romans confused Christus with Chrestus (cf. Tacitus, Annais
25:44:3). Dio Cassius in Histories 60.6, says the Jews were not expelled, but forbidden to practice their ancestral customs.
The participle, “having come,” is perfect active participle, implying that the move was thought to be permanent or long
term. Claudius’ edict (command) is a perfect passive infinitive.
18:3 “because he was of the same trade” This is usually thought to be tent-making, but the word can refer to leather working.
Paul’s rabbinical background demanded that he have a secular job or trade. No rabbi could take money for teaching. Cilicia, Paul’s
home area, was noted for its goat hair and skins.
18:4 “he was reasoning in the synagogue every Sabbath” Paul was active every Sabbath both “reasoning” and “trying to persuade”
(these are both imperfect tense). Paul went to the Jews first because
1. it was Jesus’ example (cf. Matt. 10:5-6)
2. they knew the OT
3. the God-fearing Greeks there were generally responsive to his message (cf. Rom. 1:16)
The synagogue developed during the Babylonian exile as a place of worship, education, and prayer. It was designed to foster and
maintain Jewish culture.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 18:5-11
5But when Silas and Timothy came down from Macedonia, Paul began devoting himself completely to the word, solemnly
testifying to the Jews that Jesus was the Christ. 6But when they resisted and blasphemed, he shook out his garments and said
to them, “Your blood be on your own heads! I am clean. From now on I will go to the Gentiles.” 7Then he left there and went
to the house of a man named Titius Justus, a worshiper of God, whose house was next to the synagogue. 8Crispus, the leader
of the synagogue, believed in the Lord with all his household, and many of the Corinthians when they heard were believing
and being baptized. 9And the Lord said to Paul in the night by a vision, “Do not be afraid any longer, but go on speaking and
do not be silent; 10for I am with you, and no man will attack you in order to harm you, for I have many people in this city.”
11And he settled there a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them.
18:5 “Silas and Timothy came down from Macedonia” They apparently brought a love offering from the believers at Philippi,
which allowed Paul to preach full time (cf. II Cor. 11:9; Phil. 4:15). Timothy also brought news about the church at Thessalonica
in response to which Paul wrote I and II Thessalonians (cf. 17:14). It seems that, just as Luke had been left in Philippi to disciple
the new believers, Timothy was left at Thessalonica and Silas at Berea. Paul was very concerned with the training of new Christians
(i.e., the Great Commission is making and teaching disciples, not just decisions). He wanted to leave an active, growing, reproducing
church in every city he visited.
▣
NASB “Paul began devoting himself completely to the word”
NKJV “Paul was constrained by the Spirit”
NRSV “Paul was occupied with proclaiming the word”
TEV “Paul ave his whole time to preaching the message”
NJB “Paul devoted all his time to preaching”
There is a Greek manuscript variant in this phrase. The oldest and best texts have the dative of Logos (cf. MSS P74, א, A, B,
D, E, along with the Vulgate, Peshitta, and Coptic translations). The UBS4 rates it “B” (almost certain). The Textus Receptus has
“Spirit” (pneumati), which is found only in much later Minuscule Greek manuscripts (three from the tenth century are the oldest).
▣ “solemnly testifying to the Jews that Jesus is the Christ” Compare 9:22 with 17:3 concerning Paul’s method of persuasion
(imperfect passive indicative of sunechō, which means to constrict or press), which was very much like Stephen’s method and
enthusiasm (cf. Acts 7). See note at 2:40. This often repeated theological assertion (i.e., Jesus is the Messiah, see note at 17:3) is
the key to all others!
18:6 “resisted and blasphemed” These are both present middle participles, which emphasize continuing personal involvement.
Unfortunately this became the all too common response from the Jews of the Diaspora.
▣ “he shook out his garments” This was a Jewish symbol for rejection (cf. Neh. 5:13; Acts 13:51; Luke 9:5; 10:11). See complete
note at 13:51.
▣ “Your blood be on your own heads” This OT idiom has several connotations.
1. the responsibility of a watchman, both individually and collectively, Ezek. 3:16ff; 33:1-6
2. a personal responsibility, Josh. 2:19; II Sam. 1:16; Ezek. 18:13; Acts 18:6; 20:26
3. a corporate responsibility of the ancestors or nations, II Sam. 3:28-29; II Kgs. 2:33
4. NT combination of # 2 and #3, Matt. 27:25
Life was in the blood (cf. Lev. 17:11,14). The shedding of blood made someone responsible to God for that death (cf. Gen.
4:10; 9:4-6).
▣ “I am clean” This is an OT sacrificial metaphor of personal responsibility. Paul was no longer spiritually responsible (cf. Ezekiel
33) for the Jews to hear the gospel in this city. He shared the message and they would not respond. Are we clean?
▣ “From now on I will go to the Gentiles” This evangelistic procedure and curse became normative for Paul (cf. 13:46; 18:6;
26:20; 28:28). Paul felt obligated to preach to the house of Israel first, following Jesus (cf. Matt. 10:6; 15:24; Mark 7:27). He
explains this theologically in Rom. 1:3,5,9-11 and emotionally in Acts 9;15; 22:21; 26:17 (cf. Rom. 11:13; 15:16; Gal. 1:16; 2:7-9;
Eph. 3:2,8; I Tim. 2:7; II Tim. 4:17).
18:7 “Titus Justus” There are several possibilities as to the identity of this “worshiper of God” who lived next to the synagogue in
Corinth.
1. His full name is Gaius Titus Justus and the church in Corinth met in his home (cf. Rom. 16:23)
2. He may be the Gaius mentioned in I Cor. 1:14 who was baptized by Paul
3. There is a Greek manuscript variant connected with this name.
a. Titiou Ioustou, MSS B, D2 (UBS4 gives this a “C” rating)
b. Titou Ioustou, MSS א, E, P
c. Ioustou, MSS A, B2, D*
d. Titou, Peshitta and Coptic translations
▣ “a worshiper of God”
An inscription from Aphrodisias (3rd century), uses the phrase “worshiper of God” for those Gentiles
attached to and attending the synagogue. So “God fearers” (10:1-2,22; 13:16,26) is synonymous to “worshiper of God” (cf. 13:50;
16:14; 18:6-7).
This phrase is hard to define. The same phrase is used of Lydia in 16:14 and several Greeks at Thessalonica in 17:4 and in
Berea in 17:17. They seem to be Greeks who were attracted to Judaism, attended the synagogue when possible, but were not full
proselytes. However, the phrase “a God-fearing proselyte” is used to describe full proselytes at the synagogue in Perga of Pamphylia
in 13:43.
18:8 “Crispus” This man was the organizer and superintendent of the local synagogue (cf. I Cor. 1:14).
▣ “believed in the Lord with all his household” Acts records several instances where the head of a house converts and the entire
extended family is baptized (cf. 11:14; 16:15,31-34; 18:8, See Special Topic: Baptism at 2:38). Westerners forget the place of the
extended family in the ancient Mediterranean world. Family was priority. Individuality was not emphasized. Although this is
different from our individualistic understanding of evangelism, that does not make it inappropriate or less real.
However, it is also to be noted that not all the members of saved families who attended church were saved. Onesimus was a
slave in Philemon’s house where the church met, but he was not saved until he met Paul in prison.
For “believed” see Special Topics at 2:40 and 3:16.
▣ “many of the Corinthians when they heard were believing and being baptized” Many at Corinth readily accepted Paul’s
message, but Paul was discouraged and had to be energized by a special divine vision (cf. v. 10b). The Corinthian churches (house
churches) were Paul’s most difficult, problematic congregations. He loved them, but they caused him great personal pain (cf. I and
II Corinthians).
There is a relevant parallel to this context in I Cor. 1:14-17. I have included here one of my notes from my commentary on I
Corinthians. See it online free at www.freebiblecommentary.org
“1:17 “For Christ did not send me to baptize, but to preach” This is not meant to disparage baptism, but to react to
the factious spirit in the church of Corinth that was lifting up certain leaders. However, this statement does indicate that
baptism was not seen as a “sacramental” agency of grace. It is surprising that some interpret Paul’s writings in a
sacramental sense when in all his writings he specifically mentions the Lord’s Supper only once in I Corinthians 11 and
baptism twice, in Rom. 6:1-11 and Col. 2:12. However, baptism is the will of God for every believer.
1.it is the example of Jesus
2.it is the command of Jesus
3.it is the expected, normal procedure for all believers
I do not believe it is the channel for receiving the grace of God or the Spirit. It was that public opportunity for new
believers to express their faith in a very public and decisive way. No NT believer would ask, “Must I be baptized to be
saved?” Jesus did it! Jesus commanded the church to do it! Do it!” Baptism is still a major decisive public declaration
of one’s personal faith, especially in non-Christian cultures.
18:9 “Do not be afraid any longer” This is a present middle imperative with a negative particle, which usually means to stop
an act already in process. This may be an allusion to Gen. 26:24 or Deut. 1:29-33; 20:1, where Isaac was afraid. Paul was afraid and
needed Christ’s encouragement. Luke records these special visions of encouragement in 22:17-18; 23:11; 27:23-24. If a man like
Paul grew weary in well-doing, does it surprise you that you do, too? Jesus is with us also (cf. v. 10; Matt. 28:20)! The Great
Commission is still the guiding goal, the main thing (cf. Matt. 28:18-20; Luke 24:47; Acts 1:8).
▣ “but you go on speaking and do not be silent” These are both imperatives (present active and aorist active). Fear must
not silence the gospel proclaimer! Our emotions go up and down, but Acts 1:8 is still the guiding light (cf. II Tim. 4:2-5).
18:10 “I am with you” There is no greater promise (cf. Gen. 26:24; Exod 3:12; 33:4; Ps. 23:4; Matt. 28:20; Heb. 13:5). Notice
He is with us, not for our personal comfort or security, but for evangelistic boldness (so too, the purpose of the filling of the Spirit
in Acts). The Spirit’s presence is for proclamation, not personal peace alone.
▣ “for I have many people in this city” The phrase “I have many people” is an allusion to the OT use of this term for Israel (i.e.,
the people of God), but now in the NT it refers to those in Corinth (Jews and Gentiles) who would respond to the gospel message.
There is no more Jew or Greek (cf. Rom. 3:22; I Cor. 12:13; Gal. 3:28; Col. 3:11). The church is now called by OT titles (cf. Gal.
6:16; I Pet. 2:5,9; Rev. 1:6).
This is an emphasis of God’s predestination and foreknowledge (cf. Romans 9; Ephesians 1). Oh, if we could only see the book
of Life now! The church’s witness is effective (cf. Rev. 13:8). Personal assurance is for evangelistic boldness, not the confirmation
of a ticket to heaven when believers die!
18:11 This verse helps establish a possible chronology for Paul’s missionary travels. Although the phrase is ambiguous, it implies
a preaching mission of eighteen months in Corinth.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 18:12-17
12But while Gallio was proconsul of Achaia, the Jews with one accord rose up against Paul and brought him before the
judgment seat, 13saying, “This man persuades men to worship God contrary to the law.” 14But when Paul was about to open
his mouth, Gallio said to the Jews, “If it were a matter of wrong or of vicious crime, O Jews, it would be reasonable for me
to put up with you; 15but if there are questions about words and names and your own law, look after it yourselves; I am
unwilling to be a judge of these matters.” 16And he drove them away from the judgment seat. 17And they all took hold of
Sosthenes, the leader of the synagogue, and began beating him in front of the judgment seat. But Gallio was not concerned
about any of these things.
18:12 “Gallio” From biblical and extra-biblical sources we learn that this was a fair and competent political leader. His brother,
Seneca, says of him, “Even those who love my brother Gallio to the utmost of their power do not love him enough” and “no man was
ever as sweet to one as Gallio is to all.” This political appointee helps us to date Paul’s journeys. He was a proconsul for two and
one half years starting in a.d. 51.
▣ “Gallio was proconsul of Achaia” Luke is an accurate historian. The names of Roman officials in this area had changed since
a.d. 44; “proconsul” (cf. 13:7; 19:38) was correct because Emperor Claudius gave this province to the Senate.
▣ “the Jews with one accord” Luke uses this phrase many times to express the unity of the believers (cf. 1:14; 2:1,46; 4:24; 5:12;
8:6; 15:25), but here it denotes the unity of the jealousy and anti-gospel rebellion of the Jews of Corinth (cf. v. 6). Other examples
of the use of this phrase in a negative sense are 7:57; 12:20; and 19:29. The term “Jews” often has a pejorative sense in Luke’s
writings.
▣ “brought him before the judgment seat” This is the word bēma (literally, “step”). It was the seat or raised platform of Roman
justice (cf. Matt. 27:19; John 19:13; Acts 25:6,10,17; II Cor. 5:10).
18:13 “to worship God contrary to the law” This Jewish claim that Christianity was a violation of their laws and, therefore, not
a part of Judaism, was a very important legal issue. If Gallio had ruled on this charge, Christianity would have become an illegal
religion. But, as it was, Christianity enjoyed political protection (it was seen as a sect of Judaism, which was a legal religion) under
Roman law until Nero’s persecution, 10-12 years later.
It is even possible that one of Luke’s purposes in writing Acts was to document that Christianity was not a threat to Roman
authority. Every Roman official is recorded as recognizing this fact.
18:14 “If” This is a second class conditional sentence. It is a rare construction that makes a false statement in order to make
a point or continue a discussion. It is often called “contrary to fact” condition. This should be translated “if it were a matter of wrong
or of vicious crime, which it is not, then it would be reasonable for me to put up with you, which it is not.”
18:15 “if” This is a first class conditional sentence. The legal issue was, in reality, a religious issue. Gallio wisely recognized
the true motive of the Jews. He could not and would not act as a judge in these kinds of matters.
18:16 “he drove them away” This is the only occurrence of this verb in the NT, but it was used several times in the Septuagint (cf.
I Sam. 6:8; Ezek. 34:12). It is an intensified form of elaunō, which means to expel forcibly.
18:17 “they all took hold of Sosthenes” “They all” refers to the Jews of v. 12 or possibly to Greeks, which shows the underlying
anti-Semitism of these Greek cities. A Sosthenes is mentioned in I Cor. 1:1; whether he is the same one or not is uncertain, but it is
a rather rare name. This Sosthenes had taken Crispus’ place as leader of the synagogue. Why the Jews should beat him is uncertain.
Maybe he let Paul speak at the synagogue.
▣ “But Gallio was not concerned about any of these things” This Roman political leader, unlike Pilate, would not be swayed by
the crowd.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 18:18-21
18Paul, having remained many days longer, took leave of the brethren and put out to sea for Syria, and with him were
Priscilla and Aquila. In Cenchrea he had his hair cut, for he was keeping a vow. 19They came to Ephesus, and he left them
there. Now he himself entered the synagogue and reasoned with the Jews. 20When they asked him to stay for a longer time,
he did not consent, 21but taking leave of them and saying, “I will return to you again if God wills,” he set sail from Ephesus.
18:18 “Cenchrea” This was one of two seaports of Corinth. It was located on the Aegean Sea, on the east side of the narrow isthmus
on which Corinth was located. It is mentioned again as the site of a church in Rom. 16:1.
▣ “keeping a vow” This refers to a chronologically limited Nazarite vow described in Num. 6:1-21 (cf. F. F. Bruce, Answers to
Questions, p. 52). Paul does this again in Acts 21:24 (see note there). The cutting or shaving of the head would denote the end of
the vow.
Both A. T. Robertson and M. R. Vincent think this was not a Nazarite vow because it could only be terminated in Jerusalem
according to Jewish custom. Paul did become all things to all men to win some (cf. I Cor. 9:19-23). We can be sure this vow was
for evangelism, not legalism! And, of course, there is always the possibility that it was Aquilla who shaved his head.
18:19 “Ephesus” This was a large commercial city in western Asia Minor. After the harbor at Miletus was destroyed by silt from
the Maeander River, the commercial trade moved up the coast to Ephesus, which also had a natural harbor. By the NT period the
best days of Ephesus had passed. It was still a large and influential city, but nothing like its past glory.
1. It was the largest city of the Roman province of Asia Minor. It was not the capital, though the Roman governor lived there.
It was a commercial center because of it excellent natural harbor.
2. It was a free city, which allowed it to have local government and much freedom, including no garrison of Roman soldiers.
3. It was the only city which was allowed to hold the bi-annual Asian games.
4. It was the site of the Temple to Artemis (Diana in Latin), which was one of the seven wonders of the world of its day. It
was 425′ x 220′ with 127 columns, which were 60′ tall; 86 of them were overlaid with gold (see Pliny’s Hist. Nat. 36:95ff).
The image of Artemis was thought to have been a meteor which resembled a many-breasted female figure. This meant
that there were many cultic prostitutes present in the city (cf. Acts 19). It was a very immoral, multi- cultural city.
5. Paul stayed in this city more than three years (cf. Acts 18:18ff; 20:13).
6. Tradition asserts that it became John’s home after Mary’ death in Palestine.
▣ “he himself entered the synagogue and reasoned with the Jews” Paul loved his people (cf. Rom. 9:1-5). He tried without fail
to reach them with and for the gospel.
18:20 These Jews were like the Bereans. They were willing to listen. Why Paul was unwilling to stay is not stated in the text, but
in v. 21 it shows he was willing to return at God’s direction at a later date.
18:21 “I will return to you again if God wills” Paul believed his life was in God’s hands, not his own (cf. Rom. 1:10; 15:32; I Cor.
4:19; 16:7). This is the biblical worldview (cf. Heb. 6:3; James 4:15; I Pet. 3:17). Paul will return and Ephesus will become his major
focus on the third missionary journey.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 18:22-23
22When he had landed at Caesarea, he went up and greeted the church, and went down to Antioch. 23And having spent
some time there, he left and passed successively through the Galatian region and Phrygia, strengthening all the disciples.
18:22 Verse 21 ends with Paul sailing from Ephesus. Verse 22 has him landing in Palestine (Caesarea) and visiting the church in
Jerusalem (“he went up,” theologically speaking) and then (down) to Antioch of Syria. It must be remembered that Luke is not
recording a daily exhaustive travel itinerary, but jumping from one significant theological event to another. Acts is not modern
history, but it is a good, accurate history! Verse 22 ends the second missionary journey and verse 23 begins the third missionary
journey.
▣ “the church” See Special Topic at 5:11.
▣ “the Galatian region and Phrygia” This phrase “Galatian region” is still the source of controversy among scholars as to whether
this refers to racial or political divisions within modern central Turkey.
The Phrygian region is first mentioned in 2:10. Some who experienced Pentecost were from this area. Paul was forbidden to
preach in this area in 16:6.
One wonders if the phrase “strengthening all the disciples” in the latter part of v. 23 refers to Pentecost converts in Phrygia or
Paul’s converts in Derbe, Lystra, and Iconium, which were in the Pisidian southern part of the Roman province of Galatia.
This is the beginning of Paul’s third missionary journey (cf. 18:23-21:16).
▣ “strengthening all the disciples” Paul took the Great Commission of Matt. 28:19-20 seriously. His ministry involved both
evangelism (cf. Matt. 28:19) and discipleship (cf. 15:36; Matt. 28:20).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 18:24-28
24Now a Jew named Apollos, an Alexandrian by birth, an eloquent man, came to Ephesus; and he was mighty in the
Scriptures. 25This man had been instructed in the way of the Lord; and being fervent in spirit, he was speaking and teaching
accurately the things concerning Jesus, being acquainted only with the baptism of John; 26and he began to speak out boldly
in the synagogue. But when Priscilla and Aquila heard him, they took him aside and explained to him the way of God more
accurately. 27And when he wanted to go across to Achaia, the brethren encouraged him and wrote to the disciples to welcome
him; and when he had arrived, he greatly helped those who had believed through grace, 28for he powerfully refuted the Jews
in public, demonstrating by the Scriptures that Jesus was the Christ.
18:24-28 This seems to be an account related to either
1. Priscilla and Aquila
2. John the Baptist’s followers (it is not in chronological sequence)
3. its function as a letter of recommendation for Apolos by Paul
18:24 “a Jew named Apollos” It is highly unusual for a Jew to be named after a Greek god. He was a highly educated and eloquent
preacher (cf. 18:24-19:1). His ministry in Corinth was helpful, but became problematic when one of the three factions (supporters
of Paul, Peter, Apollos, cf. I Cor. 1-4) took him as their champion. He refused to return to Corinth (cf. I Cor 16:12).
▣ “an Alexandrian by birth” This was the second largest city of the Roman Empire, known for its large library and academic
flavor. It had a large Jewish population (for which the Hebrew Bible was translated into Greek, the Septuagint) and was the home
of Philo, a famous Jewish, neo-Platonist, allegorical scholar.
▣ “came to Ephesus” Acts is not a detailed, chronological writing. Paul had just left (cf. v. 23).
▣ “an eloquent man” This term in Koine Greek can mean either eloquent or educated. In the Septuagint logios is used of the oracles
of God. Apollos was obviously more gifted in public speaking (Greek rhetoric) than Paul (compare I Cor. 1:17; 2:1; II Cor. 10:10;
and 11:6). He was a powerful preacher!
▣ “and he was mighty in the Scriptures” The term “Scriptures” refers to the OT (cf. I Thess. 2:13; II Tim. 3:16; I Pet. 1:23-25;
II Pet. 1:20-21), with the exception of II Pet. 3:15-16, where Paul’s writings (by analogy) are attributed inspired status. Apollos knew
his OT well.
The word “mighty” is dunatos, which is used of Jesus’ might in word and deed in Luke 24:19, and of Moses in Acts 7:22.
18:25 “This man had been instructed” This is a periphrastic pluperfect passive (cf. Luke 1:4). He had been trained in the
teachings of Jesus, but only up to a certain level or time period. Curtis Vaughan, Acts, p. 118, footnote #2, lists the things Apollos
may have known and preached.
1. John was the forerunner of the Messiah.
2. He pointed out the Messiah as the Lamb of God who takes away the sins of the world.
3. Jesus of Nazareth was the Messiah.
I also think that repentance was probably emphasized in his preaching because it was in both John’s and Jesus’ preaching.
▣ “in the way of the Lord” “The way” was the first title used to describe the followers of Jesus in Acts (cf. 9:2; 19:9,23; 22:4;
24:14,22; John 14:6). It was used often in the OT (cf. Deut. 5:32-33; 31:29; Ps. 27:11; Isa. 35:8), where it speaks of lifestyle faith.
It is uncertain whether it has that meaning in this text (cf. 18:26).
Apollos also knew something about Jesus, but apparently it was His early earthly ministry and not the post-Calvary, post-resurrection gospel.
▣ “being fervent in spirit” This is literally “burning in spirit.” This phrase is meant to describe the enthusiasm of Apollos for what
he did know and understand about the life and teachings of Jesus.
▣ “being acquainted only with the baptism of John” This phrase about Apollos may have been the literary technique that Luke
used to introduce the followers of John in 19:1-7. There were several heresies that developed in first century Palestine connected
with John the Baptist’s teaching and preaching.
John was the last OT prophet who prepared for the coming of the Messiah (cf. Isa. 40:3; Matt. 3:3), but he was not the first
gospel preacher. If Apollos’ preaching focused too much on John, then he missed the full significance of Jesus. Both John and Jesus
emphasized “repentance,” “faith,” and “godly living.” Both initially called the Jews to a new commitment to faith and practice
(covenant faithfulness and personal faith in YHWH). However, Jesus’ message developed into the bold assertion of His central place
(e.g., John 10 and 14), possibly this is what Apollos lacked.
18:26 “he began to speak out boldly in the synagogue” This verb is used of Paul speaking to the Jews in the synagogue in 13:46;
14:3; 19:8 and before Festus in 26:26. Apollos was a powerful and effective preacher.
▣ “in the synagogue” Notice Priscilla and Aquila were also there. This was Paul’s regular custom also.
▣ “Priscilla and Aquila” She is mentioned first several times, 18:18,26; Rom. 16:3; II Tim. 4:19. This is highly unusual. Possibly
she was the strongest personality or of Roman nobility. In Acts 18:2, Aquila is said to be Jewish, but never Priscilla. They were
forced to leave Rome under Emperor Claudius’ edict in a.d. 49. They met and befriended Paul in Corinth and followed him to
Ephesus. The three of them were tent makers.
▣ “took him aside” This term is used to describe someone being accepted or received as a friend. It is uncertain how or where
Priscilla and Aquila did this for Apollos. They may have talked to him privately or taken him home with them. Notice they did not
embarrass him or challenge him publicly!
▣ “explained to him the way of God more accurately” He was teachable, which is rare for gifted, educated humans! He obviously
responded to their fuller information about Jesus.
18:27 “he wanted to go across to Achaia” The Greek manuscript D adds “at the urging of Corinthian Christians.” He was their
kind of preacher (Greek rhetorical style).
▣ “the brethren. . .wrote” Letters of recommendation from one church to another are referred to in Rom. 16:1; II Cor. 3:1; and II
John. This was the early church’s way of avoiding false and disruptive traveling preachers.
▣ “he greatly helped those who had believed through grace” There are two ways to understand this phrase.
1. this refers to believers already saved by grace (NASB, NKJV, NRSV, TEV)
2. this refers to God’s gracious empowering of Apollos (NJB)
The main verb, helped, (contributed) is an aorist middle indicative. Apollos was a blessing!
The participle “believed” is a perfect active, implying they were already believers. Apollos was functioning as a discipler,
not an evangelist, in Corinth.
18:28 Apollos used the OT in the same way as Peter, Stephen, and Paul. Demonstrating from the OT that Jesus was the Messiah was
a recurrent pattern in the sermons to the Jews in Acts (see note at 17:3).
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why is Priscilla listed first so often in the New Testament?
2. How did Paul get to know Priscilla and Aquila? Why?
3. Did Priscilla and Aquila ever return to Rome? How do we know?
4. Compare Paul and Apollos’ preaching styles.
5. Was Apollos a Christian before he visited with Aquila and Priscilla?
ACTS 19
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul at Ephesus |
Paul at Ephesus |
Paul’s Long Ministry in |
Paul in Ephesus |
The Disciples of John at |
19:1-7 |
19:1-10 |
19:1-7 |
19:1-2a |
19:1-7 |
|
|
|
19:2b |
|
|
|
|
19:3a |
|
|
|
|
19:3b |
|
|
|
|
19:4 |
Foundation of the Church at |
|
|
|
19:5-7 |
|
19:8-10 |
|
19:8-10 |
19:8-10 |
19:8-10 |
The Sons of Sceva |
Miracles Glorify Christ |
|
The Sons of Sceva |
The Jewish Exorcists |
19:11-20 |
19:11-20 |
19:11-20 |
19:11-14 |
19:11-12 |
|
|
|
|
19:13-17 |
|
|
|
19:15 |
|
|
|
|
19:16-20 |
|
|
|
|
|
19:18-19 |
|
|
|
|
19:20 |
The Riot at Ephesus |
The Riot at Ephesus |
|
The Riot in Ephesus |
Paul’s Plans |
19:21-27 |
19:21-41 |
19:21-22 |
19:21-22 |
19:21-22 |
|
|
|
|
Ephesus: The Silversmiths’ |
|
|
19:23-27 |
19:23-27 |
19:23-31 |
19:28-41 |
|
19:28-41 |
19:28-34 |
|
|
|
|
|
19:32-41 |
|
|
|
19:35-41 |
|
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 19:1-7
1It happened that while Apollos was at Corinth, Paul passed through the upper country and came to Ephesus, and found
some disciples. 2He said to them, “Did you receive the Holy Spirit when you believed?” And they said to him, “No, we have
not even heard whether there is a Holy Spirit.” 3And he said, “Into what then were you baptized?” And they said, “Into
John’s baptism.” 4Paul said, “John baptized with the baptism of repentance, telling the people to believe in Him who was
coming after him, that is, in Jesus.” 5When they heard this, they were baptized in the name of the Lord Jesus. 6And when
Paul had laid his hands upon them, the Holy Spirit came on them, and they began speaking with tongues and prophesying.
7There were in all about twelve men.
19:1 “upper country” This refers to an alternate route through the higher (i.e., elevation) country and to the churches started on
Paul’s previous missionary activity in South Galatia.
▣ “Ephesus” Michael Magill, NT TransLine, p. 413, #25, has an informative note.
“This was the capital city of Asia, where Paul was forbidden to go in 16:6. He stopped there briefly in 18:19-21,
planning to return. Now he spends over two years here, 19:10.”
▣ “disciples” The term implies they were believers (cf. v. 2, “when you believed,” see Special Topics at 3:16 and 6:5) in Jesus as
the Messiah through John the Baptist’s messages or possibly through Apollos’ preaching.
The Spirit apparently sent Paul by this upper route for the very purpose of helping these “disciples” know and experience the
full truth of the gospel.
19:2 “Did you receive the Holy Spirit when you believed” The fact that they are called “disciples” (v. 1) and the statement “when
you believed” imply they were believers. This question links (1) the personal reception of the Spirit at the time one believed (aorist
active indicative and aorist active participle) and (2) the Spirit’s preparatory action, without which no one could even believe
(cf. John 6:44,65; Rom. 8:9). There are levels and stages of the Spirit’s work (cf. Acts 8:11, 15-17). The book of Acts itself should
warn modern interpreters not to be dogmatic in the “necessary” elements and order of salvation. Acts records what occurred, not what
should occur every time. Salvation is a personal relationship which involves the whole person, but often this is a progressive
experience as the relationship deepens and more scriptural information is understood. See Special Topic at 2:40.
▣ “No, we have not even heard whether there is a Holy Spirit” John’s preaching could not have produced spiritual effect without
the Spirit (cf. Rom. 8:6-11; I Cor. 12:3; I John 4:2). John mentioned the Spirit in his preaching (cf. Matt. 3:11; Mark 1:8; Luke 3:16;
John 1:32-33), but it must be remembered that his was a message of preparation, not fulfillment (cf. Isa. 40:3; Matt. 3:3). John was
the last OT prophet and transitional preacher and preparer for the coming of the Messiah. He pointed people to Jesus (cf. John 1:19-42).
19:3 “Into what then were you baptized” They were followers of John the Baptist. Apparently they were faithful to the light they
had, but needed further clarification about the life, death, resurrection, and ascension (i.e., the gospel) of Jesus, just like Apollos (cf.
18:24-28).
19:3-4 “John’s baptism” John’s baptism involved repentance and expectation (cf. Matt. 3:11; Mark 1:15). However, it must be
consummated by faith in Jesus. From history we know that there were several heretical groups that formed in the first century
claiming to be followers of John the Baptist (Recognitions of Clement, chapter 60). Recording this account may have been Luke’s
way of nullifying the effect of these groups. John’s ministry pointed away from himself and to Jesus (cf. John 1:19-42).
19:4 “believer in Him” See Special Topics: Believe at 3:16 and 6:5.
19:5 “They were baptized” See Special Topic at 2:38.
▣ “in the name of the Lord Jesus” Luke describes baptism as “in the name of Jesus” (cf. 2:38; 8:12,16; 10:48). See Special
Topic: The Name of the Lord at 2:21. Matthew describes baptism as “in the name of the Father and the Son and the Holy Spirit” (cf.
Matt. 28:19). The baptism formula is not the key to salvation, but the heart of the person being baptized. To view the formula as
the key is to place the emphasis in the wrong place. Salvation is not the sacramental correctness of a rite, but an entering into a
repentant/faith relationship with Jesus. See note at 2:38.
As far as we know, Apollos, who also only knew the baptism of John, was not rebaptized! The Spirit was obvious in his
powerful preaching and teaching.
19:6 “Paul had laid his hands upon them, the Holy Spirit came on them” The laying on of hands is often mentioned in
connection with the Spirit (cf. 8:16-17; 9:17), but not always (cf. 10:44, see Special Topic at 6:6). The Bible links the Spirit with
the believer in three different ways:
1. at the time of belief
2. at the time of baptism
3. with laying on of hands
This diversification should warn us against dogmatism in the matter. Acts is not intended to teach a set pattern, but to describe the
dynamic movement of the Spirit.
I must admit that these twelve disciples of John speaking in tongues is surprising to me. Usually in Acts tongues are evidence
for the believing Jewish proclaimers that God
1. has accepted a new group or
2. broken down a geographical barrier (see full note at 2:4b)
What new group did these men represent? They were already disciples (cf. v. 1). Why did Luke choose to record this event? He
chooses to introduce it with Apollos in chapter 18. This just does not fit the pattern, which probably means that modern interpreters
are trying to fit an agenda or interpretive grid over Luke’s writing that just does not fit! Maybe this event of speaking in tongues is
more like those in Corinth!
There is an interesting variety in the way the NT describes the coming of the Spirit to individuals.
1. came upon (erchomai plus epi), cf. Matt. 3:16; Luke 19:6 [just epi, 2:25]
2. baptized with, cf. Matt. 3:11; Mark 1:8; Luke 3:16; 11:16; John 1:33; Acts 1:5
3. descended upon, cf. Matt. 3:16; Mark 1:10; Luke 3:22
4. coming upon (eperchomai plus epi), cf. Luke 1:35; Acts 1:8
5. filled with, cf. Luke 1:15,41,67; Acts 2:4; 4:8,31; 9:17; 13:9,52
6. poured out (ekcheō), cf. Acts 2:17-18,33; 10:45; Titus 3:6
7. received, cf. Acts 2:33,38; 8:15,17,19; 10:47; 19:2
8. given, Acts 5:32; 10:45; 15:8
9. fallen upon (epipiptō), cf. Acts 8:16; 10:44; 11:15
▣ “and prophesying” This term has OT connotations of ecstatic behavior (cf. I Sam. 10:10-12; 19:23-24). The context may support
this interpretation. However, this term in I & II Corinthians (cf. I Cor. 11:4,5,9; 14:1,3,4,5,24,31,39) implies a bold proclamation
of the gospel. It is difficult to define prophecy in the NT. Since the filling of the Spirit is often linked with a bold proclamation of
the gospel, this may be the intent of this context also. See Special Topic: NT Prophecy at 11:27.
19:7 “There were in all about twelve men” Twelve is one of several numbers often used symbolically in the Bible, but here it seems
to be historical. See Special Topics: Twelve at 1:22 and Symbolic Numbers in Scripture at 1:3.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 19:8-10
8And he entered the synagogue and continued speaking out boldly for three months, reasoning and persuading them
about the kingdom of God. 9But when some were becoming hardened and disobedient, speaking evil of the Way before the
people, he withdrew from them and took away the disciples, reasoning daily in the school of Tyrannus. 10This took place for
two years, so that all who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord, both Jews and Greeks.
19:8 “he entered the synagogue” This was his standard pattern (cf. 9:20; 13:5,14; 14:1; 17:2, 10; 18:4,19,26).
▣ “speaking out boldly” This is a perfect middle indicative. It was one of the results of being “Spirit filled” (cf. 4:13,29,31;
9:28,29; 14:3; 18:26). Paul prays for this very thing in Eph. 6:19.
▣ “three months” This synagogue at Ephesus apparently allowed Paul to preach, teach, and reason with them for many Sabbaths.
This in itself shows a degree of openness to the gospel and is a tribute to Paul’s God-given abilities.
▣ “the kingdom of God” This is the central theme of Jesus’ preaching. It refers to the reign of God in human lives now that will
one day will be consummated over all the earth, as it is in heaven (cf. Matt. 6:10). See Special Topic at 1:3.
19:9 “some were becoming hardened and disobedient” All who hear the gospel have a choice (cf. 17:32, 34). This reflects the
parable of the sower (cf. Matthew 13; Mark 4). It is the mystery of the iniquity (cf. II Cor. 4:4).
The term “hardened” (sklērunō) is an imperfect passive indicative (disobedient is an Imperfect active indicative), which
implies the beginning of an action or a repeated action in past time. This is the very word used in Rom. 9:18 to describe God’s
hardening of Israel’s heart and also the repeated verb in Hebrews 3 and 4 (cf. 3:8,13,15; 4:7) dealing with Israel’s hardness of heart
during the Wilderness Wandering Period. God does not actively harden the hearts of humans whom He loves and are made in His
image, but He does allow human rebellion to manifest itself (cf. Rom. 1:24,26,28) and personal evil to influence His created ones
(cf. Eph. 2:1-3; 4:14; 6:10-18).
▣ “speaking evil of the Way before the people” The gospel is so radically different from the exclusivism and performance-oriented
mind set of Judaism that there was no common ground possible if the basic tenets of the gospel were rejected.
Luke’s recurrent pattern of aggressive Jewish opposition to the gospel continues (cf. 13:46-48; 18:5-7; 19:8-10; 28:23-28).
▣ “the Way” See the notes at 18:25 and 19:23.
▣ “the school of Tyrannus” The codex Bezae, D, from the fifth century, adds that Paul taught from 11:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., when
most of the city had a rest period and the building was available. This may be an item of oral tradition. Paul would work at his trade
during regular business hours and then teach during the rest period (cf. 20:34).
There have been several theories as to the identification of Tyrannus.
1. He was a sophist mentioned by Suidas. Suidas wrote in the tenth century, but used reputable sources back to classical
times. His literary work is like an encyclopedia of political, literary, and ecclesiastical persons.
2. He was a Jewish rabbi (Meyer) who operated a private school for teaching the law of Moses, but there is no textual
evidence for this position.
3. This was a building which was originally a gymnasium but later a lecture hall owned by or named after Tyrannus.
Paul had to leave the synagogue and apparently there were too many converts to use a house, so he rented a lecture hall. This
allowed him some contact with the population of Ephesus.
19:10 “two years” In 20:31 Paul states the length of his entire time in the province (three years).
▣ “all who lived in Asia heard” This is an obvious hyperbole. Jesus often spoke in overstatements. It is simply part of the
idiomatic nature of eastern literature.
SPECIAL TOPIC: EASTERN LITERATURE
The Big Picture – Biblical paradoxes
1. This insight has been the most helpful to me personally as one who loves and trusts the Bible as God’s Word. In trying
to take the Bible seriously it became obvious that different texts reveal truth in selected, not systematic ways. One inspired
text cannot cancel or depreciate another inspired text! Truth comes in knowing all Scripture (all Scripture, not just some,
is inspired, cf. II Tim. 3:16-17), not quoting a single passage (proof-texting)!
2. Most biblical truths (eastern literature) are presented in dialectical or paradoxical pairs (remember the NT authors, except
Luke, are Hebrew thinkers, writing in common Greek. Wisdom Literature and Poetic Literature present truth in parallel
lines. The antithetical parallelism functions like the paradox. This synthetic parallelism functions like parallel passages).
Somehow both are equally true! These paradoxes are painful to our cherished, simplistic traditions!
a. predestination versus human free will
b. security of the believer versus the need for perseverance
c. original sin versus volitional sin
d. Jesus as God versus Jesus as man
e. Jesus as equal with the Father versus Jesus as subservient to the Father
f. Bible as God’s Word versus human authorship
g. sinlessness (perfectionism, cf. Romans 6) versus sinning less
h. initial instantaneous justification and sanctification versus progressive sanctification
i. justification by faith (Romans 4) versus justification confirmed by works (cf. James 2:14-26)
j. Christian freedom (cf. Rom. 14:1-23; I Cor. 8:1-13; 10:23-33) versus Christian responsibility (cf. Gal. 5:16-21; Eph.
4:1)
k. God’s transcendence versus His immanence
l. God as ultimately unknowable versus knowable in Scripture and Christ
m. Paul’s many metaphors for salvation
(1) adoption
(2) sanctification
(3) justification
(4) redemption
(5) glorification
(6) predestination
(7) reconciliation
n. the kingdom of God as present versus future consummation
o. repentance as a gift of God versus repentance as a mandated response for salvation (cf. Mark 1:15; Acts 20:21)
p. the OT is permanent versus the OT has passed away and is null and void (cf. Matt. 3:17-19 vs. 5:21-48; Romans 7
vs. Galatians 3)
q. believers are servants/slaves or children/heirs
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 19:11-20
11God was performing extraordinary miracles by the hands of Paul, 12so that handkerchiefs or aprons were even carried
from his body to the sick, and the diseases left them and the evil spirits went out. 13But also some of the Jewish exorcists, who
went from place to place, attempted to name over those who had the evil spirits the name of the Lord Jesus, saying, “I adjure
you by Jesus whom Paul preaches.” 14Seven sons of one Sceva, a Jewish chief priest, were doing this. 15And the evil spirit
answered and said to them, “I recognize Jesus, and I know about Paul, but who are you?” 16And the man, in whom was the
evil spirit, leaped on them and subdued all of them and overpowered them, so that they fled out of that house naked and
wounded. 17This became known to all, both Jews and Greeks, who lived in Ephesus; and fear fell upon them all and the name
of the Lord Jesus was being magnified. 18Many also of those who had believed kept coming, confessing and disclosing their
practices. 19And many of those who practiced magic brought their books together and began burning them in the sight of
everyone; and they counted up the price of them and found it fifty thousand pieces of silver. 20So the word of the Lord was
growing mightily and prevailing.
19:11 This is not the first time God used extraordinary miracles to confirm His truth and His speaker (cf. 3:1-10; 5:15; 8:6,13; 9:40-42; 13:11-12; 14:8-11). Superstition and occult practices were widespread and entrenched in Ephesus. God, being rich in mercy,
allowed His supernatural power and authority, resident in His Messiah, to express itself through Paul to these Satanic-bound people.
Oh, the mercy of God!
19:12 “handkerchiefs” These were possibly sweat bands tied around the head during work.
▣ “aprons” This refers to work aprons, somewhat like carpenters’ aprons. These healings showed God’s compassion, power, and
confirmed the gospel and the ministry of Paul.
▣ “the evil spirits went out” Here these demons (cf. Luke 10:17) are called “evil spirits” (cf. Matt. 12:45; Luke 7:21; 8:2; 11:26;
Acts 19:12,13,15,16). But Luke also calls them “unclean spirits” (cf. 5:16; 8:7; see Special Topics at 5:3 and 5:16). In Acts 16:16
the demon is called “the spirit of python (divination).” All of these phrases seem to be synonymous.
Paul often speaks of demonic categories like “all rule and authority and power and dominion” (Eph. 1:21), “the rulers and the
authorities in heavenly places” (Eph. 3:10), or “against the rulers, against the power, against the world forces of this darkness, against
the spiritual forces of wickedness in the heavenly places” (Eph. 6:12). These must refer to some levels of organized demonic spirits.
But how, why, where, and who are all speculative because the Bible does not choose to reveal a detailed description of the spiritual
realm. It does clearly reveal Christ’s power (and His Apostles’) over Satan and his kingdom of darkness and death. Jesus’ “name”
is above every name! Knowing Him brings salvation, peace, wholeness, restoration, and health.
SPECIAL TOPIC: ANGELS IN PAUL’S WRITINGS
The rabbis thought that the angels were jealous of God’s love and attention to fallen mankind and, therefore, were hostile to
them. The Gnostic false teachers asserted that salvation was only available by secret passwords through hostile angelic spheres (cf.
Colossians and Ephesians), which led up to the high-god.
George Eldon Ladd has a good summary of the terms used by Paul for angels in his book A Theology of the New Testament:
“Paul refers not only to good and bad angels, to Satan and to demons; he uses another group of words to designate
ranks of angelic spirits. The terminology is as follows:
‘Rule’ [arche], I Cor. 15:24; Eph. 1:21; Col. 2:10
‘Rules’ [archai; RSV, “principalities’], Eph. 3:10; 6:12; Col. 1:16; 2:15; Rom. 8:38
‘Authority’ [exousia], I Cor. 15:24; Eph. 1:21; Col. 2:10
‘Authorities’ [exousiai; RSV, “authorities”], Eph. 1:21
‘Power’ [dynamis], I Cor. 15:24; Eph. 1:21
‘Powers’ [dynameis], Rom. 8:38
‘Thrones’ [thronoi], Col. 1:16
‘Lordship’ [kyriotes; RSV, “dominion”], Eph. 1:21
‘Lordships’ [kyriotetes], Col. 1:16
‘World rulers of this darkness,’ Eph. 6:12
‘The spiritual (hosts) of evil in the heavenlies,’ Eph. 6:12
‘The authority of darkness,’ Col. 1:13
‘Every name that is named,’ Eph. 1:21
‘Heavenly, earthly, and subterranean beings,’ Phil. 2:10” (p. 401).
19:13-16 “Jewish exorcists” Jewish exorcists were common (cf. Luke 11:19). This context clearly shows that exorcism is not by
magic formula (names), but by personal relationship with Jesus. If this passage were not so sad it would be funny! Josephus tells
of a Jewish exorcism rite in Antiq. 8.2.5 by one Eleazar, using Solomon’s incantations.
19:13 “evil spirits” This refers to the demonic. The NT speaks often of this spiritual reality, but does not discuss its origin or details
about its organization or activities. Curiosity, fear, and practical ministry needs have caused much speculation. There is never a gift
of exorcism listed in the NT, but the need is obvious. Some helpful books are
1. Christian Counseling and the Occult by Kouch
2. Biblical Demonology and Demons in the World Today by Unger
3. Principalities and Powers by Montgomery
4. Christ and the Powers by Hendrik Berkhof
5. Three Crucial Questions About Spiritual Warfare by Clinton E. Arnold
See Special Topic: The Demonic at 5:16.
19:14 “Sceva, a Jewish chief priest” Modern scholars cannot find this name in any other writings. It is problematic for a Jewish
high priest (archiereus) to be in Ephesus. There was a local synagogue, but the only Jewish temple was in Jerusalem. Luke uses this
very word several times in his Gospel and Acts for the High Priest and his family in Jerusalem.
Some speculate that this man was somehow connected to the family of the High Priest, or possibly head of one of the twenty-four
orders of priests set up by David (cf. I Chr. 24:7-19).
If this man and his sons were priests, it is surprising they did not use YHWH as the powerful name to control the spirits as does
the magic or occult.
19:15 “I recognize Jesus, and I know about Paul” This first verb is ginōskō; the second is epistamai. They are somewhat
synonymous. Both are used often in Acts, but in this context there is obviously a distinction made between this demon’s knowledge
of Jesus as the Christ and Paul as His spokesperson.
19:17 Luke records this account to show how the Spirit was magnifying (imperfect passive indicative) Jesus (cf. John 14:25;
16:13-14).
19:18 “those who had believed” This is a perfect passive participle. The question is, were they believers in the occult or does
this phrase refer to their new belief in the gospel? It is also possible that new believers in the gospel still were initially influenced
by their past superstitions. See Special Topic: Greek Verb Tenses Used for Salvation at 2:40.
Previous occultists may have been convinced by what happened to the Jewish exorcists in vv. 13-16. The message of this
incident, which showed the power of the person/name of Jesus, spread rapidly (cf. v. 17). These people would have been very
conscious of the power of “the name.”
▣ “kept coming” This is an imperfect middle indicative.
▣ “confessing and disclosing their practices” The ancient Mediterranean was awash in the occult. It was common belief that
revealing one’s magical formula made it ineffective. This was their way of repudiating their past occultic activities. There is a type
of magic literature famous in the ancient world called “Ephesian writings”! This incident shows the gospel’s superiority over the
occult (cf. v. 20).
SPECIAL TOPIC: CONFESSION
A. There are two forms of the same Greek root used for confession or profession, homolegeō and exomologe. The compound
term is from homo, the same; legō, to speak; and ex, out of. The basic meaning is to say the same thing, to agree with.
The ex added to the idea of a public declaration.
B. The English translations of this word group are
1. praise
2. agree
3. declare (cf. Matt. 7:23)
4. profess
5. confess (cf. Heb. 4:14; 10:23)
C. This word group had two seemingly opposite usages
1. to praise (God)
2. to admit sin
These may have developed from mankind’s sense of the holiness of God and its own sinfulness. To acknowledge
one truth is to acknowledge both.
D. The NT usages of the word group are
1. to promise (cf. Matt. 14:7; Acts 7:17)
2. to agree or consent to something (cf. John 1:20; Luke 22:6; Acts 24:14; Heb. 11:13)
3. to praise (cf. Matt. 11:25; Luke 10:21; Rom. 14:11; 15:9; Heb. 13:15)
4. to assent to
a. a person (cf. Matt. 10:32; Luke 12:8; John 9:22; 12:42; Rom. 10:9; Phil. 2:11; I John 2:23; Rev. 3:5)
b. a truth (cf. Acts 23:8; I John 4:2)
5. to make a public declaration of (legal sense developed into religious affirmation, cf. Acts 24:14; I Tim. 6:13)
a. without admission of guilt (cf. I Tim. 6:12; Heb. 10:23)
b. with an admission of guilt (cf. Matt. 3:6; Acts 19:18; Heb. 4:14; James 5:16; I John 1:9)
19:19 “magic” See Special Topic at 8:9.
The “books” (biblous) could refer to large books or small scrolls of papyri on which oaths or curses were written. These were
worn as amulets. The huge price shows (1) how superstitious these people were and (2) how the gospel had set them free!
▣ “burning them in the sight of everyone” These were very expensive and sought after books and parchments. Their burning was
these new believers’ public repentance and profession of faith in Christ, not “the powers”!
19:20 The gospel message is personified (i.e., the word of the Lord) and summarized. Luke’s summaries help us divide Acts into
six sections (cf. 6:7; 9:31; 12:24; 16:5; 19:20; 28:31).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 19:21-22
21Now after these things were finished, Paul purposed in the spirit to go to Jerusalem after he had passed through
Macedonia and Achaia, saying, “After I have been there, I must also see Rome.” 22And having sent into Macedonia two of
those who ministered to him, Timothy and Erastus, he himself stayed in Asia for a while.
19:21
NASB “Paul purposed in the spirit”
NKJV “Paul purposed in the Spirit”
NRSV “Paul resolved in the Spirit”
TEV, NJB “Paul made up his mind”
TEV (footnote) “Paul, led by the Spirit, decided”
Here is a combination of God’s sovereignty and mankind’s freewill. It is uncertain whether this use of the term “spirit” refers
to:
1. the Holy Spirit or
2. the human spirit (cf. 7:59; 17:16; 18:25; Rom. 1:9; 8:16; I Cor. 2:11; 5:4; 16:18; II Cor. 2:11; 7:13; 12:18; Gal. 6:18; Phil.
4:23).
If it is the Holy Spirit, this is another example of divine leadership combined with appropriate human response.
Luke often has a brief comment to introduce events which occur later in his account. It is surely possible that Luke has Paul
deciding to go to Jerusalem as a result of God’s leading (i.e., die, v. 21; see full note at 1:16), not as the result of the riot caused by
Demetrius and the guild of silversmiths in Ephesus (cf. vv. 23-41).
▣ “I must also see Rome” Paul needed (dei) to visit the church at Rome (cf. 9:15; Rom. 1:10) on his way to Spain (cf. Rom. 15:24,
28). He wanted them to know him and support his mission work. He also wanted to add his blessing/gift to their situation.
19:22 “Erastus” There is a man by this name mentioned in Rom. 16:23. He is called the city treasurer of Corinth. This name occurs
again in II Tim. 4:20. It may refer to the same person, but this is uncertain.
▣ “he himself stayed in Asia for a while” The gospel had gloriously spread, affecting and converting the province (cf. I Cor. 16:9).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 19:23-27
23About that time there occurred no small disturbance concerning the Way. 24For a man named Demetrius, a silversmith,
who made silver shrines of Artemis, was bringing no little business to the craftsmen; 25these he gathered together with the
workmen of similar trades, and said, “Men, you know that our prosperity depends upon this business. 26“You see and hear
that not only in Ephesus, but in almost all of Asia, this Paul has persuaded and turned away a considerable number of people,
saying that gods made with hands are no gods at all. 27“Not only is there danger that this trade of ours fall into disrepute,
but also that the temple of the great goddess Artemis be regarded as worthless and that she whom all of Asia and the world
worship will even be dethroned from her magnificence.”
19:23 “the Way” This was the earliest designation for Christianity. It speaks of the OT concept (ex. Ps. 1:1,6; 5:8; 25:4,8,9,12;
27:11; 37:5,7,23,34; 119:101, 105) of lifestyle faith (cf. Acts 9:2; 19:9,23; 22:4; 24:14,22; also possibly 18:25-26).
19:24 “silver shrines” This refers to small silver images (1) of the Temple of Artemis or (2) the meteorite which looked like a multi-breasted woman. Archaeology has found many silver images of this goddess, but none of the shrine (temple) itself. It was one of
the seven wonders of the world. See note at 18:19, #4.
▣ “Artemis” The Artemis who was worshiped at Ephesus is not to be identified with Diana of the Roman pantheon. This goddess
is closer to Cybele, the mother goddess. This religious practice had much in common with the fertility cults of Canaan (see M. R.
Vincent, Word Studies, vol. 1, p. 271).
▣ “was no little business” This persecution had an economic basis (cf. vv. 25,27). See full note on Luke’s purposeful
understatements (i.e., litotes) at 12:18.
▣ “craftsmen” From this Greek word we get the English word “technician.” In the ancient Mediterranean world guilds or
associations of craftsmen were very popular and powerful. Paul would have been a part of the tent-making guild.
19:26-27 This gives us an insight into the success and permeation of Paul’s ministry in Asia.
▣ “that gods made with hands are not gods at all” This reflects the OT concept of the vanity of idolatry (cf. Deut. 4:28; Ps. 115:4-8; 135:15-18; Isa. 44:9-17; Jer. 10:3-11).
19:27 There are numerous passages in Greek literature of the first century that mention Artemis of the Ephesians. Apparently there
were thirty-nine separate cities of the Mediterranean world which were involved in the fertility worship of this mother goddess.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 19:28-41
28When they heard this and were filled with rage, they began crying out, saying, “Great is Artemis of the Ephesians!”
29The city was filled with the confusion, and they rushed with one accord into the theater, dragging along Gaius and
Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions from Macedonia. 30And when Paul wanted to go into the assembly, the disciples
would not let him. 31Also some of the Asiarchs who were friends of his sent to him and repeatedly urged him not to venture
into the theater. 32So then, some were shouting one thing and some another, for the assembly was in confusion and the
majority did not know for what reason they had come together. 33Some of the crowd concluded it was Alexander, since the
Jews had put him forward; and having motioned with his hand, Alexander was intending to make a defense to the assembly.
34But when they recognized that he was a Jew, a single outcry arose from them all as they shouted for about two hours,
“Great is Artemis of the Ephesians!” 35After quieting the crowd, the town clerk said, “Men of Ephesus, what man is there
after all who does not know that the city of the Ephesians is guardian of the temple of the great Artemis and of the image
which fell down from heaven? 36So, since these are undeniable facts, you ought to keep calm and to do nothing rash. 37For
you have brought these men here who are neither robbers of temples nor blasphemers of our goddess. 38So then, if Demetrius
and the craftsmen who are with him have a complaint against any man, the courts are in session and proconsuls are available;
let them bring charges against one another. 39But if you want anything beyond this, it shall be settled in the lawful assembly.
40For indeed we are in danger of being accused of a riot in connection with today’s events, since there is no real cause for it,
and in this connection we will be unable to account for this disorderly gathering.” 41After saying this he dismissed the
assembly.
19:28 This verse shows how closely the ancient world held religion and local traditions. Many people made their daily living in ways
connected to the local pagan temples.
▣ “Great is Artemis of the Ephesians” This fertility goddess was often called “the Great.” This may have been the temple’s
worship slogan.
19:29 “rushed. . .into the theater” The ruins of this very large Roman amphitheater still remain today. It held between 25 and 56
thousand people (estimates differ).
▣ “with one accord” Acts often uses the phrase “one accord” to describe the unity and fellowship of believers (cf. 1:14; 2:1,46;
4:24; 5:12; 8:6; 15:25), but also of how evil can unite (cf. 7:57; 12:20; 18:12). Unity itself is not the goal. It is the purpose of the
unity which is crucial!
▣ “Gaius” He was from Derbe (cf. 20:4). This was a very common name, so definite identification is difficult (cf. I Cor. 1:14; III
John 3).
▣ “Aristarchus” He was from Thessalonica (cf. 20:4; 27:2; Col. 4:10-11; Phil. 2:4).
19:30 “the disciples would not let him” Paul was a strong-willed man! However, he allowed other believers to influence some
decisions (cf. v. 31).
19:31 “some of the Asiarchs” This term means “local elected officials,” but was used in several senses. This is another technical
term for local political officials used so accurately by Luke. Apparently they had become believers also, or at least friends of Paul.
Again Luke shows that Christianity was not a threat to the local governmental authorities. It is verses like this one that cause some
commentators to surmise that Acts was written to be read at Paul’s trial in Rome. Again and again the church came into conflict with
Jews, but not with government!
19:32 “the assembly” This is the same Greek word (ekklesia) used for the church. In Acts 19:32,39, and 41 it refers to an assembly
of townspeople.
The early church chose this term because of its use in the Septuagint for “the assembly of Israel.” See Special Topic: Church
(ekklesia) at 5:11.
▣ “the majority did not know for what reason they had come together” It was a typical mob scene.
19:33 “Alexander” The local Jews wanted it to be understood that they were a separate group from these itinerant Christian
missionaries, but it backfired on them. Whether this is the same man mentioned in II Tim. 4:14 is uncertain, but I Tim. 1:20 makes
it doubtful.
▣ “having motioned with his hand” This was a cultural way of seeking silence so that one could speak (cf. 12:17; 13:16; 19:33;
21:40).
▣ “a defense” We get the English term “apology” from this Greek term, which referred to a legal defense. Luke used this verb
often (cf. Luke 12:11; 21:14; Acts 19:32; 24:10; 25:8; 26:1,2,24) and the noun in Acts 22:1 and 25:16.
19:34 This shows either (1) the anti-Semitism of the Greco-Roman world or (2) this crowd’s anger at Paul’s ministry.
19:35 “the town clerk” This was the chief civil official, who acted as liaison with the Roman government in these cities with famous
temples. The term is grammateus. It is used most often in Acts for Jewish scribes (cf. 4:5; 6:12; 23:9). In the Septuagint it referred
to Egyptian leaders who submitted records to higher authorities (cf. Exod. 5:6) and to Jewish officers (cf. Deut. 20:5).
▣ “city of the Ephesians is guardian of the temple” The word for guardian is literally “temple sweeper” (neōkos, temple warden).
This had become an honorific title, although originally it referred to the lowest temple servants.
▣ “the image which fell down from heaven” It was apparently a meteor shaped like a woman with many breasts. This was a perfect
idol for a fertility cult. The term “heaven” is literally “which fell from Zeus (dios).”
19:37 The cause of the riot had no true basis and, therefore, was liable for Roman judicial discipline (cf. v. 40).
19:38-39 “let them bring charges against one another” Let them go through the proper channels provided for complaints. These
two verses also have two first class conditional sentences.
19:38 “proconsuls” There were two kinds of Roman provinces, those controlled by the Emperor and those controlled by the Senate
(Augustus, Acts of Settlement, 27 b.c.). The Roman provinces were governed by
1. senatorial provinces governed by proconsuls or propraetors
2. imperial provinces governed by legatus pro proetors
3. other lesser or problem provinces governed by praefectus
4. free cities governed by local leaders, but under Roman guidelines
5. client states like Palestine governed by local leaders, but with limits and restrictions
Ephesus was in a Senatorial province and thereby had a “proconsul.” Proconsuls are mentioned three times:
1. Sergius Paulus, Cyprus, Acts 13:7-8,12
2. Annaeus Gallio, Achaia, Acts 18:12
3. no specific name, but the category, Ephesus, Acts 19:38
19:39-41 “assembly” This is the word ekklesia, which was used by the Greek city-states for a town assembly. It came to be used
for the gathered church because in the Septuagint it translated the Hebrew term for “assembly” (Qahal).
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Are we to view vv. 2-6 as a proof-text for
a. rebaptism of some believers
b. the laying on of hands to receive the subsequent blessing of speaking in tongues?
2. Define prophesying (v. 6).
3. Why does Acts record Paul’s encounter with both Apollos and these twelve disciples of John the Baptist?
4. Are vv. 11-12 normative for the church in all ages and cultures? Why/why not?
5. Why is exorcism not included in the lists of spiritual gifts?
6. Why are believers not given more biblical information on this subject?
7. What was the purpose of these miraculous events? (cf. v. 17)
ACTS 20
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul’s Journey to |
Journeys in Greece |
The Last Visit to Greece |
To Macedonia and Achaia |
Paul Leaves Ephesus |
20:1-6 |
20:1-6 |
20:1-6 |
20:1-6 |
20:1-6 |
Paul’s Farewell Visit to |
Ministering in Troas |
Paul’s Return to Palestine (20:7-21:14) |
Paul’s Last Visit to Troas |
Troas: Paul Raises a Dead |
20:7-12 |
20:7-12 |
20:7-12 |
20:7-12 |
20:7-12 |
The Voyage from Troas to |
From Troas to Miletus |
|
From Troas to Miletus |
From Troas to Miletus |
20:13-16 |
20:13-16 |
20:13-16 |
20:13-16 |
20:13-16 |
Paul Speaks to the Ephesian |
The Ephesian Elders |
|
Paul’s Farewell Speech to |
Farewell to the Elders of |
20:17-24 |
20:17-38 |
20:17-18a |
20:17-24 |
20:17-18a |
|
|
20:18b-24 |
|
20:18b-21 |
|
|
|
|
20:22-24 |
20:25-35 |
|
20:25-35 |
20:25-31 |
20:25-27 |
|
|
|
|
20:28 |
|
|
|
|
20:29-32 |
|
|
|
20:32-35 |
|
|
|
|
|
20:33-35 |
20:36-38 |
|
20:36-38 |
20:36-38 |
20:36-38 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS TO VERSES 1-6
A. This is a very brief and, therefore, somewhat confusing summary of Paul’s ministry in Macedonia and Greece on his third
missionary journey.
B. The best way to sort out Paul’s ministry in this area is to consult his letters, especially I and II Corinthians.
C. Luke attempts to detail Paul’s movements by using time markers and place names, but its brevity causes confusion.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 20:1-6
1After the uproar had ceased, Paul sent for the disciples, and when he had exhorted them and taken his leave of them,
he left to go to Macedonia. 2When he had gone through those districts and had given them much exhortation, he came to
Greece. 3And there he spent three months, and when a plot was formed against him by the Jews as he was about to set sail
for Syria, he decided to return through Macedonia. 4And he was accompanied by Sopater of Berea, the son of Pyrrhus, and
by Aristarchus and Secundus of the Thessalonians, and Gaius of Derbe, and Timothy, and Tychicus and Trophimus of Asia.
5But these had gone on ahead and were waiting for us at Troas. 6We sailed from Philippi after the days of Unleavened Bread,
and came to them at Troas within five days; and there we stayed seven days.
20:1 “After the uproar had ceased” This phrase is ambiguous. It does not mean to imply that Paul left Ephesus immediately
because of the riot started by Demetrius. Paul did not leave because of the riot, but because his evangelistic work was finished, as
Demetrius’ own statements made obvious (cf. 19:26).
▣ “Paul sent for the disciples and when he had exhorted them” Paul was concerned with both evangelism and discipleship (cf.
v. 2; Matt. 28:18-20). The gospel, although received individually, becomes a family to which service is due (cf. I Cor. 12:7). The
goal of local believers was a church!
20:2 “he had gone through those districts” This possibly refers (1) to Illyricum (cf. Rom. 15:19) or (2) to the Macedonian cities
of Philippi, Thessalonica, and Berea.
▣ “he came to Greece” Greece (Hellas) means the Roman Province of Achaia (cf. 19:21). This refers mainly to the city of Corinth.
Paul had an extended ministry in this area. During this time he wrote Romans. He was worried about the church in Corinth, as I Cor.
16:5-9 and II Cor. 2:12-13 clearly show.
20:3 This verse relates to Paul’s travel plans. He often had to change them because of circumstances. In this instance Paul thought
it unwise (i.e., a plot by Jews) to board a pilgrim ship heading toward Jerusalem, so he traveled by land.
▣ “a plot was formed against him by the Jews as he was about to set sail” He was possibly planning to sail on a Pilgrim ship
that stopped at all ports on the way taking Jewish pilgrims to the festivals in Jerusalem.
▣ “Sopater, Aristarchus, Secundus, Gaius, Timothy, Tychicus, Trophimus” These are probably men from various churches
sent to accompany Paul’s special monetary gift to the church in Jerusalem (cf. I Cor. 16:1-3; II Cor. 8-9).
1. Sopater is possibly the Sosipater of Rom. 16:21.
2. Aristarchus is mentioned in Acts 19:29; 27:2 and Col. 4:10.
3. Tychicus is mentioned in Eph. 6:21-22; Col. 4:7-8; II Tim. 4:12 and Titus 3:12.
4. Gaius is mentioned in Acts 19:29.
5. Trophimus is mentioned in Acts 21:29 and II Tim. 4:20.
The following is taken from my commentary on I Corinthians (see www.freebiblecommentary.org ).
“the collection” Logia is a term which has been found in the Greek papyri in Egypt as a gift of money for a religious
purpose, but not related to a regular tax (cf. Moulton, Milligan, The Vocabulary of the Greek Testament, p. 377). It is
uncertain whether in this context it refers to a regular gift or extra gift to the church. Paul began this concern for the poor
in Judea from a conversation with James, Peter, John, and Barnabas in Gal. 2:10; 6:10. This specific offering was begun
by the church at Antioch where Paul and Barnabas served, Acts 11:27-30. This offering is mentioned in several NT books
(cf. Rom. 15:26; II Cor. 8-9; I Cor. 16:1). It was an attempt to seal the relationship between the Hebrew mother church
and the Gentile churches.
Paul calls this one-time contribution by several names.
1.almsgiving, Acts 24:17
2.fellowship, Rom. 15:26,27; II Cor. 8:4; 9:13
3.an indebtedness, Rom. 15:27
4.service, Rom. 15:27; II Cor. 9:12”
From II Cor. 8:6,16 it seems that Titus may have also been a church representative. It is so strange that Luke never mentions
Titus in Acts. The theory has been that Titus was Luke’s brother and that modesty caused him to omit his name. This may also
explain the unnamed brother in II Corinthians 8:18, who many think was Luke (Origen recorded in Eusebius’ His. Eccl. 6.25.6; A.
T. Robertson’s, Word Pictures in the New Testament, p. 245).
F. F. Bruce, Paul: Apostle of the Heart Set Free, comments on Titus and Luke being brothers.
“One explanation of Luke’s silence about one who was such a trusted lieutenant of Paul’s is that Titus was Luke’s
brother; cf. W. M. Ramsay, St. Paul the Traveler and the Roman Citizen (London, 1895), p. 390; Luke the Physician and
Other Studies (London, 1908), pp. 17 f.; A. Souter, ‘A Suggested Relationship between Titus and Luke’, Expository Times
18 (1906-7), p. 285, and “The Relationship between Titus and Luke’, ibid., pp. 335 f. But if this relationship is
maintained, then the possibility that Luke is the ‘brother’ of 2 Corinthians 8:18 f. (see. p. 320) is ruled out: Paul’s purpose
in sending this ‘brother’ along with Titus was that he should be an independent guarantor of the probity of the
administration of the relief fund, and this purpose would have been frustrated if critics had been given an opportunity to
draw attention to a blood-relationship between the two. Nothing could have been better calculated to foster already
existing suspicions” (p. 339 footnote #5).
20:5 “us” Luke begins again his eyewitness account, which was discontinued in Philippi (cf. Acts 16). The “we” sections are
identified as 16:10-17; 20:5-15; 21:1-18; and 27:1-28:1b.
20:6 “the days of Unleavened Bread” This seven-day feast in mid-April was combined with the one-day Passover feast (cf. Exodus
13). Paul’s Jewish background influenced the way he viewed the calendar. We know nothing of Jews or a synagogue at Philippi,
so Paul did not keep this feast for witnessing purposes (cf. I Cor. 9:19-23). Perhaps it is just mentioned because he was planning his
travel to be in Jerusalem by Pentecost (cf. 20:16).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 20:7-12
7On the first day of the week, when we were gathered together to break bread, Paul began talking to them, intending
to leave the next day, and he prolonged his message until midnight. 8There were many lamps in the upper room where we
were gathered together. 9And there was a young man named Eutychus sitting on the window sill, sinking into a deep sleep;
and as Paul kept on talking, he was overcome by sleep and fell down from the third floor and was picked up dead. 10But Paul
went down and fell upon him, and after embracing him, he said, “Do not be troubled, for his life is in him.” 11When he had
gone back up and had broken the bread and eaten, he talked with them a long while until daybreak, and then left. 12They
took away the boy alive, and were greatly comforted.
20:7 “On the first day of the week when we were gathered together to break bread” This shows the early Church’s procedure
of meeting on Sundays (the first workday of the week) to have a communal fellowship meal (v. 11) and the memorial supper
(“breaking bread” is a NT idiom for the Lord’s Supper). Jesus Himself set the precedent of Sunday worship by His three post-resurrection appearances (cf. John 20:19,26; 21:1; Luke 24:36; I Cor. 16:2).
The Helps for Translator series (The Acts of the Apostles by Newman and Nida, p. 384) says that Luke is referring to Jewish
time and that this would have been Saturday evening (cf. TEV), but most translations are more literal, “the first day of the week.”
This is the only use of this phrase in Acts. Paul uses the phrase “first day of the week” only in I Cor. 16:2, where it implies Sunday.
▣ “prolonged his message” Paul wanted to teach and encourage as much as possible (cf. vv. 2,31).
▣ “until midnight” The Jews began the day at twilight or evening because of Genesis 1, while the Romans began the day at
midnight.
20:8 “There were many lamps” This must have been a hot, stuffy, even smokey, atmosphere. It almost seems Luke is trying to
explain why Eutychus fell asleep.
20:9 “a young man” The term here denotes a man in the prime of life. A different term is used in v. 12. It denotes a child.
Eutychus was a young adult.
▣ “Eutychus. . .was sinking into a deep sleep, and as Paul kept on talking” This present passive participle shows the biblical
evidence both for long sermons and sleeping listeners!
▣ “was picked up dead” Apparently he was dead! See verse 12.
20:10 “fell on him and embraced him” Paul acted much like Elijah and Elisha in the OT, who also raised the dead in this same
manner (cf. I Kings 17:21; II Kings 4:34). He tells his audience not to be troubled, but in point of fact, I feel sure Paul was distressed
by this event!
▣ “Do not be troubled” This is a present imperative with a negative article which usually means to stop an act already in
process.
2:12
NASB, TEV “and were greatly comforted”
NKJV, NRSV “they were not a little comforted”
NJB “and were greatly encouraged”
The NKJV and NRSV are literal and show Luke’s propensity for negated understatements (cf. 12:18; 15:2; 19:11,23,24; 20:12;
26:19,26; 27:20; 28:2).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 20:13-16
13But we, going ahead to the ship, set sail for Assos, intending from there to take Paul on board; for so he had arranged
it, intending himself to go by land. 14And when he met us at Assos, we took him on board and came to Mitylene. 15Sailing
from there, we arrived the following day opposite Chios; and the next day we crossed over to Samos; and the day following
we came to Miletus. 16For Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus so that he would not have to spend time in Asia; for he was
hurrying to be in Jerusalem, if possible, on the day of Pentecost.
20:13 “the ship” Paul’s travel plans had to be changed because of a plot against his life, which had been planned to occur at sea (cf.
v. 3). Perhaps Paul wanted to know who was on this ship before he boarded. Paul went overland from Troas to Assos, where he
would be picked up by the ship from Troas. All of the people mentioned in v. 4 were already on this ship.
20:14 “came to Mitylene” This is the chief city of the island of Lesbos. It is the largest island off the coast of Asia Minor (western
Turkey).
20:15-16 It is amazing how much Luke knew about sailing. He uses many technical sailing terms in his accounts (“we” sections)
of Acts. Several of the “we” sections involve sea travel. Obviously he was a well educated man who traveled extensively.
20:15 “Chios” This is another island in the Aegean Sea. It is a long, narrow island very near the coast.
▣ “Samos” This is yet another island off the west coast of Asia Minor, close to Ephesus.
▣ “Miletus” This was once a large and important maritime city on the southern coast of Ephesus at the mouth of the Maeander River.
Paul landed here and sent for the church leaders at Ephesus. It was about a thirty-mile trip.
20:16 “Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus” This seems to imply that Paul had some volitional control over the ship. If so, then
either (1) they had hired a ship all to themselves or (2) they picked a ship that did not stop at Ephesus.
▣ “if” This is a fourth class conditional (ei with optative mood), which expresses a wish.
▣ “Pentecost” This was the Jewish feast fifty days after Passover. Paul missed Passover Feast because of verse 3.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS TO ACTS 20:17-21:16
A. There is an element of self defense in this passage, as if some were continuing to attack Paul personally (cf. v. 33).
B. This is the only example in Acts of Paul preaching to believers. In Acts 13:16ff he is addressing Jews, while in 14:15ff
and 17:22ff he is addressing pagan Greeks.
C. This message has many parallels to Paul’s letters, as one would expect. Paul’s unique vocabulary is readily reflected in
this farewell admonition. This shows Luke’s faithfulness in recording the testimonies of others.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 20:17-18a
17From Miletus he sent to Ephesus and called to him the elders of the church. 18And when they had come to him, he said
to them,
20:17 “Miletus” This port was about 30 miles south of Ephesus.
▣ “elders” From this word (presbuteros) we get “Presbyter” or “Presbyterian.” Because of Acts 20:17,28 and Titus 1:5,7 the terms
“elders” (presbuteroi) and “bishops” (episcopoi) are synonymous with the term “pastor” (poimenos, cf. Eph. 4:11). The term “elder”
had a Jewish background (Jewish tribal leaders) and “bishop” or “overseer” had a Greek city-state political/administrative
background.
There are only two groups of local church leaders mentioned in the NT—pastors and deacons (cf. Phil. 1:1). There may be three
groups listed in I Timothy 3, which includes the widows’ role or deaconesses (cf. Rom. 16:1).
Notice that the term is plural. This probably refers to house-church leaders (cf. 11:30; 14:23; 15:2, 4,6,22-23; 16:4; 21:18;
I Tim. 5:17, 19; Titus 1:5; James 5:14; I Pet. 5:1).
▣ “the church” This Greek term (ekklesia) is the word used for a town assembly (cf 19:39). However, it was used to translate the
OT phrase “the congregation (qahal) of Israel” in the Septuagint. The early church chose it to describe the new body of believers
because it identified them with the OT people of God. The NT church saw themselves as the true fulfillment of the OT promise
because Jesus of Nazareth was the true Messiah. See Special Topic at 5:11.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 20:18b-24
18“You yourselves know, from the first day that I set foot in Asia, how I was with you the whole time, 19serving the Lord
with all humility and with tears and with trials which came upon me through the plots of the Jews; 20how I did not shrink
from declaring to you anything that was profitable, and teaching you publicly and from house to house, 21solemnly testifying
to both Jews and Greeks of repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus Christ. 22And now, behold, bound in spirit,
I am on my way to Jerusalem, not knowing what will happen to me there, 23except that the Holy Spirit solemnly testifies to
me in every city, saying that bonds and afflictions await me. 24But I do not consider my life of any account as dear to myself,
so that I may finish my course and the ministry which I received from the Lord Jesus, to testify solemnly of the gospel of the
grace of God.”
20:18 “You yourselves know. . .how I was with you the whole time” Paul’s walk and talk confirmed his relationship with Christ.
The fact that Paul states this so strongly in vv. 18-19 shows the presence of critics.
20:19 “serving the Lord with all humility” This term begins a list of Christian virtues which produces unity (cf. Eph. 4:2-3).
“Humility” is a uniquely Christian virtue which was not included in the Greek moralists’ (Stoics) list of virtues. Both Moses (cf. Num.
12:3) and Jesus (cf. Matt. 11:29) are described by this term. Paul uses it several times (cf. Eph. 4:2; Phil. 2:3; Col. 2:18,23; 3:12).
SPECIAL TOPIC: VICES AND VIRTUES IN THE NT
Lists of both vices and virtues are common in the NT. Often they reflect both rabbinical and cultural (Hellenistic) lists. The NT
lists of contrasting characteristics can be seen in:
Vices Virtues
1. Paul Rom. 1:28-32 —
Rom. 13:13 Rom. 12:9-21
I Cor. 5:9-11 —
I Cor. 6:10 I Cor. 6:6-9
II Cor. 12:20 II Cor. 6:4-10
Gal. 5:19-21 Gal. 5:22-23
Eph. 4:25-32 —
Eph. 5:3-5 —
— Phil. 4:8-9
Col. 3:5,8 Col. 3:12-14
I Tim. 1:9-10 —
I Tim. 6:4-5 —
II Tim. 2:22a,23 II Tim. 2:22b,24
Titus 1:7, 3:3 Titus 1:8-9; 3:1-2
2. James James 3:15-16 James 3:17-18
3. Peter I Pet. 4:3 I Pet. 4:7-11
II Pet. 1:9 II Pet. 1:5-8
4. John Rev. 21:8; 22:15 —
▣ “with tears and with trials” Paul lists the physical and emotional things that he faced as the Apostle to the Gentiles in II Cor.
4:7-12; 6:3-10; 11:24-28. Ministry costs!
▣ “through the plots of the Jews” There are several examples of these “plots” in Acts (cf. 9:24; 13:45,50; 14:2,4,5,19; 17:5,13;
18:12; 20:3; 21:27; 23:12,27,30; 24:5-9,18-19).
20:20 “did not shrink” This is a sailing term (cf. 20:27, an aorist middle indicative) for striking the sails when a ship approaches
the dock.
▣ “anything that was profitable” Paul taught them everything related to the gospel: how to receive it, how to live it, how to defend
it, and how to promote it.
▣ “teaching you publicly and from house to house” This probably means that not only did Paul teach in open public group
meetings (not secret meetings), but also within individual houses (or possibly separate house churches). The point is they knew quite
well how Paul acted among them and also what Paul said.
Paul must have been attacked by some local group. This was his way of deflecting the criticism
20:21 “testifying to both Jews and Greeks” There is one message for both groups. Often the presentation is varied but the content
is the same, as the sermons in Acts (kerygma, see Special Topic at 2:14) show. Paul made it a priority to present the gospel to the
Jews first (cf. Rom. 1:16; I Cor. 1:18,24).
▣ “repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus Christ” Repentance is a change of mind (Greek word), followed by a
change of action (Hebrew word). It is one of at least two requirements for salvation. The other is faith in our Lord Jesus (cf. Mark
1:15; Acts 3:16,19; see Special Topic at 3:16). One is negative (turning from self and sin). One is positive (turning to embrace Jesus
and His atonement of our behalf). Both are required. I have come to believe that there are several NT requirements: certainly initial
repentance and faith and continuing repentance and faith, but also obedience and perseverance.
There are some variants in the ancient Greek texts about “our Lord Jesus Christ.” The title “Christ” is omitted in manuscript
B (Vaticanus), but it is present in P74, א, A, and C. Like the vast majority of these variants, they do not change the sense of the text.
The UBS4 Greek text believes the shorter reading is “almost certain” because there is no reason why any scribe would delete it, but
there is evidence of them expanding parallel phrasing to the expected full phrasing (see Appendix Two: Textual Criticism).
20:22
NASB “bound in the spirit”
NKJV “bound in the spirit”
NRSV “a captive of the Spirit”
TEV “in obedience to the Holy Spirit”
NJB “in captivity to the Spirit”
This is a perfect passive participle. It shows Paul’s sense of divine leadership (cf. 18:21; 19:21; 20:23; I Cor. 4:19; 7:40;
16:7). See Special Topic: Spirit (pneuma) in the NT at 2:2 and the note at 19:21. The Holy Spirit is mentioned in v. 23.
20:23 “the Holy Spirit solemnly testifies to me in every city, saying the bonds and afflictions await me” This was probably done
through different prophets being used by the Holy Spirit to warn Paul (cf. Acts 9:16; 21:4, 10-12). Often God sends and uses what
seems negative, in purposeful, positive ways (cf. Isa. 55:8-11). Paul was not detoured by personal hardship as long as he believed
it served God’s purposes.
20:24 “I do not consider my life of any account as dear to myself” This type of thinking is the opposite of fallen human self-centered thinking. Christians have a different world view. They have died to self and sin and are alive to God (cf. Romans 6; II Cor.
5:14-15; Gal. 2:20; I John 3:16). Death to the tyranny of self brings the freedom of selfless service.
▣ “finish my course” This is an athletic term for running a race. Paul loves to use athletic metaphors. He often speaks of his life
as an athletic event (cf. I Cor. 9:24-27; Gal. 2:2; 5:7; Phil. 2:16; 3:14; II Tim. 2:5; 4:7). Paul believed God had a specific will, plan,
purpose for his life.
▣ “the ministry which I received from the Lord Jesus” Paul received his call on the Damascus road (cf. Acts 9). All believers
are called and gifted ministers (cf. Eph. 4:11-12). This realization, this worldview will change the way we live (cf. II Cor. 5:18-20).
We are men and women on mission! We are saved to serve. We are all stewards of the gospel and the gift!
▣ “the gospel of the grace of God” Fallen mankind’s only hope is in the unchanging, gracious mercy of God. The Triune God has
provided everything we need for abundant life. Our hope is in who He is and what He has done.
It is surprising how seldom Luke uses the noun “gospel” (not at all in Luke and only twice in Acts, 15:7; 20:24), but he uses
the verb many, many times in both of his books.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 20:25-35
25“And now, behold, I know that all of you, among whom I went about preaching the kingdom, will no longer see my
face. 26Therefore, I testify to you this day that I am innocent of the blood of all men. 27For I did not shrink from declaring
to you the whole purpose of God. 28Be on guard for yourselves and for all the flock, among which the Holy Spirit has made
you overseers, to shepherd the church of God which He purchased with His own blood. 29I know that after my departure
savage wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock; 30and from among your own selves men will arise, speaking
perverse things, to draw away the disciples after them. 31Therefore be on the alert, remembering that night and day for a
period of three years I did not cease to admonish each one with tears. 32And now I commend you to God and to the word of
His grace, which is able to build you up and to give you the inheritance among all those who are sanctified. 33I have coveted
no one’s silver or gold or clothes. 34You yourselves know that these hands ministered to my own needs and to the men who
were with me. 35In everything I showed you that by working hard in this manner you must help the weak and remember the
words of the Lord Jesus, that He Himself said, ‘It is more blessed to give than to receive.’”
20:25 “I know that all of you. . .will see my face no more” He was planning to go to Spain (cf. Rom. 15:24,28), but this possibly
contextually refers to his upcoming, predicted imprisonment and possible death at Jerusalem. If the Pastoral Epistles describe Paul’s
fourth missionary journey then he did return to this very area again.
1. Ephesus, I Tim. 1:3; 3:14; 4:13
2. Miletus, II Tim. 4:20
3. Possibly even Troas, II Tim. 4:13.
Paul lived by faith in God’s leadership. He did not know the specific future.
▣ “preaching the kingdom” See note at 2:34.
20:26 “I am innocent of the blood of all men” This is a Jewish idiom, like Acts 18:6, or more specifically, Ezek. 3:16ff and 33:1ff.
Paul had faithfully presented the gospel (cf. II Cor. 2:17). Now those who responded and those who rejected bear the burden of their
own decision. One to service, the other to destruction (cf. II Cor. 2:15-16).
20:27 “I did not shrink” See note at 20:20.
▣ “the whole purpose of God” We must always proclaim God’s full message, not just our favorite part! This may be an allusion
to the Judaizers who claimed that Paul left out part of the message (i.e., Mosaic Law-Judaism) or to the charismatics of II Corinthians
12 who thought Paul was devoid of spiritual experiences. God’s purpose is that humans be restored to full fellowship with Himself,
which was the purpose of creation (cf. Gen. 1:26,27; 3:8; 12:3).
20:28 “Be on guard for yourselves” This is a present active imperative. This admonition is also in I Cor. 16:13; Col. 4:2; I
Thess. 5:6,10. The Christian life has both a divine and a human aspect. God always takes the initiative and sets the agenda, but
believers must respond and continue to respond. In one sense we are responsible for our spiritual lives (cf. Phil. 2:12-13). What is
true of individual believers, is true for church leaders (cf. I Corinthians 3).
▣ “and for all the flock” This is a metaphor for the people of God (cf. Psalm 23; Luke 12:32; John 21:15-17). It is also the origin
of the term “pastor.” See note at 20:17. Church leaders are responsible to God for themselves and their churches (cf. I Corinthians
3).
▣ “the Holy Spirit has made you” This shows the divine call of God in choosing church leaders.
▣ “overseers” See note at 20:17.
▣ “the church of God” “God” is found in the ancient Greek manuscripts P74, A, C, D, and E, while “Lord” is found in MSS א and
B. Paul uses the phrase “church of God” often, but never the phrase “church of the Lord.” The context supports “the church of the
Lord” because the next phrase, “with His own blood,” which surely refers to Christ. However, this is just the kind of editorial scribal
change that one would expect (see Bruce M. Metzger, A Textual Commentary, pp. 480-482). Therefore the UBS4 Greek text retains
“God,” but gives it a “C” rating. “Lord” would be the most unusual and difficult reading (see Appendix Two: Textual Criticism).
This text serves as a good example of how scribes changed texts for theological reasons. A good discussion is found in Bart
D. Ehrman’s The Orthodox Corruption of Scripture, pp. 87-89. Scribes altered texts to make them stronger doctrinally against the
Christological heresies of their day. Acts 20:28 offers a variety of changes probably related to internal historical/theological tensions.
Before we throw up our hands in despair, we must remember that the New Testament has a superior textual tradition, far better
than any other ancient writing. Although we cannot be absolutely sure of the exact wording of the original autographs, we still have
a trustworthy and accurate text! The original words are in the variants. These variants do not affect any major doctrines!! See
Rethinking New Testament Textual Criticism ed. David Alan Black.
▣ “He purchased with His own blood” This reflects the OT concept of sacrificial substitution (cf. Leviticus 1-7; Isaiah 53). This
emphasis is surprisingly not mentioned much in the kerygma of Acts (see James D. G. Dunn, Unity and Diversity in the NT, pp. 17-18). It is also possibly a strong reference to Jesus’ deity (i.e., “church of God”). Paul often uses phrases which point to this truth (cf.
Rom. 9:5; Col. 2:9; Titus 2:13).
It is also possible to translate this Greek phrase as “through His own,” meaning near relative (i.e., His Son Jesus). F. F. Bruce,
Commentary on the book of the Acts, p. 416 #59, says this phrase should be translated “by means of the blood of His own one,” which
he asserts is well attested in the Egyptian Koine papyri literature.
20:29 “savage wolves will come in among you” This is a metaphor based on the previously used metaphors of “flock” and
“shepherd.” This accentuates the problem of the false teachers, both from without (v. 29) and within (v. 30). They both came in
sheep’s clothing (cf. Matt. 7:15-23; Luke 10:3; John 10:12, also in interbiblical apocalyptic literature, I Enoch 89:10-27; IV Ezra
5:18). Believers must test those who claim to speak for God (cf. I John 4:1). Test them by their faithfulness to the gospel, both in
word and deed (cf. vv. 18-24; Matthew 7; Rom. 16:17-18).
20:30 “speaking perverse things” “Speaking” is a present active participle, while “perverse things” is a perfect passive
participle, used as a substantive (direct object). Its basic meaning is “to twist.” It is used to describe human society (cf. Luke
9:41; Phil. 2:15). This activity is described (different term) in II Pet. 3:15-16.
▣ “to draw away the disciples after them” The theological question is, “Are those drawn away, spiritually lost or confused?” (cf.
Matt. 24:24). It is impossible to be dogmatic, but true faith continues! (cf. I John 2:18).
SPECIAL TOPIC: APOSTASY (APHISTĒMI)
This Greek term aphistēmi has a wide semantic field. However, the English term “apostasy” is derived from this term and
prejudices its usage to modern readers. Context, as always, is the key, not a preset definition.
This is a compound term from the preposition apo, which means “from” or “away from” and histēmi, “to sit,” “to stand,” or “to
fix.” Notice the following (non-theological) usages:
1. to remove physically
a. from the Temple, Luke 2:37
b. from a house, Mark 13:34
c. from a person, Mark 12:12; 14:50; Acts 5:38
d. from all things, Matt. 19:27,29
2. to remove politically, Acts 5:37
3. to remove relationally, Acts 5:38; 15:38; 19:9; 22:29
4. to remove legally (divorce), Deut. 24:1,3 (LXX ) and NT, Matt. 5:31; 19:7; Mark 10:4; I Cor. 7:11
5. to remove a debt, Matt. 18:24
6. to show unconcern by leaving, Matt. 4:20; 22:27; John 4:28; 16:32
7. to show concern by not leaving, John 8:29; 14:18
8. to allow or permit, Matt. 13:30; 19:14; Mark 14:6; Luke 13:8
In a theological sense the verb also has a wide usage:
1. to cancel, pardon, remit the guilt of sin, Exod.32:32 (LXX); Num. 14:19; Job 42:10 and NT, Matt. 6:12,14-15; Mark
11:25-26
2. to refrain from sin, II Tim. 2:19
3. to neglect by moving away from
a. the Law, Matt. 23:23; Acts 21:21
b. the faith, Ezek. 20:8 (LXX ); Luke 8:13; II Thess. 2:3; I Tim. 4:1; Heb. 2:13
Modern believers ask many theological questions that the NT writers would have never thought about. One of these would relate
to the modern tendency to separate faith from faithfulness.
There are persons in the Bible who are involved in the people of God and something happens.
I. Old Testament
A. Those who heard the twelve (ten) spies’ report, Numbers 14 (cf. Heb. 3:16-19)
B. Korah, Numbers 16
C. Eli’s sons, I Samuel 2, 4
D. Saul, I Samuel 11-31
E. False prophets (examples)
1. Deut. 13:1-5 18:19-22 (ways to know a false prophet)
2. Jeremiah 28
3. Ezekiel 13:1-7
F. False prophetesses
1. Ezekiel 13:17
2. Nehemiah 6:14
G. Evil leaders of Israel (examples)
1. Jeremiah 5:30-31; 8:1-2; 23:1-4
2. Ezekiel 22:23-31
3. Micah 3:5-12
II. New Testament
A. This Greek term is literally apostasize. The Old and New Testaments both confirm an intensification of evil and false
teaching before the Second Coming (cf. Matt. 24:24; Mark 13:22;
Acts 20:29,30; II Thess. 2:9-12; II Tim. 4:4). This Greek term may reflect Jesus’ words in the Parable of the Soils found
in Matthew 13; Mark 4; and Luke 8. These false teachers are obviously not Christians, but they came from within (cf. Acts
20:29-30; I John 2:19); however, they are able to seduce and capture immature believers (cf. Heb. 3:12).
The theological question is were the false teachers ever believers? This is difficult to answer because there were false
teachers in the local churches (cf. I John 2:18-19). Often our theological
or denominational traditions answer this question without reference to specific Bible texts (except the proof-text method
of quoting a verse out of context to supposedly prove one’s bias).
B. Apparent faith
1. Judas, John 17:12
2. Simon Magnus, Acts 8
3. Those spoken of in Matt. 7:13-23
4. Those spoken of in Matthew 13; Mark 4; Luke 8
5. The Jews of John 8:31-59
6. Alexander and Hymenaeus, I Tim. 1:19-20
7. Those of I Tim. 6:21
8. Hymenaeus and Philetus, II Tim. 2:16-18
9. Demas, II Tim. 4:10
10. False teachers, II Peter 2:19-22; Jude vv. 12-19
11. antichrists, I John 2:18-19
C. Fruitless faith1.I Corinthians 3:10-15
2. II Peter 1:8-11
We rarely think about these texts because our systematic theology (Calvinism, Arminianism, etc.) dictates the mandated
response. Please do not pre-judge me because I bring up this subject. My concern is proper hermeneutical procedure. We must let
the Bible speak to us and not try to mold it into a preset theology. This is often painful and shocking because much of our theology
is denominational, cultural or relational (parent, friend, pastor), not biblical. Some who are in the People of God turn out to not be
in the People of God (e.g., Rom. 9:6).
20:31 “be on the alert” This is a present active imperative (cf. Mark 13:35), which is parallel to v. 28, “Be on guard for
yourselves” (present active imperative). God’s leaders and God’s church must be on constant watch for false teachers—not those
who disregard our personal preferences, but those who disregard the gospel and its lifestyle implications.
▣ “for three years” This refers to Paul’s stay in Ephesus. This time indication includes all of Paul’s activity in the area. He stayed
longer with these believers than with any other city, church, or area. They knew the gospel. Now they must protect it and spread it!
20:32 “commend you to God” This means “entrust to” (cf. 14:23). We are responsible to God for the gospel we have been entrusted
with (cf. I Tim. 1:18). We are responsible to pass it on to others who will pass it on (cf. II Tim. 2:2).
The name “God” is found in MSS P74, א, A, C, D, and E. The term “Lord” is found in MS B. UBS4 gives Theos a “B” rating
(almost certain).
▣ “and to the word of His grace” This is a synonymous phrase for “the gospel.” See note at v. 24.
▣ “able to build you up” Notice that it is the person and truth of God (the gospel) that leads to maturity (cf. 9:31). Paul uses this
metaphor often. This Greek word can be translated both “build up” or “edify” (cf. I Corinthians 14). This is the goal of the gospel,
not just the maturity of the individual believer, but of the whole church.
SPECIAL TOPIC: EDIFY
This term oikodomeō and its other forms are used often by Paul. Literally it means “to build a house” (cf. Matt. 7:24), but it
came to be used metaphorically for:
1. Christ’s body, the church, I Cor. 3:9; Eph. 2:21; 4:16
2. building up
a. weak brothers, Rom. 15:1
b. neighbors, Rom. 15:2
c. one another, Eph. 4:29; I Thess. 5:11
d. the saints for ministry, Eph. 4:11
3. we build up or edify by
a. love, I Cor. 8:1; Eph. 4:16
b. limiting personal freedoms, I Cor. 10:23-24
c. avoiding speculations, I Tim. 1:4
d. limiting speakers in worship services (singers, teachers, prophets, tongue speakers, and interpreters), I Cor. 14:3-4,12
4. all things should edify
a. Paul’s authority, II Cor. 10:8; 12:19; 13:10
b. summary statements in Rom. 14:19 and I Cor. 14:26
▣ “and to give you the inheritance” In the OT God was the inheritance of the Levites and Priests. In the NT God is all believers’
inheritance because believers are God’s children through the person and work of Christ (cf. Rom. 8:15,17; Gal. 4:1-7; Col. 1:12).
NT believers, like the OT Israelites, are priests (cf. I Pet. 2:5,9; Rev. 1:6). We are meant to minister to the lost world.
▣ “among all those who are sanctified” This is a perfect passive participle. See Special Topic: Sanctification at 9:32.
20:33 “silver or gold or clothes” These were items of wealth. Paul is defending his actions and motives. In the NT greed and
sexual exhortation are often hallmarks of false teachers (cf. I Cor. 3:10-17).
20:34 “ministered to my own needs” Paul refused to take help from the churches he currently served because of the constant
accusation by the false teachers concerning his motives. Paul supported himself (cf. I Cor. 4:12; 9:3-7; II Cor. 11:7-12; 12:13; I
Thess. 2:9; II Thess. 3:6-13). Also Paul, being a trained rabbi, would have personal qualms about accepting money for teaching.
However, he asserts that ministers of the gospel should be paid (cf. I Cor. 9:3-18; I Tim. 5:17-18).
There is an excellent brief history of the first century Mediterranean world by James S. Jeffers, The Greco-Roman World of the
New Testament Era. It mentions that Paul alludes to working with his own hands to provide his physical needs in all three missionary
journeys (cf. p. 28).
1. First journey, I Cor. 4:12; 9:6; I Thess. 2:9
2. Second journey, Acts 18:3
3. Third journey, Acts 19:11-12; 20:34; II Cor. 12:14
20:35 Notice that the believers’ hard labor is not for personal gain or luxury, but for the sake of others in need in Christ’s name (cf.
II Cor. 9:8-11). Paul’s quote from Jesus is not found in any of the Gospels. Therefore, it must be an oral tradition.
This “weak” is not used here in the sense of over scrupulous Christians (cf. Rom. 14:1; 15:1; I Cor. 8:9-13; 9:22), but physically
needy. Paul worked to support himself and other believers in need.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 20:36-38
36When he had said these things, he knelt down and prayed with them all. 37And they began to weep aloud and embraced
Paul, and repeatedly kissed him, 38grieving especially over the word which he had spoken, that they would not see his face
again. And they were accompanying him to the ship.
20:36 “knelt down” This was not the usual posture of prayer from Paul’s Jewish background. This was possibly a special
commitment ritual (cf. v. 32; 21:5).
20:37 “embraced Paul” The NKJV is more literal, “fell on Paul’s neck.” Thank God for church leaders who come to help us!
20:38 “grieving especially over the word which he had spoken” This refers to v. 25.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why was Paul traveling with so many men from different cities in v. 4?
2. What is the theological purpose of vv. 7-10?
3. Why is v. 13 so confusing?
4. Why does Paul defend himself to the Ephesian elders?
5. Why was Paul going to Jerusalem if prophets were warning him about the severe consequences of his visit? (Vv. 22-23)
6. Why are false prophets common in every age and place? Are they redeemed? Are those who follow them redeemed?
What is a false prophet?
7. Why should vv. 36-38 cause us to love and pray for our local leaders?
ACTS 21
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul’s Journey to Jerusalem |
Warnings on the Journey to |
Paul Returns to Palestine |
Paul Goes to Jerusalem |
The Journey to Jerusalem |
|
|
(20:7-21:14) |
|
|
21:1-6 |
21:1-14 |
21:1-6 |
21:1-6 |
21:1-6 |
21:7-14 |
|
21:7-14 |
21:7-11 |
21:7-14 |
|
Paul Urged to Make Peace |
Paul’s Conformity to |
21:12-13 |
Paul’s Arrival in Jerusalem |
|
|
|
21:14 |
|
21:15-16 |
21:15-25 |
21:15-16 |
21:15-16 |
21:15-16 |
Paul Visits James |
|
|
Paul Visits James |
|
21:17-26 |
Arrested in the Temple |
21:17-26 |
21:17-25 |
21:17-25 |
|
21:26-36 |
|
21:26 |
21:26 |
Paul Arrested in the Temple |
|
Paul’s Arrest and Defense |
Paul is Arrested in the |
Paul’s Arrest |
21:27-36 |
|
(21:27-22:29) 21:27-36 |
21:27-29 |
21:27-29 |
|
|
|
21:30-36 |
21:30-36 |
Paul Defends Himself |
Addressing the Jerusalem |
|
Paul Defends Himself |
|
21:37-22:5 |
(21:37-22:21) |
21:37-40 |
(21:37-22:5) 21:37a |
21:37-40 |
|
|
|
21:37b-38 |
|
|
|
|
21:39 |
|
|
|
|
21:40-22:2 |
|
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
This chapter is surprising in what is not said! There is no mention of Paul’s emphasis on a contribution from the Gentile
churches to the Jerusalem church.
James D. G. Dunn, Unity and Diversity in the NT, pp. 272-278, makes in interesting conjecture that there was tension between
James (known for his allegiance to the traditions of Judaism) and Paul over the place of the Oral Traditions in the life of a believing
Jew.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 21:1-6
1When we had parted from them and had set sail, we ran a straight course to Cos and the next day to Rhodes and from
there to Patara; 2and having found a ship crossing over to Phoenicia, we went aboard and set sail. 3When we came in sight
of Cyprus, leaving it on the left, we kept sailing to Syria and landed at Tyre; for there the ship was to unload its cargo. 4After
looking up the disciples, we stayed there seven days; and they kept telling Paul through the Spirit not to set foot in Jerusalem.
5When our days there were ended, we left and started on our journey, while they all, with wives and children, escorted us
until we were out of the city. After kneeling down on the beach and praying, we said farewell to one another. 6Then we went
on board the ship, and they returned home again.
21:1 “ran a straight course” This is a nautical term meaning to sail a direct course (cf. 16:11). Luke was very familiar with sailing
terms (cf. v. 3). Most of the “we” sections of Acts involve sailing.
▣ “Cos” The name means “summit.” It is the name of both an island and its largest city. This island was the home of Hippocrates
(fifth century b.c.) and it was the site of a large medical school. It was a free state considered to be part of the Roman province of
Asia. It was located about forty miles south of Miletus.
▣ “Rhodes” This is also the name of an island and its chief city. This commercial island was famous for (1) its roses and (2) its
university, which specialized in rhetoric and oratory. In the past (29 b.c.) it was world famous for its bronze, 104′ tall colossus of
a man that stood by the harbor. The statue functioned as a lighthouse.
▣ “Patara” The Western family of Greek manuscripts (cf. P41, D) and some Old Latin versions add “and Myra” (most likely an
addition from 27:5), which was the chief port for ships to Syria. The UBS4 gives the shorter reading an “A” rating (certain).
Patara was a coastal city in Lycia. It was famous for its oracle of Apollo, which at one time rivaled even Delphi.
21:2 “and having found a ship crossing over to Phoenicia” This must have been a larger ship. The smaller ships hugged the
coastline. This ship saved them a lot of time by taking a direct route.
21:3 “came in sight of Cyprus” This must have brought thoughts of Barnabas and the first missionary journey.
▣ “Tyre” This was the coastal capital of Phoenicia.
21:4 “the disciples” There was a church in this city which was probably started after the persecution of Stephen (cf. 8:4; 11:19).
In this period believers would seek out other believers to stay with (cf. vv. 7,16).
▣ “telling Paul through the Spirit not to set foot in Jerusalem” This refers to the presence of prophets in this local congregation
(cf. 20:23; 21:10-12). Their message concerning persecution was true and yet apparently Paul’s trip was God’s will (cf. v. 14). Jesus,
through Ananias, had told Paul about his life’s work (cf. Acts 9:15-16). Suffering would be part of it, but also he would witness to
kings.
21:5 “After kneeling down on the beach and praying” This is a beautiful picture of Christian love and concern. It may have been
a special service, like 20:32,36.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 21:7-14
7When we had finished the voyage from Tyre, we arrived at Ptolemais, and after greeting the brethren, we stayed with
them for a day. 8On the next day we left and came to Caesarea, and entering the house of Philip the evangelist, who was one
of the seven, we stayed with him. 9Now this man had four virgin daughters who were prophetesses. 10As we were staying
there for some days, a prophet named Agabus came down from Judea. 11And coming to us, he took Paul’s belt and bound
his own feet and hands, and said, “This is what the Holy Spirit says: ‘In this way the Jews at Jerusalem will bind the man
who owns this belt and deliver him into the hands of the Gentiles.’” 12When we had heard this, we as well as the local
residents began begging him not to go up to Jerusalem. 13Then Paul answered, “What are you doing, weeping and breaking
my heart? For I am ready not only to be bound, but even to die at Jerusalem for the name of the Lord Jesus.” 14And since
he would not be persuaded, we fell silent, remarking, “The will of the Lord be done!”
21:7 “Ptolemais” This city was named after Alexander the Great’s general who ruled in Egypt and was an ancestor of Ptolemy II
who built this city in 26 b.c. This is the only natural port on the Palestinian coast. In the OT it was called Acco (cf. Judges 1:31).
Today it is called by its Crusader name, Acre.
▣ “the brethren” In Acts this is synonymous to “disciples” (cf. vv. 4,16). It designated believers in Jesus Christ.
▣ “we stayed with them” See note at v. 4.
21:8 “we left” Whether they left by land or sea is uncertain.
▣ “Caesarea” This is the Roman headquarters of Palestine. It was a coastal city with a small manmade harbor. Philip the
Evangelist lived here (cf. 8:40).
▣ “the evangelist” This term is surprisingly used only three times in the NT (cf. Eph. 4:11 and II Tim. 4:5). We are not certain
exactly what this ministerial gift encompassed. The term itself means “one who proclaims the gospel.”
▣ “who was one of the seven” This refers to the Jerusalem church’s problem of complaining of unfair food distribution by the
Greek-speaking widows. The church elected seven men to handle this need. All of them had Greek names. These seven were
powerful preachers. They were the first to catch the worldwide vision of the gospel (cf. Acts 6).
21:9 “had four virgin daughters. . .prophetesses” Remember Luke has a special concern for women. We need to rethink our
position on women in leadership positions (cf. Joel 2:28-32; Acts 2:16-21) in the church based on all of NT evidence. See Special
Topic: Women in the Bible at 2:17. A book that has helped me in this area is Gordon Fee, Gospel and Spirit.
Church tradition says that they moved to Asia Minor (Phrygia) and that his daughters lived long and served God to a very old
age. We learn this tradition from Eusebius’ quotes from both Polycrates and Papias (cf. Eccl. Hist. 3:31:2-5).
21:10 “a prophet named Agabas” There are at least two ways to understand this term.
1. in the Corinthian letters this refers to sharing or proclaiming the gospel (cf. I Cor. 14:1)
2. the book of Acts mentions prophets (cf. 11:27-28; 13:1; 15:32; 21:10, even prophetesses, 21:9)
The problem with this term is, how does the NT gift of prophecy relate to OT prophets? In the OT prophets are the writers of
Scripture. In the NT this task is given to the original twelve Apostles and their helpers. As the term “apostle” is retained as an
ongoing gift (cf. Eph. 4:11), but with a changed task after the death of the Twelve, so too, is the office of prophet. Inspiration (see
Special Topic at 13:1) has ceased; there is no further inspired Scripture (cf. Jude v. 20). New Testament prophets’ primary task is
proclamation of the gospel, but the also show how to apply NT truths to current situations and needs. See Special Topic: Prophecy
in the NT at 11:27.
21:11 Agabas, like the OT prophets Jeremiah and Exekiel, acted out his revelation.
21:12 “began begging him” This is an imperfect active indicative. It can mean (1) to begin an action or (2) a repeated action
in past time.
21:13 It is hard to balance this prophetic action with Paul’s sense that going to Jerusalem was God’s will (cf. v.4).
▣ “the name of the Lord Jesus” See Special Topic: The Name of the Lord at 2:21.
21:14 “The will of the Lord be done” This is a present middle imperative, used in the sense of a prayer. God did have a plan
and purpose for Paul’s life. Paul felt he knew God’s will even in the face of specific and recurring prophecy about the problems which
lay ahead. Paul must have felt that these prophecies were for his spiritual and mental preparation and not a prohibition.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE WILL (thelēma) OF GOD
JOHN’S GOSPEL
‒ Jesus came to do the Father’s will (cf. 4:34; 5:30; 6:38)
‒ to raise up on the last day all whom the Father gave the Son (cf. 6:39)
‒ that all believe in the Son (cf. 6:29,40)
‒ answered prayer related to doing God’s will (cf. 9:31 and I John 5:14)
THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS
‒ doing God’s will is crucial (cf. Matt. 7:21)
‒ doing God’s will makes one brother and sister with Jesus (cf. Matt. 12:50; Mark 3:35)
‒ it is not God’s will for any to perish (cf. Matt. 18:14; I Tim. 2:4; II Pet. 3:9)
‒ Calvary was the Father’s will for Jesus (cf. Matt. 26:42; Luke 22:42)
PAUL’S LETTERS
‒ the maturity and service of all believers (cf. Rom. 12:1-2)
‒ believers delivered from this evil age (cf. Gal. 1:4)
‒ God’s will was His redemptive plan (cf. Eph. 1:5,9,11)
‒ believers experiencing and living the Spirit-filled life (cf. Eph. 5:17-18)
‒ believers filled with the knowledge of God (cf. Col. 1:9)
‒ believers made perfect and complete (cf. Col. 4:12)
‒ believers sanctified (cf. I Thess. 4:3)
‒ believers giving thanks in all things (cf. I Thess. 5:18)
PETER’S LETTERS
‒ believers doing right (i.e., submitting to civil authorities) and thereby silencing foolish men, providing an
opportunity for evangelism (cf. I Pet. 2:15)
‒ believers suffering (cf. I Pet. 3:17; 4:19)
‒ believers not living self-centered lives (cf. I Pet. 4:2)
JOHN’S LETTERS
‒ believers abiding forever (cf. I John 2:17)
‒ believers key to answered prayer (cf. I John 5:14)
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 21:15-16
15After these days we got ready and started on our way up to Jerusalem. 16Some of the disciples from Caesarea also came
with us, taking us to Mnason of Cyprus, a disciple of long standing with whom we were to lodge.
21:15 “we got ready” The King James Version has “took up our carriages” (NKJV has “packed”). This is a graphic word used of
travel preparation and is found only here in the NT.
▣ “Jerusalem” It was about 64 miles away.
21:16 “Mnason” This was a Jewish Christian from Cyprus (like Barnabas). He would have been one of the Hellenistec Jews, like
the Seven of Acts 6. Apparently he had been a believer from the early days; possibly Luke interviewed him for his Gospel while
staying in Palestine during Paul’s imprisonment at Caesarea.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS INTO ACTS 21:17-23:30
A. BRIEF OUTLINE OF ACTS 21:17-26:32 (Paul’s imprisonment and defense both in Jerusalem and Caesarea.)
1. Riot and arrest at the Temple 21:17-40
2. Paul’s defense before the mob 22:1-22
3. The Roman Interrogation 22:23-30
4. The Sanhedrin Interrogation 23:1-10
5. The conspiracy to murder Paul 23:11-35
6. Paul before Felix 24:1-23
7. Paul before Felix and Drucilla privately 24:24-27
8. Paul before Festus 25:1-12
9. Paul before Agrippa II and Bernice 25:13-26:32
B. COMMON ELEMENTS OF PAUL’S DEFENSE
Common Elements |
Paul before |
Paul before |
Paul before |
Paul before |
1. His Jewish Background |
22:3 |
24:14,17-18 |
26:4 |
|
2. His Pharisaic Training and Zeal |
22:3 |
23:6-9 |
24:15,21 |
26:5-8 |
3. His Persecution of “The Way” |
22:4-5 |
26:9-11 |
||
4. His Personal Testimony of His Conversion |
22:6-16 |
26:12-16 |
||
5. His Call to Specific Ministry by God |
22:17-22 |
26:17-23 |
C. COMPARISON OF SADDUCEES AND PHARISEES
SADDUCEES PHARISEES
Origin Maccabean Period Maccabean Period
Name Means “Zadokities”? “Separated Ones”?
Social Status Priestly Aristocracy Middle Class Laymen
Scriptural Question Written Law only All of the Oral & Written Law
(especially Genesis plus the Prophets and Writing
through Deuteronomy) sections of the OT canon
Theology Conservative Progressive
– just the opposite – highly developed angeology
of Pharisees, who – belief in life after death
were accused of and resurrection
being influenced – very structured rules for daily life
by Zoroastrianism
(cf 23:8)
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 21:17-26
17After we arrived in Jerusalem, the brethren received us gladly. 18And the following day Paul went in with us to James,
and all the elders were present. 19After he had greeted them, he began to relate one by one the things which God had done
among the Gentiles through his ministry. 20And when they heard it they began glorifying God; and they said to him, “You
see, brother, how many thousands there are among the Jews of those who have believed, and they are all zealous for the Law;
21and they have been told about you, that you are teaching all the Jews who are among the Gentiles to forsake Moses, telling
them not to circumcise their children nor to walk according to the customs. 22“What, then, is to be done? They will certainly
hear that you have come. 23“Therefore do this that we tell you. We have four men who are under a vow; 24take them and
purify yourself along with them, and pay their expenses so that they may shave their heads; and all will know that there is
nothing to the things which they have been told about you, but that you yourself also walk orderly, keeping the Law. 25“But
concerning the Gentiles who have believed, we wrote, having decided that they should abstain from meat sacrificed to idols
and from blood and from what is strangled and from fornication.” 26Then Paul took the men, and the next day, purifying
himself along with them, went into the temple giving notice of the completion of the days of purification, until the sacrifice
was offered for each one of them.
21:17 It was a good sign that the Jerusalem believers gave Paul and these Gentile converts a hearty welcome (cf. Luke 8:40; 9:11;
Acts 2:41; 18:27; 21:17; 24:3; 28:30), but there was also prejudice in the Jerusalem church (cf. vv. 20-21).
21:18-19 “Paul went in with us to James” There is no special mention here of the gift from the Gentile churches (cf. 24:17). Paul
made a similar report to James in 15:12. James is the half-brother of Jesus and the respected leader of the Jerusalem Church (cf. Acts
12:17; 15:13).
21:18 “and all the elders were present” Notice that there is no mention of the Apostles. Apparently they were on mission trips
out of the country, or maybe they were dead. This use of the term “elders” reflects its Jewish usage (cf. 4:5,8,23; 6:12; 11:30;
15:2,4,6,22,23; 16:4; 23:14; 24:1,25; 25:15; Heb. 11:2; James 5:14), not its later use by the church for pastors (cf. 14:23; 20:17,18,23;
I Tim. 5:17,19; Titus 1:5; I Pet. 5:1; II John 1; III John 1).
21:19 Some commentators think that Paul received a cool reception and that the money from the Gentile churches was not
appreciated. Here is their line of reasoning.
1. Paul stayed at a Hellenistic Jew’s home, not one of the leaders of the Jerusalem church.
2. There is no expression of gratitude for the gift. It is not even mentioned.
3. The leadership immediately tell Paul how disliked he is among thousands in the Jerusalem church.
4. The church is never said to have supported Paul in prison or at his trials.
It must be said that there was conflict and confusion about Paul’s message and mission. However, v. 19 seems to be positive
to me!
21:20 “how many thousands there are among the Jews” What a wonderful witness of the power of the gospel and the love of God
to Jewish people in Jerusalem. There was a believing Jewish remnant. May be Zech. 12:10 has been fulfilled!
▣ “who have believed” This is a perfect active participle (see Special Topics at 3:16 and 6:5). This surely implies true saving
faith. One can be saved without complete understanding and even despite misunderstanding of all theological issues, (cf. Acts 1:6;
Luke 19:11).
Paul would characterize these as “weak” Christians (cf. Rom. 14:1-15:13; I Cor. 8; 10:23-33). He would bend over backward
to encourage them, as long as their “weakness” did not affect the gospel (the Judaizers of Galatians).
▣ “they are all zealous for the Law” This shows the large number of converted Pharisees, zealots, or Essenes. However,
conversion did not remove their religious bias. These were similar to the Judaizers of Galatians. It is remarkable how Paul loved
and supported “weak” believers, but would not tolerate “false teachers” or those who misrepresented the gospel.
21:21 “they have been told about you, that you are teaching all the Jews who are among the Gentiles to forsake Moses” The
phrase “having been told” reflects the Hebrew idiom “re-echo,” which implies oral teaching. This is combined with the present
tense verb (teaching) to show that the Jews in Jerusalem had repeatedly been told about Paul’s activity in a biased sense. These
charges were more serious than preaching to Gentiles, which caused so much trouble (cf. Acts 15).
The term “to forsake” is a strong term which comes into English as “apostasy” (cf. II Thess. 2:3). The theological issue related
to how believing Jews should relate to the OT was not yet settled! In some sense this mirrors the issues of “Messianic synagogues”!
21:23 “We have four men who are under a vow” Apparently these were members of the church. This refers to a limited Nazarite
vow (cf. Num. 6:1-8). Paul had earlier taken a similar vow (cf. 18:18). We are very uncertain about the details of this limited vow
(cf. Nazir 1:3).
21:23-25 This passage gives us insight into Paul’s view about Jewish Christians’ relationship to the Mosaic Law. Paul may have
continued to observe Jewish traditions (cf. 18:18; 20:6), at least when trying to evangelize Jews (cf. I Cor. 9:19-23). This is possibly
an affirmation of Messianic Jewish fellowships in our day.
21:24 “pay their expenses” Paul may not have taken a Nazarite vow himself at this point, but paid for the required sacrifice for the
others. The rabbis taught that it was a great honor to pay for the Nazarites vow (Ned. 10a).
SPECIAL TOPIC: NAZARITE VOW
A. This was a way for someone, male or female (cf. Num. 6:1), who was not of the tribe of Levi, to dedicate himself or herself
to God’s service (i.e., “holy to the Lord”). Nazarite means “one separated” (BDB 634), which is the root idea of the
Hebrew term holy.
B. In the OT it was a life-long vow
1. Samson (Jdgs. 13:7)
2. Samuel ( I Sam. 1:21)
3. John the Baptist
C. Judaism developed a short-term Nazarite vow (probably developed from the words in Num. 6:5). The shortest length was
thirty days. This short-term vow culminated in the shaving of the head and burning of the shavings along with a sacrifice
at the temple.
D. The specific requirements (cf. Num. 6:1-8)
1. Abstain from wine and strong drink, eat no product of the vine (cf. Num. 6:3-4).
2. Do not cut one’s hair.
3. Do not touch a dead person. This would make it impossible to participate in any of the Jewish funeral procedures.
4. A provision for accidental defilement is in Num. 6:9. Apparently Paul’s situation in Acts 21:23-25 involved this
issue. There was a period of purification and a sacrifice prescribed (cf. Num. 6:9-12).
▣ “shave their heads” The Nazarite vow is discussed in Numbers 6. Those who took permanent vows were not allowed to cut their
hair. However, the temporary vow was characterized by the shaving of the head at the end of the time period. This verse shows how
Paul tried to conform to the culture to which he was trying to preach (cf. I Cor. 9:19-23; 10:23-33).
21:25 “we wrote” This refers to the official statement of the Jerusalem Council (cf. Acts 15:19-20, 28-29). This document mainly
removed the ritualistic and dietary barriers between believing Jewish and believing Gentile groups in mixed churches of the diaspora
(outside Palestine). It, however, did not relate to believing Jews’ relationship to the Mosaic Covenant.
21:26 “went into the temple” This is what would cause the trouble, not solve it!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 21:27-36
27When the seven days were almost over, the Jews from Asia, upon seeing him in the temple, began to stir up all the
crowd and laid hands on him, 28crying out, “Men of Israel, come to our aid! This is the man who preaches to all men
everywhere against our people and the Law and this place; and besides he has even brought Greeks into the temple and has
defiled this holy place.” 29For they had previously seen Trophimus the Ephesian in the city with him, and they supposed that
Paul had brought him into the temple. 30Then all the city was provoked, and the people rushed together, and taking hold of
Paul they dragged him out of the temple, and immediately the doors were shut. 31While they were seeking to kill him, a report
came up to the commander of the Roman cohort that all Jerusalem was in confusion. 32At once he took along some soldiers
and centurions and ran down to them; and when they saw the commander and the soldiers, they stopped beating Paul. 33Then
the commander came up and took hold of him, and ordered him to be bound with two chains; and he began asking who he
was and what he had done. 34But among the crowd some were shouting one thing and some another, and when he could not
find out the facts because of the uproar, he ordered him to be brought into the barracks. 35When he got to the stairs, he was
carried by the soldiers because of the violence of the mob; 36for the multitude of the people kept following them, shouting,
“Away with him!”
21:27 “Jews from Asia” Paul’s old enemies had come to Jerusalem for the feast also. Now Paul was on Judaism’s turf.
21:28 “this is the man who preaches” These Asian Jews interpreted Paul’s preaching as against Judaism instead of fulfilling the
OT promises. These charges are similar to the ones made against Stephen (cf. 6:13). Paul himself may have stated this; he surely
agreed with this Jewish theological position (cf. 22:20) before his Damascus encounter with Christ. The message of Christ
undermined the legalism and ritualism of popular first century Judaism! This is seen not only in Paul’s universalism—salvation
available to “all men”—but also the theological assertion of exclusivistic salvation only in and through faith in Christ.
▣ “he has even brought Greeks into the temple” This supposed incident would have occurred in the Court of Israel, where the
Nazarite vows were performed in the southeast corner. It was lawful for the Gentiles to enter the outer court of the Temple only.
This was a false charge (cf. v. 29).
21:29 “Trophimus the Ephesian” These Jews from Asia (Ephesus) knew both Paul and Trophimus and had earlier planned Paul’s
death (cf. 20:3). Now they saw their opportunity to play on Jewish racial biases and have Paul killed (cf. vv. 31,36).
21:30 “the doors were shut” This was apparently the gate between the Court of Israel and the Court of the Women. The Temple
had its own police force of Levites who kept order. This action was to
1. keep the Temple from being defiled
2. keep Paul from trying to return to the Temple for safety
These Jews acted in exactly the same manner as did the mob at Ephesus (cf. Acts 19).
21:31 “the commander of the Roman cohort” This is literally a leader of a thousand. This would be the highest-ranking official
in the Roman army (equestrian) who was stationed in Jerusalem during feast days when the population swelled to three times its
normal number. His job was to keep order.
▣ “the cohort” They lived in Fortress Antonia, which overlooked the Temple Court. It was built by Herod the Great as a palace,
but was used by the Romans as a military headquarters (cf. Josephus, Wars 5.5.8).
21:32 “some soldiers and centurions” A centurion was literally the leader of a hundred. The Fortress Antonia overlooked the
Temple area. It was heavily garrisoned, especially during feast days.
21:33 “to be bound with two chains” This could mean (1) hands and feet or (2) between two Roman soldiers. Apparently the
soldiers thought he was an insurrectionist (cf. v. 38).
21:34-35 This shows the violence and frenzy of the mob (cf. v. 30).
21:35 “the stairs” These stairs that ran from the Fortress Antonia into the temple area had been alluded to in v. 32, “ran down.”
There were two sets of these access stairs, each going into a different division of the temple. The Romans wanted to quell any rioting
quickly. Feast days were often days of nationalistic unrest.
21:36 “Away with him” These are the same words which were shouted at Jesus (cf. 22:22; Luke 23:18; John 19:15). There are
many parallels between the treatment of Paul and Jesus by the Jews and Romans.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 21:37-40
37As Paul was about to be brought into the barracks, he said to the commander, “May I say something to you?” And
he said, “Do you know Greek? 38“Then you are not the Egyptian who some time ago stirred up a revolt and led the four
thousand men of the Assassins out into the wilderness?” 39But Paul said, “I am a Jew of Tarsus in Cilicia, a citizen of no
insignificant city; and I beg you, allow me to speak to the people.” 40When he had given him permission, Paul, standing on
the stairs, motioned to the people with his hand; and when there was a great hush, he spoke to them in the Hebrew dialect,
saying,
21:37 “Do you know Greek” The Colonel was surprised that Paul spoke Koine Greek because he apparently thought that Paul was
an Egyptian insurrectionist that he had heard about (cf. v. 38 and Josephus’ Antiq. 2.13.5; 20.8.6). This Egyptian rebellion occurred
between a.d. 52-57.
21:38 “men of the Assassins” This is sicarii, a Latin term for assassins or dagger men. They are often called “zealots” in the NT
(cf. Luke 6:15; Acts 1:13). They were a group of Jews committed to the violent overthrow of the Romans.
A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, vol. 3, p. 382, mentions that this very word was used by Josephus to
describe this Egyptian insurrectionist’s followers (cf. Josephus, Wars 2.13.5; Antiq. 20.8.6,10).
21:39 “a citizen of no insignificant city” This is an idiom (litotes, see note at 12:18), which Paul used to assert his citizenship in
a world-class university town. The text does not say if the Roman officer was impressed.
21:40 “he had given him permission” This commander still wanted to know what this was all about!
▣ “motioned to the people with his hand” This was apparently a well known hand gesture for silence so that a person could speak
(cf. 12:17; 13:16; 19:33; 21:40; 26:1). This may have been a rhetorical gesture that Paul learned while studying rhetoric at Tarsus.
▣ “he spoke to them in the Hebrew dialect” Paul spoke to the mob in Aramaic (the Jews had learned to speak Aramaic during their
years under Persian rule). This quieted the mob for a period (cf. 22:2).
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. If prophets in every city told Paul not to go to Jerusalem, why did he go?
2. How were/are believing Jews to relate to the Mosaic Covenant?
3. Was the Asian Jews’ charges against Paul in v. 28a true?
4. Does this commander’s comment (v. 38) imply that few Jews knew Greek or that he thought Paul was an Egyptian?
ACTS 22
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul Defends Himself |
Addressing The Jerusalem |
Paul’s Arrest and Defense |
Paul Defends Himself |
Paul’s Address to the Jews |
21:37-22:5 |
21:37-22:21 |
(21:27-22:29) 21:37-22:1 |
(21:37-22:5) |
|
|
|
|
|
22:1-5 |
|
|
22:2 |
|
|
|
|
22:3-5 |
22:3-5 |
|
Paul Tells of His |
|
|
Paul Tells of His |
|
22:6-11 |
|
22:6-11 |
22:6-11 |
22:6-11 |
22:12-16 |
|
22:12-16 |
22:12-16 |
22:12-16 |
Paul Sent to the Gentiles |
|
|
Paul’s Call to Preach to the |
|
22:17-21 |
|
22:17-21 |
22:17-21 |
22:17-21 |
Paul and the Roman |
Paul’s Roman Citizenship |
|
|
Paul the Roman Citizen |
22:22-29 |
22:22-29 |
22:22-29 |
22:22-25 |
22:22-29 |
|
|
|
22:26 |
|
|
|
|
22:27a |
|
|
|
|
22:27b |
|
|
|
|
22:28a |
|
|
|
|
22:28b |
|
|
|
|
22:29 |
|
Paul Before the Council |
The Sanhedrin Divided |
|
Paul Before the Council |
His Appearance Before the |
(22:30-23:11) 22:30-23:5 |
22:30-23:10 |
22:30 |
(22:30-23:11) 22:30 |
(22:30-23:11) 22:30 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 22:1
1“Brethren and fathers, hear my defense which I now offer to you.”
22:1
NASB “Brethren and fathers”
NKJV “Men, brethren and fathers”
NRSV “Brothers and fathers”
TEV “My fellow Jews”
NJB “My brothers, my fathers”
A Translator’s Handbook on the Acts of the Apostles, by Newman and Nida says this implies men of Paul’s age and those older
than he (cf. p. 419). However, I think this must be an idiom (Stephen used the same introductory statement in 7:2) because Paul was
over sixty by this point and this does not fit the age of the mob.
There would have been some believers in this crowd. Possibly the term “the brothers” uniquely refers to them. However, Paul
always identified with his race and nationality (cf. Rom 9:1-5; Phil. 3:5).
▣ “defense” We get the English term “apology” from this Greek word (apologia). It means a legal verbal defense. This term is used
several times in Acts related to Paul’s trials (cf. 25:16; II Tim. 4:16).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 22:2
2And when they heard that he was addressing them in the Hebrew dialect, they became even more quiet; and he said,
22:2 “Hebrew dialect” This refers to Aramaic. All of the places in the Gospels where Jesus’ actual words are recorded are in
Aramaic. This was a cognate language to ancient Hebrew. It was the language of the Persian Empire. The Jews learned it while
under their control. For example, in Nehemiah 8, where Ezra read the Law of Moses in Hebrew, Levites had to interpret it into
Aramaic for the people (cf. Neh. 8:7).
▣ “they became even more quiet” Paul’s polite introduction, combined with his fluent Aramaic and the fact that many in this mob
knew him or knew of him, caused an immediate, surprising calm. They wanted to hear what he had to say—a perfect preaching
opportunity to the leaders of Judaism.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 22:3-5
3“I am a Jew, born in Tarsus of Cilicia, but brought up in this city, educated under Gamaliel, strictly according to the
law of our fathers, being zealous for God just as you all are today. 4I persecuted this Way to the death, binding and putting
both men and women into prisons, 5as also the high priest and all the Council of the elders can testify. From them I also
received letters to the brethren, and started off for Damascus in order to bring even those who were there to Jerusalem as
prisoners to be punished.”
22:3 “I am a Jew, born in Tarsus” Paul is trying to identify himself with this Jewish crowd. He is asserting his Jewishness (cf. II
Cor. 12:22; Phil. 3:5-6). He would have been considered a Greek-speaking Jew of the diaspora.
The phrase “but brought up in this city” can refer grammatically either to (1) Tarsus or (2) Jerusalem. Contextually, Jerusalem
is implied. If so, then Paul’s training in Greek rhetoric must have occurred somewhere besides Tarsus.
▣ “educated under Gamaliel” This was a very respected rabbi (cf. 5:34-40). He is quoted in the Mishnah several times. Paul was
a student of the liberal rabbinical school of Hillel. This crowd would have been impressed by this statement. See Special Topic:
Gamaliel at 5:34.
▣ “strictly according to the law of our fathers” This would imply that he was a Pharisee (cf. 23:6; 26:5) and a zealous one at that
(cf. v. 4; Gal. 1:14; Phil. 3:6). The Pharisees were committed to stringent obedience to the Oral Traditions (i.e., Talmud), which
interpreted the Old Testament.
▣ “as you all are today” Paul acknowledges their enthusiasm and commitment. He was once like them!
22:4 “I persecuted” Throughout Paul’s ministry he looked back on these days with deep regret. He mentions this often (cf.
9:1,13,21; 22:4,19; 26:10-11; Gal. 1:13,23; Phil. 3:6; I Tim. 1:13). Paul often refers to himself as the least of the saints because of
these actions (cf. I Cor. 15:9; II Cor. 12:11; Eph. 3:8; I Tim. 1:15).
▣ “this Way” This was the earliest name for the Christian Church (cf. 9:2; 19:9,23; 22:4; 28:14,22). It refers to
1. Jesus as “the Way” (cf. John 14:6)
2. biblical faith as a lifestyle (cf. Deut. 5:32-33; 31:29; Ps. 27:11; Isa. 35:8)
▣ “to the death” Paul had some Christians put to death (cf. 8:1,3; 26:10)! He was surely involved in Stephen’s death (cf. 7:58, 8:1).
▣ “binding and putting both men and women into prisons” The fact that Paul did this to women really shows the intensity of his
persecutions.
22:5 Paul is sharing the circumstances that led up to his Damascus road conversion to faith in Jesus (cf. Acts 9).
▣ “the Council of the elders” This is literally “all the elders.” Luke uses this same term for the Sanhedrin in Luke 22:66. This is
not the normal term used of this official body of Jewish leaders in Jerusalem (Sanhedrin). It may have referred to a small
administrative sub-committee.
▣ “I also received letters” F. F. Bruce, Paul: Apostle of the Heart Set Free, has an interesting discussion and documentation of the
Sanhedrin’s rights of extradition from surrounding countries (p. 72). For more historical information see I Macc. 15:21 and Falvius
Josephus.
▣ “those who were there” This phrase implies that these were believing Jews who had fled the persecution in Jerusalem.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 22:6-11
6“But it happened that as I was on my way, approaching Damascus about noontime, a very bright light suddenly flashed
from heaven all around me, 7and I fell to the ground and heard a voice saying to me, ‘Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting
Me?’ 8And I answered, ‘Who are You, Lord?’ And He said to me, ‘I am Jesus the Nazarene, whom you are persecuting.’
9And those who were with me saw the light, to be sure, but did not understand the voice of the One who was speaking to me.
10And I said, ‘What shall I do, Lord?’ And the Lord said to me, ‘Get up and go on into Damascus, and there you will be told
of all that has been appointed for you to do.’ 11But since I could not see because of the brightness of that light, I was led by
the hand by those who were with me and came into Damascus.”
22:6 “about noontime” This is an added detail not found in 9:3.
22:7 This is a repeat of 9:4.
22:8
NASB, NJB “Jesus the Nazarene”
NKJV, NRSV,
TEV “Jesus of Nazareth”
Paul shares his personal testimony three times in Acts 9:1-31; 26:4-18, but here and 26:9 are the only places where he uses this
designation. Literally, this is “Jesus the Nazarene.” This is a term of derision in 24:5, but a term of prophecy in Matt. 2:23. It is
possible that it is not a geographical designation, but a Messianic title from “branch” (cf. Isa. 11:1; 53:2) from the Hebrew word nēser
(cf. Jer. 23:5; 33:15; Zech. 3:8; 6:12). See Special Topic at 2:22.
▣ “whom you are persecuting” See full note at 9:4.
22:9 “but did not understand the voice” There is no contradiction between the accounts of Paul’s conversion in 9:7 and 22:9. The
Greek grammar implies that his companions heard the sound, but did not understand the words. See 9:7 for a fuller discussion.
22:10 “all that has been appointed for you” This is a perfect passive indicative. It reflects the words of Jesus to Ananias in
9:15-16. Paul had a very specific and difficult mission to accomplish. In several ways Paul’s vision and commission follow that of
OT prophets (cf. Isa. 6; Jer. 1; Ezek. 2-3).
22:11 I think this was the cause of Paul’s “thorn in the flesh.” Some theories regarding Paul’s thorn in the flesh are:
1. early Church Fathers, Luther, and Calvin, say it was spiritual problems with his fallen nature (i.e., “in the flesh”)
2. Chrysostom says it was a problem with persons (cf. Num. 33:55; Jdgs. 2:3)
3. some say it was epilepsy
4. Sir William Ramsay says it was malaria
5. I think it was ophthalmia, a common eye problem (compare Gal. 4:13-15 and 6:11) exacerbated or caused by this initial
blindness on the Damascus road (cf. Acts 9, possibly an OT allusion in Josh. 23:13)
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 22:12-16
12“A certain Ananias, a man who was devout by the standard of the Law, and well spoken of by all the Jews who lived
there, 13came to me, and standing near said to me, ‘Brother Saul, receive your sight!’ And at that very time I looked up at
him. 14And he said, ‘The God of our fathers has appointed you to know His will and to see the Righteous One and to hear
an utterance from His mouth. 15‘For you will be a witness for Him to all men of what you have seen and heard. 16‘Now why
do you delay? Get up and be baptized, and wash away your sins, calling on His name.’”
22:12 This is a much fuller description of Ananias than 9:10. He was a lay person who apparently, like Paul, was devout by the
standard of the Mosaic Law. This may imply he was also a Pharisee.
1. Luke similarly describes Simeon, the one who saw Jesus in the temple as a child (cf. Luke 2:25).
2. Luke also uses it of Jews of the diaspora who came to Jerusalem on Pentecost when the Spirit came with power (cf. Acts
2:5).
3. Luke uses it a third time of the men who buried Stephen after his stoning (cf. Acts 8:2).
Therefore, this term does not relate to a believer in Christ as much as a sincere follower of Judaism. He is called a “disciple” in 9:10;
therefore, he had become a believer. Yet, even though he was a Christian, he still had the respect of the Jewish community in
Damascus.
22:13 Ananias’ ministry to Paul shows us that there is no clear division of believers in the NT between clergy (special ordained group)
and laity. Jesus’ words were his authority to:
1. lay hands (cf. 9:12,17) on Paul and command healing (aorist active imperative, v. 13, See Special Topic at 6:6)
2. reveal Jesus’ will for Paul’s ministry (v. 15)
3. tell Paul to be baptized (Paul may have baptized himself as Jews required of proselytes, Aorist middle imperative, v.
16)
4. be the instrument of Paul being filled with the Spirit (cf. 9:17)
You can see Ananias’ heart when he calls this vicious persecutor and murder (cf. 9:13-14) “Brother Saul.”
22:14 “The God of our fathers” This phrase was used to describe the Deity of Jewish worship. Paul wants to make clear that it was
YHWH (see Special Topic at 1:68) who contacted him and commissioned him through His Son, Jesus. Paul was not called by any
other god than Judaism’s God!
▣ “to know His will” YHWH’s primary will is for humans is to know Jesus (cf. John 6:29,40). God’s further will for Paul was to
be the missionary Apostle to the Gentiles (cf. 9:15; 22:15; 26:16).
▣ “to see the Righteous One” This is a Messianic title (cf. Ps. 45; 72; Acts 3:14; 7:52; I John 2:1). Paul would have the privilege
of a personal revelation of the glorified Jesus (as did Stephen, cf. 7:55-56). See Special Topic: Righteousness at 3:14.
▣ “and to hear an utterance from His mouth” This seems to refer to the voice from heaven in vv.7-8 (i.e., Bat Kol, cf. Deut. 4:12;
I Kgs. 19:12-13; Job 4:16; Jer. 25:30; Ezek. 1:25,28; Joel 3:16; Amos 1:2; Luke 3:22; 9:35; Acts 10:13,15), but it could just as much
refer to vv. 17-21. It is also possible that it refers to several special visions which Paul had throughout his ministry. See list at vv.
17-21.
22:15 “a witness. . .to all men” This is the marvelous truth that the gospel of Jesus Christ is for all men (cf. John 3:16; 4:42; I Tim.
2:4; 4:10; Titus 2:11; II Pet. 3:9; I John 2:1; 4:14). Not all will receive, not all may clearly hear, but all are included in God’s love
and Jesus’ sacrifice and Paul’s preaching! This is the very truth that this mob rejected (cf. v. 22).
Paul purposefully does not use the word “Gentile” that Ananias passed on to him from Jesus (cf. 9:15). Paul knew how
explosive this derogatory term go’im (the nations or Gentiles) was to these ultra-conservative Jews. Their biases and racial arrogance
had even robbed the OT prophets of their inclusive prophecies!
▣ “what you have seen and heard” This first verb is a perfect active indicative; the second is an aorist active indicative.
Why they are different tenses is uncertain. They seem to be parallel. Paul will carry the memory of this personal encounter with the
risen Christ throughout his life. He mentions it three times in Acts. He probably gave his personal testimony in every synagogue.
22:16 “be baptized and wash away your sins” These are both aorist middle imperatives. This is an OT allusion to the
ceremonial ablutions (cf. Lev. 11:25,28,40; 13:6,34,56; 14:8-9; 15:5-13,21-22,27; 16:26,28; 17:15-16; Num. 8:7,21; 19:19; Deut.
23:11). It is used here as a symbol of our spiritual cleansing in Christ (cf. I Cor. 6:11; Eph. 5:26; Titus 3:5; Heb. 10:22). Baptism
was the early Church’s public profession of faith. See notes and Special Topic at 2:38 for a fuller theological discussion.
Notice that the middle voice refers to both baptism (aorist middle imperative) and cleansing (aorist middle imperative).
Paul could not wash away his sins, but he could baptize himself (Jewish practice for proselytes). Often it is said that immersion is
the only NT pattern (cf. Romans 6 and Colossians 2), but here baptism is linked to the metaphor of washing (cf. 2:38; I Cor. 6:11;
Eph. 5:26; Titus 3:5; Heb. 10:22). Theologically I Pet. 3:21 shows that it is a symbol, not a sacrament!
Modern interpreters must be careful of basing too much on the middle or passive voice because these were merging into the
passive form in Koine Greek. Paul is said to have been baptized (PASSIVE) in 9:18. The mode of Paul’s baptism is not the issue,
but his baptism itself is!
▣ “calling on His name” The “name” is not a magical formula, but a public acknowledgment of Jesus’ ownership and the beginning
of a personal relationship with Him (aorist middle participle used as an imperative), which issues in a Christlike attitude and
lifestyle. The early Church’s baptismal formula as stated orally by the candidate was “Jesus is Lord” (cf. Rom. 10:9-13; I Cor. 1:2;
II Tim. 2:22). The exact words or formula is not the key (sacramentalism), but the heart of the candidate (believe, receive). See note
at 2:38 and Special Topic at 2:21.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 22:17-21
17“It happened when I returned to Jerusalem and was praying in the temple, that I fell into a trance, 18and I saw Him
saying to me, ‘Make haste, and get out of Jerusalem quickly, because they will not accept your testimony about Me.’ 19And
I said, ‘Lord, they themselves understand that in one synagogue after another I used to imprison and beat those who believed
in You. 20And when the blood of Your witness Stephen was being shed, I also was standing by approving, and watching out
for the coats of those who were slaying him.’ 21And He said to me, ‘Go! For I will send you far away to the Gentiles.’”
22:17-21 This is another example of Paul’s special visions (cf. 18:9-10; 23:11; 27:23-24). In this context it fits the prophecy of v.
14.
22:17 “when I returned to Jerusalem” In Paul’s testimony in both chapter 9 and here, it seems to imply that he returned to
Jerusalem soon after his conversion, but Gal. 1:11-24 reveal a long period (up to three years) before Paul returned.
▣ “fell into a trance” See note at 10:10.
22:18 Jesus speaks two aorist active imperatives to Paul: “make haste” and “get out.” Jesus’ warning is illustrated in the
Hellenistic Jews’ plot to kill Paul, recorded in 9:29.
22:19 “Lord” The grammatical antecedent to this could be either “the God of our fathers” (v. 14) or “the Righteous One” (v. 14).
The Jewish mob would have understood YHWH, but any believers present there would have understood Jesus. The transference is
common in OT quotes used of Jesus in the NT. It is the ambiguity of “triune monotheism” (see Special Topics at 2:32 and 2:39)!
▣ “I used to imprison and beat” These are periphrastic imperfect actives, which denotes continued action in the past. See full
note at 22:4.
▣ “those who believed in You” See the related Special Topics at 2:40, 3:16, and 6:5.
22:20 See note at 7:58-59 and 8:1. Paul describes his previous grievous acts by using three periphrastic imperfect participles.
1. He was standing there with the mob.
2. He was consenting to the stoning.
3. He was holding the cloaks of those stoning Stephen.
Stephen’s sermon and death had a profound influence on Paul.
22:21 “I will send you far away to the Gentiles” This is an obvious reference to Paul’s missionary journeys and ultimately, witness
before Roman governmental officials in Palestine and also in Rome before Caesar (cf. 23:11). He knew this statement would inflame
the crowd!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 22:22-29
22They listened to him up to this statement, and then they raised their voices and said, “Away with such a fellow from
the earth, for he should not be allowed to live!” 23And as they were crying out and throwing off their cloaks and tossing dust
into the air, 24the commander ordered him to be brought into the barracks, stating that he should be examined by scourging
so that he might find out the reason why they were shouting against him that way. 25But when they stretched him out with
thongs, Paul said to the centurion who was standing by, “Is it lawful for you to scourge a man who is a Roman and
uncondemned?” 26When the centurion heard this, he went to the commander and told him, saying, “What are you about to
do? For this man is a Roman.” 27The commander came and said to him, “Tell me, are you a Roman?” And he said, “Yes.”
28The commander answered, “I acquired this citizenship with a large sum of money.” And Paul said, “But I was actually born
a citizen.” 29Therefore those who were about to examine him immediately let go of him; and the commander also was afraid
when he found out that he was a Roman, and because he had put him in chains.
22:22 Their statement is idiomatic and has two parts.
1. “take (present active imperative) from the earth such a man” (cf. Luke 23:18; Acts 21:36)
2. “not fitting (imperfect active indicative) for him to live” (cf. Acts 25:24)
Their racial and religious biases are revealed. All humans are historically and culturally conditioned.
22:23
NASB “throwing off their clothes”
NKJV “tore off their clothes”
NRSV “throwing off their cloaks”
TEV “waving their clothes”
NJB “waving their cloaks”
This tearing off and waving of clothes or the throwing of them into the air were OT signs of mourning over a blasphemy (Greek-English Lexicon, Louw and Nida, vol. 1, p. 213, cf. 14:14).
▣ “tossing dust into the air” Paul was lucky that there were no rocks available. Putting dust on one’s head was a sign of mourning
(cf. Josh. 7:6; I Sam. 4:12; II Sam. 1:2; Job 2:12), here mourning over blasphemy (cf. Isa. 47; Lam. 2; Micah 1:10).
SPECIAL TOPIC: GRIEVING RITES
The Israelites expressed sorrow for the death of a loved one and for personal repentance, as well as corporate crimes, in several
ways:
1. tear outer robe, Gen. 37:29,34; 44:13; Jdgs. 11:35; II Sam. 1:11; 3:31; I Kgs. 21:27; Job 1:20
2. put on sackcloth, Gen. 37:34; II Sam. 3:31; I Kgs. 21:27; Jer. 48:37
3. take off shoes, II Sam. 15:30; Isa. 20:3
4. put hands on head, II Sam. 13:19; Jer. 2:37
5. put dust on head, Josh. 7:6; I Sam. 4:12; Neh. 9:1
6. sit on the ground, Lam. 2:10; Ezek. 26:16 (lie on the ground, II Sam. 12:16); Isa. 47:1
7. beat the breast, I Sam. 25:1; II Sam. 11:26; Nah. 2:7
8. cut the body, Deut. 14:1; Jer. 16:6; 48:37
9. fast, II Sam. 12:16,21-23; I Kgs. 21:27; I Chr. 10:12; Neh. 1:4
10. chant a lament, II Sam. 1:17; 3:31; II Chr. 35:25
11. baldness (hair pulled out or shaved), Jer. 48:37
12. cut beards short, Jer. 48:37
13. cover head or face, II Sam. 15:30; 19:4
22:24 “the commander” This is the word chiliarch (cf. vv. 27-29), which means a leader of 1000, as the term centurion (cf. vv.
25,26) implies a leader of 100. However, the numbers are relative. He was the officer in charge of the Roman garrison in Jerusalem.
▣ “the barracks” This refers to the Fortress Antonia, which overlooked and connected to the Temple area. It was built in the Persian
Period during Nehemiah’s day (cf. Neh. 2:8; 7:2). Herod the Great renamed it after Marc Antony. During feast days Jerusalem
swelled to three times its normal population. The Romans moved large numbers of troops from Caesarea into the Fortress Antonia
for security purposes.
▣ “examined by scourging” This implies “beat the information out of him.” Scourging was a cruel form of torture. Many died
from it. It was much more severe than Jewish flogging or Roman beating with rods. A leather whip with pieces of metal, stone or
bones sewn into the strands was used to whip prisoners.
22:25 “stretched him out” Usually the victims were bent over and bound to a low post for the scourging to be performed.
▣ “Is it lawful” These soldiers were about to transgress their own law in several points:
1. a Roman citizen could not be bound (cf. 21:33 and 22:29)
2. a Roman citizen could not be scourged (cf. Livy, History 10:9:4; Cicero, Pro Rabirio 4:12-13)
3. Paul had not been tried and found guilty (cf. 16:37)
22:27 “are you a Roman” The “you” is emphasized. This Roman officer could not believe Paul was a Roman citizen.
22:28 “I acquired this citizenship with a large sum of money” There were three ways to be a Roman citizen:
1. by birth
2. given for special service to the state
3. purchased (Dio Cassius, Rom. Hist. 60:17:5-6)
This soldier’s name implies that he purchased his citizenship under Claudius and that he was a Greek (Claudius Lysias, cf. 23:26).
Claudius’ wife, Messaline, often sold Roman citizenships for large sums of money.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 22:30
30But on the next day, wishing to know for certain why he had been accused by the Jews, he released him and ordered
the chief priests and all the Council to assemble, and brought Paul down and set him before them.
22:30 “he. . .ordered. . .the chief priests and all the Council to assemble” This shows the Roman power. The Sanhedrin was
forced to meet, possibly in the Fortress Antonio. This seems to be an unofficial, informal meeting.
Paul had to face the local charges but in a Roman setting.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why did Paul even want to defend himself to this mob?
2. Why does Luke record three times Paul’s testimony of his conversion on the road to Damascus?
3. How does the Spirit’s use of Ananias refute Apostolic succession?
4. List Paul’s special visions. Why did he need this many supernatural encounters?
5. How does the outcome of Paul’s defense before this mob in the temple fit God’s plan?
ACTS 23
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul Before the Council |
The Sanhedrin Divided |
Paul Before the Sanhedrin |
Paul Before the Council |
His Appearance Before the |
22:30-23:5 |
22:30-23:10 |
(22:30-23:10) 22:30-23:5 |
(22:30-23:11) |
(22:30-23:11)
|
|
|
|
23:1-3 |
23:1-5 |
|
|
|
23:4 |
|
|
|
|
23:5 |
|
23:6-10 |
|
23:6-10 |
23:6 |
23:6-10 |
|
|
|
23:7-9 |
|
|
The Plot Against Paul |
Paul is Sent to Caesarea |
23:10 |
|
23:11 |
23:11-22 |
23:11 |
23:11 |
23:11 |
The Plot Against Paul’s Life |
|
|
The Plot Against Paul’s Life |
The Conspiracy of the Jews |
23:12-22 |
|
23:12-15 |
23:12-15 |
23:12-15 |
|
|
23:16-22 |
23:16-18 |
23:16-22 |
|
|
|
23:19 |
|
|
|
|
23:20-21 |
|
|
|
|
23:22 |
|
Paul Sent to Felix the |
Sent to Felix |
|
Paul is Sent to Governor |
Paul Transferred to |
23:23-30 |
23:23-35 |
23:23-25 |
23:23-25 |
23:23-25 |
|
|
23:26-30 |
23:26-30 |
23:26-30 |
23:31-35 |
|
23:31-35 |
23:31-35 |
23:31-35 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 23:1-5
1Paul, looking intently at the Council, said, “Brethren, I have lived my life with a perfectly good conscience before God
up to this day.” 2The high priest Ananias commanded those standing beside him to strike him on the mouth. 3Then Paul said
to him, “God is going to strike you, you whitewashed wall! Do you sit to try me according to the Law, and in violation of the
Law order me to be struck?” 4But the bystanders said, “Do you revile God’s high priest?” 5And Paul said, “I was not aware,
brethren, that he was high priest; for it is written, ‘You shall not speak evil of a ruler of your people.’”
23:1
NASB, NRSV “looking intently at”
NKJV “looking earnestly at”
TEV “looked straight at”
NJB “looked steadily at”
See full note at 1:10. Luke uses this term often. Here he uses it of Paul. Paul uses it only in II Cor. 3:7,13.
▣ “the Council” See Special Topic: Sanhedrin at 4:5.
▣ “Brethren” Paul calls Jews “brothers” several times (13:26,38; 22:1,5; 23:1,5,6). The Jews call Paul brother in 13:15. Ananias
called him brother in 9:17, as does the church in Jerusalem in 21:20.
However, Jewish believers are also called by this title (e.g., 9:30; 10:23; 11:1,12; 12:17; 15:3,7,13,22). The word is linked with
“disciple” in 11:29; 18:27. It is also used of Greek believers in 16:2,40. Thus the term is ambiguous and must be linked to a specific
text and group.
▣ “I have lived my life. . .before God” This is a perfect middle (deponent) indicative of politeuō from which we get the English
word political or policy. This term is used with the connotation of a citizen (cf. Phil. 1:27). Paul is asserting that he has faithfully
discharged the responsibilities of being a member of Judaism before God.
▣
NASB “a perfectly good conscience”
NKJV “in all good conscience”
NRSV “a clear conscience”
TEV “my conscience is perfectly clear”
NJB “a perfectly clear conscience”
Paul uses the term “conscience” often in the Corinthian letters (cf. 4:4; 8:7,10,12; 10:25,27,28,29; II Cor. 1:12; 4:2; 5:11). It
refers to that moral inner sense of what is appropriate or inappropriate (cf. Acts 23:1). The conscience can be affected by our past
lives, our poor choices, or by the Spirit of God. It is not a flawless guide, but it does determine the boundaries of individual faith.
Therefore, to violate our conscience, even if it is in error or weak, is a major faith problem.
The believer’s conscience needs to be more and more formed by the Word of God and the Spirit of God (cf. I Tim. 3:9). God
will judge believers (i.e., weak or strong, cf. Rom. 14:1-15:13) by the light they have, but all of us need to be open to the Bible and
the Spirit for more light and to be growing in the knowledge of the Lord Jesus Christ.
▣ “before God up to this day” Paul makes this same assertion in II Cor. 1:12; II Tim. 1:3. He does admit that he did covet (cf.
Rom. 7:23, esp. v. 7). His theological argument in Romans 1-8 is based on every person’s violation of law and conscience (cf. 3:9-23;
4:15; 5:20).
23:2 “The high priest Ananias” In Hebrew his name would be Hananiah. This is not the same as the Ananias of Luke 3:2, John
18:13, or Acts 4:6, but a later one (Ananias, son of Nebedaeus or Nedebacus) who was appointed by Herod Chalcis, who reigned
from a.d. 48-59 (Josephus, Antiq. 20.9.2).
The writings of Josephus tell us much about this High Priest.
1. when he became High Priest, Antiq. 20.5.2; Wars, 2.12.6.
2. when he and his son (Ananus) were sent in bonds to Rome, Antiq. 20.6.2
3. when he was killed by insurrectionists along with his brother, Wars 2.17.9
Josephus is often our only ancient contemporary source for Jewish events and persons in Palestine.
▣ “to strike him on the mouth” This was a sign of blasphemy (cf. John 18:22).
23:3 “God is going to strike you” This is recorded in great detail in Josephus, Wars 2.17.9.
▣ “you whitewashed wall” It is uncertain exactly what Paul was saying.
1. the Jews used this metaphor for hypocrisy (cf. Matt. 23:27)
2. it could be an allusion to Ezek. 13:10-15
▣ “in violation to the Law” This may be an allusion to Lev. 19:15. Also see John 7:51.
23:5 “I was not aware brethren, that he was high priest” The theories for Paul’s not knowing are his
1. poor eyesight
2. not being familiar with him because Paul had been gone from Jerusalem for several years
3. not recognizing the High Priest because he was not wearing his official robes
4. he did not know who spoke
5. the inappropriateness of his actions (i.e., sarcasm)
▣ “for it is written” Paul shows he knows and respects the Law by quoting Exod. 22:28.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 23:6-10
6But perceiving that one group were Sadducees and the other Pharisees, Paul began crying out in the Council,
“Brethren, I am a Pharisee, a son of Pharisees; I am on trial for the hope and resurrection of the dead!” 7As he said this,
there occurred a dissension between the Pharisees and Sadducees, and the assembly was divided. 8For the Sadducees say that
there is no resurrection, nor an angel, nor a spirit, but the Pharisees acknowledge them all. 9And there occurred a great
uproar; and some of the scribes of the Pharisaic party stood up and began to argue heatedly, saying, “We find nothing wrong
with this man; suppose a spirit or an angel has spoken to him?” 10And as a great dissension was developing, the commander
was afraid Paul would be torn to pieces by them and ordered the troops to go down and take him away from them by force,
and bring him into the barracks.
23:6 “perceiving” Paul may have realized that he could not get a fair hearing from this Sadducean high priest.
▣ “Sadducees” See Special Topic at 4:1.
▣ “Pharisees” Paul had been a Pharisee (cf. 26:5; Phil. 3:5-6) from a family of Pharisees. See Special Topic at 5:34.
▣ “I am on trial for the hope and resurrection of the dead” Paul threw out a theological issue that the Sadducees and Pharisees
disagreed about. The Sadducees denied the afterlife, while the Pharisees affirmed it (cf. Job 14:14; 19:23-27; Isa. 25:8; 26:19; Dan.
12:2). This set the two factions of the council against each other (cf. vv. 7-10).
23:7 “the assembly was divided” This term’s basic meaning is “to tear” (cf. Luke 5:36; 23:45). It came to be used metaphorically
of division within groups (cf. Acts 14:4; 23:7). The division between these two Jewish sects was always just under the surface. Paul
fanned the flames.
23:8 “nor an angel, nor a spirit” Verse 8 is a comment by Luke on his source. Does this phrase imply there are two categories of
spiritual beings or one? The origin of both is biblically ambiguous, but Heb. 1:5,13, and 14 imply they are the same.
What the Sadducees denied was the dualism of good and evil spiritual beings (Zoroastrian dualism). The Pharisees had
elaborated the OT concept into rigid Persian dualism and even developed a hierarchy of angelic and demonic (seven leaders of each).
The best source I have found for first century Jewish angelology is Alfred Edersheim, The Life and Times of Jesus the Messiah,
Appendix XIII.
23:9
NASB “there arose a great uproar”
NKJV “there arose a loud outcry”
NRSV “then a great clamor arose”
NJB “the shouting grew louder”
This same phrase is found in the Septuagint of Exod. 12:30 (also note Exod. 3:7; 11:6; Esth. 4:3; Isa. 58:4; 65:19). The word
“cry” (kraugē) is also in Matt. 25:6; Luke 1:42; Eph. 4:31; Heb. 5:7; Rev. 21:4. Only context can determine the kind of loud “cry”
(i.e., positive or negative).
Another emotional word “to argue heatedly” (diamachomai) is also used in the LXX in Dan. 10:20. Paul’s comment caused
a loud, emotional confrontation, which is exactly what he wanted!
▣ “the scribes” These were the legal experts in both the oral (Talmud) and written law (OT). Most of them were Pharisees.
SPECIAL TOPIC: SCRIBES
The title comes from the Hebrew noun (BDB 706) which means “a spoken message,” “a written document/decree.” The Greek
translation “grammateus” usually refers to a written message. It can denote
1. educator (Nehemiah 8)
2. governmental official ( II Kgs. 22:3-13)
3. recorder/secretary (I chr. 24:6; II Chr. 34:13; Jer. 36:22)
4. military officer (cf. Jdgs. 5:14)
5. religious leader (Ezra 7:6; Neh. 12:12-13
In the NT they are often associated with the Pharisees. In a sense they were people who were educated in the OT and the Oral
Traditions (i.e., Talmud). They helped interpret and apply the Jewish traditions to everyday life (cf. Sirah 39:6). However, their
righteousness (i.e., Jewish legalism and ritual) could not bring peace with God (cf. Matt. 5:20; Rom. 3:19-20; 9:1-5,30-32; 10:1-6;
Col. 2:20-22).
They were often depicted in the Synoptic gospels (John never mentions them, 8:3 not original), as opposed to Jesus, although
some did respond to Him (cf. Matt. 8:19).
1. conflict over eating with sinners and tax-collectors, Mark 2:16; Matt. 9:9-13
2. conflict over the source of Jesus’ authority in exorcisms, Mark 3:22
3. conflict over Jesus forgiving sin, Matt. 9:3; Luke 5:21
4. demand for a spectacular sigh, Matt. 12:38
5. conflict over hand washing (i.e., ceremonial washings), Matt. 15:1-2; Mark 7:1-5
6. conflict over the crowds’ affirmation at the triumphal entry into Jerusalem, Matt. 21:15
7. Jesus’ accusation of their motives (i.e., seeking honor and preeminence), Mark 12:38-40
8. Jesus’ accusing them of being hypocrites and blind guides in Moses seat, Matt. 23:1=36
Because of their knowledge of Scripture, they should have been the first to recognize and embrace Jesus, but their traditions (cf. Isa.
29:13; 6:9-10) had blinded them! When light becomes darkness, how great is the darkness!
▣ “this man” The use of this noun phrase in this context shows it is not automatically a negative phrase.
▣ “suppose” This is a partial or incomplete first class conditional sentence. These scribes were asserting that Paul had seen
something from the spiritual realm, but exactly what they were not sure. Their immediate and forceful defense of Paul shows how
biased they were for their own group. Apparently they disliked Sadducees more than a supposedly renegade Pharisee.
Because this is an incomplete grammatical structure, the Textus Receptus, following the uncial Greek manuscripts H, L, and
P, adds, “Let us not fight against God,” which is taken from Acts 5:39.
23:10 “ordered the troops to go down and take him away from them by force” Twice now the Roman government had saved
Paul’s life in Jerusalem. No wonder Paul saw the government as a minister of God (cf. Romans 13). This may relate to “the one who
restrains” in II Thess. 2:6-7.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 23:11
11But on the night immediately following, the Lord stood at his side and said, “Take courage; for as you have solemnly
witnessed to My cause at Jerusalem, so you must witness at Rome also.”
23:11 “the Lord stood at his side” Here is another personal vision to encourage Paul (cf. 18:9-10; 22:17-19; 27:23-24). Paul was
not a man without discouragement and doubt.
▣ “Take courage” This is a present active imperative. This is the only use of this term in Luke’s writings. Paul must have shared
this with Luke. Jesus uses the term several times (cf. Matt. 9:2,22; 14:27; John 16:33).
▣ “you must witness at Rome also” It was God’s will for Paul to be imprisoned so that he might appear before Caesar. The gospel
will be preached in Rome (cf. 19:21; 22:21)!
For “must” see full note at 1:16.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 23:12-15
12When it was day, the Jews formed a conspiracy and bound themselves under an oath, saying that they would neither
eat nor drink until they had killed Paul. 13There were more than forty who formed this plot. 14They came to the chief priests
and the elders and said, “We have bound ourselves under a solemn oath to taste nothing until we have killed Paul. 15“Now
therefore, you and the Council notify the commander to bring him down to you, as though you were going to determine his
case by a more thorough investigation; and we for our part are ready to slay him before he comes near the place.”
23:12-15 This paragraph informs us of the assassination pact of some of the Jews. This is another premeditated murder (cf. v. 21)
like the one the Jews planned for Jesus.
23:13 “more than forty” Forty is a Jewish idiom for a long, indefinite period of time, but here it is used of persons, so it is probably
literal. See Special Topic: Numbers in Scripture at 1:3.
23:14 “the chief priests and the elders” This was an abbreviated way of referring to the Sanhedrin. See Special Topic at 4:5.
▣
NASB “we have bound ourselves under a solemn oath”
NKJV “we have bound ourselves under a great oath”
NRSV “we have strictly bound ourselves by an oath”
TEV “we have taken a solemn vow”
NJB “we have made a solemn vow”
These English translations are an attempt to translate a cognate idiomatic phrase, “with a curse we curse ourselves.” These oath-takers did not kill Paul. I wonder if they starved to death? Apparently the oral tradition allowed a way out of these blood oaths. See
Special Topic following.
SPECIAL TOPIC: CURSE (ANATHEMA)
There are several words in Hebrew for “curse.” Herem (BDB 356) was used of something given to God (cf. LXX as anathema
(BAGD 54), Lev. 27:28), usually for destruction (cf. Deut. 7:26; Josh. 6:17-18; 17:12). It was a term used in the concept of “holy
war.” God said to destroy the Canaanites and Jericho was the first opportunity, the “first fruits.”
In the NT anathema and its related forms were used in several different senses:
1. as a gift or offering to God (cf. Luke 21:5)
2. as a death oath (cf. Acts 23:14)
3. to curse and swear (cf. Mark 14:71)
4. a curse formula related to Jesus (cf. I Cor. 12:3)
5. a giving of someone or something to the judgment or destruction of God (cf. Rom. 9:3; I Cor. 16:22; Gal. 1:8-9).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 23:16-25
16But the son of Paul’s sister heard of their ambush, and he came and entered the barracks and told Paul. 17Paul called
one of the centurions to him and said, “Lead this young man to the commander, for he has something to report to him.” 18So
he took him and led him to the commander and said, “Paul the prisoner called me to him and asked me to lead this young
man to you since he has something to tell you.” 19The commander took him by the hand and stepping aside, began to inquire
of him privately, “What is it that you have to report to me?” 20And he said, “The Jews have agreed to ask you to bring Paul
down tomorrow to the Council, as though they were going to inquire somewhat more thoroughly about him. 21“So do not
listen to them, for more than forty of them are lying in wait for him who have bound themselves under a curse not to eat or
drink until they slay him; and now they are ready and waiting for the promise from you.” 22So the commander let the young
man go, instructing him, “Tell no one that you have notified me of these things.” 23And he called to him two of the centurions
and said, “Get two hundred soldiers ready by the third hour of the night to proceed to Caesarea, with seventy horsemen and
two hundred spearmen.” 24They were also to provide mounts to put Paul on and bring him safely to Felix the governor. 25And
he wrote a letter having this form:
23:16 “the son of Paul’s sister” We have many questions about Paul’s family, but it is shrouded in silence. How he knew of the
plan is also unknown. He was possibly a Pharisee also.
23:21 This attack would have also involved the killing of the Roman guards!
23:23 The contingent of troops to accompany Paul was apparently either (1) 200 infantry, 70 cavalry, and 200 lancers or (2) 200
lancers and 70 cavalry. The western family of Greek manuscripts has a long descriptive addition (cf. NKJV).
▣ “the third hour” This is obviously Roman time. They started counting the night at 6 p.m. This would be 9 p.m.
▣ “Caesarea” This was the headquarters for the Roman occupational forces in Palestine.
▣
NASB, NKJV,
NRSV, TEV “spearmen”
NJB “auxiliaries”
REB “light-armed troops”
NASB (footnote) “additional mounts” or “pack animals”
NEB “bowman”
The meaning of the term dexiolabos is uncertain. It is literally “one posted or armed on the right side” (dexios). It refers to
1. some type of light armed soldier (bow or spear)
2. one who is bound to prisoners on the right side
3. one who holds a second horse
4. one who is on the flank
So many options show that moderns do not exactly know the meaning.
23:24 “Felix” The Roman historian Tacitus (Histories 5:9, Annals 12:54) called Antonius Felix cruel and lustful. He gained his
position through his brother, Pallas (both of whom were freed slaves), who was a close friend to Emperor Claudius. He served as
the eleventh procurator of Palestine from a.d. 52-59.
23:25 “form” See Special Topic: Form (tupos) at 7:43.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 23:26-30
26“Claudius Lysias, to the most excellent governor Felix, greetings. 27When this man was arrested by the Jews and
was about to be slain by them, I came up to them with the troops and rescued him, having learned that he was a Roman.
28“And wanting to ascertain the charge for which they were accusing him, I brought him down to their Council; 29and I found
him to be accused over questions about their Law, but under no accusation deserving death or imprisonment. 30When I was
informed that there would be a plot against the man, I sent him to you at once, also instructing his accusers to bring charges
against him before you.”
23:26-30 This is the required letter of explanation of Paul’s case by the officer in charge (cf. 25:12ff). It states the flow of the events,
but does so in such a way as to make Lysias look good.
23:26 This is the verse in which we are told the Chiliarch’s name.
23:29 This verse fits Luke’s pattern of showing that Christianity and its leaders, when accused before governmental officials, were
always acquitted and deemed innocent. Rome had nothing to fear from “the Way”!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 23:31-35
31So the soldiers, in accordance with their orders, took Paul and brought him by night to Antipatris. 32But the next day,
leaving the horsemen to go on with him, they returned to the barracks. 33When these had come to Caesarea and delivered
the letter to the governor, they also presented Paul to him. 34When he had read it, he asked from what province he was, and
when he learned that he was from Cilicia, 35he said, “I will give you a hearing after your accusers arrive also,” giving orders
for him to be kept in Herod’s Praetorium.
23:31 “brought him by night to Antipatris” This city was built by Herod the Great and named after his father, Antipater II. This
was a very long march of possibly 30-40 miles. The exact site of the city is uncertain. The reason the foot soldiers returned (cf. v.
32) at this point is because
1. this was primarily a Gentile area
2. the topography was open and flat, so there was little danger of surprise attack
23:33 “the governor” This is literally “procurator.” Luke is very precise in his titles for local and Roman officials.
23:34 “asked from what province he was” This was to ascertain jurisdiction. Since Paul was also from an Imperial Province Felix
could try the case. There were three divisions of jurisdiction in the Roman Empire:
1. Imperial (Caesar)
2. Senatorial
3. local (like the Herods)
23:35 “after your accusers arrive” This should have been the Jews from Asia who accused Paul in the Temple of bringing a Gentile
into the restricted Jewish area. The fact that they did not appear should have resulted in a dismissal of the charges. But, as often
happens, local politics affects justice!
▣ “kept in Herod’s Praetorium” The Romans were kind to Paul while he was in their custody (cf. 24:23). Paul stayed in a palace
built by Herod the Great, which had previously been used for his personal residence, but now had become Roman Headquarters.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Compare Paul’s defenses and list the common elements.
2. Did Paul see himself as a faithful Jew?
3. Do we know anything about Paul’s extended family from Acts?
ACTS 24
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
The Case Against Paul |
Accused of Sedition |
Paul Before Felix |
The Case Against Paul |
The Case Before Felix |
24:1-9 |
24:1-9 |
24:1-2a |
24:1-2a |
24:1-9 |
|
|
24:2b-8 |
24:2b-9 |
|
|
|
24:9 |
|
|
Paul Defends Himself |
The Defense Before Felix |
|
Paul’s Defense Before Felix |
|
24:10-21 |
24:10-21 |
24:10a |
24:10a |
24:10a |
|
|
|
|
Paul’s Speech Before the |
|
|
24:10b-21 |
24:10b-16 |
24:10b-13 |
|
|
|
|
24:14-16 |
|
|
|
24:17-21 |
24:17-21 |
|
Felix Procrastinates |
|
|
Paul’s Captivity at Caesarea |
24:22-23 |
24:22-27 |
24:22-23 |
24:22-23 |
24:22-23 |
Paul Held in Custody |
|
|
Paul Before Felix and |
|
24:24-26 |
|
24:24-26 |
24:24-26 |
24:24-26 |
24:27 |
|
24:27 |
24:27 |
24:27 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of
us must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this
to a commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 24:1-2a
1After five days the high priest Ananias came down with some elders, with an attorney named Tertullus, and they
brought charges to the governor against Paul. 2After Paul had been summoned, Tertullus began to accuse him, saying to
the governor,
24:1 “the high priest Ananias” See full note at 23:2. Wow! The high priest himself came from Jerusalem to Caesarea. Paul
was really a thorn in their flesh!
▣ “came down” For Jews, Jerusalem is always “up” and all other geographical locations are “down.”
▣ “elders” In the OT this term referred to older tribal leaders. By the post-exilic time it began to be used of wealthy, influential
people of Jerusalem. Often in the NT the Sanhedrin is described as “the High Priests, scribes, and elders.” These were probably
members of the Sanhedrin who were supporters of the Sadducees. The temple leadership had seen the potential problem when
Pharisees were present (cf. 23:6-10).
▣ “Tertullus” This was a hired lawyer (advocate) or orator (cf. NKJV). It is a form of the Greek word rēma or “spoken word.”
Apparently he presented the Sanhedrin’s case in an acceptable Roman legal form, possibly in Latin.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 24:2b-9
2b“Since we have through you attained much peace, and since by your providence reforms are being carried out for
this nation, 3we acknowledge this in every way and everywhere, most excellent Felix, with all thankfulness. 4But, that I
may not weary you any further, I beg you to grant us, by your kindness, a brief hearing. 5For we have found this man a
real pest and a fellow who stirs up dissension among all the Jews throughout the world, and a ringleader of the sect of the
Nazarenes. 6And he even tried to desecrate the temple; and then we arrested him. [We wanted to judge him according to
our own Law. 7But Lysias the commander came along, and with much violence took him out of our hands, 8ordering his
accusers to come before you.]By examining him yourself concerning all these matters you will be able to ascertain the
things of which we accuse him.” 9The Jews also joined in the attack, asserting that these things were so.
24:2b-4 This introduction was not only an attempt at flattery (probably expected), but baseless in fact. Felix was a cruel man (cf.
Tacitus, Histories 5.9 and Annals 12.2). Felix was only in his position because of his brother, Pallas, who, along with Felix, was a
freedman of Antonia (Marc Antony’s daughter), Claudius, the Emperor’s mother. He was later removed by Nero at the request of
the people (cf. Josephus, Wars 2.12.8-13.7 and Antiq. 20.7.7-8.9.
24:2b “attained much peace” Some think this refers to his attempt to stop the activity of the Jewish extremists called sicarii (dagger
men). See Josephus’ Wars 2.13.2.
24:5 “we have found this man” It is Luke’s purpose throughout Acts to show the Roman world that the charges against Christianity
are false. This is why Luke records so many appearances before Roman courts and officials. Paul was accused of three things:
1. being a troublemaker
2. being a leader of a new sect
3. temple desecration
▣
NASB “a real pest”
NKJV “a plague”
NRSV “a pestilent fellow”
TEV “a dangerous nuisance”
NJB “a perfect pest”
This comes from a word meaning plague (cf. Luke 21:11). In the OT (LXX) it also had the meaning of plague, but could be
used metaphorically of a person (cf. Pro. 19:25).
▣ “throughout the world” This is surely a purposeful overstatement and yet what a compliment to the effectiveness of Paul’s
ministry in the diaspora.
▣ “ringleader” This is a compound Greek term from “first” and “to stand.” It was used in the Septuagint of Job 15:24, “a captain
of the first rank.” It is found only here in the NT and not at all in the Koine papyri found in Egypt.
▣ “the sect” The term hairesis originally meant “division” or “faction” (literally, “to make a choice’). It came to have a negative
connotation, as can be seen in our English term “heresy,” which comes from this Greek term. The Sadducees are addressed by this
term in 5:17 and the Pharisees in 15:5. In this context in Acts, Paul considers Christianity an integral part of the historical Jewish
faith and hope (cf. v. 14).
▣ “the Nazarenes” This term refers to the followers of Jesus of Nazareth. Some assert that the term comes from the city of Nazareth
but others relate it to nezer (BDB 666) or “branch,” a title for the Messiah (cf. Isa. 11:1; 53:2). See Special Topic at 2:22.
24:6 Notice the charge made against Paul in 21:28 that he desecrated the temple, has now been changed to “he tried to desecrate the
temple.” They really had a weak case. Paul’s effective preaching was really the problem.
24:7 The parenthesis in the NASB shows a textual addition found in the uncial MS E (8th century) and several minuscules starting
the 9th century. The longer reading is found in NKJV. It seems to change the one/ones wanting to hurt Paul from the Jewish
leadership to Lysias.
The UBS4 excludes the addition and rates the shorter version (MSS P74, א, A, D, some Old Latin, Vulgate, Coptic, and Georgian
versions) as a “B” (almost certain). The UBS3 included the longer reading but gave it a “D” rating (high degree of doubt).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 24:10-21
10When the governor had nodded for him to speak, Paul responded: “Knowing that for many years you have been a
judge to this nation, I cheerfully make my defense, 11since you can take note of the fact that no more than twelve days ago
I went up to Jerusalem to worship. 12Neither in the temple, nor in the synagogues, nor in the city itself did they find me
carrying on a discussion with anyone or causing a riot. 13Nor can they prove to you the charges of which they now accuse
me. 14But this I admit to you, that according to the Way which they call a sect I do serve the God of our fathers, believing
everything that is in accordance with the Law and that is written in the Prophets; 15having a hope in God, which these men
cherish themselves, that there shall certainly be a resurrection of both the righteous and the wicked. 16In view of this, I also
do my best to maintain always a blameless conscience both before God and before men. 17Now after several years I came to
bring alms to my nation and to present offerings; 18in which they found me occupied in the temple, having been purified,
without any crowd or uproar. But there were some Jews from Asia—19who ought to have been present before you and to make
accusation, if they should have anything against me. 20Or else let these men themselves tell what misdeed they found when
I stood before the Council, 21other than for this one statement which I shouted out while standing among them, ‘For the
resurrection of the dead I am on trial before you today.’”
24:10 As the attorney for the Sanhedrin used a formal introduction (probably culturally expected), so too, does Paul.
▣ “defense” We get the English term “apology” or “apologetics” from this Greek term. It originally meant a legal oral defense in
court.
24:11-12 Paul asserts that his public activities in Jerusalem were anything but abnormal and contentious. He was accused of
desecrating the temple, but in reality, he was performing an acceptable ritual.
24:14 “The Way” This was the early title for Christians which emphasized that Jesus is the way to God (John 14:6) and a lifestyle
fellowship (cf. 9:2; 19:9,23; 22:4; 24:22 and possibly 18:25-26).
▣ “I do serve the God of our fathers” Paul clearly asserts in this verse that what he preaches about Jesus in no way violates the
OT. Jesus is the fulfillment of Israel’s hopes and promises. He does not see Christianity as something new and different but a
fulfillment (cf. Jesus in Matt. 5:17-19).
▣ “the Law. . .the Prophets” These are two of the threefold divisions of the OT canon:
1. The Torah (Law) — Genesis – Deuteronomy
2. The Prophets
a. former prophets — Joshua – Kings (except Ruth)
b. latter prophets — Isaiah – Malachi (except Lamentations and Daniel)
3. The Writings
a. megiloth — Ruth, Esther, Ecclesiastes, Song of Songs, and Lamentations
b. wisdom literature — Job, Psalms, Proverbs
c. post-exilic history — I & II Chronicles, Ezra, and Nehemiah
24:15 “having a hope in God which these men cherish themselves” Paul is asserting that his religious orientation is the same as
these accusers (cf. v. 16), except in his view of the resurrection. Paul is trying to defend himself by showing that the conflict is over
theological issues within Judaism, which Rome did not want to become involved with.
For “hope” see Special Topic: Hope at 2:25.
▣ “there shall certainly be a resurrection of both the righteous and the wicked” This refers to the theology of the Pharisees,
not the Sadducean leadership of the temple. Josephus, Antiq. 18.1.3, even asserts that some Pharisees denied the resurrection of the
wicked (for a modern view of annihilation see Edward Fudge, The Fire That Consumes). The Bible is replete with this concept of
a general resurrection (cf. Isa. 25:8; Dan. 12:2; Matt. 25:46; John 5:29; Rom. 2:6-11; Rev. 20:11-15). Paul saw Christianity as the
natural fulfillment of the OT (cf. Matt. 5:17-19). It was not something new!
24:16 “I also do my best to maintain always a blameless conscience” This same phrase is what angered the High Priest so much
in 23:1-2. Paul repeats it again in his presence. It is similar to his discussion of personal effort in I Cor. 9:24-27. The self-control
he preached to Felix (cf. v. 25) was not an easy thing to accomplish and maintain. Self-control is one of the fruits of the Spirit in Gal.
5:22 and possibly the capstone of the list of fruits!
24:17 “I came to bring alms to my nation” For “alms” see Special Topic at 3:2. This probably refers to the contribution from the
Gentile churches to the church in Jerusalem (cf. Rom. 15:25-27; I Cor. 16:1-4; II Corinthians 8-9). It is surprising it is not mentioned
in 21:15ff. This may show that it was not received well by all of the church in Jerusalem (see James D. G. Dunn, Unity and Diversity
in the New Testament). Intrenched racism is hard to deal with even for believers.
▣ “and to present offerings” This refers to
1. the conclusion of Paul’s limited Nazarite vow (cf. 21:24)
2. his paying for others’ limited Nazarite vows (cf. 21:24)
Because this phrase seems to be linked grammatically to “bring alms,” it is possible that they both refer to Jewish rituals, not the
offerings from the churches.
24:18 “they found me occupied in the temple, having been purified” This Jewish ritual procedure was at the instigation of James
and the elders of the church (cf. 21:17-26). It was meant to placate the legalistic Jewish believers in the church, but in reality, it
inflamed the Greek-speaking Jews from Asia.
24:18-19 “Jews from Asia who ought to have been” This was an important legal point in Paul’s defense (cf. v. 19). The
eyewitnesses’ accusers were not present! Those who were accusing Paul of world-wide mischief had no experiential evidence (cf.
v. 20)!
Asia is a geographical reference to Jewish people from southern and western Turkey, then called Asia Minor.
24:19b “if” This is a fourth class conditional, a way to express a contingency which is the farthest removed from possibility.
A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, p. 420, calls it a mixed condition with a second class conclusion (i.e., but
they are not present, v. 19a). His Grammar (p. 1022) lists other mixed conditional sentences in Luke’s writings (cf. Luke 17:6
and Acts 8:31).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 24:22-23
22But Felix, having a more exact knowledge about the Way, put them off, saying, “When Lysias the commander comes
down, I will decide your case.” 23Then he gave orders to the centurion for him to be kept in custody and yet have some
freedom, and not to prevent any of his friends from ministering to him.
24:22 Apparently Felix had heard about Jesus and Christianity. Probably as a Roman official he had been briefed about the local
situation to which he would be assigned.
Felix’s wife was Jewish (cf. v. 24), which meant he had an experiential opportunity to know about the teaching of Judaism. The
Way was considered a sect within Judaism and was, therefore, a “legal” religion in the Roman Empire.
24:23 This shows that Felix did not see Paul as a threat and allowed some freedom and access. Here again is a Roman official who
does not sense Christianity as a political problem. This was surely one of Luke’s purposes in writing his Gospel!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 24:24-27
24But some days later Felix arrived with Drusilla, his wife who was a Jewess, and sent for Paul and heard him speak
about faith in Christ Jesus. 25But as he was discussing righteousness, self-control and the judgment to come, Felix became
frightened and said, “Go away for the present, and when I find time I will summon you.” 26At the same time too, he was
hoping that money would be given him by Paul; therefore he also used to send for him quite often and converse with him.
27But after two years had passed, Felix was succeeded by Porcius Festus, and wishing to do the Jews a favor, Felix left Paul
imprisoned.
24:24 “Drusilla” She was the youngest, and apparently beautiful, daughter of Herod Agrippa I and the sister of Bernice and Agrippa
II. She was Felix’s third wife, whom he took from the Azizus, the King of Emesa (cf. Josephus, Antiq. 20.7.2).
▣
NASB, NRSV,
TEV, NJB “Christ Jesus”
NKJV “Christ”
Option #1 is found in MSS P74, א*, B, E, and the Old Latin, Vulgate versions. The shorter reading is found in MSS אc, A, C,
and the Peshitta and Coptic versions. The UBS4 gives the longer version a “B” rating (almost certain).
One wonders if in this context “Christ” should be translated “Messiah” (MS 044 has “the Messiah”).
▣ “faith” This is a crucial theological word. See Special Topics at 2:40; 3:16; and 6:5. Remember these theological terms in Koine
Greek are based not on Greek usage, but the Septuagint. Luke knows the Septuagint well. It was the OT for the church.
24:24-25 Paul preached the gospel often (cf. v. 26b) to Felix and Drusilla. This was exactly what Jesus wanted him to do (cf. 9:15).
He was convicted, but also greedy (i.e., he wanted Paul to bribe him) and put off his decision (cf. v. 26).
24:26 Apparently Paul had some funds during this prison period. Possibly from (1) a personal inheritance or (2) help from the
churches (i.e., Philippi or Thessalonica). Felix called for Paul often, not to hear him speak, but in hopes of receiving a bribe.
24:27 “after two years had passed” Many believe that it was during this period that Luke gathered eyewitness information from
those in Palestine for his Gospel (cf. Luke 1:1-4). This must have been a discouraging time to an aggressive man like Paul! However,
he did not seek freedom by means of bribery. He knew he was in God’s will.
▣ “Porcius Festus” There is some disagreement between the Roman historians, Suetonius and Tacitus, over the beginning date of
his office. Felix was put on trial in a.d. 55, but it is uncertain whether he was convicted and removed then or in a.d. 59. Festus died
in a.d. 62, while still in office (cf. Josephus, Antiq. 20.9.1). There is little known about him (cf. Josephus, Antiq. 20.8.9-10; Wars
2.14.1).
▣ “Felix left Paul imprisoned” It was customary to release all the prisoners at the time of the change of administrations. This verse
shows the political situation in Palestine and the weakness of the Roman leaders, as well as the power of the Sanhedrin.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. What does the term “Nazarene” mean?
2. What are the implications of the first title for the church in Acts being “the Way”?
3. Explain the significance of v. 15.
ACTS 25
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul Appeals to Caesar |
Paul Appeals to Caesar |
Appeal to the Emperor |
Paul Appeals to the |
Paul Appeals to Caesar |
25:1-5 |
25:1-12 |
25:1-5 |
25:1-5 |
25:1-5 |
25:6-12 |
|
25:6-12 |
25:6-8 |
25:6-12 |
|
|
|
25:9 |
|
|
|
|
25:10-11 |
|
|
|
|
25:12 |
|
Paul Brought Before |
Paul Before Agrippa |
Paul’s Defense Before (25:13-26:32) |
Paul Before Agrippa and |
Paul Appears Before King |
25:13-22 |
25:13-27 |
25:13-22 |
25:13-21 |
25:13-22 |
|
|
|
25:22a |
|
|
|
|
25:22b |
|
25:23-27 |
|
25:23-27 |
25:23-27 |
25:23-26:1 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 25:1-5
1Festus then, having arrived in the province, three days later went up to Jerusalem from Caesarea. 2And the chief priests
and the leading men of the Jews brought charges against Paul, and they were urging him, 3requesting a concession against
Paul, that he might have him brought to Jerusalem (at the same time, setting an ambush to kill him on the way). 4Festus then
answered that Paul was being kept in custody at Caesarea and that he himself was about to leave shortly. 5“Therefore,” he
said, “let the influential men among you go there with me, and if there is anything wrong about the man, let them prosecute
him.”
25:1 “Festus” This was Felix’s successor. He was a nobler personality, but obviously under the same political pressure and mind
set. He was in office for two years and died in a.d. 62 while still in office (cf. Josephus, Antiq. 20.8.9).
▣ “three days later” This shows how upset and persistent the Jewish leadership was concerning Paul. Festus also wanted to make
a good first impression.
25:2 “the chief priest and the leading men of the Jews” This may refer to the Sanhedrin, which was made up of 70 Jewish leaders
from Jerusalem. They formed the highest judicial body of the Jews in both politics and religion. See Special Topic at 4:5. However,
it could also refer to the other wealthy and elite citizens of Jerusalem who would be very anxious to meet the new Roman procurator
and begin to establish a good relationship with him.
It is surely possible that it refers to both groups. After two years there was a new high priest, Ishmael ben Fabus (a.d. 56-62).
He, too, wanted to establish himself and a good way to do this was to attack the renegade Pharisee, Paul.
▣ “they were urging him” This is an imperfect active indicative. They asked again and again.
25:3 This shows animosity against Paul on the part of these religious leaders. They saw Paul as an enemy from within!
▣ “(at the same time, setting an ambush to kill him on the way)” The tactics of the Jewish leadership had not changed (cf. 23:12-15).
25:5 “if” This is a first class conditional sentence which is assumed to be true from the author’s perspective or for his purposes
(cf. A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, vol. 3, p. 429). Dr. Bruce Tankersley, the Koine Greek specialist at East
Texas Baptist University, says it might be third class because there is no verb in the protasis. Festus assumed Paul was guilty.
Why else would the Jerusalem leaders be so persistent, and so tenacious?
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 25:6-12
6After he had spent not more than eight or ten days among them, he went down to Caesarea, and on the next day he took
his seat on the tribunal and ordered Paul to be brought. 7After Paul arrived, the Jews who had come down from Jerusalem
stood around him, bringing many and serious charges against him which they could not prove, 8while Paul said in his own
defense, “I have committed no offense either against the Law of the Jews or against the temple or against Caesar.” 9But
Festus, wishing to do the Jews a favor, answered Paul and said, “Are you willing to go up to Jerusalem and stand trial before
me on these charges?” 10But Paul said, “I am standing before Caesar’s tribunal, where I ought to be tried. I have done no
wrong to the Jews, as you also very well know. 11If, then, I am a wrongdoer and have committed anything worthy of death,
I do not refuse to die; but if none of those things is true of which these men accuse me, no one can hand me over to them. I
appeal to Caesar.” 12Then when Festus had conferred with his council, he answered, “You have appealed to Caesar, to
Caesar you shall go.”
25:6-9 These events showed Paul that he had no real hope for justice with Festus. He knew what awaited him in Jerusalem (cf. v.
3). He also knew Jesus wanted him to go to Rome (cf. 9:15).
25:6 “After he had spent not more than eight or ten days among them” I would imagine the Jewish leaders wined and dined
Festus. They manipulated all the Roman officials.
25:8 Paul asserts that he is innocent of all charges against
1. the Law of Moses (cf. 21:21,28)
2. the temple (cf. 21:28; 24:6)
3. Caesar (cf. 16:21; 17:7)
Numbers 1 and 2 are exactly what Stephen was charged with in 6:13-14.
25:10-11 Paul asserts that he was already before the proper authority and in the proper place. Luke records in v. 11 Paul’s official
appeal to Caesar.
The right of appeal to Caesar initially started with Octavian in 30 b.c. (cf. Dio Cassius, History, 51.19). This initial dictate was
expanded to forbid blinding, scourging, and torture to any Roman citizen who appealed to Caesar (cf. Paulus, Sententiae 5.26.1).
There is a good discussion of Roman Law of the first century in A. N. Sherwin-White’s Roman Society and Roman Law in the
New Testament, “lecture four: Paul before Felix and Festus,” pp. 48-70.
25:11 “If. . .if” These are two first class conditional sentences which are assumed to be true from the author’s perspective or
for his purpose. These two usages in context show how this grammatical construction was used to make a point. The first is false
to reality (but exactly the same condition used by Felix in v. 5); the second is true to reality.
▣ “I do not refuse to die” Paul recognized the power of the state (cf. Rom. 13:4). The OT perspective on capital punishment can
be found in Gen. 9:6. See an interesting discussion of capital punishment in Hard Sayings of the Bible, pp. 114-116.
▣
NASB, TEV “no one can hand me over to them”
NKJV “no on can deliver me over to them”
NRSV “no one can turn me over to them”
NJB “no one has the right to surrender me to them”
The term charizomai basically means “to gratify” or “grant as a favor.” Paul realized that Festus was trying to impress the
Jewish leadership by giving them himself!
However, it is possible that Festus is trying to abide by a decree from Julius Caesar (cf. Josephus, Antiq. 14.10.2), which
encouraged Roman officials in Palestine to allow the wishes of the high priest.
▣ “I appeal to Caesar” This was the legal right of every Roman citizen in capital punishment cases (Pliny the Younger, Letters
10.96). At this point in history, Nero was the Caesar (a.d. 54-68).
25:12 “his council” This refers to Festus’ Roman legal experts, not the Jewish leaders.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS TO ACTS 25:13-26:32
BACKGROUND
A. Herod Agrippa II (Marcus Julius Agrippa)
1. He is the son of Herod Agrippa I (cf. Acts 12), who was the political ruler of Judea and who had control of the
Temple and Priesthood (a.d. 41-44) and grandson of Herod the Great.
2. He was educated in Rome and was pro-Roman. He returned to Rome after the Jewish war of a.d. 70 and died there
in a.d. 100.
3. At the age of 17 his father died, but he was too young to assume his kingdom.
4. In a.d. 50 Herod Chalcis, Agrippa II’s uncle, the King of Chalcis (a small kingdom in Northern Palestine), died and
Agrippa II was given his kingdom by Emperor Claudius. Also, he was given control over the Temple and the High
Priesthood.
5. In a.d. 53 he exchanged this small kingdom for the tetrarches of Herod Philip (Ituraea and Trachonitis) and Lysanius
(Abilene).
6. Later, Emperor Nero added certain cities and villages around the Sea of Galilee to his control. His capital was
Caesarea Philippi, which he renamed Neronias.
7. For historical reference cf:
a. Josephus Jewish Wars 2.12.1,7-8; 15.1; 16.4; 7.5.1
b. Josephus’ Antiquities of the Jews 19.9.2; 20.5.2; 6.5; 7.1; 8.4; 9.6.
B. Bernice
1. She was the oldest daughter of Herod Agrippa I.
2. She was the sister of Agrippa II, and for a period of time may have been his incestuous lover (there is no evidence
of this, only rumor). Later she was a mistress to Emperor Titus while he was a general. He was the Roman general
who destroyed Jerusalem and the Temple in a.d. 70.
3. She was Drusilla’s sister (cf. 24:24).
4. She was married to Herod Chalcis (Herod Agrippa I’s brother, her uncle), but when he died she moved in with her
brother.
5. She later married Polemon, King of Cilicia, but left him to return to her brother who had just been given the title of
“King.”
6. She was the mistress of Emperor Vespasian.
7. Historical references
a. Josephus Jewish Wars 2.1.6; 15.1; 17.1.
b.Josephus’ Antiquities of the Jew 19.9.1; 15.1; 20.1.3
c. Tacitus’ History 2.2
d. Seutonius’ Life of Titus 7
e. Dio Cassius’ Histories 65.15; 66.18
f. Juvenal’s Satire 61.156-157
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 25:13-22
13Now when several days had elapsed, King Agrippa and Bernice arrived at Caesarea and paid their respects to Festus.
14While they were spending many days there, Festus laid Paul’s case before the king, saying, “There is a man who was left
as a prisoner by Felix; 15and when I was at Jerusalem, the chief priests and the elders of the Jews brought charges against
him, asking for a sentence of condemnation against him. 16I answered them that it is not the custom of the Romans to hand
over any man before the accused meets his accusers face to face and has an opportunity to make his defense against the
charges. 17So after they had assembled here, I did not delay, but on the next day took my seat on the tribunal and ordered
the man to be brought before me. 18When the accusers stood up, they began bringing charges against him not of such crimes
as I was expecting, 19but they simply had some points of disagreement with him about their own religion and about a dead
man, Jesus, whom Paul asserted to be alive. 20Being at a loss how to investigate such matters, I asked whether he was willing
to go to Jerusalem and there stand trial on these matters. 21But when Paul appealed to be held in custody for the Emperor’s
decision, I ordered him to be kept in custody until I send him to Caesar.” 22Then Agrippa said to Festus, “I also would like
to hear the man myself.” “Tomorrow,” he said, “you shall hear him.”
25:13 “King Agrippa” This refers to Agrippa II. He was the brother of Drusilla and Bernice. He was educated in Rome and was
very loyal to Rome’s policies and programs.
SPECIAL TOPIC: BERNICE
1. She was the oldest daughter of Herod Agrippa I.
2. She was the sister of Agrippa II, and for a period of time was his incestuous lover. Later she was a mistress to Titus
while he was a general.
3. She was also Felix’s third wife, Drusilla’s sister.
4. She was married to Herod Chalcis (Herod Agrippa I’s brother, her uncle), but when he died she moved in with her
brother.
5. She later married Polemon, King of Cilicia, but left him to return to her brother who had just been given the title of
“King.”
6. She was the mistress of both Vespasian and Titus.
7. For historical references
a. Josephus’ Jewish Wars 2:11:6; 15:1; 17:1.
b.Josephus’ Antiquities of the Jew 19:9:1; 15:1; 20:1:3
c. Tactius’ History 2:2
d. Seutonius’ Life of Titus 7
e. Dio Cassius’ Histories 65:15; 66:18
f. Juvenal’s Satire 61:156-157
25:13-19 This again reveals one of Luke’s literary and theological purposes, which was to show that Christianity was not a political
threat to Rome (cf. v. 25). In the early decades of the first century Christianity was considered a sect of Judaism, which was
acknowledged by Rome as a legal religion. Rome wanted no part of disputes between Jewish religious sects!
25:18 “they began charges against him not of such crimes as I was expecting” This shows the intensity and nature of the Jewish
opposition. It was not political, but religious.
▣
NASB, NRSV,
NJB, NIV “crimes”
NKJV “such things”
TEV “evil crimes”
REB “charges”
NET Bible “evil deeds”
ASV “evil things”
There are several variants.
1. ponērōn – genitive plural in MSS א2, B, E, meaning “things of evil” (cf. 28:21)
2. ponērau – accusative neuter singular in MSS P74, A, C*
3. ponēra – accusative neuter plural in MSS א*, C2
4. omit – MSS L, P, and some Lectionaries (cf. NKJV)
UBS4 puts option #1 in the text with a “C” rating (difficulty in deciding).
Felix was surprised that the charges were not serious and had to do with Jewish religious matters, not legal matters.
25:19 “religion” This is literally a compound term from “fear” and “gods.” This term can mean “superstition,” which was exactly
what these Roman leaders thought about the Jewish religion. However, Festus would have not wanted to insult his Jewish dignitaries,
so he used an ambiguous term (so too, Paul, 17:22).
Verses 18-19 show again that Roman justice found no fault with Paul or Christianity.
▣ “about a dead man, Jesus, whom Paul asserted to be alive” The resurrection was one the central pillars of the sermons
(kerygma, see Special Topic at 2:14) in Acts (cf. 26:8). Christianity stands or falls on this theological assertion (cf. I Corinthians 15).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 25:23-27
23So, on the next day when Agrippa came together with Bernice amid great pomp, and entered the auditorium
accompanied by the commanders and the prominent men of the city, at the command of Festus, Paul was brought in. 24Festus
said, “King Agrippa, and all you gentlemen here present with us, you see this man about whom all the people of the Jews
appealed to me, both at Jerusalem and here, loudly declaring that he ought not to live any longer. 25But I found that he had
committed nothing worthy of death; and since he himself appealed to the Emperor, I decided to send him. 26Yet I have
nothing definite about him to write to my lord. Therefore I have brought him before you all and especially before you, King
Agrippa, so that after the investigation has taken place, I may have something to write. 27For it seems absurd to me in sending
a prisoner, not to indicate also the charges against him.”
25:23 What a wonderful opportunity to preach the gospel!
▣ “the commanders” This is the term chiliarch, which means leaders of a thousand, as centurion means leader of a hundred. We
learn from Josephus’ Antiq. 19.19.2, that there were five auxiliary cohorts in Caesarea at this period. Therefore, possibly five military
men are referred to here.
▣ “the prominent men of the city” This would refer to the civic leaders of Caesarea.
Notice the groups in the assembly.
1. a Roman procurator
2. an Idumean regional king
3. Roman military leaders
4. prominent civic leaders of Caesarea
▣ 25:26 “the Emperor” This term is sebastos, which was the Greek equivalent of the Latin term augustus. Its basic etymology
is “revere, “adore,” “venerate,” or “worship.” It was first used of Octavian in 27 b.c. by the Senate. Here, it is used of Nero (a.d.
54-68). Nero seems to have expanded the worship of the Emperor cult.
25:26 “I have nothing definite about him to write” Festus had the same problem as Lysias, the commander from Jerusalem. He
was bound by Roman law to write an indictment against Paul along with any evidence or judicial opinion. Paul was a mystery to these
Roman leaders.
▣ “lord” The is the Greek word kurios, which means owner, master, ruler. This is the first documented use of kurios as a stand-alone
title for Nero. This title was rejected by the Emperors Octavian/Augustus and Tiberias because they felt it was too close to the Latin
rex (king), which caused the Roman populace and Senate discomfort. However, it appears often during and after Nero’s day.
Vespasian and Titus used the term “savior” and Domitian used “god” to describe themselves (cf. James S. Jeffers, The Greco-Roman
World p. 101). The term kurios became the focus of the persecution against Christians, who could use only this term for Jesus Christ.
They refused to use it in the incense offering and pledge of allegiance to Rome.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us must
walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why did the Jewish leaders fear and hate Paul?
2. How does this chapter reflect one of Luke’s purposes in writing Acts?
3. What was Paul’s purpose in defending himself before Agrippa and Bernice?
ACTS 26
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul Defends Himself |
Paul’s Early Life |
Paul’s Defense Before (25:13-26:32) |
Paul Defends Himself |
Paul Appears Before King 25:13-26:1 |
26:1-11 |
26:1-11 |
26:1 |
26:1 |
Paul’s Speech Before King |
|
|
26:2-3 |
26:2-3 |
26:2-3 |
|
|
26:4-8 |
26:4-8 |
26:4-8 |
|
|
26:9-11 |
26:9-11 |
26:9-11 |
Paul Tells of His |
Paul Recounts His |
|
Paul Tells of His |
|
26:12-18 |
26:12-18 |
26:12-18 |
26:12-18 |
26:12-18 |
Paul’s Testimony to Jews |
Paul’s Post-conversion Life |
|
Paul Tells of His Work |
|
26:19-23 |
26:19-23 |
26:19-23 |
26:19-23 |
26:19-23 |
Paul Appeals to Agrippa to |
|
|
|
His Hearers’ Reactions |
26:24-29 |
26:24-32 |
26:24-29 |
26:24 |
26:24-29 |
|
|
|
26:25-27 |
|
|
|
|
26:28 |
|
|
|
|
26:29 |
|
26:30-32 |
|
26:30-32 |
26:30-32 |
26:30-32 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 26:1
1Agrippa said to Paul, “You are permitted to speak for yourself.” Then Paul stretched out his hand and proceeded to
make his defense:
26:1 “stretched out his hand” This was a gesture of greeting and oratorical introduction (cf. Acts 12:17; 13:16 and 21:40, in which
gestures of the hand are used for attention and silence).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 26:2-3
2“In regard to all the things of which I am accused by the Jews, I consider myself fortunate, King Agrippa, that I am
about to make my defense before you today; 3especially because you are an expert in all customs and questions among the
Jews; therefore I beg you to listen to me patiently.
26:2-3 Paul introduces his defense in a typical formal and flattering way, as he did in his trial before Felix (cf. 24:10), which was
probably a culturally expected necessity.
26:2 “In regard to all the things of which I am accused by the Jews” Agrippa II had been put in charge of the Temple and
Priesthood by Rome. Although pro-Roman and educated in Rome, he understood the intricacies of the Jewish faith (cf. v. 3).
▣ “fortunate” This is the same term which introduces each of the Beatitudes of Matt. 5:3-12; Luke 6:20-22; and Ps. 1:1 in the
Septuagint.
26:3
NASB, NKJV “all customs and questions”
NRSV “all customs and controversies”
TEV “all of the Jewish customs and disputes”
NJB “customs and controversy”
The first term is ethōn, from which we get the English word “ethnic,” or the cultural aspect of a particular people group.
The second term dzētēmatōn is used often in Acts to denote debates and arguments over aspects of rabbinical Judaism (cf. 15:2;
18:15; 23:19; 25:19; 26:3). These were not uncommon because of the existence of several factions within first century Judaism :
Sadducees, Pharisees (also the theological factions of Shammai and Hillel), and the zealots.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 26:4-8
4“So then, all Jews know my manner of life from my youth up, which from the beginning was spent among my own
nation and at Jerusalem; 5since they have known about me for a long time, if they are willing to testify, that I lived as a
Pharisee according to the strictest sect of our religion. 6“And now I am standing trial for the hope of the promise made by
God to our fathers; 7the promise to which our twelve tribes hope to attain, as they earnestly serve God night and day. And
for this hope, O King, I am being accused by Jews. 8“Why is it considered incredible among you people if God does raise the
dead?
26:4 “all Jews know my manner of life” Paul has repeated this several times (cf. Acts 22:3-5; 23:1; 24:16; 25:8). Paul had lived
an exemplary life among the Jews in Jerusalem (cf. v. 5).
▣ “my own nation” It is uncertain where Paul grew up. This could refer to (1) Tarsus in Cilicia or (2) Jerusalem.
26:5 “if” This is a third class conditional sentence which means potential action. In this context Paul knows they could testify
about his past, but they would not.
▣ “Pharisee according to the strictest sect of our religion” This was a theological sect of Judaism which emerged during the
Maccabean Period. It was committed to the oral and written tradition. See Special Topic at 5:34.
26:6 “the hope of the promise made by God to our fathers” This refers to the OT prophecy of (1) the coming of the Messiah
or (2) the resurrection of the dead (cf. 23:6; 24:15; Job 14:14-15; 19:25-27; Dan. 12:2). Paul saw “the Way” as the fulfillment of the
OT (cf. Matt. 5:17-19; Galatians 3).
For “hope” see Special Topic at 2:25 and the Special Topic: The Kerygma at 2:14.
26:7 “our twelve tribes” The tribal lineage (children of Jacob) was still very important to the Jews. Many of the ten northern tribes
never came back from Assyrian exile (722 b.c.). We know some tribal information from the NT.
1. Mary, Joseph, and Jesus were from the tribe of Judah (cf. Matt. 1:2-16; Luke 3:23-33; Rev. 5:5)
2. Anna’s tribe is identified as Asher (cf. Luke 2:36)
3. Paul’s tribe is identified as Benjamin (cf. Rom. 11:1; Phil. 3:5)
Herod the Great was jealous of this and had the Temple records, which showed genealogies, burned.
For “twelve” see Special Topic at 1:22.
▣ “hope” One wonders exactly which hope Paul is referring to. From the larger context one would assume the resurrection (cf. v.
8). See Special Topic: Hope at 2:25.
▣ “as they earnestly serve God night and day” Paul loved his racial group (cf. Rom. 9:1-3). He knew how hard they tried to serve
YHWH. He also uniquely knew the danger of legalism, dogmatism, and elitism.
“Night and day” was an idiom of intensity and regularity (cf. 20:31; Luke 2:37).
26:8 “Why is it considered incredible among you people” Paul is speaking to two groups:
1. Agrippa and other Jews present
2. the Gentiles present, such as Festus
▣ “if” This is a first class conditional sentence which is assumed to be true from the author’s perspective or for his literary
purposes.
▣ “God does raise the dead” This phrase speaks of the Jewish hope of a general resurrection (see Job 14:14-15; 19:25-27; Isa. 25:8;
26:19; Dan. 12:2-3), but Paul had Christ’s resurrection specifically in mind (cf. I Cor. 15:1-28). These Sadducean accusers would
be getting very nervous at this point (cf. 23:1-10).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 26:9-11
9“So then, I thought to myself that I had to do many things hostile to the name of Jesus of Nazareth. 10And this is just
what I did in Jerusalem; not only did I lock up many of the saints in prisons, having received authority from the chief priests,
but also when they were being put to death I cast my vote against them. 11And as I punished them often in all the synagogues,
I tried to force them to blaspheme; and being furiously enraged at them, I kept pursuing them even to foreign cities.”
26:9 Paul (egō, “I” and emautō, “myself”) confesses his misdirected religious enthusiasm, which he now realizes was not the will
of God (cf. I Tim. 1:13). He thought that by persecuting the followers of Jesus he was serving God and pleasing God. Paul’s world
and worldview totally changed on the Damascus road (cf. Acts 9).
▣ “the name” This Semitic idiom means “ther person of” (cf. 3:6,16). This is no magic formula, but a personal relationship!
▣ “Jesus of Nazareth” See Special Topics at 2:22.
26:10 “the saints” Literally this is “the holy ones.” Paul knew now exactly whom he had persecuted and killed, God’s people! What
a shock, sorrow, and enlightenment Paul’s Damascus vision must have been, a total reorientation of thought and life!
For “saints” see Special Topic at 9:13.
▣ “having received authority” Paul was the “official” persecutor for the Sanhedrin.
▣ “when they were being put to death” This shows the intensity of the persecution. The “Way” was not a minor issue; it was a
life-and-death issue and it still is!
▣ “cast my vote against them” This is the technical word in Greek for an official vote either in the Sanhedrin or a local synagogue.
But because no local synagogue could/would vote on death issues, it was probably the Sanhedrin. If it was in the Sanhedrin, then
Paul had to have been married. The term originally meant “a pebble,” which was used to cast a vote—either a black one or a white
one (cf. Rev. 2:17)
26:11 “tried to force” This is an imperfect tense of a Greek term that means to force or compel (cf. 28:19), but here it is used in
the sense of tried. It refers to a repeated action in past time.
▣ “to blaspheme” Saul attempted to force them to publicly affirm their faith in Jesus as the Messiah and then condemn them. In
later persecutions, believers were forced to reject faith in Christ, but this context is a different cultural situation.
▣
NASB “being furiously enraged”
NKJV “being exceedingly enraged”
NRSV “I was so furiously enraged”
TEV “I was so furious”
NJB “my fury against them was so extreme”
This is a very intense adverb (“much more”) and participle (present middle [deponent]). Festus uses the same root for Paul
(i.e., rave in 26:24)
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 26:12-18
12“While so engaged as I was journeying to Damascus with the authority and commission of the chief priests, 13at
midday, O King, I saw on the way a light from heaven, brighter than the sun, shining all around me and those who were
journeying with me. 14And when we had all fallen to the ground, I heard a voice saying to me in the Hebrew dialect, ‘Saul,
Saul, why are you persecuting Me? It is hard for you to kick against the goads.’ 15And I said, ‘Who are You, Lord?’ And
the Lord said, ‘I am Jesus whom you are persecuting. 16‘But get up and stand on your feet; for this purpose I have appeared
to you, to appoint you a minister and a witness not only to the things which you have seen, but also to the things in which I
will appear to you; 17rescuing you from the Jewish people and from the Gentiles, to whom I am sending you, 18to open their
eyes so that they may turn from darkness to light and from the dominion of Satan to God, that they may receive forgiveness
of sins and an inheritance among those who have been sanctified by faith in Me.’”
26:12 Luke records Paul’s personal testimony three times in Acts, 9:1-31; 22:3-21, and here. God’s mercy and election towards Saul
are so obvious. If God in Christ can forgive and use this man, He can forgive and use anyone!
26:13 See full note in 9:3.
The fact that there is variation in details in all three places where Paul shares his conversion speaks to the accuracy of Luke’s
recording of Paul’s legal defenses (and, thereby, also the sermons) in Acts!
26:14 See full note at 9:4.
Frank Stagg, New Testament Theology, has a great paragraph on the vital connection between Jesus and His church.
“The most important fact about judgment is that we are judged in relation to Christ. In turn, this is a judgment in
relation to his people. Our true relationship to him is reflected in our relationship to his people. To serve them is to serve
him and to neglect them is to neglect him (Matt. 25:31-46). Never does the New Testament allow one to divorce his
relationship to Christ from that to other people. To persecute them is to persecute him (Acts 9:1-2,4-5; 22:4,7-8; 26:10-11,14-15). To sin against the brethren is to sin against Christ (1 Cor. 8:12). Though we are not saved by our works, we
are judged by them; for they reflect our true relationship to Christ and his grace. Judgment is merciful toward them that
accept judgment, and judgment is merciful toward them who are merciful (Matt. 5:7)” (p. 333).
▣ “Hebrew dialect” In Paul’s three personal testimonies in Acts, this is the only one in which the detail of Jesus speaking Aramaic
is mentioned. See full note at 22:2.
▣ “Saul, Saul” This last half of v. 14 and the last part of v. 15, as well as vv. 16-18, are a quote from Jesus to Paul on the Damascus
road.
▣ “It is hard for you to kick against the goads” This phrase is unique to this context, possibly because it was a Greek/Latin
proverb, not Jewish. Paul always knew to what audience he was speaking and how to communicate to them! This is referring to
1. a pointed stick used by those who directed oxen to pull carts and plows
2. projections on the front of the cart or wagon to keep the animals from kicking backward
This proverb was used to denote the human futility of resisting divine initiatives.
26:15 See complete note at 9:5.
▣ “Jesus whom you are persecuting” This shows the close connection between Jesus and His church, (cf. Matt. 10:40; 25:40,45).
To hurt them is to hurt Him!
26:16 “‘But get up and stand on your feet’” These are both aorist active imperatives. This sounds very familiar to the prophetic
call of Jeremiah 1:7-8 and Ezekiel 2:1,3.
▣ “‘for this purpose I have appeared to you’” God had a specific assignment for Paul. Paul’s conversion and call are not typical,
but extraordinary! God’s mercy is powerfully demonstrated as well as God’s election for Kingdom service and kingdom growth.
▣ “I have appeared to you. . .I will appear to you” These are both forms of horaō. The first is aorist passive indicative and
the second is future passive indicative. In a sense Jesus is promising Paul future personal encounters. Paul had several divine
visions during his ministry (cf. 18:9-10; 22:17-21; 23:11; 27:23-24). Paul also mentions a training period in Arabia in which he was
taught by Jesus (cf. Gal. 1:12,17,18).
▣ “to appoint” This is literally “to take into the hand.” It was an idiom of destiny (cf. 22:14; 26:16).
▣ “a minister and a witness” The first term literally referred to an “under-rower” on a ship. It came to be used idiomatically for
a servant.
From the second term, martus, we get the English term “martyr.” It had a double meaning:
1. a witness (cf. Luke 11:48; 24:48; Acts 1:8,22; 5:32; 10:39,41; 22:15)
2. a martyr (cf. Acts 22:20)
Both connotations were the personal experience of most of the Apostles and many, many believers throughout the ages!
26:17 “rescuing you” This is a present middle participle. In the middle voice this word usually means to select or choose.
Normally it is translated “rescue or deliver” (cf. 7:10,34; 12:11; 23:27). God’s providential care is evident here. Paul received
several of these visions during his ministry in order to encourage him. This possibly alludes to the Septuagint’s reading of Isa. 48:10
or possibly Jer. 1:7-8,19.
▣ “from the Jewish people and from the Gentiles” Paul will suffer opposition from both groups (cf. II Cor. 11:23-27).
▣ “to whom I am sending you” The “I” is emphatic (egō) here as in v. 15. The verb is apostellō (present active indicative),
from which we get the term “Apostle.” As the Father sent Jesus, so Jesus sends His witnesses, apostles (cf. John 20:21).
26:18 “to open. . .turn” These are both aorist infinitives. This may be an allusion to Isa. 42:7. The Messiah will open blind eyes
as a metaphor for opening spiritual eyes (cf. John 9). Gospel knowledge and understanding must precede the call to a volitional
response (repentance and faith). Satan tries to close our minds and hearts (cf. II Cor. 4:4) and the Spirit tries to open them (cf. John
6:44,65; 16:8-11).
▣ “from darkness. . .from the dominion of Satan” Notice the parallelism. “Dominion” is the Greek term exousia, usually
translated authority or power (cf. NKJV, NRSV, TEV). The world is under the influence of personal evil (cf. Eph. 2:2; 4:14; 6:10-18;
II Cor. 4:4; Col. 1:12-13, see Special Topic at 5:3).
In the OT, particularly the prophecies of Isaiah, the Messiah (see Special Topic at 2:31) was to bring sight to the blind. It was
both a physical prediction and also metaphorical for truth (cf. Isa. 29:18; 32:3; 35:5; 42:7,16).
SPECIAL TOPIC: AUTHORITY (EXOUSIA)
It is interesting to observe Luke’s use of exousia (authority, power, or legal right).
1. In 4:6 Satan claims to be able to give Jesus authority.
2. In 4:32,36 the Jewish people were amazed at how Jesus taught using His personal authority.
3. In 9:1 He gave His power and authority to His Apostles.
4. In 10:19 He gave His authority to the seventy missionaries.
5. In 20:2,8 the central question of Jesus’ authority is asked.
6. In 22:53 evil has been allowed authority to condemn and kill Jesus.
Although not in Luke, Matthew’s introduction to the Great Commission, “all authority has been given to Me in heaven and on
earth,” is a marvelous statement (Matt. 28:18).
Jesus’ answer to their question would have been
1. God’s spoken words at His
a. baptism (Luke 3:21-22)
b. transfiguration (Luke 9:35)
2. OT fulfilled prophecy
a. tribe of Judah (cf. Gen. 49:10)
b. family of Jesse (cf. II Samuel7)
c. born in Bethlehem (cf. Micah 5:2)
d. Born during the fourth empire (Rome) of Daniel 2
e. helped the poor, blind, needy (Isaiah)
3. His exorcisms revealed His power and authority over Satan and his kingdom.
4. His resuscitations of the dead showed His power over physical life and death.
5. His miracles all reveal His power and authority over the temporal, spacial, and physical.
a. nature
b. feedings
c. healings
d. mind readings
e. catching fish
▣ “to light. . .to God” Notice the parallelism. Ancient humans feared darkness. It became a metaphor for evil. Light, on the other
hand, became a metaphor for truth, healing, and purity. A good parallel passage on the light of the gospel is John 3:17-21.
▣ “that they may receive” The verbal in this phrase is another aorist infinitive. There is no “may” in the Greek text (cf. TEV,
NJB). The only condition in this context is “by faith in Me” clause, which is put last in the Greek sentence for emphasis. All of God’s
blessings are contingent on a faith response (i.e., receive, cf. John 1:12) to His grace (cf. Eph. 2:8-9). This is the NT counterpoint
of conditional covenants in the OT.
▣ “forgiveness of sins” Luke uses this term (aphesis) often.
1. In Luke 4:18 it is used in an OT quote from Isa. 61:1, where it means release, which reflects the LXX usage of Exod. 18:2
and Lev. 16:26.
2. In Luke 1:77; 3:3; 24:47; Acts 2:38; 5:31; 10:43; 13:38; 26:18, it means “the removal of the guilt of sin,” which reflects
the LXX usage of Deut. 15:3, where it is used of the cancellation of a debt.
Luke’s usage may reflect the New Covenant promise of Jer. 31:34.
▣ “and an inheritance” This is the Greek term klēros, which denotes the casting of lots (cf. Lev. 16:8; Jonah 1:7; Acts 1:26) to
determine an inheritance, as in Gen. 48:6; Exod. 6:8; and Josh. 13:7-8. In the OT the Levites did not have a land inheritance, only
the 48 Levitical cities (cf. Deut. 10:9; 12:12), but the Lord Himself was their inheritance (cf. Num. 18:20). Now in the NT all
believers are priests (cf. I Pet. 2:5,9; Rev. 1:6). The Lord (YHWH) is our inheritance; we are His children (cf. Rom. 8:15-17).
▣ “those who have been sanctified” This is a perfect passive participle. Believers (faithers) have been and continue to be
sanctified by faith in Christ (cf. 20:21). See Special Topic at 9:32. Neither Satan nor the demonic can take this away (cf. Rom. 8:31-39).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 26:19-23
19“So, King Agrippa, I did not prove disobedient to the heavenly vision, 20but kept declaring both to those of Damascus
first, and also at Jerusalem and then throughout all the region of Judea, and even to the Gentiles, that they should repent and
turn to God, performing deeds appropriate to repentance. 21“For this reason some Jews seized me in the temple and tried
to put me to death. 22“So, having obtained help from God, I stand to this day testifying both to small and great, stating
nothing but what the Prophets and Moses said was going to take place; 23that the Christ was to suffer, and that by reason
of His resurrection from the dead He would be the first to proclaim light both to the Jewish people and to the Gentiles.”
26:19 “So, King Agrippa” See note at 25:13, Intro. Paul was trying to reach this man for the gospel (cf. vv. 26-29).
▣ “I did not prove disobedient” The Greek term peithō is from the name of the goddess of persuasion. In this context it has the
alpha privative, which negates it, thereby denoting “disobedience” (cf. Luke 1:17; Rom. 1:30; II Tim. 3:2; Titus 1:16; 3:3). So,
in a sense, this was a forceful way in Koine Greek to negate something, but in this context, it is a literary way of affirming Paul’s
obedience!
▣ “heavenly vision” This refers to Paul’s Damascus road encounter with the resurrected, glorified Christ.
26:20 “Damascus. . .Jerusalem” See Acts 9:19-25,27 for Paul’s ministry in Damascus; 9:26-30 for Paul’s ministry in Jerusalem
and possibly 9:31 for Paul’s ministry in Judea.
▣ “repent and turn to God” Paul’s message (cf. Acts 20:21) was the same as
1. John the Baptist’s (cf. Matt. 3:1-12; Mark 1:4-8)
2. Jesus’ early message (cf. Mark. 1:15)
3. Peter (cf. Acts 3:16,19)
The Greek term repent means a change of mind. The Hebrew word means a change of action. Both are involved in true
repentance. See Special Topic at 2:38. The two New Covenant requirements (which are also old Covenant requirements) for
salvation are repentance (turning from self and sin) and faith (turning to God in Christ).
▣ “performing deeds appropriate to repentance” The believer’s lifestyle (present active participle) confirms his/her initial
faith commitment (cf. Matt. 3:8; Luke 3:8; Eph. 2:8-10, James and I John). God wants a people who reflect His character. Believers
are called to Christlikeness (cf. Rom. 8:28-29; Gal. 4:19; Eph. 1:4; 2:10). The gospel is
1. a person to welcome
2. truth about that person to believe
3. a life like that person’s to live
26:21 It was not Paul’s theological views, but his preaching to and inclusion of “the Gentiles” (cf. v. 20) that caused the riot in the
Temple.
▣ “tried to put me to death” This is an imperfect middle (deponent) indicative (tried again and again) with an aorist middle
infinitive (to kill). The Jews (cf. Acts 9:24) from Asia (cf. 20:3,19; 21:27,30) tried to kill Paul several times.
26:22 “testifying both to small and great” This is an inclusive Semitic idiom. It is Paul’s affirmation (like Peter’s, cf. 10:38) that
he, like God, is not respecter of persons (cf. Deut. 10:17; II Chr. 19:7, see fuller note at 10:34). He preaches to all humans.
▣ “stating nothing but what the Prophets and Moses said” Paul is asserting that his message and audience (i.e., Gentiles) are not
an innovation, but OT prophecy. He is simply following OT guidelines (see Special Topic at 1:8), promises and truths.
26:23 Notice that Paul’s message consisted of three parts:
1. the Messiah suffered for human forgiveness
2. the Messiah’s resurrection was first fruits of all believers’ resurrection
3. this Good News was for Jews and Gentiles
These three theological aspects must be combined with verse 20 which shows how we personally receive Christ (repentance, turning
from self and sin; faith, turning to God in Christ).
▣ “that the Christ was to suffer”
For the basic theological points of the Apostolic sermons in Acts see Special Topic at 2:14. It
was the stumbling block for the Jews (cf. I Cor. 1:23), but it was an OT prediction (cf. Gen. 3:15; Psalm 22; Isaiah 53). This same
truth is found in Luke 24:7,26,44-47.
The Greek “the Christ” reflects the Hebrew title “the Messiah.” Paul asserts that Jesus, who was crucified, was truly the Christ,
the Promised One, the Anointed One (cf. 2:36; 3:6,18,20; 4:10,26; 13:33; 17:3; 26:23, see special Topic: Messiah at 2:31).
▣ “that by reason of His resurrection from the dead” Because of this text, and Rom. 1:4, there developed an early heresy called
“adoptionism” (see glossary), which asserted that the human Jesus was rewarded for a good life by being raised from the dead.
However, this aberrant Christology ignored all the texts about His pre-existence, such as John 1:1; Phi. 2:6-11; Col. 1:15-17; and Heb.
1:2-3. Jesus has always existed; He has always been divine; He was incarnated in time.
▣ “the light” Light is an ancient metaphor of truth and purity (cf. v. 18; Isa. 9:2; 42:6-7).
▣ “to the Jewish people and to the Gentiles” There is only one gospel for both groups (cf. Eph. 2:11-3:13). This was the mystery
that had been hidden from the ages, but is now fully revealed in Christ. All humans are made in the image of the one creator God
(cf. Gen. 1:26-27). Genesis 3:15 promises that God will provide salvation for fallen humanity. Isaiah affirms the universality of the
Messiah (e.g., Isa. 2:2-4; 42:4,6,10-12; 45:20-25; 49:6; 51:4; 52:10; 60:1-3; and also Mic. 5:4-5).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 26:24-29
24While Paul was saying this in his defense, Festus said in a loud voice, “Paul, you are out of your mind! Your great
learning is driving you mad.” 25But Paul said, “I am not out of my mind, most excellent Festus, but I utter words of sober
truth. 26For the king knows about these matters, and I speak to him also with confidence, since I am persuaded that none of
these things escape his notice; for this has not been done in a corner. 27King Agrippa, do you believe the Prophets? I know
that you do.” 28Agrippa replied to Paul, “In a short time you will persuade me to become a Christian.” 29And Paul said, “I
would wish to God, that whether in a short or long time, not only you, but also all who hear me this day, might become such
as I am, except for these chains.”
26:24 “Festus said in a loud voice” Paul’s message was unbelievable to him. His world-view and culture, education, and position
biased his ability to understand.
▣ “Your great learning is driving you mad” In a roundabout way this shows the depth, clarity, and persuasiveness of Paul’s
defense.
26:25 “of sober truth” The Greek term sōphrosunē comes from two Greek words, “sound” and “mind.” They mean a balanced
approach to life and thinking. It is the antonym of “out of your mind” and “mad” (cf. v. 24).
▣ “the truth” See Special Topic below.
SPECIAL TOPIC: “TRUTH” IN PAUL’S WRITINGS
Paul’s usage of this term and its related forms comes from its OT equivalent, emet, which means trustworthy or faithful (BDB
53). In interbiblical Jewish writings it was used of truth in contrast to falsehood. Maybe the closest parallel would be the Dead Sea
Scrolls’ “Thanksgiving Hymns,” where it is used of revealed doctrines. The members of the Essene Community became “witnesses
of truth.”
Paul uses the term as a way of referring to the gospel of Jesus Christ.
1. Romans 1:18,25; 2:8,20; 3:7; 15:8
2. I Corinthians 13:6
3. II Corinthians 4:2; 6:7; 11:10; 13:8
4. Galatians 2:5,14; 5:7
5. Ephesians 1:13; 6:14
6. Colossians 1:5,6
7. II Thessalonians 2:10,12,13
8. I Timothy 2:4; 3:15; 4:3; 6:5
9. II Timothy 2:15,18,25; 3:7,8; 4:4
10. Titus 1:1,14
Paul also uses the term as a way of expressing his speaking accurately
1. Acts 26:25
2. Romans 9:1
3. II Corinthians 7:14; 12:6
4. Ephesians 4:25
5. Philippians 1:18
6. I Timothy 2:7
He also uses it to describe his motives in I Cor. 5:8 and lifestyle (also for all Christians) in Eph. 4:24; 5:9; Phil. 4:8. He
sometimes uses it for people.
1. God, Rom. 3:4 (cf. John 3:33; 17:17)
2. Jesus, Eph. 4:21 (similar to John 14:6)
3. Apostolic witnesses, Titus 1:13
4. Paul, II Cor. 6:8
Only Paul uses the verb form (i.e., alētheuō) in Gal. 4:16 and Eph. 4:15, where it refers to the gospel. For further study consult
Colin Brown (ed), The New International Dictionary of New Testament Theology, vol. 3, pp. 784-902.
26:26-28 “the king knows about these matters” There has been much discussion about these verses. Apparently Paul wanted to
use Agrippa II to confirm his testimony and if possible bring him to acceptance of its truth. Verse 28 could be translated, “Do you
want me to be a Christian witness?”
26:26 “I speak to him also with confidence” Luke often uses this term in Acts, it is always connected with Paul (cf. 9:27,28; 13:46;
14:3; 18:26; 19:8). It is usually translated “speaking with boldness” (cf. I Thess. 2:2). This is one of the manifestations of being
Spirit-filled. It was the object of Paul’s prayer request in Eph. 6:20. Gospel proclamation with boldness is the Spirit’s goal for every
believer.
▣ “for this has not been done in a corner” Peter made this same assertion again and again to his first hearers in Jerusalem (cf.
2:22,33). The facts of the gospel were verifiable and historical.
26:27 Paul knew that Agrippa was knowledgeable of the OT. Paul is claiming that his gospel message was clearly discernable from
OT Scriptures. It was not a “new” or “innovative” message! It was fulfilled prophecy.
26:28
NASB “In a short time you will persuade me to become a Christian”
NKJV “You almost persuade me to become a Christian”
NRSV “Are you so quickly persuading me to become a Christian”
TEV “In this short time do you think you will make me a Christian”
NJB “A little more, and your arguments would make a Christian of me”
There is a lexical option about how to understand oligō (meaning small or little), “in a short time” (NASB, NRSV, TEV), or
“with little effort” (NKJV, NJB). This same confusion is also present in v. 29.
There is also a textual variant related to this phrase: “to do” or “to make” (poieō) in the manuscripts P74, א, A (UBS4 gives it
an “A” rating), or “to become” in MS E and the Vulgate and Peshitta translations.
The meaning in the larger context is obvious. Paul wanted to present the gospel in such a way that those who knew and affirmed
the OT (Agrippa) would be brought under conviction or at the least, affirm the relevance of these OT prophecies.
▣ “Christian” The people of “the Way” (followers of Christ) were first called Christians at Antioch of Syria (cf. 11:26). The only
other place this name appears in Acts is on the lips of Agrippa II, which means the name had become widely known.
26:29 “I would wish to God” Verse 29 is a partial Fourth class conditional sentence (an with the optative mood), which
expresses a desire that might remotely come to reality. It is usually a prayer or wish. Paul wished all of his hearers, Roman and
Jewish, would come to faith in Christ like himself.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 26:30-32
30The king stood up and the governor and Bernice, and those who were sitting with them, 31and when they had gone
aside, they began talking to one another, saying, “This man is not doing anything worthy of death or imprisonment.” 32And
Agrippa said to Festus, “This man might have been set free if he had not appealed to Caesar.”
26:30 How did Luke get this information? It was a private conversation between governmental leaders (and their families).
1. a servant have heard this and passed it on to Luke?
2. Luke assumes what they said by subsequent statements
3. Luke uses this opportunity to reinforce his literary purpose of showing that neither Paul or Christianity is a threat to Rome
26:31-32 “This man might have been set free if he had not appealed to Caesar” This shows one of Luke’s major purposes in
writing Acts, which was to show that Christianity was not treasonous to Rome. This is a second class conditional sentence which
makes a false assertion to accentuate a truth. This man might have been set free (which he was not) if he had not appealed to Caesar
(which he did).
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. How is this defense different from the defense before Festus and Felix?
2. How does Paul’s personal testimony fit into his overall defense?
3. Why was a suffering Messiah so alien to the Jews?
4. Why is verse 28 so difficult to interpret?
5. How does the discussion of Festus, Agrippa and Bernice (vv. 30-31) fit into Luke’s overarching literary purpose in Acts?
ACTS 27
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul Sails for Rome |
The Voyage to Rome |
The Voyage to Malta |
Paul Sails for Rome |
The Departure for Rome |
27:1-8 |
27:1-8 |
27:1-8 |
27:1-6 |
27:1-3 |
|
|
|
|
27:4-6 |
|
Paul’s Warning Ignored |
|
27:7-8 |
27:7-8 |
27:9-12 |
27:9-12 |
27:9-12 |
27:9-12 |
27:9-12 |
The Storm at Sea |
In the Tempest |
|
Storm at Sea |
Storm and Shipwreck |
27:13-20 |
27:13-38 |
27:13-20 |
27:13-20 |
27:13-20 |
27:21-26 |
|
27:21-26 |
27:21-26 |
27:21-26 |
27:27-32 |
|
27:27-32 |
27:27-32 |
27:27-32 |
27:33-38 |
|
27:33-38 |
27:33-38 |
27:33-38 |
The Shipwreck |
Shipwrecked on Malta |
|
The Shipwreck |
|
27:39-44 |
27:39-44 |
27:39-44 |
27:39-41 |
27:39-41 |
|
|
|
27:42-44 |
27:42-44 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
CONTEXTUAL INSIGHTS
A. Luke had a vast knowledge, covering sailing (A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, vol. 3, p. 456, says
Luke used nine compounds with pleō, to sail) as well as literature, medicine, history and theology. Here is a list of
technical, nautical terms and phrases
1. sailed (cf. 13:4; 14:26; 20:15;27:1)
2. under the shelter of (cf. 27:4,7)
3. weighed anchor (cf. 27:13)
4. euraquilo (cf. 27:14)
5. face the wind (cf. 27:15)
6. running under the shelter of (cf. 27:16)
7. undergirding (cf. 27:17)
8. sea anchor (skeuos) (cf. 27: 17
9. ship’s tackle (skeuēn) (cf. 27:19)
10. soundings (cf. 27:28[twice])
11. athoms (cf. 27:28[twice])
12. four anchors from the stern (cf. 27:29,40)
13. the ropes of the rudders (cf. 27:40)
14. hoisting the foresail to the wind (cf. 27:40)
15. tacking (MSS P74, א, A, cf. 28:13)
B. One older book that has been such a help to commentators is James Smith’s The Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 1848.
C. This trip to Rome was attempted at a dangerous time of the year for sailing (cf. 27:1,4,7,9,10,14). Usually November-February was the most dangerous time to travel, with a two to three week marginal period before and after. The regular
grain shipments to Rome took ten to fourteen days, but because of the wind direction the return could take sixty days.
D. There are three different, possibly four, ships mentioned in this passage
1. a coastal ship which stopped at every port and hugged the coastline.
2. two Egyptian grain ships that ferried grain from Egypt to Italy
3. possibly a barge trip between Naples to a landing 43 miles south of Rome
It is interesting to follow Luke’s account of this voyage on a map of the Mediterranean.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 27:1-8
1When it was decided that we would sail for Italy, they proceeded to deliver Paul and some other prisoners to a centurion
of the Augustan cohort named Julius. 2And embarking in an Adramyttian ship, which was about to sail to the regions along
the coast of Asia, we put out to sea accompanied by Aristarchus, a Macedonian of Thessalonica. 3The next day we put in at
Sidon; and Julius treated Paul with consideration and allowed him to go to his friends and receive care. 4From there we put
out to sea and sailed under the shelter of Cyprus because the winds were contrary. 5When we had sailed through the sea
along the coast of Cilicia and Pamphylia, we landed at Myra in Lycia. 6There the centurion found an Alexandrian ship sailing
for Italy, and he put us aboard it. 7When we had sailed slowly for a good many days, and with difficulty had arrived off
Cnidus, since the wind did not permit us to go farther, we sailed under the shelter of Crete, off Salmone; 8and with difficulty
sailing past it we came to a place called Fair Havens, near which was the city of Lasea.
27:1 “When it was decided that we would sail for Italy” Festus sent them at a dangerous time of the year for sailing. The “we”
refers to Paul and Luke (possibly others). Most of the “we” sections of Acts have a sailing component (cf. 16:10-17; 20:5-15; 21:1-18; 27:1-28:16).
▣ “some other prisoners” We do not know anything about them except they were imperial prisoners heading for Rome.
▣ “centurion” These men are always presented in positive terms in the NT (cf. Matt. 8; Luke 7; 23:47; Acts 10; and Paul’s trials,
21-28).
▣ “of the Augustan cohort” They were thought to be official couriers between Rome and the provinces (cf. W. M Ramsay, St. Paul
the Traveler and Roman Citizen, pp. 315, 348), but this is only undocumented supposition before Emperor Hadrian (a.d. 117-138).
27:2 “an Adramyttian ship” This was a small coastal ship which stopped at every port. The home port of this ship was the seaport
of Mysia in Asia Minor. This is the first stage of the long and dangerous trip to Rome.
▣ “Aristarchus” His home was in Thessalonica; possibly he was returning home (cf. Acts 19:29; 20:4; Col. 4:10; Philemon 24).
He may have been accompanied by Secundas (cf. 20:4 and some western Greek manuscripts of this verse).
27:3 “Sidon” This is a Phoenician city about sixty-seven miles north of Caesarea. It was the ancient capital of Phoenicia, but had
long since been eclipsed by Tyre.
▣
NASB “with consideration”
NKJV, NRSV “kindly”
TEV “was kind”
NJB “was considerate”
This is a compound term from “love” (philos) and “humanity” (anthrōpos). The term is used twice in Acts, the noun in 28:2
(cf. Titus 3:4) and the adverb here in 27:3. Julius was a compassionate person (somewhat surprising for a Roman occupational
soldier). He probably had heard about Paul’s case.
▣ “his friends” This probably refers to the Christians there. Julius trusted Paul, but possibly a Roman guard went with him.
▣ “receive care” The text does not specify what kind of attention (emotional, physical, financial).
27:4 “under the shelter of Cyprus” This is a confusing phrase because it makes English readers think “south of Cyprus,” but in
reality, it meant north. The other names mentioned are on the southern and western coast of modern Turkey.
27:6 “Alexandrian ship sailing for Italy” This was a larger ship (276 people on board plus huge amounts of grain) from Egypt on
her way to Rome. Moderns know of these large ships from pictures on the walls of Pompeii and from Lucian’s writings, around a.d
150. Myra was the major port for these large grain ships.
27:7 “Cnidus” This was a free maritime city on the southwest coast of the Roman province of Asia. Most Rome-bound ships used
this port (cf. Thucydides, Hist. 8.35). It had two harbors because it was located on a peninsula.
▣ “Salmone” This was a city on the eastern tip of the island of Crete. Because of the time of the year they tried to work their way
west by sailing close to the island.
27:8 “Fair Havens” This is a bay near the southern city of Lasea on Crete. It is not a harbor, but a bay. It would have been difficult
to stay here all winter.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 27:9-12
9When considerable time had passed and the voyage was now dangerous, since even the fast was already over, Paul
began to admonish them, 10and said to them, “Men, I perceive that the voyage will certainly be with damage and great loss,
not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives.” 11But the centurion was more persuaded by the pilot and the captain
of the ship than by what was being said by Paul. 12Because the harbor was not suitable for wintering, the majority reached
a decision to put out to sea from there, if somehow they could reach Phoenix, a harbor of Crete, facing southwest and
northwest, and spend the winter there.
27:9
There were certain times of the year (winter months) when the rapid movement of storm fronts and wind directions made sailing
dangerous in the Mediterranean.
▣ “the fast” This refers to the Day of Atonement (cf. Leviticus 16). It is the only fast day mentioned in the writings of Moses. This
would make the voyage sometime between September and October. October was the marginal period for sea travel.
▣ “Paul began” This is an Imperfect tense which can refer to (1) continuous action in past time or (2) the beginning of an action.
In context option #2 is best.
27:10 Paul issues a strong and specific warning. However, in reality, this did not occur. Was Paul giving his personal opinion (“I
perceive”), or did God change His mind and decide to spare the people on board (cf. v. 24)?
27:11
NASB “the pilot and the captain”
NKJV “the helmsman and the owner”
NRSV “the pilot and the owner”
TEV, NJB “the captain and the owner”
This phrase denotes two separate people.
1. the pilot (kubernētēs), which refers to the helmsman, the one who steers the ship (cf. Rev. 18:17)
2. the captain (nauklēros, compound of “ship” [naus] and “to inherit” or “a lot” [klēros]), although the word could mean
“ship owners” (cf. F. F. Bruce, The Book of Acts, p. 507, quotes Ramsay, St. Paul the Traveler, p. 324, who quotes
Inscriptiones Graecae, 14.918). Its use in the Koine Papyri is “captain.” The exact difference between these two terms
is uncertain (cf. Louw and Nida, Greek-English Lexicon, vol. 1, p. 548 vs. Harold Moulton, The Analytical Greek Lexicon
Revised, p. 275), but probably on a ship of this size (Alexandrian grain ship) there were several levels of leaders, as well
as regular sailors.
27:12 “if” This is a fourth class conditional sentence. Those who made the decision to sail knew it would be dangerous but
thought they could make it.
▣ “Phoenix” This is a harbor on the southern shore of Crete, westward of Fair Havens. There is some doubt from ancient sources
about its exact location (Strabo, Geography, 10.4.3 vs. Ptolemy, An Egyptian Geography 3.17.3). They were still sailing close to
the shore along the southern coast of Crete.
▣ “facing southwest and northwest” Apparently at Phoenix there were two towns separated by a piece of land jutting into the sea.
One harbor would be favorably related to winds from one direction and the other favorably related to winds from the other direction.
The time of year determined which harbor was best.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 27:13-20
13When a moderate south wind came up, supposing that they had attained their purpose, they weighed anchor and began
sailing along Crete, close inshore. 14But before very long there rushed down from the land a violent wind, called Euraquilo;
15and when the ship was caught in it and could not face the wind, we gave way to it and let ourselves be driven along.
16Running under the shelter of a small island called Clauda, we were scarcely able to get the ship’s boat under control. 17After
they had hoisted it up, they used supporting cables in undergirding the ship; and fearing that they might run aground on the
shallows of Syrtis, they let down the sea anchor and in this way let themselves be driven along. 18The next day as we were
being violently storm-tossed, they began to jettison the cargo; 19and on the third day they threw the ship’s tackle overboard
with their own hands. 20Since neither sun nor stars appeared for many days, and no small storm was assailing us, from then
on all hope of our being saved was gradually abandoned.
27:14
NASB, NRSV “a violent wind”
NKJV “a tempestuous wind”
TEV “a very strong wind”
NJB “a hurricane”
This Greek word is tuphōn (typhoon) + ikos (like). This was a sudden, very violent wind. It was probably intensified by the
7,000 foot mountains on Crete.
▣
NASB “Euraquico”
NKJV “Euroclydon”
NRSV, TEV “the northeaster”
NJB “the north-easter”
This was a special name the sailors had given for this type of wind during this season. It is made up of (1) a Greek term, “east
wind” (euros) and (2) a Latin term “north wind” (aquilo). It was a strong, sudden northeast wind.
Because this became a technical nautical term (eukakulōn), it was misunderstood by later scribes who altered it in several ways
to try to make the context make sense.
27:15 “could not face the wind” Ancient ships had eyes painted on each side of the bow. Later human or animal figures were placed
on the bow (cf. 28:11). Even today we personify ships as females. This phrase is literally “against” (anti) plus “eye” (ophthalmos).
They could not head the ship into the wind.
27:16 “Clauda” This small island is about fifty miles off the southern coast of Crete. They were now helpless in the face of a strong
northeastern wind. They took advantage of the brief shelter from the wind to do what they could to prepare the ship for rough seas.
There are several Greek manuscript variants as to the name of this island.
1. Kauda, MSS P74, א2, B
2. Klauda, MSS א*, A
3. Klaudēn, MSS H, L, P, and many later minuscule manuscripts
4. Gaudēn, the Greek text used by Jerome
5. Klaudion, some minuscule manuscripts
UBS3 and UBS4 give #1 a “B” rating (almost certain). The first two options may be the Greek form and the Latin form of the name.
▣ “to get the ship’s boat under control” This refers to a smaller boat in tow (cf. vv. 30, 32). This trailing boat formed a drag which
made it difficult to steer the larger ship.
27:17 “used supporting cables in undergirding the ship” This refers to wrapping special ropes around the hull to help hold it
together in storms (cf. Aristotle, Rhetoric 2.5.18).
▣ “the shallows of Syrtis” These are moving sand bars off the coast of northern Africa. They were called Syrtis Major and Syrtis
Minor (cf. Pliny, Nat. Hist. 5.4,27). They were the graveyard of many a sailing ship. To avoid the Syrtis Major the sailors steered
the ship sideways, so as to drift slowly southward.
▣ “sea anchor” The key to properly interpreting this context is the term “lowered.” What did they lower: (1) a sea anchor or (2)
part of the sail? The purpose was to slow the ship down, but at the same time allow some control.
A sea anchor is not an anchor that gripped the bottom, but a parachute-like sheet which used the weight of the water it contained
to slow down the ship from drifting southward (cf. old Latin text and NASB, NRSV, and NJB).
There are several English translations which translate this as “lower the sail” (cf. NKJV, TEV, NJB, and Peshitta in English).
The Greek term literally means “a thing” (cf. Louw & Nida, Greek-English Lexicon, vol. 2, p. 223) and must be interpreted in light
of a specific context. There are several specific papyrii texts which use it for a sail (cf. Moulton & Milligan, The Vocabulary of the
Greek Testament, p. 577). If so, they lower part of the sails but not all of them. They had to retain some control and attempt to travel
sideways as slowly as possible.
27:18-19 This shows how violent and dangerous this storm seemed to these seasoned sailors (cf. 20).
27:18 “jettison the cargo” This act shows that these sailors were truly afraid for their lives.
27:19 “the ship’s tackle” Exactly to what this refers is unknown, possibly the main sail and its rigging. The term is ambiguous.
This very same term refers to the sea-anchor, or part of the sails, in v. 17.
27:20 “neither sun nor stars appeared for many days” This phrase apparently reveals that they had no clue as to where they were.
They were afraid of the coast of north Africa, but they could not tell how close they were (cf. v. 29). Without stars or the sun they
could not navigate or discern their position.
▣ “from then on all hope of our being saved was gradually abandoned” This sets the stage for Paul’s encouragement based on
his previous vision (cf. vv. 21-26). Their resources were gone!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 27:21-26
21When they had gone a long time without food, then Paul stood up in their midst and said, “Men, you ought to have
followed my advice and not to have set sail from Crete and incurred this damage and loss. 22Yet now I urge you to keep up
your courage, for there will be no loss of life among you, but only of the ship. 23For this very night an angel of the God to
whom I belong and whom I serve stood before me, 24 saying, ‘Do not be afraid, Paul; you must stand before Caesar; and
behold, God has granted you all those who are sailing with you.’ 25Therefore, keep up your courage, men, for I believe God
that it will turn out exactly as I have been told. 26“But we must run aground on a certain island.”
27:21 “they had gone a long time without food” There are at least three possible meanings in relation to v. 33:
1. maybe they were seasick from the violent, protracted storm
2. they were praying and fasting for the religious purpose of being spared (i.e., pagan ritual, cf. v. 29)
3. they were so busy trying to save the ship, eating became a lesser issue
▣ “you ought to have followed my advice” This is Paul’s “I told you so!” It provided Paul the opportunity to act as the Spirit’s
spokesman.
27:22 “but only of the ship” Notice the use of dei in v. 26. See full note on dei at 1:16. It is used three times in this chapter (vv.
21,24,26).
27:23 “an angel of the God” Several times Jesus or an angel appeared to Paul to encourage him (cf. 18:9-10; 22:17-19; 23:11;
27:23-24). God had an evangelistic plan and purpose for Paul’s life (cf. v. 26; 9:15) and a storm was not going to stop it.
27:24 “Do not be afraid, Paul” This is a present middle (deponent) imperative with the negative participle which usually
means stop an act already in process (cf. Acts 23:11; Pro. 3:5-6).
▣ “God has granted you all those who are sailing with you” This first verb is a perfect middle (deponent) indicative. God
had a plan and purpose for Paul’s ministry (cf. 9:15; 19:21; 23:11). He must (dei) witness in Rome before her governmental and
military leaders.
Paul’s life and faith impacted the destiny of his companions. This same extension of grace can be seen in Deut. 5:10; 7:9; I Cor.
7:14. This does not remove personal responsibility, but accentuates the potential influence of believing family, friends, and co-workers.
27:25 Paul’s admonition of v. 22, “to keep up your courage,” a present infinitive, is repeated, “keep up your courage,” which is
a present active imperative.
▣ “for I believe God” Paul’s encounter with the living Christ enabled him to trust God’s word (“it will turn out exactly as I have
been told” perfect passive indicative). Faith is the hand that receives the gifts of God—not only salvation, but providence.
Robert B. Girdlestone, Synonyms of the Old Testament has a great statement and quote from Romaine, Life of Faith.
“We now approach the N.T. with a clear distinction between faith on the one hand, and trust and hope on the other.
Faith is the taking God at His word, while trust and patience and also hope are the proper fruits of faith, manifesting in
various forms the confidence which the believer feels. A message comes to me from the Author of my existence; it may
be a threat, a promise, or a command. If I take is as ‘yea and amen,’ that is Faith; and the act which results is an act of
amunah or faithfulness God. Faith, according to Scripture, seems to imply a word, message, or revelation. So the learned
Romaine says in his Life of Faith:—‘Faith signifies believing the truth of the Word of God; it relates to some word spoken
or to some promise made by Him, and it expresses the belief which a person who hears it has of its being true; he assents
to it, relies upon it, and acts accordingly: this is faith.’ Its fruit will vary according to the nature of the message received,
and according to the circumstances of the receiver. It led Noah to build an ark, Abraham to offer up his son, Moses to
refuse to be called the son of Pharaoh’s daughter, the Israelites to march round the walls of Jericho. I believe God that
it shall be even as it has been told me—this is a picture of the process which the Bible calls faith” (pp. 104-105).
For “believe” see Special Topic at 2:40; 3:16; and 6:5.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 27:27-32
27But when the fourteenth night came, as we were being driven about in the Adriatic Sea, about midnight the sailors
began to surmise that they were approaching some land. 28They took soundings and found it to be twenty fathoms; and a little
farther on they took another sounding and found it to be fifteen fathoms. 29Fearing that we might run aground somewhere
on the rocks, they cast four anchors from the stern and wished for daybreak. 30But as the sailors were trying to escape from
the ship and had let down the ship’s boat into the sea, on the pretense of intending to lay out anchors from the bow, 31Paul
said to the centurion and to the soldiers, “Unless these men remain in the ship, you yourselves cannot be saved.” 32Then the
soldiers cut away the ropes of the ship’s boat and let it fall away.
27:27 “the fourteenth night” This time fits exactly the distance covered in their drifting configuration (i.e., sea anchor). They
traveled 476 miles at 36 miles per 24-hour period.
▣ “Adriatic Sea” This refers to the south central Mediterranean (Adria). It does not refer to the Adriatic Sea of our day.
▣ “began to surmise that they were approaching some land” They possibly heard the breakers or saw certain birds or fish.
27:28 “sounding” This is from the verb that means “to heave the lead,” which refers to dropping a weighted rope, marked to denote
the depth of the water.
▣ “fathom” This was the space between the arms outstretched. It denoted the measurement used by sailors to express the depth of
the water.
27:29 It was still dark. They did not know exactly where they were. They wanted to slow down or stop the ship’s approach to land
until they could see where the ship was heading.
27:30 These sailors were not men of faith. They would do whatever they could to save themselves.
27:31 There were some conditions (third class conditional sentence) connected to Paul’s updated vision and God’s promise.
▣ “saved” This is the OT sense of physical deliverance (cf. James 5:15). Knowing Paul, these sailors, soldiers, and fellow
passengers also heard the gospel, which brings the NT sense of the term spiritual salvation. What a tragedy to be saved from physical
death to die an eternal death!
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 27:33-38
33Until the day was about to dawn, Paul was encouraging them all to take some food, saying, “Today is the fourteenth
day that you have been constantly watching and going without eating, having taken nothing. 34Therefore I encourage you
to take some food, for this is for your preservation, for not a hair from the head of any of you will perish.” 35Having said this,
he took bread and gave thanks to God in the presence of all, and he broke it and began to eat. 36All of them were encouraged
and they themselves also took food. 37All of us in the ship were two hundred and seventy-six persons. 38When they had eaten
enough, they began to lighten the ship by throwing out the wheat into the sea.
27:34 “not a hair from the head of any of you will perish” Paul uses words similar to Jesus’ words (cf. Luke 12:7; 21:18). This
was a Hebrew idiom of protection (cf. I Sam. 14:45; II Sam. 14:11; I Kgs. 1:52).
27:35 This does not refer to the Lord’s Supper, but it does show Paul’s faith, even in the midst of crisis. Paul’s faith influenced others
(cf. v. 36).
27:37 “two hundred and seventy-six” This includes crew and passengers.
1. Manuscript B (fourth century) has “76”
2. MSS א (fourth century) and C (fifth century) have “276”
3. Manuscript A (fifth century) has “275”
4. All modern English translations have 276
UBS4 gives it a “B” rating (almost certain).
27:38 This was a large grain ship from Egypt. They had already thrown overboard all other cargo and rigging (cf. v. 18).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 27:39-44
39When day came, they could not recognize the land; but they did observe a bay with a beach, and they resolved to drive
the ship onto it if they could. 40And casting off the anchors, they left them in the sea while at the same time they were
loosening the ropes of the rudders; and hoisting the foresail to the wind, they were heading for the beach. 41But striking a
reef where two seas met, they ran the vessel aground; and the prow stuck fast and remained immovable, but the stern began
to be broken up by the force of the waves. 42The soldiers’ plan was to kill the prisoners, so that none of them would swim away
and escape; 43but the centurion, wanting to bring Paul safely through, kept them from their intention, and commanded that
those who could swim should jump overboard first and get to land, 44and the rest should follow, some on planks, and others
on various things from the ship. And so it happened that they all were brought safely to land.
27:39 They could still control the ship to some degree (cf. v. 40).
There is a Greek manuscript variant related to “drive the ship onto it” (cf. MSS א, A, B2) and “land the ship safely” (cf. MSS
B* and C). These two words sound very similar (exōsai vs. eksōsai). Ancient Greek manuscripts were often read by one and copied
by many. Similar sounding terms were often confused.
27:40 These reefs along the shore caused many a ship wreck. In this case a reef developed where the ocean waves and the bay waters
met.
▣
NASB, NKJV,
NJV “rudders”
NRSV, TEV “steering-oars”
This refers to the dual rudders, which were typical on larger ships. James 3:4 uses this same word for “rudder.”
▣ “the foresail” This is a rare term, but it must refer to a small sail on the bow (cf. Juvenal, Sat. 12.69).
27:42 “The soldiers’ plan was to kill the prisoners” If they escaped the soldiers would have had to bear their penalty!
27:43 Paul’s words, faith, and actions had convinced the leader of the Roman contingent to trust him and protect him.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Luke’s account of Paul’s sailing to Rome has many nautical technical terms. What is the implication of this?
2. Why is v. 20 so theologically significant?
ACTS 28
PARAGRAPH DIVISIONS OF MODERN TRANSLATIONS
UBS4 |
NKJV |
NRSV |
TEV |
NJB |
Paul on the Island of Malta |
Paul’s Ministry on Malta |
Paul in Malta |
In Malta |
Waiting in Malta |
28:1-10 |
28:1-10 |
28:1-6 |
28:1-6 |
28:1-6 |
|
|
28:7-10 |
28:7-10 |
28:7-10 |
Paul Arrives at Rome |
Arrival at Rome |
The Journey to Rome |
From Malta to Rome |
From Malta to Rome |
28:11-15 |
28:11-16 |
28:11-15 |
28:11-15 |
28:11-14 |
|
|
|
In Rome |
28:15-16 |
28:16 |
|
28:16 |
28:16 |
|
Paul Preaches in Rome |
Paul’s Ministry at Rome |
Paul and the Jews of Rome |
|
Paul Makes Contact with |
28:17-22 |
28:17-31 |
28:17-22 |
28:17-20 |
28:17-20 |
|
|
|
28:21-22 |
28:21-22 |
|
|
|
|
Paul’s Declaration to |
28:23-29 |
|
28:23-29 |
28:23-27 |
28:23-27 |
|
|
|
|
(26-27) |
|
|
|
28:28 |
28:28 |
|
|
Conclusion |
28:29 |
Epilogue |
28:30-31 |
|
28:30-31 |
28:30-31 |
28:30-31 |
READING CYCLE THREE (from “A Guide to Good Bible Reading” p. vi)
FOLLOWING THE ORIGINAL AUTHOR’S INTENT AT THE PARAGRAPH LEVEL
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
Read the chapter in one sitting. Identify the subjects. Compare your subject divisions with the five modern translations.
Paragraphing is not inspired, but it is the key to following the original author’s intent, which is the heart of interpretation. Every
paragraph has one and only one main subject.
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. Third paragraph
4. Etc.
WORD AND PHRASE STUDY
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 28:1-6
1When they had been brought safely through, then we found out that the island was called Malta. 2The natives showed
us extraordinary kindness; for because of the rain that had set in and because of the cold, they kindled a fire and received
us all. 3But when Paul had gathered a bundle of sticks and laid them on the fire, a viper came out because of the heat and
fastened itself on his hand. 4When the natives saw the creature hanging from his hand, they began saying to one another,
“Undoubtedly this man is a murderer, and though he has been saved from the sea, justice has not allowed him to live.”
5However he shook the creature off into the fire and suffered no harm. 6But they were expecting that he was about to swell
up or suddenly fall down dead. But after they had waited a long time and had seen nothing unusual happen to him, they
changed their minds and began to say that he was a god.
28:1 “they had been brought safely through” This is the term sōzō (cf. 27:31) with dia prefixed. It was used regularly for someone
reaching safety (cf. 23:24; 27:44; 28:1,4). Luke even uses it for physical healing in Luke 7:3.
The aorist passive participle shows that Luke attributed the safety as being provided by God (passive voice) according to
His word (cf. 27:21-26).
▣ “Malta” The Phoenician sailors also called this island Melita, which was a Canaanite term that meant “refuge.” This was
originally a Phoenician colony. It is located between Sicily and North Africa. It is only eighteen miles long and eight miles wide,
but its location afforded great maritime commercial value. It has several good harbors.
28:2 “natives” This is literally “barbarians.” This is not a derogatory title, but simply refers to anyone who did not speak Greek or
Latin.
▣
NASB “extraordinary kindness”
NKJV, NRSV,
NJB “unusual kindness”
TEV “were very friendly”
This intensified phrase has the term philanthrōpos, which is literally “lover of men” as in 27:3. The specific care and provision
given by the natives was because they saw Paul’s miraculous encounter with a serpent on the beach. This, and other miraculous acts
(cf. vv. 7-10), opened the door for evangelism! Paul always had a mind toward gospel proclamation (cf. I Cor. 9:19-23).
28:3 “Paul had gathered a bundle of sticks” This really shows Paul’s humility. He worked along with all the others. No elitism
since the road to Damascus!
▣ “a viper. . .fastened itself on his hand” This term’s basic meaning is “to attach.” It can mean “a bite” or “coiled around.”
28:4 “the creature” This term for “creature” became the medical term for poisonous snakes (cf. 10:12).
▣ “justice has not allowed him to live” “Justice” or “Fate” was the name of one of their gods. They were expressing the irony of
the situation, similar to Amos 5:19. Verse 6 shows that the native islanders were superstitious polytheists.
28:6 These islanders had personal experience with the snakes on the island. Their radical change of attitude is similar to the pagan
reactions to the miraculous in Acts 14:11-13.
▣ “to swell up” This is one of many medical terms used by Luke (cf. v. 8). It is found only here in the NT.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 28:7-10
7Now in the neighborhood of that place were lands belonging to the leading man of the island, named Publius, who
welcomed us and entertained us courteously three days. 8And it happened that the father of Publius was lying in bed afflicted
with recurrent fever and dysentery; and Paul went in to see him and after he had prayed, he laid his hands on him and healed
him. 9After this had happened, the rest of the people on the island who had diseases were coming to him and getting cured.
10They also honored us with many marks of respect; and when we were setting sail, they supplied us with all we needed.
28:7 “the leading man” This word means some type of governmental official, literally, “the first” (cf. 13:50; Luke 19:47, “of
people”; 16:12, “of a city”). It has been found in two inscriptions on this island, one Greek and one Latin. Rome had allowed this
island self-rule and at some point, full Roman citizenship.
28:8 “lying in bed afflicted with recurrent fever and dysentery” Malta was known for its fever which came from microbes in their
goats’ milk.
▣ “laid his hands on him and healed him” See Special Topis: Laying on of Hands at 6:6.
28:9 Both of these verbs are imperfect, which implies repeated or continuing action in past time (indicative mood). They kept
coming. God kept healing them through Paul.
The Greek verb behind the English translation “getting cured” is therapeuō, from which we get the English “therapy.” The
term can be used for “service” as well as “healing.” Only a specific context can determine which one is appropriate.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 28:11-15
11At the end of three months we set sail on an Alexandrian ship which had wintered at the island, and which had the
Twin Brothers for its figurehead. 12After we put in at Syracuse, we stayed there for three days. 13From there we sailed
around and arrived at Rhegium, and a day later a south wind sprang up, and on the second day we came to Puteoli. 14There
we found some brethren, and were invited to stay with them for seven days; and thus we came to Rome. 15And the brethren,
when they heard about us, came from there as far as the Market of Appius and Three Inns to meet us; and when Paul saw
them, he thanked God and took courage.
28:11 “an Alexandrian ship” This was probably another large grain ship going to the Bay of Naples from Egypt (cf. 27:6,38).
▣ “ship which had wintered at the island” The Mediterranean Sea was too stormy to navigate during the winter months. The
shipping lanes opened back up in late February or March.
▣ “the Twin Brothers for its figurehead” This refers to Zeus’ twin sons, Caster and Pollox. They were the patrons of sailors in
the Roman pantheon. Poseidon had given them power and control over wind, waves, and storms. Their special constellation was
Gemini. Apparently there was a carving of them on the bow, two little elf-like men.
28:12 “Syracuse” This was the principal city of Sicily located on the eastern coast. This port was eighty miles north of Malta.
28:13 “sailed around” The ancient uncial manuscripts א (Siniaticus), and B (Vaticanus) have “weighing anchor,” which was a
technical sailing term (so characteristic of Luke), but other ancient manuscripts P74, אc, and A have “passing by,” like 16:8.
▣ “Rhegium” This is the city at the southwestern tip of Italy.
▣ “Puteoli” This was the grain importing center for Rome in the Bay of Naples. They traveled about 180 miles in two days.
28:14 “There we found some brethren” There were existing Christian congregations in Italy (cf. v. 15) and Rome who embraced
Paul.
28:15 “Market of Appius” This was the end of the barge trip from the south of Italy and the beginning of the great Roman highway
called the Appian Way. It was forty-three miles to Rome.
▣ “Three Inns” This was a rest stop about thirty-three miles from Rome.
▣ “Paul. . .took courage” Paul apparently had become discouraged again. He seems to have been prone to this. Jesus appeared
to him personally several times to encourage him.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 28:16
16When we entered Rome, Paul was allowed to stay by himself, with the soldier who was guarding him.
28:16 “When we entered Rome” This was not the way Paul expected to come to Rome. But, this was God’s way to arrange for
Paul to speak to the Roman governmental, military, and religious leaders.
▣ “Paul was allowed to stay by himself with the soldier who was guarding him” Paul was placed under house arrest. The
testimony of the officer who brought him was instrumental in this decision.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 28:17-22
17After three days Paul called together those who were the leading men of the Jews, and when they came together, he
began saying to them, “Brethren, though I had done nothing against our people or the customs of our fathers, yet I was
delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem into the hands of the Romans. 18And when they had examined me, they were willing
to release me because there was no ground for putting me to death. 19But when the Jews objected, I was forced to appeal to
Caesar, not that I had any accusation against my nation. 20For this reason, therefore, I requested to see you and to speak with
you, for I am wearing this chain for the sake of the hope of Israel.” 21They said to him, “We have neither received letters from
Judea concerning you, nor have any of the brethren come here and reported or spoken anything bad about you. 22But we
desire to hear from you what your views are; for concerning this sect, it is known to us that it is spoken against everywhere.”
28:17 “Paul called together those who were the leading men of the Jews” This was Paul’s standard approach (cf. Rom. 1:16;
2:9). He explains his current circumstances and opens the door for a gospel presentation.
28:18-19 Here again Luke’s apologetic purpose can be clearly seen! Christianity was not a threat to the Roman government.
28:19 “the Jews objected” This phraseology seems strange spoken to Jewish leaders in Rome. Luke uses Ioudaios (Jews) in two
senses.
1. nationality – 2:5,11; 9:22; 10:22,28; 11:19; 13:56; 14:1; 16:1,3,20; 17:1; 17:10,17; 18:2,4,5,19; 19:10,17,34; 20:21;
21:21,39; 22:3,12; 24:5,9; 24:24,27; 25:8,9,24; 20:7; 28:17
2. those who had eyewitness knowledge of the last week of Jesus’ life – 2:15; 10:39
He also used it in different evaluations.
1. in a negative sense – 9:23; 12:3,11; 13:45,50; 14:2,4,5,19; 17:5,13; 18:12,14,28; 19:13,14,33; 20:3,19; 21:11,27; 22:30;
23:12,20,27; 24:19; 25:2,7,10,15; 26:2,21; 28:19
2. in a positive sense – 13:43; 14:1; 18:2,24; 21:20
Possibly the best text in Acts which shows the different connotations of this term is 14:1-2.
28:20 “for the sake of the hope of Israel” Paul is addressing these Jewish leaders in such a way as to establish a relationship with
his audience. He tries to find a common ground with these Jewish leaders in “the hope of Israel.” For Paul, that referred to Jesus,
for them, the Promised Coming One, the Messiah or possibly to the resurrection!
28:21 This lack of information about Paul is surprising in light of Paul’s ministry on three mission journeys and the events and rumors
in Jerusalem.
28:22 It is obvious that the news about Jesus was spreading and that many were responding to the gospel. In Jewish circles this was
not good news! However, these Jewish leaders were willing to give Paul a hearing.
▣ “This sect” See Special Topic: Jesus the Nazarene at 2:22.
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 28:23-29
23When they had set a day for Paul, they came to him at his lodging in large numbers; and he was explaining to them
by solemnly testifying about the kingdom of God and trying to persuade them concerning Jesus, from both the Law of Moses
and from the Prophets, from morning until evening. 24Some were being persuaded by the things spoken, but others would
not believe. 25And when they did not agree with one another, they began leaving after Paul had spoken one parting word,
“The Holy Spirit rightly spoke through Isaiah the prophet to your fathers, 26saying, ‘Go to this people and say, You will
keep on hearing, but will not understand; And you will keep on seeing, but will not perceive; 27For the heart
of this people has become dull, And with their ears they scarcely hear, And they have closed their eyes;
Otherwise they might see with their eyes, And hear with their ears, And understand with their heart and
return, And I would heal them.’ 28Therefore let it be known to you that this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles;
they will also listen.” 29[When he had spoken these words, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.]
28:23
“they came. . .in large numbers. . .from morning until evening” Paul explained the Christian faith to these Jews all day!
What a marvelous opportunity.
▣ “the kingdom of God” This was the central theme of Jesus’ preaching and teaching (parables). It is a present reality in the lives
of believers and a future consummation of God’s reign over all the fallen earth (cf. Matt. 6:10). This phrase is obviously not related
to Israel only, but it was an integral part of Israel’s hope (cf. v. 20). See Special Topic at 1:3.
▣ “the Law of Moses and from the Prophets” This is two of the three divisions of the Hebrew canon (see Special Topic at 13:15
and the note at 24:14) which stood for the entire OT (cf. Matt. 5:17; 7:12; 22:40; Luke 16:16; 24:44; Acts 13:15; 28:23). Paul’s
methodology (Christological typology and predictive prophecy) was to set the OT texts alongside the life of Jesus.
28:24 This reflects the mystery of the gospel. Why some believe and some do not is the mystery of a sovereign God and human free
will.
In one sense Paul’s ministry to the Jewish leaders in Rome is a microcosm of Paul’s ministry. He first shared with the Jews.
He shared Jesus’ fulfillment of OT Scriptures. Some believed, but most did not. This too, was predicted in the OT (cf. Isa. 6:9-10).
28:25-27 “The Holy Spirit rightly spoke through Isaiah” This reveals Paul’s view of the mystery of Israel’s unbelief! The quote
in verses 26-27 is from Isa. 6:9-10. Jesus used this verse often of human unbelief (cf. Matt. 13:14-15; Mark 4:12; Luke 8:10; John
12:39-40). By this time Paul had already penned Romans 9-11 (why has Israel rejected her Messiah?). Israel of the OT would not/did
not fully believe either. There was a remnant of faith, but a majority of unbelief.
SPECIAL TOPIC: THE REMNANT, THREE SENSES
The OT concept of “a faithful remnant” is a recurrent theme of the Prophets (mostly in the eighth century prophets and
Jeremiah). It is used in three senses:
1. those who survived the Exile (e.g., Isa. 10:20-23; 17:4-6; 37:31-32; Jer. 42:15,19; 44:12,14,28; Amos 1:8)
2. those who remain faithful to YHWH (e.g., Isa. 4:1-5; 11:11,16; 28:5; Joel 2:32; Amos 5:14-15; Micah 2:12-13; 4:6-7; 5:7-9; 7:18-20)
3. those who are a part of the eschatological renewal and recreation (e.g., Amos 9:11-15)
In this context God chooses only some (those with a faithful zeal) of the remnant (survivors of the Exile) to return to Judah.
As we have seen before in this chapter, themes from Israel’s past recur (v. 6). God is reducing the numbers so that He can show His
power, provision, and care (e.g., Gideon, Judges 6-7).
28:28 “this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles” This may be an allusion to Psalm 67, especially v. 2. This universal
aspect of Christianity is what caused the riot in Jerusalem and was an ongoing problem for many Jews. This is logical from Gen.
1:26,27; 3:15; 12:3. It was prophesied in Isaiah, Micah, and Jonah. It is clearly stated as God’s eternal plan by Paul in Eph. 2:11-3:13! See Special Topic at 1:8.
▣ “they will also listen” This is the truth of Romans 9-11. The Jews rejected the Messiah because He did not fit their expectations
and because the gospel opened the door of faith to all people.
The NT issue really is not Jew vs. Gentile, but believer vs. unbeliever. The issue is not who is your mother, but is your heart
open to God’s Spirit and God’s Son?!
28:29 This verse is omitted in the ancient Greek manuscripts P74, א, A, B, and E. It does not appear in any Greek manuscript before
P, which dates to the sixth century a.d. UBS4 rates its exclusion as “A” (certain).
NASB (UPDATED) TEXT: 28:30-31
30And he stayed two full years in his own rented quarters and was welcoming all who came to him, 31preaching the
kingdom of God and teaching concerning the Lord Jesus Christ with all openness, unhindered.
28:30 “two full years” This was possibly
1. the normal period of time required to see the Caesar
2. the time needed to get new papers from Festus
3. the mandatory waiting period for witnesses from Asia or Jerusalem
4. close to the legal statute of limitations
It was during this time that Paul wrote his prison letters (Colossians, Ephesians, Philemon, and Philippians).
▣ “in his own rented quarters” Paul had some source of income.
1. he worked at tent making or leather working
2. he was helped by churches (Thessalonica and Philippi)
3. he had some inherited funds
▣ “welcoming” Luke uses this term often with the connotation of “heartily welcome” (cf. 18:27; 28:30 and paradechōmai in 15:4).
It is used of the crowd welcoming Jesus in Luke 8:40 and 9:11. It is used of welcoming the gospel as preached by Peter in Acts 2:41.
▣ “all who came” This was the problem. Paul’s gospel had a universal reach. It was “good news” for all humans, not just Jews!
28:31 “preaching. . .teaching” The early, post-apostolic church made a distinction between these two ways of presenting truth. The
body of sermons recorded in Acts (Peter, Stephen, Paul) is called the Kerygma (proclamation, cf. 20:25; 28:31; Rom. 10:8; Gal. 2:2;
I Cor. 9:27; II Tim. 4:2), while the teaching of Jesus interpreted in the Epistles is called the Didache (teaching, cf. 2:42; 5:28; 13:12;
Rom. 16:17; I Cor. 14:20).
▣ “the kingdom of God” This was the subject of Jesus’ preaching. It refers to the reign of God in man’s hearts now that will one
day be consummated on earth as it has been in heaven. This passage also shows that the topic is not only for Jews. See Special Topic
at 1:3.
▣ “the Lord” “Lord” is the translation of the Hebrew term adon, which meant “owner, husband, master, or lord” (see Special Topic:
Names for Deity at 1:6). The Jews became afraid of pronouncing the sacred name YHWH lest they take it in vain and break one of
the Ten Commandments. Whenever they read the Scriptures, they substituted Adon for YHWH. This is why our English translations
use all capitals Lord for YHWH in the OT. By transferring this title (kurios in Greek) to Jesus, the NT authors assert His deity and
equality with the Father.
▣ “Jesus” “Jesus” is the name given to the baby in Bethlehem by the angel (cf. Matt. 1:21). It is made up of two Hebrew nouns:
“YHWH,” the covenant name for deity, and “salvation” (i.e., Hosea). It is the same Hebrew name as Joshua. When used alone it
often identifies the man, Jesus of Nazareth, son of Mary (e.g., Matt. 1:16, 25; 2:1; 3:13,15,16).
▣ “Christ” “Christ” is the Greek translation of the Hebrew Messiah (i.e., an Anointed One, see Special Topic at 2:31). It asserts
Jesus’ OT title as YHWH’s promised One sent to set up the new age of righteousness.
▣
NASB “with all openness, unhindered”
NKJV “with all confidence, no one forbidding him”
NRSV “with all boldness and without hindrance”
TEV “speaking with all boldness and freedom”
NJB “with complete fearlessness and without any hindrance from anyone”
This verse shows that the Roman authorities did not consider Christianity subversive or dangerous. The Greek text ends with
the adverb “unfettered” or “unhinderedly.” This seems to emphasize the ongoing nature of the task of proclamation and the power
of the Spirit.
Many have assumed, based on Acts 1:1 use of “first,” which implies more than two, that Luke planned to write a third volume.
Some even think that this third volume may be the Pastoral Letters (I Timothy, II Timothy and Titus).
For the Greek term (parrhēsia), translated “openness” by NASB, see Special Topic at 4:29.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
This is a study guide commentary, which means that you are responsible for your own interpretation of the Bible. Each of us
must walk in the light we have. You, the Bible, and the Holy Spirit are priority in interpretation. You must not relinquish this to a
commentator.
These discussion questions are provided to help you think through the major issues of this section of the book. They are meant
to be thought-provoking, not definitive.
1. Why does Acts end with Paul still in prison? Why does it end so abruptly?
2. Why does Luke take so much time in describing Paul’s trip and stay in Rome?
3. Why did Paul always try to witness to the Jews first?
4. Explain the difference between the Kerygma and Didache.